Kogan Page Academic Catalogue 2022 by africaconnection

CATALOGUEACADEMIC2022 INNOVATION AND BEST PRACTICE FOR BUSINESS SUCCESS

Our books are available to lecturers through our inspection copy service. We will consider requests from any instructor with a registered academic address, teaching a class of 10 or more students. You can request an inspection copy by registering for an academic account at Staywww.koganpage.com/inspectioncopiesInformed

Contact Customer Services T: +44 (0) 20 7278 0433 | E: kpinfo@koganpage.com

Kogan Page books are available as ebooks from major ebook retailers and our website. We also offer multiple access for students through digital textbook platforms such as Kortext and VitalSource.

Inspection Copies

Subscribe to our newsletters for expert articles, sample chapters and special offers. Sign up today at www.koganpage.com/newsletter

Discover our bespoke solutions for businesses, including bulk sales and custom publishing opportunities, at www.koganpage.com/corporate Connect with Us: Accounting, Finance & Banking: @KPAcctFinance Business & Management: @KPBusinessMgmt HR & L&D: @KoganPageHR Kogan Page: @KoganPage Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations: @KPLogistics Marketing & Communications: @KPMktng Rights & Licensing: @KPRights Risk, Compliance & CSR: @KPRiskCSR Skills, Careers & Employability: @KPSkillsCareers

Ebooks

Corporate Solutions

You can also find us on: Accessibility Kogan Page has made a commitment to accessibility. We create highly accessible ebook files and we make sure they are readily available to users who are blind, visually impaired or otherwise print disabled at the same time as the print editions.

About Us Kogan Page is the leading independent global publisher of business books with over 1,000 titles in print. Founded in 1967, our award-winning work offers solutions for professional practice and academic achievement in the following areas: Business & Management Human Resources, Learning & Development Marketing & Communications Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations Skills, Careers & Employability Kogan Page Inspire Risk & Accounting,ComplianceFinance & Banking Digital & Technology

Choose from our range of books to provide your students with the reading they need. Build your own Ebook Collection Contact us at Unlimited concurrent users | MARC records | LMS/VLE www.koganpage.com/collectionsintegrationFacilitatelearningatalllevelswithyourcollectionofKoganPagecontent. Choose from books across any area, such as: • Accounting, Finance & Banking • Business & Management • Human Resources, Learning & Development & CIPD • Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations • Marketing Communications& • Risk & Compliance • Skills, Careers & Employability

We offer bulk discounts on print books, ebooks and bundles to academic institutions –contact us at corporate-enquiries@koganpage.com WithANYWHEREANYTIME,READourprintandebookbundlesavailableatwww.koganpage.com you and your students can read Kogan Page and CIPD textbooks anytime, anywhere. You can have the printed copy for your desk plus access to the ebook through the Kogan Page Bookshelf® for free when you select the ‘paperback + ebook bundle’ option. Powered by VitalSource®, Bookshelf provides an optimized reading experience for you and your students. You can: • Read books offline on iOS, Android, Mac and PC • Bookmark, highlight and search for easy navigation • Adjust the font size to suit your preferences • Cite content correctly in a variety of citation styles • Learn collaboratively by sharing notes WITH OUR NEW PRINT AND EBOOK BUNDLES Get the whenFREEebookyoubuyyourprintcopy

5 www.koganpage.com Table of Contents by Subject Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Accounting & Finance BusinessBanking & Management Skills HR CorporateProjectBusinessAnalyticsResearchManagementGovernance, Ethics & CSR Information, Knowledge & Data Management International Business Employability,InnovationStrategyRiskBusinessLeadershipImprovementManagement&CreativityCareers & Entrepreneurship HumanWorkplaceTestingJobSpecificCareerStudyEntrepreneurshipSkillsDevelopmentCareersSeekingSkillsResources,Organizational Development and Coaching Introduction to HRM HR HumanLeadershipResource Management International HRM HR Logistics,CoachingTalentOrganizationalOrganizationsLearningEmploymentEmployeeChangeRewardPerformanceHRStrategicAnalyticsHRMTechnologyManagementManagementManagementEngagementLaw&Relations&DevelopmentDevelopmentManagement&RecruitmentOperationsandSupply Chain Management Intro Logistics & Supply Chain RetailWarehouseOperationsGlobalLogisticsLogisticsManagementManagementLogistics&Supply Chain MaritimeTransport HumanitarianSupplySupplySupplyProcurementManufacturingLogistics&ProductionChainFinanceChainAnalyticsChainManagementLogistics&Supply Chain MarketingSustainabilityand PR RetailInternalPublicMarketingMarketingMarketingMarketEventProductLuxuryBrandingSalesB2BConsumerMarketingSocialDigitalMarketingAdvertisingFundamentalsMarketingMediaCommunicationsBehaviourMarketing&KeyAccountManagementMarketingDesignManagementResearchAnalyticsStrategyPlanningRelationsCommunications

The Definitive Guide to Strategic Content Marketing 361 Content - The Atomic Particle of Marketing 362 Experiential Marketing 363 Persuasive Copywriting 364 Consumer Behaviour Inspiring Green Consumer Choices 365 The New Chameleons 366 Decoding the Irrational Consumer 367 B2B Marketing Innovative B2B Marketing 368 B2B Marketing Strategy 369 B2B Digital Marketing Strategy 370 Sales & Key Account Management Selling Transformed 371 Implementing Key Account Management 372 Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management 373 Key Account Management 374 A Practitioner’s Guide to Account-Based Marketing 375 B2B Social Selling Strategy 376 Sales and Marketing Channels 377 Branding Global Brand Management 378 The New Strategic Brand Management 379 International Brand Strategy 380 Digital Branding 381 Brand Elevation 382 How Cool Brands Stay Hot 383 Audio Branding 384 The TV Brand Builders 385 Brand Psychology 386 From Marginal to Mainstream 387 Myths of Branding 388 Luxury Marketing The Luxury Strategy 389 Kapferer on Luxury 390 Managing Luxury Brands 391 Adding Prestige to Your Portfolio 392 The Power of a Prestige Brand 393 Rethinking Prestige Branding 394 The Management of Luxury 395 Product Design Design Management 396 Event Management Event Planning and Management 397 Event Sponsorship and Fundraising 398 Market Research Market Research in Practice 400 Questionnaire Design 401 User Research 402 Using Semiotics in Marketing 403 Games and Gamification in Market Research 404 Marketing Analytics Marketing Analytics 405 Predictive Analytics for Marketers 406 Artificial Intelligence Marketing and Predicting Consumer Choice 407 Advanced Customer Analytics 408 Practical Text Analytics 409 Marketing Strategy Advanced Marketing Management 410 Marketing Strategy 411 Marketing Metrics 412 Stand Out Marketing 413 Malcolm McDonald on Value Propositions 414 Marketing Planning Malcolm McDonald on Marketing Planning 415 How to Write a Marketing Plan 416 Public Relations Myths of PR 417 Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns 418 PR Technology, Data and Insights 419 Ethics in Public Relations 420 Communicate in a Crisis 421 Internal Communications Influential Internal Communication 422 Internal Communications 423 Retail Retail Marketing Strategy 424 The Retail Start-Up Book 425 Omnichannel Retail 426 Retail Disruptors 427 Using Semiotics in Retail 428 Retail Innovation Reframed 429

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Accounting & Finance Accounting and Finance for Managers 8 Accounting for Non-Accountants 9 Value Pricing for Accounting Professionals 10 Financial Technology 11 International Finance 12

Entrepreneurship

The Handbook of International Trade and Finance 13 Investment and Portfolio Management 14 Sustainable Investing 15 Financial Management for Technology Start-Ups 16 Forensic Accounting and Finance 17 Understanding Islamic Financial Services 18 The Contemporary CFO 19 The Financial Services Guide to Fintech 20 Anti-Money Laundering 21 The Cryptocurrency Revolution 22 Banking Retail and Digital Banking 23 Relationship Management in Banking 24 Commercial Lending 25 Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking 26 Culture Audit in Financial Services 27 Green and Sustainable Finance 28 Reinventing Banking and Finance 29 Business & Management Skills

6 www.koganpage.com Table of Contents by Title

The Business Plan Workbook 86 How to Write a Business Plan 87 Social Entrepreneurship and Innovation 88 She Made It 89 From Start-Up to Grown-Up 90 Unprepared to Entrepreneur 91 The Young Entrepreneur 92 Study Skills The Return to Study Handbook 93 Career Development Developing Mental Toughness 94 Good Work 95 The Successful Career Toolkit 96 Stop, Ask, Explore 97 Make Your Own Map 98 Career Fear (and how to beat it) 99 Specific Careers The A-Z of Careers and Jobs 100 Success After Service 101 Job Seeking Ultimate Job Search 102 Ultimate New Job 103 Ultimate Cover Letters 104 Ultimate CV 105 Ultimate Interview 106 Ultimate Presentations 107 Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions 108 Assessment Centre Success 109 Superconductors 110 The Job-Ready Guide 111 Testing Ultimate IQ Tests 112 Ultimate Aptitude Tests 113 Ultimate Psychometric Tests 114 How to Pass Numerical Reasoning Tests 115 How to Pass Advanced Verbal Reasoning Tests 116 How to Pass the QTS Numeracy and Literacy Skills Tests 117 Workplace Skills How to Write Effective Business English 118 Improve Your Global Business English 119 How to Write Reports and Proposals 120 Improve Your Communication Skills 121 Develop Your Presentation Skills 122 Dealing with Difficult People 123 Successful Time Management 124 How to Organize Yourself 125 How to Work Remotely 126 How to Manage People 127 Confident Coding 128 Confident Digital Content 129 Confident Web Design 130 Confident Cyber Security 131 Confident Data Skills 132 Be Data Literate 133 Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching Introduction to HRM Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice 136 Human Resource Management at Work 137 Human Resource Practice 138 Introduction to Human Resource Management 139 Human Resource Management for MBA and Business Masters 140 Studying Human Resource Management 141 Work and Employment in a Changing Business Environment 142 People Practice 143 Human Resource Management in a Business Context 144 Human Resource Management 145 Human Resource Management in Context 146 HR Leadership Armstrong’s Handbook of Management and Leadership for HR 147 Leading, Managing and Developing People 148 Human Resource Management Competitive HR 149 Managing Workplace Health and Wellbeing during a Crisis 150 Artificial Intelligence for HR 151 Sustainable Human Resource Management 152 The New World of Work 153 Flexible Working 154 Human Capital Management Standards 155 International HRM International Human Resource Management 156 International Human Resource Management 157 International Human Resource Management 158 HR Analytics Research Methods in Human Resource Management 159 Predictive HR Analytics 160 Introduction to People Analytics 161 Excellence in People Analytics 162 Learning Analytics 163 Driving Digital Transformation through Data and AI 164 Data-Driven HR 165 Strategic HRM Armstrong’s Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management 166 Strategic Human Resource Management 167 HR Technology Introduction to HR Technologies 168 Digital HR Strategy 169 Performance Management Armstrong’s Handbook of Performance Management 170 Performance Management 171 Armstrong on Reinventing Performance Management 172 Performance Management 173 Motivation and Performance 174 Building Top Performing Teams 175 Reward Management Armstrong’s Handbook of Reward Management Practice 176 Reward Management 177 Reward Management 178 Change Management Making Sense of Change Management 179 Managing Change 180 Managing and Leading People Through Organizational Change 181 Consultancy, Organizational Development and Change 182 Organizational Change Explained 183 The Effective Change Manager’s Handbook 184 Neuroscience for Organizational Change 185 Agile Change Management 186 Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation 187 Appreciative Inquiry for Change Management 188 Leading Cultural Change 189 The Next Rules of Work 190 Employee Engagement Employee Engagement 191 Successful Employee Communications 192 Designing Exceptional Organizational Cultures 193 Strategic Internal Communication 194 Human Experience at Work 195 Employment Law & Relations Introduction to Employment Law 196 Employment Law 197 Employment Law 198 Managing Employment Relations 199 Employment Relations 200 Employee Relations 201 Learning & Development Armstrong’s Handbook of Learning and Development 202 Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace 203 Learning for Organizational Development 204 The Learning Organization 205 Studying Learning and Development 206 Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D 207 Continuing Professional Development 208 Neuroscience for Learning and Development 209 Learning and Development 210 Workplace Learning 211 Learning Experience Design 212 The Learning and Development Handbook 213 Artificial Intelligence for Learning 214 Experiential Learning 215 Organizations Organizational Behaviour 216 Data-Driven Organization Design 217 Myths of Work 218 Organizational Development Developing People and Organisations 219 People and Organisational Development 220 Organization Development 221 The Agile Organization 222 Organizational Planning and Analysis 223 Business Resilience 224 Networked, Scaled, and Agile 225 Remote Workplace Culture 226 The Energized Workplace 227 Talent Management & Recruitment Resourcing and Talent Management 228 Learning and Talent Development 229 Inclusive Talent Management 230 Neurodiversity at Work 231 Coaching Excellence in Coaching 232 How to Create a Coaching Culture 233 Coaching and Mentoring 234 Systemic Coaching and Constellations 235 Leadership Coaching 236 Leadership Team Coaching 237 50 Top Tools for Coaching 238 Leadership Team Coaching in Practice 239 Neuroscience for Coaches 240 Diversity, Inclusion and Belonging in Coaching 241 Coaching People through Organizational Change 242 Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Intro Logistics & Supply Chain The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management 245 A Practical Guide to Logistics 246 Supply Chains in Action 247 Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management Case Study Collection 248 Repeat from last catalogue (Gabby) 249 An Introduction to Macrologistics 250 Mastering the Supply Chain 251 Repeat from last catalogue 253 The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit 256 Logistics The Logistics Outsourcing Handbook 257 E-Logistics 258 Defence Logistics 259 Fashion Logistics 260 Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations 261 Urban Logistics 262 Packaging Logistics 263 Health and Safety in Logistics 264 Global Logistics Introduction to Global Logistics 265 Global Logistics 266 International Freight Transport 267 Cross-Border Logistics Operations 268 International Supply Chain Relationships 269 Operations Management Business Operations Models 270 The Operations Advantage 271 The Inventory Toolkit 272 Warehouse Management Warehouse Management 273 Warehousing and Transportation Logistics 274 Retail Logistics & Supply Chain Logistics and Retail Management 275 Managing the Retail Supply Chain 276 Transport Lowe’s Transport Manager’s and Operator’s Handbook 2022 277 A Study Guide for the Operator Certificate of Professional Competence (CPC) in Road Freight 2020 278 Road Passenger Transport Management 279 Air Transport Management 280 Aviation Logistics 281 Maritime Logistics Maritime Logistics 282 Maritime Transport 283 Port Management 284 Smart Green Shipping 285 Container Logistics 286 Technology and the Blue Economy 287 Manufacturing & Production Systems for Manufacturing Excellence 288 International Standards for Design and Manufacturing 289 The Tesla Way 290 Toyota Methods and Operating Models 291 Product Design and the Supply Chain 292 Procurement Strategic Sourcing Management 293 Effective Strategic Sourcing 294 Category Management in Purchasing 295 The Technology Procurement Handbook 296 Strategic Sourcing and Category Management 297 Contract Management 298 Supplier Relationship Management 299 Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals 300 The Buyer’s Toolkit 301 Leading Procurement Strategy 302 Sustainable Procurement 303 Global Contract Logistics 304 A Practical Guide to E-auctions for Procurement 305 Supply Chain Finance Supply Chain Finance 306 Supply Chain Management Accounting 307 Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics 308 Financing the End-to-End Supply Chain 309 Supply Chain Analytics Supply Chain Analytics and Modelling 310 Supply Chain Management Strategic Supply Chain Management 311 Global Value Chain Management 312 Supply Chain 4.0 313 The Strategy-Driven Supply Chain 314 Demand-Driven Supply Chain Management 315 Supply Chain Disruption 316 E-Business and Supply Chain Integration 317 Successful Integrated Planning for the Supply Chain 318 Collaborative Principles for Better Supply Chain Practice 319 The Logistics and Supply Chain Innovation Handbook 320 The Lean Supply Chain 321 Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics 322 Global Supply Chain Ecosystems 323 Supply Chain Risk Management 324 Integrating Blockchain into Supply Chain Management 325 Blockchain and the Supply Chain 326 Humanitarian Logistics & Supply Chain Humanitarian Logistics 327 Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians 328 Sustainability Mastering the Circular Economy 329 Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management 330 A Circular Economy Handbook for Business and Supply Chains 331 Green Logistics 332 Global Waste Management 333 Understanding Planned Obsolescence 334 Sustainability in Global Value Chains 335 Sustainable and Green Supply Chains and Logistics Case Study Collection 336 The Road to Zero Emissions 337 Decarbonizing Logistics 338 Supply Chain Ethics 339 Marketing and PR Advertising Essentials of Advertising 342 Paid Attention 343 Marketing Fundamentals Myths of Marketing 344 Digital Marketing Digital Marketing Strategy 345 The Digital Marketing Handbook 346 Understanding Digital Marketing 347 Optimizing Digital Strategy 348 B2B Digital Marketing Strategy 349 E-Commerce Website Optimization 350 Mobile Marketing 351 Video Marketing 352 Podcasting Marketing Strategy 353 Using Artificial Intelligence in Marketing 354 Social Media Marketing for Business 355 Social Media Social Media Strategy 356 Understanding Social Media 357 Myths of Social Media 358 Influencer Marketing Strategy 359 Marketing Communications Marketing Communications 360

The Risk Management Handbook 70 Cyber Risk Management 71 Cybersecurity for Business 72 Rethinking Reputational Risk 73 Strategy Management and Leadership in the 4th Industrial Revolution 74 Strategic Decision Making 75 Resetting Management 76 Evidence-Based Management 77 The New Strategist 78 Radical Business Model Transformation 79 Advancing Strategy through Behavioural Psychology 80 The Business Models Handbook 81 Decision Making and Problem Solving 82 Innovation & Creativity Business Experimentation 83 Employability, Careers & Entrepreneurship

The Practical Negotiation Handbook 30 The Success Factor 31 Myths of Management 32 HR Analytics Research Methods in Human Resource Management 33 Business Research Business Research 34 Business Research Methods 35 Practical Statistics 36 The Business Analysis Handbook 37 Project Management Understanding Project Management 38 The Power of Project Leadership 39 Corporate Governance, Ethics & CSR Global Business Ethics 40 The Business Guide to Effective Compliance and Ethics 41 Responsible Business 42 Information, Knowledge & Data Management Knowledge Management 43 The Knowledge Manager’s Handbook 44 IT Governance 45 The Enterprise Big Data Framework 46 Data and Analytics Strategy for Business 47 The Practical Guide to Digital Transformation 48 Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation 49 Be Data Driven 50 Ethical Data and Information Management 51 International Business Emerging Markets 52 Leadership Leadership Skills Handbook 53 Essential Leadership 54 Organizing for the New Normal 55 Develop Your Leadership Skills 56 Myths of Leadership 57 Sustainability to Social Change 58 Neuroscience for Leaders 59 Coherence 60 Mavericks 61 What Philosophy Can Teach You About Being a Better Leader 62 Business Improvement The Sustainable Business Handbook 63 Risk Management Fundamentals of Risk Management 64 Fundamentals of Operational Risk Management 65 Operational Risk Management in Financial Services 66 Supply Chain Risk Management 67 Business Continuity Management 68 The Organizational Resilience Handbook 69

www.koganpage.com Business, Risk and ManagementInformation Innovation and Best Practice in Accounting & Finance BusinessBanking & Management Skills Business Research Project CorporateManagementGovernance, Ethics & CSR Information, Knowledge & Data Management International Business StrategyRiskLeadershipManagement

8 Accounting & Finance Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction to accounting 2 Accounting concepts and systems 3 Financial analysis: Part I 4 Financial analysis: Part II 5 Business planning 6 Budgets and managementperformance 7 Cash flow and working capital management 8 Pricing decisions 9 Investment decisions 10 Financing decisions 11 Operational decisions Appendix A: An introduction to double-entry bookkeeping Appendix B: AppendixAppendixAppendixAppendixReportingAccounting/FinancialInternationalStandardsC:ExampleearningsannouncementsD:DiscounttablesE:AnnuityfactorsF:Usefulweblinks

« Online resources: bonus chapters containing guidance and teaching tips, additional questions and lecture slides for each chapter

Now in its third edition, Accounting and Finance for Managers contains updates on new accounting standards and regulations, as well as featuring up-to-date real-world examples of real options, value chain analysis and competitive advantage analysis. This textbook features ‘traditional’ accounting practices in detail, but also covers topics with a strategic focus to ensure students learn to think in broader strategic terms. Written for an international audience using International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) terminology with supporting online resources including additional exercise questions, curated further reading and lecture slides for each chapter.

Author Information Matt Bamber is an Assistant Professor in Accounting at Schulich School of Business, York University. He has taught a range of undergraduate, MBA and other postgraduate courses. He is a Fellow of the Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales, with professional experience in the UK and US. Simon Parry is a Senior Lecturer in Accounting and Finance at Newcastle University. Over the last 22 years he has taught professional accounting courses for ACCA, CIMA, ICAEW, and CIPD, together with academic courses for Business, Accounting and MBA students. He is a Chartered Accountant (ICAEW, FCA) with 34 years’ professional experience in industry, practice and the public sector.

Accounting and Finance for Managers rebukes the myth that in order to excel in accounting and finance you need to be great at mathematics. Split into two broad sections which focus on financial accounting and management accounting and finance, this textbook uses clear, accessible language that will appeal to students from a variety of academic backgrounds. Taking a uniquely practical approach that focuses on the financial aspects of business decisions, the textbook covers all the core topics of accounting and finance, including basic bookkeeping, financial analysis, business planning, cash-flow analysis and investment decisions.

« Develops analytical skills through exercises, comprehension questions, and the interpretation of real financial statements and worked examples from well-known businesses, such as Tesco, Ryanair and Whitbread PLC « New to this edition: provides updates on new accounting standards and regulations, as well as featuring more modern real-world examples in extracts and in expert view sections.

ThisDescriptiontextbookisthe ideal guide for business and management students who need to understand accounting and finance information and develop analytical skills in order to make better-informed decisions.

andAccountingFinance for Managers A Business Decision Making

Edition:Approach 3 Date: 03/12/2020 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789667516 ISBN Ebook: 9781789667523 Pages: 464 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Accounting & Finance

This book « Specifically designed for business and management students who need to understand accounting and finance information in order to make better-informed business decisions Uses clear language accessible to students who have not studied finance previously and explains all key concepts in a logical manner

Now in its 12th edition, Accounting for Non-Accountants has been fully updated to the latest regulatory requirements including the UK GAAP framework, International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and International Accounting Standards (IAS). The final chapter focuses on the impact of changes in the economic environment on businesses and there are introductions to areas including tax, transfer pricing and creative accounting. This practical guide includes review questions in each chapter, with answers and workings where appropriate, and is supported online by over 200 questions and a glossary to develop a firm understanding of all topics.

Accounting for NonAccountants

Accounting for Non-Accountants assumes no prior knowledge of the subject area and is designed to serve as an introductory text for managers and non-specialists who wish to gain an oversight of the accounting discipline. The book covers both financial and management accounting in sufficient detail to allow data to be interpreted but in a clear and accessible manner so the reader can quickly gain an understanding of the basic principles of the subject area.

AccountingDescriptionhasa reputation as a technical and jargon-heavy subject, but there is no reason why those without formal training cannot master the basics of interpreting accounts and making good decisions.

Author Information David Horner has taught Accounting and related courses for over 25 years in the UK. He currently teaches at Birkdale school, Sheffield. He has written numerous textbooks aimed at students both for schools and university level. He has worked with AQA, a major examination board in the UK, for over 20 years.

Edition: 12 Date: 03/05/2020 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789664300 ISBN Ebook: 9781789664317 Pages: 392 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Accounting & Finance

9 Accounting & Finance Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Financial Record Keeping 2 Income Statements 3 The Balance Sheet 4 Further Adjustments to the Income Statement 5 Checking the Double-entry System 6 Accounting Concepts 7 Accounting for Other Business Organisations 8 An Introduction to Business Costing 9 Marginal Costing and Decision Making 10 Standard Costing 11 Budgeting 12 Working Capital Management 13 Capital Investment Appraisal 14 An Introduction to Limited Companies 15 Published Accounts of the Limited Company 16 Current Issues in Accounting 17 Statement of Cash Flows 18 Accounting Ratios 19 The Economic Environment This book « Presents the basics of both financial and management accounting in an easy to follow format « Contains review questions in each chapter, with answers and workings where appropriate, to embed learning « New to this edition: fully updated with new content including reworked chapters on the current issues in accounting and economic issues that have an effect on accounting « Brings the reader up to date on UK GAAP accounting standards, International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and International Accounting Standards (IAS) « Online resources: Over 200 additional review questions to support the book and a glossary of key terms

10 Accounting & Finance Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1

How to quantify the value to your client 20 The reason your clients are clueless about price and how that helps you

The book’s step-by-step approach is backed up by dozens of real-life case studies of firms which applied these methods to get better results, along with benchmarking research based on a survey of thousands of accounting professionals. There is guidance on calculating a profitable price, creating effective packages and managing the ‘invisible’ cost of scope creep, and new insights into meeting clients remotely and pricing in difficult economic times. Become more profitable and deliver extraordinary solutions to clients with this essential guide to effective value pricing.

and Increase Profitability

The problem with the oldfashioned way of pricing accounting services What the research tells us a lack of confidence when pricing makes a great pricing strategy? does pricing change in a post-COVID world? foundations of value pricing structure of the value conversation How to price a new client to prequalify prospects so you avoid the time wasters questions to ask the client to determine value Giving clients a choice – Your first step to value pricing How to create effective packages How to calculate a profitable price How to properly build scope into the price so you never make a loss How to set out your fixed price agreement

This book « Explains how value pricing is the fairest and most profitable option for accountants and bookkeepers, and a better alternative to hourly billing « Contains clear guidance on becoming more confident and comfortable with your pricing strategy and how to avoid pricing too low « Describes how to identify the right kind of client, the critical steps to pricing a new client and powerful strategies to re-price existing clients without losing them « Features benchmarking research on how thousands of accounting professionals price their services and dozens of case studies of firms which implemented value pricing

10 The

Value Pricing for ProfessionalsAccounting A

3 Overcoming

Product Category:

6 The

How to identify and tackle scope creep 17

Accountants and Bookkeepers to Find the Right

« Covers all aspects of pricing, including creating effective packages, setting out a fixed price agreement and building scope creep into the price AccountantsDescriptionand bookkeepers are working long hours but not making the profits they should. A value pricing strategy can lead to better prices for accounting professionals and better results for their clients.

The concept of value pricing is simple to understand but many accountants struggle with the price conversation and lack the confidence to charge higher prices. Value Pricing for Accounting Professionals is a practical guide to building a clear pricing strategy, feeling more confident and increasing earnings. It covers the critical steps to pricing a new client and how to re-price existing clients without losing them by quantifying value.

Accounting

Finance

How to re-price your existing clients without fear of losing them 18 How to get clients to value what you do for them

9 How

7 The

Author Information Mark Wickersham is a Chartered Accountant, speaker and sought-after profit improvement expert. Since selling his own accountancy practice in 2006 he has trained and mentored hundreds of accountants around the world on how to improve their value pricing techniques and strategies. He has built a large, international online community with The Value Pricing Academy, The Bookkeepers’ Pricing Academy and the private Facebook group, Value Pricing with Mark Wickersham. Complete Guide for Clients Edition: 1 Date: 03/07/2022 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398605374 ISBN Ebook: 9781398605381 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Professional Subject: &

4 What

5 How

Financial Technology Case Studies in Fintech Innovation Edition: 1 Date: 03/12/2020 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789665437 ISBN Ebook: 9781789665444 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Accounting & Finance

Table of Contents

Accounting &

Real-world case studies from a variety of international organizations including Lloyds Bank, TransferWise, Generali, Starling and Stocktwits, bridge the gap between theory and practice and contextualize learning in terms of real businesses, from large incumbents to smaller start-ups. With coverage of robo-advisors, mobile-only banks, open banking and risk and regulation, this book also explores a range of analytical frameworks to critically examine new technologies and emerging business models.

This book « Combines theoretical and commercial perspectives informed by the author’s professional experience and academic research « Thoroughly explains key technologies and emerging business models in a clear and accessible manner for those with no technological background « Includes a mix of international case studies from large financial services organizations and smaller start-ups, including Lloyds Bank, TransferWise, Generali, Starling and Stocktwits « Covers the topics required for postgraduate and undergraduate Financial Technology courses and includes learning objectives and discussion questions based on case studies « Online resources: PowerPoint slides for lecturers and additional case studies.

Description With the continued success of fintech (financial technology) businesses around the world, financial services are becoming increasingly de-centralized, personalized, and automated. This new textbook strikes a balance between academic depth and commercial relevance in examining the advantages and challenges of these changes through the lens of various analytical frameworks. Financial Technology demystifies key technologies, such as blockchains, APIs, AI, machine learning, and cloud computing, in a clear and accessible style suitable for readers with no technological background.

Financial Technology enables readers to understand the fintech movement in the context of recent financial history, examine the key drivers of change and form insights about the financial system in a forward-looking and global manner. Online resources include PowerPoint slides for lecturers and additional case studies.

Author Information Niels Pedersen is a Senior Lecturer on the MSc Financial Technology programme at Manchester Metropolitan University, UK, and a regular conference speaker on fintech. As a Chartered Accountant (ICAEW), he worked at PwC and the Financial Services Authority before coming to academia.

1 Networks, APIs and fintech banking platforms – How technology is decentralizing finance 2 Disruption disintermediationand – How financial innovation and cloud computing gave birth to the fintech revolution 3 Behavioural economics and experience design – How to optimize user engagement 4 Artificial intelligence and automation in fintech – AI and machine learning in practice 5 Bitcoin, blockchain and cryptocurrencies – The applications of distributed ledger technology in finance 6 Digitizing the price mechanism – The impact of automation and social media on financial markets 7 Financial crime, cybersecurity and risk management –Pitfalls and opportunities in fintech 8 Regtech and regulatory compliance – Financial regulation in a fintech context 9 Looking to the future –Optimization, decentralization and personalization

Finance Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Country Risk Analysis Long–Term Financing Capital Structure

International Finance offers a clear and accessible introduction to the fundamental principles and practice of international finance in today’s world, from the international financial environment and exchange rates, to financing multinational companies and international investment. The theory and techniques are presented with the non-financial manager in mind, and the theoretical material is supplemented by case studies and a discussion of the appropriateness of the various techniques and principles to solve practical problems. This book draws from examples and practice around the world, helping students of international corporate finance, particularly non-specialist finance students, understand the complexities of modern Europe and comparative systems of finance globally. International Finance is essential reading for anyone studying international finance or needing an up-to-date, engaging resource to help them navigate the complicated and ever-changing global financial world. Key theories and terms are explained and defined, avoiding unnecessary jargon and acknowledging that many readers are coming to the subject with little or no prior knowledge of corporate finance at all. Online supporting resources include PowerPoint lecture slides.

For Non-Financial Managers

This book « Includes a highly accessible, engaging introduction to what can sometimes be a difficult, technical subject Draws on examples from practice from around the world to offer a truly global approach Offers an up-to-date approach to the subject post global financial crisis Provides a glossary to accompany the text, offering instant access to key terminology Online Resources: PowerPoint lecture slides

Edition: 1 Date: 03/01/2018 Price: £36.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480011 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480028 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 235x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Accounting & Finance

FinanceInternational

Description

12 Accounting & Finance Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 The International Financial Environment 1 The Rise of the Multinational and the MonetaryInternationalSystem 2 The Institutions and Participants that Make Up the Global Financial System 3 The History of Exchange Rates, the IMF and the World Bank 4 The Euro and the Global Financial Environment 2 Exchange Rates 3 Exchange Rate Regimes 4 Parity Conditions and Forecasting Exchange Rates 5 Currency Markets 6 Measuring and Managing Exchange Risk 3 Financing the International Company 4 Financing International Trade 5 Long Term Sources of Finance 6 International Cash Management 4 International Investment 5 Investing Directly in Foreign Enterprises 6 International Investment Appraisal 7

Author Information Dora Hancock has over 30 years’ teaching experience at universities in the UK including Birmingham City University and Leeds Beckett University. Recently, her teaching has focused solely on finance, including international, corporate and investment finance on undergraduate, postgraduate and professional courses. She has taught UK and international students. The author is passionate about teaching and writing materials for students and lecturers to use.

13 Accounting & Finance Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Trade risks and risk assessment 2 Methods of payment 3 Bonds, guarantees and standby letters of credit 4 Currency risk management 5 Export credit insurance 6 Trade finance 7 Structured trade finance 8 Terms of payment 9 The export quotation Author Information Anders Grath has over 25 years’ experience in international trade and finance within major European financial institutions, as head of both international departments and corporate units. He is the author of a series of similar titles on individual country markets. The Handbook of International Trade and Finance Business, Finance, Risk, Information Edition:Management 4 Date: 03/08/2016 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749475987 ISBN Ebook: 9780749475994 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 234x158 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Accounting & Finance

A Practical Introduction Edition: 1 Date: 03/11/2017 Price: £44.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480059 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480066 Pages: 616 Format (mm): 235x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Accounting & Finance

14 Accounting & Finance Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1 Financial Markets 2 Main Market Participants 3 Global Fund Management Industry 4 Investment Theory 2 Investment Classes 3 Equity 4 Debt 5 Mutual Funds 6 Derivatives 7 Alternative Investments 3 Risk 4 Types of Risk 5 Financial Regulation and Supervision 4 Portfolio Management 5 The Advisor and the Client 6 Issues Involved in the Management of Retail Fund Management Products 7 Taxation

ManagementandInvestmentPortfolio

This book « Introduces what can sometimes be a difficult, technical subject in a highly accessible, engaging way « Is rooted in Europe rather than adapted from a US text, but draws on examples and practice from around the world « Adopts a practical approach, drawing on the authors’ many years of experience working in the financial sector to illustrate concepts with real-world examples and practice, making it the perfect choice for those preparing for a career in finance and investment « Offers a concise introduction, supported with links to further reading and self-directional study « Online resources: Lecture slides and figures from the book Description For students of finance at both undergraduate and postgraduate level, or those preparing for professional examinations, Investment and Portfolio Management develops knowledge and understanding of the key financial products, investment strategies and risks in financial markets in the UK and internationally. With an emphasis on practice, Investment and Portfolio Management presents the theory and its relevance and application in the financial workplace. The authors draw on their experience working in the financial sector to illustrate concepts with case studies, examples and problems, including material relevant to candidates studying for professional examinations offered by the major professional bodies in the subject area (Charted Institute of Investment, CII & Chartered Institute of Securities and Investment, CISI). Each chapter is written in an easy-to-follow style, allowing readers to navigate their way through different topics without issue, avoiding complicated technical jargon, in favour of simpler terms and writing style. To meet the criteria for those studying for academic and professional courses, links are provided to more in-depth material and in-chapter features to encourage self-directional Onlinelearning.supporting resources for this book include lecture slides and figures from the book.

Author Information Ian Pagdin is Course Leader for Banking & Finance Masters and a variety of finance and international finance courses at Sheffield Hallam University. His background is finance, having worked in the finance industry for 22 years, including 19 years as an independent financial adviser. Michelle Hardy is a senior lecturer and module leader for several key modules on a variety of finance and international finance courses at Sheffield Hallam University. Her background is corporate banking and international wealth management for 14 years. She is a fellow of the Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales

This book « This insider’s guide optimizes the opportunities for sustainable finance while noting and addressing the challenges with solutions Helps readers to avoid common pitfalls with its balanced and realistic take on sustainable investing Presents a plethora of case studies, examples, graphs and charts, and new solution ideas in each chapter Supported by fresh insights and viewpoints from a range of top-tier expert commentators Written by an experienced author team who built one of the financial industry’s fastest growing and most decorated sustainable investing franchises

15 Accounting & Finance Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 What is Sustainable Investing (SI)? 3 SI measurement and data? 4 Corporate ESG activity 5 Key SI themes 6 Public equity 7 Debt 8 Private investments 9 Cross asset allocations and portfolios 10 Conclusion

The book delivers a balanced overview, covering topics such as Sustainable Investing Data and Disclosure and Corporate Sustainability actions and diving into individual asset classes including Equities, Bonds, and Alternatives. It neither blindly praises or criticises activities, but rather explains the incentives and compromises that have occurred to reach a certain point, reviewing both successes and failures in sustainable investing. Above all, it is practical: it presents examples and cases in each chapter and offers useful ideas and plans for how to take sustainable finance forward while balancing credibility and commerciality in equal measure.

This is a must-read for every finance professional, investor and regulator-whether they are seeking to fast track their careers, bring commercial and sustainable learning to their organisation, or upgrade their understanding of this crucial but complex topic.

By offering a realistic account of what is working and what is not, readers of this book will be given a unique and deep insight into the current environment and a suite of thought-provoking ideas they may carry forward in their own careers. Together, the authors built one of the financial industry’s fastest growing and most decorated sustainable investing franchises, and their impressive credentials and deep knowledge underpin the book.

Author Information Simon Smiles, PhD, is a seasoned sustainable finance investment strategist, based in Zurich, Switzerland. He was most recently Group Managing Director and CIO for Ultra High Net Worth Clients at Swiss multinational investment bank and financial services firm UBS Wealth Management, establishing and running the wealth management sustainable and impact investing teams. Simon is also a IIF Future Leader, WEF Young Global Leader, and member of the Milken Institute’s Young Leaders Circle. Simon holds a PhD in economics from Australian National University James Purcell is the Group Head of ESG, Sustainable, and Impact Investing at Quintet Private Bank, where he is based in Zurich, Switzerland. Previously, James was a Managing Director and the Global Head of Sustainable and Impact Investing at UBS Wealth Management. In 2018 he was named by Financial News as a Rising star of Asset Management under 40. Under his supervision, UBS won variants of Best Private Bank for sustainable investing from Euromoney, Asia Private Banker, and Financial Times publications.

TheDescriptionPracticalGuide

to Sustainable Investing takes a shrewd and honest look at the realities of Environmental, Social and Governance investing and provides a pragmatic steer for how finance professionals can make it work for them in practice.

InvestingSustainable Edition: 1 Date: 03/12/2022 Price: £34.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398607903 ISBN Ebook: 9781398607910 Pages: 312 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Accounting & Finance

16 Accounting & Finance Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Now is the Time 2 Tech Start-ups - It’s a Different World 3 Start-up Contribution Analysis 4 Start-up Financial Analysis 5 Start-up Progress Analysis 6 The Importance of Being Liquid 7 What’s it Worth to you 8 Tracking your Start-up’s Growth 9 Glossary 10 Resources This book « Develops the financial intelligence you need to communicate effectively with investors, implement business strategies and pinpoint emerging pathways for profit « Outlines how to analyze your performance and undertake risk-return assessments to tactically grow your start-up « Offers proven methods for tracking your start-up’s progress to ensure that growth is maintained and continuous « New to this edition: analysis of financial statements directly from start-ups, new case studies on companies that have scaled up, focus on new digital technologies and market opportunities for start-ups, information on new players and potential future tech start-ups MoreDescriptionthanathird of start-ups fail due to founders having a poor understanding of financial management. Become financially savvy with this easy to understand guide and learn how to effectively grow your business, communicate with investors and progress to the next level.

The fully updated second edition offers greater analysis of financial statements directly from real-world start-ups, charts the success of businesses that went from start-up to scale-up with all new case studies and covers new digital technologies, emerging opportunities in the ecosystem, developing markets and much more. For entrepreneurs and tech innovators, this is a must-have book to help take your idea from concept to company with clear and effective financial insights.

Author Information Alnoor Bhimani is Professor of Management Accounting at the London School of Economics (LSE) and was previously Head of the Department of Accounting and Founding Director of LSE Entrepreneurship based in London, UK. He regularly delivers business and technology focused talks at conferences and events across the globe, is a professionally certified accountant and has a PhD from LSE and an MBA from Cornell University where he was a Fulbright Scholar. for Technology StartUps How to Power Growth, Track Performance and Drive Innovation Edition: 2 Date: 03/01/2022 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398603066 ISBN Ebook: 9781398603073 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 233x154 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Accounting & Finance

ManagementFinancial

Start-ups face many challenges but managing the finances does not need to be one. Financial Management for Technology Start-Ups offers a complete financial toolkit on how to use this area of your business to your advantage. This book contains invaluable tools and insights designed specifically for tech start-ups, with a concentrated focus on what is important in financial terms for technologybased and innovation focused entrepreneurial businesses.

Written by a strong academic and practitioner author team and in association with the Network for Independent Forensic Accountants, this book covers all forensic accounting topics from forensics as an extension of auditing and the basic principles of forensic accounting, to financial analysis and modelling, financial reporting, financial crime, and IT systems.

This book « Each chapter is written by a high-profile specialist, in association with the Network of Independent Forensic Accountants, bringing the latest industry insights to the topics covered « Considers the Forensic Accountant in practice, using case studies throughout from a number of different regions and sectors to demonstrate the link between theory and forensic accountancy in the professional world

Description A complete guide to Forensic Accounting and Finance, this book is ideal for advanced-level students and new or mid-level forensic accounting professionals looking to boost their specialist knowledge as part of their CPD, for accountants who wish to build more knowledge in this skills area or advanced undergraduates who feel ready to stretch themselves.

17 Accounting & Finance Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Forensic Accounting and Finance shares current examples and case studies, highlighting cultural differences for key topics with updated regional legislation information available online for those looking for a truly global approach which is always up to date. Online supporting resources include PowerPoint lecture slides and links to regional updates.

Author Information Bee-Lean Chew is an experienced member of the forensic accounting team at Wilder Coe Ltd., a director of the Network of Independent Forensic Accountants and a provider of CPD training to solicitors and fellow business professionals. The author trained with Wilder Coe Ltd., becoming partner in 2005. A Chartered Accountant, Ms Chew has a Law degree from Kent University, a Master’s degree in Finance from the University of Strathclyde and is an ICAEW-accredited Forensic Accountant.

Demand for expertise in this field is growing, and Forensic Accounting and Finance offers a complete, accessible and affordable guide, combining coverage of principle theory with the real and practical needs of the professional.

Forensic Accounting and Finance Principles and Practice

Edition: 1 Date: 03/08/2017 Price: £42.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749479992 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480004 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 215x140 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Accounting & Finance

The forensic accountant in practice [Fiona Hotston Moore and Simon Martin] 2 The forensic accountant as expert witness [Niamh M Brennan] 3 Forensic accountancy and taxation [Tim Cook] 4 Forensic accountancy and fraud [David Muggridge] 5 Fraud prevention [Steven Toms] 6 Professional negligence [Adam Stronach and Christopher Hatcher] 7 Valuations [Brian Spencer and Christopher Hatcher] 8 Audit and financial reporting [Bee-Lean Chew] 9 Crime [Andrew Donaldson and Adam Calvert] 10 Commercial disputes [Kate Hart] 11 Forensic accountancy in matrimonial cases [Kate Hart] 12 Insolvency [Norman Cowan] 13 Personal injury [Christopher Hatcher]

« Online Resources: PowerPoint lecture slides and links to regional updates

« Offers comprehensive coverage of all key forensic accounting topics, such as taxation, financial analysis and modelling and auditing and reporting while also covering areas of current interest to the sector, including financial crime, fraud and cyber crime while sharing expertise on civil disputes and litigation and expert witnessing and dispute resolution

Table of Contents

Edition: 1 Date: 03/04/2017 Price: £42.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480516 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480523 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 235x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Accounting & Finance

Understanding Islamic Financial Services covers contemporary developments in service science (e.g. service theories, service visualization tools and service co-creation concepts) and implications for the development and sustainability of Islamic financial services Examples from practice enliven the text and allow the reader to relate the theories and principles discussed to current practice.

Author Information Karim Ullah is Assistant Professor and Islamic Financial Services Co-ordinator, Centre for Excellence in Islamic Finance at the Institute of Management Sciences. He has taught extensively in the areas of Islamic banking and finance, business finance and managerial finance, amongst others. Wafi Al-Karaghouli is Senior Lecturer in Operations and Project Management, Brunel University. He has extensive experience within multinational companies and Higher Education.

While other texts on the subject look at the basic concepts, principles, contracts and financial products used in Islamic banking and finance, Understanding Islamic Financial Services goes one step further and provides a new context, identifying four levels on which the Islamic Financial system operates: product level, institution level, market level and inter-market level. It considers Islamic banking and finance as a multi-level service system, an approach which will enable students and professionals of Islamic finance to gain a more in-depth, holistic understanding of how the system functions.

The HEC Outstanding Research Award 2019 Understanding Islamic Financial Services offers fresh insights on the Islamic financial system. The importance of this system cannot be underestimated. Experts expect that it is likely to sustain double digit growth globally over the next few years, and demand for professionals in the area has never been higher, both in the UK and around the world.

WINNER:Description

18 Accounting & Finance Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 History and Development of the Islamic Financial System 2 Islamic Law (Shariah), Economics, and Financial System 3 Core Elements of the Islamic Financial System 4 Multi-Level Islamic Financial System 5 Product Level Development of Islamic Financial System 6 nstitution Level Development of Islamic Finance 7 Market Level Development of Islamic Financial System 8 Inter-Markets (Ecosystem) Level Development of Islamic Financial System 9 Adaptability and Sustainability of Islamic Financial System

This book « Considers Islamic banking and finance as a multi-level service system, an approach which will enable students and professionals of Islamic finance to gain a more in-depth, holistic understanding of how the system functions « Offers four cutting edge, in depth case studies that clearly demonstrate how the system operates in different types of financial systems « Is written by Karim Ullah, a key player in Islamic finance in Pakistan, having played a major role in setting up the Centre for Excellence in Islamic Finance there « Presents a much needed up to date resource for a growing global industry thirsty for new sources of knowledge.

ServicesIslamicUnderstandingFinancial Theory and Practice

The Contemporary CFO Edition: 1 Date: 03/11/2021 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398602908 ISBN Ebook: 9781398602915 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Professional Subject: Accounting & Finance

4 Introduction 5

This book provides motivation and guidance for current and future finance leaders to navigate an increasingly unpredictable, dynamic, complex and connected world. As businesses are forced to change fundamentally or accept the reality of being left behind, the CFO has a particularly important part to play in preparing for this change - not only for their own function but for the business as a Sowhole.what is the role of CFOs in delivering digital business transformation? What can they do to manage business resources and performance more dynamically? How can CFOs contribute to the creation and management of new business models, such as digital business platforms and ecosystems? And what can finance leaders do to enable sustainable growth and long-term multi-stakeholder value creation?

7 The

1 Introduction 2 Beyond

4 It’s

Introduction The engineer perspective (and the art of design thinking) process automation Data, data, data all about people engineer perspectiveSummary The perspectiveentrepreneur(andthe art of systems thinking) strategic performance operational performance culture entrepreneur perspective - Summary The economist perspective (and the art of network thinking) Digital business platform Digital business ecosystems Multi-stakeholder value The economist perspectiveSummary 9 Bibliography This book « Motivates current and future finance leaders to re-examine their approaches and the capabilities needed to meet rapidly changing expectations in an uncertain, connected world « Examines the practical aspects of digital business transformation, from process automation to creating a data-driven culture and preparing knowledge workers for a new future « Evaluates new requirements for corporate performance management, including more dynamic approaches to planning, budgeting, forecasting, resource allocation and performance tracking « Explores the evolution of new digital business models, including digital business platforms and ditial business ecosystems, and their implications on value creation and on driving sustainable growth « Includes key takeaways, guiding principles, case studies and practical examples throughout the book to encourage readers to apply leading practices in their own organization

19 Accounting & Finance Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents

dialogue 6 Performance

TheDescriptiondigitalrevolution is changing our world and the fundamentals of business faster than anyone expected, and the responsibility for leading key aspects of enterprise-wide business transformation often falls to the Chief Financial Officer (CFO).

This essential guide includes the latest thinking, trends and perspectives to help finance leaders navigate the demands of the connected world successfully.

dialogue 5 The

These and many more key questions are tackled in The Contemporary CFO, which draws on practical experience of transforming leading global businesses and on extensive, original research, including in-depth interviews with a wide range of corporate leaders. CFOs are used to managing change but delivering a complex business transformation on top of an already demanding role can be challenging.

5 The

Author Information Michael Haupt is a Partner in Deloitte Consulting, based in London. He is a senior leader of Deloitte’s Finance, Performance Management and Technology practice in Europe and works very closely with many senior finance, business and technology executives of leading global companies. He is a widely recognized thought leader who has contributed to several publications on finance and performance management. He has written The Contemporary CFO to help current and future finance leaders navigate the demands of an increasingly fast-changing, complex and interconnected world.

3 Introduction 4 The

ServicesFinancialGuide

20 Accounting & Finance Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Banks versus fintechs during the economic crisis 2 Fintech for customer experience 3 Early collaboration models 4 Widening of the fintech ecosystem 5 Emerging markets driving innovation 6 Governments and fintech hubs 7 Fintech segments at play 8 B2B fintech 9 Collaboration models within fintech 10 Challenger banking 11 Data and analytics 12 Conclusion

Author Information Devie Mohan is a fintech industry advisor and analyst based in London, UK. She is co-founder and CEO of Burnmark, a fintech research company, a contributor to the ING group Think Forward Initiative, and sits on the Editorial Board for the Journal of Digital Banking. She has been listed in the top 10 of various fintech influencer lists. In 2019 she was included in the Financial Times’ list of the 100 most influential BAME leaders in technology.

This book « Explores how banks can collaborate with fintech firms to drive innovation in areas such as cash management, compliance and tax « Explains key fintech segments such as regtech, robo-advisory, blockchain and personal finance management Includes case studies and business models of banks who have had successful partnerships including Barclays and Citibank Covers key fintech hubs in Europe, Africa, Asia, Latin America and the US Description Fintech has emerged as one of the fastest growing sectors in the financial services industry and has radically disrupted traditional banking. However, it has become clear that for both to thrive, the culture between fintech and incumbent firms must change from one of competition to collaboration.

The to Fintech Business, Finance, Risk, Information Edition:Management 1 Date: 03/01/2020 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749486372 ISBN Ebook: 9780749486389 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Professional Subject: Accounting & Finance

The Financial Services Guide to Fintech looks at this trend in detail, using case studies of successful partnerships to show how banks and fintech organizations can work together to innovate faster and increase profitability.

Written by an experienced fintech advisor and influencer, this book explains the fundamental concepts of this exciting space and the key segments to have emerged, including regtech, robo-advisory, blockchain and personal finance management. It looks at the successes and failures of bank-fintech collaboration, focusing on technologies and start-ups that are highly relevant to banks’ product and business areas such as cash management, compliance and tax. With international coverage of key markets, The Financial Services Guide to Fintech offers practical guidance, use cases and business models for banks and financial services firms to use when working with fintech companies.

Introduction 1 Reaction: The rise of antimoney laundering and counter-terrorist financing activity 2 Implementing an anti-money laundering risk control framework Using the launderinganti-moneystrategywheel Applying the brakes at key moments 5 Country and people risk 6 Product and delivery channel risk Regulators: External reporting and Financial Intelligence Unit activity Navigating cultural change 9 Conclusion This book « Addresses the needs of the non-specialist compliance professional from a range of industries, backgrounds and experience « Outlines the different elements of anti-money laundering (AML) practice to support compliance professionals at any stage of their career to put effective controls in place in their own organisations « Presents readers with the global oversight needed to align activity to a cohesive plan, sharing case studies and examples of good and bad practice from around the world « Includes the EU 4th Directive, due to come into practice in July 2017; stays up-to-date with current regulations Description It is estimated that between 2 and 5 per cent of global GDP (over $3 trillion) is laundered by criminals around the world every year. Once thought to be a problem which only affected banks and the financial services sector, high profile cases, such as the recent leak of the Panama Papers in 2016, have thrust the issue into the public arena, and governments around the world are being forced to put robust systems and controls in place. Anti-Money Laundering offers a cost-effective self-development tool for the busy compliance professional eager to progress their career and in need of an accessible, practical and jargon-free introduction to anti-money laundering (AML).

21 Accounting & Finance Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents

LaunderingAnti-Money

A Practical Guide to Reducing Organizational Risk Edition: 1 Date: 03/05/2018 Price: £36.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481896 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481902 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 234x154 Product Category: Professional Subject: Accounting & Finance

Anti-Money Laundering offers a practical guide to navigate the maze of requirements needed to counter money laundering in an organization. This book separates the different elements of AML practice, featuring a range of case studies and scenarios highlighting issues and best practices around the world. The text demonstrates that it is by foresight and methodology that AML can be mitigated, and provides clarity on complex points to better enable readers to gain the expertise they need to achieve success in practice.

Author Information Rose Chapman is the Global Head of Compliance for a leading travel commerce platform and solutions provider. With over 20 years of experience working in compliance and ethics in global organizations, she is accustomed to the demands and challenges faced by business professionals and compliance teams working in fast-moving, culturally diverse and dynamic environments. She is a lecturer and training manual writer/ reviewer for the ICA in Post Graduate Diplomas and Certificates in Compliance, a member of the Institute of Money Laundering Prevention Officers Committee, UK, and a recognised speaker and expert voice on antimoney laundering.

Author Information Rhian Lewis is a software engineer and former digital journalist at thetimes.co.uk. She co-founded the London Women in Bitcoin meetup in 2014 and co-developed the altcoin portfolio tracker countmycrypto.com. She is an international conference speaker and blogger on blockchain technology and cryptocurrency. Finance, Risk, Information 1 Date: 03/10/2020 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789665680 ISBN Ebook: 9781789665697 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 230x158 Product Category: Professional/General Subject: Accounting & Finance

The Cryptocurrency Revolution explains the most important takeaways from the continued growth of digital currencies and blockchain technology and explores the transformative possibilities of borderless payments, decentralized finance (‘DeFi’) and machine-to-machine transactions.

22 Accounting & Finance Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 What is money? 2 The first 10 years of Bitcoin 3 Litecoin, Ethereum and a tidal wave of altcoins 4 Libra: how Big Tech moved in on digital currencies 5 Tokenomics and governance 6 Driving change with token economies: case studies 7 Public blockchains versus permissioned blockchains 8 ICO mania 9 Banking and financial services 10 A revolution in financial products 11 Regulation 12 State-issued digital currencies 13 Future digital currency trends

The RevolutionCryptocurrency Business,

Written in jargon-free and accessible language, this book examines the key value proposition of Bitcoin and other cryptocurrencies and how decentralized technologies could enable banks and financial institutions to become more efficient. It looks at the potential impact of company-backed virtual currencies (such as Facebook’s Libra) and how governments and regulators around the world are reacting to these innovations. With discussion of the principles of tokenomics and the difference between public and private blockchains, The Cryptocurrency Revolution is the essential guide for those wishing to understand the threats and opportunities of the changing world of payments and finance.

This book « Pulls together the most important takeaways from the growth of cryptocurrencies and blockchains, looking at their potential impact on traditional business and finance « Explains the key value proposition of Bitcoin and other cryptocurrencies and how the landscape has evolved « Explores how blockchains can enable new financial products and efficiencies for incumbent banks and financial institutions « Examines the implications of Big Tech companies such as Facebook entering the digital currency market « Compares the attitudes of governments and regulators around the world to genuinely borderless technologies

Edition:Management

TheDescriptionworldofcryptocurrencies and blockchains was initially viewed as a niche space of little interest to mainstream business and finance sectors. With major banks now licensed to provide cryptocurrency custody solutions, and everyone from Facebook to governments using the underlying technology to create their own digital currencies, this has undoubtedly changed.

Retail and Digital Banking offers readers the opportunity to take a step back and consider the evolution of the sector in which they work and the tremendous level of change that has occurred over time for all operational activity. Retail and Digital Banking provides support for the Personal and Private Banking module assessment and features practical case studies from the banking sector. This essential text brings the journey of modern banking to life and considers what the future holds. Online supporting resources include a glossary and updates to regulation.

Author Information John Henderson has over 30 years’ experience in the banking sector, having held a number of roles for the Bank of Scotland, Sainsbury’s Bank, the Royal Bank of Scotland (RBS) and NatWest. He began his career working in retail branches but has also been Regional Training Manager, headed up the Treasury Department and other operational risk services, managed quality for an operational call centre business and also led branch design and distribution. His current role is with the RBS Group, where he manages the offshoring portfolio. The author is a Fellow of the Chartered Banker Institute.

Endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute as core reading for the Personal and Private Banking module, Retail and Digital Banking looks at the changes that have occurred, including developments in onshore and offshore operations, call centres and the impact of technology and other critical factors in retail and digital banking. This book considers the evolution of retail banking services and the major role that technology has played in providing quality, cost-effective services to consumers. This fascinating text then goes on to offer expert thought leadership on the future of retail banking and what this could mean for existing established banks and disruptive new entrants.

Retail and Digital Banking Principles and Practice Edition: 1 Date: 03/10/2018 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482718 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482725 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 235x160 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Banking

This book « Supports the Chartered Banker Institute’s Personal and Private Banking module requirements and helps to prepare for assessment « Is written by a banking sector expert with cutting-edge industry perspective, ideal to support students of banking in professional training or at undergraduate and postgraduate level « Aids work-based learning and professional development with a highly practical and applied approach, bringing learning to life with activities to carry out in the workplace as well as case studies, further reading recommendations and definitions of key terms throughout « Offers thought leadership on retail and digital banking from an expert author with over 39 years of experience in the sector, endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute « Online resources: includes a glossary and updates to regulation Description

23 Banking Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 The birth and development of retail banking 2 The growth of retail banking and its place in the economy 3 Problems and opportunities caused by financial crises 4 Preparing for external trends and influences to deliver high-quality income and costeffective services 5 Disruption in the market 6 Distribution of retail banking services via a range of customer channels 7 Multi-channel versus omnichannel 8 The role of technology in the evolution of retail banking 9 The impact of legislation and regulation on retail banking operations

24 Banking Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 Business customers 2 Products and services 3 Reputational risk and ethics 4 The changing nature of banking 5 The changing nature of regulation and legislation 6 The role of the relationship manager 7 Tools and techniques to help relationship managers 8 Customer service and portfolio planning 9 Relationship strategies: customer developmentretention,andacquisition 10 Case study – gaining new business 11 Glossary This book « Supports the Chartered Banker Institute’s Personal & Private Banking and Commercial Lending modules requirements and helps to prepare for assessment « Is written by banking sector experts with cutting-edge industry perspective, ideal to support students studying banking at undergraduate and postgraduate level « Aids work-based learning and professional development with a highly practical and applied approach, bringing learning to life with activities to carry out in the workplace as well as case studies, further reading recommendations and definitions of key terms throughout « Offers thought leadership on relationship management from expert authors with over 50 years of combined experience in the sector, endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute « Online resources: includes a glossary and updates to regulation Description Endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute as core reading for the Personal & Private Banking and Commercial Lending modules, Relationship Management in Banking supports and develops the need to be able to manage key customer relationships. The text considers the nature of commercial relationships and help the reader synthesise complex factors in order to develop a robust relationship management methodology. It will draw from bona fide case studies and examples that can demonstrate key relationship management concepts as well as bring learning to life and share examples of customers, good and bad, from a range of different sectors.

Author Information Steve Goulding worked for a UK Bank for 35 years, the majority of which were spent in Commercial and Corporate, as a Relationship Director. He is now an author, coach and mentor for a number of financial services personnel, and provides management consultancy services for a number of businesses. Richard Abley has operated within the banking industry since 1978, fulfilling a number of customer-facing and leadership roles in business and corporate banking. Simultaneously, he has lectured to many hundreds of bankers seeking to obtain their professional qualifications, and has coauthored several books on banking. in Banking Principles and Practice Edition: 1 Date: 03/10/2018 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482831 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482848 Pages: 400 Format (mm): 235x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Banking

ManagementRelationship

Through case studies and providing online updates to regulations, Relationship Management in Banking considers how to critically analyze approaches to relationship management used for a variety of banking customer types and examine the impact of legislation, regulation, governance and technology on banking relationship management and customer acquisition and retention. Online supporting resources include a glossary and updates to regulation.

Commercial Lending Principles and Practice Edition: 1 Date: 03/10/2018 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482770 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482787 Pages: 352 Format (mm): 235x157 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Banking

Commercial Lending uses a series of practical exercises and case studies, and provides the tools needed for the reader to understand and appraise a customer’s business strategy. This will then enable the reader to provide appropriate funding solutions to meet the commercial needs of customers while reflecting the bank’s risk appetite. These tools include: how to assess the performance and creditworthiness of a business; how to critically evaluate the robustness of cash flow; and how to undertake sensitivity analysis to quantify sustainable debt repayment capacity. This practical text will present a critical analysis of financial and non-financial information to help readers identify key risks inherent in the customer’s lending proposition. Readers will go on to propose suitable funding solutions that mitigate risk and meet the needs of customer and bank. Online supporting resources include a glossary and updates to regulation.

This book « Supports the Chartered Banker Institute’s Commercial Lending module requirements and helps to prepare for assessment Is written by a banking sector expert with cutting-edge industry perspective, ideal to support students of banking at undergraduate and postgraduate level « Aids work-based learning and professional development with a highly practical and applied approach, bringing learning to life with activities to carry out in the workplace as well as case studies, further reading recommendations and definitions of key terms throughout « Offers additional numeracy support to help readers with practical lending work, such as assessing balance sheets and understanding financial reports and documents

« Offers thought leadership on commercial lending from an expert author with over 30 years of experience in the sector, endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute « Online resources: includes a glossary and updates to regulation Description

25 Banking Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 The relationship between the bank and the customer 2 The financial analysis of businesses 3 Cash analysis 4 How to structure a lending proposition 5 The strategic analysis of business 6 Securities for lending 7 Lending products 8 Management and leadership 9 Businesses facing financial difficulties 10 Glossary

Endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute as core reading for one of the modules leading to the Institute’s professional qualifications and chartered status, Commercial Lending supports readers that wish to develop their ability to analyze the creditworthiness of a customer and their business in the context of the current economic climate, future market and sector expectations.

Author Information Adrian Cudby runs his own financial training and consulting business based in Leeds, UK. His clients range from international financial institutions to individuals who require oneto-one mentoring and coaching. He is a professional banker (ACIB) with over thirty years’ experience in the industry. He has a Master’s Degree in Business Administration and holds a Postgraduate Certificate in Higher Education.

Edition: 1 Date: 03/12/2019 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482909 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482916 Pages: 376 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Banking

« Online

Culture, Conduct and Ethics Banking Principles and Practice

Author Information Fred Bell is an experienced career banker with extensive risk management leadership expertise. Working over 39 years in the Royal Bank of Scotland (RBS), he has held senior leadership roles including Head of Operational Risk in the RBS Wealth Division, Head of Risk at Tesco Personal Finance and Head of the RBS Bank of China Risk Programme. Bell established and ran RBS’s first dedicated business continuity function.

26 Banking Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 Ethics theory 2 Professionalism and ethics in banking 3 Ethical decision making in practice 4 A short history of banking 5 An overview of regulation and legislation in banking 6 Corporate governance 7 Conduct and culture in banking 8 Conduct risk management 9 Corporate social responsibility and environmental issues 10 Ethics and technology

This book « Supports the Chartered Banker Institute’s Professionalism and Ethics module requirements and helps prepare for assessment Includes case studies, further reading and viewing recommendations, and definitions of key terms throughout Analyzes the evolution of the bank’s role in society and examines the impact of legislation, regulation and governance on banking operations Offers a range of ethical theories and their applicability to banking and finance resources: a glossary and information on further sources

Description

Endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute as core reading for its professional qualifications, Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking emphasizes the importance of professionalism for banks, and explores how all staff play a key role in putting customers at the heart of their business. Taking an applied approach, it aims to develop the reader’s capability to: recognize and contribute towards balanced outcomes for consumers and organizations; understand the impact of reputational deficit; and understand the personal impact of an individual in the workplace.

From a discussion of the main branches of ethical thinking to an overview of regulation and legislation in the UK and internationally, this book covers the theory and practice of conduct and professionalism in banking. Chapters contain activities and industry case studies, and further reading and viewing suggestions are included to help develop a deeper understanding of the topics covered. With fully referenced discussion of conflicts of interest, decision making models, the role of professional bodies, corporate governance, conduct risk management and the Global Financial Crisis 2007-08, Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking is the essential guide for finance professionals.

Written by an impartial author and a variety of contributors with extensive experience working with practitioners, regulators, and many of the world’s finest academic initiatives, this book is filled with practical, grounded advice on how best to approach this new challenge and avoid infractions.

InDescriptionthenextwave of conduct regulation in financial markets, from 2021 conduct regulators in the UK and elsewhere expect firms to produce evidence on how they are improving behaviour and culture. Facing this, many practitioners are anxious that their current reporting and management information (MI) are irrelevant to meeting as-yet unclear regulatory expectations. This book provides the insights and tools firms need to report on culture, securing both enhanced business value and the regulator’s approval. Culture is now seen as a key contributor to good governance, feeding into existing discourse on environmental, social and governance (ESG) factors and the emerging dialogue on ‘non-financial (mis)conduct’, but conventional measures of business quality are unfit for the new reporting agenda. Culture Audit in Financial Services follows the arc of ‘behavioural regulation’ to examine what the regulator really wants, before offering guidance on how culture audit differs from conventional auditing, how to put the latest pure-research findings to work, and the key features of well-designed conduct and culture reports.

27 Banking Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book « Offers clear, practical guidance on how to assess conduct and culture for internal governance purposes, to report to regulators and to evidence success to stakeholders

in Financial Services Reporting on Behaviour to Conduct

Edition:Regulators 1 Date: 03/06/2021 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789667752 ISBN Ebook: 9781789667769 Pages: 448 Format (mm): 230x165 Product Category: Professional Subject: Banking

Culture

« Benefits from the author’s work with a variety of financial firms in conduct-regulated markets, his direct access to regulators, and a range of international contributing chapter authors

« Examines what behavioural regulators around the world really want using examples from the front line of conduct reporting « Explains the key features of well-designed conduct and culture reports, and how the practice of culture audit differs from conventional auditing « Addresses practitioner concerns that their current reporting and MI tools will not be able to meet as-yet unclear regulatory expectations

Author Information Dr Roger Miles researches behavioural risk and the impacts of conduct regulation. He is Head of Faculty for UK Finance’s Conduct and Culture Academy, an industry-wide initiative which gathers, establishes and disseminates ‘best practice’ in the measurement and regulatory reporting of human-factor risks. He counsels Boards on human risk factors and uncertainty, delivers bespoke risk workshops for leadership groups in a variety of sectors, and is regularly called upon to liaise with professional groups internationally. Audit

Table of Contents 1 A culture quest for ‘better behaviour 2 ‘How regulators’ ‘behavioural approach’ went global – with culture its latest focus 3 ‘The house is on fire - How regulators own research has pointed to ‘culture reset’ 4 What’s the big idea? (1)How conduct regulators use behavioural science 1 Interlude One: From poacher to gamekeeper to poacher… to scientist - A supervisor’s tale 2 What’s the big idea? (2)Regulators’ challenge to firms - framing ‘purposeful culture’ 3 A ‘behaviour-at-risk’ agenda emerges - Questioning purpose, lost trust and cultural coercion 4 The new mindset and language of cultureAssessing financial and nonfinancial conduct 5 Audit basics - How the practice of culture audit differs from conventional auditing 6 The new reportingmanagementinformation (MI) for culture Part 1 - Getting past the old MI 7 The new reporting Part 2 - Developing the frameworkfrom culture models to better questions and indicators 2 Interlude Two: Case example - Culture rating in a retail bank 3 Interventions and enforcements - How regulators have responded to a ‘culture crisis’ 4 Intelligence gathering versus surveillance - Tried and failed methods; putting the latest research tools to work 3 Interlude Three: A sector-wide group seeks culture ‘tells’ - (Observing indications of good and poor conduct) 4 Putting respected research tools to work, example 1 - Tools for Analyticstransformationcultural-Barrett 5 Putting respected research tools to work, example 2 - Using the CultureScope ‘combined analytic’ to deliver measurably better culture 6 What regulators really wantWrap-up and look ahead 7 Glossary 8 Recommended reading

28 Banking Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 An introduction to green finance 2 Green finance in our changing world 3 Building a sustainable financial system 4 Monitoring flows of finance and performanceenvironmental 5 Risk management 6 Retail, commercial and corporate banking 7 Green bonds and asset-backed securities 8 Central and development banks 9 Equity markets and investment funds 10 Insurance 11 FinTech in green finance 12 Mainstreaming green finance This book « Explains how green and sustainable finance principles can be applied in banking, investment and insurance « Covers risk and regulation in green finance, international market frameworks and standards, and the role of a range of financial institutions and markets « Explores the range of green finance products and services, including those offered by fintech organizations « Considers ethics and professionalism, and how the finance sector can mainstream green finance « Endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute as the core text for the benchmark Certificate in Green and Sustainable Finance

Green Sustainableand Finance Principles and Practice Edition:

Consideration is also given to the ethical dimensions of green and sustainable finance, including how professionals can promote market integrity and take active steps to avoid greenwashing. Endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute as the core text for the benchmark Certificate in Green and Sustainable Finance, this book is essential reading for finance professionals and students, and individuals working to embed sustainability in business, policy and regulation.

Product

Paperback:

Professional Subject: Banking

Author Information Simon Thompson is Chief Executive of the Chartered Banker Institute. He leads the UK’s Green Finance Education Charter initiative and is a former Vice President of the European Bank Training Network. Simon is a Fellow of the Chartered Banker Institute, a Member of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development and holds an MBA from the University of Edinburgh. 1 Date: 03/03/2021 Price: £49.99 ISBN 9781789664546 ISBN Ebook: 9781789664553 Pages: 480 Format (mm): 230x155 Category: Text/

Supplementary

MoreDescriptionthan120countries have committed to net zero targets by 2050, requiring systemic economic transitions on an unprecedented scale and with the finance sector playing a leading role. Green finance will power the transition, ensuring capital flows to the firms, investments, projects and technologies looking to create a sustainable, low-carbon world.

To achieve net zero, every professional financial decision must take climate change and broader sustainability factors into account. Green and Sustainable Finance provides a comprehensive guide to the application of common green and sustainable principles and practices in banking, investment and insurance to help finance professionals embed these in their daily activities and decision-making.

Focusing on the necessity of mainstreaming green and sustainable finance globally, this book includes a clear explanation of the science underpinning climate change. Green and Sustainable Finance covers a wide range of green finance products and services in retail, commercial and corporate banking, insurance, investment and fintech. It provides an overview of emerging regulation and international market frameworks and standards, particularly in relation to climate and environmental risk.

Author Information Helene Panzarino is a highly experienced fintech Programme Director, exited entrepreneur, educator and author. Her most recent role was MD of the global Rainmaking Colab fintech Programme, a world-first, postaccelerator programme for Series A+ fintechs and Tier 1 financial institutions. She is also an Associate Director of the LIBF Digital Banking Centre, the Lead Fellow and creator on a world-first fintech Pathway in a Masters in Tech Entrepreneurship Degree for UCL. She is a co-creator and lead delivery partner on the Imperial College Fintech Executive Education.

This book Provides advice for banking and finance professionals on the drivers and challenges of innovation, and the possibilities of collaboration and partnerships « Explores the emergence of global fintech hubs, including London, New York, Tel Aviv, the Gulf and Shenzhen, and how their specialisms distinguish them « Contains examples of companies leading in innovation and interviews with innovators and experts to capture multiple perspectives « Covers current technology trends in banking and finance such as AI, machine learning, blockchain and digital identity « Outlines the background and building blocks of innovation in financial services and the key factors which have shaped the industry such as mobile, cybersecurity and big data Description The finance industry is currently going through a digital revolution, with new and developing technology transforming the world of banking and financial services beyond recognition. Banks and financial institutions worldwide recognize the pressing need to innovate to avoid disruption or displacement by highly agile and often smaller fintech companies. Reinventing Banking and Finance is an essential guide for finance professionals to current trends in fintech, innovation frameworks, the challenges of outsourcing or embedding innovation, and how to effectively collaborate with other Beginningorganizations.with the history and background of how banking got to the era of fintech, the book provides a thorough overview of the global fintech ecosystem and the drivers behind innovation in technologies, business models and distribution channels. Examples of key institutions and interviews with innovators and experts shine a light on key financial innovation hubs in UK, US, China, Israel and more, and offer advice for institutions looking to choose the right market for their needs. Covering genuine innovations in AI, machine learning, blockchain and digital identity, Reinventing Banking and Finance offers expert insight into navigating the complex and multi-layered finance industry.

29 Banking Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 The History of Banking 2 The Digital Threat 3 The Shape of the Perfect Neobank 4 The Journey from Bricks and Mortar to Digital 5 The Fintech Hubs 6 The Fintech Tribes 7 London 8 The Gulf 9 Paris 10 New York City 11 Tel Aviv 12 Shenzhen 13 Final Thoughts 14 Further reading

Alessandro Hatami is the founder of advisory firm Pacemakers.io, specialising in digital transformation in financial services. He has been a practitioner of digital innovation in banking for over 15 years, holding senior executive roles at businesses such as PayPal, Lloyds Banking Group, PayPoint and GE Capital.

Reinventing Banking and Finance Frameworks to Navigate Global Fintech Innovation Edition: 1 Date: 03/11/2020 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789664096 ISBN Ebook: 9781789664102 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x158 Product Category: Professional Subject: Banking

EffectiveDescriptionnegotiations lead to sustainable partnerships, help both parties to achieve higher goals than they would alone and allow organizations to avoid the costly price of conflict. This book outlines a simple and powerful method of negotiating, either in person or virtually.

Author Information Melissa Davies is a negotiation expert, professional trainer and coach based in Geneva, Switzerland. She is the founder of negoservices Sàrl and has over 25 years’ experience in negotiating agreements and building lasting partnerships around the world. She leads workshops in negotiation skills and conflict management for businesses, universities, research institutes and not-forprofit organizations, and is a visiting lecturer at Geneva School of Business Administration, University of Applied Sciences Western Switzerland.

The HandbookNegotiationPractical Edition: 1 Date: 03/10/2021 Price: £24.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398601802 ISBN Ebook: 9781398601819 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Business & Management Skills

Preface - Why this book fills a market need 1 Introduction and mind-set 2 The five-step negotiation process 3 Prerequisites and positioning your goal 4 Step 1 - Contextual analysis 5 Step 2 - Preparing your goal and your roadmap 6 Step 3 - The encounter(s) 7 Step 4 - The offer 8 Step 5 - The implementation 9 A few words on gender and negotiation 10 Stand out as an excellent negotiator

Using a ‘solution-focused’ approach which centres around preferred outcomes rather than conflicts, and on questioning and listening to the other party rather than trying to convince or impose and making assumptions, this pragmatic book will help build your profile as an ethical and respected negotiator. From contextual analysis and goal preparation to the importance of communication and building an offer, it cuts through the theory and clearly outlines the skills needed to influence the outcome and implementation of any negotiation.

30 Business & Management Skills Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents

This book « Explains how to follow a tried and tested five-step negotiation process using a solution-focused approach, from contextual analysis and goal preparation to building an offer « Includes best practice case examples, checklists and tools that can be applied at once without too much theory « Covers the importance of verbal and non-verbal communication skills, offers advice on virtual negotiations and addresses outdated beliefs about gender and negotiation « Based on the author’s years of experience negotiating in different international settings across business, academia and non-governmental organizations « Explores how to develop the right attitude and approach to get results as an ethical and respected negotiator

The Practical Negotiation Handbook outlines a tried and tested five-step process for negotiating lasting agreements, with best practice case examples, checklists and tools. This thoroughly practical guide brings together over 25 years of the author’s experience negotiating in a variety of countries and contexts to give you the confidence to negotiate any kind of contract or agreement, large or small.

WhatDescriptiondoastronauts, Olympic champions, and Nobel laureates do differently that allows them to achieve at such a high level?

Using these four shared attributes as a guide, The Success Factor helps you reach your peak by applying the lessons of high achievers in your own life: identify your passion using a Passion Audit; learn how and where to find a mentor and how to build a mentoring team; develop your own community of practice; pursue your interests through informal learning; manage your time and energy.

The Success Factor features exclusive interviews with high achievers, including such people as Dr. Tony Fauci NIH/NIAID Institute Director; Dr Mike Brown, Nobel prize winner; Dr Peggy Whitson, Former NASA Chief Astronaut; Maxine Clark, founder and former CEO of Build-A-Bear Workshop; and Steve Kerr, eight time NBA Champion and head coach of the Golden State Warriors.

31 Business & Management Skills Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 Identifying Success 2 Objective versus Subjective Measures of Success 3 What is success? 4 Success is a Moving Target 2 Four Pillars of Optimizing Success 3 Tap into an Intrinsic Motivation 4 Respond to Challenges with Perseverance 5 Cultivate a Solid Foundation 6 Embrace Opportunities for Continuous Learning and Growth 3 Optimizing Your Success 4 Finding Your Passion 5 Finding a Mentor 6 Developing Your Mentoring Team 7 Finding Your People 8 Embracing Opportunities to Learn 9 Conclusion This book « Features interviews with high achievers including Nobel laureates, astronauts and Olympic champions (including such people as Dr. Tony Fauci NIH (NIAID) Institute Director; Dr. Mike Brown, Nobel prize winner; Dr. Peggy Whitson, Former Chief Astronaut, NASA; Maxine Clark, founder and former CEO of Build-A-Bear Workshop) « Outlines practices to help readers identify their passions, find mentors, develop a team of mentors, establish a community of practice and pursue informal learning « Online resources include a downloadable Passion audit, a goal audit worksheet and a mentoring team worksheet

High achievers share the same four attributes: intrinsic motivation, perseverance, strong foundation, constantly learning through informal means. The key to their success is that they do all four of these things at the same time. Based on research and in-person interviews with astronauts, Nobel Prize winners, and Olympic champions, The Success Factor outlines the approach that individuals aspiring to improve their performance can adopt.

The Success Factor Edition: 1 Date: 03/01/2022 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398602298 ISBN Ebook: 9781398602304 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 233x155 Product Category: Professional Subject: Business & Management Skills

The Success Factor comes with online resources that feature a downloadable Passion Audit worksheet, Mentoring Team worksheet, and Goal Audit worksheet. The book offers scripts for approaching potential mentors and a list of uncommon places to find a mentor, such as webinars, airports, and social media.

Author Information Ruth Gotian, based in New Rochelle, New York, is a leadership coach, keynote speaker, educator, and social scientist who researches the most successful people in order to learn about their mindsets and practices. She serves as the Chief Learning Officer and is Assistant Professor of Education in Anesthesiology at Weill Cornell Medicine in New York City, New York. She is the 2021 recipient of the Thinkers50 RADAR Award, making her the world’s #1 emerging management thinker. Her work regularly appears in Forbes, Psychology Today, Nature, Scientific American, Academic Medicine, and Harvard Business Review

Table of Contents

This book « Explores 50 of the most pervasive myths that all managers and aspiring managers should be able to recognize and relate to, from the entertaining to the downright damaging

About the Business Myths series...

The world of management is blighted by fads, fiction and falsehoods. In Myths of Management, Cary Cooper and Stefan Stern take you on an entertaining journey through the most famous myths surrounding the much-written about topic of management. They debunk false assumptions, inject truth into over-simplifications and tackle damaging habits head-on.

Author Information Stefan Stern writes for the Guardian and the FT, where he was the management columnist between 2006 and 2010. He is visiting professor in management practice at Cass Business School and is Director of the High Pay Centre. Sir Cary Cooper CBE is the 50th Anniversary Professor of Organizational Psychology and Health at the Alliance Manchester Business School, University of Manchester. He is President of the CIPD, President of the British Academy of Management and Editor-in-Chief of the Blackwell/Wiley Encyclopedia of Management Dispel the Misconceptions

« Is written by Professor Sir Cary Cooper (President of the CIPD and Professor at Manchester Business School) and Stefan Stern, management journalist and director of the High Pay Centre

Edition: 2 Date: 03/10/2022 Price: £9.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398607743 ISBN Ebook: 9781398607750 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 198x129 Product Category: General Subject: Business & Management Skills

« New to this edition: fully updated to bust new myths such as hybrid working is not going to work, extraverts are the vital ingredient to make a team perform, stars will always perform well wherever they are, entitled millennials are self-obsessed and frightened of hard work.

Introduction 1 Myth 1 - There is One Right Way to Lead or Manage 2 Myth 2 - It’s Tough at the Top 3 Myth 3 - Long Hours Will Lead to Success 4 Myth 4 - It’s Important Not to Show Vulnerability or Doubt 5 Myth 5 - It’s Lonely at the Top 6 Myth 6 - You Need to be the Smartest Person in the Room 7 Myth 7 - Hierarchy is Finished 8 Myth 8 - Consistency is Essential 9 Myth 9 - Only Hire People Who Will Fit In 10 Myth 10 - Leadership is More Important than Management 11 Myth 11 - You Have to Pay Top Dollar to Get the Right Person 12 Myth 12 - Annual Appraisals Help You PerformanceManage 13 Myth 13 - Information Must be Controlled and Limited 14 Myth 14 - … but Women Don’t Really Want Top Jobs 15 Myth 15 - Leaders are Born Not Made 16 Myth 16 - Your First 100 Days in a New Job are Make or Break 17 Myth 17 - You Have to Know Everything that is Going On 18 Myth 18 - Heroic Leaders Can Change Entire Organizations on their Own 19 Myth 19 - The Boss with the Best Strategy Wins 20 Myth 20 - It is Not Possible to Work Flexibly in Senior Roles 21 Myth 21 - Pay Must be Kept Confidential 22 Myth 22 - Psychology is Psychobabble and there’s No Need or Place for it 23 Myth 23 - The Robots are Coming to Take Your Job 24 Myth 24 - Leadership Must Be Transformational 25 Myth 25 - Conformity Leads to Success 26 Myth 26 - Feelings are Soft and for Losers 27 Myth 27 - Keep Your Distance if You Want Respect 28 Myth 28 - Be Yourself -- It’s All About Authenticity 29 Myth 29 - Date of Birth is Destiny 30 Myth 30 - People are Motivated by Money 31 Myth 31 - Fear Works and ‘Engagement’ is Unnecessary 32 Myth 32 - The Business Case Will Always Prove Persuasive 33 Myth 33 - There’s Nothing Wrong with the Business, there’s just a Few Rotten Apples 34 Myth 34 - We Have Woken Up to the Problems Caused by Prejudice 35 Myth 35 - All the Power Resides at the Top 36 Myth 36 - People Will Learn if you Explain Things to them Clearly 37 Myth 37 - You Must Keep Up with all the New Management Ideas and Give Them a Try 38 Myth 38 - You’ve Got to Talk Like a Real, Serious, Grown-Up Business Person. Learn the Jargon 39 Myth 39 - You Can’t Manage People if You Can’t See Them 40 Myth 40 - Who Needs Employees Anyway? Get With the Gig Economy 41 Myth 41 - People Hate Change 42 Big Data Will Fix Everything 43 Myth 43 - A Cool Office Will Make Everybody More Creative 44 Myth 44 - There are Only 44 Things to Get Wrong

IsDescriptionit really true that working longer hours makes you more successful? Are millennials selfobsessed and frightened of hard graft? Do you really need to hide your emotions in order to gain respect as a manager? Does higher pay really always lead to higher performance?

Myths Managementof

and Become an Influential Manager

Whether cheesy, naïve or even destructive, management myths could be holding you back and stifling your team’s potential. Myths of Management is the guide you need to become an enlightened manager.

The Business Myths series tackles the falsehoods that pervade the business world. From leadership and management to social media and the workplace, these accessible books overturn out-of-date assumptions, skewer stereotypes and put oft-repeated slogans to the myth-busting test. Both entertaining and rigorously researched, these books will equip you with the insight and no-nonsense wisdom you need to succeed.

32 Business & Management Skills Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

« Is part of the Business Myths series, which tackle some of the biggest falsehoods, skewed stereotypes and damaging misconceptions that can disrupt businesses today

Filled with international examples to provide a global perspective, this fully updated 4th edition of Research Methods in Human Resource Management balances theoretical frameworks and practical guidance. Fully updated throughout, this edition now includes increased discussion of methodological issues, more real-life examples and international case studies and best practice sample literature reviews and write-ups. ‘Review and Reflect’ sections at the end of each chapter help to consolidate learning and explain how it can aid professional development. This book is fully mapped to the CIPD Level 7 Advanced module on Investigating a Business Issue from an HR Perspective, and multiplechoice questions and a glossary of terms help students understand the key concepts and use the terminology confidently. Online supporting resources for lecturers include an instructor’s manual and lecture slides and there are annotated web links, further reading and new reflective questions for students.

Author Information Valerie Anderson, Chartered MCIPD, is Reader in HRD at University of Portsmouth. She gained extensive HRM and HRD management and consultancy experience in a range of different public and private sector organizations before moving to a career in higher education. Rita Fontinha is a Lecturer of International Business and Strategy specialising in Strategic and International Human Resource Management at Henley Business School, University of Reading. Fiona Robson, Academic FCIPD is Director of Excellence in Learning & Teaching and Reader in Human Resource Management at Newcastle University Business School.

33 HR Analytics Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Investigating and researching HR issues 2 First stages towards an HR project 3 Finding and reviewing HR literature and information sources 4 Ethics, standardsprofessionalism,andHRresearch 5 Planning the research process 6 Finding and using documents and organisational evidence 7 Collecting and recording qualitative data 8 Analysing qualitative data 9 Collecting and recording quantitative data 10 Analysing quantitative data 11 Writing up your project and making recommendations 12 Making an impact – the relationship between research and practice

Research Methods in Human ManagementResource

Investigating a Business Issue Edition: 4 Date: 03/12/2019 Price: £47.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749483876 ISBN Ebook: 9780749483883 Pages: 496 Format (mm): 250x190 Product Category: Textbook Subject: HR Analytics

This book « Provides detailed guidance through each stage of an HRM business project as well as collecting and interpreting both qualitative and quantitative data New to this edition: international case studies, increased discussion of methodological issues, best practice sample literature reviews and real-life examples « Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides and annotated web links Description Research Methods in Human Resource Management is a key resource for anyone undertaking a research report or dissertation. It covers the planning and execution of HRM research projects, from investigating and researching HR issues to designing and implementing research and then evaluating and reviewing the results.

Business Research Enjoy Creating, Developing and Writing Your Business Project Edition: 1 Date: 03/11/2013 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749468958 ISBN Ebook: 9780749468965 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Business Research

Elayne Coakes has taught business research methods at the University of Westminster for many years. Her consultancy experience in large and small enterprises has provided Elayne with extensive applied business experience.

Business Research is essential reading for students who are studying for one or more modules in research methods for a postgraduate qualification in business and management; students who have a methodological component to one of their modules (eg a module in organizational behaviour); and students who have to conduct an investigation in a business and management field, for a dissertation or project report, and need guidance and assistance on how to approach, conduct and report every aspect of their project.

34 Business Research Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 Planning your project 1 The nature of business research 2 Methodology and methods 2 ‘Doing’ your project 3 The project proposal 4 Collecting quantitative data 5 Collecting qualitative data through interviews 6 Collecting data as an ethnographer 7 Case study research 8 Collecting data: less common methods 9 Ensuring data saturation 3 Reporting your findings 4 Analysing quantitative data 5 Analysing qualitative data 4 Writing your report 5 Discussing project findings 6 Conclusion to your report 7 Reference lists 8 Writing your abstract 9 Conclusion This book « Provides a clear, step-by-step narrative that links the student’s research to their aims of getting into their preferred organizations « Makes students comfortable and confident in selecting research methods to learn about organizations « Helps students to develop strong arguments and convincing stories that will convince examiners of their knowledge Description

Knowledge of business research is necessary for any business student, as all postgraduate business programmes and business-related disciplines require it. Business Research is a groundbreaking book for student researchers who need to conceive, conduct and complete a new research project for the first time. It concentrates on the business organization and gives invaluable practical advice on going out into the field and conducting interviews, researching problems and learning about organizations. Through its conversational, accessible style and its adoption of a student’s perspective, this book will make the process of learning about research enjoyable and the resulting research project outstanding.

Author Information Wilson Ng leads and delivers business research methods modules for undergraduate and postgraduate students at the University of Roehampton. He is a Visiting Professor at two European universities: UNICA (Università degli studi di Cagliari) in Italy and BEM (Bordeaux Management School) in France. Prior to his academic career, Wilson was a senior investment banker with NM Rothschild in London and Singapore.

Deborah

ISBN Paperback:

This Helps students apply research methods to their own projects Presents complex principles in a user-friendly Online resources: instructor’s manual with additional activities and supporting handouts, lecture slides, figures and tables from the text and web links, templates, quizzes, activities, examples of sample questionnaire results for Organizations need research, and managers have to be able to commission, judge and use others’ research as well as conduct research themselves to inform business decisions. Business Research Methods helps you understand the challenges of carrying out worthwhile research into significant issues and develop a wide range of research-related professional skills. Guiding you through the process of selecting, carrying out and reporting on a successful research project, it breaks down the research process, from exploring the literature and crafting a research proposal to practical research management and addressing the transferable skills of project management and communication.

Pages:

students Description

book «

Subject: Business Research

way «

Product

Author Information

35 Business Research Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 From First Ideas to Possible Topics 2 Practical Business ResearchAn Overview 3 The Complexities of Business Research 4 The Investigative Process 5 Stakeholders, Power and Ethics 6 Considering Possible Topics 2 Towards a Research Proposal 3 Exploring the Literature 4 Writing A Literature Review 5 Research Questions and Purposes 6 Data, Evidence and Sampling 7 Choosing a Research Method 8 Crafting a Research Proposal 3 Data Collection 4 Producing a Research Project from Secondary Data 5 Case Study Research 6 Action-Oriented Research and Action Research 7 Questionnaires 8 Interviews 9 Focus Groups and Workshops 4 Data Analysis 5 Grounded Theory 6 Content Analysis 7 Representing Quantitative Data 8 Inferential Statistical Analysis 9 Drawing Valid Conclusions 5 Essential Research Skills 6 Managing the Project 7 Managing Client Relationships 8 Learning and Reflection 9 Writing about Research

the Open

practice and

Business Research Methods places research firmly in the real world, exploring why research is done and how to ensure that projects are meaningful for organizations. Examples and case studies, including examples of students’ projects, give learners with little or no work experience a meaningful context in which to relate their own projects. Online supporting resources for lecturers include an instructor’s manual with additional activities and supporting handouts, lecture slides and figures and tables from the text. Resources for students include web links, templates, quizzes, activities, examples of practice and sample questionnaire results for students. Sheila Cameron is a senior lecturer at the Open University Business School (OUBS), UK. Price is a lecturer in Management at University Business School (OUBS), UK. Approach Edition: 1 Date: 03/11/2009 Price: £47.99 9781843982289 Ebook: 9781843983620 656 Format (mm): 265x195 Category: Textbook

Business Research Methods A Practical

ISBN

Introduction 1 What you need to know before you start analysing data Analysing univariate data Analysing bivariate data Analysing multivariate data with dependency Analysing multivariate data for interdependency

John Buglear emphasizes the importance of working back from results rather than working out results. He starts the book with basic concepts that get increasingly more complex, from simple diagrams to multivariate methods, as well as using simple metaphors to aid understanding. The book has a two-level approach, with sections headed ‘The essentials’ and ‘Tell me more’ to support learning at all Alevels.rare

Author Information John Buglear is Head of the Division of Management at Nottingham Business School. He teaches quantitative methods and basic accounting on undergraduate and postgraduate programmes. He has lectured in statistics, operational research and research methods on postgraduate international programmes: Azerbaijan (in collaboration with BP Exploration); the Czech Republic (in collaboration with PricewaterhouseCoopers) and Uzbekistan.

36 Business Research Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents

Practical Statistics is an introduction and reference guide for those studying business and management at postgraduate level, MBA students and professionals. It gives the reader a solid understanding of statistics without being too simple or mind-numbingly complex. It turns statistics, often perceived as being difficult and pointless, into something approachable and sensible.

book on business statistics that students and professionals can really understand, Practical Statistics supports active learning with use of applications and case studies, invaluable online learning materials and fully worked solutions to questions in the review section.

This book « Enables readers and students to translate statistical data into comprehensive information « Supports readers at all levels of knowledge and experience through a two-level approach with ‘The essentials’ and ‘Tell me more’ sections « Encourages active distance and independent learners through case studies and simple explanations Description

Practical Statistics A Handbook for Business Projects Edition: 1 Date: 03/11/2013 Price: £24.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749468460 ISBN Ebook: 9780749468477 Pages: 184 Format (mm): 244x172 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Business Research

The business analyst role can cover a wide range of responsibilities, including the elicitation and documenting of business requirements, upfront strategic work, design and implementation phases. Typical difficulties faced by analysts include stakeholders who disagree or don’t know their requirements, handling estimates and project deadlines that conflict, and what to do if all the requirements are top priority. The Business Analysis Handbook offers practical solutions to these and other common problems which arise when uncovering requirements or conducting business analysis.

Getting requirements right is difficult; this book offers guidance on delivering the right project results, avoiding extra cost and work, and increasing the benefits to the organization. The Business Analysis Handbook provides an understanding of the analyst role and the soft skills required, and outlines industry standard tools and techniques with guidelines on their use to suit the most appropriate situations. Covering numerous techniques such as Business Process Model and Notation (BPMN), use cases and user stories, this essential guide also includes standard templates to save time and ensure nothing important is missed.

Author Information Helen Winter has over 20 years’ Business Analysis experience, having worked as a consultant on large-scale transformation programmes within the financial services, regulation, insurance and utilities sectors. She has the BCS International Diploma in Business Analysis and is a BCS certified Chartered IT Professional. She is an active volunteer for IIBA (International Institute of Business Analysis) and the founder of Business Bullet, an online magazine promoting business analysis and providing guidance for professionals. Finance, Risk, Information Edition:Management 1 Date: 03/09/2019 Price: £31.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749497064 ISBN Ebook: 9780749497057 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x157 Product Category: Professional Subject: Business Research

The AnalysisBusinessHandbook Business,

37 Business Research Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Preparation for business analysis 2 Effective working relationships 3 Business context and vision 4 Business context and business processes 5 Business understandingcontext/requirements 6 System requirementscontext/understanding 7 Managing requirements 8 Enterprise business analysis 9 Templates This book « Explores common problems which occur when conducting business analysis and how to handle them « Covers industry standard tools, techniques and methodologies, and explains which situations to use them in « Includes standard templates of key documents such as the business requirements document, the functional requirements document, the options paper and the business solution document « Offers advice on how to engage stakeholders, communicate effectively and handle conflict FINALIST:DescriptionBusiness Book Awards 2020 - Specialist Book Category FINALIST: PMI UK National Project Awards 2019 - Project Management Literature Category

Author Information Gary Straw has delivered project management modules on MBA and Master’s and management development schemes for business schools in the UK and Eastern Europe, including Aberystwyth School of Management and Business, The Management Centre at Bangor University and Kingston Business School. He has also delivered ILM and CMI project management courses. His professional experience and insights into project management have developed through working within a number of private- and public-sector organizations, delivering projects in a range of market sectors.

Online supporting resources include lecture slides and an instructor’s manual.

ProjectUnderstandingManagement

With a host of features to encourage reflection and reinforce learning, it is the ideal complement for independent or classroom study on a range of business courses.

Understanding Project Management helps managers understand project management, develop perspectives in application, and, through reflection, enables them to develop a project management capability, at an individual, organization or project level. The content throughout is guided by practice, making this an essential read for anyone wishing to make a success of the project management role.

Understanding Project Management takes an applied approach to the study of project management, carefully balancing reflective practice and methodology necessary for successful deployment of tools and techniques in the real world. Including plenty of practical examples as well as contemporary realworld case studies, it takes a unique approach to the study of project management with an emphasis on international aspects and dilemmas that are increasingly common in the contemporary world.

Skills and Insights for Successful Project Delivery Edition: 1 Date: 03/05/2015 Price: £32.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749470555 ISBN Ebook: 9780749470562 Pages: 328 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Project Management

38 Project Management Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Projects in an ideal world 1 An introduction to projects and project management 2 Projects at the conceptual phase 3 Planning within projects 2 Projects in a real world 3 After the planning: delivering projects 4 Managing to completion 5 Reviewing and learning in projects 3 Projects in a challenging world 4 Projects – a way of thinking 5 Within and outside projects 6 A global stage 7 Managing and leading in project environments 4 Developing a capability 5 Managing and leading project enviornments 6 A spectrum of project management roles 7 Develop the capability This book « Improves managers’ analytical skills and ability to recognise and manage projects « Supports independent and distance learners with online resources, activities and exercises similar to those on MBA courses « Fits into a range of business courses including MBAs and executive education schemes, allowing students to apply their practical experience in the workplace to their studies « Encourages managers’ understanding of specific contextual challenges that are increasingly common in the contemporary world of projects « Online resources: lecture slides and instructor’s manual Description

Now in its second edition, The Power of Project Leadership contains new interviews with successful project leaders and discusses current topics such as the psychology behind high performing teams, coaching, facilitation and conflict resolution, collaborative planning and risk management. It outlines the capabilities, attitudes and behaviours needed to become a confident, driven and focused project leader, including leading with vision, continuously improving, empowering teams, building trust with stakeholders, and using powerful techniques. With examples of the most fundamental causes of project failure and how to avoid them, The Power of Project Leadership shows how to inspire teams, add real value and deliver outstanding projects.

39 Project Management Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 The world is changing and so must you 2 Your hidden drivers 3 The 7 keys to project leadership 1 Key #1 – Be authentic 2 Key #2 – Lead with vision 3 Key #3 – Improve and innovate 4 Key #4 – Empower the team 5 Key #5 – Get close to your stakeholders 6 Key #6 – Establish a solid foundation 7 Key #7 – Work with intent 4 Making the transitionThishappenbook « Explains how to generate results for the project and client while being recognized in the process « Explores how leaders can foster collaboration, gain buy-in from stakeholders, and motivate a team « Includes interviews from dozens of leading experts from a variety of organizations, including Expedia, British Gas, Standard Bank, Verizon Enterprise Solutions, and the UK Government « New to this edition: more interviews with successful project leaders and new coverage of topics such as overcoming dysfunctional team behaviour, facilitation and conflict resolution, and collaborative planning WINNER:Description PMI UK National Project Awards

2019 - Project Management Literature Category Projects and work environments are becoming increasingly complex, with more stakeholders, dispersed teams and an unprecedented rate of technological change. In order to adapt to this complexity and find new opportunities to innovate and build a high performing team, project managers must shift their mindset to one of project leadership. The Power of Project Leadership explains how to generate positive results for projects and clients while growing as a leader and empowering the team to fully contribute.

Author Information Susanne Madsen is an internationally recognized project leadership coach, trainer and consultant. Prior to setting up her own business, she worked for almost 20 years in the corporate sector leading high-profile programmes for major global corporations. She is a fully qualified corporate and executive coach accredited by DISC, and a regular contributor to the Association for Project Management (APM). She is a frequent speaker at organizations and leading business schools and is also the co-founder of The Project Leadership Institute, which is dedicated to building authentic project leaders.

Date: 03/08/2019 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749493240 ISBN Ebook: 9780749493257 Pages: 336 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Professional Subject: Project Management

The Power of Project Leadership Business, Finance, Risk, Information Edition:Management 2

Global Business Ethics Responsible Decision Making in an International Context

Edition: 1 Date: 03/11/2015 Price: £36.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473952 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473969 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 241x171 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Corporate Governance, Ethics & CSR

Online supporting resources for this book include instructor’s manual, lecture slides and appendices.

Corporate social responsibility, sustainability and acting ethically are all accepted business aims, but their meaning and implementation in a global context is far less clear-cut. Global Business Ethics cuts through the confusion to provide a coherent basis for ethical decision-making within the complications of the international business landscape.

Underpinned by theory and including worked-through examples of ethical dilemmas and their solutions, this textbook will guide the reader beyond theory to real-world business decisions. Practical tools such as decision trees and suggested principles to apply in dilemma situations give readers the skills and confidence to tackle the ethical challenges they face. Global Business Ethics offers a unique working code of ethics provided as a model with guidance to readers for adaptation and implementation. Case studies include: Walmart, Hershey’s, Citibank, Ford, Nike, Johnson & Johnson, Harley-Davidson, The Body Shop and Procter and Gamble.

A chapter on the legal aspects of ethics provides guidance on the complex relationship between law and ethics in international business. The final part takes an in-depth look at the practical application of ethics in business life. Covering all the major theories of ethics, including an examination of the role of quantification of ethics, Global Business Ethics demonstrates how their principles can be applied to inform better business decisions.

40 Corporate Governance, Ethics & CSR Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 THE CULTURALRESEARCHJUSTIFICATIONNECESSITY,ANDINTOCROSSBUSINESSETHICS 1 Background to ethics 2 Justification for ethics 3 Cross-cultural issues in business ethics 4 Organizational factors in business ethics 5 Individual factors in business ethics 2 THEORETICAL ISSUES IN BUSINESS ETHICS 3 Theoretical approaches 4 Legal aspects of ethics 3 SOLVING PROBLEMS 4 Ethical gradualism, culture, quantification and codes 5 Investigating ethical breaches 6 International standards and first principles 7 Ethical codes: ready reference guide (glossary of international codes related to ethics) This book « Gives readers the knowledge and confidence to make sound ethical decisions in all business activities « Provides easily implementable practical guidance in the form of decision-making trees and a model organizational ethics code « Features detailed analysis of international ethical issues such as the conflict between Sharia law and Western principles « Supports the student market with case studies and worked examples of dilemma-solving « Online Resources: Instructor’s manual, lecture slides and appendices Description

Author Information Ronald D Francis is Professor Emeritus in Ethics and Governance at Victoria University, Melbourne. His experiences in ethics extends over decades, and includes a period as Chairman of a national ethics committee, and as a member of a psychologists’ registration board, as well as ten years on a research ethics committee. As a consultant, he has worked with corporations and universities to develop ethics codes and deliver practical business ethics training. Guy Murfey is a psychologist and lawyer, recently retired as the National Practice manager of the Australian Tax Office’s (ATO) Legal Services Branch, where he was responsible for the day to day running of litigation, ensuring that the highest ethical standards of practice were adhered to.

So why isn’t compliance working? The Business Guide to Effective Compliance and Ethics examines how rules-based, tick-box, defensible compliance continues to fail, and lays out a new approach for organizations seeking to flourish and succeed.

Author Information Andrew Hayward is a lawyer with more than a dozen years’ experience of compliance roles across sectors. Having previously worked for AstraZeneca and Balfour Beatty, he is now Head of Compliance and Ethics at Subsea 7, an engineering, construction and services contractor to the offshore energy industry. He worked with the British Standards Institute to develop the first anti-bribery standard (BS10500) and was part of the UK delegation on the development of the International AntiBribery Standard (BS ISO 37001:2016).

Tony Osborn is an award-winning writer, creative consultant and content developer. He has worked with leading global corporations to help them find and tell their stories and connect with stakeholders. He helped shape and write Serco’s online and printed Code of Conduct, and, with Andrew Hayward, the award-winning Balfour Beatty Code of Conduct. Business, Finance, Risk, Information

Written for any organization and businesses, this book provides clear, thorough and practical guidance for practitioners and decision-makers. It explains in layman’s terms the skills, tools and mindset needed to develop and deliver a best practice compliance and ethics programme - one that meets the requirements made by law, stakeholders and society, and protects your organization from risk of fines, penalties and reputational damage. But this is also a book for all those interested in how to build employee engagement and motivation. The Business Guide to Effective Compliance and Ethics demonstrates the value - including competitive advantage, career satisfaction, employee and customer loyalty, and brand enhancement - that a truly effective compliance and ethics programme can bring, when it works hand in hand with a values-based culture of shared ownership.

This book « Discusses compliance in broader terms than other books in the market, considering social, psychological, global and cultural factors in order to better understand how to collaborate, communicate and engage others in the organization Provides precision, but also allows non-specialist readers to access the information provided, including expertise on the typical traps to be aware of, policy and process and how to develop an ethics and compliance strategy Provides an ideal self-development toolkit that readers can access on a day-to-day basis, offering a clear, simple route to quickly find and apply expertise

The EthicsComplianceGuideBusinesstoEffectiveand

« Gives professionals clear guidance to key issues, using accessible language and cutting through jargon to define ethics and compliance and offer practical advice and ideas

Edition:Management 1 Date: 03/08/2019 Price: £36.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482978 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482985 Pages: 376 Format (mm): 234x157 Product Category: Professional Subject: Corporate Governance, Ethics & CSR

41 Corporate Governance, Ethics & CSR Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Why compliance isn’t working 2 The meaning, origins and role of compliance and ethics 3 Barriers to success 4 Looking for answers 5 The anatomy of a compliance and ethics programme 6 Top-level commitment 7 Risk assessment and due diligence 8 Code of conduct and policies 9 Communication, education and training 10 Whistle-blowing hotline and speak-up culture 11 Procedures and controls 12 Investigations, remediation and enforcement 13 Assurance and continuous improvement 14 Implementation – The compliance and ethics function – and everyone else

« Uses storytelling and scenarios to help readers apply theory to real-life situations, bringing issues to life in the human, social and political contexts relevant to the workplace Description

Across the world, organizations continue to be damaged and brought down by systemic noncompliance or the misdeeds of a few, and newspapers abound with examples of corporate and NGO scandals and crimes. This is despite the increasing ethical demands stakeholders are making of business, the exposing power of social media, the proliferating requirements of compliance laws and regulations, and the burgeoning numbers of policies, procedures and compliance officers that have been put in place in response.

Jacques de Swart is Professor of Applied Mathematics at Nyenrode Business University and partner within PwC, where he is responsible for the Data Analytics Group. Myrthe van der Plas is a GARP certified Financial Risk Manager. She works within the Data Analytics Group of PwC and also teaches courses on Strategic Decision Making at several universities.

Preface Working ResponsibilityTowardsinBusiness and Society The Responsible Business Simulator at the Heart of the Decision-Making Process Shared Value as a Framework for Shaping the Strategy Innovation and Sustainability as a Catalyst for Responsible Growth Stakeholder Management and Interactivity in the DecisionMaking Process Strategic Decision Making based on Data and Dialogue via the Responsible Business Simulator Using the Responsible Business Simulator Reducing Greenhouse Gas Emissions Putting Roof Renovation in a Strategic Context Choosing between Various Waste Collection Systems Creating a Healthy and Productive EnvironmentWorking Quantifying the Contribution of Sports Responding to the Refugee Influx in Europe Attracting Investment at a Social Enterprise 15 Conclusion

Responsible Business Making Strategic Decisions to Benefit People, the Planet and Profits Edition: 1 Date: 03/06/2018 Price: £32.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480608 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480615 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Corporate Governance, Ethics & CSR

42 Corporate Governance, Ethics & CSR Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents

Responsible Business will enable business leaders to answer questions including: What values should be attached to financial and non-financial aspects of business decisions? How can these values be translated into concrete manageable actions? Which decisions best suit the strategic goals of the organization? Readers will have access to the business simulator tool which removes the complexity, ambiguity and stress of business decisions to allow leaders to manage the competing priorities in their organization and confidently make the best investment decisions for their business. With diverse case studies from organizations who have benefited from this approach, this book is essential reading for everyone needing to evaluate their investment decisions.

This book « Highlights the added value to organizations of incorporating triple P (People, Planet and Profits) considerations into investment decisions Features case studies from private and public sector, not-for-profit and social enterprise organizations who have benefited from this approach including the Ellen MacArthur Foundation « Includes access to a ready-made business simulator tool for evaluating investment decisions Description Until recently, profit has been the driving force for most business decisions. However, business leaders must now look more widely at their actions to assess the impact of these on people both inside and outside the organization as well as the environment. Responsible Business provides a seven step framework that eliminates internal bias and can be used to make decisions that increase profits, benefit staff and protect the environment as a whole. This means that personal values, ethics and morals can be aligned with business goals and overall company strategy.

Author Information Annemieke Roobeek is Professor of Strategy and Transformation Management at Nyenrode Business Universiteit (Netherlands). She was previously Professor of Technology and Economics at Nyenrode and Professor of Complex Issues in strategy and policy at the University of Amsterdam.

Author Information Shaofeng Liu is Professor of Operations Management and Decision Making at Plymouth Business School, University of Plymouth, UK. She teaches a Knowledge Management module every year to postgraduate students across several courses in the Faculty of Business. She is Senior Editor for Cogent Business & Management and Associate Editor for the International Journal of Decision Support System Technology and has published over 150 research papers in peer-reviewed books, journals and conference proceedings.

ManagementKnowledge

This book « Is written specifically for business and management courses, focusing on issues such as how knowledge management can be integrated with the business decision making process

« Covers the most advanced IT and information systems technologies and cutting-edge research on topics such as boundary spanning « Includes real world case studies, role play scenarios, and “think back” and “critique discussion” questions to encourage reflective learning and critical thinking

As knowledge economies become increasingly important around the world, it is essential that organizations are able to transform their knowledge into a competitive advantage. This textbook offers an interdisciplinary approach to knowledge management written specifically for postgraduate students in business and management schools. Knowledge Management presents classic and advanced concepts, models and frameworks using a clear logical structure, which covers building knowledge competence, the knowledge lifecycle, and integration of knowledge management with business decision making. An overall framework illustrates links between chapters and ensures readers can gain a body of actionable knowledge rather than learning isolated, uncontextualized topics.

Based on cutting-edge research findings and covering the most advanced IT and IS technologies, this book emphasises the need for knowledge management to span boundaries across organizations, supply chains and partnerships, rather than being limited to individual learning and sharing within businesses. Knowledge Management is international in scope and includes real world case studies and role play scenarios to show how theories are applied in practice, and “think back” and “critique discussion” questions to encourage reflective learning and critical thinking. This indispensable text provides a dynamic picture of the evolution of knowledge management and demonstrates its full potential to enable better business decisions. Accompanying online resources include PowerPoint slides for lecturers and exercise questions for students.

43 Information, Knowledge & Data Management Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Knowledge management –Key concepts and models 1 Introduction to knowledge management 2 Tacit and explicit knowledge 3 Knowledge management process and lifecycle models 2 Building competenceknowledgeinorganizations 3 Organizational learning 4 The learning organization 5 Organizational culture for knowledge sharing and learning 3 Crossing boundariesknowledge 4 Communities of practice 5 Knowledge boundaries and mechanismsboundary-spanning 6 Knowledge networks 7 ICT-enabled managementknowledge-Internet of Things and big data analytics 4 Knowledge support for business decision making 5 The business decision context 6 Human requirementsprocessesdecision-makingandknowledge 7 Knowledge-based decision support systems

« Takes an international approach to knowledge management, for example comparing models from USA, UK and Japan « Online resources: PowerPoint lecture slides and exercise questions for students

Description

An Interdisciplinary Approach for Business Decisions Edition: 1 Date: 03/01/2020 Price: £34.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749494834 ISBN Ebook: 9780749496876 Pages: 384 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

This book « Guides the reader through the essential steps of aligning knowledge management with organizational priorities to deliver long-term benefits « Covers best practice requirements from the first internationally recognised standard for knowledge management, ISO 30401:2018 « Provides practical checklists, guidelines and process templates to help with implementation « Includes case studies from a variety of organizations, such as Mars, Huawei and the Singapore Youth Olympics « New to this edition: clear guidance on ISO 30401:2018, new content on the impact of AI and data analytics, and updated case studies

CILIP’s Knowledge and Information Management Award 2019 - Information Resources Print TheCategorywayan organization manages and disseminates its knowledge is key to informed business decision-making, effectiveness and competitive edge. The Knowledge Manager’s Handbook takes you step by step through the processes needed to define and embed an effective knowledge management framework within an organization.

Author Information Dr Nick Milton is a director and co-founder of Knoco Ltd, an international knowledge management consultancy. He previously worked at BP, coordinating the BP Knowledge Management Community of Practice, and was a member of the working group for the development of ISO 30401:2018. Patrick Lambe is a founding partner of Straits Knowledge, a global consulting and research firm specializing in knowledge, learning and innovation. He is a Visiting Professor in knowledge management at Bangkok University, President of the International Society for Knowledge Development Singapore chapter and an editorial board member of the Journal of Knowledge Management. Business, Finance, Risk, Information Edition:Management 2 Date: 03/10/2019 Price: £41.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749484606 ISBN Ebook: 9780749484613 Pages: 448 Format (mm): 233x157 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

44 Information, Knowledge & Data Management Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Orientation to knowledge implementationmanagement 1 What is management?knowledge 2 The stages of implementationKM 3 Barriers and pitfalls 2 Preparation and resources 3 Knowledge management strategy 4 The role, skills and characteristics of the knowledge management leader 5 The KM team members 6 The role of managementsenior 7 Budget and timescale 8 Aims and objectives for the KM programmeimplementation 9 Finding partners to help you 3 Assessment and planning 4 Conducting the knowledge resources audit 5 The knowledge management framework 6 The knowledge discussion elements of the KM framework 7 The knowledge capture and documentation elements of the KM framework 8 The knowledge synthesis elements of the KM framework 9 The knowledge-finding and re-use elements of the KM framework 10 Knowledge organization 11 Influencing the stakeholders 12 Culture, communications and change 13 Preparing the implementationKMplan 4 The implementation activity 5 Building the KM champion network 6 Trials and pilots 7 Roll-out, embedding and governance 8 Setting up the KM metrics and reporting system 9 Dealing with bumps in the road 10 Transition to the operational team 5 Deepening and extending your KM programme 6 Working with external frameworks and standards 7 Working externally 8 Knowledge management and digital transformation 6 Case histories 7 Implementing KM at Mars 8 NASA – emergence, evolution and resilience of a KM programme 9 Using the ISO KM standard 30401:2018 to sense-check KM at Petroleum Development Oman 10 KM implementation in a global oil and gas company 11 KM implementation at Huawei 12 KM implementation at the Singapore Youth Olympics 13 Implementing and sustaining KM in the Public Works Department Malaysia 14 Summary 15 Glossary 16 Index

WINNER:Description

This second edition now includes clear guidance on the best practice requirements from the first ever internationally recognised standard for knowledge management, ISO 30401:2018, as well as content on the impact of AI and data analytics. Nick Milton and Patrick Lambe work through each stage of creating and implementing a knowledge management framework for an organization’s specific needs, based around the four essential aspects of knowledge management: people, processes, technologies and governance. With updated international case studies from organizations of all sizes and sectors, along with user-friendly templates and checklists to help implement effective knowledge management procedures, The Knowledge Manager’s Handbook is the end-to-end guide to making a sustainable change in the knowledge management culture.

The Manager’sKnowledgeHandbook

Steve Watkins is Executive Director at GRC International Group plc, chair of the UK ISO/IEC 27001 User Group and contracted technical assessor for UKAS. He is a member of the international technical committee responsible for the ISO 27000 family of standards, and chairs the UK National Standards Body’s technical committee IST/33 (information security, cyber security and privacy protection) that mirrors it.

45 Information, Knowledge & Data Management Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Why is information security necessary? 2 The UK combined code, the FRC risk guidance and Sarbanes–Oxley 3 ISO27001 4 Organizing information security 5 Information security policy and scope 6 The risk assessment and Statement of Applicability 7 Mobile devices 8 Human resources security 9 Asset management 10 Media handling 11 Access control 12 User access management 13 System and application access control 14 Cryptography 15 Physical and environmental security 16 Equipment security 17 Operations security 18 Controls against malicious software (malware) 19 Communications management 20 Exchanges of information 21 System maintenancedevelopmentacquisition,and 22 Development and support processes 23 Supplier relationships 24 Monitoring and information security incident management 25 Business and information security managementcontinuity 26 Compliance 27 The ISO27001 audit

Author Information Alan Calder is Group CEO of GRC International Group plc, the AIM-listed company that owns IT Governance Ltd.. He led the world’s first successful implementation of BS 7799 (now ISO 27001) and was involved in developing a wide range of information security management training courses, accredited by the International Board for IT Governance Qualifications (IBITGQ).

IT Governance

Faced with the compliance requirements of increasingly punitive information and privacy-related regulation, as well as the proliferation of complex threats to information security, there is an urgent need for organizations to adopt IT governance best practice. IT Governance is a key international resource for managers in organizations of all sizes and across industries, and deals with the strategic and operational aspects of information security.

An International Guide to Data Security and ISO 27001/ISO 27002 Edition: 7 Date: 03/10/2019 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749496951 ISBN Ebook: 9780749496968 Pages: 408 Format (mm): 233x157 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

Now in its seventh edition, the bestselling IT Governance provides guidance for companies looking to protect and enhance their information security management systems (ISMS) and protect themselves against cyber threats. The new edition covers changes in global regulation, particularly GDPR, and updates to standards in the ISO/IEC 27000 family, BS 7799-3:2017 (information security risk management) plus the latest standards on auditing. It also includes advice on the development and implementation of an ISMS that will meet the ISO 27001 specification and how sector-specific standards can and should be factored in. With information on risk assessments, compliance, equipment and operations security, controls against malware and asset management, IT Governance is the definitive guide to implementing an effective information security management and governance system.

This book « Advises on the development and implementation of an information security management system that will meet the ISO 27001 specification Outlines IT governance best practice for international organizations of all sizes and across sectors « New to this edition: changes in global regulation (including GDPR) and updates to standards in the ISO/IEC 27000 family, BS 7799-3:2017 (information security risk management) and the latest standards on auditing Covers topics such as risk assessment, asset management, controls, security, supplier

relationships and compliance Description

This comprehensive guide covers all the aspects of transforming enterprise data into value, from the initial set-up of a big data strategy, towards algorithms, architecture and data governance processes.

Author Information Jan-Willem Middelburg is the CEO and cofounder of Cybiant, based in Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia. With Cybiant he helps to create a more sustainable world through analytics, big data and automation, developing algorithms and employing data scientists to unearth patterns and information. He is also President and Chief Examiner of the Enterprise Big Data Framework, an independent organization dedicated to upskilling individuals with expertise in Big Data. In partnership with APMG-International, the Enterprise Big Data Framework offers vendor-neutral certifications for individuals.

46 Information, Knowledge & Data Management Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction to Big Data 1 Introduction to Big Data 2 The Big Data framework 3 Big Data strategy 4 Big Data architecture 5 Big Data algorithms 6 Big Data processes 7 Big Data functions 8 Artificial intelligence 2 Enterprise Big Data analysis 9 Introduction to Big Data analysis 10 Defining the business objective 11 Data ingestion – importing and reading data sets 12 Data preparation – cleaning and wrangling data 13 Data analysis – model building 14 Data presentation 3 Enterprise Big Data engineering 15 Introduction to Big Data engineering 16 Data modelling 17 Constructing the data lake 18 Building an enterprise Big Data warehouse 19 Design and structure of Big Data pipelines 20 Managing data pipelines 21 Cluster technology 4 enterprise Big Data algorithm design 22 Introduction to Big Data algorithm design 23 Algorithm design –fundamental concepts 24 Statistical machine learning algorithms 25 The data science roadmap 26 Programming languages 26 visualization and simple metrics 27 Advanced machine learning algorithms 28 Advanced machine learning classification algorithms 29 Technical communication and documentation 5 Enterprise Big Data architecture 30 Introduction to the Big Data architecture 31 Strength and resilience – the Big Data platform 32 Design principles for Big Data architecture 33 Big Data infrastructure 34 Big Data platforms 35 The Big Data application provider 36 System orchestration in Big Data This book « Focuses on the enterprise implementation of the big data framework, covering analysis, engineering, algorithm design and architecture « Offers a vendor-independent approach to transforming massive quantities of data into value « Covers detailed data analysis and data engineering techniques for anyone who wants a deep understanding of big data « Helps readers understand the core concepts and techniques that underpin the somewhat abstract concept of big data « Online resources: sample data for practice purposes

BusinessesDescriptionwhocan make sense of the huge influx and complexity of data will be the big winners in the information economy. Learning how to fully leverage, analyze and integrate big data can help companies reduce costs, increase operating margins and add income.

With a focus on business implementation, The Enterprise Big Data Framework includes sections on analysis, engineering, algorithm design and big data architecture, and covers topics such as data preparation and presentation, data modelling, data science, programming languages and machine learning algorithms. Endorsed by leading accreditation and examination institute AMPG International, this book is required reading for the Enterprise Big Data Certifications, which aim to develop excellence in big data practices across the globe.

Using a vendor-independent approach, The Enterprise Big Data Framework offers practical advice on how to develop data-driven decision making, detailed data analysis and data engineering techniques.

The Enterprise Big Data Framework Edition: 1 Date: 03/09/2022 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398601710 ISBN Ebook: 9781398601727 Pages: 568 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

data is a by-product, but for the smarter ones it is the heartbeat of their business. Most businesses have a wealth of data buried in their systems which, if used effectively, could increase revenue, reduce costs and risk and improve customer satisfaction and employee experience.

ForDescriptionmanyorganizations

Beginning with how to choose projects which reflect your organization’s goals and how to make the business case for investing in data, this book then takes the reader through the five ‘waves’ of organizational data maturity. It takes the reader from getting started on the data journey with some quick wins, to how data can help your business become a leading innovator which systematically outperforms competitors.

47 Information, Knowledge & Data Management Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 How data and analytics can help you grow your business 1 How can this book help you? 2 The business case for data 3 Your data strategy 4 A team game 2 Wave 1 – Aspire 3 Quick wins 4 Repeat and learn 3 Wave 2 – Mature 4 Data governance 5 Data quality 6 A single customer view 7 Reports and dashboards 8 Risk management and ethics 4 Wave 3 – Industrialise 5 Automation, automation, automation 6 Scaling up 7 Optimising processes 5 Wave 4 – Realise 6 Using outside sources 7 Data analytics 8 Sharing data with clients and customers 9 AI and decision-making 6 Wave 5 – Differentiate 7 AI and innovation 8 Product development 9 An agile, learning organization This book « Follows the five ‘waves’ of data maturity businesses must pass through to implement a data-driven strategy which leverages existing assets « Explains how to choose projects which reflect organizational goals and get started with some quick wins « Outlines how to improve business performance and optimise processes through automation « Explores how investing in AI, machine learning and data science can help businesses become leading innovators prepared for change « Offers guidance on rigorous data governance and the importance of data quality in building trust

Data and Analytics Strategy for Business outlines how to build consistent, high-quality sources of data which will create business value and explores how automation, AI and machine learning can improve performance and decision making. Filled with real-world examples and case studies, this book is a stage-by-stage guide to designing and implementing a results-driven data strategy.

Author Information Simon Asplen-Taylor is an experienced and successful data and analytics leader based in London, UK, having served as Chief Data Officer for multiple FTSE firms and led some of the largest data led transformations in Europe. He specialises in transforming business through the use of data, analytics and artificial intelligence and is currently leading the data transformation at Lloyd’s of London. He was included in the dataIQ 100 Most Influential People in Data in both 2020 and 2021.

Data and Analytics Strategy for Business Unlock Data Assets and Increase Innovation with a Results-Driven Data Edition:Strategy 1 Date: 03/06/2022 Price: £24.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398606050 ISBN Ebook: 9781398606067 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

Author Information Dr Antonio Weiss, based in London, UK, is a Senior Partner at The PSC, an award-winning public service consultancy specialising in usercentred design, digital, strategy and delivery. He has advised the Office for Artificial Intelligence, the UK Space Agency and NHSx as well as numerous other pioneering digital organizations and frequently trains leaders to become digital transformation experts. He is also an Affiliated Researcher at the University of Cambridge’s Digital State programme and the co-founder of Thomas Clipper, an e-commerce lifestyle brand for men featured in GQ, The Guardian and The Telegraph.

DigitalDescriptiontransformation is a vital practice for organizations trying to keep up with competitors, but with new digital approaches constantly promising to revolutionise the workplace it can feel impossible to keep up. Cut through the hype with this accessible guide to making end-to-end digital transformation happen.

48 Information, Knowledge & Data Management Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 Getting the strategy and the roadmap right 1 What is a digital strategy? 2 Choosing your strategic delivery vehicle 3 How to do a digital roadmap 2 Making change happen 3 Ways of working 4 Senior and organisational buy-in 5 Funding digital 3 Doing digital 4 Understanding your users 5 Doing the bare minimum 6 Building new services 7 Buying technology 8 The cloud, APIs and opensource 9 Using data science to inform decision-making 10 Stimulating innovation 4 Future-proofing 5 Protecting and defending your organisation 6 The ethical digital organisation 7 Upskilling and bringing in new talent 8 Defining the next horizon

The TransformationGuidePracticaltoDigital Edition: 1 Date: 03/02/2022 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398603653 ISBN Ebook: 9781398603660 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 233x155 Product Category: Professional Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

While technology offers the possibility for business improvement, successful digital transformation also requires an effective strategy, the right culture, change management, the ability to stimulate innovation and the knowledge of where to upskill and where to bring in new talent. The Practical Guide to Digital Transformation covers each of these factors and more by breaking the process down to 17 easy-to-follow and practical steps.

This book « Presents 17 practical and easy-to-follow steps for delivering successful digital transformation « Features key tips and tricks on putting principles into action, case studies of organizations getting it right and advice on what to say in your next meeting « Covers important aspects of the end-to-end process, including creating a digital strategy, change management, stimulating innovation and knowing where to upskill and where to bring in new talent « Helps time pressured professionals build confidence and quickly master the essentials of digital transformation « Outlines how to start with the ‘basics’ of data science, cyber security, workable technology and good user experience and build from there

Each chapter includes a case study of an organization getting it right, along with advice on putting the principle into action, key tips and tricks, and what you might say in your next meeting. This book also outlines how to start with the foundations of ‘doing digital’ and build from there, including data science, cyber security, workable technology, minimised stack duplication, data registers and good user experience. Quickly build confidence and make change happen with this actionable guide to the essentials of digital transformation.

TransformationthroughBusinessDigital

Building the Agile Edition: 2 Date: 03/06/2021

This majorly revised second edition of Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation contains new material on the culture and mindset challenges of shifting at scale from linear to agile working, and using data effectively in organizational decision-making. Full of practical advice, examples and real-life insights from organizations at the leading edge of digital transformation including AirBnb, Amazon and Google, this book is an essential guide to driving success by becoming an agile and digital native business.

Peter Abraham is an author, practitioner and co-founder of weareCrank, which uses data to drive decision making and driving growth through the intersection of data, user experience and channel optimization. Based in Surrey, UK, he has over 20 years’ experience of helping global companies define their digital strategy and build digital centres of excellence to support true agility in business.

HowDescriptioncanbusinesses transform to achieve competitive advantage in a digital-enabled world?

How can managers and leaders create a culture that supports lasting change through these transformations?

Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation is an in-depth guide for all those needing to better understand, implement and lead digital transformation in the workplace. It sets aside traditional thinking and outdated strategies to explain what steps need to be taken for an organization to become truly agile, embed innovation and develop talent to succeed.

Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789666533 ISBN Ebook: 9781789666540 Pages: 336 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Professional Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

49 Information, Knowledge & Data Management Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 The agile business 1 The key forces for change 2 How digital disrupts 3 What’s stopping you? 4 Defining digital transformation and how an agile business is the foundation for it 2 Fast 3 Operating in the ‘ambiguity zone’ 4 Agile and methodologyadaptive 5 The agile innovation process 3 Focused 4 The role of vision and purpose 5 Agile strategy and planning 6 Linking strategy to execution 4 Flexibility 5 Agile structures and resourcing 6 Scaling agility 7 Building the culture to move fast 8 A blueprint for flexibility - autonomy, mastery and purpose 9 Digital-native talent 5 Start small, scale fast and the transformation journey – putting it all together 6 Index This book « Shows how businesses can embrace digital transformation and agile processes to achieve organizational success « Provides guidance on how to scale agile principles and operations, make change stick and adopt agile mindsets and culture « Contains real-life insights and examples from organizations driving business success with agility and digital innovation such as AirBnb, Amazon and Google « New to this edition: material on the culture and mindset challenges of shifting at scale from linear to agile working, using data effectively in organizational and high-velocity decision-making and agile approaches in multidisciplinary teams

50 Information, Knowledge & Data Management Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Be Data Driven How Organizations Can Harness the Power of Data Edition: 1 Date: 03/08/2022 Price: £24.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398606128 ISBN Ebook: 9781398606555 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

This practical guide explains what it means to be a data-driven organization and explores which technologies are advancing data and analytics. Crucially, it also examines the most common challenges to becoming data driven, from a foundational skills gap to issues with leadership and strategy and the impact of organizational culture. With case studies of businesses who have successfully used data, Be Data Driven shows managers, leaders and data professionals how to address hurdles, encourage a data culture and become truly data driven.

Table of Contents Foundational – the world of data within organizations 1 A data-driven world 2 The impact of COVID-19 on organizations and data Technologies advancing data and analytics and the human element 4 What does it mean to be data-driven, individually and organizationally? Gaps to being data driven Foundational skills gaps 4 “Holes” in organizational strategy The gap in leadership 6 The biggest hurdle – culture A roadmap for building a data-driven organization 4 Decide your outcome 5 Build your strategy 6 Invest in technology 7 Close the skills gaps 8 Conclusion This book « Shows managers, leaders and data professionals how to harness the power of their data and analytical strategies to become truly data driven « Outlines a roadmap for building a data-driven organization, including deciding on outcomes and building a strategy « Explains how to identify and overcome common hurdles, such as a foundational skills gap and the difficulty of creating a data-driven culture « Explores advances in technologies, where to invest and the importance of the human element in data « Includes case studies of data-driven businesses and how the COVID-19 pandemic has impacted the way organizations use data MakeDescriptionanyteamor business data driven with this practical guide to overcoming common challenges and creating a data culture.

Businesses are increasingly focusing on their data and analytics strategy, but a data-driven culture grounded in evidence-based decision making can be difficult to achieve. Be Data Driven outlines a step-by-step roadmap to building a data-driven organization or team, beginning with deciding on outcomes and a strategy before moving onto investing in technology and upskilling where necessary.

Author Information Jordan Morrow is Head of Data, Design and Management Skills at Pluralsight and a global trailblazer in the world of data literacy. He served as the Chair of the Advisory Board for The Data Literacy Project and is an active voice in the data and analytics community. He has helped organizations around the world, including the United Nations, build and understand data literacy. He is based in Salt Lake City, Utah and is also the author of Be Data Literate (Kogan Page).

51 Information, Knowledge & Data Management Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents Introduction: why write a book on information ethics? 1 Ethics in the context of information management 2 Introduction to ethical concepts and frameworks 3 Ethics, privacy and analytics 4 Information ethics and artificial intelligence: concepts and thought experiments 5 Ethics in the ManagementDataBody of Knowledge 6 Developing an ethical architecture for information management 7 Introducing the Ethical Enterprise frameworkManagementInformation(E2IM) 8 Information ethics as an information quality system 9 Information ethics and data governance 10 Information ethics and risk: the rise of the Ethical Impact Assessment 11 Making the ethical information management change 12 And in conclusion… This book « Is the first book of its kind written for information managers and data scientists « Is written by internationally regarded experts in information governance, data privacy and information ethics « Provides a detailed framework with practical tools and techniques for implementing an ethical information management strategy « Includes well-researched, road-tested material that the authors use in their training Description Information and how we manage, process and govern it is becoming increasingly important as organizations ride the wave of the big data revolution. Ethical Data and Information Management offers a practical guide for people in organizations who are tasked with implementing information management projects. It sets out, in a clear and structured way, the fundamentals of ethics, and provides practical and pragmatic methods for organizations to embed ethical principles and practices into their management and governance of information.

Written by global experts in the field, Ethical Data and Information Management is an important book addressing a topic high on the information management agenda. Key coverage includes how to build ethical checks and balances into data governance decision making; using quality management methods to assess and evaluate the ethical nature of processing during design; change methods to communicate ethical values; how to avoid common problems that affect ethical action; and how to make the business case for ethical behaviours.

Author Information Katherine O’Keefe is a Data Governance and Data Protection Consultant and Trainer at Castlebridge Associates, Dublin. She also delivers Data Ethics training for the Data Protection Certificate Data Round Table for the Law Society of Ireland.

Ethical Data and ManagementInformation Concepts, Tools and Methods Edition: 1 Date: 03/05/2018 Price: £42.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482046 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482053 Pages: 344 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Professional Subject: Information, Knowledge & Data Management

Daragh O Brien is a Data Governance, Data Quality and Data Privacy Consultant and Trainer. He is Managing Director and Lead Consultant at Castlebridge Associates. He is also an adjunct faculty member at the Law Society of Ireland Diploma School.

Companies that can successfully enter these emerging markets may reap rewards and benefits from cost reductions and market opportunities. By understanding their positioning in the global continuum of companies and customers - the global value chain - businesses can build their strategies for better competition, more effective resource allocation, cost reduction, and a heightened awareness of the risks and benefits.

Online supporting resources include lecture slides that align with each chapter.

52 International Business Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Why emerging markets are the place to be 3 The time horizon 4 What is the challenge from emerging markets? 5 Competing in emerging markets 6 Competitive strategies of firms in China: MNEs, SOEs and private firms 7 Emerging market MNEs competing in industrial countries and globally 8 Innovation is key 9 Large, small, family-owned and state-owned companies from emerging markets 10 Conclusions This book « Demonstrates how companies can build their competitiveness by understanding the global value chain in which they operate « Offers lessons for US, Japanese and European multinational companies as well as emerging market multinationals in how to understand the new business environment « Explains how to position your company to succeed in emerging markets and in traditional markets, and to take advantage of the benefits of both « Includes case studies from renowned international companies from both sides of emerging markets « Online Resources: Lecture slides of each chapter Description

Emerging Markets Strategies for Competing in the Global Value Chain Edition: 1 Date: 03/11/2015 Price: £36.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474492 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474508 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: International Business

Author Information Professor Robert E. Grosse is Dean of the School of Business Administration at American University of Sharjah, and was 2012-2014 President of the Academy of International Business. He has taught international finance in the MBA programmes at Thunderbird, the University of Miami, the University of Michigan, the Instituto de Empresa (Madrid, Spain), and in many universities in Latin America, and he lectures on executive education programmes around the world. He was founding Director of Standard Bank Group’s (South Africa) executive education programme, the Global Leadership Centre, offering leadership development training to 11,000 managers and executives. He is a leading author on international business topics, and his latest book, Can Latin American Firms Compete? was published by Oxford University Press in 2007.

Packed with in-depth case studies of multinationals from both sides of emerging markets, including: Accenture, Walmart, Google, Nike, Novartis, PetroChina, Embraer, Tata Group and FEMSA; Emerging Markets is essential reading for anyone looking to understand the new competitive landscape and how they can maximise the business opportunities available.

The traditional dominance of international markets by companies from the US, Western Europe and Japan can no longer be taken for granted. Emerging market economies, from the powerhouse Chinese economy (set to pass the US in national income by 2020) to dynamic players such as Mexico, South Africa and Indonesia, are rapidly changing the competitive landscape.

You Need to be a

Leadership Skills Handbook 100 Essential

This book shows you what works in practice, not in theory, in crucial areas such as people skills, career skills, mindset skills, organization skills, personal values and behaviours. Each skill is presented in a concise, easy to follow format, with an accompanying framework to help you deploy it in your own life. The skills are about the real challenges real leaders must master, and as you observe and record real-life examples of skills in action, you will be developing your own unique formula for success in the context that matters to you.

« New to this edition: exclusive new content on the changing demands of leadership in the current volatile and ambiguous business world « Is written by award-winning and best-selling author, Jo Owen, who has sold hundreds of thousands of copies of his books on leadership and management worldwide

This book « Features practical advice on over 100 leadership skills plus tips, exercises and examples, arranged in an easy dip-in-and-out style « Allows you to create your own personalized formula for success, based on a combination of what works best for both the individual reader’s career and their company

Description WINNER: CMI Management Book of the Year 2013 - New Manager Category (previous edition)

The Leadership Skills Handbook from best-selling author Jo Owen reveals the essential skills you need to be an effective leader.

Based on research from over a thousand leaders throughout the world at all levels in the public, private and voluntary sectors, The Leadership Skills Handbook identifies the practical skills to make you even more successful, and offers guidance on all key topics. This updated new edition includes exclusive new content on the changing demands of leadership in the 21st century and 10 whole new skills. These include the need to influence rather than control, how you get people to commit to your vision rather than comply and how career is no longer a noun but a verb for new generations of workers.

Edition:Leader 5 Date: 03/10/2020 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789666687 ISBN Ebook: 9781789666700 Pages: 328 Format (mm): 215x138 Product Category: General Subject: Leadership

53 Leadership Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Author Information Jo Owen is a best-selling and multi-awardwinning leadership author, keynote speaker and social entrepreneur. He is a founder of eight charities, including the UK’s largest graduate recruiter Teach First. His books The Mindset of Success, Myths of Leadership and Management Stripped Bare, all published by Kogan Page, have been translated into eight different languages. Jo Owen is the first person to win the Chartered Institute of Management Gold Award four times for four of his books. Skills

54 Leadership Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1 Leading in a New Era 2 Leadership Frameworks and Research 3 Leadership Traits and Characteristics 4 Contingency Theories 5 Situational Leadership 6 Psychodynamics, Power and the Shadow 7 Transformational and Transactional Leadership 8 Strategic and Innovation Leadership 9 Change Leadership 10 Leadership Responsibility and Values 11 Leading across Organizations and Networks 12 Leadership Health – Mind, Body and Spirit 3 Learning to Lead in Practice 4 What Does 21st-century Leadership Require? 5 How do Leaders Learn? 6 Levels of Leadership Maturity 4 You and Your Development 5 Taking Stock and Self-Rating 6 Clarifying your Goals and Intended Outcomes 5 Developing and Using the Five Qualities 6 Overview of the Five Qualities Framework 7 The Tenacious Implementer Quality 8 The Measured Connector Quality 9 The Visionary Motivator Quality 10 The Thoughtful Architect Quality 11 The Edgy Catalyser Quality 12 Becoming Masterful 6 Leadership Organizationsand 7 Defining Leadership Culture 8 Changing Leadership Culture 9 The Implications of Millennial Leadership This book « Contains all the essential and emerging theories and models of leadership to give students and practitioners a solid and rigorous academic underpinning to their leadership development « Combines this theory with practical guidance based on research in the field and case studies, allowing students and practitioners to unite academic background with real-life situations in order to strengthen themselves as leaders « Self-assessment tools and reflective exercises enable students and practitioners to discover their personal leadership style, their strengths and weaknesses, and learn how to become better leaders « Online Resources: PowerPoint lecture slides and an instructor’s manual Description

Essential Leadership is a practical, accessible book that tackles theory and practice in an integrated and stimulating way. You are encouraged to engage with a wide range of leadership theories and frameworks as well as rate your own leadership skills and qualities, make realistic self-development plans and start to experiment with new or different approaches. Rather than offering one best way forward or becoming overly theoretical, this book is a pragmatic resource for new and experienced leaders looking to navigate the leadership literature and start to fully realize their own leadership Supportedpotential. by exercises, practical examples, rigorous self-assessments, advice and suggestions, Essential Leadership offers an important guide for those currently working, or planning to work, in a 21st century business environment with all its complexity and uncertainty. It provides an overarching framework of five essential leadership qualities that can be refined and combined as leaders grow, allowing them to be particularly responsive to the business context. The book allows readers to discover and develop their own leadership qualities, and master them through understanding, experimentation, feedback and reflection. Cutting-edge research into Millennial Leadership is also included, as are sections on developing your leadership maturity throughout life, and how leadership culture forms and changes. Online supporting resources include lecture slides and an instructor’s manual.

Essential Leadership Develop Your Leadership Qualities Through Theory and Practice Edition: 1 Date: 03/02/2017 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749477400 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477417 Pages: 400 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Leadership

Mike Green is Director of Transitional Space Ltd, and a Visiting Fellow at Henley Business School where he tutors and coaches in Leadership and Change. Mike also delivers bespoke and accredited learning programmes in Change Management to managers and change agents globally.

Author Information Esther Cameron has been experimenting with approaches to leadership and change for 25 years. She is a founding Director of Integral Change Consulting Ltd and was previously a lecturer for the University of Bristol. Together with Mike Green, she is co-author of Making Sense of Change Management (also published by Kogan Page).

Author Information Constantinos C. Markides is recognized as one of the world’s foremost experts on strategy and innovation, based in London, UK. He is Professor of Strategy and Entrepreneurship and holds the Robert P Bauman Chair in Strategic Leadership at London Business School. An internationally acclaimed teacher and conference speaker, he is the author of seven books and has published articles in top journals such as the Strategic Management Journal, Harvard Business Review and MIT Sloan Management Review. He is currently the Program Director of his school’s executive education course, entitled: “Exploiting Disruption in a Digital World.”

Organizing for the New Normal Prepare Your Company for the Journey of Continuous Disruption Edition: 1 Date: 03/04/2021 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398600799 ISBN Ebook: 9781398600812 Pages: 184 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Professional Subject: Leadership

How do you develop a strategy for what is coming next while you are busily driving your current transformation? And how do you convince emotionally exhausted employees to join you on the journey? The book does not provide a ready-made recipe for success, but rather explores how to put together the ingredients that will improve the odds of success.

Organizing for the New Normal outlines the leadership competencies critical for success in the “new normal”, such as: · How to create a “permanent” sense of urgency and an organization-wide unease with the status quo · How to convince people to exploit disruption as an opportunity when all they see around them are the negative consequences of disruption · How to institutionalize into the DNA of the organization the day to day behaviors that would allow us to identify and respond to change early-and how to achieve this in a decentralized way · How to develop a strategic response that is innovative and aims to attack the disruption rather than defend against it.

Organizing for the New Normal explores how to prepare the organization for this unique challenge.

55 Leadership Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 Attitude Towards Disruption is Key 2 Creating Urgency for Change 3 Deciding What to Do 4 How to Develop an Innovative Strategy 5 Experimenting with New Business Models 6 Winning Commitment for the New Business Model 7 The Importance of the Organizational Environment 8 How to Develop a Supportive Organizational Environment 9 Making the Transition to the New Business Model 10 Putting It All Together This book « Outlines the leadership competencies critical for success in the “new normal” « Provides the “how to” for CEOs who know what has to be done but struggle with how to do it « Includes examples from global companies such as Microsoft, Walmart, Adobe, Netflix, Axel Springer, Autotrader, BP, Medtronic, SKY TV, KBC Bank, Arla, Oatly, Diageo, Nestle, Babylon, LVMH, EasyJet, The Guardian and Informa WeDescriptionliveinaworld of continuous disruption. Before we have a chance to respond to one disruption, another hits. Before we finish one transformation journey, we need to embark on another. How do you prepare the organization for this new normal of continuous disruption?

This is the challenge that every organization is now facing, no matter how successful their digital transformation of the past decade has been.

This book « Provides a full overview of how to grow as a leader and encourages you to find greatness in others « Is from the bestselling author and world renowned leadership expert John Adair, with over 500,000 books sold worldwide and translations into 25 languages « Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential work skills to help you develop your career « New to this edition: revised case studies throughout and summaries of the latest leadership thinking

Develop LeadershipYourSkills

Acknowledged as a world expert, John Adair offers stimulating insights into recognizing and developing individual leadership qualities, acquiring personal authority and, most importantly, mastering core leadership functions such as planning, communicating and motivating. This 5th edition now features even more practical exercises, useful templates, and top tips to improve or develop your leadership skills, this guide distils the essence of John Adair’s teaching and provides a framework for becoming an effective leader.

The Creating Success series of books... Unlock vital skills, power up your performance and get ahead with the bestselling Creating Success series. Written by experts for new and aspiring managers and leaders, this million-selling collection of accessible and empowering guides will get you up to speed in no time. Packed with clever thinking, smart advice and the kind of winning techniques that really get results, you’ll make fast progress, quickly reach your goals and create lasting success in your career.

Fast, Effective Ways to Become a Leader People Want to Follow Edition: 5 Date: 03/07/2022 Price: £12.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398606173 ISBN Ebook: 9781398606272 Pages: 104 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Leadership

ThisDescriptionindispensable guide from leadership guru John Adair, will boost your confidence levels, inspire you and help you on your journey to becoming a leader of excellence.

56 Leadership Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 What you have to be 3 What you have to know 4 What you need to do 5 How to turn the core leadership functions into skills 6 How to develop yourself as a leader 7 How to lead at the strategic level 8 How to grow leaders in your organization

Author Information John Adair is acknowledged internationally as an authority on leadership, based in Guildford, UK. The world’s first Professor of Leadership Studies, he advises organizations and has received the Lifetime Achievement in Leadership Award. He is the author of the bestselling classics Not Bosses But Leaders, The John Adair Lexicon of Leadership and The Inspirational Leader, all published by Kogan Page.

Myths of Leadership Banish the Misconceptions and Become a Great Leader Edition: 1 Date: 03/10/2017 Price: £15.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480745 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480752 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: General Subject: Leadership

Leadership Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

« Contains compelling evidence from leadership theory, true business accounts and interviews to help the reader separate fact from fiction and become a better informed leader

The best leaders are born, not made. The best leaders are always in control. The best leaders are those with the highest IQs. But are they really?

« Is written by the bestselling and award winning author Jo Owen (The Mindset of Success and The Leadership Skills Handbook)

« Contains real-life examples from a diverse range of global companies and industries to show the reader how to spot myths in action

« Tackles fascinating myths about leadership such as: leaders are born not made, leaders should be the smartest people in the room, leaders should always be in control and the founder should always be the leader

This book « Explores over 40 of the most pervasive myths that all leaders and aspiring leaders should be able to recognize and relate to, from the entertaining to the potentially career damaging

WINNER:Description CMI Management Book of the Year 2019 - Aspiring Leaders Category

The thinking surrounding what makes the greatest leaders is increasingly muddled by stereotypes, snake oil promises and pseudo-science. The best leaders rely on fact, not fads. Myths of Leadership blasts away the fluff and confronts false legends head on. Jo Owen uses the most credible research to analyze each myth, using international business case studies, leadership theory and insightful interviews, to uncover the truth.

Author Information Jo Owen is a best-selling and multi-award winning leadership author, keynote speaker and social entrepreneur. He is a founder of eight charities, including the UK’s largest graduate recruiter Teach First. His books The Mindset of Success, The Leadership Skills Handbook and Management Stripped Bare, all published by Kogan Page, have been translated into eight different languages.

This is a compelling and practical examination of the most pervasive misconceptions about leadership that will help you elevate your own leadership abilities, better inspire your team and empower your organization by thinking differently. Entertaining but evidence-based, Myths of Leadership throws out the management jargon and skewers over-hyped leadership trends to bring you the best practical tips you need to become a better leader.

IsDescriptionyourcompany using its talent to create social value? Or is it simply managing risks? To address the problems facing society and business today, sustainability is not good enough.

58 Leadership Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents

Bradley Googins is a retired professor and former Director of the Center of Corporate Citizenship at Boston College. He is currently a visiting professor of Strategy and Entrepreneurship at the Catholic University of Milan. He is based in Watertown, Massachusetts.

Introduction 1 Where We Are Now and What’s Next 2 Sustainability - The End of the Beginning 3 Social Change - The Start of Something New 4 Business as an Agent of Change - Trailblazers and Transformers 5 Changemaking - Gearing Up to Lead Social Change 2 Lead Your Company into the Future 3 Put Purpose First 4 Make Prosperity Inclusive 5 Engage the Whole Person 6 Produce Social Value 7 Revive the Planet 8 Systemic Social Change 9 Epilogue This book « Reveals how Ben & Jerry’s, Unilever, Nike, Danone, Ikea, NEC, Jaipur Rugs and BlackRock made the strategic shift from minimizing risk to creating social value « Outlines strategies and practices for companies to create purpose, engage the “whole person,” create value for society and revive the planet « Offers a self-assessment to help readers evaluate their company’s mindset and practices « Online resources include a guide to help employees become socially conscious, operate in a purposeful company, become allies for social justice, add social value to their products and establish “green” habits

Instead, companies need to do their part to lead social change. In Sustainability to Social Change, leadership and social innovation experts Philip Mirvis and Bradley K. Googins share their handson research to reveal how leaders can design and guide their companies to create more inclusive prosperity and become agents of social change. The book reveals the inside story of how socially innovative companies are making the strategic shift from minimizing risk to creating social value. It then outlines the strategies and practices that leaders can use to address the five biggest problems facing companies and society today: Purpose, Prosperity, Products, Planet and People.

Author Information Philip Mirvis is an organizational psychologist who serves as senior research fellow for the Global Network on Corporate Citizenship and Babson Social Innovation Lab. He is based in Ranchos des Taos, New Mexico. He has led public and corporate seminars, and lectured in over 50 nations throughout Asia, Europe, and Africa, and in Brazil and Australia.

Filled with real life examples, hands-on guidelines and self-assessments to rate your company’s performance, Sustainability to Social Change helps you pivot your company’s mindset and practices in order to enhance society and the environment, and fuel its own success. Online resources include a guide to help employees become socially conscious, operate in a purposeful company, become allies for equity and social justice, add social value at work and establish “green” habits.

Sustainability to Social Change Lead Your Company from Managing Risks to Creating Social Value Edition: 1 Date: 03/03/2022 Price: £24.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398604353 ISBN Ebook: 9781398604360 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Leadership

Neuroscience for Leaders Practical Insights to Successfully Lead People and Organizations Edition: 2 Date: 03/10/2020 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789662146 ISBN Ebook: 9781789662153 Pages: 336 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Professional/General Subject: Leadership

Author Information Nikolaos Dimitriadis is an award-winning communications professional, educator and consultant. Based in Serbia, he is the Head of Neuro Consulting Services at OptimalHRGroup and the Country Manager for Serbia for The University of Sheffield International Faculty, City College. Alexandros Psychogios is a Professor of International HRM in Birmingham City Business School at Birmingham City University, UK. He is also a Visiting Professor at Cyprus International Institute of Management (CIIM) and a Research Associate in South Eastern European Research Centre (SEERC).

59 Leadership Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents Introduction – The leadership enigma and the human brain 1 Pillar 1 thinking brain 2 Powerful brain, powerful leader 3 Clear mind, strong direction 4 Higher performance, more followers 5 Summary of pillar 1 2 Pillar 2 emotional brain 3 More emotion, better decisions 4 Right emotion, right action 5 Summary of pillar 2 3 Pillar 3 brain automations 4 Gut reaction, faster solution 5 Summary of pillar 3 4 Pillar 4 relational brain 5 More connected, more successful 6 Brain communication, better persuasion 7 Summary of pillar 4 8 Concluding remarks – The future, the brain and the BAL approach This book « Provides a comprehensive approach to leading people and organizations using the latest neuroscience findings « Offers leaders practical guidance in an easy to understand framework « New to this edition: new examples, activities and applicable leadership suggestions plus updates with the latest scientific developments in neuroscience relating to leadership « Relates theory to practice with real examples and a variety of individual and company examples « Presents primary research and academic research to help improve your leadership performance UnlockDescriptionyourpotential with the latest neuroscientific insights and succeed as a leader in complex business environments. As understanding of neuroscience increases, it is better understood how scientific insights can be applied to develop and enhance leadership. Neuroscience for Leaders captures the most up-to-date and important findings in neuroscience and links these to the business world. This guide offers a simple framework to put these principles into practice to make better decisions, take the right actions and find faster solutions.

Now in its second edition, this book presents a comprehensive approach to leading people and organizations based on academic research. The authors’ ‘Brain Adaptive Leadership’ approach offers a step-by-step guide to enhancing the way leaders think, understanding and nurturing emotions, shaping automated brain responses and developing dynamic relationships. Examples, activities and practical suggestions are all designed to be clear and engaging. Neuroscience for Leaders is the essential guide for leaders who are ready to gain the business advantage scientifically.

Coherence The Science of Exceptional Leadership and Edition:Performance 2 Date: 03/09/2021 Price: £24.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398601185 ISBN Ebook: 9781398601192 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 15x155 Product Category: Professional Subject: Leadership

60 Leadership Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 The great performance myth 2 Be younger 3 Be healthier and happier 4 Be smarter 5 Be successful 6 Be influential

Most leaders are operating nowhere near their optimal level of performance. In this book, Dr Alan Watkins helps leaders at every level understand how they can transform their output and unlock their true potential. He shares proven techniques that have helped thousands of leaders in FTSE 50 giants and SMEs across market sectors and geographies as well as the Olympic and Paralympic Rowing Team, resulting in them achieving their best ever medal haul in London 2012.

Coherence shows how our ability to lead and deliver results is rooted in our biology. Dr Watkins explains the science of how to increase energy levels and become smarter, more resilient, happier, healthier and more successful in whatever we do. Drawing on case studies from prominent business leaders and insights from a diverse range of research fields, he reveals the secrets to exceptional leadership and how to be brilliant every day. Now in its second edition, this vital guide contains upgraded practical tools and new insights on how to transform productivity, manage complexity, accelerate innovation and drive greater commercial performance, all while becoming healthier and happier.

Author Information

Dr Alan Watkins lives on the south coast of England and is CEO and co-Founder of Complete, a consultancy specializing in developing exceptional leadership through individual and team development. A physician and neuroscientist, he has been a coach to many top CEOs and business leaders around the world for over 25 years, bringing the latest approaches from neuroscience, physiology and systems theory to the human performance challenge. He is a visiting Professor in Business Studies at Kingston University, London.

This book « Presents a comprehensive enlightened leadership model that has been proven to help business leaders overcome their everyday challenges Unlocks your true potential as a leader using a unique set of scientifically based metrics that are designed to drive individual and organizational success Includes case studies and interviews from prominent business leaders and and insights from a diverse range of research fields New to this edition: practical tools and new insights on how to transform productivity, manage complexity, accelerate innovation and drive greater commercial performance

UnderstandDescriptionhow to overcome the obstacles inhibiting performance and unlock the potential for brilliance that lies within every leader.

61 Leadership Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents

Organizations are where the world’s most innovative and impactful talents lie; we have the ingenuity, the technology and the resources to change the world for the better. Discover how to awaken the maverick mindset in you; one that will question, debate and enhance. Mavericks are the key to answering some of the world’ most pressing challenges; they don’t settle for anything less, and neither should you. Mavericks shows you how being a maverick isn’t about shooting from the hip and rocking the boat for the sake of it, it’s about demanding better of yourself and your organization for the wider Ingood.

Edition:World 1 Date: 03/03/2022

Introduction 1 Belief: We should do better What makes a Maverick leader? Resourcefulness: Connecting people, ideas and assets Nonconformity: The instinct to question Experimental: Learning through trial and error Undeterred: Resisting opposition Maverick styles of leadership Maverick forms of organization Maverick states of society Becoming a Maverick leader References

This book « Teaches readers to challenge the status quo and enhance positive growth in their organizations by channelling their inner maverick « Anchors exceptional leadership within making changes for the better: bettering ourselves, our teams and environment but also the rest of the world « Brings in exciting examples of maverick leaders from all walks of life to inspire; including Dame Steve Shirley, Reggie Nelson, Annmarie Lewis OBE and Jamshedji Tata « Unearths five characteristics that all maverick leaders have and that we can cultivate in ourselves and others: passionate belief, being undeterred, resourcefulness, directionality and being experimental HowDescriptionmanyofour business leaders truly embody the change needed in the world of work and beyond? Not nearly enough. This book shows you how to reclaim your power to make a difference, by unleashing your inner maverick.

Mavericks How Bold Leadership Changes the

Mavericks, business consultants, London Business School faculty members and authors David Lewis and Jules Goddard guide you through the five characteristics that you can develop to become a maverick leader. From passionate belief, an undeterred attitude, being resourceful, being directional and finally experimenting, these characteristics are the blueprint for you to grow into an iconic and positive change maker. The focus is not on what becoming a leader can do for you, but on what you can do to make the world a better place.

Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398604391 ISBN Ebook: 9781398604407 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/General Subject: Leadership

Author Information David Lewis is a guest lecturer at London Business School and Hult International Business School. A global business consultant, cited on the Thinkers50 Radar of top global management thinkers, he is based in London, UK. Dr Jules Goddard is a Fellow of London Business School. He has written extensively on strategy and leadership and his corporate clients include Orange, Tata, Danone, Toshiba, and Rolls-Royce. He is based in London, UK Tamryn Batcheller-Adams is a psychologist and leadership development consultant who has worked with leaders in over 20 countries. She is based in Cape Town, South Africa.

What Philosophy Can Teach You About Being a Better Leader Edition: 1 Date: 03/10/2019 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749493165 ISBN Ebook: 9780749493172 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 234x157 Product Category: General Subject: Leadership

The four authors argue that the rise of the ‘omnipotent leader’, who focuses on telling rather than leading, risks creating a new generation of feudal CEOs and needs to be resisted. With the help of Aristotle, Socrates, Kant and Nietzsche, as well as a whole host of other brilliant minds, they turn traditional management practices on their head, showing how moving away from traditional, hierarchical, risk focused control structures can lead to improved employee engagement, increased productivity and better outcomes for the entire business.

Author Information Alison Reynolds is a business leader and consultant in strategy execution. She is part of the Faculty in Executive Education at Ashridge Business School. Jules Goddard is a Fellow of the Centre for Management Development at London Business School, where he has taught competitive strategy and creative marketing for 30 years.

What Philosophy Can Teach You About Being a Better Leader offers a different route that will allow you to reconnect with the humanist values of work. By turning to philosophy, and what it teaches us about finding fulfilment and living a good life, this book uncovers the ways you can re-engage your workforce by valuing its members as people, rather than just tools within the process.

The four authors met while undertaking a Master’s in Research in Philosophy at the University of Buckingham.

62 Leadership Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents Introduction – The dehumanized workplace 1 Who can reconnect us with our dreams? 2 Reason and passion in the humanized workplace 3 Humanizing strategy 4 Creativity and critical thinking 5 A question of example and fairness 6 The gift of authority 7 Meaning and communication 8 From engagement to encounter 9 Values and ethical pluralism 10 The freedom to do what you can 11 Index This book « Explores how four great philosophers - Aristotle, Socrates, Kant and Nietzsche - would approach questions of empowerment, engagement, leadership, values and performance « Explains why modern organizational practices miss what matters the most - their people « Reveals how leaders and their people can progress towards being more fully flourishing persons in the workplace by smashing through seven common workplace fictions

David Lewis is Programme Director for Executive Education at London Business School and a renowned strategy and leadership expert.

ForDescriptiondecades,wehave looked to management theorists, organizational psychologists and economists to tell us how we can squeeze the most out of people at work. The result? People are uninspired, feel like cogs in a machine and prefer to leave traditional work structures behind. Numbers and productivity can only get you so far.

Dominic Houlder is an Adjunct Professor in Strategic and Entrepreneurial Management at London Business School. He is internationally recognised as a leading business strategist.

BusinessSustainableHandbook

It is therefore time to shift the conversation from the ‘why’ of business sustainability to the ‘how’.

TheDescriptioncaseforbusiness sustainability has already been made; organizations can no longer ignore the issue when climate change affects supply chains and customer expectations require them to take action. It has also been proven that businesses operating sustainably drive innovation, build brand value and are more profitable.

This book « Focuses on how businesses can become more sustainable in practice (the ‘how’) rather than on the case for sustainability (the ‘why’) « Features practical tools and tips and a variety of case studies of organizations successfully embracing sustainability « Covers the whole process to sustainability, from defining an organizational purpose and setting goals to engaging stakeholders, creating a successful culture and avoiding common pitfalls « Spotlights actionable examples of how businesses can become more innovative, resilient and successful by becoming more sustainable « Explores how sustainable businesses create long term value by minimising negative social, environmental and economic practices and maximizing positive impacts

The Sustainable Business Handbook is a practical ‘how-to’ guide which aims to demystify jargon and provide practical tools and tips for busy managers. Rather than preaching the importance of sustainability, it cuts straight to how businesses can become more resilient and successful in the long term by becoming more sustainable. This indispensable book is based around twenty top tips for transforming your business and is interspersed with a range of individual profiles and case studies of organizations successfully embracing sustainability. With guidance on defining your organizational purpose, engaging stakeholders and creating the right culture, The Sustainable Business Handbook outlines how to shift Corporate Responsibility from being a bolt-on to business operations to being a source of innovation and new business, as well as societal good.

63 Business Improvement Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 Getting started 2 Purpose 3 Materiality 4 Business case 2 Building it up 3 Strategy 4 Operationalizing 5 Culture 6 Leadership 7 Reporting 8 Governance 3 Taking it to the world 4 Engagement 5 Communications 6 Partnering 7 Advocacy 8 Conclusion

Author Information David Grayson CBE is Emeritus Professor of Corporate Responsibility at Cranfield School of Management, based in London, UK. From 2007-17 he was Professor and Director of the Doughty Centre for Corporate Responsibility at Cranfield. He is the chair of the Institute of Business Ethics and has worked with responsible business coalitions across the world. Chris Coulter is CEO of GlobeScan, an insights and strategy firm that helps organizations build the trust they need to create value for themselves and society, and is based in Toronto, Canada. He is the Chair of Canadian Business for Social Responsibility (CBSR) and is a member of the Multinational Subcommittee of B Lab’s Standards Advisory Council and Walgreen’s Corporate Responsibility Advisory Board. Mark Lee is the Director of the Sustainability Institute by ERM, which launched in 2020 to define, accelerate and scale sustainability performance by developing actionable insight for business. He is also an ERM Partner and sits on the Advisory Board of Sustainable Brands and the Senior Advisory Board of the Centre for Responsible Business at the Haas Business School at UC Berkeley. He is based in California. The Edition: 1 Date: 03/02/2022 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398604049 ISBN Ebook: 9781398604056 Pages: 328 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Business Improvement

Fundamentals of Risk Management is a detailed and comprehensive introduction to commercial and business risk for students and risk professionals. Completely aligned with ISO 31000 and the COSO ERM Framework, this book covers the key principles of risk management and how to deal with the different types of risk organizations face. The frameworks of business continuity planning, enterprise risk management, and project risk management are covered alongside an overview of international risk management standards and frameworks, strategy and policy.

The revised sixth edition includes updates throughout as well as providing new content on trends such as cyber risk, black swan events and climate risk. Supported by relevant international case examples including BP, Singapore Airlines and Darktrace, this book provides a full analysis of changes in contemporary risk areas including digital risk management, risk culture and appetite, supply chain and statutory risk reporting. Supporting online resources include lecture slides with figures, tables and key points from the book.

reputation, the business model and strategy, along with improvements in risk management documentation and statutory risk reporting for assurance and reporting purposes « Provides

Fundamentals of Risk Management Understanding, Evaluating and Implementing Effective Enterprise Risk Edition:Management

Date:

This book Details regulatory developments affecting to relevant international case BP, Singapore Airlines and Darktrace to this edition: updates throughout and new content on cyber, black swan events (such as COVID-19) climate developments in enterprise risk management (ERM), loss control and the value of insurance as a risk management method· Online resources: lecture slides with figures, tables and key points from the book

Risk Management

64 Risk Management Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction to Risk Management 1 Approaches to Defining Risk 2 Impact of Risk on Organizations 3 Types of Risks 4 Scope of Risk Management 5 Principles and Aims of Risk Management 2 Approaches to Risk Management 3 Risk Management Standards 4 Establishing the Context 5 Enterprise Risk Management 6 Alternative Approaches 3 Risk Assessment 4 Risk ConsiderationsAssessment 5 Risk Classification Systems 6 Risk Analysis and Evaluation 7 Loss Control 8 Defining the Upside of Risk 4 Risk Response 5 Tolerate, Treat, Transfer and terminate 6 Risk Control Techniques 7 Insurance and Risk Transfer 8 Business Continuity 5 Risk Strategy 6 Core Business Processes 7 Reputation and the Business Model 8 Risk Management Context 9 Risk ResponsibilitiesManagement 10 Control of Selected Hazard Risks 6 Risk Culture 7 Risk-Aware Culture 8 Importance of Risk Appetite 9 Risk Training Communicationand 10 Risk CompetenciesPractitioner 7 Risk Governance 8 Corporate Governance Model 9 Stakeholder Expectations 10 Operational Risk Management 11 Project Risk Management 12 Supply Chain Management 8 Risk Assurance 9 The Control Environment 10 Risk Assurance Techniques 11 Internal Audit Activities 12 Reporting on Risk Management

« New

Paperback:

Product

Textbook/Professional

and

risk « Covers

Author Information Clive Thompson was founding Chair of the Professional Standards and the Interest Group Committees of the Institute of Risk Management where he served on the board and was Deputy Chair until 2020. Based in West Sussex, UK, he has been a risk manager and consultant delivering projects globally. He is a Certified Fellow of the IRM. Paul Hopkin was Technical Director at the Institute of Risk Management (IRM) and held the same role at Airmic. He was previously Director of Risk Management for The Rank Group and prior to that Head of Risk Management at the BBC. He is a Certified Fellow of the IRM. The IRM is a world leading professional body for risk management, driving excellence in managing risk to ensure organizations are ready for opportunities and threats of the future. 6 03/12/2021 Price: £44.99 ISBN 9781398602861 ISBN Ebook: 9781398602878 Pages: 472 Format (mm): 240x170 Category: Subject:

risks

EffectiveDescriptionriskmanagement allows opportunities to be maximized and uncertainty to be minimized. This guide for emerging professionals provides a comprehensive understanding of risk management with tools, tips and tactics on how to offer expert insights and drive success.

studies including

« Examines

65 Risk Management Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Understanding operational risk – key concepts and management objectives 2 Embedding operational risk 3 Risk categorisation 4 Risk culture 5 Risk appetite and tolerance 6 Risk and control self assessment 7 Operational events and losses 8 Operational risk, control and performance indicators 9 Scenario analysis and stress testing 10 Operational resilience 11 The regulatory treatment of operational risk

Author Information Dr Simon Ashby is Associate Professor of Financial Services at Vlerick Business School, based in Brussels, Belgium. Prior to this he was Associate Professor at Plymouth Business School, UK and worked as a financial regulator and a senior risk manager in a number of top UK financial institutions. He is a Fellow and former Chairman of the Institute of Operational Risk (IOR) and a Senior Research Fellow at the Centre for Risk, Banking and Financial Services at the University of Nottingham. The IRM is a world leading professional body for risk management, driving excellence in managing risk to ensure organizations are ready for opportunities and threats of the future. ManagementRisk

Fundamentals of Operational

Understanding Implementing

and

Effective Tools, Policies and Edition:Frameworks 1 Date: 03/04/2022 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398605022 ISBN Ebook: 9781398605039 Pages: 296 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Risk Management

This book « Explains the key components of an operational risk management framework and supporting governance structures Includes case studies of major operational risk events to illustrate key concepts, covering rogue traders, fraud and technology issues operational risk tools including categorisation, risk and control self-assessment, scenario analysis, events and losses and operational risk indicators the regulatory treatment of operational risk and how to create an effective risk culture where operational risk fits in relation to other risk types and how this can create challenges

« Covers

ThreatsDescriptiontoanorganization’s operations, such as fraud, IT disruption or poorly designed products, could result in serious losses. Understand the key components of effective operational risk management with this essential book for risk professionals and students.

Fundamentals of Operational Risk Management outlines how to implement a sound operational risk management framework which is embedded in day-to-day business activities. It covers the main operational risk tools including categorisation, risk and control self-assessment and scenario analysis, and explores the importance of risk appetite and tolerance.

With case studies of major operational risk events to illustrate each concept, this book demonstrates the value of ORM and how it fits with other types of risk management. There is also guidance on the regulatory treatment of operational risk and the importance of risk culture in any organization. Master the essentials and improve the practice of operational risk management with this comprehensive guide.

« Explores

Author Information Elena Pykhova is an operational risk executive specializing in strategy, design and implementation of firm-wide operational risk frameworks, based in London, UK. She is an experienced operational risk trainer, running public and in-house training courses in the UK and internationally for world-leading venues such as the London Stock Exchange Academy. She is founder of a think tank, Best Practice Operational Risk Forum, the Chair of the Operational Risk Expert Panel for the Association of Foreign Banks and the former Director for Education at the Institute of Operational Risk.

66 Risk Management Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Operational risk - Definition and taxonomy 2 Operational risk framework and its implementation 3 The three lines of defence model - Its application to operational risk management 4 Operational risk events 5 Risk and control selfassessments 6 Operational risk assessment of change initiatives 7 Key risk indicators 8 Scenario analysis 9 Operational risk appetite 10 Operational risk reporting 11 Operational risk training and education 12 Risk culture 13 Embedding and maturity assessment 14 Operational resilience Appendix 1 Operational Risk Champion - Role Description Appendix 2 Example operational risk event reporting template Appendix 3 ORA template Appendix 4 Table of 50 key risk indicators

Operational

Filled with frameworks, examples and diagrams, this book offers clear advice on key practices including conducting risk assessments, assessing change initiatives, designing key risk indicators, establishing scenario analysis, drafting appetite statements and carrying out risk reporting. Operational Risk Management in Financial Services also features results from polls taken by risk practitioners which provide a snapshot of current practices and allow the reader to benchmark themselves against other firms. This is the essential guide for professionals looking to derive value out of operational risk management, rather than applying a compliance ‘tick box’ approach.

This book « Inspires professionals to derive value out of operational risk management, rather than applying a compliance ‘tick box’ approach « Guides the reader on how to establish effective solutions and avoid common pitfalls with frameworks, examples and diagrams « Includes results from polls taken by risk practitioners which provide a snapshot of current practices and allow the reader to benchmark against other firms « Offers clear advice on conducting Risk and Control Self-Assessment, designing Key Risk Indicators and creating operational risk reports « Benefits from the author’s 25 years of experience as an operational risk executive and international trainer TechnologyDescriptionfailures, data loss, issues with providers of outsourced services, misconduct and mis-selling are just some of the top risks that keep financial firms up at night. In this context effective operational risk management is, simply, a commercial necessity.

FinancialManagementRiskinServices

The management of operational risk, defined by the Basel Accord as arising from failures of processes, people, systems or external events, has developed considerably since its early years. Continued regulatory focus and catastrophic industry events have led to operational risk becoming a crucial topic on senior management’s agenda. This book is a practical guide for practitioners which focuses on how to establish effective solutions and avoid common pitfalls.

A Practical Guide to Establishing Effective Solutions Edition: 1 Date: 03/07/2021 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789667080 ISBN Ebook: 9781789667110 Pages: 384 Format (mm): 233x158 Product Category: Professional Subject: Risk Management

67 Risk Management Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 A framework understandingforrisk 2 Engineering supply chain resilience 3 Industry sector resilience to supply chain threats 4 Natural disasters and pandemics 5 Climate change and emissions policy 6 Economic risks to the supply chain 7 Societal risks to supply chains 8 Corruption in the logistics industry 9 Cargo crime and piracy 10 The threat of supply chain cyber crime 11 Political risks in supply chains 12 Illicit supply chains 13 Terrorism and security

Author Information John Manners-Bell is the CEO of Transport Intelligence, a leading supplier of market solutions to the global logistics industry. He is also Visiting Professor at the London Guildhall Faculty of Business and Law, London Metropolitan University. Chains Edition: 3 Date: 03/11/2020 Price: £49.99 9781789666373 Ebook: 9781789666380 Pages: 368 Format (mm): 235x156 Category: Subject:

ISBN Paperback:

Description

The third edition of Supply Chain Risk Management details how to approach various threats, including black swan events, natural disasters, climate change, cargo crime and piracy, and terrorism and security. Using case studies and recent, topical examples, this book demonstrates how to successfully manage these risks and apply learnings in practice. Objectives, summaries and key point checklists in each chapter also help the reader grasp these key concepts and understand how to keep supply chains resilient. Online resources include lecture slides and example test questions.

ISBN

This book « The first edition, Supply Chain Risk Management, won the ACA Bruel Special Mention Prize in Paris for its contribution to the purchasing and supply chain industry « Explains key areas of supply chain risk management, such as cargo crime, climate change and cyber-crime « Provides case studies, such as Dell’s response to climate changes, the Port of Antwerp cyber breach and the Yemen Air Cargo Plot, to embed learning using applicable examples « New to this edition: a new chapter on ‘The threat of supply chain cyber crime’, additional case studies, the latest thinking on political risk as well as updates throughout « Online resources: lecture slides and example test questions

Product

Textbook/Professional

From political uncertainty to trade disrupts and cyber threats, the risk environment is continuously evolving, and new challenges frequently arise demanding immediate attention to avoid disruption to supply chains. Supply Chain Risk Management is the guide to recognizing, reviewing and reacting to these risks to ensure continued operations and optimal service. This book is a practical learning tool which offers a comprehensive framework to understanding risk and how to engineer resilience into the supply chain.

Risk Management

Supply Chain Risk Management How to Design and Manage Resilient Supply

Business ManagementContinuity

Business Continuity Management compares incident management, crisis response and business continuity and how to explain their importance to senior decision makers to ensure appropriate investment. Readers will benefit from case studies of organizational crises and disruptions, including Home Depot, Nissan, RBS, Facebook, Equifax and KFC, and an exploration of lessons learned from the COVID-19 pandemic. With key performance indicators, templates and checklists covering planning, response, reporting and assurance, this book is the essential reference for business continuity and resilience which can be tailored to any organization.

68 Risk Management Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents About the author 1 Introduction 1 Core principles 2 The evolution of resilience 3 What can we learn from international standards? 4 How business continuity and resilience differs between industries 5 Comparing continuitymanagementmanagement,incidentcrisisandbusiness 6 Good practice in crisis response 7 Lessons for business continuity and resilience from COVID-19 2 Guidance on delivering an effective business continuity capability 3 Gaining and maintaining the attention of the board 4 Developing the governance and implementing resources 5 Delivering the BIA and determining recovery strategies 6 Writing plans and procedures 7 Training and exercising 8 Supply chain resilience 9 Reviewing, auditing and improving 3 Templates and checklists 4 Plan contents and tips for completion 5 Response templates 6 Assurance scorecard 7 Index

This book « Explains how to implement the best practice contained in ISO 22301:2019 and deliver an effective business continuity capability Explores key lessons for business continuity and resilience professionals from the COVID-19 pandemic Features case studies of significant organizational crises and disruptions and explores the lessons learned, including Home Depot, Nissan and KFC « Contains templates and checklists covering planning, response, reporting and assurance, including a Business Impact Analysis « Tackles key issues including getting the Board engaged, obtaining real investment for resilience building and good practice in crisis response ImplementDescriptionpractical solutions in business continuity management and organizational resilience guided by international best practice from ISO 22301:2019.

Business continuity management and resilience are critical to maintaining a healthy business, but many organizations either do nothing (leaving themselves exposed to disruption), take short cuts (leaving major gaps) or fail to properly engage senior stakeholders. This book is a straightforward guide to delivering an effective business continuity capability, including practical solutions built from the author’s personal experience managing hundreds of projects in a variety of business settings.

A Practical Guide to Organizational Resilience and ISO 22301 Edition: 1 Date: 03/04/2021 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789668131 ISBN Ebook: 9781789668148 Pages: 344 Format (mm): 235x157 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Risk Management

Author Information James Crask is Global Lead for Resilience Advisory Services at Marsh, based in UK, working with clients to deliver resilience and business continuity solutions. He also chairs the International Standards Committee (ISO) responsible for all global Business Continuity and Organisational Resilience ISO Standards, including ISO 22301:2019. He previously worked for PwC where he was responsible for building the UK firm’s business resilience advisory services and has held roles for the Nuclear Decommissioning Authority in the UK and for the British Broadcasting Corporation (BBC).

Through adopting a strategic and progressive approach, practitioners can apply the book’s methodology to develop an in-depth understanding of resilience within their own organization and use it to effectively engage with the board and senior management in developing strategies for achieving greater resilience capability. A range of high-profile case studies, such as Mercedes, the UK’s National Health Service, Alibaba and BP, help to illustrate the concept of resilience by detailing characteristics and behaviours which confirm its meaning. The Organizational Resilience Handbook is a practical guide to self-assessment, benchmarking performance and implementing resilience frameworks in any organization.

Author Information Graham Bell is a consultant and trainer specialising in organizational resilience and the assessment and mitigation of business risks. He delivers a qualification course on organizational resilience regulated by Ofqual and has 30 years’ international experience in roles across manufacturing, telecoms, transport and energy sectors. He is a Fellow of the Institute for Strategy, Resilience & Security (ISRS), at University College London (UCL), and of the Institute of Strategic Risk Management (ISRM). He is also a member of the BSI Committee (CAR/001/01) tasked with the revision of BS 65000 Organization Resilience. Business, Finance, Risk, Information Edition:Management 1

« Explains

69 Risk Management Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 Contextual setting 2 Definitions and references 3 Reasoning and benefits 4 Case studies 5 The Organizational Resilience Capability Model® (ORCM) 6 Assessment and reporting 7 Other key issues and ideas 8 Application implementationand

The ResilienceOrganizationalHandbook

This book « Introduces a tool for organizational resilience capability which can be scaled and adapted to any business regardless of size or complexity how to conduct detailed assessments, report on resilience capability, benchmark performance, and develop strategies for achieving greater resilience Features case studies analyzing House of Fraser, Mercedes, Alibaba, BP, Transport for London and the WannaCry ransomware attack related topics such as knowledge management, security, organizational learning, compliance and business transformation Avoids the common pitfalls of focusing solely on unexpected events and crisis management Description

Date: 03/08/2020 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789661842 ISBN Ebook: 9781789661859 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 235x159 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Risk Management

For businesses to grow and be successful their approach to resilience must be defined by a holistic and risk-focused outlook, rather than one which is narrow and dominated by event-oriented continuity practices. The Organizational Resilience Handbook shows that success is as much to do with innovation and the speed with which new products are brought to market as it is with organizations having to deal with unexpected crisis situations. It comprehensively covers the full breadth and depth of the field and introduces related topics such as security, safety, e-commerce, emerging technologies and customer experience.

« Covers

The Risk Management Handbook offers readers knowledge of current best practice and a cuttingedge insight into new developments within risk management. Whether you are a risk professional wanting to stay abreast of your field, a student seeking a broad and up-to-date introduction to risk, or a business leader wanting to get to grips with the risks that face your business, this book will provide expert guidance.

1 Introducing risk [Dr David Hillson] 1 Multidimensional risk management 2 Enterprise Risk Management [Liz Taylor] 3 Governance, Risk and Compliance [Robert Toogood] 4 Operational Risk Management [Edward Sankey, with Dr Ariane Chapelle] 5 Project, programme and portfolio risk management [Dr Dale F Cooper] 6 Political risk management [Robert McKellar] 7 Reputational risk [Arif Zaman] 8 Supply chain risk management [Linda Conrad] 9 Business ManagementContinuity[IanClark] 10 Managing stakeholder risk [Dr Lynda Bourne and Patrick Weaver] 11 Ethics in risk management [Giusi Meloni] 12 Cyber risk management [Ben Rendle] 2 Emerging trends 3 Country risk management [Daniel Wagner] 4 Communicating uncertainty [Dr Veronica Bowman] 5 Risk-based decision making [Dr Keith Smith] 6 Risk leadership in complex organizations [Dr Richard Barber] 7 Resilience [Dr Erica Seville] 8 Organizational change management and risk [Dr Ruth Murray-Webster] 9 Risk culture [Alex Hindson] 10 Social media risk [Dr Greg Ker-Fox] 11 Risk in development aid practice [Magda Stepanyan] Epilogue: The future of risk management [Dr David Hillson]

70 Risk Management Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Table of Contents

The HandbookManagementRisk Business, Finance, Risk, Information Edition:Management 1 Date: 03/06/2016 Price: £42.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478827 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478834 Pages: 336 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Risk Management

Part One surveys these crucial application areas and provides a broad integrative framework for the differing contexts within which risk management is undertaken. Part Two explores emerging issues and techniques, from risk-based thinking to communicating uncertainty.

This book « Covers all the main areas of risk management in business, including cyber risk and political risk « Includes chapters from leading subject experts, outlining best practice and emerging developments « Highlights the key emerging issues in risk management for business, drawing on cutting-edge thinking « Uses a consistent framework to allow readers to easily compare practice in each area and apply insights Description Risk management is dynamic, with new risks continually being identified and risk management techniques adapting to new challenges.

The Risk Management Handbook gives a clear snapshot of the current state of play in the risk management landscape, and a look ahead to the key emerging issues in the field. Drawing together leading voices from the major risk management application areas - from GRC to supply chain risk, operational risk to cyber risk - this edited collection showcases best practice in each discipline and provides a succinct and coherent picture of the field as a whole.

Author Information Dr David Hillson is The Risk Doctor. He is an international risk management consultant, and leads The Risk Doctor Partnership (www.risk-doctor.com). He is recognized globally as an expert practitioner in risk management, and he has made several innovative contributions to the field. He consults, writes and speaks widely on the topic and has received many awards. David Hillson is an active Fellow of the Institute of Risk Management (IRM) where he was named the inaugural “Risk Personality of the Year” in 2010-11, and he was elected a Fellow of the Royal Society of Arts (RSA) to contribute to its Risk Commission.

Cyber ManagementRisk Prioritize Threats, Identify Vulnerabilities and Apply Controls Edition: 1 Date: 03/06/2019 Price: £42.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749484125 ISBN Ebook: 9780749484132 Pages: 416 Format (mm): 230x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Risk Management

Author Information Christopher J Hodson is Chief Information Security Officer (CISO), EMEA at Tanium. He has 18 years’ experience across the financial, retail, energy and media industry sectors and was previously CISO, EMEA and Data Protection Officer at Zscaler. He holds an MSc in Cyber Security from Royal Holloway and retains an active role in the Infosec industry through directorship of the Institute of Information Security Professionals (IISP) and membership of CompTIA’s Cyber Security Committee.

Examples and use cases including Yahoo, Facebook and TalkTalk, add context throughout and emphasize the importance of communicating security and risk effectively, while implementation review checklists bring together key points at the end of each chapter. Cyber Risk Management analyzes the innate human factors around risk and how they affect cyber awareness and employee training, along with the need to assess the risks posed by third parties. Including an introduction to threat modelling, this book presents a data-centric approach to cyber risk management based on business impact assessments, data classification, data flow modelling and assessing return on investment. It covers pressing developments in artificial intelligence, machine learning, big data and cloud mobility, and includes advice on responding to risks which are applicable for the environment and not just based on media sensationalism.

Most organizations are undergoing a digital transformation of some sort and are looking to embrace innovative technology, but new ways of doing business inevitably lead to new threats which can cause irreparable financial, operational and reputational damage. In an increasingly punitive regulatory climate, organizations are also under pressure to be more accountable and compliant. Cyber Risk Management clearly explains the importance of implementing a cyber security strategy and provides practical guidance for those responsible for managing threat events, vulnerabilities and controls, including malware, data leakage, insider threat and Denial-of-Service.

71 Risk Management Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 cybersecurityContextualizingrisk 1 Why now? The only constant is change 2 Technologies and security challenges 3 Data breaches 2 Cybersecurity programme management 3 What are cybersecurity and cybercrime? 4 Establishing a cybersecurity programme 3 Actors, events and vulnerabilities 4 Threat actors 5 Threat events 6 Vulnerabilities 7 Controls 4 Conclusion –cybersecurityTherisk equation explained 5 Cyber risk management – A conclusion This book « Provides guidance on managing common threats to confidentiality, integrity and availability including malware, data leakage, insider threat and Denial-of-Service « Includes examples and use cases including Yahoo, Facebook and TalkTalk, along with implementation review checklists at the end of each chapter « Explores how to prioritize relevant risks rather than those sensationalized by the media « Covers human factors around cyber risk and how they impact employee training and cyber awareness « Contains interviews with leading security and risk professionals from a variety of industries Description

The roles and responsivities of cyber operations in developing a culture of security

This book « Explains how organizations can achieve their digital transformation goals without creating undue cybersecurity risks « Brings together chapters written by senior practitioners of cybersecurity from a wide range of industry sectors « Based on principles that have been independently shown to improve cybersecurity by enhancing risk management, aligning business goals and creating a culture of security throughout an organization « Explores the roles and responsibilities of each department in managing cyber risk, including HR, Legal, Audit, M&A and Supply Chain Management « Reframes cybersecurity as a strategic business issue and translates board-level principles to the management level

72 Risk Management Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1

Why we need to take an enterprise-wide approach to cyber risk 1 The growing cyber threat –not just an “IT” issue View from the top – how boards are addressing cyber risk 3 Structuring the organization for the digital age 4 A modern approach to assessing cyber risk 2 How to manage cyber risk from an perspectiveenterprise-wide 3 The roles and responsibilities of human managementresourceincybersecurity 4 The roles and responsibilities of legal and general counsel 5 The roles and responsibilities of audit and compliance 6 Cybersecure supply chain and third-party management 7 The roles and responsibilities of technical operations 8 The roles and responsibilities of external communications and crisis management 9 The roles and responsibilities in mergers and acquisitions 10

BalanceDescriptionthebenefits of digital transformation with the associated risks with this guide to effectively managing cybersecurity as a strategic business issue.

Important and cost-effective innovations can substantially increase cyber risk and the loss of intellectual property, corporate reputation and consumer confidence. Over the past several years, organizations around the world have increasingly come to appreciate the need to address cybersecurity issues from a business perspective, not just from a technical or risk angle. Cybersecurity for Business builds on a set of principles developed with international leaders from technology, government and the boardroom to lay out a clear roadmap of how to meet goals without creating undue cyber risk.

This essential guide outlines the true nature of modern cyber risk, and how it can be assessed and managed using modern analytical tools to put cybersecurity in business terms. It then describes the roles and responsibilities each part of the organization has in implementing an effective enterprisewide cyber risk management program, covering critical issues such as incident response, supply chain management and creating a culture of security. Bringing together a range of experts and senior leaders, this edited collection enables leaders and students to understand how to manage digital transformation and cybersecurity from a business perspective.

Cybersecurity for

Author Information Internet Security Alliance provides thought leadership in cybersecurity and works with the US government to advocate for public policy that will advance the interests of cybersecurity. Larry Clinton is President of the Internet Security Alliance. He advises industry and government on cyber policy and regularly appears in the media to provide an expert opinion. He has briefed NATO, the Organization of American States (OAS), G-20 and the US Congress. He has twice been named to the NACD ‘Directorship 100’ list of the most influential individuals in corporate governance. Business Organization-Wide Strategies to Ensure Cyber Risk Is Not Just an IT Edition:Issue 1 Date: 03/04/2022 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398606142 ISBN Ebook: 9781398606395 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Risk Management

Paperback:

This book « Explains the underlying behavioural and organizational risks that can leave organisations vulnerable to what can be catastrophic reputational damage Provides a framework and insights that will help risk managers and boards to focus on and deal with the fundamental behavioural risks that underlie reputational risks Reveals how and why these risks remain hidden for long periods before emerging unexpectedly, giving readers the incentive to troubleshoot for their organizations well before trouble emerges Uses a wide variety of real-life case studies - BP, Barclays, AIG, Volkswagen and the NHS - and examples of organizations that have suffered reputation damage to draw out insights

Professional

ReputationalRethinking Risk

An essential read for risk professionals, business leaders and board members who need to understand and deal with business-critical threats to their reputation, this book presents a new framework that will be invaluable for all involved in safeguarding an organization’s reputation.

ADescriptioncompany’sreputation is one of its most valuable assets, and reputational risk is high on the agenda at board level and amongst regulators. Rethinking Reputational Risk explains the hidden factors which can both cause crises and tip an otherwise survivable crisis into a reputational disaster.

73 Risk Management Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Rethinking 1 Introduction 2 Reputation Basics 3 How Reputations are lost 4 What is Reputational Risk? 5 The hole in Classical Risk Management 6 Stakeholder Behaviour 7 Risks from failing to communicate and learn 8 Character, Culture and Ethos 9 Incentives 10 Complexity 11 Board composition, Skill, Knowledge, Experience and Behaviour 12 Risks from Strategy and Change 13 Incubation and complacency 14 The special role – and Risks –of leaders 2 Case studies 3 BP: Texas City Explosion 4 BP: Deepwater Horizon 5 Tesco PLC 6 American International Group (AIG) 7 EADS Airbus A380 21 Volkswagen 22 Mid Staffordshire NHS Foundation Trust (Stafford Hospital) 3 Practicalities 4 The way forward 5 System Basics – Getting to ‘go’ 6 Setting up the Reputational Risk Management System 7 Operating the Reputational Risk Management System

Management

Reputations are lost when the perception of an organization is damaged by its behaviour not meeting stakeholder expectations. Rethinking Reputational Risk lays bare the actions, inactions and local ‘states of normality’ that can lead to perception-changing consequences and gives readers the insight to recognize and respond to the risks to their reputations. Using case studies, such as BP’s Deepwater Horizon oil spill, Volkswagen’s emissions rigging scandal, Tesco, AIG, EADS Airbus A380, and MidStaffordshire NHS Hospital Trust, and analysis of their failures, this hard-hitting guide also applies lessons drawn from behavioural economics to the behavioural risks that underlie reputation risk.

Author Information Anthony Fitzsimmons is Chairman of Reputability LLP and an authority and leading thinker on reputational risk and the propensity of behavioural and organizational risks to cause reputational damage. Derek Atkins BSc PhD MIMMM CEng FCIM FCII Chartered Insurer was a visiting Professor at Cass Business School, London, teaching risk management, reputational risk, and insurance, and a partner in Reputability LLP. He was the co-author of a dozen books. How to Manage Risks that can 1 Date: 03/01/2017 Price: £32.99 ISBN 9780749477363 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477370 Pages: 336 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Subject: Risk

Ruin Your Business, Your Reputation and Edition:You

the

1 Date:

74 Strategy Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1 Competing for tomorrow, today 2 Build dynamic capacityThrive in 4IR 3 Sense & Make Sense 4 Seize & Replicate 5 Reposition & Reconfigure 3 Drive audacious growth - Be purpose-led 4 Purpose-led, forward-leaning 5 Ambidextrous - ‘Both AND’ mindset 6 Continuous evolution 4 Win the 4IR talent race 5 The race to develop 4IR talent 6 Deploy talent with fluid teaming 7 Human-centred workforce management - Duty of care 5 Dynamic advantage 6 Superior performance in 4IR 7 Summary 8 Boosters and key themes This book « Explains what businesses need to do to thrive in the increasingly uncertain context of the fourth industrial revolution, and how this can be achieved « Illustrates the importance of establishing long term strategy, despite the turbulence and unpredictability of the markets, and provides tools and techniques to make these decisions « Outlines the dynamic capabilities firms require to achieve competitively superior performance, with examples of good practice and advice on how to strengthen areas of relative weakness « Includes a self-assessment questionnaire to assess the dynamic capacity of your organization, which can be an indicator of future performance « Draws on robust research which tracked organizations over five years as well as the author’s experience as an international business consultant LONGLISTED:Description

Author Information Stephen Wyatt is Professor of Strategy and Leadership at the University of Bath. For over 25 years he has been a business consultant focused on developing leaders and enabling organizations to thrive in highly dynamic environments. He is also Affiliate Faculty at Singapore Management University and Industrial Associate at the University of Cambridge, and serves on the boards of the Global Innovation Management Institute and the Management Consulting Institute.

Price:

Professional

Edition:Performance 03/11/2020 £19.99 9781789666809 ISBN Ebook: 9781789666816 280 (mm): 235x152 Text/ Subject:

Pages:

Format

CMI Management Book of the Year 2021

Building on the ‘dynamic capabilities’ approach already familiar to strategists and based around his own research, Stephen Wyatt shows how executives can assess the dynamic capacity of their organization - a leading indicator of future performance in comparison to their industry peers.

Product Category: Supplementary

Strategy

Management and Leadership in the 4th RevolutionIndustrial Capabilities to Achieve Superior

Written in an accessible style with best practice examples from companies and quotes from executives to support each insight, this book includes a self-assessment questionnaire to measure the dynamic capacity of your organization and advice on how to strengthen areas of relative weakness. Management and Leadership in the 4th Industrial Revolution offers timely insights on driving innovation and emphasizes the importance of long-term strategy, change management and new models of dynamic leadership.

The business world is currently experiencing fundamental disruption, in part driven by the technology enabled Fourth Industrial Revolution. Corporate value is created and lost in breathtakingly short periods, and the rise of ‘unicorns’ against the demise of once-venerated organizations has shown that how firms compete has changed. Management and Leadership in the 4th Industrial Revolution presents a framework for managing and winning in the new accelerated world of business, focusing on the key capabilities organizations now need to achieve competitively superior performance.

ISBN Paperback:

This book « Explores what senior managers can do to make better strategic decisions in a business environment of uncertainty, ambiguity and confusion « Shows how to test, evaluate and refine strategic interventions before cascading throughout the whole organization « Provides guidance on how to combat decision-making bias and organizational inertia

75 Strategy Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents

Strategic Decision Making

Author Information Dr Simon Haslam is a Chartered Director, strategy consultant and strategy programme lead at the Institute of Directors. He is a Visiting Fellow at Durham University Business School and co-owns the research and consulting firm FMR Research. He consults internationally to public,private and third sector organisations. Dr Ben Shenoy helps organizations apply behavioural insights to a variety of business issues, through executive education, speaking engagements and applied research. He is a Visiting Professor at The London School of Economics and Director of the Business Insights Lab at the University of Surrey.

Introduction - Why Strategic Decision Making needs to become Discovery-led 1 The World is Changing, but we don’t always see it Organizational Inertia - Why Enterprises find it Difficult to Change Top-down Decisions Middle-Out Decisions Discovery-Led Decision Making Mode I - Framing Mode II - Experimenting 8 Mode III - Scaling 9 Implications for Organisations The Force that is You

Packed with real world examples and backed up by academic research, Strategic Decision Making will allow today’s leaders and the leaders of tomorrow to make successful and defensible business choices. It shows how to: avoid decision-making bias, overcome organizational inertia, manage the difficulties of rigid organizational structures and avoid being side tracked by outdated or irrelevant experience. Essential reading for business practitioners and management students alike, this comprehensive guide provides a robust approach to achieving strategic success.

Description Making strategic decisions is a fundamental skill for leaders and managers. However, in a business environment that is in a constant state of change, making strategic decisions has never been more difficult. Strategic Decision Making addresses this challenge by providing a framework that can be used to make sound decisions in an uncertain world. Structured around the core concepts of framing, experimenting and scaling, this book will ensure that efforts are focused where the need is greatest, that interventions are tested, evaluated and revised if necessary and that successful initiatives are effectively rolled out across the business.

« Features examples from Ryanair, Netflix, HMV, Komatsu, Caterpillar, Ericsonn, Tesco and McDonalds

A Discovery-Led Approach to Critical Choices in Turbulent Times Edition: 1 Date: 03/01/2018 Price: £32.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749472603 ISBN Ebook: 9780749472610 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x157 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Strategy

Resetting Management helps leaders understand why business agility matters. Agility releases a new level of energy, innovation and entrepreneurship, enabling organizations to respond to disruption while still delivering business strategies with rigour and efficiency. Using diagnostic tools and practical models, the book describes how to master the essential components and principles of agility and respond to uncertain and fast-changing environments.

ManagementResetting

Thrive with Agility in the Age of Edition:Uncertainty 1 Date: 03/06/2021 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789667172 ISBN Ebook: 9781789667189 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Strategy

competitive advantage with flexibility is essential for any business in today’s turbulent world. How do you go beyond trendy buzzwords and master the principles of business agility?

76 Strategy Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 A Call to Action (Why) 1 Why Agility? 2 The What of Business AgilityReshaping How Organizations Make Choices 2 A New Agility Landscape (What) 3 Strategic Agility 4 Ramping Up Organizational Agility Without a Profound Overhaul of the Hierarchy 5 Intermediate Stage of Organizational AgilityPockets of Agility, Powered by Agile Methods 6 Organizational Agility: The Pioneers of New Organizational Forms 7 Leadership Agility 3 How to Transform for Agility Successfully 4 Managing the Trade-offs of Strategic Agility 5 Navigating the Challenges of Implementing Agile Methods 6 Managing the Trade-offs of Radically New Organizational Forms 7 Final words This book « Dispels the ambiguity around on-trend buzzwords and explains how executives can deliver flexibility and entrepreneurship at a strategic, organizational and leadership level « Includes case studies from companies including General Electric, Lego, Accor Hotels, ING, LVMH and Deutsche Telecom « Explains why business agility is much more than agile « Provides diagnostic tools to measure a business’ starting level of agility and practical models to help any business to start and sustain a successful agility transformation « Shows that it is possible to embrace uncertainty, rather than fear it TheDescriptionabilitytorenew

Featuring case studies from some of the world’s leading companies and illustrating how they have successfully and less successfully transformed for greater agility - including Lego, General Electric, LMVH and ING - Stéphane J.G. Girod and Martin Králik provide leaders with the skills to master the transformation journey that is right for their business.

Author Information Stéphane J.G. Girod is Professor of Strategy and Organizational Innovation at IMD business school in Lausanne, Switzerland. He writes a column in Forbes.com and his opinion pieces have been carried by China Daily, The Economist, BBC News, Tribune de Genève and The Times. Before joining IMD he was Manager of the Accenture Institute for High Performance, based in London. Martin Králik is an IMD external associate, based in Southeast Europe. Before IMD, he worked with Insead and the International Data Corporation.

In response to this problem, evidence-based management has evolved with the goal of improving the quality of decision-making by using critically evaluated evidence from multiple sources - organizational data, professional expertise, stakeholder values and scientific literature. This book sets out and explains the specific skills needed to gather, understand and use evidence to make better-informed organizational decisions.

ManagementEvidence-Based

How to Use Evidence to Make Better Organizational Decisions Edition: 1 Date: 03/09/2018 Price: £36.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749483746 ISBN Ebook: 9780749483753 Pages: 392 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Strategy

Table of Contents Evidence-based management: the basic principles (with Rob Briner) ASK: Critical questions about assumed problems and preferred solutions Evidence from practitioners ACQUIRE: Evidence from practitioners APPRAISE: Evidence from practitioners Evidence from the scientific literature A short introduction to science (with Rob Briner) ACQUIRE: Evidence from the scientific literature APPRAISE: Evidence from the scientific literature (with Rob Briner) Evidence from the organization ACQUIRE: Evidence from the organization (with Martin Walker) APPRAISE: Evidence from the organization (with Martin Walker) Evidence from stakeholders 5 ACQUIRE: Evidence from stakeholders 6 APPRAISE: Evidence from stakeholders AGGREGATE: Weighing and pulling together the evidence 8 APPLY: Incorporating the evidence into the decisionmaking process (with Alessandra Capezio) 9 ASSESS: Evaluate the outcome of the decision taken 10 Building the capacity for evidence-based management 11 Guidelines for critically appraised topics

77 Strategy Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Evidence-Based Management is a comprehensive guide that provides current and future managers, consultants and organizational leaders with the knowledge and practical skills to improve the quality and outcome of their decision-making. Online resources include case studies, exercises, lecture slides and further reading.

Author Information Eric Barends is Managing Director of the Center for Evidence-Based Management and advises management teams and boards of directors on evidence-based management and decision-making. He is also a visiting lecturer at New York University, Australian National University and VU University Amsterdam. Denise M Rousseau is the H J Heinz II University Professor of Organizational Behavior and Public Policy at Carnegie Mellon University’s Heinz College and Tepper School of Business. She was formerly the President of the Academy of Management and is an adviser to numerous social enterprises, professional associations, and governmental and for-profit organizations.

This book « Explains what information qualifies as evidence and how it can drive better organizational decisions « Outlines how to improve the quality of organizational decisions by using data from multiple sources including organizational data, professional expertise, stakeholder values and scientific literature « Shows how to critically analyze and evaluate evidence in order to get the most out of it « Online resources: Lecture slides, case studies, exercises and further reading Description

Decisions in businesses and organizations are too often based on fads, fashions and the success stories of famous CEOs. At the same time, traditional models and new cutting-edge solutions often fail to deliver on what they promise. This situation leaves managers, business leaders, consultants and policymakers with a profound challenge: how can we stay away from trends and quick fixes, and instead use valid and reliable evidence to support the organization?

This book « Explores how the role of strategist should adapt to face new challenges and drive the corporate agenda Is based on original research from the prestigious Institute of Management and Strategy, University of St. Gallen on the day-to-day practice of strategy and the practical implications of current challenges rather than the theory Looks at various strategic roles, including managers, strategy consultants and Chief Strategy Officers strategists to reflect their

« Focuses

own role Description

Date: 03/02/2020 Price: £32.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789661125 ISBN Ebook: 9781789661132 Pages: 336 Format (mm): 230x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Strategy

Edition:Management 1

78 Strategy Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Professionalizing strategists 2 The executive as strategist 3 Chief strategy officer 4 Strategists at headquarters 5 Strategists’ competencies 6 A strategist’s tools 7 Looking ahead 8 Appendices 9 References 10 Index

« Allows

Author Information Prof. em. Dr. Günter Müller-Stewens is Professor Emeritus of Management (previously Executive Director) at the Institute of Management and Strategy at the University of St. Gallen. He is a member of multiple boards of international organizations, works as a consultant and trainer for a variety of companies, and is the recipient of several international awards. He researches and teaches on matters of strategic management and has co-authored nearly 400 publications, including Radical Business Model Transformation and The Management of Luxury (both published by Kogan Page). Business,

on and legitimate

As organizations face an unprecedented rate of change, how should the role of the strategist adapt to address new challenges? Based on original research and consulting projects from the Institute of Management and Strategy, University of St. Gallen, The New Strategist is a practical guide which explains how to execute strategy, not just think about the theory. It examines day-to-day strategy work, explores the competences required by strategic leaders, and maps out the strategist’s tools of the trade, including processes, initiatives and discourse.

Using a rich and unique data set, this book looks at the roles of different strategists in an organization and emphasizes the importance of managers and strategy consultants as well as Chief Strategy Officers and other leaders. Crucially, The New Strategist focuses on the practice of strategy rather than the theory, answering key questions around how professional strategists should work and which methods and techniques they should draw upon. This timely and authoritative text will support and strengthen managers in fulfilling their strategic leadership responsibilities, allowing them to contribute to the professionalization of the field and ensure their role is suitable for the future of business.

Finance, Risk, Information

The New Strategist

3 Drivers

79 Strategy Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents

About the authors Why business models need to radically shift How business mainstreamtransformationmodelbecame Working with the Business Transformation Board Navigating the business model journeytransformation of business model transformation How to assess your current and target business model to lead a radical shift of your business model from organizationstransformationalsuccessful studies of companies radically shifting the level of inclusiveness studies of companies radically shifting the level of customization Case studies of companies that sequence multiple radical shifts How to move forward 5 Mastering transformationalthe leadership challenge 6 Designing your business model transformation path 7 Index

This book « Addresses business model transformation as a leadership challenge providing actionable tools and guidance for companies Provides insights into organizations that have made radical shifts including SAP, Netflix and Daimler New to this edition: updated case studies with a global focus, new literature to keep up-to-date with the academic discourse and new chapters on areas such as Digital Transformation

4 Case

HowDescriptioncanorganizations complete a major business model transformation and how can leaders successfully guide their business through this radical shift?

As markets are constantly transformed by new technologies and disruptor competitors, once successful business models designed to function in a different time now struggle as the mainstream changes. This book is the guide for organizations looking to turn downward trends into upward momentum and gain an edge on the competition.

Now in its second edition, this book offers practical advice on how to understand the fit of an existing business model and reconstruct it with a forward-thinking approach. New illustrative case studies of global organizations which have boldly transformed offer examples for change, including SAP, Netflix and Daimler. Business transformation is presented as a leadership challenge and methods to realize and implement opportunities for innovation company-wide are discussed in detail. Radical Business Model Transformation is essential reading for business leaders, transformation experts and MBA students interested in ensuring that their business model is future-proof and can withstand the new proliferation of innovations set to transform the business landscape.

5 How

Alexander Zimmermann is Chaired Professor of Entrepreneurship and Strategic Management and Executive Director of the MBA in Technology and Innovation at the University of Liechtenstein. As well as teaching he acts as a moderator and coach to assist companies’ strategic and organizational transformation processes. TransformationModel

5 Case

BusinessRadical

Author Information Carsten Linz is leading organizations to transform for the digital-intelligent age. During his 20 years in executive roles focused on software and data fueled growth, he has built several €100 million businesses and led company-wide transformation programs. His most recent roles include Group Digital Officer at BASF, Business Development Officer at SAP, and Global Head of the Center for Digital Leadership. He holds senior advisory roles, e.g. for the World Economic Forum’s ‘Digital Platforms and Ecosystems’ project, serves on the committee of Europe’s largest seed stage fund, and teaches in Executive programs at leading business schools. His blog is carstenlinz.com.

Günter Müller-Stewens is Professor Emeritus of the Institute of Management and Strategy at the University of St. Gallen, Switzerland. His most recent main research interest is corporate strategy, as well as the competencies and contributions of strategists in organizations.

How Leading Organizations Have Successfully Adapted to Disruption

Edition: 2 Date: 03/10/2020 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789661965 ISBN Ebook: 9781789661972 Pages: 368 Format (mm): 230x150 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Strategy

3 Learning

80 Strategy Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 A theory of everything 1 Introduction to strategy and behaviour 2 Strategy, change and behavioural psychology 3 A common language 4 Behaviour – The least common denominator 2 Arbitrariness is over 3 Old management principles are no longer good enough 4 The organization, its development and lack of development 5 Evidence and measurement 3 Unexpected simplicity 4 Behaviour – The foundation of everything 5 Activators – The igniting spark 6 Consequences – No feedback is also feedback 4 Strategy is behavioural change 5 A behavioural view of strategy 6 To realise strategy is to change 7 Exploiting advantagescompetitive–Big,best, fast and beautiful 5

Grounded in practitioner experience and academic research, this book argues that to achieve set goals organizations should spend less time planning and sending out instructions and more time on providing feedback on implementation and drawing out key points to be learned. By focusing on behaviour in this way, organizations can create a culture where innovation is encouraged and employees want to contribute to the company’s future. Ensure long-term success and seize competitive advantage with this essential guide to identifying the key behaviours which will create business results and what influences them.

Advancing Strategy through Behavioural Psychology shows that by identifying which behaviours should be measured and encouraged, organizations can succeed in implementing strategies for continuous adaptation in a rapidly changing business environment.

The realisation of strategy is entirely dependent on employee behaviour, so in order to achieve business results it is vital that managers and leaders develop an understanding of human behaviour.

Advancing Strategy through Competitive Advantage in Relentlessly Changing Markets

Smart as a competitive advantage From individual insight to competitive edge Smart and strategisingbehavioural 8 The future of competitive advantage

PsychologyBehavioural Create

Edition: 1 Date: 03/04/2022 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398604827 ISBN Ebook: 9781398604865 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Strategy

This book « Explains how managers and leaders can influence, measure and reinforce employee behaviours that lead to actual results « Brings together academic theories and practitioner experience drawn from behavioural psychology, strategy and change management « Explores how adopting a behavioural approach leads to greater adaptability in rapidly changing business circumstances « Considers the importance of understanding behaviour in encouraging innovation and improving employee engagement « Proves that by spending less time on giving instructions and more time on follow-up, feedback and learning, organizations can achieve better results

AccelerateDescriptionstrategy and achieve desired results with this guide to understanding and influencing employee behaviour, based on the theory and practice of strategic management, behavioural psychology and change.

Author Information Pontus Wadström is an independent consultant and advisor in strategy and change based in Stockholm, Sweden, and has worked with all types and sizes of organization in almost all industries. He is also an affiliate researcher and lecturer at KTH Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm. His research focus is on how large and complex organizations ‘do’ strategy in practice, all influenced by his previous studies in both management and behavioural psychology.

81 Strategy Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Author Information Paul Hague is the Founder of B2B International Ltd, a global market research company. He is fellow of the Market Research Society and the author of ten books, sharing 30 years of practical experience in market research and marketing. He is a visiting fellow at Manchester Metropolitan University and a guest lecturer at Manchester Business School. His books have been translated into Italian, Indonesian, Bulgarian, Polish, Portuguese and Chinese.

The Business Models Handbook Business, Finance, Risk, Information Edition:Management 1 Date: 03/01/2019 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481872 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481889 Pages: 336 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Professional Subject: Strategy

The Business Models Handbook brings together the most helpful and widely used templates and frameworks into a single, invaluable resource. Each chapter focuses on an individual business framework, giving an overview of 50 of the best known frameworks and how it will help an organization grow and be profitable. Each supported by a real-world case study, these include ANSOFF matrix, Price-Quality-Strategy model, Stage-Gate model, Service Profit Chain and many more.

This book « Presents well-known and respected business models in their purest form, ensuring readers can trust them to dependably solve business challenges in any context and avoid the unreliable, re-purposed versions so often found online « Provides a clear explanation of every model’s history, along with relevant theory, business application and real-world case studies « Helps readers add structure and clarity to business problems, and gives them templates they can apply to overcome their own professional challenges « Brings together 50 of the most valuable business models into one reliable resource, including AIDA, Branding Pentagram, Disruptive Innovation Model, Gap Analysis, Porter’s Five Forces, SWOT and many more « Online Resources: lecture slides to support each chapter Description Business frameworks sit at the heart of every successful business. They add structure and clarity to business problems and can help practitioners overcome the everyday challenges they face.

Authored by a leading global market researcher with a background working on over 3,000 different research projects, The Business Models Handbook is an invaluable resource for any student or professional. Online resources include lecture slides that align with each chapter.

82 Strategy Business, Risk and Information Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 Your mind at work 2 The art of effective decision making 3 Sharing decisions with others 4 Key problem-solving strategies 5 How to generate ideas 6 Thinking outside the box 7 Developing your thinking skills

Strategy

This book « Provides tried and trusted methods to evaluate your own decision-making processes and helps you implement these decisions « Is written by the leadership guru and bestselling author John Adair, with over 500,000 books sold and translations into 25 languages « Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential work skills to help you develop your career « New to this edition: updated case studies and examples as well as revised top tips and interactive, reflective exercises

This 5th edition now features even more practical exercises, useful templates, and top tips to provide a clear framework that can generate ideas and inspire confidence in your team - so you can spot the solution in every problem, and create ideas to rival even the best strategists.

Product

ThoughtDescriptionleaderJohn Adair provides the techniques and insights you need to find solutions, spark creativity and confidently make the right decisions.

Decision Making and Problem Solving Break Through Barriers and Banish Uncertainty at Work

83 Innovation & Creativity Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction experimentationto in business 2 What we really mean by ‘experiments’ 3 Ten principles of successful business experiments 4 A ‘typology’ of experiments 5 The benefits experimentationof – And what inhibits managers from using it 6 An overview of the experiment process 7 Identify 8 Discovery 9 Ideation 10 Define 11 Experiment 12 Evaluation

ExperimentationBusiness

Dr Jules Goddard is the leading proponent and practitioner of action learning programmes at London Business School, UK. He was the first person to be appointed Gresham Professor of Commerce and now serves as a member of the Council of the Royal Institute of Philosophy.

A Practical Guide for Driving Innovation and Performance in Your Edition:Business 1 Date: 03/09/2021 Price: £24.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398601673 ISBN Ebook: 9781398601680 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Innovation & Creativity

This business experiment methodology can be used to support a one-off initiative or to underpin desired behaviours as part of a wider organizational change programme, as experimentation encourages people to be bold, take risks and seek new ways of doing things. Based on programmes the authors have run with a variety of leading organizations and with astonishing results, this practical guide provides businesses with the confidence to get started with experimentation and the tools to succeed.

This book Explains how carrying out experiments can introduce and reinforce the competences that support an innovative and agile organization Includes case studies and examples of successful experiments concerning problem solving, performance improvement and strategic innovation Contains downloadable templates, worksheets and activities to accompany each stage of the experimentation process Explores how experimentation can be used to change behaviours as well as systems and processes, with evidence from the authors’ work with leading organizations Outlines the pressing need for organizations to re-assess their priorities and business direction in today’s fast-changing climate BusinessDescriptionexperimentation can not only create measurable value for organizations, it can provide the inspiration to break with the habits of the past by dealing with challenges and exploiting opportunities. This book is a step-by-step, practical guide to the six-stage business experiment process, from understanding the problem or opportunity to creating a hypothesis, planning the experiment and analysing the findings. It explores the top design criteria for successful and impactful business experiments and includes valuable case studies covering problem solving, performance improvement and strategic innovation. To support the process, Business Experimentation also includes downloadable, editable templates, worksheets and activities for use in ideation and planning sessions.

Author Information Rob James established his own leadership consultancy practice in 2003 after senior roles in executive development at PwC. In this practice, and as a Programme Director at London Business School, he has worked globally across many industry sectors using experimentation to create greater value for businesses.

www.koganpage.com EntrepreneurshipCareersEmployability,& Innovation and Best Practice in WorkplaceTestingJobSpecificCareerStudyEntrepreneurshipSkillsDevelopmentCareersSeekingSkills

Choose from our curated ebooks collections to prepare your students for the world of work. Skills, Careers & EbookEmployabilityCollections 4 How to Manage People The Mindset of Success How to Be an Even ManagerBetter No. of ebooks: 26 First-time manager Motivate students to progress in their careers and achieve their ambitions. 1Ace your selection tests Help students develop essential testing skills to gain a competitive edge. PsychometricUltimateTests How to Pass Advanced ReasoningVerbalTests AptitudeUltimateTests No. of ebooks: 29 2 Job-Ready Guide PresentationsUltimate CentreAssessmentSuccess No. of ebooks: 17 Find and get the job you want Inspire students to take the first step in their career and provide a path to success. 3 Confident Coding Dealing with Difficult People ConfidentContentDigital No. of ebooks: 30 Early career success Equip students with vital skills to support their career development. Contact us at corporate-enquiries@koganpage.com Your library or careers service can choose a collection above or create your own bespoke collection. Unlimited concurrent users | MARC records | LMS/VLE www.koganpage.com/collectionsintegration

Edition: 10 Date: 03/02/2021 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789667370 ISBN Ebook: 9781789667387 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Entrepreneurship

86 Entrepreneurship Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents 1 Strategy and purpose 1 Introduction 2 Assignment 1:Coming up with a winning idea for your business plan 3 Assignment 2:Strategy – the big picture 4 Assignment 3:You and your team 2 Market research 3 Introduction 4 Assignment 4:Researching customers 5 Assignment 5:Researching competitors 6 Assignment 6:A plan for market research 3 Competitive marketing strategies 4 Introduction 5 Assignment 7:Products and/or services 6 Assignment 8:Pricing 7 Assignment 9:Advertising and promotion 8 Assignment 10:Place and distribution 9 Assignment 11:People, process and physical environment 10 Assignment 12:Competing online 4 Operations 5 Introduction 6 Assignment 13:The selling methods plan 7 Assignment 14:Making, outsourcing and supplies 8 Assignment 15:Legal and regulatory factors 5 Reviewing requirementsfinancingandoptions 6 Introduction 7 Assignment 16:The sales forecast 8 Assignment 17:Cash-flow projections 9 Assignment 18:The profit and loss account 10 Assignment 19:The balance sheet 11 Assignment 20:Break-even analysis 12 Assignment 21:Estimating financing requirements 13 Assignment 22:Stress testing your business projections 6 Business controls 7 Introduction 8 Assignment 23:Financial controls 9 Assignment 24:Sales and marketing controls 10 Assignment 25:Other business controls 7 Writing up and presenting your business plan 8 Introduction 9 Assignment 26:Writing up and presenting your business plan 10 Index of key organizations and resources for business planning This book « Enables readers to research and complete a winning business plan by highlighting 24 separate areas of development with corresponding assignments « Is based on teaching methodology which was developed at one of the UK’s best business schools, Cranfield School of Management « Contains close to 70 case studies of business planning that are behind a myriad of business ventures that include Richer Sounds, Eat 17, The Northern Dough Company, Catalan and Secret Escapes « New to this edition: Has been streamlined to ensure readers spend time where it matters and also includes updated information resources, new case studies and updated financial projection assignments « Online Resources: Includes slide deck for lecturers and downloadable templates LayDescriptiondownthefoundations of a successful business venture through a thoroughly researched and competitive business plan.

Author Information Colin Barrow has lectured in business schools in the UK, the USA, Australia, the Far East and throughout Europe. A former visiting fellow at Cranfield School of Management, he is the author of the 30 Day MBA series, Financial Management for the Small Business and Starting a Business from Home (all published by Kogan Page).

The

Paul Barrow is a visiting fellow at Cranfield and also a consultant advising SMEs on growth strategies.

Robert Brown is a visiting fellow at Cranfield and directed the Graduate Enterprise Programme there, where he led a course on entrepreneurship.

Business Plan Workbook

Based on tried and tested business methodology used at the leading business school, Cranfield School of Management, this 10th edition of The Business Plan Workbook guides you through all the necessary steps to constructing a winning business plan. This is a practical run-through of 26 key areas of development of strategic planning. It will allow you to think of these areas in isolation through the use of assignments that ensure you have stress-tested your business proposition. This guide covers how to - Come up with a winning business idea - Complete market and competitive research - Set up a winning marketing strategy - Forecast watertight financials and projections - Define realistic operations and staffing - Deliver an unforgettable pitch to potential backers and investors

Business & Management

This new and fully updated edition includes 67 business case studies that show you how successful entrepreneurs have dealt with strategic planning in the past. The content has been streamlined to focus on the most critical parts of business planning, ensuring you spend time where it matters and stay competitive. With new information resources and financial planning consideration, this is an invaluable guide for entrepreneurs, business executives and students.

How to Write a Business Plan Win Backing and Support for Your Ideas and Ventures Edition: 7 Date: 03/07/2022 Price: £12.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398605640 ISBN Ebook: 9781398605657 Pages: 192 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Entrepreneurship

Whether it is to raise finance, sell a business or develop a specific project, this is your one-stop guide to producing the most professional and convincing business plan for a new venture. This 7th edition now features even more practical exercises, useful templates and top tips to help you write a comprehensive and compelling plan, as well as content on digital developments such as crowdfunding, online retailing and digital marketing.

87 Entrepreneurship Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 The structure of the plan 3 Summary 4 The business background 5 The market 6 Operations 7 Management 8 The proposal 9 The forecast 10 Financial information 11 Risks 12 Legal issues confidentialityand 13 Selling your business 14 Improve business performance 15 Bidding for business

Author Information Brian Finch is an independent consultant, with considerable experience of preparing and delivering effective business plans, as well as advising others on their preparation of winning material. He is the author of Effective Financial Management, also published by Kogan Page. He is based in London, UK.

IfDescriptionyouarestarting or selling your own business, or wanting to expand your company, business plans are essential. Get expert guidance on how to make an impact with your business plan and successfully communicate your strategic vision.

This book « An accessible guide to producing the most professional and convincing business plans, including advice on plans for internal as well as external company use « Provides invaluable help with the sales forecast and compiling of all the necessary financial information

« Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential work skills to help you develop your career « New to this edition: updated to include new ways of sourcing finance such as crowd funding, revisions to business legislation and advice on risk, legal issues and confidentiality

Using their own words to reflect upon their experiences, these cases do not gloss over the setbacks and the dead-ends social entrepreneurs can face. Instead, readers will gain a realistic insight into the challenges and an engaging look at the problem-solving mindset needed to overcome them. From a life-saving project to bring solar-powered lighting to midwives in Nigeria, to a news dissemination service that’s grown from small beginnings to have a global impact, each case study draws out the lessons learnt by the innovators, providing guidance and advice for those looking to follow in their footsteps. Social Entrepreneurship and Innovation is an invaluable resource for social entrepreneurs and innovators looking for new ideas and insight into what really works - and what doesn’t.

13 Power to the [TarikReengineeringPeople:DemocracyNeshNashofGovright]

2 Closing Latin America’s Digital Divide [Rodrigo Baggio of Centre for Digital Inclusion (CDI)]

8 Touch-Based Treatment for Autism [Louisa Silva of Qigong Sensory Training Institute (QSTI)]

Table of Contents

Introduction [Ken Banks of kiwanja.net] 1 Wonders of the Solar System: Reducing Maternal Mortality in Developing Regions [Laura Stachel of We Care Solar]

12 The Reluctant Geneticist [Sharon Terry of Genetic Alliance]

10 Let a Billion Readers Bloom [Brij Kothari of Planet Read]

11 Keep Calm and Dream in Tunisia: ToumiWomenThroughinSustainableSupportingDevelopmentTunisiaandNorthAfricaEmpoweringYouth,andFarmers[SarahofDreaminTunisia]

9 Reconnecting the Disconnected: A Story of Technology, Refugees and Finding Lost Family [David and Christopher Mikkelsen of Refugees United]

3 Patent Wars: Fighting Big Pharma to Enable Access to Drugs for All [Priti Radhakrishnan of I-MAK]

This book « Showcases innovative solutions to social problems through case studies from Africa, India, the United States and Europe « Draws out the lessons learned by each innovator, enabling the reader to learn from their successes and mistakes

« Bridges the gap between business and social entrepreneurship by exploring new business models to support social innovation

4 Data Science, Technology and Design for Social Justice [Jessica Anderson and Joumana al Jabri of Visualizing Impact]

5 Bringing the Silicon Valley Revolution in Technology and Business to Global Healt [Joel Selanikio of Magpi]

Author Information Ken Banks, founder of global non-profit organization kiwanja.net, devotes himself to the application of mobile technology for positive social and environmental change in the developing world. He is a PopTech Fellow, a Tech Awards Laureate, an Ashoka Fellow and a National Geographic Emerging Explorer. He was appointed Entrepreneur in Residence at CARE International in 2015, elected a Fellow of the Royal Society of Arts in 2012, and in 2013 he was nominated for the prestigious TED Prize.

andEntrepreneurshipSocialInnovation

International Case Studies and Edition:Practice 1 Date: 03/03/2016 Price: £34.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749475918 ISBN Ebook: 9780749475925 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 238x168 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Entrepreneurship

7 Innovation in Africa’s Silicon Savannah [Erik Hersman of Ushahidi]

« Provides inspiration and practical guidance for social entrepreneurs and those studying social entrepreneurship Description Social innovation and social entrepreneurship look for creative and affordable solutions to specific societal problems. Fuelled by the spread of the internet and the ubiquity of mobile phones, there are more people working to solve pressing social and environmental problems in the world today than ever before. Social Entrepreneurship and Innovation presents the journeys of pioneering - and often accidental - social innovators who, faced with a problem, used their courage, tenacity and creative thinking to find a solution.

88 Entrepreneurship Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

6 Food Waste Meets Food Poverty: Closing the Loop [Kelvin Cheung and Michael Norton of Foodcycle]

Introduction 1 All about you How to own your career How to build a business you love 18 How to think like an entrepreneur How to define what success means to you How to maximize your skill set How to boost your productivity How to find your inner boss How to manage stress, burnout and founder fatigue All about your business How to start the right business How to structure and finance your business Problem-solving businesses Making your business stand out from the crowd Your toolkit for success Creating a personal brand Social media to supercharge your business PR strategy for your business Supercharge your community with events Conclusion 9 Notes 10 Index This book « Is a no-nonsense guide to making it in business and as a female founder, from advice on how to seek investment and grow your team, to finding your voice and leadership style

Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789666847 ISBN Ebook: 9781789666854 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 215x138 Product Category: General Subject: Entrepreneurship

Author Information Angelica Malin is an award-winning young entrepreneur, founder of About Time Magazine and the About Time Academy. She is a regular commentator on business and entrepreneurship in the national press and broadcast and the UK’s rising voice for championing women founders and entrepreneurs. Most recently, she has appeared on TalkRadio Business Breakfast, LBC Business Hour, and been featured in the Independent, Huffpost and Real Business. She is based in London, England.

89 Entrepreneurship Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents

« Includes a rich collection of exclusive case studies from world-renowned pioneering businesswomen like Rachel Carrell from Koru Kids, Steph Douglas from Don’t Buy Her Flowers and Saasha Celestial-One from OLIO « Covers all the basics of how to launch a business, but also pushes readers to consider deeper issues related to being in business such as how to lead, how to fully exploit the possibilities of digital channels and how to build a community around your business

« Describes the challenges and obstacles that women often face and offers a toolkit to overcome them, placing special emphasis on the opportunities available with digital and influencer channels WantDescriptiontobethenext Ella Mills? Award-winning rising star entrepreneur, Angelica Malin shows you how.

For a new generation of fiercely independent and ambitious career women, going at it alone and even thinking you could launch your own successful business remains a pipe dream. The business world, and the start-up scene in particular, remain ruthless, unwelcoming and scary. She Made It is the secret weapon you need. With honesty, practicality and a helping of epic and successful women in business, this book offers you a voice of reason and encouragement that will allow you to square up to the big players in Silicon Valley or any of the tech entrepreneur scenes of the world. She Made It is your go-to guide to launching your own business, as well as to finding your feet and voice as a woman in business. It details the practicalities of being an entrepreneur and your own boss, guiding you through the day to day running of a start-up with lessons in hiring a team, raising investment and backing yourself and your ideas. It also addresses the challenges of being a female founder and businesswoman, with sections on stress management, finding your voice and style and building a personal brand. Angelica Malin has been there. An award-winning rising star entrepreneur, she tells the story of how she has overcome some of the barriers to success and tapped into a wealth of knowledge from fellow women founders. You can absolutely break out of the 9 to 5 - get your inspiration from She Made It and change your life.

She Made It The Toolkit for Female Founders in the Digital Age Edition: 1 Date: 03/01/2021

Author Information Alisa Cohn is an executive coach based in New York City, New York who helps start-up founders mature into world-class CEOs. She has coached the founders of Etsy, Foursquare, Venmo, InVision, Tory Burch, Mack Weldon and The Wirecutter. She has spoken at the IBM Digital Summit, KPMG Leadership Summit, the Inc. Women’s Summit and the OpenView CEO Summit. She writes regularly for Harvard Business Review, Forbes.com and Inc.com. She was named the #1 Startup Coach in the world at the 2019 Thinkers50 Marshall Goldsmith Coaching Awards in London and one of the Top 30 Global Gurus for Startups of 2020.

EveryDescriptionstart-upfounder feels overwhelmed and uncertain at various times. The key to managing the relentless turmoil of a start-up is learning to manage yourself.

From Start-Up to Grown-Up Your Leadership to

Grow Your

Edition:Business 1 Date: 03/10/2021 Price: £22.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398601383 ISBN Ebook: 9781398601390 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Entrepreneurship

Filled with stories drawn from the author’s experience, From Start-Up to Grown-Up helps you build a company with a set of core values that everybody lives by and where everyone shares a vision of where the company is going and how to get there.

From Start-Up to Grown-Up gives you, the founder and CEO of a great start-up, the knowledge and experience that executive coach Alisa Cohn has gained from helping companies such as Etsy, Foursquare, InVision and The Wirecutter become headline names. Growth of your company begins with growth within you. The book provides you with effective and practical ways of maximizing your strengths, defusing your triggers, controlling your self-doubt and building on your motivators. With these self-management tools, you can then turn your attention to managing your team by ensuring the flow of communication and finding the joy of delegation and the soul in meetings. Finally, you gain practical tools for managing the company and ensuring overall effectiveness of your team and strategy, using specific scripts you need to have delicate or difficult conversations.

90 Entrepreneurship Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents Introduction 1 Managing You 1 Your Start-Up Self 2 Be the Boss of You 2 Managing Them 3 Why Should Anyone Follow You? 4 Cultural Conceptions (and Misconceptions) 5 Hiring and Firing 3 Managing the Company 4 Growing and Growing Up 5 Smooth Operations 6 Managing the Board 7 Cofounder Care and Feeding 8 Your New Workplace 9 Conclusion This book « Addresses key founder challenges such as founder depression, imposter syndrome, assessing employee performance, hiring and firing, building a culture to scale and how to grow as a leader as your start-up matures « Offers a framework for business growth by helping leaders manage themselves, manage their teams and manage their business « Provides practical tools for growing a start-up including how to build a culture, who to hire (and if you must, fire) and how to measure overall effectiveness

Grow

Unprepared A Method to the Madness of Starting Your Own Business Edition: 1 Date: 03/10/2021 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398601468 ISBN Ebook: 9781398601475 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 215x139 Product Category: General Subject: Entrepreneurship

« Contains a diverse list of examples of entrepreneurs who have done it by foregoing traditional routes, from award-winning professional network founders like YSYS, bestselling products like Rens Original and innovative new offerings like Beauty Pie

TimesDescriptionhavechanged: you can launch a successful enterprise with your phone, sell through social media and tap into a whole world of opportunities.

Author Information Sonya Barlow is an award-winning entrepreneur, founder of the @LMFnetwork, diversity business coach and TEDx speaker. She works with clients like Google, Vodafone, Barclays, the Financial Times and PwC. Named as one of 2020’s Most Influential Women in Tech by ComputerWeekly, she is a TechRound Top 50 BAME Entrepreneur, LinkedIn’s Changemaker 2021 for Gender, Diversity & Inclusion and Marie Claire Future Shaper 2020 and hosts the Everyday Hustle radio show for BBC Asian Network. Her work has featured in Metro, Business Insider, The Telegraph, BBC Radio5 and BBC Breakfast. She is based in London, England.

Unprepared to Entrepreneur is an honest guide to launching your own business, sharing real stories from real people who have tested, failed and won at business. It profiles the underdogs, those who brainstormed ideas whilst travelling on the bus, started a business from their phone and managed to create three income streams whilst maintaining a full-time job in the city to show you that you can do it too. From a working Google doc as your business plan, to ideation strategies that live and die off Instagram engagement; they won’t teach you this at business school.

Sonya Barlow takes a look at the resilience needed to make it in business, the incredible tax on mental health and the non-negotiable steps to creating a viable business. This is the ultimate guide to side hustling, freelancing and entrepreneurial freedom of the future.

Entrepreneurto

91 Entrepreneurship Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents 1 Are you prepared to be an entrepreneur? 2 Entrepreneurship - Nature or nurture? 3 Does your understandcustomerwhoyou are? 4 Social media for your business 5 Converting your network into your net worth 6 Does teamwork make the dream work? 7 The three Ps of leadershipPeople, power and purpose 8 Mind over matter 9 Shifting your money mindset 10 How to influence people and win clients 11 Eleven methods to the madness of starting your own business This book « Demonstrates an alternative way to launch your business that defies some of the old school rules of business and argues the most important thing is to just get your idea out there

« Taps into the disruptive trends that are opening up opportunities for entrepreneurs like social media selling, innovation labs and quick data validation or pro-social business grants « Demystifies the process of launching a successful business: you don’t need to know it all to launch and highlights the important elements to tick off so you’re spending time where it matters

The EntrepreneurYoung Edition:

IfDescriptionyouhaveagreat start-up idea and know how to think like an entrepreneur, but are still at college or university, then this book will show you how to run your business without having to drop out.

General

Product

Entrepreneurship

Research shows that Generation Z are the most entrepreneurial generation yet. If you don’t want to wait until you graduate before launching the next big thing, then this book - written by successful young entrepreneurs Swish Goswami and Quinn Underwood - is for you.

92 Entrepreneurship Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents Foreword 1 Entrepreneur 1 Introduction – What to expect 2 The entrepreneur mindset 2 Endeavour 3 The lightbulb moment – How to come up with an idea 4 Common mistakes 5 Infrastructure 6 MVP (Minimum Viable Product) 7 Development 8 Launch 9 Traction 10 Fundraising 11 Scale 12 End goal 13 Misconceptions of starting a business 14 Ecosystem 15 Opportunities This book « Tells you all you need to know to launch a business without dropping out or waiting for graduation « Provides tailored information and advice, from that lightbulb moment and getting started, to scaling up or selling your business - including specific highlights of how being a student can be an advantage « Provides clear and invaluable guidance on where and how to access funding, mentorship and support « Features inspiring case studies from successful young founders as well as from the authors’ own experiences as young serial entrepreneurs

Packed with practical and realistic advice The Young Entrepreneur really cuts through the noise surrounding business innovation and makes a clear case for starting your own company while you’re young. Featuring inspiring examples and invaluable resources to give you the tools you need, this book is your one-stop guide to jump-start your entrepreneurial journey. 1 Date: 03/05/2022 Price: £12.99 9780749497347 ISBN Ebook: 9780749497330 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 198x129 Category: Subject:

ISBN Paperback:

Edition: 1 Date: 03/09/2019 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749496906 ISBN Ebook: 9780749496913 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 235x156 Product Category: General Subject: Study Skills

93 Study Skills es.ai Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents Introduction 1 Getting ready for further study 1 Independent learning 2 Embrace your nontraditionalism as a student 3 How to prepare for higher education 4 Goal setting 2 Mindset and motivation 3 Mindset 4 Motivation 3 Organization and productivity 4 Organization 5 Productivity 6 The dark side of productivity 4 Classes, note taking and assignment skills 5 Classes 6 Note taking 7 Essay writing 5 Exam preparation 6 Exam revision 7 Exam performance 6 Personal development 7 Continuous improvement This book « Is a one-stop, comprehensive guide for candidates on professional qualifications, mature students, distance or part-time learners, adults returning to study, and other non-traditional students, providing the full range of mental and practical skills you need to succeed « Will help you effectively manage your learning alongside the diverse and often conflicting priorities of adult life, including full-time work or family responsibilities « Features recommended technology tools, practical exercises, useful templates and inspirational and aspirational case studies from a range of non-traditional, real-life students and graduates

The Return to Study Handbook

Employability and Careers

Description Have you learned how to learn? Written especially for professional or distance learners, part-time or mature students, and formal CPD qualification candidates, The Return to Study Handbook will teach you how to study effectively, ace your ongoing education, and get the grades you need to advance in your career. Whether you need to balance your learning with full or part-time work, or overcome the ‘mindset gremlins’ stemming from a negative school experience, this book will empower you to effectively manage your own learning and provide you with the full range of mental and practical skills you need to succeed.

Packed with practical tools, tips, exercises, case studies and strategies, plus the author’s own inspirational story, The Return to Study Handbook not only covers the study skills necessary for any student to be successful - such as effective note-taking; exam technique; and essay writing - but it specifically addresses relevant topics for non-traditional students. With advice on recommended technology aids; handling procrastination and distractions; dealing with overwhelm and avoiding burnout; managing distance learning; and overcoming the mental and emotional barriers of past experiences, this book will guide you through everything you need to achieve the grades and career you want.

Author Information Chloe Burroughs is a Graduate Ambassador for the Open University. Study coach, blogger, entrepreneur, and contributing writer for We Are The City; she specializes in using her own experience as a full-time professional and part-time distance learner, to help people overcome barriers to learning and achieve the grades they need to advance in their careers.

Author Information Peter Clough is former Head of Psychology at Hull University, UK. Based in East Yorkshire, UK, he is recognised as a leading applied academic authority in this field.

Doug Strycharczyk, based in Chester, UK, is MD for AQR, an organisation which has been instrumental in most of the pilots which lead to the adoption of mental toughness in new sectors.

John Perry is Lecturer in Sport and Exercise Psychology at the University of Limerick, Republic of Ireland, and was formerly Head of Psychology at Mary Immaculate College.

94 Career Development Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

Table of 1 Introduction 2 The importance of stress 3 Developing the model and the MTQ48 4 Mental toughness and the MTQ48 measure 5 Control 6 Commitment 7 Challenge 8 Confidence 9 Mental toughness and its relationships with other important models – Mindset, positive psychology and emotional intelligence 10 Decision making 11 Mental toughness and fatigue – The impact of mental toughness on the development of fatigue 12 Mental toughness and the world of work (1) – Stress, motivation, leadership, coaching and teamworking 13 Mental toughness and the world of work (2) –Assessment and development, and talent management 14 Employability – A key issue for the 21st-century employer and employee 15 Using the MTQ48 measure to improve self awareness 16 Mental toughness and the world of education and the development of young people 17 Mental toughness in sport 18 Mental toughness and its link to the social and health sectors 19 Can mental toughness be developed? – The practitioner’s psychologist’sandperspectives 20 Using the mental toughness model and the MTQ48 in coaching and mentoring 21 Positive thinking 22 Visualization 23 Anxiety control and relaxation – A perspectivephysiotherapist’s 24 Attentional control 25 Goal setting 26 Research and evidence-based practice using the MTQ48

HowDescriptioncanindividuals

This book « Demystifies mental toughness and provides an evidence-based measurable framework to improve the ability to cope with daily pressures and stress, and promote performance « Features practical guidance for applying mental toughness to develop leadership, organizational culture and self-awareness « Includes case studies, such as from Deloitte and Ethiad, that demonstrate how mental toughness concepts can enhance employee experience « New to this edition: Expansion of the 4Cs model to include concepts on learning orientation and resilience; chapters on self-awareness and evidence-based practice; material on diversity and inclusion and the latest research in the field

Tracing its development from sports psychology into the business sector, Developing Mental Toughness provides a reliable psychometric measure to apply at the organizational level. With coverage on how mental toughness relates to other behaviours and can be applied to employability, leadership, performance, creativity, emotional intelligence and motivation, the practical guidance and exercises in this book make it essential reading for academics, managers and coaches alike.

Contents

and organizations understand and measure mental toughness to deal with stress and challenge, and so improve performance? This fully updated third edition of Developing Mental Toughness provides the answers to unlock this potential.

This third edition includes an expansion of the 4Cs model to include concepts on learning orientation and resilience and new chapters on evidence-based practice and using the Mental Toughness Questionnaire (MTQ48) to gain richer self-awareness. Featuring case studies from Deloitte and Ethiad, Developing Mental Toughness is the practical coaching guide for developing capabilities and resilience.

Developing Mental Toughness Strategies to Improve Performance, Resilience and Wellbeing in Individuals and Organizations Edition: 3 Date: 03/09/2021 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398601840 ISBN Ebook: 9781398601857 Pages: 344 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Professional Subject: Career Development

Author Information Shannon Houde is the Founder and Managing Director of Walk of Life Coaching, an international career advisory consultancy focused on sustainable business, environmental, impact investing, international development and corporate responsibility. A speaker, consultant and certified coach, she works with clients around the world, across brands ranging from Google and Deutsche Bank to Virgin Airlines and the UN Foundation. Originally from Maryland, US, she has lived and worked in Washington DC, Chile, San Francisco, Phoenix, Sicily, Geneva and London, to name a few, and is now based in Cambridge, UK.

The two-way street of valuesbased organizations – how do I match my values and traits to theirs?

10 Conclusion 11 Index

6 Wow them on paper – what are the bits of my story that make me unique for the purpose economy?

95 Career Development Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

Table of Contents

5 Prove your skills – how do my skills translate for a missiondriven role?

STEP INTO THE MARKET 5 Tell me so I’ll listen – how do I convert my unique story into a thought leader’s biography?

7 Working with recruiters –where do I find the best impact roles?

This book « Guides you through a clear step-by-step structure to help you get - and succeed in - a job that will have a positive impact on the world « Is packed with practical tools, useful worksheets and helpful tips, to help you apply the advice to your own life and career path; from working out your own values and strengths, to figuring out how they fit in with what the world needs

DoDescriptionyouwanttohave a positive impact on the world? Do you want to have a successful career that makes a difference? In short... do you want to do Good Work? Let this step-by-step guide show you how.

Written by corporate responsibility consultant and certified coach Shannon Houde, this book is part career guide and part job search help - and all purpose-driven. From understanding what the ‘purpose economy’ is and how you fit into it, to what jobs to go for and how to land them, Good Work is the helping hand you need to make a career out of changing the world.

Good Work How to Build a Career that Makes a Difference in the World Edition: 1 Date: 03/02/2021 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789665727 ISBN Ebook: 9781789665734 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 215x140 Product Category: General Subject: Career Development

8 Networking sherpa – how can I walk the talk of collaboration and make new friends for a win–win?

« Features case studies from leaders in the sector, including a Director of Corporate Responsibility and a Chief Sustainability Officer

2 AIM YOUR COMPASS 3 Narrowing the net – how do I figure out where I fit into the sustainability market?

7 Write a cover letter using KISS – this sector loves storytelling

3 MAP YOUR STORY 4 Be in their shoes – how do I unpack what the hiring manager wants when I don’t know the lingo?

9 Now in person at the interview – how do I show them in person that I’m the one for the job?

Packed with useful tools and exercises, this step-by-step guide will help you figure out your passion and purpose, and how to effectively harness it to make real and positive change - on the world, and on your career. Whether you want to battle climate change, promote diversity and inclusion, work in sustainability - or if you’re not sure, but just want to leave things a little better at the end of every work day - let this book support you in turning that passion into action.

5 Change your course – how do I overcome my fears and enhance my impact credentials?

Introduction – making a difference 1 The market LANDSCAPE 2 Lay of the land – what is an impact career?

The change makers – who do I want to be when I grow up?

6 Sustainability jobs are all about partnering – how to show I’m worth collaborating with on LinkedIn?

Author Information Patrick Barr has over 20 years international leadership experience, having held senior roles in Ireland, the UK and the USA in the airline, FMCG and IT industry sectors. Owner and Managing Partner of Barr Performance Coaching, he is passionate about leadership development and performance management. He is a member of the Enterprise Ireland Mentor Panel and The European Mentoring and Coaching Council.

96 Career Development Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents 1 Managing self 1 Communication skills 2 My curriculum vitae 3 Career planning 4 Induction (as an employee) 5 Building good relationships 6 Why mindset matters 7 Personal work–life balance 8 Managing stress 9 Dealing with disappointing news at work 10 Resilience 11 Managing your personal brand 12 Effective networking 13 Leadership 2 Managing others 3 How to disagree 4 How to handle a difficult boss or peer 5 Leading teams 6 Supporting a team’s work–life balance 7 Performance discussions (as a manager) 8 Impact and influence 9 Challenging the status quo 10 Building a culture of innovation 11 Bringing about behavioural change 12 Overcoming resistance 3 Managing the task 4 How to interview (as a candidate) 5 Performance discussions (as an employee) 6 One-to-one meetings with your boss 7 How to ask for a pay rise 8 Negotiation skills 9 How to handle an unethical request 10 How to resign 11 How to interview (as the hiring manager) 12 New employee induction 13 Succession planning

Employability and Careers

This book « Provides quick-reference support for a huge range of essential business skills - including selfmanagement, process management and people management - making it a valuable tool be referred to again and again throughout your career, from new jobs to senior management Offers quick access to tools and techniques to help you make considered decisions when faced with a challenge at work, including self-assessment questions, useful templates and interactive exercises Empowers you to feel confident in any work situation, using tried-and-tested coaching techniques to give you the tools you need

Description As you progress in your career, you will face new challenges. From managing yourself, to managing processes, projects and people, what works for one situation may not work for another and you’ll need to be able to develop and apply what you know in a different way. The Successful Career Toolkit is a helpful survival guide to keep on hand no matter where your career takes you. With focused, skillbased topics in three broad areas - managing yourself, managing tools and processes, and managing others - this book uses tried-and-trusted coaching techniques to help you face any imaginable workplace challenge, from asking for a raise or managing a difficult conversation, to improving your presentation skills or giving constructive feedback to an employee.

With practical, interactive exercises throughout, The Successful Career Toolkit is a vital resource you will return to again and again as you progress in your chosen career.

Written by experienced senior business leader, coach, and mentor Patrick Barr, this book does what it says on the tin - providing concise and empowering guidance on a range of essential business skills.

The CareerSuccessfulToolkit

Edition: 1 Date: 03/05/2019 Price: £15.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749484774 ISBN Ebook: 9780749484781 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 230x155 Product Category: General Subject: Career Development

YourDescriptionbusinessannounced a major restructuring and your role is put at risk. You just graduated into a changing marketplace. You finally have the career you always wanted, but you wonder if there is more to life than what you’ve built. Interruptions and disruptions will block your path throughout your journey. You need to learn to navigate them.

Stop, Ask, to in Times of Edition:Uncertainty 1

Table of Contents Think Inside the BoxWhat Now? Moments and Uncharted Territory 2 Stop! Don’t Follow Your Passion Stop: Don’t Pivot! 4 Stop: Get Your Bearings Ask: Where Am I? 6 Ask: Who Am I? - The Pursuit of a Rigorous Self-Awareness Ask: What’s Possible? Identify a Locus of EverythingPossibilities—ontheAltar Explore! Wayfinding and the Experimental Mindset 9 Explore! Learn, Discern, Choose, Confirm 10 Follow your Passion – Set a New Course Until the Next What Now? Think Outside the Box –Engage the Calm and Welcome the Storm

Author Information

Joan P. Ball is an associate professor of Marketing at St. John’s University, a researcher and a leadership coach. Joan works with emerging and established leaders to help them navigate flux, build resilience and develop an experimental mindset when faced with tricky transitions. The founder of WOMBLab, she works with individuals, teams and organizations to develop new tools to help leader navigate uncertain transitions and teach others to do the same. She has worked with leaders from companies like Verizon Media, Capital One and Herman Miller. She is based in New York City, New York.

« Recognizes the creative and positive potentials of transition moments thus empowering readers to embrace them and utilize them for positive growth in their professional life « Includes extra careers services online resources allowing for optimal applicability for student and young professional markets

97 Career Development Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

Explore Learn

Date: 03/04/2022 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398605602 ISBN Ebook: 9781398605619 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: Professional/General Subject: Career Development

Navigate Change

This book offers readers a practical framework for navigating life’s inevitable turning points, thresholds and transitions- at work, at home and in between. Drawing upon more than a decade of research and work with established and emerging leaders across the globe, leadership consultant, Joan P. Ball invites emerging and established changemakers and their teams to reimagine their relationship with interruptions and disruptions-life’s What Now? Moments. This book guides you on a quest to recognize the creative potential that exists in the times between what was, What Now? and what might be. Stop, Ask, Explore is a lively and eye-opening book that introduces field-tested tools designed to allow you to more effectively engage interruptions and disruptions and develop the hopeful curiosity and experimental mindset needed to lead yourself and those around you in an era of unrelenting and exponential change. Discover how to learn, discern, choose and confirm the right way forward, rather than mindlessly ‘pivoting’ our ‘bouncing back’ without direction. They don’t teach this in business school, yet navigating change successfully will be the difference between those who thrive or survive in the new world of work.

This book « Unpicks a method to navigating change and ‘what now?’ moments, which in today’s business world is the skill that is needed to thrive in uncertainty « Provides actionable tools to evaluate transitions in work and life carefully and discern a way forward rather than encourage a mindless pivot

Author Information Kathryn Bishop is an Associate Fellow at the Saïd Business School, University of Oxford, where she has taught strategy development to organizations and individuals for over 20 years. She is the Programme Director for Women Transforming Leadership - Oxford University’s first leadership programme for women - and has worked with women from all over the world as they make their career and development plans. Her background includes IT and HR and she has worked as a line director and manager, a project manager, a consultant and as a non-executive director in both the private and public sectors.

Effective methods of strategic planning have been tried and tested in the corporate business world, and this book shows you how to repurpose those methods for yourself, even if you’re not in the corporate world. Packed with strategic tools and practical exercises, this book will help you: -Assess and define your career goals -Make a -Implementplanyour plan to find the work that fits your needs, your skills, and your direction.

Introduction – what this book covers, why it will help, and how to use it 1 Devising a strategy for you –the Strategy Triangle 1 Examining the past and present to plan for the future 2 How you got to where you are now – your Journey Map 3 What is working well right now – your Personal Dashboard 2 Envisaging your future –four different approaches 3 The work that matters most to you – the Ikigai model 4 The purpose you serve – the story of you 5 Organizing your working life –your life architecture 6 What’s worth developing – the Strengths model 3 Making strategy real 4 Making a career transition –the Product/Market matrix 5 Turning your new strategy into action – planning and experimenting 6 Getting under way – tactics for taking action 7 References 8 Further reading This book « Provides tried-and-tested strategic planning tools and practical exercises, borrowed from successful business practice, to apply to individual career paths « Is written specifically for women, to account for and answer the particular challenges and difficulties that many women face in the workplace and with career planning

« Is based on material from the Oxford University’s first leadership programme for women, the Women Transforming Leadership course from Saïd Business School

Based on material from the popular Women Transforming Leadership course from Saïd Business School, University of Oxford, Make Your Own Map will help you develop a resilient and aspirational strategy for your career - whatever your starting point.

Make Your Own Map Career Success Strategy for Women Edition: 1 Date: 03/02/2021 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789668360 ISBN Ebook: 9781789668377 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: General Subject: Career Development

98 Career Development Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

Table of Contents

There’sDescriptionnosuchthing as a pre-set path to career success. Following the footsteps of others can only get you so far - and for women, there are often additional obstacles. But what if you could design your own path to your career goals? What if you could Make Your Own Map?

With your best career as the goal, this book will help you forge your own path and Make Your Own Map

In this practical and reassuring book, you’ll explore the perspective, mindset and uniquely human skills you need for a resilient and thriving career - without the fear. From understanding how the world of work is changing, to self-reflection and developing your critical thinking; author Somi Arian guides you through everything you need to be ready for an exciting and varied journey through life and work.

What’sDescriptiongoingon with the world of work? Will my job exist in five years’ time? What’s ‘disruption’ all about, and what does it mean for me?

Jobs don’t look like they used to. In this age of innovation, staying in control of your work life can feel overwhelmingly challenging. So what does it take to have - and be in control of - a successful and fulfilling career? Career Fear (and how to beat it) will help you answer this question for yourself.

Packed with clear, useful examples and inspiring case studies, Career Fear (and how to beat it) helps you beat that career fear and prepare to succeed - no matter where your career takes you.

Author Information Somi Arian is a tech philosopher, international speaker, entrepreneur, awardwinning filmmaker and LinkedIn Top Voice among UK influencers. Her work focuses on the impact of technology on society at large, the future of work and digital marketing. She has given talks to industry leaders from organizations as diverse as the BBC, The Economist, Marie Claire, The Guardian, Amazon, HSBC, Virgin Atlantic and American Express. Her 2018 documentary The Millennial Disruption has been nominated for a dozen international film festival awards, winning the Worldfest Houston Silver Remi - Best Documentary Short Film (2019) and Idyllwild International Festival - Best Directory Documentary (2019).

Career Fear (and how to beat it) Get the Perspective, Mindset and Skills You Need to Futureproof your Work Edition:Life 1 Date: 03/08/2020 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789664621 ISBN Ebook: 9781789664638 Pages: 208 Format (mm): 217x139 Product Category: General Subject: Career Development

99 Career Development Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents Introduction 1 PERSPECTIVE 2 A history of work 3 The modern career landscape 4 The future of work - AI and humanity 5 The future of work - Time, transition and machines 2 MINDSET 3 Knowing yourself 4 Your place in the world 3 (HUMAN) SKILLS 4 Emotional intelligence 5 Critical thinking 6 Contextual creativity 7 Mindfulness 8 Bringing it all together 9 Index This book « Takes a topic that feels overwhelming and abstract, and breaks it down into clear, practical steps that will reassure and help you take control of your career « Guides you through the process of understanding the career landscape of the past, present and future, and your unique place in it « Features inspiring case studies, clear and practical examples, and tools such as decision-making techniques to help you apply the theory to your own career path

This book « Fully updated content for 2020, including new careers in the digital space such as Analyst and Influencer « Provides jobseekers with crucial and concise information: what qualifications are required, what does the job entail, what are the starting salaries and what are the opportunities in the industry

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

« Gives careers advisers a one-stop reference guide to a huge range of career options, allowing them to easily direct students to the choices that best suit their ambitions and capabilities

100

Specific Careers

« Functions as an easy-to-read and non-intimidating guide that is perfect for young people considering their career options « Covers over 300 different career paths available today

The A-Z of Careers and Jobs Employability and Careers Edition: 26 Date: 03/10/2020 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789664584 ISBN Ebook: 9781789664591 Pages: 384 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: General Subject: Specific Careers

This book is a quick and informative way to find out about what jobs and careers are out there, from traditional roles to new opportunities in the digital world. For those looking for their first job after school or university, or for anyone considering a change of career, this book provides reliable and upto-date advice on a wide range of professions to help you choose the right path for you.

The A-Z of Careers and Jobs covers the practical issues you need to understand, such as the extent of job opportunities in each industry, what personal skills are needed, what experience is required, entry qualifications, training, as well as typical earnings and starting salaries. In an ever more competitive and changing job market, information will help maximize your chances of success. This handy and informative reference guide is also a valuable resource for careers advisers working in schools, colleges and universities who need to keep track of new developments - such as new roles and routes of entry, professional associations and exams - to offer the very best guidance to today’s job hunters.

FromDescriptionaccountant to zoologist, this new edition of The A-Z of Careers and Jobs is your one-stop shop for insightful guidance on more than 300 different career areas in the UK. This book is designed to help identify what personal strengths fit to what kinds of work, what skills you should highlight on a CV and what you need to know about each job.

Success After Service provides the tools, resources and strategies to help you adapt to the civilian workplace and evaluate post-military career options. Whether you become an entrepreneur, move into the corporate world or pursue higher education, you will learn how to develop a portfolio of career assets, including your résumé, elevator pitch, online profiles, interview acumen and professional network, empowering you to begin your new career with confidence and clarity. Success After Service is the perfect guide for transitioning military and veterans who seek a coherent set of strategies, resources and steps for building a meaningful, deliberate and rewarding post-military career.

Author Information Lida Citroën specializes in personal branding and reputation management online and in-person for a target audience, and is based in Englewood, CO. She volunteers to help transitioning military service members build their civilian careers by teaching personal branding and online reputation management in the TAP program at the United States Air Force Academy. She also consults with private Fortune 100 companies who are looking to hire and increase the number of veteran employees. She is the author of two veteranfocused books: Your Next Mission (2014) and Engaging with Veteran Talent (2017).

Success After Service How to Take Control of Your Job Search and Career After Military Duty

101 Specific Careers Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents Introduction 1 Fundamentals of Career Readiness 2 What to Do Before You Separate/Retire 3 Evaluating the Path Forward – Employment, Education, or Entrepreneurship 4 Building Your Personal Brand 5 Career-Ready Tools to Gather – Resume and Cover Letter 6 Getting Yourself Out There –Crafting Your Narrative and Networking in Person 7 Getting Yourself Out There –Networking Online 8 Finding Apprenticeships,Mentors, and Internships 9 Researching, Applying, and Interviewing for a Job 10 Choosing and Beginning Your Career, Education, and Business Venture 11 Growing Your Career in the First Three Years 12 Growing Your Career and Knowing When to Move On This book « Includes a detailed checklist of career-related tasks, such as drafting a résumé, finding a mentor and accessing internships, to complete prior to transition « Offers insights and information from corporate hiring managers and recruiters regarding the skills gaps and culture differences veterans should address when applying « Provides practical resources for the US Department of Labor’s Transition Goal Plan Success (GPS) Program « Written by an accredited expert in the civilian space on personal branding and military transition, whose extensive experience in helping service members build civilian careers comes in motivational yet practical tips

The transition from military to civilian life is more than just a title change; it is a whole new life experience with the sense of excitement and possibility that accompany a transition. Whether you’re preparing to retire or separate, Success After Service is written to help all veterans succeed in the civilian workplace.

Product Category: Professional Subject: Specific Careers

WINNER:DescriptionIndependent Press Awards 2021 - Career Figuring out your next move after transitioning out of the military should start before your last day. Prepare yourself emotionally and professionally to put those hard-earned skills in context of the civilian world.

Edition: 1 Date: 03/10/2020 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789665932 ISBN Ebook: 9781789665949 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 235x157

About the Ultimate series...

The Ultimate series contains practical advice on essential job search skills to give you the best chance of getting the job you want. Taking you all the way from starting your job search to completing an interview, it includes guidance on CV or resume and cover letter writing, practice questions for passing aptitude, psychometric and IQ tests, and reliable advice for interviewing.

FindingDescriptiontheright job can be a job in itself - but this one-stop-shop guide will take you through every step. Covering everything from looking for jobs online to making a fantastic impression at interview, Ultimate Job Search is everything the ambitious job hunter needs. Take the stress out of job-seeking with comprehensive advice on: -Designing your job-search strategy -Building an online profile -Writing a stand-out cv/resume -Sample cover letters to help you sound both authentic and impressive -Giving a winning interview performance -Dealing with rejections and offers Now in its 6th edition, Ultimate Job Search now contains new and up-to-date advice on the changing face of technology in job seeking; avoiding scams and other traps; developing resilience; and the future of work. Let this invaluable guide help you on your way to your next dream job.

« Is part of the successful Ultimate series, containing practical advice on essential job search skills and offering the best chance at getting the job you want

Author Information Lynn Williams is a career counsellor and trainer who runs workshops on CV writing and interview techniques, and writes regularly on job search and career issues. She is the author of Ultimate Interview, Readymade CV and Readymade Job Search Letters, all published by Kogan Page.

102 Job Seeking Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents Introduction 1 First things first 2 The highly employable candidate 3 Making a start 4 The skills they want from everyone 5 Your CV 6 CV problems 7 CVs with considerationsspecial 8 CVs for specific jobs 9 Application forms 10 Covering letters 11 Telephone calls 12 The job search 13 Your online job search 14 Job search strategies 15 Interviews – making a great impression 16 Answering interview questions 17 Questions for specific jobs 18 Questions for school and college leavers 19 Interviews and more 20 Offers and rejections This book « Provides everything job hunters need to know in one book on how to maximize their chances of securing a new role « Features sample CVs for different types of jobs and sector specific interview questions

« New to this edition: new and up-to-date advice on the changing face of technology in job seeking; avoiding scams and other traps; developing resilience; and the future of work

Ultimate Job Search Master the Art of Finding Your Ideal Job, Getting an Interview and Edition:Networking 6 Date: 03/07/2021 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398602175 ISBN Ebook: 9781398602182 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 235x152 Product Category: General Subject: Job Seeking

103 Job Seeking Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents Introduction 1 A new job 1 Handling the offer 2 Leaving your last job 3 Being prepared 2 The first week 3 D-Day – your first day 4 Understanding your purpose 5 Knowledge is power 3 The people 4 Managing your new boss 5 Finding your place within the team 6 Handling your subordinates 7 Networking and socialising 4 The learning curve 5 Planning and organisation 6 Time management 7 Communication 8 Writing skills 9 Presentations 10 Meetings 11 Remote working 12 Working abroad 5 Coping with problems 6 Dealing with difficult people 7 Handling office politics 8 Pressure and stress 9 Coping with change at work 10 Imposing change at work 11 Feel like jumping ship? 6 Onwards and upwards 7 Training 8 Performance appraisals 9 Time for a pay rise? 10 Getting promoted 11 Moving on 7 My five top tips to survive and thrive in your new job 8 Survive and thrive

The Definitive Guide to Surviving Thriving As A New Starter Edition: 1 Date: 03/03/2012 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749464097 ISBN Ebook: 9780749464844 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 242x168 Product Category: General Subject: Job Seeking

This book « Covers every aspect of starting a new job or internship, tackling the top 15 questions that people ask when starting a new position Includes essential advice, such as managing a difficult new boss and managing your image « Provides extra material available on The CV Centre’s website, offering interactivity, forums and a video blog Description

and

Author Information James Innes is an accomplished author and the Founder and Managing Director of The CV Centre - the UK’s leading CV consultancy. Following more than a decade of experience heading up The CV Centre, James is widely considered to be one of the UK’s leading careers experts. Visit his website at: http:// www.ineedacv.co.uk/

How long do you stay in each job? Millions of us change roles on average every three years. A nation of job-hoppers, every promotion or change presents the same issues and worries and there’s no getting away from those first day nerves. Ultimate New Job will prepare you for the toughest few months of your life, when fitting in is everything and first impressions count. Covering every aspect of starting a new job or internship, it tackles the top fifteen questions that people ask when starting a new position, from handling the offer and resigning from your current post, to researching the organisation, networking and finding your place within the team. With realistic, practical advice, Ultimate New Job tackles all of your concerns head on, making your first weeks and months as smooth a transition as possible - for you and your new employer.

Ultimate New Job

Description Does your cover letter have the X factor? How can you make sure that it communicates what employers really want?

Now including a chapter on how to develop your professional image and integrate it into your job search letter, Ultimate Cover Letters 5th edition covers all aspects of this crucial part of the jobhunting process in an engaging and approachable way, ensuring you put every chance of success by your side. Ultimate Cover Letters will help you make the perfect first impression.

« Is written by internationally best-selling author and job seeking expert, Martin John Yate « Is part of the successful Ultimate series, containing practical advice on essential job search skills and offering the best chance at getting the job you want

104 Job Seeking Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents Read This First 1 Cover Letters – The Secret Weapon in Your Job Search 2 The Six Types of Job Search Letters 3 Know the Job, Know Your Customer 4 Develop Your Professional Identity 5 Elements of a Great Cover Letter 6 Assembling Your Job Search Letter 7 How to Polish and Edit Your Letters for Maximum Impact 8 The Plan of Attack 9 Sample Letters

Author Information Martin John Yate is an internationally bestselling author. He has held major posts as a director of training and personnel for several international companies. His best-selling book Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions is now in its 8th edition and has sold over 5 million copies. He is also the author of the highly successful Ultimate CV, both published by Kogan Page. 5 Date: 03/08/2018 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481667 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481674 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 235x157 Product Category: General Subject:

Job Seeking

This book « Includes sample cover letters, from a wide selection of industries, that the reader can adapt for their own use « Contains an indispensable list of useful key phrases that can help you create a compelling cover letter and write fluidly « Guides you through the entire cover letter process, from drafting, writing and sending it, to writing follow up emails, networking emails and emails following either acceptance or rejection

About the Ultimate series...

The Ultimate series contains practical advice on essential job search skills to give you the best chance of getting the job you want. Taking you all the way from starting your job search to completing an interview, it includes guidance on CV or résumé and cover letter writing, practice questions for passing aptitude, psychometric and other employment tests, and reliable advice for interviewing.

Ultimate Cover Letters Master the Art of Writing the Perfect Cover Letter to Boost Your Edition:Employability

Ultimate Cover Letters, from best-selling author and careers expert Martin John Yate, describes how to write the very best cover letters, helping you to open doors to job interviews and offers of employment, and outshine all other candidates. From the very popular Ultimate series, the book offers sound advice on assembling letters and how to use key ‘power phrases’ to get results, as well as over 100 sample letters to cover a variety of situations. These include e-mail responses to online applications, speculative letters, letters to answer advertised vacancies, follow-up letters, networking letters and even acceptance and resignation letters.

Description

Author Information Martin John Yate is an internationally best-selling author and renowned expert on career matters. He has held major posts as a director of training and personnel for several international companies. His top selling title Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions, published by Kogan Page, is now in its 8th edition.

Ultimate CV Master the Art of Creating a Winning CV with Over 100 Samples to Help You Get the Job Edition: 5 Date: 03/08/2018 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481537 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481520 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 234x155 Product Category: General Subject: Job Seeking

Does your CV have the X factor? Do you want your CV to impress potential employers and show them exactly what they want? Ultimate CV, now in its 5th edition and part of the successful Ultimate series, provides you with the key guidance you need to create an irresistible CV that will grab any recruiter’s attention. This book will help you to stand out from other candidates, open doors to job interviews and maximize the potential for job offers. Careers and CV guru Martin John Yate shows you how to position plain facts into a powerful sales pitch that will get you the job you want.

About the Ultimate series...

105 Job Seeking Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents 1 How to Make Your CV Shine 2 Get Inside Your Customer’s Head 3 The Basic Ingredients 4 Building Your Professional Identity 5 Choose Your Format 6 The Simplest, Smartest, Fastest Way to Write Your CV 7 How to Give Your CV Impact 8 Getting the Most from Your CV 9 Ready to Launch 10 The CVs…

This book « Is written by renowned careers expert Martin John Yate, author of the companion title Ultimate Cover Letters and best-selling careers title Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions « Contains everything you need to know to produce the perfect CV that will differentiate you from the competition « Includes over 100 samples of winning CVs, tailor-made for different job descriptions and special situations, that you can adapt for yourself « Is part of the successful Ultimate series, containing practical advice on essential job search skills and offering the best chance at getting the job you want

Ultimate CV covers every aspect of this crucial part of the job-hunting process. It contains hundreds of sample CVs, tailored to specific jobs and industries, that you can use and personalize for your own applications. Alongside insightful advice on hunting for jobs, this indispensable book will give you all the guidance you need to create a distinctive, professional CV so you can get that dream job.

The Ultimate series contains practical advice on essential job search skills to give you the best chance of getting the job you want. Taking you all the way from starting your job search to completing an interview, it includes guidance on CV or résumé and cover letter writing, practice questions for passing aptitude, psychometric and other employment tests, and reliable advice for interviewing.

« Is part of the successful Ultimate series, containing practical advice on essential job search skills and offering the best chance at getting the job you want

Including hundreds of sample interview questions and answers to really help you nail it on the day, Ultimate Interview is the ideal tool to help you relax and show off your best side. The secret to stress-free interviewing is preparation, preparation, preparation, and this book will take you through everything you need to effectively prepare, including: -Understanding your interviewer and what they are looking for -How to highlight the evidence they want to see -How to stand out from the competition -Coping with difficult questions -Telephone, video and assessment centre interviews

Author Information Lynn Williams is a career counsellor and trainer who runs workshops on CV writing and interview techniques, and writes regularly on job search and career issues. She is the author of the best-selling Ultimate Job Search, Readymade CV and Readymade Job Search Letters, all published by Kogan Page.

Ultimate Interview 100s of Sample Questions and Answers for Interview Success Edition: 6 Date: 03/07/2021 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398602137 ISBN Ebook: 9781398602144 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 232x160 Product Category: General Subject: Job Seeking

This fully updated 6th edition now contains new and up-to-date advice on the future of work; developing resilience; blind selection processes; and working in the gig economy. Getting a job doesn’t have to be painful - let this book help you give the Ultimate Interview.

106 Job Seeking Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents Introduction 1 Know Your enemy 2 Prepare yourself 3 Standing out 4 Answering questions 5 Starting in the interview 6 Questions they ask everybody 7 Questions for practical jobs 8 Questions for creative jobs 9 Questions for clerical and administrative jobs 10 Questions for sales and marketing jobs 11 Questions for technical jobs 12 Questions for management jobs 13 Questions for customer relations jobs 14 Questions for school and college leavers 15 Tackling the difficult questions 16 Dealing with tricky questions 17 Answering off-the-wall questions 18 Your questions for the interviewer 19 Variations on the theme 20 Interview extras 21 Looking the part 22 What happens next? This book « Helps job-seekers effectively and confidently prepare for the most painful part of the job searchthe interview « Features 100s of sample interview questions and sample answers from a diverse range of job types including management, sales and marketing, administration, customer relations, technical jobs, creative jobs and practical jobs « New to this edition: new and up-to-date advice on the future of work; developing resilience; blind selection processes; and working in the gig economy

About the Ultimate series... The Ultimate series contains practical advice on essential job search skills to give you the best chance of getting the job you want. Taking you all the way from starting your job search to completing an interview, it includes guidance on CV or resume and cover letter writing, practice questions for passing aptitude, psychometric and IQ tests, and reliable advice for interviewing.

Don’tDescriptionletinterview

nerves get the better of you - present the best version of yourself and be ready for anything to wow your potential employer.

107 Job Seeking Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents Introduction 1 The importance of presentation skills 1 Why presentation skills are important 2 Giving presentations at interviews and assessment centres – the essentials 3 Giving presentations in your professional life – the essentials 2 The presentation 3 How to prepare for a presentation 4 How to structure your presentation 5 Time management 6 Presentation styles and techniques 7 Presenting as part of a group 8 Using technology and visual aids 9 Openings and endings 3 You 4 Personality and message 5 Personal brand 6 Overcoming nerves 7 Body language 8 Verbal communication 9 Coping with the unexpected 4 The audience 5 Tailoring your presentation to your audience 6 Impressing potential employers in an interview presentation 7 Answering questions on the spot 8 Audience interaction or participation 9 Conclusion Author Information Jay Surti is a business presentation coach, speaker and consultant. She works with executives, teams and MBA candidates to help them transform their presentations to make sure they engage with their audience and get their message across. She has been a Judge at MassChallenge UK and served as an Executive Board Member of Women in Banking and Finance. She has recently been appointed as a Board Member of the Governing Body of the University of Dundee and is a Council Member for the Women’s Engineering Society. PresentationsUltimate Master Interviews and Presentations to Land Your Dream Job Edition: 2 Date: 03/07/2021 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398601765 ISBN Ebook: 9781398601772 Pages: 208 Format (mm): 232x160 Product Category: General Subject: Job Seeking

Author Information Martin John Yate is an internationally bestselling author. He has held major posts as a director of training and personnel for several international companies and is widely respected as the expert on all career matters. He is also the author of Ultimate CV and Ultimate Cover Letters, both published by Kogan Page.

Great Answers to Tough QuestionsInterview

108 Job Seeking Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents Introduction 1 The Well-Stocked Briefcase 1 The realities of job hunting 2 Transferable skills and professional values 3 The productive CV 4 Networking and the successful job search 5 Network-integrated job search tactics 2 Getting to Square One 3 Making contact 4 The telephone interview 5 Dressing for interview success 6 Body language 7 The curtain goes up on the job interview 3 Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions 4 The five secrets of securing a job offer 5 Why interviewers do the things they do 6 How to knock ’em dead 7 Questions of manageability and team spirit 8 The stress interview and illegal questions 9 Answering unanswerable questions 10 Welcome to the real world 11 The graceful exit 4 Finishing Touches 5 Out of sight, out of mind? 6 Snatching victory from the jaws of defeat 7 Negotiating the offer 8 Multiple interviews, multiple offers 9 Index of questions 10 Index This book « Gives an end-to-end guide to securing a job: searching, applying, preparing, interviewing and negotiating « Has sold over 5 million copies across previous editions « Includes over 200 interview questions with expert tips for tackling them « Provides guidance on the trickiest issues facing jobseekers, such as salary negotiations and searching for jobs during tough economic times « New to this edition: brand new content on making a career change Description Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions is the essential companion for all jobseekers. With over 5 million copies sold, this bestseller takes you through the whole process: from composing your CV and preparing for interviews, to interview techniques, answering tough questions and even negotiating your new salary. Crammed full of the difficult questions that interviewers might throw at you, Martin John Yate gives you expert tips and suggested answers to tackle the tricky ones including: Why should I give you the job? What is your biggest weakness? What are your salary expectations? How long would you stay with the company? What is your greatest strength? Why do you want to work Nowhere?in its 11th edition, Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions is your indispensable guide to blowing away the competition and landing your dream job.

Your Comprehensive Job Search Guide with over 200 Practice Interview Questions Edition: 11 Date: 03/12/2020 Price: £12.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789666915 ISBN Ebook: 9781789666939 Pages: 296 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: General Subject: Job Seeking

Assessment Centre

Assessment Centre Success is your road map to mastering the skills, exercises and challenges that you’ll be faced with when trying to secure that prized job offer. An Assessment Centre can be daunting: you are likely to face a full day of challenging exercises, tests and skilled competitors. However, with the right level of practice and preparation, you will be able to confidently tackle whatever employers may throw at you.

Author Information

Edition: 1 Date: 03/07/2018 Price: £15.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749483135 ISBN Ebook: 9780749483142 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: General Subject: Job Seeking

Table

Written by experienced Assessment Centre planner, Tony Weightman, Assessment Centre Success contains a bank of practice exercises and insider tips to help you succeed. Individual exercises are covered, including how to deliver good presentations, reports, interviews and analysis under pressure as well as group exercises such as problem solving and team presentations. Expert guidance on how to demonstrate the key skills employers are looking for helps you understand how to show yourself in the best possible light under challenging circumstances: including leadership, team work, industry knowledge, keeping calm under pressure, decision making, analytical skills, confidence and communication skills.

of Contents

109 Job Seeking Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

Tony Weightman has over 30 years’ experience as an HR consultant for major organizations including GSK, Nestle, Virgin Atlantic and Transport for London. He has developed and run assessment centres for some of the UK’s largest organizations across several industries including food, engineering, hospitality and the charity sector, as well as for MBA candidate development.

Success Your Ultimate Resource of Practice Exercises and Sample Questions to Help you Ace the Activities, Beat the Competition and Impress Employers

Description

Introduction 1 What is an assessment centre? What employers are looking for 3 How will it work? How to prepare for an assessment centre Individual communicationexercises: Individual exercises: analysis Group exercises Psychometric tests 9 The interview 10 Dealing with difficulties and how to perform on the day Gaining feedback after the event 12 AppendixConclusion1:Model answer for identifying skills from a job Appendixdescription2:Model answer for written report 1 Appendix 3: Model answer for written report 2 Appendix 4: Presentation planning Appendixtemplate5:Example of presentation feedback using AppendixPOOSA6: Model answer for intray prioritization exercise This book « Contains one of the highest numbers of practice exercises and questions on the market, developed and sourced by an expert Assessment Centre planner « Is full of insider tips and tricks from author Tony Weightman, who has run Assessment Centres for major clients including GSK, Nestle, Virgin Atlantic and Transport for London « Helps job seekers gain confidence by giving them the tools to practice showcasing the kinds of skills that top employers are looking for - from leadership and teamwork, to decision making and keeping calm under pressure « Provides essential practice for all aspects of the Assessment Centre, including individual exercises, interviews, group exercises, presentations and psychometric testing

110 Job Seeking Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents Introduction 1 Revolutionize your career 2 Build a strong foundation 3 Optimizing your creativity 4 Do your best work 5 Accelerate your learning 6 Telling your story 7 Portraying your best self: the science of charisma and confidence 8 Strategic relationships 9 Think big 10 Fun and games

If you’re ambitious and you want to carve your place in this chaotic, but exciting, new world of work then you need to be a superconductor: you need to have the creative energy, the ability to build great networks and the charisma to make big things happen. Whether you want to live as a digital nomad, an entrepreneur or be a formidable force in your chosen industry, Superconductors gives you the unique insight and hands-on tools to be the best you can be.

This book « Pushes the reader to triumph over increasingly disrupted career paths by fully developing themselves with the original, practical and hands-on exercises at the end of every chapter « Shows the reader how they can become irreplaceable, get an edge on the competition and stay valuable in a context of growing automation, AI, and increased outsourcing « Covers crucial skills that help the reader be the best they can be at creativity, charisma, relationship building, getting ahead, learning, story telling, and making their ideas reality « Contains inspiring interviews with cutting-edge experts, including entrepreneurs, podcasters, venture capital experts, digital storytellers and human behaviour specialists Description The steady career path is a thing of the past: disruption is here to stay. You need to be able to keep learning, growing and reinventing yourself to stay valuable in the midst of this change. Those who succeed in this new world will be the ones who have skills that are always in demand and cannot be replaced. Creativity, charisma, confidence, constant learning, storytelling, adaptability and tribe building are the keys to having a thriving professional life and turning ideas into reality. Superconductors is your treasure trove of exclusive interviews and hands-on self-development exercises to inspire you and push you into action. Derek Loudermilk brings together some of the best minds to coach you on every skill, including entrepreneurs, podcasters, venture capitalist experts, human behaviour hackers, journalists and digital storytellers. Michael Margolis, Vanessa Van Edwards, Derek Muller, Jason Zook, Linda Rottenburg are just some of the people giving you original insights and advice to help you form your own path.

Superconductors

Revolutionize Your Career and Make Big Things Happen

Author Information Derek Loudermilk is a serial US entrepreneur, business coach and international speaker. A dedicated professional adventurer and digital nomad, he is also the host of the Art of Adventure Podcast and the Uncharted Family Podcast.

Edition: 1 Date: 03/07/2018 Price: £15.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482367 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482374 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 232x155 Product Category: General Subject: Job Seeking

This

111 Job Seeking Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents Introduction 1 Setting yourself up for success 1 CV building 2 Career planning 3 Work experience and internships 4 Further study 2 Developing job-ready skills 3 Leadership and teamwork 4 Communication skills 5 Problem-solving 6 Industry knowledge 3 Looking for a job 4 Systematic job hunting 5 Understanding what employers want 6 Social media, personal branding and self-promotion 7 Networking 8 Budgeting and money skills 4 Applying for a job 5 Creating a winning CV 6 Covering letters and application forms 7 Interviews 8 Assessment centres 9 Giving presentations 10 Getting an offer 5

You’ll be able to conduct a systematic job search, learn how to network and develop a personal brand online, as well as hone valuable skills including leadership, teamwork, creativity and problem-solving.

Description

Moving from education into the workplace can be a challenge: the world of work demands skills that you may never have had to truly use - or think about - before. The Job-Ready Guide will help you to boost your employability, covering everything you need to prepare for and start a successful career.

Price: £15.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749483258 ISBN Ebook: 9780749483265 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: General Subject: Job Seeking

Job-Ready Guide

Starting a job Planning and preparation Twenty questions about your first day answered a good impression and building positive relationships your next move Index book Features interviews with industry professionals, employers, and graduates, self-development exercises and focused learning outcomes Is a one-stop shop with everything readers need to become job-ready, including developing the skills that employers want, doing a successful job search, performing in interviews and assessment centres and planning for a dream career Empowers job-seekers to feel in control of their employability and career planning by providing practical advice and interactive self-assessment exercises

8 Making

9 Planning

Author Information Anastasia de Waal is director of I Can Be, a charity focused on breaking down barriers to opportunity for disadvantaged children and young people. Before setting up I Can Be, she was Deputy Director of think tank Civitas and Director of the Family and Education Unit. A qualified primary school teacher and Chair of national parenting support charity Family Lives, Anastasia de Waal has written a number of publications on education and family issues.

The

Employability and Careers Edition: 1 Date: 03/05/2019

A highly practical, hands-on guide, this book is packed with useful features, including interactive exercises to help you in your real life; insider advice from employers; and tips from professionals at different stages in their careers who reveal ‘what they wish they’d known’.

To get the career you want, you need to be job-ready. This is your all-in-one guide to understanding what employers want and how to prepare yourself with a personal career plan. From gaining work experience, to mastering essential skills and acing the application process, The Job-Ready Guide is a complete resource for standing out from the crowd and getting a job offer. It shows you how to build a strong CV, write an impressive cover letter, excel at interviews, and cultivate the professionalism that employers want.

Author Information Ken Russell and Philip Carter are IQ test experts who are continually devising new IQ tests and puzzles. They have produced over 60 books covering all aspects of testing, crosswords, puzzles and reasoning. These include the best-selling Test your IQ published by Kogan Page. Philip Carter is also the author of IQ & Psychometric Tests, The IQ & Psychometric Test Workbook, Test and Assess Your IQ, Advanced IQ Tests, IQ and Aptitude Tests, IQ and Personality Tests, Succeed at IQ Tests, all published by Kogan Page. 1000 Practice

Your Edition:Brainpower 3

Date: 03/08/2015 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474300 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474317 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: General Subject: Testing

Test Questions to Boost

112 Testing Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents 1 Test 1 - Questions 2 Test 2 - Questions 3 Test 3 - Questions 4 Test 4 - Questions 5 Test 5 - Questions 6 Test 6 - Questions 7 Test 7 - Questions 8 Test 8 - Questions 9 Test 9 - Questions 10 Test 10 - Questions 11 Test 11 - Questions 12 Test 12 - Questions 13 Test 13 - Questions 14 Test 14 - Questions 15 Test 15 - Questions 16 Test 16 - Questions 17 Test 17 - Questions 18 Test 18 - Questions 19 Test 19 - Questions 20 Test 20 - Questions 21 Test 21 - Questions 22 Test 22 - Questions 23 Test 23 - Questions 24 Test 24 - Questions 25 Test 25 - Questions This book « Is the biggest book of IQ practice tests available with 1000 psychometric test questionssubstantially more than the nearest competitor « Is perfect for those facing an IQ test or for puzzle enthusiasts « Covers every aspect of IQ testing, including verbal reasoning, diagrammatic reasoning and lateral thinking « Is written by two of the undisputed masters of IQ testing, Philip Carter and Ken Russell, who have created over 60 books on the subject Description IQ tests are routinely encountered in recruitment for various industries, including for jobs in the government, armed forces, and education as well as industry and commerce. Competition is fierce and employers are determined to cut the weak from the strong so it is essential for candidates to be prepared. Ultimate IQ Tests is the biggest book of IQ practice tests available. Written and compiled by experts in IQ testing and brain puzzles, it contains 1000 practice questions organized into 25 tests, with a simple guide to assessing individual performance.

With a brand new test in this edition, designed to be more challenging than the others so you can track progress, this is the best one-stop resource to mind puzzles. Working through the questions will help you to improve your vocabulary and develop powers of calculation and logical reasoning. From the best-selling Ultimate series, Ultimate IQ Tests is an invaluable resource if you have to take an IQ test, but it’s also great fun if you like to stretch your mind for your own entertainment - and boost your brain power. About the Ultimate series... The Ultimate series contains practical advice on essential job search skills to give you the best chance of getting the job you want. Taking you from your job search to completing an interview, it includes guidance on CV or résumé and cover letter writing, practice questions for passing aptitude, psychometric and other employment tests, and reliable advice for interviewing.

Ultimate IQ Tests

Ultimate Aptitude Tests, now in its fourth edition and part of the best-selling Ultimate series, is the largest and most comprehensive book of its kind, boasting over 1000 varied practice aptitude questions with accompanying answers and explanations. In such a competitive job market, it’s the perfect book to ensure you’re entirely prepared to get those high scores and impress potential employers.

Providing essential practice, Ultimate Aptitude Tests includes tests like those you are likely to encounter, including abstract visual tests, verbal and numerical reasoning tests, practical skills and understanding tests, spatial and systems potential tests and logic and intuition tests of different types.

The Ultimate series contains practical advice on essential job search skills to give you the best chance of getting the job you want. Taking you from your job search to completing an interview, it includes guidance on CV or résumé and cover letter writing, practice questions for passing aptitude, psychometric and other employment tests, and reliable advice for interviewing.

Do you need to prepare for an aptitude test for an interview or selection process? Do you want to practise and improve your scores?

Businesses use aptitude tests when recruiting; sometimes even to fast-track potential leaders.

Tom Barrett runs a online software development consultancy. He specialises in web software architecture, web standards, usability and content management. Tom is a psychology graduate and has developed the software for the online psychometric tests available at insight-tests.com.

About the Ultimate series...

113 Testing Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents Introduction 1 Abstract Visual Tests 2 Constructs 3 Sequences 4 Perceptual 2 Abstract Numerical Tests 3 Reasoning 4 Interpolation 3 Abstract Verbal Tests 4 Deduction 5 Analysis 4 Physical Tests 5 Dynamics 6 Tracing 5 Spatial Tests 6 Formation 7 3D Tests 6 Practical Numerical Tests 7 Reckoning 8 Arithmetic 9 Figure Work 10 Number Skills 11 Calculations 7 System Tests 8 Systems 9 Coding 8 Practical Verbal Tests 9 Word Usage 10 Vocabulary 11 Verbal Precision 9 Online Testing 10 Core Intelligence Test This book « Contains 1,000 questions of essential practice for recruitment tests and aptitude assessment procedures « Includes detailed explanations of answers to aid learning and test scoring abilities « Comes with a free suite of online tests which allow the reader to practise and score themselves against others « Gives readers the technical skills and practice opportunities so that they can impress prospective employers and get hired « Is part of the successful Ultimate series, containing practical advice on essential job search skills and offering the best chance at getting the job you want Description

This new edition also now includes a brand new section on online testing environments as well as free access to a separate full online test to evaluate your abilities. Ultimate Aptitude Tests is brilliant preparation for candidates wishing to outshine their competition and secure their dream job.

Jim Barrett is a chartered psychologist with years of experience in advising organizations on their selection procedures. He is a bestselling author and has written many testing books, including The Complete Personality Assessment, How to Pass Advanced Aptitude Tests, The Aptitude Test Workbook and he is co-author of Test Your Own Aptitude, all published by Kogan Page.

Ultimate Aptitude Tests

Over 1000 Practice Questions for Abstract Visual, Numerical, Verbal, Physical, Spatial and Systems Tests

Author Information

Edition: 4 Date: 03/07/2018 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482084 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482091 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: General Subject: Testing

This book « Boasts over 1,000 practice questions, with supporting answers and explanations Features sample questions from every major type of test including verbal and numerical reasoning, personality questionnaires, non-verbal and diagrammatic tests, spatial and recognition tests, situational awareness questions, quantities and conversions

Price:

But practice makes perfect - and with over 1,000 exercises from all the major types of test, Ultimate Psychometric Tests is the ideal tool to help you get to grips with: -verbal and numerical reasoning -personality questionnaires -non-verbal and diagrammatic reasoning -spatial recognition and visual estimation -situational awareness -quantities and conversion tests

Author Information Mike Bryon is an expert in psychometrics and training solutions, based in Newhaven, UK. He is the author of many testing books, including How to Pass Graduate Psychometric Tests, The Graduate Psychometric Test Workbook, How to Pass Advanced Numeracy Tests, The Advanced Numeracy Test Workbook and How to Pass the Civil Service Qualifying Tests all published by Kogan Page. and 5 03/07/2021 £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398602380 ISBN Ebook: 9781398602397 Pages: 296 Format (mm): 235x152 Product Category: General Subject: Testing

PsychometricUltimate Tests 1000 Questions and Answers for Verbal, Numerical,

« Is part of the successful Ultimate series, containing practical advice on essential job search skills and offering the best chance at getting the job you want

Personality Edition:Tests

With each test supported by detailed answers and explanations, Ultimate Psychometric Tests will boost your confidence and your performance on the day, to help you land your next dream job.

test - or your nerves - stand between you and your dream job.

Don’tDescriptionletapsychometric

Many interviews and assessment centres include psychometric testing as part of the hiring process, and fears about tests are all too common and undermine confidence and performance on the day.

114 Testing Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents 1 Psychometric tests – What are they? 2 How to pass psychometric tests and how to use this book 3 Verbal reasoning 4 Numerical reasoning 5 Personality questionnaires 6 Non-verbal reasoning, mechanical comprehension and data interpretation 7 Answers and explanations

About the Ultimate series...

Date:

Author Information Heidi Smith is the author of a number of best-selling books on psychometric testing. She has many years’ experience working in global consultancies in education and training and now runs her own consultancy providing Russian-language business services.

Over 550 Practice Questions Edition: 3 Date: 03/06/2017 Price: £12.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480196 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480202 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 199x131 Product Category: General Subject: Testing

This book « Contains over 550 practice questions - the highest number of practice questions on the market - to help readers become as prepared as possible for numerical reasoning tests « New to this edition: brand new chapter on Data Sufficiency test questions, an increasingly common element in numerical reasoning tests « Is written in a clear, accessible style to improve readers’ confidence and demystify numerical problems « Covers the essential numerical topics readers need to understand when preparing for the tough tests set by many employers Description Containing the largest bank of test questions on the market, How to Pass Numerical Reasoning Tests provides advice, practice and exercises to help you prepare for the rigorous tests used by employers, helping you to build up speed, accuracy and confidence.

115 Testing Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents Introduction 1 Review the Basics 2 Fractions and Decimals 3 Rates 4 Percentages 5 Ratios and Proportions 6 Data Interpretation 7 Word Problems 8 Data Sufficiency Problems

An overview of the basics is followed by a step-by-step guide to numerical tests, covering: - Fractions and decimals - Rates - Percentages - Ratios and proportions - Data interpretation Also containing practice on mathematical problems in written word format to aid your analytical skills, How to Pass Numerical Reasoning Tests gives you everything you need to boost your ability and face the challenge head on.

How TestsNumericalPassReasoning

This book Features a unique five-step winning approach to verbal reasoning tests to help readers beat the competition written in a clear and accessible style to improve readers’ understanding and confidence with difficult verbal reasoning over 500 practice questions and expert advice covering all aspects of advanced verbal reasoning Containing the largest bank of test questions on the market, How to Pass Advanced Verbal Reasoning Tests provides advice, practice and exercises to help you prepare for the rigorous tests used by employers, helping you to build up speed, accuracy and confidence. Testing expert Mike Bryon offers practice on a range of areas, including: - English usage - Written assessments - Presentations - Group exercises - Assessment centres Including four timed realistic tests with interpretations of your score, How to Pass Advanced Verbal Reasoning Tests covers word links, word swaps, sentence sequence, decision analysis, reading comprehension as well as critical reasoning, giving you everything you need to boost your ability and face the challenge head on.

Over 500 Practice Questions Edition: 3 Date: 03/06/2017 Price: £12.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480172 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480189 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 218x140 Product Category: General Subject: Testing

exercises « Contains

« Is

How to ReasoningAdvancedPassVerbalTests

116 Testing Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents 1 Verbal Reasoning Tests 2 The Winning Approach 3 110 Warm Up Questions 4 100 English Usage Questions 5 100 True, False or Cannot Tell Questions 6 Decision Analysis 7 Four Timed Realistic Tests with Interpretations of Your Score 8 Answers and Detailed Explanations

Description

Author Information Mike Bryon is an expert in psychometrics and training solutions. He is also the author of many books including Ultimate Psychometric Tests, How to Master the UKCAT, Management Level Psychometric Assessments, The Verbal Reasoning Test Workbook, Great Answers to Tough Career Dilemmas and How to Pass Graduate Psychometric Tests, all published by Kogan Page.

Essential Practice for the Qualified Teacher Status Skills Tests Edition: 2 Date: 03/07/2016 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478292 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478308 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: General Subject: Testing

117 Testing Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents 1 Numeracy 1 Mental arithmetic 2 General arithmetic 3 Statistics 2 Literacy 3 Spelling 4 Punctuation 5 Grammar 6 Comprehension 3 Answers with Explanations and Glossary 4 Answers 5 Glossary

Skills Tests

the test «

All trainee teachers in England and Wales have to sit numeracy and literacy skills tests in order to achieve Qualified Teacher Status (QTS) which permits them to continue or start teaching. How to Pass the QTS Numeracy and Literary Skills Tests includes both literacy and numeracy revision and mock tests. The numeracy section starts at a low level and includes a diagnostic test, a maths review, mental and general arithmetic practice, and revision of statistics. It gives the reader a good grounding in the skills needed to pass the test, particularly if maths has always been a weak subject or hasn’t been revised in years. The literacy section includes practice material on spelling, punctuation, grammar and comprehension. It highlights the areas where people commonly have problems, and provides easy to follow explanations and practice questions and answers.

Description

Online supporting resources for this book include MP3 audio files to test mental arithmetics and sample numeracy tests.

This book « Provides more than 1,000 questions to help you prepare for the QTS Skills Test Provides practice and review of basic maths and literacy well as the more complex problems that in Contains practice in verbal reasoning, numerical reasoning and abstract reasoning Online Resources: MP3 audio files to test mental arithmetic and sample numeracy tests

feature

Author Information Chris Tyreman has 12 years’ experience coaching candidates in Maths, English and IQ tests. He is a tutor for distance learners studying for GCSE Maths and the QTS skills tests and the author of learning materials used in colleges of further and higher education. He is also the author of How to Master Nursing Calculations, and co-author of How to Master the UKCAT also published by Kogan Page.

to Pass the QTS Numeracy and

How Literacy

Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749497293 ISBN Ebook: 9780749497309 Pages: 160 Format (mm): 218x138 Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

118 Workplace Skills Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents Introduction 1 Why are you writing? 2 Business writing for today 3 Quality matters 4 Writing across generations – For colleagues as well as clients 5 Telling your story through social media 6 Standard or variant english 7 Writing globally? Or in multinational teams? 8 E-mail and instant messaging 9 Punctuation and grammar tips 10 Practical conventions and common confusions 11 Paper is here to stay 12 Conclusion - What will you do differently – and better? This book « Gives both native and non-native English speakers a solid grounding and confidence boost in writing for business; including email, CVs and cover letters, social media, common errors and how to avoid them, and global business English « Features international case studies to illustrate examples in context, including Innocent, Ogilvy and Mather, and Virgin « New to this edition: New chapter on writing for different generations, clients and colleagues; updated content on instant messaging, gender-neutral pronouns, and the enduring power of paper Description

to EnglishEffectiveWriteBusiness

Your Guide to Excellent Professional 3

How

Edition:Communication

Author Information Fiona Talbot is an internationally acclaimed business writing author. She works in the UK and internationally, training and advising on how to deliver premier written corporate communication for both native and nonnative English speakers in today’s digital, global economy. She has featured in major publications such as The Sunday Times, The Irish Times, The Press Association, Accounting Technician and Personnel Management, to name just a few. She is also the author of Improve Your Global Business English, Make an Impact with Your Written English, and Executive Writing Skills for Managers, all published by Kogan Page.

Do you need a confidence boost in your workplace communication? Whether you speak English as an additional language, or you’re a native speaker looking to take your writing to the next level, How to Write Effective Business English provides easy to apply guidance on how to express yourself in writing clearly, concisely, and confidently. With case studies from companies such as Innocent and Virgin which demonstrate how English is used internationally in business, and ideas to help you get your communications right first time, this book is ideal for multinational companies where communication is a priority. For native English speakers, it may mean un-learning things you were taught at school and learning how to save time by getting to the point more quickly in emails; for intermediate English speakers, it focuses on the areas that are easy to get wrong.

Date: 03/09/2019

Author Fiona Talbot uses real international business scenarios to help you develop and apply your skills, and provide you with answers that even your boss might not know. You will learn a system to help you quickly and easily write emails, letters, social media content, CVs and more. Featuring sections on punctuation and grammar, checklists to help you assess your progress, updated content on instant messaging and gender-neutral pronouns, and now with a new chapter on writing for different colleagues and co-workers, this third edition of How to Write Effective Business English will help you get your message across with impact.

Online supporting resources for this book include supplementary video, self-test questions and answers, templates and a case study on going global

Improve Your Global Business English

Very readable and hugely instructive, Improve Your Global Business English provides practical selfstudy with quizzes, activities and worksheets, helping you to fine-tune your written communication.

4 Common

6 Writing

In a business world that spans several continents, it is no longer common for everyone to speak English as a first language. Whether you speak English as a first, second or even third language, intercultural business communication means that getting it right first time has never been more important for you and your organization. English can never be standardized in the global and digital marketplace; instead, we can learn how to customize business English according to our own values and culture and communicate successfully across borders. Improve Your Global Business English creates an awareness in the reader of what to avoid and how to ensure that communications are correctly understood.

119 Workplace Skills Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents

Author Information Fiona Talbot runs TQI Word Power Skills, a Business Writing Skills consultancy. In addition to writing articles for Personnel Today, British Airways and CCF magazine, she is the author of the Better Business English series, published by Kogan Page. Sudakshina Bhattarcharjee is a lecturer at the Institute of Leadership in Kolkata, where she teaches journalism and mass communications for both undergraduate and postgraduate courses. Previous posts include Lecturing for Kingston College of Further Education and The London College. She lives both in India and the UK. www. sudakshinakina.com

5 How

The Essential Toolkit for Writing and Communicating Across Borders Edition: 1 Date: 03/11/2012 Price: £15.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749466138 ISBN Ebook: 9780749466152 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 217x138 Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

By mastering the basics, defining your readers and tailoring your message to them, understanding the conventions of different media and understanding cultures, you can enhance your reputation as a truly global, modern player in today’s marketplace. If you want your messages to be perceived as you intended, to retain customers or to win new ones, Improve Your Global Business English gives you the background you need.

This book « Allows you not only to master the basics, but to customize business English according to your own and your company’s values and culture « Grows your confidence in expressing yourself clearly and with tact, understanding and finesse « Includes quizzes, activities and worksheets for practical self-study and monitoring progress « Provides insights and examples from the authors’ international experience and their combined understanding of working in different cultures « Reflects modern business realities, with chapters dedicated to mastering communication on social media « Online Resources: supplementary video, self-test questions and answers, templates and a case study on going global Description

3 Deciding

Introduction Writing English for global business Why do we write in business? your business writing objectives in the digital age challenges in business English in a global workplace does writing in a global economy affect us all? e-mails Making an impact Using the global word power skills guide Report writing Writing agendas, notes and minutes of meetings Personal and company promotion in the digital age Using word power skills with social networking media Quality matters Writing tips for everyday business 15 The kaleidoscope effect –further perspectives for global business English

Table

to Write Reports Proposalsand Create DocumentsAttention-GrabbingthatAchieveYour

120 Workplace Skills Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

This fully updated 6th edition now features even more practical exercises, useful templates and top tips that will help you to write succinctly and with impact across different media. How to Write Reports and Proposals will give you the tools to put over a good case with style.

Goals Edition: 6 Date: 03/07/2022 Price: £12.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398606104 ISBN Ebook: 9781398606357 Pages: 160 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

of Contents

Introduction – Pitfalls and opportunities 1 What makes good business writing? 2 Creating a good report 3 Preparing to write 4 The power of language 5 Making numbers clear 6 Making proposals persuasive 7 The contribution of layout and presentation

GettingDescriptionamessage across on paper and presenting a proposal in a clear and persuasive form are vital skills for anyone in business. This book provides practical advice on how to impress, convince and persuade.

This book « Offers clear, concise and practical guidance on how to write succinctly and with impact across different media, as well as deciding what to include in a report « Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential work skills to help you develop your career « New to this edition: new and improved practical features to aid learning, including useful templates, top tips and interactive, reflective exercises

Author Information Patrick Forsyth runs Touchstone Training & Consultancy and specializes in marketing, sales and communications skills. He is based in Essex, UK. He is the author of more than fifty successful business books, translated into 17 languages, including Successful Time Management, also published in the Kogan Page Creating Success series. He writes regularly for a number of business journals, and for Writing Magazine.

How

Workplace Skills

« Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential work skills to help you develop your career

Author Information Alan Barker is Managing Director of Kairos Training, a learning consultancy devoted to creativity and communication at work. He is based in Wiltshire, UK. He is the author of How to Manage Meetings, also published by Kogan Page.

How to Build Trust, Be Heard and Communicate with Confidence Edition: 6 Date: 03/07/2022 Price: £12.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398605824 ISBN Ebook: 9781398605893 Pages: 176 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject:

BetterDescriptioncommunication skills will have a direct impact on your career development. Improve Your Communication Skills is your practical guide to effective communication in business.

This fully updated 6th edition now features a handy self-assessment tool to help you profile your own preferred communication style, even more practical exercises, useful checklists and top tips, as well as content on influencing others and managing difficult conversations. This book provides vital guidance on improving your conversations, building rapport, giving effective presentations, writing excellent reports and networking successfully. With the help of Improve Your Communication Skills, you will be able to get your message across - every time.

This book « Offers a comprehensive guide to all types of communication at work, including useful tips, checklists and exercises for a direct impact on career development

121 Workplace Skills Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents 1 What is communication? 2 What’s your communication style? 3 Seven ways to improve your conversations 4 The skills of enquiry 5 The skills of persuasion 6 Tough conversations 7 Making a presentation 8 Putting it in writing 9 Networked – The new conversation

« New to this edition: new and improved practical features to aid learning, including useful templates, top tips, and interactive, reflective exercises

Improve SkillsCommunicationYour

Author Information Theo Theobald has spent most of his adult life in front of an audience, as Management Trainer, Stand-Up Comic and most recently Funeral Celebrant, writing and conducting countless services. A media career including a senior role with the BBC, was followed by 20 years as a freelancer. He is the author of On Message, also published by Kogan Page. He is based in Worcestershire, UK.

122 Workplace Skills Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents Introduction 1 What’s your motivation? 2 Where do you begin? 3 What on earth are you going to say? 4 It’s time to write… now! 5 The power of storytelling 6 Using humor 7 Visual aids and other tools 8 Rehearsal 9 Finding your voice 10 Openings 11 Endings 12 Handling your nerves 13 Handling your audience 14 Question and answer sessions 15 Getting ready – Some practical aspects 16 As the moment approaches 17 Stripped bare 18 Advanced interactivity 19 Progress report 20 Confidence under pressure 21 What next This book « Helps you face your performance demons, improve your skills and enhance your career prospects « Provides in-depth advice on how to cultivate successful interaction with an audience, find an authentic voice and judge what’s expected of a presenter « New to this edition: Updated to take into account new technologies, the basic rules of presenting on screen and how to interact with other people when working remotely « Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential skills to help you develop your career

Develop PresentationYour Skills How to Inspire and Inform with Clarity and Confidence Edition: 5 Date: 03/07/2022 Price: £12.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398605930 ISBN Ebook: 9781398605947 Pages: 184 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

ProvidesDescriptionstep-by-step advice to prepare effectively and nail that presentation. This quick and easy guide provides a practical toolkit for developing a winning presentation and improving your confidence.

Complete with case studies and expert input to help you avoid disaster, Develop Your Presentation Skills includes content to help you to deliver a presentation ‘stripped bare’ and to use new media to engage with your audience. This fully updated 5th edition now features even more practical exercises, useful templates and top tips to help you find your voice and use it with style; to inform, to persuade, to impress. From unpicking the original brief and understanding just what the audience wants, to facing your performance demons and constructing compelling content, you will keep your audience rapt with attention.

Dealing with Difficult People Fast, Effective Strategies for Handling Problem People Edition: 5 Date: 03/07/2022 Price: £12.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398606159 ISBN Ebook: 9781398606234 Pages: 176 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

123 Workplace Skills Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

Table of Contents A short course in human relations 2 The seven classic difficult types 3 Dealing with difficult bosses 4 Dealing with difficult colleagues 5 Dealing with difficult staff 6 Massaging the egotists Handling aggressive people Deaing with laziness Beating the bullies at their own game Moaners, groaners and critics Perfectionists can be a pain 12 Manipulating the manipulators 13 Morale, attitude and how was it for you 14 Fault-finders and nit-pickers 15 Gossip:a bush fire you can do without 16 The customer is always right – really? 17 Complaints: we love them 18 e-difficut@yourplace 19 Social networking 20 If things don’t change they’ll stay the same 21 A fast-track guide to conflict and how to handle it 22 And, finally, finally… This book « Features example scripts so you’re never stuck for what to say, as well as quick fire escapes and negotiation tools, ensuring you keep your cool at home and at work

« Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential and value-adding work skills to help you develop your career

« Is written by the highly respected speaker and broadcaster Roy Lilley and has sold over 50,000 copies over the past editions

« New to this edition: Information on cyber bullying and on-line behaviour, and add a new section on remote working LearnDescriptionhowtonavigate the bullies, manipulators and complainers who drive you mad. With example dialogue and techniques, it will help you navigate tricky situations situations and keep your cool. By understanding the motives and individual behaviours of difficult people, you can learn to manage aggression, reduce awkwardness and remain the better person. This 5th edition of the bestselling Dealing with Difficult People features practical exercises, useful templates and top tips you need to get the best out of the worst, including how to deal with difficult customers, dealing with difficult people in the digital sphere, advice on beating bullies at their own game and how to deal with a boss who drives you barmy. The Creating Success series of books... Unlock vital skills, power up your performance and get ahead with the bestselling Creating Success series. Written by experts for new and aspiring managers and leaders, this million-selling collection of accessible and empowering guides will get you up to speed in no time. Packed with clever thinking, smart advice and the kind of winning techniques that really get results, you’ll make fast progress, quickly reach your goals and create lasting success in your career.

Author Information Roy Lilley is an established writer, broadcaster and commentator on health and social issues, speaking at conferences and seminars throughout the UK and overseas. He regularly contributes to The Today Programme, Newsnight, the Midnight Hour, BBC News 24, and BBC Radio Five Live. He writes for The Guardian, The Sunday Times, The Telegraph and other national papers and management periodicals. He is based in Surrey, UK.

This book « Provides effective ways to manage your schedule so as to maximize productivity at work and at home « Is packed with exercises, action sheets, and appendices, including a brief assessment of various time management systems such as day, year, and meeting planners

« Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential work skills to help you develop your career

This book includes great time-saving ideas, practical solutions and checklists, plus advice on: controlling paperwork, organizing your emails, delegating and working with others, prioritizing to focus on key issues, getting and staying organized. This fully updated 6th edition features even more practical exercises, useful templates and top tips to help you minimize time-wasting and interruptions, and focus on the priorities that will lead to success in your job and career. Successful Time Management will give you the tools to become more efficient and effective.

Successful ManagementTime

124 Workplace Skills Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents 1 Time, a key resource –Opportunities and difficulties 2 First steps towards effective time management 3 Getting (and staying) organized 4 Combating the time wasters 5 Emails – Shortcut or time black hole? 6 First things first 7 Controlling the paperwork 8 Working with other people 9 Final words

« New to this edition: updated to include more on home and mixed home/remote working and how to manage yourself when you’re based away from the office

is packed with proven tips, tools and techniques to help you review and assess your time management and adopt new work practices to improve it.

Author Information Patrick Forsyth runs Touchstone Training & Consultancy and specializes in marketing, sales and communications skills. He is based in Essex, UK. He is the author of more than fifty successful business books, translated into 17 languages, including How to Write Reports and Proposals, also published in the Kogan Page Creating Success series. He writes regularly for a number of business journals, and for Writing Magazine

SuccessfulDescriptionTimeManagement

How to be Organized, Productive and Get Things Done Edition: 6 Date: 03/07/2022 Price: £12.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398606197 ISBN Ebook: 9781398606319 Pages: 176 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

Simple Ways to Take Control, Save Time and Work More Efficiently Edition: 7 Date: 03/07/2022 Price: £12.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398606098 ISBN Ebook: 9781398606333 Pages: 176 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

« New to this edition: updated material on working at home, post-pandemic. More advice on multilocation working, organizing workspace and dealing with distractions and disruptions and how to maximize digital collaboration DramaticallyDescriptionimprove the way you work with great tips on how to determine goals, prioritize tasks, overcome distractions; build positive work habits and adjusting to working at home.

This fully updated 7th edition now features even more practical exercises, useful templates and top tips to help you get organized, as well as content on how to deal with the ubiquitous presence of smartphones and adapt to the ever increasing scope for interruption and procrastination in our 24/7 lives. How to Organize Yourself will enable you to take control of your workload, reduce stress and fatigue, and free up time for the things that really matter.

125 Workplace Skills Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Know where you are going 3 Organize your time 4 Understand the way you work 5 Organize information 6 Organize the way you work with others 7 Organize your space 8 Organize filing systems 9 Use technology effectively 10 Organize yourself at home and away 11 Keep up the good work

« Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential work skills to help you develop your career

This book « Offers very practical tips that are easy to implement and will overhaul how you run your work and home life « Includes information on dealing with email overload, organizing digital files and the latest notable software to give an immediate impact on how organized you are

How to

Author Information John Caunt is a freelance writer, drawing on his many years’ experience as a senior manager, trainer and life coach. He is the author of Stay Confident, How to Organize Yourself, Boost Your Self-Esteem and 30 Minutes to Manage Information Overload, all published by Kogan Page. He is based on the Isle of Wight, UK.

YourselfOrganize

Packed with practical exercises and top tips, the book includes advice on wellbeing when working from home, how to get organized, how to start a new role when you’re not in the office and suggestions on the best ways to be productive. HR specialist Gemma Dale also explains about managing the performance of remote and hybrid teams and effectively making home working accessible for all colleagues.

126 Workplace Skills Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Skills for remote work 3 Practicalities 4 Communication and collaboration 5 Personal productivity 6 Wellbeing 7 Presence and personal brand 8 Starting a new role remotely 9 Leading remotely

How to Work Remotely will help anyone adapt to home, remote and hybrid working. Suitable for homeworkers, or the managers and leaders of homeworkers, this highly practical book will address how to be successful and build a career while working remotely, or away from the office.

to RemotelyWork Work Effectively, No

This book « Explains how employees can successfully adapt to home, remote, flexible and hybrid working Advises managers of homeworkers how to communicate with their teams, lead and manage performance and addresses questions around productivity, motivation and trust Identifies key skills you need to develop such as relationship building, understanding the needs of your organization and effectively using technology

work is here to stay, but everyone experiences it differently. Find out how to make working at home and remote work, work for you.

Author Information Gemma Dale is an experienced HR Director, Chartered Fellow of the CIPD, Fellow of the HEA and a regular speaker and writer on a variety of HR topics including employee engagement, flexible working and wellbeing. She is the co-author of several ebooks on HR and wellbeing, and Flexible Working also published by Kogan Page. She is also lecturer in the Business School at Liverpool John Moores University, as well as running her own business, The Work Consultancy where she focuses on focuses on policy development, flexible working and wellbeing. She is based in Liverpool, UK.

How Matter Where You Edition:Are 1 Date: 03/07/2022 Price: £12.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398606111 ISBN Ebook: 9781398606371 Pages: 176 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

« Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential work skills to help you develop your career

Non-officeDescriptionbased

How to Manage People Fast, Effective Management Skills that Really Get Results

« Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential work skills to help you develop your career

« Written by bestselling author Michael Armstrong, whose books have sold over a million copies and been translated into 24 languages

« New to this edition: managing homeworkers, more on change management and updated advice on essential management skills

Author Information Michael Armstrong is a bestselling author and people management expert, based in London, UK. With over a million copies sold, his books have been translated into twenty four languages. He is managing partner of E-Reward as well as an independent management consultant. Prior to this, he was a chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD). He is also the author of the bestselling How to Be an Even Better Manager, now in its 10th edition and also published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 5 Date: 03/07/2022 Price: £12.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398605466 ISBN Ebook: 9781398605473 Pages: 216 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

This book « Provides a complete overview of people management, its most common issues and how to deal with them along with practical tools to get the best from teams

127 Workplace Skills Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents 1 Managing people – what managers do 2 Treat people right 3 Leadership 4 Motivating people 5 Enhancing engagement 6 Organizing people 7 Team building 8 Delegating 9 Defining work 10 Managing performance 11 Helping people to learn 12 Selection interviewing 13 Rewarding people 14 Managing change 15 Managing conflict 16 Handling people problems

BestsellingDescriptionauthor

Michael Armstrong provides valuable insight into the skills required to be an effective manager, helping you get the best from your staff through motivation, reward and leadership. This fully updated 5th edition now features even more practical exercises, useful templates, and top tips, alongside advice on managing virtual teams, enhancing employee engagement and managing conflict. Essential reading for anyone who wants to get the best from their teams, How to Manage People distils the essence of good management into one handy, easy-to-use book.

BRONZEDescriptionRUNNER

Confident Coding How to Write Code and Futureproof

« Is part of the popular Confident series, which introduces and explains the key digital skills you need to enhance your career

Your Edition:Career 2 Date: 03/09/2020 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789663082 ISBN Ebook: 9781789663099 Pages: 336 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

« New to this edition: new and improved step-by-step examples; a real-life visitor registration app you can create; Mac- and Windows-friendly « Features online coding exercises and activities, for you to practice and hone your new skills

Coding is one of the most in-demand skills in the job market. Whether you’re an entrepreneur, a recent graduate or a professional, you can supercharge your career simply by grasping the fundamentals, and Confident Coding is here to help.

UP: Axiom Awards 2018 - Business Technology Category (1st edition)

Author Information Rob Percival is a web developer, author and entrepreneur who has taught over 500,000 students how to code through his online courses on Udemy. His courses have been translated into over five different languages and have taught people all around the world to become proficient and confident webdevelopers. Darren Woods is Managing Director of Synapture, a Cambridge-based Web/ Software Development Agency. Alongside his development work, he teaches a Pre-Diploma Computer Science course and A-Level Computer Science.

About the Confident series... From coding and web design to data, digital content and cyber security, the Confident books are the perfect beginner’s resource for enhancing your professional life, whatever your career path.

« Was the Bronze Runner Up at the Axiom Awards 2018 - Business Technology Category (1st edition)

This new and improved second edition of the award-winning book gives you a step-by-step learning guide to HTML, CSS, JavaScript, Python, building iPhone and Android apps and debugging. For entrepreneurs, being able to create your own website or app can grant you valuable freedom and revolutionize your business. For aspiring developers, this book will give you the building blocks to embark on your career path. For working professionals, coding skills can add a valuable edge to your CV. Whatever your professional profile, if you want to master the fundamentals of coding and kick start your career, Confident Coding is the book for you.

128 Workplace Skills Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents Introduction 1 Why coding 1 Why coding is important and what it can do for you 2 What coding is 2 Languages 3 HTML 4 CSS 5 JavaScript 6 Python 7 In practice 8 Website development 9 Building an android app 10 Building an iPhone/iPad app 11 Debugging 4 Futureproofing your career with coding 5 Using coding to enhance your career prospects 6 Coding and entrepreneurship – creating your own business or product 7 Pursuing coding further –becoming a developer 8 Conclusion This book « Contains practical guidance on how to enhance your career through coding skills « Teaches you how to use HTML, CSS, JavaScript and Python; debug and problem-solve; create your own websites and apps for Android and iOS

Covering the essentials of online content, this book takes you through everything you need to know - from how to write effectively for online platforms, through to video, audio, graphic design and photography. Featuring inspiring case studies from individuals at companies including CNN International, Mumsnet, Bunster’s Hot Sauce and HuffPost UK, this practical beginner’s guide includes guidance on content marketing strategy, metrics and community management.

This updated second edition features advice on the latest trends, including fake news, the importance of stories and social listening analysis. Though trends, fads and hashtags change, the principles of great online content remain the same - let Confident Digital Content give you the grounding you need to ace your social channels and supercharge your career.

129 Workplace Skills Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents Introduction 1 Why digital content skills are essential for your career 2 How to write for digital 3 Making great video 4 Graphic design, photography and audio 5 Digital community building 6 Evaluation 7 Social media 8 People 9 Campaign planning 10 Conclusion

Author Information Adam Waters has been working in digital for fifteen years. He currently runs BFBS Creative. He’s a juror for the Royal Television Society Digital Journalism awards and a regular digital advisor to charities and government. Passionate about creating opportunities through digital skills, Adam is on the InsideOut Leaderboard and runs mentoring programmes for young people.

AreDescriptionyouconsidering a career in social media? Are you an entrepreneur or freelancer looking to boost your online content marketing? Maybe you’re looking for your next career pivot, or you’re simply seeking skills to give your CV that competitive edge? Wherever you are in your career, Confident Digital Content can help.

Futureproof Career Edition: 2 Date: 03/09/2020 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789663365 ISBN Ebook: 9781789663372 Pages: 216 Format (mm): 215x140 Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

This book « Explains the basics of video creation, graphic design, photography, digital journalism and writing skills specialized to the digital world « Can enhance all career paths, with advice on boosting creativity, career prospects, entrepreneurship and leadership in the digital world and exercises to help you put your knowledge into practice « New to this edition: Covers the latest trends including fake news and social listening analysis; updated and improved case studies; and a new chapter on digital content campaign planning « Features interviews with experts from Mumsnet, CNN International, HuffPost UK, Bunster’s Hot Sauce and Crocstar Media

« Is part of the popular Confident series, which introduces and explains the key digital skills you need to enhance your career

Confident Digital Content How to Create and Manage Amazing Social Media and Web Content for a

About the Confident series...

From coding and web design to data, digital content and cyber security, the Confident books are the perfect beginner’s resource for enhancing your professional life, whatever your career path.

Confident Web

and Create

Design

DoDescriptionyouneedawebsite

Author Information Kenny Wood, the founder of IndigoMelody, has over 12 years of experience in web design. He has created websites and apps for organizations including SkillPill, Globelynx, the University of Warwick, Crenshaw Associates, Lennon Wright, Gadfly Media and the British Forces Broadcasting Service. A regular blogger, he created IndigoMelody’s ‘How we Made It’ web design blog.

Wherever you are in your career, Confident Web Design can help. The ultimate beginner’s guide to designing, building and publishing basic websites, this book features exclusive online exercises to help you practice your new skills in context. Covering the basics of HTML, CSS and JavaScript, as well as giving you a thorough grounding in the real-life application of these principles, this book provides helpful examples, explanations of technical terms, and clear, easy-to-understand language - meaning your first website is only a few chapters away.

130 Workplace Skills Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents Introduction 1 How the web works and the tools and languages of web design 1 HTML 2 HTML part 1 3 HTML part 2 2 CSS 3 CSS part 1 4 CSS part 2 5 CSS part 3 3 JavaScript 4 JavaScript part 1 5 JavaScript part 2 6 JavaScript part 3 7 JavaScript part 4 4 Putting everything into practice 5 Creating the website 6 Getting your website online 7 Conclusion This book « Covers the essential skills and concepts you need, including coding languages, tools, creating, enhancing and publishing the website « Provides a step-by-step guide which enables you to build your own basic website by the end of the book, in easy-to-understand language « Features practical online exercises, to allow you to test out your new skills and consolidate your learning « Is part of the popular Confident series, which introduces and explains the key digital skills you need to enhance your career

to support your freelance business or entrepreneurial venture? Or are you considering a career in web design? Maybe you’re looking for your next career pivot, or you’re simply seeking skills to give your CV that competitive edge?

Your Career Edition: 1 Date: 03/09/2020 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789663457 ISBN Ebook: 9781789663464 Pages: 312 Format (mm): 215x138 Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

How to Design Websites and Futureproof

Taking you on a practical journey to publish a basic website from scratch, the book’s structure is designed to break down each skill into manageable chunks. Wherever you are in your career, let Confident Web Design give you that cutting edge with vital programming and design skills.

Introduction 1 Why cyber security? What cyber security is Why it is important The technical side of cyber security Technical vulnerabilities The human side of cyber security Why people are so important in cyber security Social engineering Attacks that utilise social engineering The physical side of cyber security Why physical space matters in cyber security Attacks on the individual Attacks on organisations Nation state cyber security –Geopolitics The future of cyber security and what it means for your career Cyber security in different industries Cyber security at the board level The variety of cyber security careers 14 Pursuing a cyber security career This book « Covers the basic principles of cyber security, a vital and in-demand skill area « Features real-world case studies to help you apply your knowledge, from companies and people such such as Disney, the NHS, Taylor Swift and Frank Abagnale, plus examples from a range of industries including entertainment, social media influencers and property « Includes practical exercises to help you hone your skills, as well as dedicated advice on how cyber security can enhance your career, wherever you are in your work life « Is part of the popular Confident series, which introduces and explains the key digital skills you need to enhance your career

Author Information Dr Jessica Barker is an award-winning global leader in cyber security. She is co-Founder and co-CEO of Cygenta, where she influences cyber security awareness, behaviour and culture in organizations around the world. She has been named one of the top 20 most influential women in cyber security in the UK, is the Chair of ClubCISO. and is a popular keynote speaker, including RSA San Francisco in 2020.

About the Confident series...

Your Career Edition: 1 Date: 03/09/2020 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789663402 ISBN Ebook: 9781789663419 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 217x140 Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

From coding and web design to data, digital content and cyber security, the Confident books are the perfect beginner’s resource for enhancing your professional life, whatever your career path.

131 Workplace Skills Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

of Contents

Confident Cyber Security

Table

TheDescriptionworldismore digitally connected than ever before, and with this connectivity, comes vulnerability. It is therefore vital that all professionals understand cyber risk and how to minimize it. This means that cyber security skills are in huge demand, and there are vast career opportunities to be taken.

Confident Cyber Security is here to help. This jargon-busting guide will give you a clear overview of the world of cyber security. Exploring everything from the human side to the technical and physical implications, this book takes you through the fundamentals: how to keep secrets safe, how to stop people being manipulated and how to protect people, businesses and countries from those who wish to do Featuringharm.real-world case studies from Disney, the NHS, Taylor Swift and Frank Abagnale, as well as social media influencers and the entertainment and other industries, this book is packed with clear explanations, sound advice and practical exercises to help you understand and apply the principles of cyber security. Let Confident Cyber Security give you that cutting-edge career boost you seek.

How to Get Started in Cyber Security and Futureproof

« Demystifies the seemingly difficult world of data and makes complicated techniques easy to understand through clear language and step-by-step instructions

132 Workplace Skills Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1 “What is it?” key principles 2 Defining data 3 How data fulfils our needs 4 AI and our Future 2 “When and where can I get it?” data gathering and analysis 5 Identify the problem 6 Data preparation 7 Data analysis (part I) 8 Data analysis (part II) 3 “How can I present it?” communicating data 9 Data visualization 10 Data presentation 11 Your career in data science

Whether you’re an entrepreneur wanting to boost your business, a jobseeker looking for that employable edge, or simply hoping to make the most of your current career, Confident Data Skills is here to help.

This updated second edition takes you through the basics of data: from data mining and preparing and analysing your data, to visualizing and communicating your insights. It now contains exciting new content on neural networks and deep learning. Featuring in-depth international case studies from companies including Amazon, LinkedIn and Mike’s Hard Lemonade Co, as well as easy-to understand language and inspiring advice and guidance, Confident Data Skills will help you use your new-found data skills to give your career that cutting-edge boost.

This book « Covers the most important techniques of working with data, including: visualization, modelling, preparation, presentation and communication « Contains several inspiring case studies that show you how data skills are applied in real companies from around the world, including Netflix, LinkedIn, Goodreads, Deep Blue, AlphaGo and Mike’s Hard Lemonade Co. « Gives insightful guidance on how your new skills can boost your employability, enhance your career and make a difference to your chosen industry « New to this edition: New and up-to-date case studies; content on neural networks and deep learning; content on the latest developments and opportunities in AI and deep learning

Author Information Kirill Eremenko is a data science entrepreneur, instructor and consultant. As Founder and CEO of SuperDataScience, he leverages data to drive business strategy, revamp customer experience, and revolutionize business processes. Kirill runs more than 50 online courses, taken by over 1,000,000 students worldwide.

DataDescriptionhasdramatically changed how our world works. Understanding and using data is now one of the most transferable and desirable skills.

Confident Data Skills How to Work with Data and Futureproof Your Career Edition: 2 Date: 03/09/2020 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789664386 ISBN Ebook: 9781789664393 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 215x140 Product Category: General Subject: Workplace Skills

« Is part of the popular Confident series, which introduces and explains the key digital skills you need to enhance your career

The Data Literacy Skills Everyone Needs To Succeed Edition: 1 Date: 03/03/2021 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789668018 ISBN Ebook: 9781789668025 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Professional Subject: Workplace Skills

This book « Shows the reader how to improve their data literacy: the ability to analyze, find insight in, and communicate with data confidently « Explains how to use data to become a better decision maker by developing curiosity, creativity and critical thinking « Examines the different skills required for the four levels of analytics (descriptive, diagnostic, predictive, prescriptive) and for different aspects of the data literacy world, from data visualisation to data science and data architecture « Includes tips, tricks and exercises to work through and examples from industries successfully implementing data literacy skills from a leading expert and trainer InDescriptionthefastmoving world of the fourth industrial revolution not everyone needs to be a data scientist but everyone should be data literate, with the ability to read, analyze and communicate with data.

With learnings to show development and real-world examples from industries implementing data literacy skills, this book explains how to confidently read and speak the ‘language of data’ in the modern business environment and everyday life. Be Data Literate is a practical guide to understanding the four levels of analytics, how to analyze data and the key steps to making smarter, data-informed decisions. Written by a founding pioneer and worldwide leading expert on data literacy, this book empowers professionals with the skills they need to succeed in the digital world.

133 Workplace Skills Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Table of Contents 1 The world of data 2 The four levels of analytics 3 Defining data literacy 4 The data literacy umbrella 5 Reading and speaking the language of data 6 Combining data literacy and the four levels of analytics 7 The steps of data literacy learning 8 The three Cs of data literacy 9 Data informed decisionmaking 10 Data literacy and data and analytical strategy 11 Begin your data and analytics journey

It is not enough for a business to have the best data if those using it don’t understand the right questions to ask or how to use the information generated to make decisions. Be Data Literate is the essential guide to developing the curiosity, creativity and critical thinking necessary to make anyone data literate, without retraining as a data scientist or statistician.

Author Information Jordan Morrow is Head of Data, Design and Management Skills at Pluralsight and a global trailblazer in the world of data literacy, having built one of the world’s first data literacy programs. He served as the Chair of the Advisory Board for The Data Literacy Project, has spoken at numerous conferences around the world and is an active voice in the data and analytics community. He has also helped companies and organizations around the world, including the United Nations, build and understand data literacy. He has won numerous awards for his work and is based in Utah, USA.

Be Data Literate

www.koganpage.com HR, CoachingDevelopmentOrganizational& Innovation and Best Practice in Introduction to HRM HR HumanLeadershipResources Management International HRM HR CoachingTalent,OrganizationalOrganizationsLearningEmployeeEmployeeChangeRewardPerformanceHRStrategicAnalyticsHRMTechnologyManagementManagementManagementEngagementLaw&RelationsandDevelopmentDevelopmentManagement&Recruitment

Choose from our curated ebook collections designed for CIPD and HR courses. CIPD & HR Ebook Collections 31 42CIPD Foundation Core textbooks and reading for optional modules on the CIPD Foundation level qualifications. CIPD Intermediate The complete range of textbooks for the CIPD Intermediate level qualifications. CIPD Advanced All of the textbooks and reading required for the CIPD Advanced level qualifications. HR Professional Books Theory and practice for HR practitioners compiled by the CIPD. HumanPracticeResource HumanManagementResource Introduction to HumanManagementResource Introduction to Employment Law Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace HumanStudyingResourceManagement ManagingLeading,andDevelopingPeople The Key InclusiontoManagementResourcingandTalent DigitalTalentManagementReward HR for Hybrid Working Contact us at corporate-enquiries@koganpage.com Your library can choose a collection above or create your own bespoke collection from CIPD and Kogan Page HR books. Unlimited concurrent users | MARC records | LMS/VLE www.koganpage.com/collectionsintegration

Introduction to HRM Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Date:

« Supports learning with a range of pedagogical features including source review boxes, key learning points summaries and case studies from international organizations such as IBM, HSBC and Johnson and Johnson

Pages:

Price: £47.99 ISBN Paperback:

ISBN Ebook:

Description Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice is the bestselling and definitive resource for HRM students and professionals, which helps readers to understand and implement HR in relation to the needs of the business. It covers in-depth all of the areas essential to the HR function such as employment law, employee relations, learning and development, performance management and reward, as well as the HR skills needed to ensure professional success, including leadership, managing conflict, interviewing and using statistics. Illustrated throughout in full colour and with a range of pedagogical features to consolidate learning (e.g. source review boxes, key learning points, summaries and case studies from international organizations such as IBM, HSBC and Johnson and Johnson), this fully updated 15th edition includes new chapters on the HRM role of line managers, evidence-based HRM, e-HRM and the gender pay gap, further case studies and updated content covering the latest research and developments.

136

Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice is aligned with the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) profession map and standards and is suited to both professionals and students of both undergraduate degrees and the CIPD’s level 5 and 7 professional qualifications. Online supporting resources include comprehensive handbooks for lecturers and students, lecture slides, all figures and tables, toolkits, and a literature review, glossary and bibliography.

This book « Aligns with the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) profession map and standards; ideal for both professionals and those studying undergraduate degrees and the CIPD’s level 5 and 7 qualifications « New to this edition: chapters on the HRM role of line managers, evidence-based HRM, E-HRM and the gender pay gap, further case studies and updated content covering the latest developments and thinking « Online resources: comprehensive handbooks for lecturers and students, lecture slides, all figures and tables, questionnaire, checklist toolkits, a literature review, glossary and bibliography

« Develops understanding of all the essential areas of the HR function, such as employment law, employee relations, learning and development, performance and reward

Format (mm):

PracticeManagementHumanHandbookArmstrong’sofResource Edition:

Author Information Michael Armstrong is the UK’s bestselling author of HRM books. With over a million copies sold, his books have been translated into 21 languages. He is managing partner of e-reward and was previously a chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD). He is the author of a number of other books on HR published by Kogan Page. Stephen Taylor, Chartered CCIPD, is a senior lecturer in Human Resource Management at the University of Exeter Business School and a chief examiner for the CIPD. Before his academic career, he worked in a variety of management roles in the hotel industry and in the NHS. 15 03/01/2020 9780749498276 9780749498283 800 245x190 Introduction HRM

Product Category: Textbook Subject:

Pages:

Human Resource Management at Work includes new global case studies, reflective practice activities to encourage critical thinking, exercises to help the consolidation of learning and ‘explore further’ boxes to encourage wider reading. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual and lecture slides.

137 Introduction to HRM Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching Table of Contents 1 HRM, strategy and the global context 1 HRM, strategy, and diversity and inclusion 2 Forces shaping HRM at work 3 HRM, alignment and integration 4 International and comparative HRM 2 Responsibilities for delivering HRM 5 The changing roles of HR professionals 155 6 Line managers, leadership and HRM 3 HRM practices and processes 7 Resourcing and talent management 225 8 Performance management and development 9 Learning and knowledge development 10 Managing employment relations 11 Employee engagementparticipation,andvoice 12 Reward management 4 HRM and performance from a business perspective 13 HRM and performance 14 Research skills and project management This book « Includes reflective practice activities to encourage students to think critically about the content and self-test their learning progress « Aligns fully with the new CIPD Advanced Level 7 qualification and is written by one of the experts involved in its development « Puts human resource management (HRM) in a business context and includes case studies and practical examples to help prepare students for a professional HR role « New to this edition: Brand new chapter on organisation design and development including coverage of workplace culture, job design and change management as well as additional coverage of analytics, diversity and inclusion « Online resources: lecture slides for each chapter and a lecturer’s guide ADescriptionleadingtextbook in its field, Human Resource Management at Work is a comprehensive guide to the theory and practice of HRM. Aligned to the CIPD Level 7 qualification yet also relevant on non-CIPD accredited HR masters courses, this book covers everything students need to excel in their academic studies and will ensure that they can hit the ground running in a practitioner role after university. Divided into four key parts, the first part of the book covers HRM strategy and the global context, the forces shaping HRM at work and international and comparative HRM. Part Two discusses the role of HR professionals and line managers in the workplace, and how the responsibilities for delivering effective HR vary in a changing world of work, Part Three has expert coverage of the key areas of HR including resourcing and talent management, learning and development (L&D), reward and employment relations. The final part examines the impact that HRM can have on business performance and also outlines the key knowledge and skills required to carry out a business research project. Fully updated through, this seventh edition now has new coverage of diversity and inclusion (D&I), workplace analytics, ethics, wellbeing and precarious work as well as additional coverage of the alignment of HRM with organisational strategy and the integration of different components of HRM.

Format (mm):

ISBN Ebook:

Price:

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Introduction to HRM

Author Information Mick Marchington was emeritus professor of Human Resource Management at University of Manchester, UK and a Chartered Companion of the CIPD. Adrian Wilkinson is a professor and the director of the Centre for Work, Organisation and Wellbeing at Griffith University, Australia and a Chartered Fellow of the CIPD. Rory Donnelly is Professor of HRM at the University of Liverpool, UK and a Chartered Member of the CIPD. Anastasia Kynighou is a senior lecturer in Human Resource Management at Manchester Metropolitan University, UK and a Chartered Member of the CIPD. 03/11/2020 £48.99 9781789664867 9781789664874 568 246x190

ISBN Paperback:

Human WorkManagementResourceat The Definitive Guide Edition: 7 Date:

138 Introduction to HRM Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching Table of Contents 1 Introduction and overview 2 The organisational context 3 The legal background to employment 4 Job analysis and design 5 Recruitment and selection 6 Performance management 7 Reward 8 ?Employee relations 9 Learning and development 10 Information incommunicationandtechnologyHR 11 Change in organisations 12 Personal effectiveness

Author Information Fiona Whiting is a freelance HR and organisational development consultant with over 20 years’ experience as an HR practitioner. She has held a number of executive board-level positions and has worked predominantly with the NHS, local authorities and academic institutions as well as in a variety of private sector organisations. Fiona Whiting is also the co-founder and director of The People Effect List.

Human Resource Practice is a practical and accessible guide for students and anyone looking to gain a thorough understanding of HR and is the definitive text for the CIPD’s Level 3 Foundation Certificate in HR Practice and covers all the core areas of HR including recruitment and selection, performance management, reward and learning and development (L&D). It also provides students with the broader coverage of the business environment that they need to succeed including topics such as change management, organisational context and the legal background to employment. This fully updated 8th edition of Human Resource Practice now includes new coverage of the changing nature and demographic of the workforce, the continuing impact of technology and new developments that may be used. There is also coverage of the importance of data and people analytics to HR as well as an enhanced final chapter which includes additional material on working in a team, influencing skills and the importance of empathy, resilience and emotional intelligence. Reflective activities, case studies and explore further boxes throughout encourage students to think critically about the content and understand how it applies in practice in the workplace. Online resources include an instructor’s manual, lecture slides and annotated web links.

This book « Provides a thorough grounding in all the core areas of HR including recruitment and selection, performance management, reward management and L&D Includes a dedicated chapter on personal effectiveness to provide students with the skills they need to progress in a career in HR such as influence, resilience, empathy and handling difficult conversations Covers wider business topics including change management, organisational context and communication technology to ensure that students have a broad understanding of the business environment Includes reflective practice activities to encourage students to think critically about the content and self-test their learning progress as well as explore further boxes to help students read more widely and explore the content more deeply. « New to this edition: Fully aligned to the new CIPD Level 3 qualification including additional information on job design, people analytics and employee mental health Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides and annotated web links

Description

Human PracticeResource Edition: 8 Date: 03/10/2020 Price: £47.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789665765 ISBN Ebook: 9781789665789 Pages: 416 Format (mm): 247x190 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Introduction to HRM

This book « Provides a comprehensive overview using straightforward language and key concept definitions to introduce those without industry experience to all the key aspects of HR and the role of the HR practitioner « Goes beyond theory and encourages further thinking and reflective learning using ‘pause for thought’ boxes, activities, review questions, practical examples and wider reading to consolidate students’ learning and show how to apply this in the workplace « Includes case studies from a range of organizations such as PwC, Rolls-Royce, Deliveroo and the BBC, as well as small and medium enterprises to show how HRM is applied in different organizations and international contexts « New to this edition: international case studies, updates to legislation, coverage of zero-hours contracts, the gig economy, the continued rise of social media in recruitment and additional information on apprenticeships such as the UK apprenticeship levy « Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides, additional case studies and reflective questions for student self-study

Introduction to Human ManagementResource

Introduction to Human Resource Management is a comprehensive and accessible guide to the subject of HRM. Drawing on the authors’ experiences in both the public and private sectors and underpinned by academic theory, this textbook follows the logical sequence of the employment cycle and shows how human resource management plays out in practice. It covers organizational culture, the role of the HR professional, HR planning, recruitment and selection, talent management, L&D, motivation and performance, health and safety, diversity and equality, employment law, change management and handling and managing information.

With a range of pedagogical features, including contemporary case studies and review questions, Introduction to Human Resource Management maps to the CIPD Level 3 Foundation Certificate in HR Practice and is also ideal for foundation and undergraduate students encountering HRM for the first time. This fully updated 4th edition has been revised and expanded to include coverage of zero-hours contracts and the gig economy, social media and e-recruitment and the UK apprenticeship levy. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual, lecture slides and students’ resources including multiple choice questions, additional case studies and reflective questions for self-study.

Janet Fletcher, Chartered FCIPD, is a senior lecturer in HRM at the University of Wolverhampton, UK. A Guide to HR in Practice Edition: 4 Date: 03/10/2018 Price: £47.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749483685 ISBN Ebook: 9780749483692 Pages: 568 Format (mm): 245x190 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Introduction to HRM

Description

Author Information Charles Leatherbarrow is now retired. His career led him into managing the HR and Training functions within the oil and gas exploration sector in locations around the world. His later life was in academia, lecturing, researching and writing about human resource management.

139 Introduction to HRM Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching Table of Contents 1 Organisations 2 Aspects of organisational culture 3 Human Resource Management (HRM) 4 The role of the HR practitioner 5 Human resource planning 6 Recruitment 7 Selection 8 Induction and retention 9 Learning and development –Key Concepts 10 Learning and development –The practical aspects 11 Employee motivation and performance 12 Employee reward 13 The employment relationship 14 Health, safety, well-being and work-life balance 15 Diversity and equality 16 Understanding employment law 17 Ending the relationshipemployment 18 Change management 19 Handling and managing information

Now aimed at a wider readership of management Masters students, this fully updated 3rd edition of Human Resource Management for MBA and Business Masters features a greater international and contemporary focus, fresh case studies, coverage of the impact of new forms of employment and technology on HR, and updated online supporting resources. With diagrams and models throughout, it covers topics such as CSR, organizational culture and change, performance management and talent management, the criticisms of HRM levelled by the Critical Management School and different HRM challenges as they relate to each chapter. Online supporting resources for tutors include an instructor’s manual, videos, multiple-choice questions and additional case studies; additional resources for students include multiple-choice questions and additional case studies. Heriot-Watt University, UK.

Author Information Iain Henderson is a senior teaching fellow at Edinburgh Business School,

Human MastersMBAManagementResourceforandBusiness Edition: 3 Date: 03/01/2017 Price: £44.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781843984429 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984597 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 246x190 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Introduction to HRM

This book « Offers a solid foundation in both the theory and practice of HRM through a wide variety of pedagogical features « New to this edition: a greater international and contemporary focus, fresh case studies, coverage of the impact of new forms of employment and technology on HR and updated online resources « Online resources: an instructor’s manual, videos, multiple-choice questions and additional case studies for tutors plus multiple-choice questions and additional case studies for students

Description

140 Introduction to HRM Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching Table of Contents 1 Human Resource Management 2 Employee Resourcing 3 Learning and Development 4 Employee Relations 5 Human Resource Management and the Design of Work 6 Managing Performance 7 Managing Rewards 8 The Global Context of HRMInternational and Comparative HRM 9 Contemporary Issues and Future Trends

Packed with practical information and offering a solid foundation in HRM theory, Human Resource Management for MBA and Business Masters covers all the topics MBA students need to know in a concise, accessible way. One of the only texts available for HR non-specialist students doing a Masters or MBA, it looks at the changing world of the line manager and HR professional with regard to key topics such as HRM and strategy, employee resourcing, human resource development, employee relations and performance management. Annotated further reading for each chapter and questions for each case study help cement knowledge and understanding.

the

Subject:

Introduction to HRM Table of Contents 1 Studying HRM [Stephen Taylor and Carol Woodhams] 2 Managing and Co-Ordinating the HR Function [Krystal Wilkinson and Stephen Taylor] 3 Business Issues and the Contexts of Human Resources [Stephen Taylor and Krystal Wilkinson] 4 Developing Professional Practice [Ted Johns and Graham Perkins] 5 Using Information in Human Resources [Graham Perkins and Carol Woodhams] 6 Diversity and Inclusion (Stephen Taylor and Carol Woodhams] 7 Wellbeing at Work Stephen Taylor and Carol Woodhams] 8 Developing the Knowledge and Skill of the HR Professional [Carol Woodhams, Graham Perkins and Krystal Wilkinson] This book « Maps to the CIPD Level 5 Associate Diploma in People Management « Covers the study of HRM, how to manage and co-ordinate an HR function, organisational performance and culture in practice as well as professional behaviours and values of a people professional « Provides guidance on how to manage HR data and information and use it to make evidence-based decisions « New to this edition: Two new chapters covering diversity and inclusion (D&I) and wellbeing at work « Online resources: Powerpoint slides, Lecturer manual and annotated web links

Fully updated throughout, this book provides thorough coverage of the study of HRM, managing and co-ordinating the HR function, organisational performance and culture in practice as well as business issues in the context of HR. Written by experts in the field with both academic and practitioner experience, Studying Human Resource Management includes invaluable discussion on professional behaviours for people professionals and guidance on how to manage HR data and information and most importantly, how to use it to make evidence-based decisions. There are also now two brand new chapters on diversity and inclusion (D&I) and wellbeing at work.

Each chapter includes key learning outcomes to summarise the content that will be covered and to help students track their progress, reflective activities to consolidate learning and further reading suggestions to support wider engagement with areas of particular interest. This book also includes case studies to help students understand how the theory applies in practice. Online resources include Powerpoint slides, a lecturer guide and annotated web links

StudyingDescriptionHuman Resource Management is an ideal textbook for anyone studying the CIPD Level 5 Associate Diploma in People Management.

ISBN Paperback:

141

Author Information Stephen Taylor, Chartered CCIPD, is a Senior Lecturer in Human Resource Management at the University of Exeter Business School, UK and also a Chief Examiner for the CIPD. Based in Devon, UK, he previously taught at Manchester Business School and Manchester Metropolitan University Business School and has worked in a variety of management roles in the hotel industry and in the NHS. Professor Carol Woodhams is Professor of Human Resource Management and Head of Department of People and Organisations at the University of Surrey, UK. She has held various positions within the CIPD including National Examiner for Designing and Delivering Training and Editor of the flexible learning materials at Intermediate and Advanced levels and is based in Surrey, UK. Guide to Study, Context and Practice of HR Edition: 3 Date: 03/09/2022 Price: £39.99 9781398606890 ISBN Ebook: 9781398606906 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 246x189 Category: Textbook Introduction to HRM Human Resources, Organizational Development Coaching

Product

and

Studying Human ManagementResource A

This book Provides coverage of all the latest developments impacting work and employment including flexibility, sustainability, agility and ethics Includes reflective practice activities to encourage students to think critically about the content and explore further boxes to help students read more widely and explore the content more deeply Covers both the theory and practice of the topic so that students can hit the ground running in their future careers in the HR industry Online resources: Lecturer slides, multiple choice questions and activity feedback

in a Changing Business Environment is the definitive textbook for the new CIPD Advanced Level 7 module. It provides students with an understanding of the major contemporary trends in the HR business environment and discussion of significant areas of HR and Learning and Development (L&D) activity that derive from or are given additional prominence as a result of environmental developments. It provides students with an understanding of ways in which major, long-term environmental developments affect employment, work and people management in organizations as well as a thorough grounding in current and short-term developments in the people management environment. These areas include globalisation, technology, the economy, labour markets, society, politics, public policy and employment regulation. This book also includes expert coverage of how change, innovation and creativity can promote improvements in organisational productivity. Most importantly, this brand new textbook covers the key elements that students on HR masters courses will need in their future careers including flexibility, agility and resilience. productivity, ethics and values, sustainability, equality, diversity and inclusion, wellbeing and working internationally. Case studies and examples demonstrate how the theory applies in practice and pause and review boxes will help students think critically about the content. Work and Employment in a Changing Business Environment is ideal reading for all postgraduate students on both CIPD and non-CIPD accredited courses. Online supporting resources include powerpoint slides for every chapter.

Author Information Stephen Taylor, Chartered CCIPD, is a Senior Lecturer in Human Resource Management at the University of Exeter Business School and a Chief Examiner for the CIPD. Before his academic career he worked in a variety of management roles in the hotel industry and in the NHS. Graham Perkins is Senior Lecturer in Human Resource Management at University of Exeter Business School. Prior to a career in academia, he held a number of HR and Learning and Development roles in both public and private sector firms. 1 Date: 03/06/2021 Price: £44.99 ISBN 9781398600201 ISBN Ebook: 9781398600218 Pages: 416 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Introduction to HRM Human Resources, Organizational Coaching

142 Introduction to HRM Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Globalisation 3 Technology – past 4 Technology – present 5 Economy 6 Labour markets 7 Population 8 Society 9 Public policy 10 Regulation 11 Change 12 Agility & resilience 13 Flexibility 14 Innovation and creativity 15 Productivity and competition 16 Ethics and values 17 Sustainability 18 Equality, diversity and inclusion 19 Wellbeing 20 Working internationally

Work Employmentand in a Changing EnvironmentBusiness Edition:

Development and

Paperback:

WorkDescriptionandEmployment

Price: £47.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398602427 ISBN Ebook: 9781398602434 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 247x190 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Introduction to HRM Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

People Practice A Complete Guide Edition: 1 Date: 03/09/2021

This book « Written to support the new CIPD Level 3 Foundation qualification by the team who developed the syllabus Provides guidance on workforce analytics to enable students to use data and evidence to make informed business decisions and add organizational value Outlines the core behaviours and skills for people professionals including, developing professional courage, working ethically and managing change Online resources: Lecturer manual, Powerpoint slides and student multiple choice questions Includes key definition boxes, exercises, case studies and further reading to ensure a clear understanding of both the theory and practice, broad engagement with the subject and critical thinking skills textbook written to support the Level 3 CIPD Certificate in People Practice to succeed in your studies and launch your career as a people professional.

143 Introduction to HRM Table of Contents Introduction 1 Business, culture and change 2 Evidence-based practice and analytics 3 Core behaviours for people professionals 4 The employee lifecycle and recruitment process 5 Selection and appointment 6 The employment relationship 7 Performance management 8 Reward and reward systems 9 Supporting others to develop skills and knowledge

UseDescriptionthisbrand-new

Structured around the core knowledge and behaviours needed for the Level 3 CIPD qualification, People Practice provides a thorough understanding of the theory and practice of the key areas of the people profession. This includes business, culture and change in context, workforce analytics and the necessary skills and knowledge for people professionals. This book covers everything from understanding how external factors impact organizational goals, how to develop professional courage and build ethical and inclusive practices through to recruitment, performance, reward and supporting Writtenothers. by the team who developed the new CIPD Level 3 qualification, this book will ensure that students learn both the theory and practice necessary for their academic studies and their future careers. Full of case studies, exercises, key definition boxes and reflective questions, this book will allow students to test their understanding, see how the theory applies in the workplace and develop their critical thinking skills. Further reading suggestions in each chapter encourage a wide and broad engagement with the subject. Online resources include PowerPoint slides, a lecturer’s manual and multiple choice questions for students.

Author Information Karen Waite is Lead External Quality Advisor for the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and Founder and Director of Leap Like a Salmon Ltd. She is based in Leeds, UK. Kathy Beevers, Chartered FCIPD, is a qualified trainer, coach and author. She runs a learning and qualifications consultancy, Lightbulb Learning Ltd, and is also the Chief External Quality Advisor (CEQA) for CIPD. She is based in Halifax, UK. Nicky Small is an HR Lecturer at Solihull College and University Centre, UK, with over 30 years’ experience of working in and teaching HR. She is based in Birmingham, UK. Dr Keith Tomlinson is an HRM and Management Consultant, based in Lancashire, UK, with over 20 years of experience in designing and delivering HRM and management programmes within the HE and FE sector. Shazad Hussain is the Human Resources Director for Justice and Immigration at Serco, Ltd. He is based in Bradford, UK.

144 Introduction to HRM Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching Table of Contents 1 Human Resource Management in Context 2 The Managerial Context of Human Resources 3 The Competitive Environment 4 Government Policy 5 Regulation 6 The World Economy 7 Demographic and Social Trends 8 Technology 9 Ethics, Social Responsibility and Sustainability 10 Strategic Management 11 HR Delivery, Strategy and Performance

This book « Is the essential text for all postgraduate and undergraduate students studying the broader business context within which HR operates New to this edition: updated to include an even broader range of global case studies with extended coverage from China and India and updates to policies and legislation Online resources: additional case studies and activities, lecturer’s guides, PowerPoint slides and annotated web links Highly accessible and student-friendly, Human Resource Management in a Business Context is the core text for the CIPD Level 7 Advanced module, Human Resource Management in Context, and is also essential reading for other undergraduate and postgraduate HR and business degrees. In clear and easy to navigate chapters, which consider government policy, regulation, the world economy and demographic and social trends, this book provides the firm theoretical background that you can apply in practice.

Description

Human BusinessManagementResourceinaContext Edition: 3 Date: 03/06/2016 Price: £47.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781843984047 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984511 Pages: 608 Format (mm): 245x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Introduction to HRM

Human Resource Management in a Business Context is packed with international case studies, examples and activities that will actively engage you with the different areas of knowledge and allow you to work through the material step-by-step. This edition is fully updated to include an even broader range of global case studies with extended coverage from China and India and updates to policies and legislation. The online resources available have also been expanded on, and now provide additional case studies and activities, alongside lecturer’s guides, PowerPoint slides and annotated web links.

Author Information John Kew is an educational consultant and has written flexible learning material for the CIPD’s Development Scheme. John Stredwick is Senior Lecturer at University of Bedfordshire and a well renowned author. He is Visiting Professor at Webster University (US) based in Regents Park.

Professional

Fully supported by a range of pedagogical features including learning outcomes to summarise the content that will be covered in each chapter and track progress, reflective activities to consolidate learning and further reading suggestions to support wider engagement with areas of particular interest, this book is ideal reading for anyone studying the CIPD Level 5 Associate Diploma in People Management. Case studies throughout also help students understand how the theory applies in practice. Online resources include Powerpoint slides, a lecturer guide and annotated web links.

HumanDescriptionResource

Introduction to HRM Table of Contents Human Resource Service Delivery (Gail Swift) Employment Law (Stephen Taylor and Krystal Wilkinson) Resourcing and Talent Planning (Krystal Wilkinson and Stephen Taylor) Engagement (Ted Johns and Cecilia Ellis) Contemporary Developments in Employee Relations (Cecilia Ellis) Reward Management (Graham Perkins and Carol Woodhams) Human Perkins)DevelopmentResource(Graham 8 People Management in an International Context (Stephen Taylor and Carol Woodhams) Organisational Design and Organisational Development (Claire Roberts) Improving PerformanceOrganisational(StephenTaylor)

4 Employee

145

Professor Carol Woodhams is Professor of Human Resource Management and Head of Department of People and Organisations at the University of Surrey, UK. She has held various positions within the CIPD including National Examiner for Designing and Delivering Training and Editor of the flexible learning materials at Intermediate and Advanced levels and is based in Surrey, UK. People and Organisations Edition: 3 Date: 03/09/2022 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398606937 ISBN Ebook: 9781398606944 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Introduction to HRM Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Human ManagementResource

This book « Maps to the CIPD Level 5 Associate Diploma in People Management « Covers HR service delivery, resourcing and talent planning, employee engagement and reward and discusses organisational design and development and how to improve organisational performance « Includes pedagogical features such as learning outcomes, reflective activities, case studies and further reading to help students track their progress, reinforce their learning and see how the theory applies in practice « New to this edition: A brand new chapter on people management in an international context « Online resources: Powerpoint slides, a lecturer guide and annotated web links

Now fully updated for a third edition, Human Resource Management: People and Organisations covers everything from HR service and delivery and essential UK employment law through to resourcing and talent planning, employee engagement and reward management. There is also expert discussion or organisation design and development as well as advice on how to improve organisational performance. This edition also includes a brand new chapter on people management in an international context.

Management: People and Organisations provides thorough coverage of key HR topics and their context to enable students to excel in their academic studies and begin a successful career as a people professional.

Human ContextManagementResourcein Insights,

Author Information David Farnham, Chartered Fellow of the CIPD, is an emeritus professor at the University of Portsmouth and visiting professor at the University of Greenwich, UK. He has been a visiting professor at the University of East London, a visiting senior research fellow at the University of South Wales and a visiting senior research fellow at the Catholic University Leuven. He is Chief Examiner for the CIPD and a member of the advisory board of the Personnel Policies Study Group of the European Group of Public Administration, Brussels. Strategy

This book « Helps students understand, analyse and critically evaluate key issues including the managerial and business environment, how HR strategies are shaped, globalization and demographic, social and technological trends « New to this edition: enhanced emphasis on the impact of the external environment on the HR profession, a discussion of the impact of technology and social media, increased coverage of ethics and CSR and links to the HR Profession Map « Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides, annotated web links and answers to/guidance for the chapter activities for lecturers Description HR functions within both internal and external contexts. The understanding of both contexts is crucial for comprehending how and why they drive HR strategies and practices in organizations, as well as the rules and structures within which they work. Built around five major themes which impact upon the HR function, and mapping to the CIPD Level 7 Advanced module of the same name, Human Resource Management in Context enables students to understand the complex and changing organizational context in which HR operates today by providing a comprehensive breakdown of the concepts, theories and issues from globalization and government policy to demographic, social and technological Thistrends.fully updated 4th edition of Human Resource Management in Context includes a range of pedagogical features, balancing theory with practical analysis to form an engaging insight into the strategic side of HR. It includes enhanced emphasis on the impact of the external environment on the HR profession, a discussion of the impact of technology and social media, increased coverage of ethics and CSR and links to the HR Profession Map. Online supporting resources for lecturers include an instructor’s manual, lecture slides, annotated web links and guidance for the chapter activities.

and Solutions

146 Introduction to HRM Table of Contents 1 Introducing Human Resource ManagementOrganisationManagement,and 1 Human Resource Management and its External Contexts 2 Contemporary Organisations and their Internal Contexts 3 The Managerial and Business Contexts of Organisations 2 Strategy Formulation and Implementation 4 Developing Corporate Strategies 5 Developing Human Resource Strategies 3 The External Contexts of Human ManagementResource 6 Markets and the Competitive Context 7 Globalisation and International Factors 8 Demographic and Social Trends 9 The Technological Context 10 Government Policy and Legal Regulation

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Introduction to

ISBN

ISBN Paperback:

Organizational Development and Coaching

Edition: 4 Date: 03/02/2015 Price: £47.99 9781843983583 Ebook: 9781843984023 Pages: 488 Format (mm): 245x190 HRM Human Resources,

ISBN Ebook:

147 HR 1TableLeadershipofContentsLeading,managinganddevelopingpeoplefundamentals 1 Leadership 2 Management 3 Developing people 2 Human managementresourceand learning and development 4 The essence of human resource management 5 The practice of HRM 6 The practice of learning and development 7 The contribution of HRM and L&D in different types of organizations 8 The professional and ethical approach to HRM and L&D 3 People processesmanagement 4 Motivation 9 Commitment 10 Employee engagement 11 Change management 12 Flexible working 13 Managing diversity and inclusion 5 Leadership, management and learning developmentandskills 14 Leadership skills 15 Management skills 16 People management skills 17 Learning and development skills 18 Managing relationshipsinterpersonalatwork 19 Managing oneself 20 Problem solving and decision making 21 Analytical, critical and consultancy skills 22 Information handling skills 23 Business and financial skills 24 Postgraduate study skills

Pages: 472 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Textbook Subject: HR Leadership Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

ManagementHandbookArmstrong’sof and Leadership for HR Developing Effective People Skills for Better Leadership and Management Edition: 4 Date: 03/11/2016 Price: £36.99 ISBN Paperback:

Written by renowned human resources expert and bestselling author Michael Armstrong, Armstrong’s Handbook of Management and Leadership for HR covers in one volume the ‘Leading, Managing and Developing People’ and ‘Developing Skills for Business Leadership’ Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) modules. It includes numerous practical features such as case studies, practitioner interviews, exercises and clear learning objectives to aid learning. This is the essential book for HR students and professionals looking to broaden their skills and understanding relating to management and leadership. Online supporting resources include lecture slides, an instructor’s manual, a student’s manual and a literature review.

This book « Fully aligns with the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) ‘Leading, Managing and Developing People’ and ‘Developing Skills for Business Leadership’ modules « Written by the UK’s bestselling HRM author, whose books have sold over a million copies and been translated into twenty-one languages « Online resources: lecture slides, an instructor’s manual, a student’s manual and a literature review « Explores the key concepts of leadership, management and people development as it relates to the HR function Description To make an effective contribution, HR specialists have to be good at management, leadership and developing both themselves and others. They also need to be aware of the management and business considerations that affect their work. Armstrong’s Handbook of Management and Leadership for HR provides guidance on the processes of management and leadership with particular reference to what HR managers and aspiring managers need to know and do to make a difference.

Author Information Michael Armstrong is the UK’s bestselling author of Human Resource Management books including Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice and several other titles published by Kogan Page. With over a million copies sold, his books have been translated into twentyone languages. He is managing partner of E-Reward as well as an independent management consultant. Prior to this he was a chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and an HR director of a publishing company. 9780749478155 9780749478162

3 HRM

This book « Provides comprehensive coverage of key issues including leadership development, professionalism, motivation at work, employee engagement and retention « New to this edition: insights on cutting-edge issues and debates in the field including lean management as well as additional international case studies and increased theoretical links between topics « Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides, example essay questions as well as annotated web links, a glossary and additional case studies for students

9 Recruitment

2 The

1 Introduction

With rigorous academic underpinning and clear theoretical exploration, Leading, Managing and Developing People also includes practical advice on key activities including recruitment, job design, performance management, motivation and reward. Supported by online resources including an instructor’s manual, lecture slides, international case studies, example essay questions and annotated web links, this is an indispensable guide for both students and practitioners.

Author Information Gary Rees is Head of the Organization Studies and Human Resource Management at Portsmouth Business School, UK Ray French was previously Principal Lecturer in Organizational Behaviour at Portsmouth Business School, UK

TableLeadershipofContents [Gary Rees and Ray French] Scope and Nature of Human Resource Management and Human DevelopmentResource[GaryRees] Contributions in Different Settings [Charlotte Rayner and Liza Howe-Walsh] and Ethics in Managing People [Matthew Anderson and Charlotte Rayner] and Leader Development [Wenjin Dai & Alex Tymon] Managing Change [Gary Rees and David Hall] and the Psychological Contract [Ray French] and Job Design [Ray French] and Selection [Sally Rumbles and Ray French] Developing Employees [Alex Tymon and Margaret Mackay] Managing the Employment Relationship [Sally Rumbles and Peter Scott]

Leading, Managing and PeopleDeveloping Edition: 5 Date: 03/04/2016 Price: £47.99 ISBN 9781843984122 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984375 Pages: 376 Format (mm): 245x190 Product Category: Textbook Subject: HR Leadership Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Leading, Managing and Developing People is critical reading for all those studying the CIPD Level 7 Advanced module in Leading, Managing and Developing People as well as all HR and L&D practitioners. It provides extensive coverage of the aims, objectives and contribution of HRM such as the scope and nature of human resources, HR’s role when organisations grow and how to ensure professionalism and ethical behaviour when managing people. This book also includes discussion of major contemporary themes in leading, managing and developing people including leadership development, flexibility, agile working and the psychological contract. This ensures that readers are fully prepared to lead, manage and develop staff in the new world of work.

Paperback:

Description

7 Flexibility

5 Leadership

8 Organisational

Performance Management, Motivation and Reward [Gary Rees and Alex Tymon] Summary Themes and Future Trends [Ray French and Gary Rees]

148 HR

4 Professionalism

Author Information Kevin Green, Chartered CCIPD, is based in Surrey, UK and is a non-executive director and strategic advisor to six fast growth human capital businesses. Prior to this, he was the Chief Executive of the Recruitment and Employment Confederation (REC), the HR Director at Royal Mail and founder and Managing Director of Qtab, a leading HR consultancy who advised organizations including First Choice, Unilever, BAE Systems and the UK Cabinet Office. 9781398601260 9781398601277

149 Human Resource Management Table of Contents 1 People strategy and Business Success 2 Moving beyond Policies, Processes and Procedures 3 Developing the HR Capability 4 Performance 5 Reward 6 Employee Experience 7 Learning and Development 8 Organization Development 9 Diversity and Inclusion 10 Innovation 11 Technology 12 Engaging Stakeholders 13 Working with the Business 14 Adding value 15 People Leader;s 16 The HR Development Toolkit

This book Explains how to develop an HR department which goes beyond policies, processes and procedures to add real business value Includes guidance on how HR professionals can work with other senior stakeholders to deliver organizational success Shows how to use employee experience, technology and a data-driven approach to HR to improve employee motivation, engagement and performance Includes an HR development toolkit which enables practitioners to assess where their skills and capabilities are against those required to succeed both now and in the future

HowDescriptioncanyoudrive

individual employee and overall business performance? By aligning people strategy with business strategy through an exceptional HR team.

Designed for senior HR professionals and people managers, this book explains the importance of a people strategy for business success. It covers how to move from simply developing policies, procedures and processes to crafting and utilizing employee experience, technology, organization development and data-driven approaches. There is also expert guidance on how HR managers can work with other leaders in the business to add value to the overall company strategy. Including an HR development toolkit section, Competitive HR enables practitioners to assess their function against the skills and capabilities required for success both now and in the future. Written by an author with extensive experience in both senior HR roles and senior business roles, this book provides the insight and practical advice needed to show how HR can add tangible value to the business.

ISBN Ebook:

Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Human ManagementResource Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Competitive HR Building an Exceptional People Edition:Function 1 Date: /3/4477 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback:

Supported by case studies from companies including Microsoft, Marks and Spencer, GlaxoSmithKline, Rolls-Royce and Twitter, this book equips readers to deal with a crisis as it is happening and implement longer term post-crisis strategies.

Written by an expert author team including Professor Sir Cary Cooper, Chair of the National Board of Health and Wellbeing at Work, this is necessary reading for all professionals needing to deal with the health and wellbeing of their workforce in any crisis that may arise.

This book « Provides guidance that can be used for any kind of crisis whether it is a health, economic or social event « Shows how to get communication right in a crisis and manage employee stress, anxiety, burnout and fear « Explores practical steps to improve motivation, productivity and engagement in the workforce during times of uncertainty « Contains case studies from over 40 organizations including Microsoft, Shell, Marks and Spencer, Serco and Twitter « Includes advice for short term interventions during a crisis as well as middle and longer term strategies for workplace health and wellbeing post-crisis DuringDescriptiontheCovid-19 pandemic, almost half of Americans reported that the crisis had a negative effect on their mental health. In the UK, the financial crisis of 2008 resulted in a rise in stress and anxiety and a decline in physical health. When dealing with a crisis, a business will consider the resilience of its structures and processes or the impact on forecasts and budgets but what about their people?

Without a supported, engaged and motivated workforce, the business won’t be able to achieve its crisis recovery plans. Managing Workplace Health and Wellbeing During a Crisis is a practical guide for all HR professionals and those responsible for talent management. It covers how to deal with employee stress and burnout as well as how to drive engagement, motivation and morale during unsettled times. There is expert guidance on how to deal with role and responsibility changes and explains how to improve productivity through effective employee communication.

Organizational Development and

Paperback:

ManagementResource

Professional

Product

150 Human Resource Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Before the outbreak 3 Lockdown hits the UK 4 Policing the Covid-19 pandemic 5 FujitsupandemictechnologyInformationandtheCovid-19 6 Consultancy - The elusive origin of strength in a crisis 7 Universities - Blurring edges –leading teams and institutions in Covid-19 8 NHS Employers - The National Health Service and the Covid-19 pandemic 9 Microsoft - Managing wellbeing in a crisis – a Microsoft view 10 Construction - Maintaining the health and wellbeing of Mace colleagues throughout Covid-19 11 The CIPD’S pandemic response – supporting our organization and the people practitioners and communities we serve 12 Reflections on the coronavirus pandemic at Rolls-Royce – one year in 13 John Lewis PartnershipManaging wellbeing in a crisis 14 Real estate and the Covid-19 pandemic 15 Legal sector and the Covid-19 pandemic 16 Professional services: Mind the manager wellbeing gap 17 Health - Impact of Covid on the older worker – an early view 18 Concluding remarks

Managing Workplace Health Wellbeingandduring a Crisis How to Support your Staff in Difficult Edition:Times 1 Date:

Price:

Author Information Professor Sir Cary Cooper is the President of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and 50th Anniversary Professor of Organizational Psychology and Health at the ALLIANCE Manchester Business School, University of Manchester, UK. Based in Macclesfield, UK, he is also the Chair of the National Forum for Health and Wellbeing at Work. Ian Hesketh is the Health and Wellbeing Lead for the UK College of Policing and Support for the National Forum for Health and Wellbeing at Work, University of Manchester. Based in Blackpool, UK he is an Honorary Researcher at Lancaster University Management School and a Visiting Fellow at the Open University 03/01/2022 £29.99 ISBN 9781398601222 ISBN Ebook: 9781398601239 Pages: 200 Format (mm): 233x155 Category: Subject: Human Human Resources, Coaching

Alongside coverage of employee engagement and recruitment, this second edition features new material on applications of AI for virtual work, reskilling and data integrity. Packed with practical advice, research and new and updated case studies from global organizations including Uber, IBM and Unilever, the second edition of Artificial Intelligence for HR will equip HR professionals with the knowledge they need to improve people operational efficiencies, and allow AI solutions to become enhancements for driving business success.

ArtificialDescriptionintelligence is changing the world of work. How can HR professionals understand the variety of opportunities AI has created for the HR function and how best to implement these in their organization? This book provides the answers.

Author Information Ben Eubanks is an HR industry analyst and influencer. He is the Principal Analyst at Lighthouse Research & Advisory where he oversees the development of research, assets and insights to support HR, learning and talent executives. Based in Huntsville, Alabama, he is also the founder of HR community upstartHR, the co-founder of the HRevolution movement and host of the We’re Human podcast.

151 Human Resource Management HR, DevelopmentOrganizationalandCoaching Table of Contents 1 A snapshot of HR today 2 The basics of artificial intelligence 3 General AI Applications with HCM 4 Core HR and managementworkforce 5 Talent acquisition 6 Learning and development 7 Talent management 8 Challenges of adopting AI technology 9 HR skills of the future

This book « Defines artificial intelligence (AI) for the non-expert and explains its impact on the HR function Shows how applications of AI, such as natural language processing and chatbots, can enhance the key HR functions of recruiting, developing and retaining staff Includes case studies from global companies, including IBM and Unilever, which use AI in their HR teams to add business value New to this edition: Material on applications for AI in virtual work, reskilling and data integrity; discussion of latest research including perceptions of AI in hiring and developing human skills at work; new and updated case studies

Artificial Intelligence for HR Use AI to Support and Develop a Successful Workforce Edition: 2 Date: 03/01/2022 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398604001 ISBN Ebook: 9781398604018 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 233x155 Product Category: Professional Subject: Human ManagementResource

From using natural language processing to ensure job adverts are free from bias and gendered language to implementing chatbots to enhance the employee experience, artificial intelligence can add value throughout the work of HR professionals. Artificial Intelligence for HR demonstrates how to leverage this potential and use AI to improve efficiency and develop a talented and productive workforce. Outlining the current technology landscape as well as the latest AI developments, this book ensures that HR professionals fully understand what AI is and what it means for HR in practice.

Author Information Dr Rafal Sitko is the Programme Director for the MSc in Sustainable HRM at HeriotWatt University at Dubai campus. He is also the Programme Director for the MA in International Business Administration and is an Assistant Professor in Business Management. Based in Dubai, he has more than 10 years’ teaching and research experience in different areas of human resource management.

There is also coverage of how sustainable HRM can be introduced and measured as well as specific guidance on sustainable HRM in different parts of the world, green HRM, responsible business, ethics and sustainable HRM as a business strategy. Sustainable Human Resource Management is written specifically for third year undergraduate and postgraduate students with pedagogical features in each chapter including learning objectives, key concept definitions, skill check boxes, workshop discussion articles, chapter summaries, study questions and key readings. Online resources include a sample course outline, PowerPoint slides and student engagement questions.

SustainableDescriptionhuman resource management (HRM) processes and practices are not a niceto-have, they’re a need-to-have to benefit employees, organizations, societies and the environment.

152 Human Resource Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction to Sustainable HRM 2 Sustainable HRM: key concepts, theories and approaches 3 Harm caused by unsustainable HRM 4 Regenerating the human resource base 5 Green HRM 6 Sustainable HRM as a business strategy 7 Enacting sustainable HRM and introducing organizational change 8 Measuring and reporting sustainable HRM 9 Sustainable HRM in different areas of the world

This book « Explains what sustainable Human Resource Management is, what the benefits are and what the risks are of unsustainable HRM « Shows how to implement and measure the effectiveness of sustainable HRM practices as well as specific guidance on sustainable HRM in different parts of the world, green HRM, responsible business, ethics and sustainable HRM as a business strategy « Includes international case studies and examples throughout to show how sustainable HRM can improve candidate attraction and retention, employee engagement and reward as well as how improving productivity, employer branding and company culture to drive both efficiency and business performance « Pedagogical features in each chapter include learning objectives, key concept definitions, skill check boxes, workshop discussion articles, chapter summaries, study questions and key readings

« Online resources: Sample course outline, PowerPoint slides and student engagement questions

Sustainability has been highlighted by the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) as one of the key trends influencing the HR profession so Sustainable Human Resource Management is crucial reading for undergraduate and postgraduate HR students. It explains what sustainable HRM is, what the benefits of sustainable HRM are as well as the dangers of unsustainable HRM. It is full of examples throughout to show how sustainable HRM works in practice including how it can be used to improve candidate attraction, retention and employee engagement as well as how it can improve productivity, employer branding, company culture and drive both efficiency and business performance.

ManagementHumanSustainableResource Using HRM to achieve long-term social, environmental and business Edition:goals 1 Date: 03/11/2022 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398606494 ISBN Ebook: 9781398606708 Pages: 312 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Human ManagementResource Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

The New World of Work Edition: 1 Date: 03/06/2021 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398602090 ISBN Ebook: 9781398602106 Pages: 400 Format (mm): 233x157 Product Category: Professional Subject: Human ManagementResource Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

« Written by the Chief Executive of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and includes case studies from global public and private sector organisations WorkDescriptionhaschanged forever. How can HR and leaders adapt? How can they deal with the wellbeing and productivity crisis, address the skills gap and build better organizations? This book has the answer.

Author Information Peter Cheese is Chief Executive of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD), the professional body for HR and people development. He is also Chair of the What Works Centre for Wellbeing. Based in London, UK, he writes and speaks widely on the themes of the future of work, and engages with politicians, policy makers, academics, business leaders and leaders in the people profession. Prior to the CIPD, he was Chair of the Institute of Leadership and Management after a long career at Accenture where he led the global consulting practice in people and organisation.

Written by a leading voice in the people profession, The New World of Work takes an evidence-based approach to provide practical advice on how the business and employees can succeed. It covers how to combat stalling productivity, poor wellbeing and the increase in mental health issues in the workplace as well as the need for agile learning, ways to close the skills gap and a refreshingly realistic look at the impact of technology. There is also essential discussion of job design, flexible working, diversity and inclusion (D&I) and how to engage both an ageing workforce and new Gen Z recruits. This book also includes guidance on how to build a business which is responsible, trustworthy and transparent, is based on the principles of ‘good work’ and is one that employees are proud to work for.

153 Human Resource Management Table of Contents 1 A new era of work 2 Economics and the economy 3 Globalization and geopolitics 4 Social and demographic change 5 Technology: Automation, AI and beyond 6 Education and learning 7 Focusing on the right things 8 Building responsible business 9 Leadership for the future 10 People strategy at the heart of business strategy 11 Good work as a goal 12 The agile learning organization 13 Wellbeing as an outcome 14 #WTF - What’s the future?

With global examples and case studies from private and public sector organizations, The New World of Work is the book that HR and business professionals need to seize the opportunity and allow both the business and its people to succeed.

This book « Explores how to close the skills gap, boost productivity, improve employee wellbeing and both build and engage a diverse workforce « Includes advice on how to design organizations, work and job roles for individual and business success « Explains how to adopt an evidence-based approach to work instead of following intangible, unproven ideas about best practice « Provides guidance on how organizations can become responsible businesses with a focus on trust, transparency and ‘good work’

Business Book Awards 2021 - HR & Management Category DISTINGUISHED FAVOURITE: Independent Press Awards 2021 - Business General Category Flexible working is now a key concern for many employees. It spans genders, ages and family circumstances, with 37% of millennials declining a job offer if working flexibly isn’t an option and 78% of employees over 50 wanting more flexible hours.

Flexible Working is a practical guide for HR practitioners showing how to develop an effective flexible working strategy to meet the needs of employees and the needs of the business. This book explains how to develop effective flexibility policies and processes as well as how to communicate and train line managers on these practices. It also includes advice on how to overcome barriers to flexible working, dispels common myths and offers guidance on the different forms of flexible working available to organizations.

Price:

Flexible Working shows that working practices outside the standard 9-5, five-days-a-week in the office can benefit a company. It drives employee engagement and performance, reduces costs and workplace stress and improves talent acquisition from a more diverse talent pool. It also explains how a proactive flexible working strategy can have sustainability benefits and reduce a company’s carbon footprint. Including case studies from organizations such as Zurich Insurance, and supported by rigorous analysis of flexible working data, this is essential reading for all HR professionals.

Author Information Gemma Dale is a Senior HR professional, conference speaker, writer and coach with over 20 years’ experience. She is a lecturer at Liverpool John Moores University Business School, UK, and co-founder of The Work Consultancy where she helps business develop their people policies. She is a Chartered Fellow of the CIPD (Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development) and author of the award-winning HR blog, People Stuff. In 2021 she was named as one of the Most Influential HR Thinkers by HR Magazine 03/12/2020 £29.99 9781789665895 9781789665901 235x157

Product Category: Professional Subject: Human ManagementResource Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Pages: 248 Format (mm):

154 Human Resource Management Table of Contents Introduction: Why flexible working and why now 1 The case for flexibility 1 Flexible working 2 The benefits and challenges of flexible working 3 Flexible working and the future of work 4 Flexible working and inclusion 5 Flexible working and wellbeing 6 Exploring flexible working myths 7 The barriers to flexible working, and how to overcome them 2 Introducing flexible working: The practical guide 8 From compliance to culture: Six elements of a truly flexible workplace 9 Developing a strategy for flexible working 10 Effective policy and process 11 Supporting implementation 12 Conclusions 13 Flexible working toolkit 14 Epilogue: Flexible working post Covid-19 15 Appendix 1: Sample tools for managers 16 Appendix 2: Sample tools for employees This book « Provides guidance on how to design and implement an effective flexible working policy « Covers different forms of flexible working including job sharing, compressed or altered hours and remote working « Shows how a proactive flexible working strategy creates more inclusive organizations and allows businesses to become more environmentally responsible « Explains how flexible working practices improve talent acquisition, development and retention, reduce workplace stress and increase employee engagement « Includes case studies from organizations including Zurich Insurance SHORTLISTED:Description

Flexible Working How to Implement Flexibility in the Workplace to Improve Employee and Business Performance Edition: 1 Date:

ISBN Paperback:

ISBN Ebook:

This book also includes essential coverage of the standards assessment process and tips and advice on how to achieve successful accreditation. With case studies from organizations that have made HR interventions based on these standards and a glossary to explain the language of standards, this is an indispensable guide for HR professionals, managers and standards specialists in all organizations.

155 Human Resource Management

Human Capital Management Standards will allow people professionals and managers in organizations of all sizes and types to develop and implement effective people policies and processes based on robust research to create a supportive organizational environment for a more productive workforce.

Author Information Dr Wilson Wong is Head of Insight and Futures at the Chartered Institute for Personnel and Development (CIPD) and Chair of the Human Capital Standards Committee at the British Standards Institution (BSI). Prior to this, he worked in technology policy and financial/investment research.

Dr Valerie Anderson is Reader in Human Resource Development at the University of Portsmouth. She has gained extensive HRM and HRD management experience in a range of different public and private sector organizations. Heather Bond is Standards Adviser at CIPD. Her professional expertise in people management and standards have been integral to the development of many standards in this book. Prior to this, she was responsible for CIPD qualifications development and regulatory compliance. 1 03/09/2019 £42.99 9780749484347 9780749484354 344 234x158

Format (mm):

Product Category: Professional Subject: Human ManagementResource Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book « Provides practical guidance directly from those who created the Human Capital Management Standards « Shows how the Human Capital Management standards can be applied to organizations of any size « Guides organizations through the full standards accreditation process which is essential for winning government contracts « Includes a foreword written by Dr Scott Steedman, VP (Policy) ISO and Director of Standards, BSI Description Human Capital Management Standards is a comprehensive guide to the BSI and ISO frameworks for people management. Providing internationally agreed definitions and best practice guidance, it offers a foundation for sustainable people management and development practices in organizations. Covering everything from organizational governance, workforce planning, diversity and inclusion to learning and development, this book explores the key areas of people management throughout the employment life cycle, from initial hire to the time people move on from the organization. There is also coverage of additional business standards such as those related to occupational health and safety as well as the implications of implementing standards in a globalized and interconnected organizational context.

Date:

Price:

Pages:

Table of Contents Governance, human capital and culture - the role of standards and standardization [Edward Houghton] It’s all a matter of standards [Heather Bond] Workforce planning [Julie Sloan] Recruitment [Sandy J Miles] Learning and development [Valerie Anderson and Alaa Garad] Diversity and inclusion [Anne McBride and Helge Hoel] Occupational health and safety management [Martin Cottam] Moving on from the organization [Valerie Anderson] 9 Cross-national, cross-sectoral and cross-functional issues [Alaa Garad] Assessment and accreditation [Angela Mulvie] The future of standards affecting human capital management and development [Wilson Wong]

ISBN Ebook:

Human StandardsManagementCapital A Complete Guide Edition:

ISBN Paperback:

Level 7 module of the same name, International Human Resource Management is a critical textbook for all HR students. Structured around the three core areas of cross-cultural HRM, comparative HRM and international HRM itself, this book provides students with a thorough grounding in the key approaches to international human resource management.

Packed with global examples and case studies to support learning., this book explores all aspects of international human resource management from global talent strategy, recruitment and knowledge management to the difference in reward systems across cultures and managing expatriate assignments making it essential reading for students on both CIPD and non-CIPD accredited courses.

Author Information Chris Brewster is a professor of International HRM at Henley Business School. He is based in Kent, UK. Elizabeth Houldsworth is an associate professor of HRM at Henley Business School. She is based in Oxfordshire, UK. Paul Sparrow is the director of the Centre for Performance-Led HR and professor of International HRM at Lancaster University Management School. He is based in Manchester, UK. Guy Vernon is an associate professor of Human Resource Management at Southampton University. He is based in Southampton, UK.

ManagementHumanInternationalResource A Case Study Approach A CrossCultural and Comparative Approach

Paperback:

Product Category: Textbook Subject: International

Edition: 5 Date: 03/01/2023 Price: £47.99 ISBN 9781398603530 ISBN Ebook: 9781398603547 Pages: 488 Format (mm): 246x189 HRM

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Supported by ‘theory and practice’ boxes in every chapter and with reflective activities and learning questions throughout, International Human Resource Management ensures that students without real-world business experience fully understand the main concepts and how they apply in the world of work. This edition now includes new coverage of the impact of the gig economy on international HRM, how technology is impacting HRM across countries and new material on workforce diversity. Online resources include an instructor’s manual, lecture slides and additional case studies.

156 International HRM Table of Contents 1 International HRM - An introduction 1 Cross-cultural human resource management 2 Differing national contexts 3 The impact of national culture 4 Culture and organisation life 2 Comparative human resource management 5 Employee relations and collective communication 6 The organisation of work 7 Flexibility and work life balance 8 Recruitment and selection 9 Performance management 10 Rewards 11 Training and development 12 Global HRM departments 3 International human resource management 13 International HRM - Theory and practice 14 Managing assignmentsexpatriate 15 Managing diversity in international forms of working 16 Integrating global HRM practices 17 Globalising HRM This book « Explores international HRM from cross-cultural, comparative and international approaches « Includes ‘theory and practice’ boxes, global case studies and examples in every chapter to help students see how the content applies in a business context « New to this edition: brand new coverage of the gig economy, workplace diversity and the impact of technology on international human resource management « Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides and additional case studies MappedDescriptiontotheCIPD

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

With numerous industry examples and global case studies from companies such as Telefonica, Unilever and Volkswagen, International Human Resource Management goes beyond the theory to fully explore how International HRM works in practice. It is an indispensable textbook to prepare students for successful careers in human resources. Online supporting resources include additional case studies, lecture slides for every chapter, self-test exercises for students, discussion questions and further reading.

ISBN Paperback:

Author Information Daniel Wintersberger is a teaching fellow at Birmingham Business School in the UK, specializing in International Human Resource Management. He currently teaches on the MBA (HRM), MSc in Human Resource Management and the BSc in Business Management. Previously, Daniel lectured at Cardiff University Business School and Swansea School of Management. He has conducted research for the International Transport Workers’ Federation (ITF) and worked with the British Airline Pilots’ Association (BALPA). His professional and research experience spans Central and Eastern Europe, China, India and Brazil. 03/11/2017 £39.99 9780749480981 9780749480998 304 (mm): 235x157 HRM

This book « Fully examines the functional elements of International HRM including recruitment and selection, rewards and benefits, performance management, training and development, employment relations and job design « Includes global case studies from a range of organizations such as Telefonica, McDonald’s, Toyota, Unilever and Volkswagen « Online resources: additional case studies, lecture slides for each chapter and discussion questions and self-test multiple-choice questions for students

In the face of globalization, multinational companies have become the norm, rather than the exception. HR professionals now need to manage across borders, cultures and time zones, meaning that a complete understanding of the theory and practice of International Human Resource Management (HRM) is essential. International Human Resource Management is a concise introduction for all students studying International HRM at the Masters level. It covers everything from the cultural and institutional contexts, international employment law and the role of International Framework Agreements to recruitment and selection, training and development, performance management, reward and benefits, job design and other functional areas of International HRM.

Description

ManagementHumanInternationalResource A Case Study Approach A CrossCultural and Comparative Approach Edition: 1 Date:

Pages:

Conclusions: Change or Continuance in National Systems of HRM?

ISBN Ebook:

Work Organization and Job Design across National Contexts [Daniel Wintersberger and Jorge Muniz Jr]

157 International HRM Table of Contents 1 The Context of International HRM 1 Introduction and Background to International HRM [Daniel Wintersberger] 2 The Cultural Context of International HRM [Daniel Wintersberger] 3 Leadership Across Cultural Contexts [Avis Tam] 4 Cross-Cultural Communication [James Baba Abugre] 5 The Institutional Context of International HRM [Daniel Wintersberger] 6 Global Labour Governance and Core Labour Standards [Christina Niforou] 2 Functional Areas of International HRM 7 International Recruitment, Selection and Talent Management [Peter Foss] 8 International Staffing in Multinational Companies [James Baba Abugre] 9 International Reward [Daniel Wintersberger] 10 International Training and Workforce Skills [Daniel Wintersberger] 11 International Employee Relations [Geraint Harvey] 12

Price:

Format

Product Category: Textbook Subject: International

ManagementHumanInternationalResource A Case Study Approach A CrossCultural and Comparative Approach Edition: 1 Date: 03/04/2013 Price: £47.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781843983002 ISBN Ebook: 9781843983538 Pages: 440 Format (mm): 245x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: International HRM Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

International Human Resource Management is an essential book for all students and HR professionals looking to really understand international HRM. Covering the context of International HRM, HRM and National Culture, HRM in different regions and international HRM policies, this book provides thorough discussion and comprehensive consideration of all elements of international HRM, Full of contributions from experts in specific regions including North America, the Middle East and North Africa, India, Russia and China, this book will provide readers with a thorough understanding of HRM around the world. With crucial coverage of international HRM issues including cross-cultural leadership, business ethics, global talent supply and management as well as performance management of international staff, International Human Resource Management is essential reading for all those working or looking to work in HR around the world, particularly those looking to work in multinational companies. Fully supported by online resources including powerpoint slides, a lecturer guide, additional case studies and a bonus chapter on issues and new directions in International Human Resource Management as well as annotated web links and self-test questions for students.

Business

School,

Dr.

and

Author Information Paul Iles is Professor of Leadership HRM at Glasgow School for and Society, Glasgow Caledonian University, UK Crystal Ling Zhang Lecturer Leeds Business Leeds Metropolitan University, UK

in Human Resource Management and Organisational Behaviour at

158 International HRM Table of Contents 1 Introduction and Context 1 International HRM, National Differences and the Transfer of HRM (Paul Iles) 2 National Difference, Culture and IHRM (Crystal Zhang and Paul Iles) 3 Globalisation and IHRM Policies at the Enterprise Level (Paul Iles) 2 HRM and National Culture 4 Cross-Cultural Learning - Theories and Principles (Crystal Zhang and Paul Iles) 5 Cross-Cultural and Global Leadership, (CrystalDevelopmentLeadershipandIHRMZhangandPaul Iles) 6 Ethics, Culture and Corporate Social Responsibility (Paul Iles) 7 IHRM, Culture and Knowledge Flows in (PaulMergersAlliances,InternationalJointVentures,andAcquisitionsIles) 3 HRM in Different Regions 8 HRM in North America and Western Europe - The emergence of a ‘Western’ HRM model? (Paul Iles) 9 HRM in Russia and Central and Eastern Europe (Paul Iles) 10 HRM in the Middle East and North Africa (Paul Iles & Niki Kyriakidou) 11 HRM in Sub-Saharan Africa (Paul Iles) 12 HRM in Latin America (Paul Iles) 13 HRM in India (Crystal Zhang, Shakiya Nisa & Paul Iles) 14 HRM in China (Paul Iles & Xiaoxian Zhu) 4 International HRM Policies in IES 15 Employee ResourcingStaffing, Recruitment and Selection in International Contexts (Paul Iles and Tingting Jiang) 16 Cross-Cultural Training and International HRD (Crystal Zhang & Paul Iles) 17 Global Talent Management (Paul Iles, Xiaoxian Zhu) 18 Managing the Performance of International Staff (Paul Iles) 19 Global Reward Management, Organisational Benefits and Employer Branding (Paul Iles and Tingting Jiang) 20 Employment Relations and Employee Voice in a Global Context (Paul Iles)

This book « Includes contributions from experts on HR in specific countries and regions « Ideal for students studying International Human Resource Management for the first time or those studying in their second language « Online resources: Lecturer guide, powerpoint slides, case studies and a bonus chapter on new directions in International HRM as well as annotated web links and self-test questions for students Description

is Senior

159 HR TableAnalyticsofContents 1 Investigating and researching HR issues 2 First stages towards an HR project 3 Finding and reviewing HR literature and information sources 4 Ethics, standardsprofessionalism,andHRresearch 5 Planning the research process 6 Finding and using documents and organisational evidence 7 Collecting and recording qualitative data 8 Analysing qualitative data 9 Collecting and recording quantitative data 10 Analysing quantitative data 11 Writing up your project and making recommendations 12 Making an impact – the relationship between research and practice This book « Provides detailed guidance through each stage of an HRM business project as well as collecting and interpreting both qualitative and quantitative data « New to this edition: international case studies, increased discussion of methodological issues, best practice sample literature reviews and real-life examples « Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides and annotated web links Description Research Methods in Human Resource Management is a key resource for anyone undertaking a research report or dissertation. It covers the planning and execution of HRM research projects, from investigating and researching HR issues to designing and implementing research and then evaluating and reviewing the results.

Research Methods in Human ManagementResource

Readers are shown how to use the results to enable them to develop effective evidence-based HR Thisstrategies.second edition has been updated to include the latest material on machine learning, biased algorithms, data protection and GDPR considerations, a new example using survival analyses, and up-to-the-minute screenshots and examples with SPSS version 25. It is supported by a new appendix showing main R coding, and online resources consisting of SPSS and Excel data sets and R syntax with worked case study examples.

TableAnalyticsofContents HR analytics HR information systems and data Case study – Diversity analytics Case study attitude surveys workforce perceptions Case study Predicting employee turnover Case study Predicting employee performance Case study 5 – Recruitment and selection analytics Case study 6 – Monitoring the impact of interventions Business applications Scenario modelling and business cases More advanced HR analytic techniques Reflection on HR analytics –Usage, ethics and limitations Appendix R This book « Offers a detailed yet accessible guide to understanding and working with people analytics and advanced statistical techniques Contains numerous worked examples of analyses of various forms of HR data - such as employee engagement, performance and turnover - which are supported by SPSS screenshots and online datasets « Shows how to use the results of such analyses to enable practitioners to develop effective evidencebased HR strategies « New to this edition: new material on machine learning, biased algorithms, data protection and GDPR considerations, a new example using Kaplan Meier Survival analyses for tenure/turnover modelling, a new appendix showing main R coding for the focal analyses approaches in the book and updated screenshots and examples with SPSS version 25 « Online resources: SPSS and Excel data sets and R syntax with worked case study examples Description HR metrics and organizational people-related data are an invaluable source of information from which to identify trends and patterns in order to make effective business decisions. But HR practitioners often lack the statistical and analytical know-how to fully harness the potential of this data. Predictive HR Analytics provides a clear, accessible framework for understanding and working with people analytics and advanced statistical techniques. Using the statistical package SPSS (with R syntax included), it takes readers step by step through worked examples, showing them how to carry out and interpret analyses of HR data in areas such as employee engagement, performance and turnover.

3 –

Predictive HR Analytics Mastering the HR Metric Edition: 2 Date: 03/03/2019 Price: £34.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749484446 ISBN Ebook: 9780749484453 Pages: 536 Format (mm): 240x171 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: HR Analytics Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

3 Analysis strategies 4

4 –

160 HR

Author Information Martin R Edwards is Reader in HRM and Organizational Psychology at King’s Business School, King’s College London. He has taught statistics to undergraduate, postgraduate and PhD students for over 15 years and also teaches HR analytics to MSc students. As a consultant, he has delivered HR analytics workshops to FTSE-100 companies. Kirsten Edwards is HR Lead for Advanced Analytics and Data Science at Rio Tinto and has over 20 years’ broad international experience in analytics, HR and management consulting. She is a visiting lecturer at Kent Business School and at King’s Business School.

2 – Employee

1 Understanding

–engagement and

–

An understanding of people analytics is a crucial skill for all HR professionals. No longer limited to employees in data teams or those with analyst in their job titles, people analytics is now an integral part of every HR job. Introduction to People Analytics allows all HR professionals to get to grips with analytics, feel confident in their ability to handle employee and organizational data and use analytics to move from opinions to insights.

161 HR

analytics 7 Delivering

10 Index

change 2 The

TableAnalyticsofContents HR: context for age of data and people the shift to databased approach HR with analytics delivering people analytics insights from people people analytics to the future to be more data-driven and people analytics-focused road ahead: turning intent into tomorrow’s people function through people analytics This book « Enables HR practitioners with little or no experience of analytics to feel confident in their ability to find and handle workforce data and use it to make better business decisions Demonstrates how to make an impact by starting small and building people analytics into business processes Shows how people analytics can be used to increase performance, improve efficiency and reduce costs Includes case studies from AstraZeneca, Brompton Bikes, Swarovski, NHS and Experian Description

framework 6 Business

ISBN Paperback:

Pages:

analytics 3 Making

Preface 1 Context for change 1 Redefining

2 The commercial

value 5 A

mindset 3 Developing new ways of working 4 Working

8 How

ISBN Ebook:

projects 5 Looking

Format

Author Information Nadeem Khan is a futurist, speaker, coach, industry writer and consultant in organizational strategy, digital transformation and the future of work. He is also the managing director of Optimizhr Ltd., a data and people analytics solution provider offering services that amplify and align organizational strategy with capability towards business optimization. Dave Millner has 30 years of consulting experience working with global organizations to offer a range of organizational development solutions underpinned by people analytics. He is also frequently referenced as one of the most influential HR practitioners to follow on Twitter (HRCurator). In 2021 he was named as one of the Most Influential HR Thinkers by HR Guide Data-driven HR 1 Date: 03/04/2020 £29.99 9781789661804 9781789661828 352 (mm): 234x158

Magazine Introduction to People Analytics A Practical

Product Category: Professional Subject: HR Analytics Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

the

From where to find data in an organization, how to collect it and analyse it through to how to use these findings to add business value, Introduction to People Analytics is essential reading for all HR professionals. With case studies and thought leadership insights from companies who have leveraged people analytics to improve culture and employee engagement, increase performance and reduce costs including NHS, Brompton Bikes, British Heart Foundation, King, Experian and AstraZeneca, FIS and Swarovski, this book shows how and where HR analytics can make a tangible difference to organizations. There is also expert guidance and practical advice on how to embed analytics into HR processes and adopt a data-driven approach to all workplace activities.

Price:

data 4 People

9 The

Edition:

leveraging people data to deliver real business value is what sets the best HR leaders and teams apart. Excellence in People Analytics provides business and human resources leaders with everything they need to know about creating value from people analytics.

Author Information Jonathan Ferrar is a globally recognised consultant, speaker and business advisor in HR strategy and analytics. He is chief executive officer of global people analytics firm Insight222, and board advisor to the Chartered Institute of Personnel & Development. David Green is an influencer, advisor and prolific speaker in the field of people analytics, human resources technology and the future of work. He is managing partner at Insight222 and host of the Digital HR Leaders podcast. In 2021 he was named as one of the Most Influential HR Thinkers by HR Magazine Value 1 Date: 03/07/2021 Price: £29.99 ISBN 9780749498290 ISBN Ebook: 9780749498306 Pages: 384 Format (mm): 232x152 Product Category: Professional Subject: HR Analytics Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Edition:

Full of practical tools and advice assembled around the Insight222 Nine Dimensions in People Analytics® model, this book demonstrates how to use people data to increase profits, improve staff retention and workplace productivity as well as develop individual employee experience. Featuring case studies from leading companies including Microsoft, HSBC, Syngenta, Capital One, Novartis, Bosch, Uber, Santander Brasil and American Eagle Outfitters®, Excellence in People Analytics is essential reading for all HR professionals needing to unlock the potential in their people data and gain competitive advantage

EffectivelyDescriptionandethically

Paperback:

Written by two leading experts in the field, this practical guide outlines how to create sustainable business value with people analytics and develop a data-driven culture in HR. Most importantly, it allows HR professionals and business executives to translate their data into tangible actions to improve business performance. while navigating the rapidly evolving world of work.

162 HR 1TableAnalyticsofContentsThecaseforpeopleanalytics 1 Introduction 2 The business value of people analytics 2 Nine Dimensions for Excellence in People Analytics 3 Governance 4 Methodology 5 Stakeholder Management 6 Skills 7 Technology 8 Data 9 Workforce Experiences 10 Business Outcomes 11 Culture 3 The next steps for people analytics 12 Transforming people analytics 13 Epilogue - the future of people analytics 14 Concluding remarks 15 Glossary 16 Index This book « Shows how to use insights from data to improve business decision making and prove the ROI of people analytics « Provides advice on how to formulate smart business questions and use people data to answer them « Explains how to implement processes and establish robust infrastructure for ethical data collection « Includes case studies from global organizations who are leveraging the value of people analytics including IMicrosoft, HSBC, Syngenta, Capital One, Novartis, Bosch, Uber, Santander Brasil and American Eagle

Excellence in People Analytics How to Use Workforce Data to Create Business

Description

Author Information John R. Mattox II is the Head of Talent Research at Explorance. He helps clients develop measurement strategies to improve business performance by measuring the impact of training. Prior to this, Mattox was a Principal Consultant with Gartner and led training evaluation teams at KPMG, PwC and Arthur Andersen. Peggy Parskey is a part-time managing consultant at Explorance. Based in Connecticut, she also runs her own consulting firm, Parskey Consulting, which provides organizational improvement initiatives to Fortune 500 firms. Cristina Hall is Vice President of Strategy at Explorance and is based in Chicago, Illinois. Before this, she worked at Gartner for over 10 years, where she was most recently director of product strategy.

Effective evaluation and measurement of learning and development initiatives is critical to maximise the impact of training, identify gaps for improvement and ensure that efforts are aligned to the business’ needs. Learning Analytics outlines how analytical approaches can respond to these challenges, the types and benefits of technological solutions and how to ask the right questions of organizational data in order to build a learning organization that boosts performance and competitive Drawingadvantage.upon case studies from organizations who have applied such approaches such as The Gap, Hilton Worldwide University and Seagate Technology, Learning Analytics will enable those involved in learning and development to make the business case for their activities and deliver an evidencebased service to their organizations. Alongside updated chapters on learning technology tools and moving beyond learning analytics to talent management analytics, this second edition also features new content on measuring informal learning, increasing data literacy, and framing L&D’s contributions through a portfolio evaluation approach.

Learning Analytics Using Talent Data to Improve Business Outcomes Edition: 2 Date: 03/04/2020 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789663006 ISBN Ebook: 9781789663013 Pages: 400 Format (mm): 232x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: HR Analytics Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

163 HR

This book « Shows how to measure and evaluate learning and development initiatives through analytics in order to maximise their impact and identify gaps for improvement « Enables L&D professionals to make the business case for their activities and deliver an evidencebased service to their organizations « Features case studies from organizations such as JetBlue Airways, Hilton Worldwide University and Seagate Technology who have applied these approaches in practice « New to this edition: updates to the chapters on learning technology tools and moving beyond learning analytics to talent management analytics and fresh content on informal learning, instructor management, and a portfolio evaluation approach.

6 Benchmarks 7

1 What

5 Aligning

2 Technology’s

TableAnalyticsofContents is learning analytics? role in learning learning to business impact Scrap learning: the new leading indicator of success L&D to business goals through needs assessment Optimizing investments in learning Beyond learning analytics to talent management analytics

measurement 3 Linking

6 Designing

« Provides key principles for sharing knowledge, educating staff on data and AI, and effectively engaging top executives

5 Delivering

LeadingDescriptiontechcompanies such as Netflix, Amazon and Uber use data science and machine learning at scale in their core business processes, whereas most traditional companies struggle to expand their machine learning projects beyond a small pilot scope. This book enables organizations to truly embrace the benefits of digital transformation by anchoring data and AI products at the core of their business.

Author Information Dr Alexander Borek is an independent advisor for data, analytics and machine learning strategy. He was previously the Global Head of Data, Analytics & AI at Volkswagen Financial Services, scaling data products across international markets. In his previous roles, he led the data transformation at Volkswagen Group and worked as management consultant at Gartner and IBM. Dr Nadine Prill is Head of Product at Taktile, a Berlin based tech company that provides a platform for machine learning model deployment, governance and explainability. Previously, she worked as product manager at PricewaterhouseCoopers (PwC). She holds a PhD from the University of Oxford. Science

Driving throughTransformationDigitalDataand AI A Practical Guide to Delivering Data

Edition:Products 1 Date: 03/11/2020 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789665390 ISBN Ebook: 9781789665406 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Professional Subject: HR Analytics Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

1 Introduction

« Includes a variety of international case studies across several industries such as insurance, fashion, consumer goods, finance, technology and automotive Outlines how to develop a product strategy, build teams and design the platform and architecture

It provides executives with the essential tools and concepts to establish a data and AI portfolio strategy as well as the organizational setup and agile processes that are required to deliver machine learning products at scale. Key consideration is given to advancing the data architecture and governance, balancing stakeholder needs and breaking organizational silos through new ways of working.

7 Driving

8 The

TableAnalyticsofContents to delivering data and AI products the data and AI product strategy and goals Setting up the data and AI product delivery organization and defining data and AI products high quality data and AI products the data and AI platform and architecture transformative change with data and AI products future of data and AI products in your organization

2 Developing

Each chapter includes templates, common pitfalls and global case studies covering industries such as insurance, fashion, consumer goods, finance, manufacturing and automotive. Covering a holistic perspective on strategy, technology, product and company culture, Driving Digital Transformation through Data and AI guides the organizational transformation required to get ahead in the age of AI.

164 HR

4 Identifying

and Machine Learning

This book « Explains how to build the organizational capability to deliver Data and AI products and drive immediate business results as new digital technologies significantly disrupt business Provides best practices, tools and templates for managing the organizational and technological change process to become an AI-driven enterprise

TableAnalyticsofContents What is data-driven HR? The evolution of intelligent (and super-intelligent) HR Data-driven strategy: making a business case for more intelligent HR Capitalizing on the data explosion: identifying key sources of HR-relevant data Data-driven HR tools: turning data into insights with HR analytics Potential pitfalls: looking at data privacy, transparency and security Data-driven recruitment Data-driven engagementemployee Data-driven employee safety and wellness Data-driven learning and development Data-driven managementperformance The future of data-driven HR This book « Shows how to take a data-driven approach to recruitment, engagement, safety, wellbeing, training and performance management Helps HR professionals analyze the vast amount of company data to gain tangible organizational insights and drive performance Includes guidance on how to ensure data collection is transparent and that employees understand what information is being collected and why

Traditionally seen as a purely people function unconcerned with numbers, HR is now uniquely placed to use company data to drive performance, both of the people in the organization and the organization as a whole. Data-Driven HR is a practical guide which enables HR professionals to leverage the value of the vast amount of data available at their fingertips. Covering how to identify the most useful sources of data, collect information in a transparent way that is in line with data protection requirements and turn this data into tangible insights, this book marks a turning point for the HR Coveringprofession.all the key elements of HR including recruitment, employee engagement, performance management, wellbeing and training, Data-Driven HR examines the ways data can contribute to organizational success by, among other things, optimizing processes, driving performance and improving HR decision making. Packed with case studies and real-life examples, this is essential reading for all HR professionals looking to make a measurable difference in their organizations.

Author Information Bernard Marr is a Big Data guru and bestselling author. A strategic performance consultant, he has and advised many of the world’s best-known organizations including Accenture, Barclays, BP, DHL, Fujitsu, Gartner, HSBC, Mars, Microsoft, Oracle, The Home Office, NHS, Orange, Tetley, T-Mobile, Toyota, Royal Air Force, SAP and Shell on their business and data strategies. A frequent keynote speaker, he also writes on the topic of data and analytics for various publications including Forbes, the Huffington Post and LinkedIn Pulse. Bernard Marr is also the author of Data Strategy (2017) published by Kogan Page.

FINALIST:Description

165 HR

Business Book Awards 2019 - HR and Management Category

Data-Driven HR How to Use Analytics and Metrics to Edition:Performance 1 Date: 03/04/2018 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482466 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482473 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 234x155 Product Category: Professional Subject: HR Analytics Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Drive

chief examiner

ManagementHumanofHandbookArmstrong’sStrategicResource Improve Business Performance Through Strategic People Edition:Management 7 Date: 03/12/2020 Price: £34.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789661729 ISBN Ebook: 9781789661736 Pages: 312 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Strategic HRM Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Description Armstrong’s Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management is a complete guide to integrating HR strategies with wider organizational goals and objectives approaches to achieve sustained competitive advantage. Supported by key learning summaries, source reviews and practical real-life examples from organizations including UNICEF and General Motors (GM), it provides coverage of HRM strategies in key areas of the function such as employee engagement, talent management and learning and development, as well as strategic HRM approaches in an international context. This fully revised seventh edition of Armstrong’s Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management contains new chapters on evidence-based strategic HRM, employee wellbeing strategies and HR analytics, as well as additional case studies and updated wider content to reflect the latest research and thinking. It remains an indispensable resource for both professionals and those studying HR qualifications, including undergraduate and masters degrees and the CIPD’s advanced level qualifications. Online supporting resources include lecture slides and comprehensive handbooks for lecturers and students which include self-assessment questions, case study exercises, and a glossary and literature review.

the

partner of E-Reward and was

bestselling author of HRM books. With over a million copies sold, his books have been translated into twenty-one languages. He

166 Strategic HRM Table of Contents Introduction 1 Strategic human resource management (SHRM) 1 Human resource management 2 Strategic management 3 The concept of strategic human resource management 4 The evolution of SHRM 5 The reality of SHRM 2 People strategy in general 6 The concept of people management 7 The nature and practice of people strategy 8 Developing people strategy 9 Implementing people strategy 10 The strategic role of people professionals 3 Specific people strategies 11 Organization development strategy 12 Human capital management strategy 13 Knowledge management strategy 14 Corporate social responsibility strategy 15 Organizational performance strategy 16 Individual performance strategy 17 Digital strategy for people management 18 Employee engagement strategy 19 Resourcing strategy 20 Talent management strategy 21 Diversity and inclusion strategy 22 Learning and development strategy 23 Reward strategy 24 Employment relationships strategy 25 Employee wellbeing strategy 26 International people management strategy This book « Shows how to align HR strategies, policies and practices with wider organizational goals and objectives to improve business performance « Features key learning summaries, source reviews and real-life examples from organizations including UNICEF and General Motors (GM) « New to this edition: chapters on evidence-based strategic HRM, employee wellbeing strategies and HR analytics, additional case studies and updated wider content to reflect the latest research and thinking « Online resources: lecture slides and handbooks for lecturers and students which include selfassessment questions, case study exercises and a glossary and literature review

Information

Author Michael Armstrong is UK’s is managing previously a of Chartered Institute of (CIPD).

the

Personnel and Development

FINALIST:Description

Strategic Human ManagementResource An

Author Information Karen Beaven is an executive coach and the founder of the HR Entrepreneur’s Network. She has operated at HR Director level for a number of years at companies including River Island and AllSaints, and has been ranked as one of the most influential HR practitioners by HR Magazine in 2016 and 2017. She was also recognised as HR Director of the year in 2015 and has been listed as a Global HR superstar by HRO Today. HR Professional’s 1 03/02/2019 £29.99 9780749484040 9780749484057

Date:

ISBN Paperback:

This book « Provides guidance on how to assess business needs including interpreting financial results and understanding markets and channels to ensure organizational objectives are supported by HR practices « Explores career frameworks and personal and professional development to help enable you to make an impact in your organization and beyond « Shows how to meet the challenges of a changing business environment when building a talent pipeline and implement a workforce planning process

Price:

ISBN Ebook:

Business Book Awards 2020 - HR & Management Category HR’s contribution to the business goes beyond its traditional role of managing hiring, discipline and payroll. Strategic Human Resource Management is a practical guide for all those in HR roles to support wider organizational goals and objectives whilst developing and engaging individual employees through focussing on the concept of ‘People Experience’. Drawing upon tools, exercises and case studies, this complete resource covers the core areas that are essential to achieving competitive advantage through understanding yourself, your business, your industry and your profession. Strategic Human Resource Management shows how to hone the personal skills needed to excel in HR and leadership positions, such as authenticity, network building and managing stakeholder relationships, alongside the importance of focussing on self-care and mental wellbeing. This book provides guidance on building competitor awareness, markets and channels, trends and forecasting and interpreting financial results in order to build commercial acumen. Career frameworks, professional accreditation and the importance of continued personal and professional development are also explored, in addition to technological trends and the future of work in a changing business environment. This comprehensive toolkit is an indispensable resource for HR professionals who want to implement HR practices that benefit the business and its workforce, and make an impact within their organization and profession.

Pages: 272 Format (mm): 235x150 Product Category: Professional Subject: Strategic HRM Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Toolkit Edition:

167 Strategic HRM Table of Contents 1 Know your self 1 Continuous developmentpersonal 2 Drive and passion 3 Comfort zone 4 Interpersonal skills 5 Bravery 6 Your personal network 7 Inspirational leadership 2 Know your business 8 Product 9 People 10 Productivity 11 Annual results 12 Commercial focus 13 Markets and channels 14 Technology 15 Culture 16 Purpose 3 Know your industry 17 Competition 18 Business environment 19 Rules and regulations 20 Trends and forecasting 21 Where’s the talent? 22 Workforce planning 23 Resources 4 Know your profession 24 Professional accreditation 25 Responsibilities 26 Advisory bodies 27 Career framework 28 Professional development 29 The development of the industry 30 The future of work

TableTechnologyofContents

Introduction to HR Technologies addresses these issues in clear, accessible and jargon-free language and is an indispensable guide for HR professionals needing to get to grips with technologies and understand how to use them to add tangible business value.

Introduction to HR Technologies Understand How to Use Technology to Improve Performance and Edition:Processes 1 Date: 03/07/2021 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789665277 ISBN Ebook: 9781789665284 Pages: 208 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Professional Subject: HR Technology Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Author Information Stacey Harris is the Chief Research Officer, Managing Partner of Sapient Insights Group where she oversees their industry research work, including the esteemed Annual HR Systems Survey and White Paper, now in its 24th year. She sits on the IHIRM Board of Directors, as Vice Chair and is frequently included in Human Resource Executive® and the HR Technology Conference’s Top 100 HR Tech Influencers list. She is a frequent speaker at HR events both in the U.S. and abroad, and regular podcast host as an industry researcher and analyst.

168 HR

Preface 1 What is Human Resources technology? 2 The history of HR technology use 3 Who uses HR technology? 4 Who owns HR technology? 5 Core HR applicationsadministration 6 HR service applicationsdelivery 7 Time applicationsmanagement 8 Talent applicationsmanagement 9 HR analytics and planning 10 Emerging HR technology and the future of work 11 HR technology as an environment 12 The HR systems strategy 13 The journey continues – Keep learning

Covering all the core areas of HR including recruitment, performance management, learning and development (L&D) and reward, Introduction to HR Technologies allows practitioners to identify areas where technologies can be used to drive performance and what to look for when assessing technological solutions. There is also discussion of artificial intelligence (AI), machine learning and the Internet of Things (IoT) and what they mean for HR. This book is essential reading for all HR professionals looking to use technology confidently to increase performance, improve processes and add value to both employees and the business as a whole.

This book « Uses clear, accessible and jargon-free language to explain the technologies available to HR professionals Explains how technology can improve performance in each of the core areas of HR activity including recruitment, reward and L&D « Uses a brand-agnostic approach to show how to assess the available technologies and identify which are worth investing in « Includes discussion of artificial intelligence (AI), machine learning and the Internet of Things (IoT) and explores what impact these will have on HR « Provides examples of how technology can improve efficiency by streamlining and speeding up processes to save both time and money TechnologyDescriptioncanhave huge benefits for the HR function. Whether it’s saving time by streamlining processes, boosting engagement by enabling analysis of people data or improving employee development by allowing staff to access the content they need on different platforms, wherever and whenever they need it; the opportunities are vast. However, with more apps, software and platforms than ever before, the volume and variety of available technologies can be overwhelming. This makes it extremely difficult for HR professionals to know where to start when assessing what technologies are out there and which are worth investing in.

2 Survival 5

Digital HR Strategy also explores frameworks, strategies and opportunities for wellbeing initiatives, upskilling and reskilling workforces to respond to and establishing a culture of collaboration and innovation. Featuring tips, tools, and key questions to consider, it is an indispensable resource for all HR practitioners and leaders looking to build, develop and execute a digital HR strategy in order to achieve and sustain competitive advantage in this fast-changing digital age.

Author Information Soumyasanto Sen is the Founder and Future of Work Strategist at People Conscience, where he provides advice to communities dealing with digital transformation, the new world of work and HR strategy. He is an INSEAD alumni and currently also a HR IT Program Manager at large healthcare company. Prior to this, he was a Global HR IT Manager at one of the largest global automobile companies and a Senior Consultant at IBM Global Business Services. He is a regular conference speaker and commentator on all aspects of HR technology, digital transformation, people analytics and the future of work.

169 HR

Introduction Revolution Growing the digital economy alongside disruptions The need for transformation and having the right mindset The game changers - culture, data and strategy Creating value propositions that are fit for purpose The demand for the humancentric experience Evolving the future of work, jobs and the workforce Ongoing augmentation, reskilling and collaboration Recreating the organization as a living organism Driven by innovation and led by people A sustainable evolution and a fairer society Conclusion Index This book « Provides guidance on how to build a strategy that uses digital advancements and new technologies to make HR processes more efficient, improve individual performance and increase company profits « Explains how to use insights from data and analytics to improve employee engagement and wellbeing « Demonstrates how to recruit new staff and upskill existing employees so that the business has the expertise it needs to succeed in the digital age « Includes case studies from companies who have effectively implemented a digital HR strategy and are seeing the benefits from it including Airbnb and PepsiCo « Shows HR professionals how to adapt to the new elements of their roles created by digital transformation and new technologies Description We are living in an uncertain world that is rapidly changing with an overload of information and a continual rise of technologies. Automation, the gig economy, digital platforms and other innovations are changing the fundamental nature of work and are having a significant impact on the workforce, workplace and the HR function. Digital HR Strategy is crucial reading for all HR practitioners and leaders wanting to ensure that their organization adapts to this changing and increasingly competitive environment by creating a strategic approach for sustainable transformation which goes beyond conventional digital HR propositions. Featuring case studies from organizations including Airbnb and PepsiCo, it covers areas such as the importance of cultural change and creating a human-centric employee experience, leveraging value propositions, and harnessing data insights and analytics to improve performance.

3 Sustainability 8

TableTechnologyofContents

Digital HR Strategy Achieving Sustainable Transformation in the Digital Age Edition: 1 Date: 03/02/2020 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789661224 ISBN Ebook: 9781789661231 Pages: 312 Format (mm): 235x157 Product Category: Professional Subject: HR Technology Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Product

ManagementPerformance Human

Organizational Development

ISBN Paperback:

OptimizingDescriptionstaff performance is a key component of achieving outstanding business results. The new edition of Armstrong’s Handbook of Performance Management is an essential companion for improving employee and organizational performance.

ManagementPerformanceHandbookArmstrong’sof An Evidence-Based

From performance pay and giving feedback to managing underperformers, this handbook addresses all areas of performance management to enable students and practitioners to understand how to assess, measure and improve performance.

Date:

Textbook

This book Addresses all areas of performance management, from performance pay and giving feedback to managing underperformers and having difficult conversations Includes examples and exercises to show how the latest developments in performance management and leadership can be implemented with case studies from Microsoft and IBM New to this edition: material on managing and measuring performance with a remote workforce and creating agile performance goals; exploration of new approaches for bonuses and performance reviews Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides, a glossary and literature review Is written by the UK’s bestselling HRM author, whose books have sold over a million copies and been translated into twenty-one languages

Performance Leadership Edition:

This updated seventh edition contains new chapters on the meaning and development of performance management and managing performance with a remote workforce. It also covers performance leadership and multi-source feedback. Packed with examples to show how the theory applies in practice and exercises to consolidate student learning, Armstrong’s Handbook of Performance Management remains an indispensable and engaging resource for securing effective performance across all aspects of the organization. Supporting online resources include an instructor’s manual, lecture slides, a glossary and a literature review

170 Performance Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 Performance fundamentalsmanagement 1 The meaning and nature of performance management 2 The conceptual framework of performance management 3 Performance management systems 4 Performance management issues 5 Performance developmentsmanagement 2 Performance management processes 6 Performance leadership 7 Performance and development planning 8 Assessing performance 9 Conducting performance reviews 10 Multi-source feedback 3 Performance management skills 11 Defining objectives 12 Providing feedback 13 Coaching 14 Managing underperformance 4 Applications of performance management 15 Managing performanceorganizational 16 Managing team performance 17 International performance management 18 Managing the performance of homeworkers 19 Performance management and learning 20 Performance management and talent management 21 Performance management and reward 22 Performance management and employee engagement 5 Managing managementperformance 23 Developing managementperformance 24 Learning about performance management 25 Evaluating managementperformance 6 Conclusions 26 Where is managementperformancetoday?

ISBN

Author Information Michael Armstrong is the UK’s bestselling author of Human Resource Management books including Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice and several other titles published by Kogan Page. With over a million copies sold, his books have been translated into twentyone languages. Based in London, UK, he is managing partner of E-Reward as well as an independent management consultant. Prior to this he was a chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and an HR director of a publishing company. Guide to 7 03/01/2022 £39.99 9781398603028 Ebook: 9781398603035 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 242x172 Category: Subject: Resources, and Coaching

Price:

171 Performance Management Table of Contents 1 Setting the Scene - HRM and Performance 2 Strategic ManagementPerformance 3 Motivation at Work 4 The Role of Line Managers in Managing Performance 5 Defining and Measuring Individual Work Performance 6 Performance Appraisal and Feedback 7 Integrating Learning and Performance 8 Performance-Related Rewards 9 Managing Under-Performance 10 Absence Management 11 International Performance Management 12 Developing ManagementPerformance This book « Balances theory with practice to give students a full understanding of the subject « Maps to the CIPD advanced-level unit on Performance Management « Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides, annotated web links for students Description How do you systematically decide and communicate strategic performance aims, objectives, priorities and targets? How do you plan effective policies and practices? Which techniques, rewards and sanctions should you use to improve performance? How do you critically evaluate the effectiveness of performance management? Performance Management combines theory and practice to help students master these key concepts and apply their learning. Mapping to the CIPD Level 7 Advanced unit by the same name, the book is a core text for any student taking a performance management module at undergraduate or postgraduate level. Featuring examples from a range of sectors and organizations across the globe, Performance Management is packed with pedagogical features such as learning outcomes, case studies, activities, reflection questions and further reading to fully engage students with the subject. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual, lecture slides and annotated web links for students.

Author Information Sue Hutchinson is an associate professor in HRM at the University of the West of England, where she is also Associate Head of the HRM teaching and research group. She teaches on a range of HRM postgraduate modules including Performance Management, and is actively involved in research. Her main research interests focus on the link between people management and performance, the role of line managers in HRM and involvement and consultation. Previous work experiences include research and teaching at Bath University, policy advisor for the CIPD and industrial relations advisor in the paper industry.

ManagementPerformance A Practical Introduction Theory and Edition:Practice 1 Date: 03/08/2013 Price: £47.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781843983057 ISBN Ebook: 9781843983286 Pages: 344 Format (mm): 240x190 Product Category: Textbook Subject: ManagementPerformance Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Armstrong on Reinventing Performance Management details how to build a culture of ongoing feedback and coaching and provides case studies of how this approach to building performance has been effective in organizations including Deloitte, Gap, Expedia and Google. Filled with practical advice, including how to deal with underperformers, it enables organizations to remove overly bureaucratic and ineffective systems based on top-down judgments and ratings, and demonstrates how to get line managers’ support for the process focusing on actionable feedback and growth.

Armstrong ManagementPerformanceReinventingon Building a Culture of Continuous Edition:Improvement 1 Date: 03/01/2017 Price: £32.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478117 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478124 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 233x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: ManagementPerformance Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

172 Performance Management Table of Contents 1 Performance Management –The Concept 2 Performance Management –The Reality 3 Effective ManagementPerformance 4 What’s Happening to Performance Management? 5 Reinventing ManagementPerformance-TheIssues 6 Improve Objective Setting 7 Replace the PerformanceAnnualReview 8 Abolish Rating 9 Enhance DevelopmentPersonal 10 Provide Training 11 The Reinvention Programme 12 Conclusions This book « Written by the UK’s bestselling HRM author, whose books have sold over a million copies and been translated into twenty-one languages « Provides insights into innovative approaches organizations such as Deloitte, Expedia and Google are taking to build organizational performance « Shows how to build a culture of managing performance throughout the year which delivers results and reduces bureaucracy « Empowers line managers to own the performance management process rather than HR, ensuring that the process is effectively cascaded across the business Description

Armstrong on Reinventing Performance Management presents a holistic approach to performance management, drawing on Michael Armstrong’s vast research and experience. Most organizations have performance management processes in one form or another, but these are often based on formal annual reviews, forced rankings and directly linked to pay decisions. These traditional approaches are often at the expense of ongoing, continuous feedback and focus on looking back at what has or has not been achieved rather than looking forward. Direct links to pay decisions avert attention from people development, and managers often get lost in the bureaucracy of complex forms rather than fully engaging with their people.

in practice EffectiveDescriptionperformance

management is at the heart of organizational success, delivering able and motivated employees who are aligned to an organization’s values and goals. Using a combination of case studies, interviews, tools and diagnostic questionnaires, Performance Management is a complete and practical guide to getting the best out of people and achieving positive organizational outcomes through successful performance management. It covers all areas of the subject, from objective-setting, giving feedback, measuring performance and managing underperformance and absence, to effectively integrating systems and processes into organizational and HR strategies.

This second edition of Performance Management contains new material on the ethical focus of the topic, promoting employee wellbeing through performance management, and the future of the annual appraisal, as well as new case studies and examples from Deloitte, Jumeirah Hotels, the CIPD and Hilton. Supporting online resources consist of additional activities and guidance for further research on the topic. HR Fundamentals is a series of succinct, practical guides for students and those in the early stages of their HR careers. They are endorsed by the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD), the UK professional body for HR and people development, which has over 145,000 members worldwide.

Author Information Linda Ashdown is an Assessment Manager at the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and an HRM consultant through her own company Ashdown-Jones HR Ltd. She is also an Associate Lecturer at Portsmouth University Business School, specialising in performance management and employee engagement. She was previously on the board of a multinational advertising company as HR Director.

ManagementPerformance A Practical Introduction Theory and Edition:Practice 2 Date: 03/09/2018 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749483371 ISBN Ebook: 9780749483388 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 234x158 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: ManagementPerformance Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

173 Performance Management Table of Contents 1 What is management?performance 2 Why is it important? 3 How does it fit with organization and HRM strategy? 4 How does it work? 5 How do you do it? 6 Planning and action 7 Measurement 8 Conclusion

This book « Is part of the CIPD-endorsed HR Fundamentals series of succinct, practical guides for those in the early stages of HR Uses practical tools, assessments and more to demonstrate how to build a successful performance management strategy New to this edition: considers the major developments in the field and includes new case studies from companies such as Deloitte, who have dropped the formal appraisal process Online resources: downloadable templates and tools, including self-assessment questionnaires, to used

Author Information Adrian Furnham is professor of psychology at UCL, and adjunct professor of management at the Norwegian School of Management. He has written over 1,000 scientific papers and 70 books and is among the most well-known psychologists in the world. Ian MacRae is Director of High Potential, an organizational consultancy providing customised psychological tests and reports for improving performance, predicting potential and developing people. He is a PhD candidate at Maastricht University.

book «

This Explains the science behind motivation Provides practical guidance Helps transform talent management succession planning

by explaining what motivates an employee to want to progress in an organization

Motivation Performanceand A Guide to Motivating a Diverse Edition:Workforce 1 Date: 03/02/2017 Price: £24.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478131 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478148 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 235x157 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: ManagementPerformance Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

to unlock productivity and high performance, and reduce staff turnover «

on how to measure motivation, highlight areas for improvement, demonstrate which employee motivation programmes are working, and where costs can be reduced «

ManyDescriptionorganizations approach the issue of employee engagement and motivation by tapping into age, gender and other stereotypes. Motivation and Performance challenges these notions, bringing together evidence that group differences are often exaggerated and that getting to the heart of what really motivates individuals is what’s most important. This book is a practical guide to ensuring that organizations consider all motivators - job security as well as the need for personal growth - to improve employee satisfaction, boost organizational productivity and reduce staff turnover. Underpinned by original research, Motivation and Performance features case studies from finance, retail, the public and other sectors to show how the principles of motivating employees apply at all levels of the organization, not just at the leadership level, and how values and motivation can be changed and developed. Complete with a framework for conducting effective visits to front-line locations, it will help HR professionals ask the right questions, choose whether to implement external motivation-building programmes and make a real impact on an employee’s desire to progress in the company.

and

174 Performance Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 A Model of Motivation 3 Generational Differences 4 The Biology of Stress and Well-being 5 Measuring Motivation 6 The Power of Communication and Conversations 7 Intrinsic Motivation 8 Work OrganizationalEngagement,Health and Culture 9 Extrinsic Motivation and Rewards 10 Culture and Values 11 The Importance of Motivation Gaps 12 Outsourcing Motivation 13 The Dark Side and Derailed Motivation 14 Best and Worst Practice from Real Companies

This book « Explains how to develop a purpose-driven team with shared goals, vision and identity who can achieve greater business success than individual employees are able to « Shows how to manage internal team conflict that can arise from employees having different priorities, motivations and levels of experience

« Provides diagnostic questions and reflective practice exercises in each chapter so that readers can identify how the content can apply in practice in their own team

Pages:

ISBN Ebook:

Building Top-Performing Teams includes essential guidance, tools and techniques that show how to promote team ways of working rather than individual-focused processes. It also includes guidance on managing internal team conflict and ensuring that teams are purpose-driven and working towards a shared business goal. Each chapter includes diagnostic questions and reflective practice exercises to allow readers to identify how to apply each element of team development to their workforce. Supported by the authors’ experience in organizations such as the BBC, John Lewis, KPMG, Britvic, the NHS and BMW this is essential reading for anyone needing to unlock the value of teams to achieve greater business performance.

Containing more than 40 tools which can be used in a virtual or in-person coaching environment, Building Top-Performing Teams is a practical guide for leaders, HR professionals, coaches, team coaches and anyone with management responsibility. It covers how to motivate, develop, engage and reward a team of employees with different levels of experience and priorities to achieve outstanding business success.

Format (mm):

Product Category: Professional Subject: ManagementPerformance Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Introduction - why the world needs top-performing teams and the argument for team coaching Beyond tools and techniqueswhy is a team coach’s ‘way of being’ so important? Team coaching frameworks, models and approachesintroducing the ‘Creating the Team Edge’ framework The purpose driven team - why does being purpose driven matter so much? Team identity - why is team identity so important? Team values and beliefs - why are team values and beliefs so important? Team awareness - why is it important to develop awareness both within and beyond a team? Team relatedness - why is building trust and connection so important? Team ways of working - how can teams keep reinventing how they work together? Team transformation - what do teams need to do to become transformational?

Table of Contents

Conclusion - what does the future require of team coaching?

ISBN Paperback:

TheDescriptionbestwayfor a business to succeed is through its people. While there are gains to be had from streamlining processes, reducing costs or making a strategic change, the biggest potential for success comes through how humans collaborate. Specifically, the greatest gains are achieved through high performing teams, and teams of teams.

Author Information Lucy Widdowson MSc PCC is an accredited executive and team coach, Director of Performance Edge, and a lead tutor on team coaching at Henley Business School. During her 30 year corporate career she has worked as a HR Director and is a UK board member for team coaching for the ICF. Paul J Barbour MSc is an executive and team coach, with 20 years prior experience leading businesses and teams in Kerry Group plc. A writer and speaker with strong interests in human collaboration and conflict resolution, he is also a lead tutor on team coaching at Henley Business School. Resources, 03/01/2021 £29.99 9781789666762 9781789666779 304 235x158

« Includes practical case studies from organizations including John Lewis, Mothercare, Carlsberg, PepsiCo and Unilever

175 Performance Management

Learning & Edition:Development 1 Date:

Price:

Building PerformingTopTeams Human

« Contains more than 40 tools which can be used when coaching virtually or face-to-face

Description Armstrong’s Handbook of Reward Management Practice is the definitive guide to understanding, developing and implementing effective reward strategies. It covers all the essential aspects of improving organizational, team and individual performance through reward processes, including financial and non-financial rewards, job evaluation, grade and pay structures, rewarding specific employee groups and ethical considerations. This revised and updated sixth edition incorporates the latest research and developments and contains updated coverage of equal pay and the gender pay gap, employee benefits and total reward and a new chapter on employee financial wellbeing.

176 Reward Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 Fundamentals of reward management 1 Reward management – An overview 2 Strategic reward 3 Total reward 2 Aspects of managementreward 4 Factors affecting reward 5 Financial rewards 6 Non-financial rewards 7 Motivation and reward 8 Engagement and reward 9 Performance and reward 10 Financial well-being 11 The gender pay gap 12 The ethical approach to reward and managementperformance 3 Base pay management 13 Job evaluation 14 Market pricing 15 Grade and pay structures 4 Rewarding and recognizing performance 16 Pay progression through contingent pay 17 Bonus schemes 18 Team pay 19 Rewarding for business performance 20 Recognition 5 Rewarding special groups 21 Rewarding chief executives 22 Rewarding sales and customer service staff 23 Rewarding knowledge workers 24 Rewarding manual workers 25 International reward 6 Employee benefits 26 Employee pensions and benefits 27 Flexible benefits 7 The practice of reward management 28 Evidence-based reward management 29 Managing reward systems 30 Managing reward risk 31 Responsibility for reward 32 Reward developmentsmanagementintheUK This book « Offers a detailed and comprehensive guide to understanding, developing and implementing effective reward systems « Connects the theoretical discussion to real-world examples and case studies, including General Motors (GM), the UK National Health Service (NHS), Tesco and BT « New to this edition: majorly revised and updated chapters on equal pay and the gender pay gap, employee benefits and total reward and a new chapter on employee financial wellbeing « Online resources: lecture slides for each chapter and handbooks for lecturers and students which include learning summaries, discussion questions and exercises, further case studies, literature reviews and glossaries

As with all of Armstrong’s texts, Armstrong’s Handbook of Reward Management Practice bridges the gap between academic and practitioner and is ideally suited to both HR professionals and those studying for HR qualifications, including master’s degrees and the CIPD’s intermediate and advanced level qualifications. Tips and checklists and can be found throughout, alongside case studies from organizations including General Motors, the UK National Health Service and Tesco. Online supporting resources include lecture slides and comprehensive handbooks for lecturers and students, which include learning summaries, discussion questions and exercises, literature reviews and glossaries.

HR Thinkers

Magazine HandbookArmstrong’sof Reward PracticeManagement Improving Performance Through Edition:Reward 6 Date: 03/02/2019 Price: £46.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749484361 ISBN Ebook: 9780749484378 Pages: 392 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Reward Management Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Author Information Michael Armstrong is the UK’s bestselling author of human resource management books including Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice, also published by Kogan Page. His books have sold over a million copies and have been translated into 21 languages. He is a former Chief Examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and an independent management consultant. Duncan Brown is Head of HR Consultancy at the Institute for Employment Studies. He has more than 25 years’ experience in consulting and reward and he was previously the Assistant Director General at the CIPD. In 2021 he was named as one of the Most Influential by HR

Pages: 496 Format (mm): 250x190 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Reward Management Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book « Gives a complete theoretical grounding in reward management as well as practical examples and case studies so the theory can be applied in the workplace « New to this edition: Coverage of the latest developments in reward management including the gender pay gap, international reward, the impact of Brexit, executive reward and pay ratio reporting « Online resources: lecturer manual and lecture slides « Includes additional discussion of how different cultures impact reward management and why one size of reward doesn’t fit all Description Reward Management is a comprehensive guide to all elements of reward in the workplace. From the theoretical frameworks and legal context of reward through to practical application in the workplace, this book provides all the essential information for both students of reward management and practitioners involved in reward management in organizations. Covering all the key areas of reward management including pay structures and pay setting, job evaluation and employee benefits, Reward Management is a key book for anyone studying the Level 7 CIPD reward management module or a postgraduate qualification in HR. This book also includes guidance on non-financial reward and new coverage of the gender pay gap, executive reward and pay ratio reporting. There is also extensive discussion of international reward including the impact of different cultures on reward, benefits for multi-local talent, rewarding expatriates and why one size of reward doesn’t fit all. Accompanying online resources include lecturer manual and lecture slides.

177 Reward Management Table of Contents 1 Introducing the reward management system 2 Conceptual and theoretical frameworks 3 The legal, employment relations and market context 4 Base pay structures and relationships 5 Pay-setting, composition and progression 6 Variable pay schemes 7 Benefits 8 Pensions 9 Non-financial reward 10 Rewarding directors and executives 11 International reward management 12 Reward management within HRM

Author Information Stephen J. Perkins is ann Emeritus Professor at London Metropolitan University and a Research Fellow with the Global Policy Institute, London. A non-executive director and corporate adviser, he has previously held executive posts in industry as well as undertaking management consultancy in the UK and internationally. Sarah Jones is a Senior Lecturer in HRM and Organization Behaviour at the University of Northampton, UK. 03/01/2020 £47.99 9781789661774 9781789661781

ISBN Paperback:

ISBN Ebook:

ManagementReward A Practical Introduction Alternatives, Consequences and Contexts Edition: 4 Date:

Price:

ISBN

This third edition of Reward Management includes the latest research and developments, such as how to incorporate wellbeing and new technologies in reward strategy and how new ways of working may affect a benefits package. Case studies include insight from McDonald’s UK, Marks and Spencer and Which? to show how this can be applied in practice. Online resources include downloadable templates and further tools to be used in practice.

Featuring guidance, practical tools and case studies throughout, this book provides the knowledge and skills needed to plan, implement and assess an effective reward strategy in any type of organization. It covers key areas including pay and grade structures, job evaluation, pay reviews, bonus plans, noncash reward and tax issues.

This book « Uses practical tools and reflective questions to build knowledge and skills for implementing a successful reward management strategy Features examples and case studies, including from Which? and The Royal Horticultural Society to show how organizations can align reward strategy with wider objectives New to this edition: material and examples on approaching wellbeing within the benefits package and the latest application of technology; how to manage reward strategy with new ways of working Online resources: downloadable templates and tools to develop and implement reward management strategies « Is part of the CIPD-endorsed HR Fundamentals series of succinct, practical guides for those in the early stages of HR

Reward Management is a practical guide for understanding how to develop successful reward strategies.

Professional Subject: Reward Management Human

178 Reward Management Table of Contents 1 The fundamentals of reward management 1 Reward and reward strategy 2 Why reward is important and how it can make an impact 3 Relationship between motivation and reward 4 How reward fits together 5 How to get started with a reward strategy 6 Communications 7 Tax and National Insurance 2 Reward in practice 8 Grades and pay structures 9 Managing pay data and pay reviews 10 Bonus plans 11 Recognition and non-cash reward 12 Long-term plans 13 Benefits 14 Global Reward 15 Conclusions

Price:

HowDescriptioncanIfairlyreward employees and align this with team and organizational performance?

Author Information Michael Rose is an author, speaker and independent reward consultant based in London, UK. He was formerly the VicePresident of reward at the CIPD, and has held a number of senior reward management positions, such as the Director of Total Reward for Aon Corporation and Head of Reward Management for TSB Bank plc. A regular international conference speaker, he has also appeared on radio and TV commenting on reward issues and has written a number of books and articles on the topic. 3 Date: 03/05/2022 £19.99 9781398605299 Ebook: 9781398605305 280 Format (mm): 234x156 Category: Supplementary Text/ Resources, Coaching

The HR Fundamentals are a series of succinct, practical guides for students and those in the early stages of their HR careers, endorsed by the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD).

Product

Pages:

ISBN Paperback:

ManagementReward A Practical Introduction Alternatives, Consequences and Contexts Edition:

Organizational Development and

Textbook/Professional

Author Information Esther Cameron is a freelance change adviser and coach who supports senior leaders and their teams and organizations through change. Her recent clients include Shell, Tata Steel, Canaccord Genuity and several British government departments. Mike Green is the Managing Director of Transitional Space, a consultancy firm that specializes in change management, leadership development and individual and team coaching. He is a Visiting Executive Fellow at Henley Business School and also delivers accredited programmes in change management to senior managers and change agents in the UK, Africa and the Middle East.

Making Sense of Change Management

179 Change Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 The underpinning theory 1 Individual change 2 Team change 3 Organizational change 4 Leading change 5 The change agent 2 The applications 6 Restructuring 7 Mergers and acquisitions 8 Culture and change 9 Digital transformation 10 Becoming a sustainable business 3 Emerging inquiries 11 Complex change 12 Leading change in uncertain times 13 Project- and programme-led change 14 Conclusion 15 References and further reading 16 Index This book « Provides a comprehensive overview of the theories, frameworks and techniques of change management to enable organizations to successfully navigate through periods of change « Supports learning and understanding with features including checklists, tips, insights from industry expert contributors and ‘food for thought’, ‘stop and think’ and summary boxes « Contains examples from organizations including Google, Burberry and Volvo « New to this edition: chapters on digital transformation and becoming a sustainable business, material on resilience, wellbeing and effective leadership and updated wider content with the latest thinking and theories « Online resources: international case study question packs and lecture slides with further reflective questions ThisDescriptiondefinitive,bestselling text in the field of change management provides comprehensive guidance of everything needed to successfully navigate times of change.

Making Sense of Change Management provides a thorough and accessible overview for students and practitioners alike. Without relying on assumed knowledge, it comprehensively covers the theories and models of change management and connects them to workable approaches and techniques that organizations of all types and sizes can use to adapt to tough market conditions and succeed by changing their strategies, structures, mindsets, leadership behaviours and expectations of staff and Thismanagers.completely

Supported by “food for thought” and “stop and think” features to aid critical thinking and understanding, as well as checklists, tips and helpful summaries, Making Sense of Change Management remains essential reading for anyone who is currently part of, or leading, a change initiative. New and updated accompanying online resources include international case study question packs for lecturers and lecture slides with reflective questions.

revised and updated fifth edition contains new chapters on digital transformation and becoming a sustainable business, new material on resilience, well-being and effective leadership, and new examples from organizations including Google, Burberry and Volvo.

A Complete Guide to the Models, Tools and Techniques of Organizational Change Edition: 5 Date: 03/11/2019 Price: £34.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749496975 ISBN Ebook: 9780749496982 Pages: 544 Format (mm): 240x168 Product Category: Subject: Change Management Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Managing Change A

Description

This book « Offers a critical perspective and challenges change management assumptions to facilitate a deeper understanding and appreciation of the subject New to this edition: new chapters on perspectives, power and politics, ethics, agents and agency, HRM and evaluation; a revised structure to reflect strategic, group and individual change; a revised final chapter on evaluating the practice and theory of change management; and an appendix of twenty popular change management techniques Online resources: annotated web links for students, an instructor’s manual complete with commentary on questions and cases in the book, lecture slides and additional case studies for tutors

180 Change Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1 The Managing Change Conundrums 2 Organisational Change Classifications 3 History and Organisational Change 4 The Role of Paradigms and Perspectives 2 External and Internal Change Context 5 Why Organisations Change 6 Organisational Design and Change 7 Strategic Level Change 8 Group and Team Level Change 9 Individual Level Change 3 Managing Change 10 The Leadership of Change 11 Change Communications 12 Resistance to Change 13 Cultural Change 14 Organisational Learning 4 Developments in Managing Change 15 Power, Politics and Organisational Change 16 Ethics and Managing Change 17 Change Agents and Agency 18 HRM and Managing Change 19 Technological Change 5 Conclusions 20 Evaluating Managing Change 6 AppendixOrganisationalThe Change Field Guide

Author Information Mark Hughes is a senior lecturer in organisational behaviour at Brighton Business School, UK. Critical Perspective Edition: 2 Date: 03/08/2010 Price: £47.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781843982418 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984528 Pages: 392 Format (mm): 245x190 Category: Textbook

Managing Change: A Critical Perspective explores how and why change occurs in organizations and how the change process can be managed effectively. Complete with an appendix featuring twenty popular change management techniques, it is an ideal core textbook for change modules on HR and business degree programmes at both undergraduate and postgraduate level. It offers a critical perspective, challenging the main assumptions and ensuring that the complexity of the subject is understood and appreciated. This fully updated 2nd edition of Managing Change: A Critical Perspective includes new chapters on perspectives, power and politics, ethics, agents and agency, HRM and evaluation. Its revised structure reflects strategic, group and individual change, and a revised final chapter evaluates the practice and theory of change management. Online supporting resources include annotated weblinks for students, an instructor’s manual complete with commentary on questions and cases in the book and lecture slides and additional case studies for tutors.

Product

Subject: Change Management Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Providing an evidence-based analysis of change in organizations, Managing and Leading People Through Organizational Change is written for practitioners responsible for change programmes and postgraduate students of organizational change. This updated edition demonstrates the importance of understanding the effects of change on individuals and engaging them collaboratively through the transformation journey. Featuring new material on individual wellbeing and the impact of technological advances on the workplace, this book sets out frameworks, practical approaches and recommendations for communicating with and leading individuals, teams and organizations through change. Full of exercises, interviews and case studies from across the globe, this book is an essential resource for leaders and students enabling them to achieve sustainable benefits of change at work.

181 Change Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1 organizationalUnderstanding change 2 The context and nature of change 2 Individual responses to change 3 The impact of organizational change on emotions 4 Individual sense-making processes 3 The role of leaders and managers 5 Leading people through change 6 Fostering commitment and ownership 7 Engaging people through dialogue 8 Changing elements of the organization’s culture 4 Building capabilities 9 Building capabilities for sustaining change 10 Sustaining change 11 Glossary 12 Index This book « Equips students and practitioners with the knowledge and skills to manage people through times of change and achieve sustainable operational performance « Uses the author’s evidence-based research to provide new models including a ‘Change Readiness Assessment Template’ « Includes global case studies to help apply the theory to practice, including PepsiCo, Nissan and Aegon Asset Management « New to this edition: content on managing the impact of technological advances and the importance of wellbeing; case studies from Netflix and the UK National Health Service « Online resources: lecturer’s slides and discussion points for each chapter ChangeDescriptioninorganizations is all about people: it is people who plan, prepare for and implement change, and who are affected by it in the daily course of their work. Yet there is a tendency to focus on quantifiable and often more easily solved technical aspects of implementing organizational change programmes, and ignore the complex ways that these will impact individuals.

ChangeOrganizationalPeopleandManagingLeadingThrough

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching Edition: 2 Date: 03/05/2021 Price: £34.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789667974 ISBN Ebook: 9781789667981 Pages: 368 Format (mm): 250x130 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Change Management Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Author Information Professor Julie Hodges is a leading expert on change in organizations. Prior to this, Julie Hodges worked as a business consultant for over 20 years in several profit and non-profit organizations, including PwC. Based in the UK, she is also an Academic Fellow of the ICMCI (International Council of Management Consulting Institutes), a Principal Fellow of the Higher Education Academy, and a Senior Fellow of the Foundation for Management Education (FME), and a member of the editorial board of the ‘Management Consulting’ journal.

ChangeDevelopmentOrganizationalConsultancy,and A Practical Guide to Delivering Value Edition: 1 Date: 03/04/2017 Price: £36.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478636 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478643 Pages: 328 Format (mm): 233x157 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Change Management Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

« Online

and

182 Change Management Table of Contents 1 The Context of Consulting 1 The Nature and Value of Consulting 2 Roles and Responsibilities of Consulting 2 The Consulting Cycle 3 Preparation and Contracting 4 Diagnosing the Need and Readiness for Change 5 Designing and Delivering Interventions 6 Transition 3 Consulting Capabilities 7 Building Capabilities for Consulting 8 Becoming a Consultant 9 The Shadow Side of Consultancy 10 Conclusions and Reflections

Author Information Professor Julie Hodges is a leading expert on change in organizations. Prior to this, Julie Hodges worked as a business consultant for over 20 years in several profit and nonprofit organizations, including PwC. Based in Durham, UK, she is also an Academic Fellow of the ICMCI (International Council of Management Consulting Institutes), a Principal Fellow of the Higher Education Academy, and a Senior Fellow of the Foundation for Management Education (FME), and a member of the editorial board of the ‘Management Consulting’ journal.

This book Shows how to plan a consulting intervention, from diagnosing what change is needed and identifying risks to ensuring ethical practice demonstrating value Provides global case studies and perspectives from internal and external consultants across a range of consultancies, from the ‘Big Four’ to boutique firms Helps build the necessary skills to get work as a consultant, from putting the business case forward to establishing credibility resources: Lecturer slides

OrganizationsDescriptionare increasingly investing in consulting capabilities to understand what changes they need to make to keep up the pace with the competition and future-proof their business. Consultancy, Organizational Development and Change is a guide for students and internal and external consultants needing to develop the necessary skills to consult in organizational settings where there is a great deal of complexity.

It tackles the issues posing the greatest threat to the success of the change programme, including how to adapt to rapidly shifting needs, deal with the emotional and ethical issues that arise and ensure that the managers take full ownership for the change so that ‘business as usual’ is established.

Complete with case studies from the ‘Big Four’ consultancy groups as well as boutique firms, Consultancy, Organizational Development and Change shows how to identify and execute interventions in a variety of organizational settings to deliver value. It provides guidance on how to develop a value proposition; define, write and present the business case for the proposed interventions; establish credibility and report on the results.

Author Information Sarah Coleman is director of Business Evolution. Her clients include multinationals and established medium-sized enterprises across government and industry sectors including telecoms, professional and financial services, engineering and healthcare. Sarah is a Fellow and former Trustee of the Association for Project Management (APM) and Visiting Fellow at Cranfield and Lincoln universities. Bob Thomas is a highly experienced programme, portfolio, PMO delivery manager with a consulting and delivery background in airports, retail, government (central and local), insurance, logistics, health, financial services, transportation and management consulting. Bob also established Change Practitioner Groups for the APM. Studies on Transformational Change in Organizations Edition: 1 Date: 03/02/2017 Price: £34.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749475475 ISBN Ebook: 9780749475482 Pages: 384 Format (mm): 235x160 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Change Management Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

ChangeOrganizationalExplained Case

This book « Uses real-world examples to show how issues and challenges have been overcome in organizations « Covers a wide range of organizational perspectives with examples from GlaxoSmithKline, the NHS and other large and small companies Includes reflective questions for critically assessing and learning from the case studies Description The best way to learn how to navigate change successfully is to look at practical examples of change management programmes. Organizational Change Explained shares stories and insights from experienced change practitioners so professionals can reflect on their own work, respond critically to what others have done, and take away new tools and techniques to apply to their own change management practice. The book includes a range of cases from different sectors and countries including GlaxoSmithKline and the NHS to offer insights no matter the scale of the change management programme. Organized around central themes such as shaping and design, change leadership, and communication and engagement, Organizational Change Explained presents each case alongside an introduction, conclusion, list of key learning points, questions for reflection and sources of further reading. The book is invaluable to anyone tasked with leading or managing change within their teams, projects, departments or divisions, whether at local level or across geographic locations, countries and cultures.

183 Change Management Table of Contents 1 The Reality Organizationalof Change 1 Organizational development in the NHS 2 Sparking change 3 Changing the way we change 4 Shaping and designing change 5 Brain, behaviour and being the same or different 6 Working with resistance to change 7 Creating the resilient organization 8 Leading change 9 Employee communication and engagement during change 10 Project Carpe Diem 11 Operational readiness for change 12 Managing change in Asia and the West 13 Developing change capacity and capability in organizations 14 Risk and organizational change 15 Embedding and sustaining change 16 Change innovation 2 The Future of Organizational Change 17 The future of change and management 18 Leading the agile organization 19 The shift from complicated to complex 20 The future and manufacturing 21 The future and local government 22 The future of healthcare

The editors of The Effective Change Manager’s Handbook - Richard Smith, David King, Ranjit Sidhu and Dan Skelsey - are all experienced international consultants and trainers in change management.

All four editors worked on behalf of the Change Management Institute to co-author the first global change management body of knowledge, The Effective Change Manager, and are members of the APMG International examination panel for change management.

Author Information APMG is a leading global Examination Institute and the Official Accreditor of the UK Government’s Cabinet Office and the United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS). They accredit professional training and consulting organizations and manage certification schemes for knowledge-based workers. Richard Smith (Editor) is a specialist in organizational development-related people development issues. He works with clients as diverse as Unilever, Nestle, Mars and Harvard Business School. He is the Chief Examiner for APMG Change Management products and lead author of the first global Change Management Body of Knowledge (CMBoK) for the Change Management Institute. He is also a Fellow of the CIPD.

184 Change Management Table of Contents 1 A change perspectivemanagement–RichardSmith 2 Defining change – Robert Cole, David King and Rod Sowden 3 Managing benefits: Ensuring change delivers value –Stephen Jenner 4 Stakeholder strategy – Patrick Mayfield 5 Communication and engagement – Ranjit Sidhu 6 Change impact – Caroline Perkins 7 Change readiness, planning and measurement – Nicola Busby 8 Project management: Change initiatives, projects and programmes – Ira Blake 9 Education and learning support – Richard Smith 10 Facilitation – Dan Skelsey 11 Sustaining change – Helen Campbell 12 Personal and professional management – Ray Wicks 13 Organizational considerations – Tim Cole, Martin Lunn, Una McGarvie and Eric Rouhof

This book « Is the official guide for the first ever Change Management Body of Knowledge, created by Change Management Institute and APMG « Provides a strong base level knowledge for continuing professional development across the discipline « Enables change managers to effectively advise and coach senior colleagues and those sponsoring or leading change initiatives

TheDescriptionEffectiveChange Manager’s Handbook helps practitioners, employers and academics define and practise change management successfully and develop change management maturity within their organization.

The Effective Change Manager’s Handbook Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching Edition: 1 Date: 03/11/2014 Price: £41.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473075 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473082 Pages: 632 Format (mm): 240x172 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Change Management Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

A single-volume learning resource covering the range of knowledge required, it includes chapters from established thought leaders on topics ranging from benefits management, stakeholder strategy, facilitation, change readiness, project management and education and learning support. Endorsed by the Change Management Institute and the official guide to the CMI Body of Knowledge, The Effective Change Manager’s Handbook covers the whole process from planning to implementation, offering practical tools, techniques and models to effectively support any change initiative.

This updated second edition of Neuroscience for Organizational Change contains new chapters on planning the working day with the brain in mind and on overcoming the difficulties related to behavioural change. It also features up-to-the-minute wider content reflecting the latest insights and developments, and updated case studies from the first edition which give a long-term view of the benefits of applying neuroscience in organizations.

Practical tips and suggestions can be found throughout, as well as examples of how these insights have been applied at organizations such as Lloyds Banking Group and GCHQ. The book also sets out a practical science-based planning model, SPACES, to enhance engagement.

Author Information Hilary Scarlett is a writer, international speaker and consultant on change management and neuroscience. Her work, which has spanned Europe, the US and Asia, concentrates on the development of peoplefocused change management programmes, employee engagement and well-being. Hilary has been working with neuroscientists at University College London and in the US to apply cognitive neuroscience to practical management tools. She regularly works with leadership teams in the private and public sectors to help them build resilience and successfully introduce change.

185 Change Management Table of Contents Preface 1 The challenge 1 Introduction to neuroscience 2 Brain facts 3 Why our brains don’t like organizational change 2 What can we do? 4 Performing at our best during change 5 Our social brains: The role of leaders and managers 6 Managing emotions during change 7 Decision-making and bias 8 Communication, involvement and the role of storytelling 9 Planning change with the brain in mind 10 Changing behavior 11 Planning the working day to maximize productivity 12 Applying neuroscience in the organization 13 Index This book « Offers a practical approach underpinned by neuroscience for engaging and supporting employees during times of change « Contains numerous examples of how these approaches have been applied in organizations including as Lloyds Banking Group and Government Communications Headquarters (GCHQ) « Includes key reflection points at the end of each chapter to aid planning and implementation of key steps and insights « New to this edition: new chapters on planning the work day with the brain in mind and overcoming the difficulties related to behavioural change, as well as updated wider content and further case studies OrganizationalDescriptionchange can be unpredictable and stressful. With a better understanding of what our brains need to focus and perform at their best, organizations and leaders can increase employee engagement, productivity and well-being to successfully manage such periods of uncertainty.

Neuroscience ChangeOrganizationalfor An Evidence-based Practical Guide to Managing Change Edition: 2 Date: 03/07/2019 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749493189 ISBN Ebook: 9780749493196 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 233x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Change Management Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Drawing on the latest scientific research and verified by an independent neuroscientist, Neuroscience for Organizational Change explores the need for social connection at work, how best to manage emotions and reduce bias in decision-making, and why we need communication, involvement and storytelling to help us through change.

186 need for

4 Relationship building 5 Environment 6 Coaching

Change Management Table of Contents 1 Concept 2 Roadmap 3 Business

Change

This book « Explains core concepts of agile methodologies enabling readers to create a flexible plan for managing both large-scale and micro-level change in their organization « Provides best practice advice on how to build strong relationships with stakeholders to ensure benefits are realized early « New to this edition: Chapters on behavioural change and decomposition in planning iterations; discussion on prototyping for business needs and virtual leadership; refresh of the content to cover the latest developments and support the APMG Agile Change Agent course « Online resources: PDFs of appendices from the book on change roles, change management documents, change capabilities, a change activity index and communication activities

TheDescriptionsecondedition

of Agile Change Management provides essential tools to build change manager capabilities and ensure change initiatives are embedded effectively throughout the organization. This book is a comprehensive resource for creating a roadmap that is flexible and unique to each organization to manage any type of change initiative. Detailing all the processes, activities and information needed, from creating the right environment for change to completing iterative tasks, it shows how to respond to different needs as they arise, reducing the potential for wasted time and Theresources.updated second edition features chapters on behavioural change and decomposition in planning iterations, and new material on prototyping for business needs and virtual leadership. Whether implementing a large-scale transformation or working through projects at micro-level, Agile Change Management provides tools, frameworks and examples necessary to adapt to and manage change effectively.

Author Information Melanie Franklin is a globally recognized thought leader in change management who has effected business change programmes across public and private sector organizations. Based in London, UK, she is the Director of Agile Change Management Ltd and Founder of the Continuous Change Community. An impressive array of clients in Europe, the US and the Middle East benefit from her unique insights into change. She designs and runs in-house programs to develop skills in change and transformation and advises boards on strategies for change. She is Chief Examiner for the Agile Change Agent qualification from APMG International and works for several professional bodies to help grow the consulting and change management professions. She is the author of several publications and a regular keynote speaker at various conferences worldwide. A Practical Framework for Successful Change Planning and Implementation Edition: 2 Date: 03/10/2021 Price: £34.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398603141 ISBN Ebook: 9781398603158 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Change Management Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Agile ManagementChange

How can managers and leaders create a culture that supports lasting change through these transformations?

ISBN Paperback:

Change

187 Change Management Table of Contents 1 The agile business 2 The key forces for change 3 How digital disrupts 4 What’s stopping you? 5 Defining digital transformation and how an agile business is the foundation for it 6 Fast 7 Operating in the ‘ambiguity zone’ 8 Agile and methodologyadaptive 9 The agile innovation process 10 Focused 11 The role of vision and purpose 12 Agile strategy and planning 13 Linking strategy to execution 14 Flexibility 15 Agile structures and resourcing 16 Scaling agility 17 Building the culture to move fast 18 A blueprint for flexibility - autonomy, mastery and purpose 19 Digital-native talent 20 Start small, scale fast and the transformation journey –putting it all together 21 Index This book « Shows how businesses can embrace digital transformation and agile processes to achieve organizational success « Provides guidance on how to scale agile principles and operations, make change stick and adopt agile mindsets and culture « Contains real-life insights and examples from organizations driving business success with agility and digital innovation such as AirBnb, Amazon and Google « New to this edition: material on the culture and mindset challenges of shifting at scale from linear to agile working, using data effectively in organizational and high-velocity decision-making and agile approaches in multidisciplinary teams

Building the Agile TransformationthroughBusinessDigital

Professional

Human

Author Information Neil Perkin is a writer, keynote speaker and founder of Only Dead Fish, a consultancy which specialises in digital strategy, transformation and agility. Based in West Sussex, UK, he has worked with organizations including Vodafone, GSK, Samsung, the UK Government and The Financial Times, and curates the quarterly series of Firestarters thought leadership events for Google UK. Peter Abraham is an author, practitioner and co-founder of weareCrank, which uses data to drive decision making and driving growth through the intersection of data, user experience and channel optimization. Based in Surrey, UK, he has over 20 years’ experience of helping global companies define their digital strategy and build digital centres of excellence to support true agility in business. Edition: 2 Date: 03/06/2021 Price: £19.99 9781789666533 Ebook: 9781789666540 Pages: 336 Format (mm): 235x155 Category: Subject: Management Resources,

Organizational Development and Coaching

HowDescriptioncanbusinesses transform to achieve competitive advantage in a digital-enabled world?

ISBN

Product

This book « Enables readers to understand Appreciative Inquiry (AI) conversational techniques and implement them for change within their organizations « Explores the difference that AI can make through in-depth case studies from BP Castrol Marine, Nokia and Orbseal Technology Center « New to this edition: chapters on how positive psychology can enhance appreciative practice and appreciative coaching « Teaches new ways of authentically engaging with others in business to facilitate positive change

188 Change Management Table of Contents 1 Organizations as machines, workers as cogs and management as a control process 2 An alternative approach: organizations as living human systems 3 The development of conversational approaches to organizational change 4 Appreciative Inquiry: how do you do it? 5

The power of the question The power of conversation Extending practice: working with story in organizations practice: working with appreciative coaching How Positive Psychology enhances Appreciative Inquiry Developing conversationalyourpractice Becoming an conversationalappreciativepractitioner How to AppreciativeintroduceInquiry and related approaches to your organization Case study: using Appreciative Inquiry at BP Castrol Marine 14 Case study: revitalizing corporate values in Nokia 15 Case study: World Café enabling strategic change at the American Society for Quality 16 Case study: transformingrapidlyconflict into co-action at a South African coal mine 17 Case study: AppreciativeapplyingInquiry to deliver strategic change at Orbseal Technology Center

Description Appreciative Inquiry (AI) is a widely recognised process for engaging people in organizational development and change management. Based on conversational practice, it is a particular way of asking questions, fostering relationships and increasing an organization’s capacity for collaboration and change. It focuses on building organizations around what works, rather than trying to fix what doesn’t, and acknowledges the contribution of individuals in increasing trust and organizational alignment and effectiveness. Appreciative Inquiry for Change Management studies AI in depth, identifying what makes it work and how to implement it to improve performance within the business.

Author Information Sarah Lewis is an Associated Fellow of the British Psychological Society, a Principal member of the Association of Business Psychologists, and the owner of Appreciating Change, where she works as a facilitator and consultant. Jonathan Passmore is an award-winning professor of psychology with an international reputation for his work in coaching, change and leadership. He is managing director of Embrion and consults and speaks at conferences across the world. Stefan Cantore is the Principal Teaching Fellow in Organizational Behaviour and HRM and the Director for the MSc in Organizational Change Management at the University of Southampton. He is an experienced leadership and organizational development consultant. AI 2 Date: 03/09/2016 £32.99 9780749477912 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477929 304 Format (mm): 165x120 Management

Appreciative Inquiry for Change Management explains the skills, perspectives and approaches needed for successful AI, and demonstrates how a practical conversational approach can be applied to organizational challenges in times of change. Case studies from organizations that have already integrated AI into their change management practice, including Nokia and BP, reveal why the processes are valuable and how to promote, create and generate such conversations in other organizations. Written in jargon-free language, this second edition now includes chapters on how positive psychology can enhance appreciative practice and appreciative coaching, making it an essential resource for anyone looking to implement AI in their organization.

Price:

Pages:

ManagementInquiryAppreciativeforChange Using

to Facilitate Organizational Edition:Development

ISBN Paperback:

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

8 Extending

Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Change

Introduction 1 Leading cultural change. Theoretical perspectives Cultural change management Organization development Cultural change literature A theory of culture Cultural management as a form of control Leadership as a cultural variable Leadership and the management of meaning Language as a cultural process Ethnography as a tool for cultural change Cultural and strategic tensions. When theory meets practice The client and its problem Change technologies What did the people think? Reflective learning 14 Closing thoughts This book « Helps readers to lead a successful cultural change intervention within their organizations « Guides the reader towards achieving sustained competitive advantage through organizational change « Provides a practical framework for the implementation and evaluation of cultural change « Enables managers to communicate cultural change successfully to their stakeholders « Includes a longitudinal case study of Cordia, a public-sector organization transitioning into an LLP, to enhance learning and understanding Description

Dr David Potter is the founder of The Cultural Change Company, which specializes in enabling cultural change interventions. He is a qualified NLP Practitioner and holds both an MBA and a PhD specialising in strategy design and cultural change dynamics. He frequently teaches and presents to students on MBA and Executive courses on the topic of cultural change, including at Adam Smith Business School University of Glasgow, University of St Andrews Business School, Glasgow Caledonian University and Glasgow University Business School.

Author Information Professor James McCalman, formerly MD of Sotheby’s Institute of Art, is currently the Head of the Centre for Strategy and Leadership at the University of Portsmouth. He has previously enjoyed roles as MBA Director at the Universities of Glasgow and Strathclyde as well as at Ashridge Business School, before moving to senior leadership roles in the private and charitable sectors.

Leading Cultural Change is a unique text, rooted in behavioural sciences, which explores the topic as an organizational necessity to achieving sustained competitive advantage.

Leading Cultural Change Edition: 1 Date: 03/05/2015 Price: £42.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473037 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473044 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Change Management Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

189 Change Management Table of Contents

With coverage of the major theories and concepts alongside diagnostic tools and a practical framework for implementation, Leading Cultural Change will help the reader analyse and diagnose their current organizational culture, become aware of the key challenges and how to overcome them and learn how to adapt their leadership style, ensuring they are fit to lead a cultural change programme. Taking in core topics such as change context, language and dialogue as a key cultural process and the change team process, it uses a longitudinal case study of Cordia, a public sector organization transitioning into an LLP, to enhance learning and understanding.

The Next Rules of Work Edition: 1 Date: 03/08/2021 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398601635 ISBN Ebook: 9781398601642 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 235x165 Product Category: Professional/General Subject: Change Management Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

As traditional jobs give way to new work roles and software and robots perform the repetitive tasks formerly done by humans, the work of today is no longer guaranteed to be here tomorrow. The Next Rules of Work helps leaders understand why traditional notions about work inhibit the organization’s ability to address new problems and how they can successfully equip their organizations to manage constant change. By first developing a new mindset to help themselves and their teams become more agile, leaders can then co-create the organization’s “next mindset” by answering five key questions that help them establish constantly adaptive strategies. Finally, leaders develop agile learning practices to ensure that workers will continually have the skillsets and toolsets they need to solve organizational problems today.

Author Information Gary A. Bolles is based in San Francisco, California and is the Chair for the Future of Work with Singularity University and a partner in strategy consulting firm Charette, LLC. A globally recognized expert on the future of work, he consults with C-suite leaders of global companies, labor and education leaders from Brazil to Canada, and global non-profits. He is the co-founder of eParachute.com, inspired by his father’s bestselling book What Color Is Your Parachute?, and visiting lecturer to a variety of school systems, including Isha Vidhya in India, and a regular guest lecturer for Gartner.

190 Change Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 Rules 1 The Old Rules of Work 2 The Next Rules of Work 2 Mindset 3 Your Organization’s Culture Is Its Mindset 4 The Problem-Solving Mindset of Workers and Teams 3 Skillset 5 The Skills of OrganizationsNext 6 The Skills of Tomorrow for Workers and Teams - PACE 4 Toolset 7 The Next Toolset for Organizations 8 The Next Toolset for Workers and Teams 9 Conclusion - The Future We All Want This book « Includes exercises to help leaders create an organization mindset that can continually adapt its strategy and execution « Outlines the five questions that individuals and organizations need to answer to align around strategic goals « Helps individuals identify their “superpower” skills, which are those reflecting their strengths and are most needed to solve organizational problems « Includes global examples drawn from the author’s work with Itau (Brazil), British Telecom, Emirates Airlines, NetHope (Jordan), Adecco, SwissRe, Novartis (Switzerland), and the governments of Chile, Tunisia and New Zealand Organizations,Descriptionmanagers and workers still have an Industrial Era mindset towards work.

By redefining the fundamental nature of work, teams and the organization, The Next Rules of Work goes beyond offering advice and predictions and provides organizational leaders with a guide to create truly agile organizations that can respond to perpetual change.

How can leaders guide individuals and organizations to solve the increasingly complex work challenges of tomorrow?

ISBN Paperback:

Product

EngagementEmployee A Practical Introduction Edition:

Author Information Emma Bridger is an award-winning employee engagement specialist and Director of People Lab, an employee engagement consultancy that works with high-profile clients worldwide. Based in Brighton, UK, she has designed and developed the CIPD range of public and inhouse employee engagement courses and is a regular conference speaker. She contributed to the UK Government Review Engaging for Success and is a member of the Engage for Success movement as part of its “guru group” In 2021 she was named as one of the Most Influential HR Thinkers by HR Magazine 3 Date: 03/05/2022 Price: £19.99 9781398605145 ISBN Ebook: 9781398605152 264 Format (mm): 234x156 Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Employee Engagement Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Pages:

« Is part of the CIPD-endorsed HR Fundamentals series of succinct, practical guides for those in the early stages of HR

191 Employee Engagement Table of Contents Introduction 1 What is engagement?employee 2 Does engagement matter? 3 Developing your employee engagement strategy 4 How it works 5 Employee engagement: How do you do it? 6 Employee engagement tools and techniques 7 Planning and action 8 Measuring engagement 9 The future of employee engagement

This book « Provides practical tools, assessments and real-life examples from organizations for developing and measuring an effective strategy for engaging employees Features examples and case studies from organizations such as Capital One, EDF Energy and Marks & Spencer « New to this edition: exploration of engagement strategies for the new world of work; why wellbeing, empathy and human connection are essential for engagement and how to create strategies that are inclusive of all employees Online resources: downloadable templates and tools to be used in practice, including selfassessment questionnaires

This updated third edition presents engagement strategies that account for recent workplace developments, from remote working to creating psychological safety. It also includes updates on the evolving technology trends that impact engagement and guidance on how to create strategies that are inclusive of all employees. With examples and case studies from organizations such as AXA PPP Healthcare, EDF Energy and Marks & Spencer, Employee Engagement is essential reading for HR students and professionals. Online supporting resources include diagnostic tools, templates and additional best-practice case studies.

HowDescriptioncanIcreate engagement strategies that will empower employees to succeed? This book offers a practical resource for developing an effective engagement strategy aligned to business objectives. An engaged workforce is essential to the performance and success of any organization. Featuring practical tools and templates, Employee Engagement provides comprehensive coverage of all stages of the engagement process, from planning initiatives to building and measuring their success.

The HR Fundamentals are a series of succinct, practical guides for students and those in the early stages of their HR careers, endorsed by the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD).

Change and transformation –Understanding the differences for effective communicationemployee 10

Table of Contents 1 Making the case for employee communications – Understanding the value leading practitioners add 2 Conducting your own employee communications audit – Tools and tips from experts 3 Setting objectives –Considerations and templates that work based on real life examples 4 Understanding your audience – Building a realistic profile of your workforce and how to use it 5 Defining your messages –Insights from pros on why it matters, how to define them, get them agreed and stick to them 6 Channel choices for employee communications – What to consider when choosing and using methods 7 Line managers communicatorsas– How to help them add the most value 8 Making it happen –Overcoming obstacles and project management when implementing communicationsemployee 9

The Changing Nature of Work and the Workplace 11

Listening and Employee Voice 12 Communicating in tough times – Preparing leaders for delivering tough messages 13 Is it working? – Evaluation and measurement of an employee communication strategy that adds value 14 Communicating on purpose – Helping employees find meaning in the modern workplace

192 Employee Engagement

ISBN

Pages:

Successful CommunicationsEmployee A Practitioner’s Guide to Tools, Models and Best Practice for Internal Edition:Communication2 Date:

Successful Employee Communications delivers an easy-to-follow framework for delivering engaging communication strategies that work. Written by leading PR and internal communications experts, it shares insights and lessons from global brands including Unilever, John Lewis, HSBC and the BBC.

Price:

Author Information Sue Dewhurst, based in Shropshire, UK, spent 20 years working as a senior internal communicator and for the past decade focusing on learning and development, serving as an internal communications trainer and coach. Her models and frameworks are used in organizations worldwide. Liam FitzPatrick, based in Hertfordshire, UK, is experienced in change management, PR and internal communications in-house and for major consultancies. He lectures on developing teams, research, and planning, and has served as an external examiner at UK universities. He is the co-author of Internal Communications, also published by Kogan Page. 03/04/2022 £29.99 9781398604483 Ebook: 9781398604575 328 Format (mm): 234x156 Supplementary Text/

This book « Delivers an essential and easy-to-follow framework for delivering engaging communication strategies including the transition to flexible working « Advises how to communicate change effectively and bring clarity and stability to difficult situations, with lessons learned from the Covid-19 crisis « Includes case studies from global companies including Unilever, John Lewis, HSBC, Volvo Group and the BBC « New to this edition: chapters on Generation Z in the workplace, and the impact of remote working, and new material on the responsibility of employers to assure wellbeing, diversity, and inclusion CommunicatingDescriptioneffectively is crucial to improving employee engagement, organizational culture, and performance. Using the easy-to-follow methodology presented in this book, learn how to communicate efficiently and bring stability and clarity to all situations, including diversity, inclusion and remote working.

Now updated with the latest developments, this second edition of Successful Employee Communications contains new chapters on Generation Z in the workplace and outlines how employers can assure wellbeing, diversity and inclusion. Focusing on the new world of work, this new edition also explores employee communications with remote working. This is an essential guide for anyone responsible for managing communications around employee engagement, motivation, retention and change management in the new world of work.

ISBN Paperback:

Product Category:

Professional Subject: Employee Engagement Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Employee Engagement Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Hema Crockett is an award-winning HR professional and the co-founder of High Performanceology. Prior to this she led the Total Rewards programme for LPL Financial and an HR Executive for Renovate America. Based in San Diego, California, she has also worked with Biotechnology companies and the US State Department. where Employees Thrive Edition: 1 Date: 03/02/2021 Price: £22.99 ISBN 9781789667219 ISBN Ebook: 9781789667226 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 234x156 Subject:

Product Category: Professional

CulturesOrganizationalExceptionalDesigning How to Develop Companies

For a company to outperform the competition and achieve sustainable business growth, it needs a high performing, engaged and committed workforce with the skills the business needs both now and in the future. Attracting, motivating and retaining top talent can’t be done simply by attaching individual benefits to specific job roles. To be effective, companies need to build an exceptional company culture where people want to work and that allows them to develop and perform to their full potential.

With practical examples, tips and advice throughout , this is crucial reading for anyone needing to build a culture that attracts the very best talent and achieve sustainable business growth.

193 Employee Engagement Table of Contents Introduction – C is for conscious 1 What is organizational culture? 2 Why top-performing cultures don’t happen by accident 3 Organizational structure 4 Identifying and defining core values 5 Skills for now and the future 6 Attracting and retaining the right talent 7 Engagement and motivation 8 Total Rewards 9 Diversity, inclusion, and belonging 10 Moving to action This book « Shows how to create a structure that leverages peoples’ strengths allowing them to grow and develop « Includes assessments to define your organization’s core values and build a company culture around them « Explainshow to implement a strategic workforce plan that leverages the changing talent landscape « Shows how to deconstruct existing company cultures that are having negative business effects and rebuild them for success « Shows how to identify what competencies will be needed and how to hire for current and future success WINNER:DescriptionNonfiction

Designing Exceptional Organizational Cultures provides guidance on all elements of building a top performing culture including how to identify and define core company values and embed them throughout policies, processes and behaviours as well as how to create an organizational structure that leverages employees’ strengths for optimum performance. It also covers how to assess what roles the business needs, how to recruit for future success and make the most of non-traditional hires as well as covering employee engagement, motivation, reward, diversity and Learning and Development (L&D).

Designing Exceptional Organizational Cultures is a practical guide for HR and OD professionals which explains how to proactively design, build and foster a culture that creates employee and business success.

Authors Association Book Awards Gold Award 2021

Author Information Jamie Jacobs is the co-founder of High Performanceology. For over 20 years she has built high-performing organizations and teams across the technology, financial services and hospitality industries as a HR and culture executive. Based in San Diego, California, she is President of the National Human Resources Association and a Professor at University of Southern California.

Paperback:

Strategic CommunicationInternal How to Build Employee Engagement and Edition:Performance

Strategic Internal Communication shows how to design and implement a strategy which will lead to engaged and motivated staff, increased productivity and consequently improved business performance.

Format

Supported by examples and case studies from the author’s own experience, Strategic Internal Communication is an indispensable guide to creating an integrated and collaborative culture which will take your organization to the next level of success.

This fully updated 2nd edition of Strategic Internal Communication includes new information on how to use Dialogue Box during times of transition and organizational change. It also gives advice on how to manage difficult conversations and avoid damaging miscommunication and misinterpretation.

ISBN Paperback:

PreviouslyDescriptionrestricted to cascading information and managing day-to-day conversations, internal communication is now essential to empowering employees to deliver business strategy.

The book uses the author’s own Dialogue Box tool designed to help companies explore more thoroughly what kinds of conversations they need to have with employees to address internal and cultural challenges. It helps transform organizations into open and transparent communities to ensure that entire workforces are committed to the overall business vision.

Product Category: Professional Subject: Employee Engagement Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Date:

Price:

« New to this edition: Specific guidance on how to use the Dialogue Box tool to communicate organizational restructures more successfully and avoid misunderstandings among employees

194 Employee Engagement Table of Contents Introduction 1 The New Organizational Triangle –EngagementCommunications,InternalEmployeeandHR 2 Culture Shock – Corporate Culture Does Not Exist 3 Communicating Through Change, Changing Through Communication 4 Dialogue and the Digital World 5 Zone 1 – Intelligence – How Organizations and People Think 6 Zone 2 – Emotion – How Organizations and People Feel 7 Zone 3 – Interpretation – How Organizations and People Understand 8 Zone 4 – Narrative – How Organizations and People Agree (or Disagree!) 9 The End Zone – Ensuring Effective Dialogue – How Organizations and People Talk 10 Using the Dialogue Box This book « Helps improve employee engagement and performance by ensuring business goals are effectively communicated to staff « Combines theory and practice - including case studies from the author’s own experience - for confidently designing and implementing a strategic approach to internal communications

Author Information Dr David Cowan is a visiting scholar in the Communications Department at Boston College, USA. He has worked with a variety of clients, including SABIC, Honeywell Aerospace, SAP, Saudi Aramco, HewlettPackard, and has taught the Dialogue Box to over 600 participants in America, Britain, China, Netherlands, India, Saudi Arabia, Singapore and South Korea. He is former Global Head of Internal Communications at ArcelorMittal and has worked at the World Bank and as a finance and technology journalist. He holds degrees from the University of Oxford and the University of St Andrews, where he earned his PhD. 2 03/06/2017 £36.99 9780749478650 Ebook: 9780749478667 232 (mm): 235x155

ISBN

Pages:

Human Experience at Work covers what human experience is, the benefits for the organization, the benefits for employees, how to make it part of a talent management and organizational development strategy and how to leverage it. There is also coverage of how focusing on people and allowing them to be themselves at work creates a more diverse and inclusive work environment. Supported by case studies, insights, and examples from companies including GSK, Ford, IKEA, Fotile, Grenade, Huel, and Moneypenny.

This book Uses original research to show the performance and wellbeing benefits of a human-centric approach to how to focus on employees as people rather than a commodity order to attract, engage and retain the best talent Provides guidance on how to embed a people-focused approach to employee practices and processes to improve business performance case studies from global organizations including GSK, Ford, IKEA, Fotile, Grenade, Huel, Moneypenny

and

TheDescriptiononlywayfor

« Includes

HR professionals to ensure sustainable top performance from their workforce is by taking a people-focused approach to their employees.

To outperform their competitors, businesses need happy, engaged and committed employees performing to their full potential. Investing in new technologies or embracing people analytics won’t achieve this but a people-focused approach will. It not only improves staff engagement, productivity and wellbeing but also secures the benefits for the business with Deloitte reporting in 2019 that ‘organizations focusing on human experience are twice as likely to outperform their peers in revenue growth over a three-year period.’ Human Experience at Work is a practical guide for HR professionals and those responsible for talent management which provides advice, examples and guidance on how to embed people-centred approach to staff development.

Author Information Ben Whitter is the CEO of HEX Organization and the Founder of the World Employee Experience Institute (WEEI). Ben Whitter was recognized by Thinkers50 as one of the top management thinkers in the world for 2021 for his ‘compelling’ EX research. Ben Whitter is best known for pioneering and popularizing the concept of employee experience worldwide. Based in Cheshire, UK, but operating globally, he shares his work & research through popular keynotes, advisory services, coaching and the global HEX Practitioner programme. In 2021 he was named as one of the Most Influential HR Thinkers by HR Magazine

Human Experience at Work Drive Performance with a Peoplefocused approach to Employees Edition: 1 Date: 03/05/2021 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789667639 ISBN Ebook: 9781789667646 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Professional Subject: Employee Engagement Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

work « Explains

195 Employee Engagement Table of Contents Introduction 1 The human experience 2 Why humanity demands a new model for work 3 Accelerating holistic, humancentred and experience-driven business 4 Delivering world-class human experiences at work 5 Reset, refresh and relaunch work around life 6 Evolving human experiences at work 7 Epilogue 8 References 9 Index

Author Information Professor Kathy Daniels is Associate Pro-Vice Chancellor (Engagement) at Aston University, Birmingham, UK. She teaches employment law and employee relations at both undergraduate and masters level and is the lead tutor for employment law programmes at the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD). She writes and presents extensively for a variety of organizations and law firms, specialising in employment law. She is a lay member of the Employment Tribunals, sitting in Birmingham. Prior to these appointments she was a senior HR manager in the manufacturing sector. 03/01/2022 £39.99 9781398603783 9781398603790 320 245x190

Format (mm):

Introduction to Employment Law Fundamentals for HR and Business Edition:Students 6 Date:

ISBN Paperback:

Pages:

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Employment Law & Relations Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Price:

196 Employment Law & Relations Table of Contents 1 The formation of employment law 2 The Employment Tribunals and the Employment Appeal Tribunal 3 Contract of employment 4 Atypical contracts and the variation of contracts 5 Individual protection rights 6 Forms of discrimination 7 Discrimination - the protected characteristics 8 Termination of employment 9 Redundancy and transfers of undertaking 10 Trade union legislation 11 Privacy and confidential information 12 Health and safety 13 Study skills in employment law 14 List of legislation referred to 15 List of cases cited 16 Useful websites This book « Provides students with no prior understanding or experience of the UK legal system with a thorough grounding in the key employment law concepts « Supports students’ learning with pedagogical features including chapter objectives, tasks, ‘explore further’ sections, key learning points, examples to work through and a dedicated study skills chapter « New to this edition: new material on the rights of agency workers, furlough practices, bereavement leave and the legal implications of Brexit « Online resources: lecture slides, case studies, annotated weblinks and an instructor’s manual « Covers key areas including employment contracts, protected characteristics, discrimination, tribunals and redundancy WrittenDescriptionspecifically for HR and business students, Introduction to Employment Law is a clear, accessible and jargon-free guide to UK employment law and how it applies in practice. This book covers all the essentials of employment law including employment contracts, discrimination, redundancy and employment tribunals. There is also expert guidance on key issues including shared parental leave, flexible working policies and protected characteristics. Fully revised with the latest cases and legal developments, this new edition includes coverage of the rights of agency workers, bereavement leave, furlough practices and the legal implications of Brexit. This textbook doesn’t assume any prior knowledge of the UK legal system and equips students with the knowledge and skills that they need to take forward into the workplace.

Packed with pedagogical features to consolidate learning including tasks, examples, explore further sections and key learning points as well as a dedicated study skills chapter covering employment law assignments and exams, Introduction to Employment Law is essential reading for all students studying the CIPD Level 5 Intermediate module in employment law. It is also an accessible introduction for Level 7 students and those on undergraduate and postgraduate business courses needing a thorough grounding in employment law. Online resources include lecture slides, case studies, annotated weblinks and an instructor’s manual.

ISBN Ebook:

« Is part of the CIPD-endorsed HR Fundamentals series of succinct, practical guides for those in the early stages of HR

Author Information Elizabeth Aylott has over 15 years’ experience as an HR specialist and lecturer in areas of Employee Relations and Employment Law. After a career in HR both in industry and the charitable sector, she joined the Hampshire Business School where she lectured on CIPD programmes at both undergraduate and postgraduate level. She is based in Surrey, UK. Practical Introduction The Essentials Edition: 3 Date: 03/05/2022

Employment Law A

Subject: Employment

and

practice «

197 Employment Law & Relations Table of Contents Introduction 1 Fundamentals 1 What is employment law? 2 The importance of employment law 3 Employment law and strategy 2 In practice 4 How it works 5 How you do it 6 Planning and action 7 Measurement 8 Conclusions and Government changes to employment law

Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398603950 ISBN Ebook: 9781398603967 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Category: Textbook Law & Resources, Organizational Development Coaching

This book Builds knowledge in the core areas of employment law, including immigration, contracts, discrimination, equal pay and redundancy Features practical tools, checklists, case studies and real-life examples to help apply the knowledge in New to this edition: new material on the changeability of the law, family-friendly case law and out-of-court settlements, as well as updated case studies throughout « Online resources: templates, forms and checklists including settlement offers, person specifications, appraisal forms, job induction checklists, preparation checklists for Employment Tribunals, additional references and links to podcasts

The HR Fundamentals are a series of succinct, practical guides for students and those in the early stages of their HR careers, endorsed by the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD).

TheDescriptionupdatedthird edition of Employment Law is a clear and practical guide to understanding the complex, important system that regulates the relationship between employers and employees in the UK.

Understanding and applying the law effectively at work is essential for organizations. Employment Law offers a complete overview of the core components that form the interactions between an organization, its employees and the HR function. Featuring practical tools, checklists, case studies and real-life examples, it builds legal knowledge in key areas including recruitment, contracts, discrimination, equal pay, health and safety and managing the end of the employment relationship. This fully updated third edition of Employment Law includes the latest developments and changes in law and HR perspectives. It contains new material on the changeability of the law, equal pay and parental leave, supported by updated case studies and online resources.

Relations Human

Product

Employment

Human

and

This book « Covers how employment law relates to all the key functions of HR including recruitment and selection, discrimination, health and safety, parental rights and redundancies « New to this edition: Up to date coverage of Brexit and new discussion of zero-hours contracts, shared parental leave and migrant workers’ rights « Online resources: lecturer guide, powerpoint slides and additional case studies « Is a CIPD Level 7 textbook mapped to the CIPD qualifications and the CIPD Profession Map 2.0

This new edition of Employment Law is completely up to date with the latest cases and legislation, including zero hours contracts, migrant workers’ rights, shared parental leave and Brexit and provides an up-to-date analysis of anti-discrimination law, the national living wage and the ‘Transfer of Undertakings (Protection of Employment) Regulations 2006’ (TUPE). Online resources include a lecturer guide, powerpoint slides and extra case studies to support learning and enable students to apply the theory in practice.

198 Employment Law & Relations Table of Contents 1 The sources and institutions of employment law 2 Formation of the contract of employment (1) – the sources of terms 3 Formation of the contract of employment (2) – implied terms of law 4 Recruitment and selection 5 Pay issues 6 Discrimination against employees (1) 7 Discrimination (2) – lawful discrimination, vicarious liability, burden of proof, enforcement and equality of terms 8 Parental rights 9 Health and safety at work 10 The regulation of working time 11 Variation, breach and termination of the contract of employment at common law 12 Unfair dismissal (1) –exclusions and the meaning of dismissal 13 Unfair dismissal (2) –potentially fair reasons and the concept of reasonableness 14 Redundancy 15 Unfair dismissal and redundancy claims 16 Continuity of employment and transfers of undertakings 17 Information and consultation 18 Trade unions and collective bargaining 19 Glossary 20 Index

TheDescriptionmostup-to-date guide on UK employment law available for CIPD and HR students.

Employment Law is the core textbook for the CIPD Level 7 Employment Law module. It takes the reader step-by-step through everything that they need to know, including the formation of the Contract of Employment, discrimination, health and safety in the workplace, unfair dismissal and Easyredundancy.toread and navigate, and full of case studies and useful examples that encourage deeper thinking, this fully updated 15th edition provides a thorough theoretical grounding in employment law that can be applied in practice.

Employment Law A Practical Introduction The Essentials Edition: 15 Date: 03/11/2019 Price: £47.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749493141 ISBN Ebook: 9780749493158 Pages: 456 Format (mm): 245x190 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Law & Relations Resources, Organizational Development Coaching

Author Information David Lewis is Professor of Employment Law in the Law School at Middlesex University, UK. Malcolm Sargeant was Professor of Labour Law in the Business School at Middlesex University, UK.

RelationsEmploymentManaging

This book « Provides a thorough and up-to-date grounding in the concepts and processes of employment relations as well as coverage of the legal context « New to this edition: brand new content on workers in the gig economy, the need for greater transparency in the employer-employee relationship and how to support and encourage diversity in the workplace « Online resources: lecturer guides, lecture slides, sample essay questions and additional case studies for students and lecturers and annotated web links « Covers managing conflict, workplace grievances, employee discipline and how to use mediation to resolve conflict Description Employment relations is concerned with the relationship between employees and their employers and is one of the most important aspects of an HR role. Managing Employment Relations will give students a thorough grounding in the processes, context and practical application of employment relations and give them the knowledge and skills they need for a successful career in HR.

Covering everything from the legal aspects of employment relations, essential policies, strategies and the changing social context to conflict resolution, mediation, employee engagement and workplace discipline, Managing Employment Relations is an indispensable guide. With brand new content on gig economy workers, supporting diversity in the workplace, individual and group policies and the need for greater transparency in the employer-employee relationship, this book is a comprehensive guide to the theory and practice of employment relations. Mapped to the CIPD Level 7 module in employment relations and full of case studies and exercises to help students understand the practical application of the core topics, this is an essential textbook for postgraduate HR students and practitioners in an employment relations role. Online resources include a lecturer guide, lecture slides, sample essay questions and additional case studies for students and lecturers as well as annotated weblinks.

Author Information Tony Bennett is a Senior Lecturer at Sheffield Business School, Sheffield Hallam University, UK and a Visiting Fellow at the Institute for Research on Organizations, Work and Employment at the University of Central Lancashire, UK. Richard Saundry is a Professor of HRM and Employment Relations at the University of Sheffield, UK. Virginia Fisher is a Senior Lecturer at the University of Exeter Business School, Exeter, UK. Edition: 7 Date: 03/02/2020 Price: £47.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789661453 ISBN Ebook: 9781789661460 Pages: 472 Format (mm): 240x185 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Employment Law & Relations Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

199 Employment Law & Relations Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 The concepts and processes of employment relations 3 The context of employment relations 4 Employment relations and the law 5 The global environment 6 Employment relations strategies, policies and change 7 Employee engagement 8 Managing employment relations 9 Employee representation 10 Employee involvement and participation 11 Managing workplace conflict 12 Managing workplace discipline 13 Managing grievancesemployee 14 Managing redundancy 15 The role of mediation in conflict resolution 16 Conclusion – Thoughts for the future

RelationsEmployment

A Critical and International Approach Edition: 1 Date: 03/02/2011 Price: £47.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781843982685 ISBN Ebook: 9781843983255 Pages: 392 Format (mm): 248x190 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Employment Law & Relations Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Drawing on the latest research, Employment Relations is a key text for anyone studying the CIPD Level 7 Advanced module Managing Employment Relations as well as all those looking to expand their knowledge and understanding in this area. Covering both the conceptual debates and contextual factors relating to employment relations as well as key management interventions, this is invaluable reading for anyone looking to understand both the theory and practice of employment relations.

200 Employment Law & Relations Table of Contents Introduction 1 Conceptual Debates and Contextual Factors 1 The Main Players in Employment Relations - Trade Unions, Employers, and the State 2 Theories of Employment Relations 3 Employment Relations and Human Resource Management 4 Local, National and Global Effects on the Practice of Employment Relations 5 Power and Authority 2 Management Interventions in Employment Relations 6 Voice 7 Employee Engagement 8 Pay and Reward 9 Discrimination, Difference and Diversity 10 Discipline and Grievance 11 Conflict and Dispute Resolution 12 Downsizing and Redundancy 13 Conclusion: The Relevance of Employment Relations and Comparative Employment Relations This book « Covers both the conceptual debates and functional areas of employment relations « Considers the local, national and global effects on the practice of employment relations « Online resources: lecturer guides, PowerPoint slides and additional cases as well as annotated web links and further reading for students

With coverage of the main players in employment relations - Trade Unions, Employers and the Stateand critical discussion of the local, national and global effects on employment relations, Employment Relations provides a thorough grounding in the international context of employment relations. With comprehensive consideration of key workplace issues including employee engagement, discrimination, conflict, downsizing and redundancies, this is ideal reading for students and practitioners alike. Packed with exercises, examples and case studies, this book allows readers to take a critical approach to this crucial topic. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual, lecture slides, additional cases, annotated web links and further reading.

Author Information Pauline Dibben is Senior Lecturer in Employment Relations at the University of Sheffield, UK. Gilton Klerck is Professor of Sociology at Rhodes University, South Africa. Geoffrey Wood is Professor in Human Resource Management at the University of Sheffield, UK.

Description

Author Information Elizabeth Aylott is an experienced HR specialist and lecturer in the areas of employee relations and employment law. After a career in HR, both in industry and the charitable sector, she taught on CIPD programmes at all levels and lectured on HRM and business degree courses. She is also the author of Employment Law, published by Kogan Page. She is based in Surrey, UK. Practical Introduction Edition: 3 Date: 03/05/2022 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398604834 ISBN Ebook: 9781398604919 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Subject: Employment Law & Relations Resources,

Professional

Human

Employee Relations A

201 Employment Law & Relations Table of Contents 1 Fundamentals 1 What is Employee Relations? 2 The importance of Employee Relations 3 Employee Relations and strategy 2 In practice 4 Employee Relations in practice 5 Planning and action 6 Measurement 7 Conclusion This book « Provides practical tools, assessments and real-life examples including from Amazon and HSBC for planning, implementing and managing employee relations « Shows how to align employee relations strategies to broader organizational objectives and improve business performance « New to this edition: coverage of recent legislation changes relating to the new world of work, dispute resolution and deregulation; new and updated case studies on employee voice and industrial action « Online resources: templates, questionnaires and further tools for development of an effective employee relations strategy « Is part of the CIPD-endorsed HR Fundamentals series of succinct, practical guides for those in the early stages of HR

The third edition features updated material on recent legislation changes including employment status in the gig economy and deregulation as a result of new international relations. With updated guidance and examples covering employee voice and the virtual workplace, Employee Relations is a vital resource for HR practitioners and students alike. Online resources include questionnaires and templates to support the development of an effective employee relations strategy.

TheDescriptionthirdedition of Employee Relations is a practical guide to the principles and practice of fostering positive relationships with employees to develop their engagement and achieve business success. Covering key areas such as conflict and dispute resolution, redundancies, rights and ethics, this book equips you with the skills and knowledge to plan, build and assess employee relations in any type of organization. Practical diagnostic tools and real-life examples from organizations including HSBC and the UK Police Force show how these strategies can be applied in practice.

Organizational Development and Coaching

The HR Fundamentals are a series of succinct, practical guides for students and those in the early stages of their HR careers, endorsed by the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD).

ISBN Ebook:

DevelopmentLearningHandbookArmstrong’sofand A Guide to the Theory and Practice of Edition:L&D 1 Date: 03/11/2021 Price: £44.99 ISBN Paperback:

Pages: 344 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Learning & Development Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book « Covers blended, social, experiential and digital learning as well as learning analytics and how AI, augmented and virtual reality can be used to support learning Outlines the role and responsibilities of an L&D professional and the essential skills needed to succeed Examines the latest development in the area including micro learning, connected learning, personalised learning and learning experiences Online resources: Lecture slides, Lecturer manual, student manual Provides a thorough grounding in the theory of L&D including the components of L&D, the distinction between L&D and training and discussion of how people learn Features case studies and examples to put the theory in context, reflective questions to consolidate learning and further reading suggestions to encourage broad engagement with the topic

Supported by case studies and examples to put the theory in context, reflective exercises to consolidate learning and further reading suggestions to broaden knowledge and engagement with the topic, Armstrong’s Handbook of Learning and Development is crucial reading for academic success. The final part of the book includes additional aspects of L&D including apprenticeships, leadership development and personal and interpersonal skills development. Online resources include lecture slides for every chapter, a lecturer manual and student manual.

Armstrong’s Handbook of Learning and Development provides an essential grounding in L&D theory including the components of L&D, the distinction between L&D and training, the relationship of L&D to human resources and knowledge management as well as coverage of the role of an L&D practitioner. In addition, this book covers emerging areas of learning such as digital, social and workplace learning as well as some of the latest developments including micro, connected and personalized learning as well as earning experiences. There is also coverage of how to use AI, gamification and curation to support learning and how to host both online and offline learning events.

202 Learning & Development Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1 Fundamentals of learning and development 2 The basis of learning and development 3 The context of learning and development 4 Learning culture 5 Organizational learning and the learning organization 6 Individual learning 7 Learning and development strategy 8 The contribution of learning and development to organizational performance 9 Learning analytics 2 The responsibility for learning and development 10 The role of the learning and development function 11 The role of the line manager 3 The process of learning 12 The nature of learning 13 Approaches to learning and development 14 Learning and development techniques 4 Areas of learning 15 Workplace learning 16 Social learning 17 Digital learning 18 Training 5 Planning and delivering learning events 19 Identifying learning needs 20 Planning learning events 21 Managing learning events 22 Transferring learning 23 Evaluating learning events 6 Aspects of learning and development 24 Leadership and management development 25 Sales training 26 Apprenticeships 7 Conclusion 27 Learning and development trends and issues

ThisDescriptionbrand-newbook from HRM expert and bestselling author, Michael Armstrong, is an ideal companion for those studying learning and development (L&D) at third year undergraduate and postgraduate level as well as practitioners in L&D roles in the workplace.

Author Information Michael Armstrong is the UK’s bestselling author of HRM books. With over a million copies sold, his books have been translated into 21 languages. Based in London, he is managing partner of e-reward and was previously a chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD). He is the author of a number of other books on HR published by Kogan Page including Armstrong’s Handbook of Performance Management and Armstrong’s Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management. 9781398601888 9781398601895

This book « New to this edition: a new chapter on the role of an L&D practitioner, critical examination of apprenticeships and greater international coverage and case studies

David Hayden, Chartered FCIPD, is the L&D Digital Learning Portfolio Manager at the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD). He has been working with CIPD qualifications since 2007. Edition: 4 Date: 03/11/2019 Price: £47.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749498412 ISBN Ebook: 9780749498429 Pages: 352 Format (mm): 245x190 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Learning & Development Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

« Includes a ‘what next’ section in every chapter to extend learning in the subject area

Learning WorkplacePracticeDevelopmentandinthe

Author Information Kathy Beevers, Chartered FCIPD, is a qualified trainer, coach and author. She runs a learning and qualifications consultancy, Lightbulb Learning Ltd, and is also the Chief External Quality Advisor (CEQA) for CIPD. Andrew Rea, Affiliate MCIPD, is a trainer, coach and facilitator with a background in management. He works with a range of organisations, creating and facilitating L&D initiatives, and has contributed to several L&D textbooks.

« Is a core CIPD Level 3 textbook mapped to the CIPD qualifications and CIPD Profession Map 2.0 Description Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace is the ideal textbook for anyone studying CIPD L&D qualifications and apprenticeships at Level 3 or Level 5, as well as for practitioners new to an L&D role. It covers what is required of an L&D professional and how to meet and exceed these expectations, how to align L&D activity with organisational strategy and, crucially, how to identify learning needs and design effective L&D practice.

This new edition of Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace has been fully updated, reflecting the new CIPD Profession Map, and now has dedicated chapters on the different approaches to learning delivery, including face-to-face training and facilitation, technology-based learning, coaching, mentoring and social and collaborative learning. There is also expert guidance on learner engagement including insights from neuroscience and psychology, as well as advice on evaluating the impact of L&D. With case studies, activities and examples throughout, this new edition is an indispensable guide for students and new practitioners alike. Online supporting resources include lecture slides, annotated web links and self-test questions.

203 Learning & Development Table of Contents 1 How to use this book 2 The L&D professional 3 The organisational context 4 Identifying learning and development needs 5 Designing learning and development activities 6 Delivery - Face-to-face training and facilitation 7 Delivery - Using technology 8 Delivery - Coaching and mentoring 9 Delivery - Social and collaborative learning 10 Engaging learners 11 Evaluating impact

« Provides additional questions in every chapter which can be used by individuals to reflect on their learning or for further discussion with a group « Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides, annotated web links and self-test questions.

Description

204 Learning & Development Table of Contents 1 Understanding Organizational Development 2 The Role of Learning and Development in Talent Management 3 Developing Leadership and Management Capability 4 Using Facilitation Skills 5 Implementing Coaching and Mentoring 6 Evaluating Learning and Development in a Knowledge Economy

Author Information Eileen Arney is Teaching Director of Masters Programmes at The Open University Business School, UK. She is a Chartered Fellow of CIPD, has taught on level 7 CIPD programmes and has trained and practised as an executive coach. She has held senior civil servant posts including Assistant Director of National Police Training and has designed and delivered leadership programmes for senior managers in the UK and overseas.

This book « Provides up-to-date thinking on the issues and opportunities facing learning and development (L&D), including the role of L&D in talent attraction and retention Includes case studies and reflective questions alongside the knowledge and understanding required for the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD)’s intermediate level courses in learning and development « Arms the professional with the evidence for L&D’s transformational impact, showing how to link L&D to individual performance and organizational success Learning for Organizational Development presents how to design, deliver and evaluate effective learning and development (L&D) programmes. This definitive guide to L&D’s function in enhancing individual performance and organizational success is a core text for those studying for L&D qualifications such as the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) Intermediate level as well as a useful handbook for L&D professionals looking to further their understanding of the latest Completedevelopments.with case studies and reflective questions to aid comprehension, Learning for Organizational Development considers the strategic business function of L&D for communicating the vital contribution that it makes to both individual performance and organizational success. It explores the role of L&D in talent development, showing how to support line managers in developing their people to drive retention and attraction. It also addresses the importance of developing the leadership capability within the organization, and provides practical guidance and examples of what works.

Learning DevelopmentOrganizationalfor How to Design, Deliver and Evaluate Effective L&D Edition: 1 Date: 03/03/2017 Price: £36.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749477448 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477455 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Learning & Development Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

205 Learning & Development Table of Contents 1 Learning in the Never Normal 2 Learning Technologies and Ethics 3 Human-centric Innovation 4 Learning Competencies 5 Continuous Upskilling and Reskilling 6 Learning Strategy 7 Knowledge Gathering and Sharing 8 Hybrid Learning 9 Social learning 10 The Learning Landscape 11 Lean Learning 12 Team Learning 13 Curiosity and the Five Whys 14 Reverse Engineering and Experimentation 15 Learning Data and Analytics 16 Learning Innovation 17 Adaptive and Resilient Learning 18 Lifelong Learning This book « Explains why a learning strategy which encourages a culture of continuous learning is essential for success « Provides guidance on upskilling and reskilling a workforce in a collaborative and tech-enabled world « Shows how social learning, hybrid learning, knowledge sharing and identifying key moments of learning need each play a key role in an effective learning strategy « Explores lean learning, data analytics, learning technologies including artificial intelligence (AI) and the ethics of using these technologies « Includes case studies from Etihad Airways, Philips, Volvo and Canon BuildingDescriptionandsustaining an organization which is nimble, adaptable, resilient and future-proof is both complex and urgent. Only those with robust, flexible and innovative learning strategies will succeed.

The Learning Organization explains how to upskill and reskill a workforce continuously in an increasingly collaborative and tech-enabled world. Full of practical guidance and strategic advice, this book covers how to take a lifelong approach to learning in the organization and the competencies needed bfor this. It explains what to do when building a learning strategy and how social learning, hybrid learning and knowledge sharing each play a key role as well as how to identify key moments of learning need. This book also explores lean learning, data analytics, learning technologies including artificial intelligence (AI) and the ethics of using these technologies. It also demonstrates the value of reverse engineering and experimentation for learning and algorithmic business thinking. Most importantly, it provides guidance on how to build a learning culture and a learning ecosystem throughout the company..Supported by case studies from companies including Etihad Airways, Philips, Volvo and Canon, this is essential reading from a leading learning innovator who has helped global organizations to rethink their learning strategies to achieve sustained business growth.

Author Information Katja Schipperheijn is the Founder of Habit of Improvement, a consultancy which focuses on learning strategy and engagement in a connected world. She is also the Founder and CEO of sCooledu which is an educational platform for media literacy and digital social responsibility. Based between Antwerp, Belgium and Dubai, UAE, she is also an international keynote speaker and guest lecturer at Nyenrode Business University.

The Edition: 1 Date: 03/09/2022 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398607408 ISBN Ebook: 9781398607415 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Learning & Development Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

OrganizationLearning

« Has an easy to navigate structure that takes students step-by-step through developing the knowledge and skills required for professional practice, the context of learning and development and fully utilising data in order to build a business case for its value within an organisation

Author Information Jim Stewart is Professor of HRD at Liverpool Business School, UK. He is also Chief Examiner of Learning and Development for the CIPD as well as Visiting Panel Chair and External Moderator. Patricia Rogers is part of the Postgraduate Taught Strategy and Development Group responsible for the development of postgraduate taught strategies across Coventry University, UK. 1 Date: 03/01/2017 Price: £46.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781843984146 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984603 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 247x189 Textbook

Studying Learning and Development Context, Practice and Measurement Edition:

Written and edited by experts in the field with a wealth of experience in teaching, writing and examining, Studying Learning and Development is the first and only text to map the unit learning outcomes of the three core modules for the CIPD Level 5 Intermediate level qualification. Its broad coverage means that it is also ideal for any students studying Learning and Development as part of a wider HR or business degree and wanting to gain a deeper appreciation for the knowledge, skills and planning required for the success of its policies and activities in practice. The additional resources available online, including multiple choice questions for self-assessment, web links to further resources, extra case studies and a glossary of key terms, as well as lecturer slides, guides and text banks, will enhance learning of the text and ensure thorough grounding in the theory. There are also six ebooks available to support the CIPD Level 5 Studying Learning and Development optional modules.

206

Product Category:

Learning & Development

Subject: Learning & Development Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book « Is written and edited by experts with a wealth of experience in teaching, writing and examining in the field of Learning and Development

« Online resources: multiple-choice questions for self-assessment, web links, extra case studies and a glossary of key terms, as well as lecturer slides, guides and test banks

Description Studying Learning and Development is the essential textbook for anyone studying the field in order to further their professional development, and HR practitioners wishing to extend their understanding of its background and practical application. With a clear layout that is easy to navigate, it takes you step by step through developing the knowledge and skills required for professional practice, understanding the broader context of learning and development - including the influential factors on achieving strategic objectives and developing policies that suit your organisational needs - and fully utilising learning and development data in order to build a business case for its value within your organisation.

Author Information Peter Cureton is a former associate examiner for designing and delivering training with the CIPD. Jim Stewart is Professor of HRD at Liverpool Business School, UK. He is also Chief Examiner of Learning and Development for the CIPD as well as Visiting Panel Chair and External Moderator.

DeliveringDesigning, and Evaluating L&D Essentials for Practice Edition: 1 Date: 03/05/2014 Price: £47.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781843983606 ISBN Ebook: 9781843983699 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 246x190 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Learning & Development Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book « Mixes theory, case application and exercises to provide a comprehensive exploration of the topic « Includes a range of case studies from different countries to illustrate how key ideas and theories are operating in practice around the globe, and are accompanied by questions or activities for students « Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides and web links Description As the global economy has changed and thus organizations with it, more learning is delivered at and through work and individuals are encouraged to utilise the opportunities that advances in technology have brought to take charge of their own learning. Essential reading for the CIPD Level 7 Advanced postgraduate unit Designing, Delivering and Evaluating Learning and Development Provision, Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D critically examines the contextual factors impacting upon these activities in organizations. With case studies from the public, private and voluntary sectors as well as examples of international practice, the book helps to identify some of the challenges L&D professionals face in a range of environments. Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D is suitable not just for students working towards a CIPD Level 7 qualification, but also for those studying more general business and management degrees, as well as anyone who may have studied the subject previously and wishes to engage in continuous professional development with regard to this key HR practice. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual, lecture slides and web links.

Table of Contents Designing, Delivering and Evaluating Learning and Development (Peter Cureton and Jim Stewart) 2 Individual and Collective Learning (Clair Doloriert, Jim Stewart and Sally Sambrook) The External and Internal Context (Amanda Lee, Sophie Mills and Dalbir Sidhu) Establishing Learning Needs (Tricia Harrison and Randhir Auluck) 5 Designing InterventionsLearning(Crystal Zhang and Niki Kyriakidou) Delivering and Facilitating Learning (Michelle McLardy and Nigel O’Sullivan) 7 Evaluating Learning and Development (Marian O’Sullivan and Michael McFadden) 8 Acting Professionally and Ethically (Peter Cureton and Maureen Royce) 9 Themes and the Future of DDE (Jim Stewart and Peter Cureton)

207 Learning & Development

This book « Examines the importance of continuing professional development (CPD) and the methods that can be used to create and implement a CPD plan « New to this edition: increased coverage of the critical debate about issues in CPD, an outline of how to organize and encourage CPD and guidance on how senior members of the profession can benefit from CPD Online resources: instructor’s manual and lecture slides

Format

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Learning & Development Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

DevelopmentProfessionalContinuing Edition:

Description To maximise enjoyment of work and life requires a continual response to the changing world in which we live. Are you living to work or working to live? What would you like to be doing? We need to look within at our latent skills and abilities and explore ways of building on our current talents and developing new aspects of ourselves. Continuing Professional Development explores the importance of continuing professional development (CPD) and the different methods that can be used to analyse development needs and create and implement a CPD plan. It provides practical guidance and a theoretical overview of CPD, including examples and case studies.

This fully updated 2nd edition of Continuing Professional Development includes increased coverage of the critical debate about issues in CPD, outlines how to organize and encourage CPD and provides guidance on how senior members of the profession can use and benefit from CPD. Activities and selfdiagnostic tools, critical debates about issues and coverage of how to organize and encourage CPD all bring the topic to life for CIPD students undertaking the Professional Development Scheme as well as general readers seeking to encourage CPD in the workplace. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual and lecture slides.

Date:

208 Learning & Development Table of Contents 1 Exploring ProfessionalContinuingDevelopment 1 Clarifying ProfessionalContinuingDevelopment 2 Understanding Continuing Professional Development 2 Engaging in Continuing Professional Development 3 Identifying Development Needs 4 Prioritising Needs and Selecting Appropriate Activities 5 Undertaking Development Activities 6 Recording and Evaluating Development 7 Organisational Contribution to CPD 3 Consolidating Your CPD Achievements 8 Celebrating Success 9 Networking Your Future 10 Empowering Career Creativity

ISBN Paperback:

ISBN Ebook:

Pages:

Price:

Author Information David Megginson is a professor of HRD at Sheffield Hallam University, UK. He is on both the membership and education committees of the CIPD and the CPD Working Group. Vivien Whitaker is a lecturer, researcher and consultant at Sheffield Hallam University, UK. 2 03/01/2007 £34.99 9781843981664 9780749482503 176 (mm): 233x155

Development Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Neuroscience for Learning and Development also features insights from L&D practitioners who have applied these approaches. Readers will not only find new techniques they can implement straight away, but will also discover research that backs up what they are already doing well, enabling them to put convincing cases to budget holders.

4 The

Neuroscience for Learning and Development introduces the latest research and concepts, equipping L&D and training professionals with an understanding of the inner workings of the mind. Covering areas such as how to create effective learning environments, promoting motivation and how to make learning ‘stickier’ through the use of stories, the book offers practical tools and ideas that can be applied in a variety of contexts, from digital learning and in-person training sessions, to coaching conversations, to lectures and presentations.

Author Information Stella Collins MSc FITOL is co-founder and Chief Learning Officer at Stellar Labs, one of the Brain Ladies and the author of Neuroscience for Learning and Development She has a clear understanding of the challenges faced by organizations in upskilling and reskilling their people, especially with digital change being so high on the agenda. She and her team pragmatically apply principles from neuroscience and psychology to consult, design and build practical performance focused solutions with measurable ROI. She has trained thousands of learning professionals in brain friendly principles over more than 20 years in L&D. to and Psychology for Learning 2 Date: 03/08/2019 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749493264 ISBN Ebook: 9780749493271 Pages: 312 Format (mm): 235x157 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Subject: &

2 The

209 Learning & Development

Apply Neuroscience

This updated second edition contains new chapters on digital learning and on the importance of sleep, as well as updated wider content and new material on mindfulness, learning through your senses and the neuroscience of habits.

Learning

and Edition:Training

DevelopmentforNeuroscienceLearningand How

Improved

Preface Why neuroscience and learning are good companions science of your brain What to do when someone says ‘neuroscience says…’ science of learning Motivating learners from curiosity to persistence Use your sense: Getting information from the outside world and into your head Attention, learning and why Goldilocks deserves recognition Making learning meaningful and valuing intelligence Meaningful memories: From encoding to forgetting Testing, experimenting, habits and practice Review and reflect: Getting rid of the magic wand Stickier stories and food for thought Sleep and learning Your brain and digital learning The future is already with us The end of this journey and the start of more 17 Answers to questions in Chapter 9 18 Index This book « Provides practical tips and ideas underpinned by neuroscience on how to design and deliver effective L&D and training « Presents a scientific evidence base to help build a stronger business case to budget holders for L&D and training interventions « Contains examples from a range of international L&D practitioners who have applied such approaches in practice « New to this edition: new chapters on digital learning and the importance of rest and sleep to learning and deliver effective learning and development initiatives, it is essential to understand how our brains process and retain information.

InDescriptionordertodesign

Professional

Table of Contents

Learning Developmentand

A Practical Introduction Edition: 3 Date: 03/05/2022 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398605800 ISBN Ebook: 9781398605831 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Learning & Development Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

The HR Fundamentals are a series of succinct, practical guides for students and those in the early stages of their HR careers, endorsed by the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD).

« Is part of the CIPD-endorsed HR Fundamentals series of succinct, practical guides for those in the early stages of HR HowDescriptioncanlearning initiatives contribute to employee and organizational success? This is a practical introduction to the principles of designing and delivering effective training and L&D programmes.

Providing practical diagnostic tools, scenarios and case studies, Learning and Development demonstrates how to link learning to strategic business goals and explores both the benefits and complexities associated with L&D. It features guidance in essential areas including identifying L&D needs, selecting the most appropriate types of intervention and the processes of measurement and Thisevaluation.updated third edition of Learning and Development features a new chapter on designing learning interventions, covering the impact of virtual learning and communities of practice. There will also be guidance on making learning and development strategies accessible and inclusive for all employees, and using wellbeing as a measurement of effectiveness. Online resources include extended case studies, an annotated literature review and self-evaluation tools.

Author Information Rebecca Page-Tickell is Director of MBA programmes and Director of Education and Experience at the Royal Docks School of Business and Law, University of East London, UK. A Principal Practitioner with the Association for Business Psychology, she has a particular expertise in self-managed learning and providing coaching to senior managers and directors. She previously held a number of senior L&D and HR management positions across a variety of industries and in multinational corporations.

210 Learning & Development Table of Contents 1 Fundamentals of learning and development 1 Defining learning and development 2 The importance of learning and development 3 Learning and development, organization and human resource management (HRM) strategy 4 How learning and development works 2 In practice 5 How do you do it? 6 Design of learning and development interventions 7 Planning and action 8 Measurement 9 Conclusion This book « Features practical tools and assessments to build knowledge and skills to implement a successful L&D strategy « Includes real-life examples such as WhatsApp to show how strategies and technologies are applied in practice « New to this edition: chapter on the design of learning interventions; material on the impact of virtual learning, recent technological developments and accessibility in learning; case studies on learning through change and communities of practice « Online resources: video clips from L&D specialists, an annotated bibliography, extended case studies and self-evaluation materials

HowDescriptioncanIdevelop an effective workplace learning culture to drive employee and business success? This new edition of Workplace Learning provides the knowledge and tools to create an outstanding learning culture in the new world of work.

211 Learning & Development

Table of Contents

It’s no longer enough for Learning and Development professionals to only offer a catalogue of workplace learning courses: competing effectively in today’s business environment requires organizations and their employees to adapt and learn daily. Providing an evidence-based model for identifying key areas of focus and measuring success, Workplace Learning is a practical guide that shows how to build and embed a culture that continuously encourages and engages employees in learning and achieve business success.

The updated second edition features new material on organizational and self-determined learning, and case studies from Microsoft, Novartis and PwC. Packed with practical suggestions, tools and tips, Workplace Learning is an essential resource for establishing an outstanding continuous learning culture in all parts of the organization.

Introduction 1 Exploring the concepts of learning culture and learning organization 1 What is a learning culture? Where did learning culture come from? Senge and The Fifth Discipline 4 Bob Garratt and The Learning Organization 5 What are the core components of a learning culture? Case studies - Learning culture in action 6 Lubricating learning - A case study of the WD-40 Company 7 Taking the medicine - Novartis and curiosity 8 happy Ltd and HT2 - Learning culture in action 9 Dressing up a learning culture - Cotton On Group 3 Building a learning culture - A gyroscope for organizational effectiveness 10 Work and learning 11 Why technology is an essential component of a learning culture 12 What are the essential components of a learning culture? This book « Demonstrates the individual and company-wide benefits of building a culture of continuous workplace learning and examines the impact of recent changes to the workplace on learning and development « Provides an evidence-based model to enable Learning & Development professionals to identify the key learning needs of the organization and measure success « Includes case studies from companies who have successfully established a culture of continuous workplace learning including Microsoft and The Happy Company « New to this edition: a chapter on organizational learning and distinguishing self-determined and self-defined learning; new and updated case studies; a practical tool that allows companies to measure their current learning culture

Author Information Nigel Paine is a change-focused leader with a worldwide reputation and extensive experience in leadership and consultancy. Based in London, UK, he runs his own consultancy which focuses on leadership, creativity, innovation and e-learning, working with companies in Europe, Brazil, Australia and the US. A former Head of Training and Development at BBC, he is now an academic director and member of the international advisory board at the University of Pennsylvania, board member of Management Issues and a Masie Learning Fellow. He presents a monthly TV programme, Learning Now TV, co-presents From Scratch podcast and regularly writes articles for magazines and journals about development, technology and leadership. How to Build a Culture of Continuous Employee Development Edition: 2 Date: 03/10/2021 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398601505 ISBN Ebook: 9781398601512 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Professional Subject: Learning & Development Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Workplace Learning

212 Learning & Development Table of Contents 1 Learning experience design 2 Learning experience designers 3 Emotion, attention and motivation 4 Interface design 5 Text and graphics 6 Audio for learning 7 Video and animation 8 Engagement, questions and feedback 9 Scenarios and simulations 10 VR and AR 11 Games and gamification 12 Social learning 13 Transfer and practice 14 Workflow, curation and data

This book « Explains how to use emotion, attention, memory, engagement, enjoyment, transfer, practice and retention to create effective learning content and interactions Shows how to make evidence-based decisions when creating learning and development (L&D) content and initiatives to ensure that the learning makes a tangible difference to employees Includes practical examples and expert advice on how to design each aspect of learning content including audio, visual, text, graphics, simulations and both virtual and augmented reality Provides coverage of user experience (UX), design thinking and blended learning which can be applied to face-to-face, remote and digital learning « Contains a jargon-busting glossary to demystify learning experience terms and acronyms

With examples, tips, case studies and advice throughout, this is an invaluable book for anyone wanting to make an impact with their learning design and ensure knowledge, skills and performance improvement.

Price:

Learning Experience Design How to Create Effective Learning that Edition:Works 1 Date:

ISBN Paperback: 9781398602625 ISBN Ebook:

Pages: 320 Format (mm): 234x157 Product Category: Professional Subject: Learning & Development Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

HowDescriptioncanIcreate in-person learning that engages people? How can I build digital learning that is effective? How can I develop learning content that can be used remotely and ensure that the learning sticks? Learning Experience Design has the answers to all these questions and more.

The final part of the book covers design thinking, blended learning and discussion of LMSs (learning management systems), LXPs (learning experience platforms) and LRSs (learning record stores).

This book is a practical guide for all learning and development (L&D) professionals. It covers everything from what learning experience design (LXD) is, the role of the L&D professional in LXD, and what the main areas to consider when designing learning are including emotion, attention, memory, engagement, enjoyment, transfer, practice and learning retention. It includes practical advice for all areas of learning design including text, graphics, audio, visual, simulations, AR/VR, question and social design. There is also essential guidance on instructional design, UX (user experience) design and how to design effective learning analytics.

Author Information Donald Clark has over 30 years’ experience in online learning, simulations, virtual reality, mobile and artificial intelligence projects. He was a founding member of Epic Group plc and the Founder and CEO of Wildfire Learning. He is a frequent global speaker, blogger, advisor and researcher and is also a Visiting Professor at the University of Derby. 03/11/2021 £29.99 9781398602632

TheDescriptionskillsneeded in today’s business world are not the same as they were in the past. Therefore, upskilling, reskilling and developing staff has never been more important. However, classroom training isn’t the best way to achieve this with employees forgetting more than 70% of what they’ve been taught within just one day. Learning outside the workplace is social, digital and immediate and companies need to embrace this to achieve the productivity, performance and revenue benefits that come from effective learning.

The Learning and Development Handbook includes advice on how to embed social and digital learning, make the most of blended learning, adopt brain-friendly learning and design more effective learning content for improved employee engagement and performance. This book also provides guidance on how to identify learning needs in an organization, gather evidence to engage stakeholders and align L&D strategy with overall business strategy. There is also expert guidance on how to evaluate and measure the effectiveness of learning, where to find the data needed to support learning activity. Written by an L&D practitioner, for L&D practitioners, this book is packed full of tips, hints, tools and models that can be used to improve both employee and overall business performance in the immediate, middle-term and long-term future.

213 Learning & Development Table of Contents Introduction 1 Practical L&D Tips 1 Practical L&D – Getting Started 2 Strategy for L&D 3 Stakeholder engagement 4 Consultative L&D 5 Data and Evaluation 6 Social Learning 7 Digital Learning 8 Blending Learning 2 Frameworks 9 ICE –Communication,Information,Education 10 EPC –PermissionEnvironment,andCulture 11 The 3Rs –Resourced,Required,Referred 3 Strategies 12 Evolution or revolution 13 Reflective practice 14 Hold it lightly and celebrate success This book « Provides practical tips, tools and models to improve performance both immediately and for mid and long-term success « Shows how to embed digital and social learning into an organization’s L&D offering « Includes guidance on engaging stakeholders in learning and aligning L&D strategy with overall business strategy « Explains how to use neuroscience to deliver brain-friendly learning content for improved learning retention « Demonstrates how to measure and evaluate the effectiveness of learning and build these insights into future L&D decisions

The Learning and Development Handbook is a practical guide for L&D professionals wanting to move away from traditional classroom teaching but not sure where to start. Full of practical tips and advice, this is urgent reading for anyone in the learning profession.

The

Author Information Michelle Parry-Slater is an award-winning L&D professional with more than 20 years’ experience in the industry. She is the Founder and Director of Kairos Modern Learning, an L&D consultancy specializing in driving a shift from traditional courses to the best of digital, social and face-to-face workplace learning, working with clients such as the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD), Co-op and Duke of Edinburgh Awards. She is also the Lead Volunteer for L&D for Girlguiding UK and was listed as one of the Top 20 Corporate eLearning Movers and Shakers of 2018 by eLearning Industry. Learning and HandbookDevelopment Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching Edition: 1 Date: 03/02/2021 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789663327 ISBN Ebook: 9781789663334 Pages: 360 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Professional Subject: Learning & Development Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Author Donald Clark has over 30 years’ experience in online learning, simulations, virtual reality, mobile and artificial intelligence projects. He was a founding member of Epic Group plc and the Founder and CEO of Wildfire Learning. He is a frequent global speaker, blogger, advisor and researcher on AI in learning and is also a Professor at the University of Derby. 03/08/2020

Visiting

214 Learning & Development Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1 Homo technus 2 What is AI? 2 Teaching 3 Robot teacher fallacy 4 Teaching 3 Chatbots 5 AI is the new UI 6 Chatbots 7 Building chatbots 4 Learning 8 Content creation 9 Video 10 Push learning 11 Adaptive learning 12 Learning organizations 13 Assessment 5 Data 14 Data analytics 15 Sentiment analysis 6 Future 16 Future skills 17 Ethics and bias 18 Employment 19 The final frontier 20 Where next? 21 Index This book « Shows how to use AI to curate and personalize learning content to improve learner engagement « Debunks the myths around AI and explains how to cut through the hype and critically assess the impact of artificial intelligence on L&D « Provides guidance on how artificial intelligence can be used to improve the assessment, evaluation and measurement of learning in organizations « Explains how AI can be used as an aid in employee learning and is not a replacement for L&D professionals « Includes case studies and real-world examples from companies including Netflix, British Airways, Vision Express and the NHS Description Artificial intelligence is creating huge opportunities for workplace learning and employee development. However, it can be difficult for L&D professionals to assess what difference AI can make in their organization and where it is best implemented. Artificial Intelligence for Learning is the practical guide L&D practitioners need to understand what AI is and how to use it to improve all aspects of learning in the workplace. It includes specific guidance on how AI can provide content curation and personalization to improve learner engagement, how it can be implemented to improve the efficiency of evaluation, assessment and reporting and how chatbots can provide learner support to a global workforce. Artificial Intelligence for Learning debunks the myths and cuts through the hype around AI allowing L&D practitioners to feel confident in their ability to critically assess where artificial intelligence can make a measurable difference and where it is worth investing in. There is also critical discussion of how AI is an aid to learning and development, not a replacement as well as how it can be used to boost the effectiveness of workplace learning, reduce drop off rates in online learning and improve ROI. With real-world examples from companies who have effectively implemented AI and seen the benefits as well as case studies from organizations including Netflix, British Airways and the NHS, this book is essential reading for all L&D practitioners needing to understand AI and what it means in practice.

Information

Artificial Intelligence for Learning How to use AI to Support Employee Edition:Development 1 Date:

Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789660814 ISBN Ebook: 9781789660821 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 235x157 Product Category: Professional Subject: Learning & Development Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

1 A

for

1 Experiential

LearningExperiential A Practical

Development and

Description In a fast-paced and innovative world, traditional training methods can no longer be relied on to improve performance, engagement or promote behavioural change. Experience-based learning, in which the experience is central to the learning process, is more affordable, appealing and effective than ever before. Experiential Learning combines in-depth theory with international case studies from companies including KidZania, Shell and the UK National Health Service (NHS) and numerous practical tools for developing and delivering learning experiences in both for-profit and not-for-profit organizations. It presents a simple model, the Learning Combination Lock, which enables trainers, coaches, facilitators and educators to select the best strategies for their circumstances to maximize comprehension, knowledge retention and application. Essential reading for anyone designing and delivering learning experiences, it covers areas such as experiential learning activities, indoor and outdoor learning environments, creative learning, working with the senses and emotions to help promote learning, and reviewing and evaluating initiatives.

In addition to featuring new international case studies and examples, this updated fourth edition of Experiential Learning contains new material on the mechanisms underpinning learning, mindfulness and wellbeing, experience and language and digital games and the design of multi-sensory experiences. Online supporting resources consist of audio files exploring sensory intelligence.

2 The

Table of Contents brief introduction to experiential learning learning: foundations fundamentalsand Practical answers to some theoretical questions Designing, delivering and evaluating experiential learning Learning Combination Lock model The outer-world learning environment: other humans, other living creatures, and spaces and places (the belonging dimension) learning activities, behaviours and actions (the doing dimension) Sensory experience and sensory intelligence (SI) (the sensing dimension) Experience and emotions (the feeling dimension) Experience, knowing and intelligence (the knowing dimension) Deeper learning (the being dimension) Experiential learning and the future 10 Imagining, experiencing and learning from the future

This book « Combines an in-depth theoretical analysis of experience-based learning with practical international case studies, examples and tools that address the main factors to consider when developing and delivering learning experiences New to this edition: fresh material on the mechanisms underpinning learning, mindfulness and wellbeing, experience and language and digital games in the design of multi-sensory experiences along with new international case studies and examples Online resources: ‘Introduction to Sensory Intelligence’ audio files

and

215 Learning & Development

5 Experiential

Paperback:

Author Information Colin Beard is a professor and National Teaching Fellow at Sheffield Business School. He works with leading global public and private organizations to design and facilitate experiential learning strategies. He is the author of The Experiential Learning Toolkit, also published by Kogan Page. John P. Wilson holds positions at Sheffield and Oxford Universities. His experience in education and consultancy spans a variety of countries and sectors, including aerospace engineering, banking, law and pharmaceuticals. He has written and edited a number of books and articles, and has blogged for the CIPD. Guide Training, Coaching Education Edition: 4 Date: 03/08/2018 Price: £29.99 ISBN 9780749483036 ISBN Ebook: 9780749483043 Pages: 376 Format (mm): 235x160 Product Category: Professional Subject: Learning & Development Human Resources, Organizational Coaching

ISBN Paperback:

ISBN Ebook:

Pages:

Introduction – Stephen Perkins and Raisa ArvinenMuondo Individuals at work under an employment relationship Managing diverse identities at work – Janice Johnson and Christina Schwabenland Perception, making decisions and people management –Raisa Arvinen-Muondo Motivation at work: engagement and facilitation –Nahid Rozalin Employing human resources to work together for a purpose Managing performance –Caroline Bolam and Sarah Jones Leadership, communication and Holbecheeffectivenessorganizational–Linda Talent management – Raisa Arvinen-Muondo and Qi Wei Shifting contexts for organizational behaviour Conflict, power and politics –Philip Davies and Rod Smith Organizational culture – Eliot Lloyd 9 Managing organizational change – Faten Baddar Al-Husan and Konstantinos Kakavelakis Creativity, innovation and the management of knowledge –Pauline Loewenberger Summation and reflection 11 Coda: HRM and OB –accenting the social – Stephen Perkins and Raisa ArvinenMuondo

Format

234x157 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Organizations Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Author Information Raisa Arvinen-Muondo works in HR management in Luanda, Angola. She has undertaken doctoral research at the University of Bedfordshire, on the career development of Angolan professionals within Western multinational organizations, focusing on the impact of experiences associated with international living. Stephen J Perkins is Dean of London Metropolitan Business School and a Visiting Research Fellow at Cass Business School. In addition to having served in several universities, he has held senior management posts in industry at times of transformational change and consulted with private and stateowned organizations internationally. Process, Work 03/01/2013 £39.99 9780749463601 9780749463618 360 (mm):

BehaviourOrganizational People,

and Human Resource Management Edition: 1 Date:

Description

216 1TableOrganizationsofContentsIntroduction

Price:

This book « Bridges the gap between OB and HRM and shows you how to put effective people management at the heart of your organization Examines the role of corporate governance in shaping the scope of managerial choices in organizations and what this means in practice Looks at the ethical dimensions of OB that are increasingly important to understand in the context of ‘good employers’ and global employment standards

This updated second edition contains new material on organizational planning and analysis, role design and job architecture, position management lifecycle and delta reporting. Alongside this, new case studies and examples will show how these approaches have been applied in practice. Whether planning a long-term transformation, a large redesign or an individual small project, Data-Driven Organization Design will demonstrate how to make the most of your organizational data and analytics to drive business performance.

Author Information Rupert Morrison is the CEO and co-founder of Concentra Analytics, a software provider and consultancy firm which captures, manages, and analyzes data to improve organizational operations and execute strategies more effectively. Concentra Analytics works with clients including HSBC, Tesco, Aviva and FedEx and has won a Most Innovative award in The Sunday Times FastTrack Tech 100. Based in London, UK, he is also an international conference speaker and industry writer, whose contributions have featured in The HR Director, Personnel Today and the SHRM Blog.

OrganizationData-Driven Design Delivering Perpetual Performance Gains Through the Organizational Edition:System 2 Date: 03/10/2021 Price: £34.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398603264 ISBN Ebook: 9781398603271 Pages: 440 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Organizations Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Using data and analytics is a key opportunity for businesses to transform performance and achieve success. With a data-driven approach, all the elements of the organizational system can be connected to design an environment in which people can excel and attain competitive advantage. Data-Driven Organization Design provides a practical framework for HR and organization design practitioners to build a baseline of data, set objectives, carry out fixed and dynamic process design, map competencies, and right-size the organization. It shows how to collect the right data, present it meaningfully and ask the most relevant questions of it to help complex, fluid organizations constantly evolve and meet moving objectives.

217 1TableOrganizationsofContentsIntroduction 1 Data driven organization design 2 Challenges 3 Foundations and core concepts 2 Macro design 4 Strategy articulation and design criteria 5 Structural options and business case 3 Micro design 6 The data goldmine 7 Objectives management 8 Fixed process design 9 Dynamic process design 10 Competency management 11 Rightsizing 4 Making it real 12 Common traps 13 How will it work in practice (HOWWIP)? 14 Implementation 15 Workforce planning 16 Talent successionmanagement,development and planning 17 Organizational getting things done 18 Sustaining the edge This book « Shows how to optimize the design of an organization to meet its strategies through the use of data and analytics « Explores how to collect, sort and analyze people data in order to obtain actionable organizational insights « Contains case studies and examples from real-world interventions, and describes how to avoid common challenges and pitfalls « New to this edition: material on organizational planning and analysis, role design and job architecture, position management lifecycle and delta reporting and new case studies and examples SHORTLISTED:DescriptionCMI Management Book of the Year 2017 - Management Futures Category Understand how to drive business performance with your organizational data and analytics in the second edition of Data-Driven Organization Design.

There are a staggering number of myths, stereotypes and out-of-date rules that abound in the workplace. This can make it feel impossible to truly know how to get the most out of your career, your team and your organization. In Myths of Work, Ian MacRae and Adrian Furnham take an entertaining and evidence-based look at the most pervasive myths about our working lives, from the serious to the ridiculous, to give you the insight you need to become a better manager in the modern workplace.

Fascinating real life case studies from organizations around the world display the myths (and how to overcome them) in practice. Myths of Work takes the most up-to-date academic research in business and psychology and combines it with practical insights, a lively writing style and a handy dip-in-and-out structure to form your ultimate guide to becoming a better enlightened manager.

ISBN Paperback:

218

Pages:

TableOrganizationsofContents

This book « Explores over 27 of the most pervasive myths about the workplace - from the serious to the sillyand debunks them through compelling research « Overturns stereotypes and misinformation to help you become a better manager in the modern workplace « Includes fascinating real life examples from organizations and industries around the world « Is written by The Sunday Times columnist and performance expert Ian Macrae and best-selling author Adrian Furnham, Professor of Psychology at UCL « Tackles fascinating myths about workplaces such as: surveillance improves performance, computers are going to take all of our jobs, workplace romantic relationships should be banned and fads like table tennis tables will make your staff happier Description Buying a table tennis table will make your staff happier. Working eight hours a day, five days a week, will result in the most productivity. Paying higher salaries will always result in higher motivation. But will it really?

Myths of Work Stereotypes and 1 03/10/2017 £15.99 9780749481285 9780749481292 192 (mm): 235x157

1 Myth 1 - Staff Should Work 8 Hours a Day Monday to Friday 2 Myth 2 - Working From Home Reduces Productivity 3 Myth 3 - Social Media Should Never Be Used at Work 4 Myth 4 - Listening to Music Whilst Working is Distracting 5 Myth 5 - Health and Safety is the Enemy 6 Myth 6ImprovesSurveillancePerformance 7 Myth 7 - Creating a GoogleStyle Office Environment Will Make Staff More Innovative 8 Myth 8 - Mindfulness is the Answer to all Problems 9 Myth 9 - Neuroscience is the Silver Bullet to Workplace Problems 10 Myth 10 - Start-Ups Need a Different Type of Leader to Succeed 11 Myth 11 - It’s Better to have Higher Self-Esteem at Work 12 Myth 12 - We Only Use 10% of our Brain at Work 13 Myth 13 - Making Workplaces Sustainable is a Burden 14 Myth 14 - The Best Way to Motivate People is to Pay Them More 15 Myth 15 - Employees Who Work the Longest are the Most Valuable People 16 Myth 16 - People Should Retire at 65 17 Myth 17 - Perfectionists Make the Best Employees 18 Myth 18 - Women aren’t as Competitive as Men at Work 19 Myth 19 - People Personalities can be Categorised 20 Myth 20 - Sexuality and Gender should be Taken into Account at Work 21 Myth 21 - Millennials are Changing the Workplace 22 Myth 22 - Co-Workers Shouldn’t Form Romantic Relationships 23 Myth 23 - Teaching and Training are the Same 24 Myth 24 - Annual Appraisals are the Best Way to Measure Performance 25 Myth 25 - High Achievers Make Great Managers 26 Myth 26 - A Computer is Going to Take Your Job 27 Myth 27 - Open Plan Offices are Always the Best Option

The

Assumptions Holding Your Organization Back Edition:

Date:

Price:

Product Category: General Subject: Organizations Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Format

ISBN Ebook:

Author Information Ian MacRae is Director of High Potential, an organizational consultancy providing customized psychological tests and reports for improving performance, predicting potential and developing people. Adrian Furnham is Professor of Psychology at UCL and Adjunct Professor of Management at the Norwegian School of Management. He has written over 1000 scientific papers and 70 books and is among the most well-known psychologists in the world. Adrian is also a newspaper columnist at The Sunday Times. He has written regularly for The Financial Times, The Daily Telegraph and is a contributor to stations including the BBC, CNN, and ITV.

Written and edited by CIPD-accredited experts in the field and mapped to CIPD’s HR Profession Map, Developing People and Organisations covers key topics such as organisation design and development, developing coaching and mentoring in organisations, meeting OD needs and developments in HRD. It includes reflective activities, annotated further reading, a glossary and case studies to encourage the application of theory to a practical working environment. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual, additional case studies, multiple-choice questions and annotated web links.

5 Contemporary

6 Knowledge Management (Carol Woodhams, Graham Perkins) Improving Rogers,MichellePerformanceOrganisational(PatriciaRogers,McLardy,RaymondSusanBarnes)

219 Organizational Development

Table of Contents Organisation Design (Gary Connor, Ian McLean and Michael McFadden) Organisation Development (Sophie Mills, Kristen Stevens, Krish Pinto, Amanda Lee) Developing Coaching and Mentoring within Organisations (Terrence Wendell Brathwaite, Jill Ashley-Jones, Maxwell-Harrison)Rosalind Meeting Stewart,DevelopmentOrganisationalNeeds(JimDalbirSidhu) Developments in Human SharonDevelopmentResource(JimStewart,McGuire)

This book « Helps students develop effective analytical and problem-solving skills as they understand key OD and HRD issues « Explains concepts and theoretical approaches clearly and provides activities to help cement understanding « Online resources: instructor’s manual, additional case studies, multiple-choice questions and annotated web links Description Developing People and Organisations introduces and explores concepts relevant to the learning outcomes for the optional units in CIPD’s Level 5 Intermediate qualifications in human resource development (HRD) and organisational design and development. It provides a practical and accessible exposition of key theories informing the professional practice of HRD so students can explain and analyse the organisational context of HRD practice and describe, compare and critically evaluate a range of theories and approaches.

Edition: 1 Date: 03/08/2012 Price: £46.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781843983132 ISBN Ebook: 9781843983316 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 246x191 Product Category: Textbook Subject: DevelopmentOrganizational Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Developing People and Organisations

This book « Provides examples of emergent theories of OD and HRM and details of how these can be applied in the workplace « Includes international case studies showing both successful and unsuccessful attempts at change « Online resources: additional case studies and practical tools

Pages:

Covering everything from how HR can support strategic change and how technology can be an agent of transformation to performance management, diversity, talent management and emotion at work, this book firmly places HR at the heart of a modern approach to Crucially,OD.

People DevelopmentOrganisationaland A New Agenda for Organisational Edition:Effectiveness 1 Date:

ISBN Ebook:

Format (mm): 242x190 Product Category: Textbook Subject: DevelopmentOrganizational Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

There is also invaluable discussion of the OD role of HRD in ethics, corporate social responsibility (CSR) and sustainability. Packed with international case studies and examples, this is essential reading for all those studying the CIPD Level 7 Advanced Organisation Design and Organisation Development module and everyone wanting to make a difference to the development of their people and their organisation. Online supporting resources include additional case studies and practical tools.

220 Organizational Development

The New OE - Future Prospects and Possibilities (Helen Francis, Linda Holbeche and Martin Reddington)

People and Organisational Development doesn’t just examine successful change initiatives, it also covers the unsuccessful attempts at organisational change and what can be learnt from these.

Table of Contents

The OD Role of HRD in Ethics, Corporate Social Responsibility and Sustainability (Carole Parkes) Emotion at Work (Chiara Amati and Chris Donnegan)

Author Information Helen Francis is Director of the Edinburgh Institute of Leadership and People Management (EILPM) and Reader within Edinburgh Napier Business School, UK. Linda Holbeche is Visiting Professor at both the University of Bedfordshire and Cass Business School and an Associate at Ashridge Business School, UK. Martin Reddington was formerly Global Programme Director, HR Transformation, at Cable & Wireless. Since leaving Cable & Wireless, he blends academic research with consultancy. 03/01/2012 9781843982692 9781843983279 376

The Role of Line Managers in HRM, Learning and Innovation (John Castledine and Douglas W. S. Renwick) Strategic Workforce Capability - Planning for a New Era (Roger Cooper and Melanie Wood) Performance Management and Reward (Roger Cooper and Adrian Furnham) Inclusive Talent Management and Diversity (Eddie Blass and Gillian Maxwell) Employer Branding and Organisational Effectiveness (Helen Francis and Martin Reddington)

Organisational Effectiveness - A New Agenda for Organisational Development (OD) and Human Resource Management (HRM) (Helen Francis, Linda Holbeche and Martin Reddington) The Strategic Context for The New OE (Linda Holbeche) The Historical and Theoretical Background to Organisation Development (Naomi Stanford) Developing an Organisational Strategy from an HR Perspective (Mark Withers) Organisational Culture and Cultural Integration (Valerie Garrow and Graeme Martin) An ER Perspective on Organisational Effectiveness (John Purcell) Transforming HR to Support Strategic Change (Peter Reilly) Technology as an Agent of Transformation (Martin Reddington) 9 Critical HRD (AllanOrganisationalandEffectivenessRamdhony)

Price: £47.99 ISBN Paperback:

Description People and Organisational Development is ideal for both practitioners and students alike. Setting out a new agenda for organisational effectiveness, this book not only covers emergent theories of organisational development and human resources management, it also gives practical examples for how these theories can be applied.

221 Organizational Development Table of Contents 1 A practitioner’s guide for Organization Development 1 OD history and theory overview 1 What is OD? Its brief history 2 Theories and practices of OD: a theory overview 2 OD cycle of work 3 Theories and practices of OD - the OD cycle and the entry and contracting phase 4 Theories and practices of ODthe diagnostic phase 5 Theories and practices of ODthe intervention phase 6 Theories and practices of ODthe evaluation phase 3 OD and change 7 Living at the edge of chaos and change 8 Back-room and front-room change matters 9 Can behavioural change be made easy? 4 The DevelopmentOrganizationpractitioner 10 The DevelopmentOrganizationpractitioner 11 Power and politics in Organization Development 5 Additional thoughts 12 What is an organization? What is organization health? 13 How to build up your presence and impact on organization life 6 HR in relation to OD: theory and practice 14 HR in relation to OD 15 Organization Design 16 Transformation and culture change 17 Building organizational agility and resilience 18 A culture conducive to innovation and learning 19 Building the context for employee engagement 20 Developing effective leadership 21 Postscript – towards a better tomorrow 22 References and further reading 23 Index

OrganizationDescriptionDevelopment (OD) is key to ensuring that organizations and their people can adapt to and engage in ongoing change in today’s fast-paced and competitive world. How can those responsible for managing change determine the most appropriate course of action for their organization’s needs and maximize capability?

Written by two of the leading experts in the field, Organization Development is an essential guide to the theories, practices, tools and techniques for achieving success. It explores the role of HR in relation to OD, and connected areas such as organization design, building organizational agility and resilience, and culture change.

Linda Holbeche is Co-Director of the Holbeche Partnership, Adjunct Professor at Imperial College London Business School, UK, and Visiting Professor at four other UK universities. She acts as consultant on OD, HR, Strategy and Leadership. She is Fellow of Roffey Park and the Institute of Employment Studies and was previously Director of Research and Policy at the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and Director of Leadership and Consultancy at the Work Foundation. She is the author of The Agile Organization, also published by Kogan Page.In 2021 she was named as one of the Most Influential HR Thinkers by HR Magazine.

A Practitioner’s Guide for OD and HR Edition: 3 Date: 03/06/2021 Price: £34.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789667912 ISBN Ebook: 9781789667929 Pages: 576 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: DevelopmentOrganizational Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Author Information Mee-Yan Cheung-Judge has over 30 years’ experience of delivering transformational change in a range of international organizations, including the BBC and Singapore’s public sector agencies. A widely published author and international conference speaker, she was voted a Top Influential Thinker by HR Magazine in 2018 and 2019.

This book « Provides a complete guide for both students and practitioners to implementing effective OD to drive performance and growth « Includes theory overviews as well as tools, techniques and international case studies from organizations including Ernst & Young, Nationwide, Lockheed Martin and the University of Sheffield « Explores HR in relation to OD, and connected areas such as organization design, employee engagement, building organizational agility and resilience, and culture change « New to this edition: chapters on building an adaptive culture of learning and innovation, organization health and ‘use of self’, material on digitization, OD in SMEs, competence profiles and OD education and development, new case studies and practice suggestion boxes at the end of each chapter

DevelopmentOrganization

Alongside international case studies from organizations including Ernst & Young, Nationwide, Lockheed Martin and the University of Sheffield, UK, this revised third edition of Organization Development contains new chapters on building an adaptive culture of learning and innovation and organization health and ‘use of self’. With fresh material on digitization, OD in SMEs, and competence profiles, this is an indispensable handbook to understanding, communicating and implementing organization development approaches for both experienced practitioners and students.

Author Information Linda Holbeche is an international consultant, researcher and author in the fields of HRM, leadership, change management and organization design and development. She was previously Director of Research and Policy at the CIPD, of Leadership and Consultancy at the Work Foundation and of Research and Strategy at Roffey Park. She is a member of several advisory boards, Visiting Professor at five UK universities, and a regular speaker at national and international conference. In 2021 she was named as one of the Most Influential HR Thinkers by HR Magazine and is the coauthor of Organization Development, also published by Kogan Page. OrganizationAgile Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching Edition: 2 Date: 03/06/2018 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482657 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482664 Pages: 344 Format (mm): 235x160 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: DevelopmentOrganizational Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

222 Organizational Development Table of Contents Introduction 1 Why go agile? 2 Why are agility and resilience so elusive? 3 The resiliently agile organization 4 Agile strategizing 5 Agile implementation 6 Agile linkages 7 Designing for agile 8 Agile people processes 9 HR’s role in building a highperformance work climate 10 Nurturing engagementemployeeandresilience 11 Change and transformation 12 Building a change-able culture 13 Agile leadership 14 Conclusion This book « Equips readers with the strategies and methods to ensure their organization can respond rapidly and retain competitive advantage in the face of change « Includes checklists, guidelines and international case studies from organizations including the University of California, Berkeley, the UK National Health Service (NHS), SNC-Lavalin’s Atkins business and General Electric (GE) « New to this edition: a new chapter on agile design and structuring and fresh material on agile people processes and customer-centricity, alongside new and updated case studies to illustrate each of these themes InDescriptiontoday’svolatile and ambiguous world, organizations need to have the capacity and flexibility to respond rapidly to changes in their environment, both internally and externally. The key to retaining this competitive advantage is agility, a set of capabilities that help organizations adapt with the full co-operation of their employees.

The

Packed with helpful checklists, tips and advice, The Agile Organization is a practical blueprint to building both agility and resilience at individual, team and organizational levels. This revised second edition contains a new chapter on the latest approaches to agile organization design in light of digitization and customer-centricity, as well as new and updated case studies from the University of California, Berkeley, the UK National Health Service (NHS), SNC-Lavalin’s Atkins business and General Electric (GE). It remains the ‘go to’ guide for HR and OD specialists, senior leaders and managers who want to help bring about organizational transformation and build a sustainably agile business while enhancing employee engagement and resilience.

Price:

Full of practical advice and step by step guidance, this book is also supported by case studies from organizations including KPMG, Sainsbury’s, WPP, Accenture, TSB, Johnson & Johnson, Aer Lingus and FedEx.

This book Explains what organizational planning and analysis is and how it can improve business performance the difference between strategic and operational workforce planning how to embed robust succession planning Shows how to match people to new or changing roles and identify any skills gaps in the organization how to use people analytics to improve the return on investment (ROI) for each employee in the organization Includes case studies from KPMG, Sainsbury’s, WPP, Accenture, TSB, Johnson & Johnson, Aer Lingus and FedEx.

and

223 Organizational Development Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Challenges of making organization design a reality 3 Implementing your organization design 4 Financial Planning and Analysis 5 Organizational Planning and Analysis 6 Building an OP & A function 7 Workforce Planning 8 Talent Management 9 OP & A and HR Operations 10 New People Analytics

ISBN Ebook:

Pages:

AnalysisPlanningOrganizationaland A Data-Driven Approach to Workforce Edition:Planning 1 Date:

« Outlines

WhatDescriptionisthecost of employees today and what will this be in the future? This book explains how to take a data-driven approach to workforce planning and allow the business to reach its strategic goals. Organizational Planning and Analysis (OP&A) is a data-driven approach to workforce planning. It allows HR professionals, OD practitioners and business leaders to monitor an organization’s activities and analyse business data to regularly adjust plans to ensure that the business succeeds. This book covers everything from how to build an OP&A function, the difference between strategic and operational workforce planning and how to manage demand and supply through to how to match people to new or changing roles and develop robust succession planning. Organizational Planning and Analysis also covers how OP&A works with HR operations including recruitment, L&D, reward and performance management and includes a chapter on new human capital analytics which allow a business to improve the return on investment for each of its employees.

Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: DevelopmentOrganizational Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Author Information Rupert Morrison is the CEO and co-founder of Concentra Analytics, a software provider and consultancy firm which captures, manages and analyses data to improve organizational operations and execute strategies more effectively. Concentra Analytics works with clients including HSBC, Tesco, Aviva and FedEx and has won a Most Innovative award in The Sunday Times FastTrack Tech 100. Based in London, UK, he is also an international conference speaker and industry writer, whose contributions have featured in Forbes, HR Director and Personnel Today. 03/06/2022 £34.99 9781398605817 9781398605862 304 234x156

« Covers

Format (mm):

ISBN Paperback:

on the authors’ new models for resilience and progress, this book includes frameworks and tools which can be tailored to any organization and used as stand-alone improvements or combined across teams and departments. These practices avoid unnecessary change but enable rapid and sustainable improvements in product development, service delivery and customer value. Learn how to survive and thrive in any environment with this actionable approach to making progress at pace and effectively embedding business resilience. 9781398604643 9781398604650

This book « Focuses on a new vision for managing continuous organizational improvement by enhancing product development, service delivery and customer value

« Provides a roadmap to establishing business resilience foundations, where resilience is part of the everyday culture so the company can survive and thrive during times of crisis

Business Resilience A Practical Guide to Sustained Progress Delivered at Pace Edition: 1 Date: 03/04/2022 Price: £34.99 ISBN Paperback:

« Explains how businesses can adapt to work differently depending on the level of disruption and change at that moment in time, from gradual innovation to swarming on a problem

ISBN Ebook:

Pages: 392 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: DevelopmentOrganizational Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

InDescriptionanincreasingly VUCA (volatile, uncertain, complex and ambiguous) business world, it is more important than ever for organizations to build resilience into their everyday practice.

« Demonstrates how to improve current practices by combining them with new ‘progress at pace’ and business resilience models, building on what the organization does well and avoiding unnecessary change « Presents a practical framework with practices and tools which can be tailored to any organization and used as stand-alone improvements or combined across departments

Business Resilience is a practical guide to making organizations more resilient and improving current practices by building on what the organization does well. It explains how managers should constantly monitor their business environment and adapt their priorities depending on the level of disruptionfrom gradual innovation and improvement in good times to swarming on a single problem during a Basedcrisis.

224 Organizational Development Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Principles – underpinning the framework 3 Progress@PACE ‘8-4-8 model’ – Double infinity loop design 4 Progress cycle – First infinity loop 5 PACE elements – Linking progress cycle and resilience foundations 6 Resilience Foundations –Second infinity loop 7 Progress@PACE – Tools and techniques 8 Established tools and techniques 9 Progress measures 10 PACE profiling with gap analysis 11 Progress@PACE roles 12 Case histories – examples of Progress@PACE

This Includes examples from global companies going through transformation well as high Outlines how organization design can help mature companies better embrace and connect digital how fast-growth companies can mature and scale a culture that start-up is facing Conveys contemporary concepts organization design practical,

ISBN Paperback:

growth challengers «

WhileDescriptiontechnology and geopolitical forces change the face of business today, the patterns and challenges of organizing humans to work together across organization, culture, language and time zone boundaries remain. To face these challenges, all organizations need to be agile, networked and scalable. Networked, Scaled, and Agile reveals how to shape organizations that will enable people to make faster and better decisions in a more complex world. By outlining the tension between the need for agility/differentiation and scale/integration, the book offers a new way to think about this debate using the models of the Tower (vertical integration) and the Square (horizontal integration). It addresses the role of the leadership team and how the organization design process can build C-suite leaders and successors. Each chapter concludes with a series of reflection questions for leaders as well as a summary of key concepts and tips. Including case studies from global organizations, Networked, Scaled, and Agile reveals how organization design can address three of the biggest business challenges organizations face today: how to build a new capability across the entire enterprise; how to make the entire organization more customer-centric; and how to allow for faster innovation.

but

225 Organizational Development Table of Contents Introduction 1 The Central Design Problem 2 Operating Models 3 Organization Models 4 Vertical Organization - The Tower 5 Horizontal Organization - The Square 6 Leadership in the Tower and the Square 7 Design Challenge - Enterprise Capabilities 8 Design Challenge - Customer Solutions 9 Design Challenge - Faster Innovation 10 Conclusion

Networked,

new competition «

was effective for a

book «

around

accessible language

ISBN Ebook:

and Agile A Design Strategy for Complex Edition:Organizations 1 Date: 03/03/2021 Price:

Pages: 200 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: DevelopmentOrganizational Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Author Information Amy Kates, Greg Kesler, and Michele DiMartino are organization design practitioners that consult to senior executives in companies around the world and live in New York, NY, Turnbull, CT and St. Petersburg, FL respectively. They are Managing Directors at Kates Kesler Organization Consulting, which is part of Accenture. Kates Kesler is recognized as one of the leading organization design firms and their methodology has become the global standard. The firm has been named by Forbes as one of the best consulting firms annually since 2016. Scaled, £29.99 9781789667790 9781789667806

now

capabilities, and

ISBN Ebook:

Author Information Sean O’Meara is a public relations and user experience consultant from Nottinghamshire, England. He founded the ‘remote-first’ digital communications consultancy Essential Content in 2015 and has more than 15 years’ experience of working remotely. He lives in Stockport, Greater Manchester, UK. Professor Sir Cary Cooper is the 50th Anniversary Professor of Organizational Psychology and Health at the ALLIANCE Manchester Business School, University of Manchester, UK and was President of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD). Based in Macclesfield, UK, he is also the Chair of the National Forum for Health and Wellbeing at Work. 1 03/03/2022 £19.99 9781398603868 9781398603875 224 (mm): 234x156

Format

Remote Workplace Culture How to Bring Energy and Focus to Remote Teams Edition:

A strong and effective company culture that is built specifically with this purpose in mind is crucial.

Remote Workplace Culture is a practical guide that shows how to achieve this and explains why simply replicating what used to happen in the office in a virtual environment doesn’t work. This book shows how a strong culture for remote, hybrid and flexible working helps attract the best talent, whether this is nationally or globally and explains how to prioritize inclusion. There is also specific guidance on wellbeing initiatives, how to replace social learning in a hybrid or remote working culture and how to avoid common pitfalls such as an overreliance on technology, the blurring of work/ life boundaries and a misunderstanding of remote working etiquette. Supported by case studies from BBC, Salesforce, leading financial services brands and law firms, Remote Workplace Culture is essential reading for all HR professionals and business leaders needing to develop strong company culture in the new world of work.

Pages:

ISBN Paperback:

226 Organizational Development Table of Contents Introduction 1 The new normal 2 It’s not just where we work, it’s how we work 3 Recruitment, onboarding and retention 4 Social impact 5 Work–life integration 6 Wellbeing, environment, inclusion and belonging 7 Remote by design - A case study 8 Remote culture tools, hacks and techniques 9 Rules and etiquette 10 A hybrid future - Balancing physical and virtual culture 11 Conclusion 12 References This book « Shows how to build a culture that engages and motivates staff wherever they work from « Explains how building a strong culture for remote workers allows businesses to recruit nationally or even globally to find the best talent needed for success « Provides practical guidance on wellbeing and mental health initiatives, mentoring staff and addressing diversity and inclusion challenges « Includes case studies from the BBC and Salesforce « Offers insights on avoiding common pitfalls such as overreliance on technology, blurring work/life boundaries and a misunderstanding of remote working etiquette

TheDescriptionwaywework has changed and a strong, supportive company culture is key for success. When employees work remotely, even occasionally, HR professionals and business leaders need to think differently.

Date:

Price:

Practitioners now need to motivate their workforce, support talent development, ensure an inclusive environment and protect their employees’ mental health, all without being in the same physical space.

Product Category: Professional Subject: DevelopmentOrganizational Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Business Book Awards 2021 - HR & Management Category

ISBN Ebook:

Price:

Author Information Perry Timms is a coach, consultant, international conference speaker and the founder of People and Transformational HR Ltd. He is also the social media and HR adviser to the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD). Named by HR Magazine as the second most influential HR thinker of 2021, he is a visiting fellow at Sheffield Hallam University Business School, a fellow of the Royal Society of Arts (RSA) and the world’s first WorldBlu-certified Freedom at Work coach. Perry Timms is also the author of Transformational HR, published by Kogan Page. 03/08/2020 £19.99 9780749498665 9780749498672 232 (mm): 235x158

Productivity is flatlining, employee wellbeing is at an all-time low and stress at an all-time high. Mental health issues are now the biggest single disability affecting the UK and are estimated to cost the economy £105bn each year. Traditional company design, structures and processes are making these issues worse and leading to unprecedented levels of staff burnout. This not only impacts individual employees, there is also a detrimental effect on overall company performance when employees can’t perform to their full potential. It is the responsibility of Organizational Development and HR professionals to address these issues urgently and redesign work to allow people to flourish and businesses to thrive. Full of practical advice, tips and tools, The Energized Workplace provides a blueprint for how practitioners can redesign their organizations to support employees and ensure the business outperforms the competition. It covers everything from why existing structures are causing business output to decline, why traditional processes are holding organizations back and what the consequences of not addressing these design issues will mean for business including increased staff turnover, a rise in employee absence and a decline in company profits. Including case studies from organizations across a range of sectors who have successfully put people at the heart of their workplace design such as CyberClick, Mind Valley, Brewdog and Wegmans and with specific guidance on designing for five generations working side by side, across different countries and on separate time zones, The Energized Workplace will help OD and HR professionals confidently tackle the organizational issues putting their company success and employee health and happiness in jeopardy. This book is essential reading for practitioners needing to deal with the wellbeing crisis and productivity puzzle in the new world of work.

Format

ISBN Paperback:

The WorkplaceEnergized Human Resources, Learning & Edition:Development 1 Date:

227 Organizational Development Table of Contents Introduction 1 2050 voyaging 2 20th-century design flaws 3 80/20 variances 4 1/20 or a 20 per cent probability 5 The 5 x 20 life and the redesign of age 6 20:20 vision 7 The 20 misuses of energy in the workplace 8 The 2020 list of energized workplaces 9 20 minutes per day to energize yourself 10 Tools for the next 20 years This book « Explains why traditional organizational structures and processes are holding employees and businesses back and how to redesign them to allow both people and the business to reach their full potential « Shows how technological advances that mean staff are connected to work in their evenings, weekends and on holiday are having a direct impact on employee wellbeing and how to tackle this « Includes international case studies from companies including Brewdog, Wegmans, CyberClick and Mind Valley SHORTLISTED:Description

Pages:

ISBN

228 Talent Management & Recruitment Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 The Resourcing and Talent Management environment 3 Human resource planning 4 Job analysis and job design 5 Recruitment advertising 6 Alternative recruitment methods 7 Employer branding 8 Selection - The classic trio 9 Advanced methods of employee selection 10 The new employee 11 Performance management strategies 12 Performance appraisal 13 Managing absence 14 Succession planning 15 Measuring and analysing employee turnover 16 Improving employee retention 17 Retirement 18 Dismissals 19 Redundancy 20 Resourcing and Talent Management strategies This book « Fully aligned to the CIPD’s new qualification framework and includes ‘pause and reflect’ boxes to reinforce learning, ‘explore further’ boxes to help students read more widely and activities to help put learning into practice « Explains how to manage the internal and external recruitment and selection of staff including advertising jobs, interviewing processes and contracts of employment « Covers information on job design, flexible working, discrimination and equality at work, retirement, redundancy and dismissals « New to this edition: New chapter on the UK labour market outside the EU and the implications of Brexit on recruitment and staff development as well as further new chapters on HR analytics and employee experience « Online resources: Lecturer Manual, PowerPoint Slides and Web links

of Recruiting and Developing a Workforce

ISBN Paperback:

Price:

Product Category: Textbook Subject: Talent Management & Recruitment Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Resourcing and Talent Management The

Resourcing and Talent Management provides broad and accessible coverage of key topics for HR masters students and is the essential companion for the CIPD Level 7 module of the same name. It covers everything from job design and both internal and external recruitment through to interviewing, selection and contracts of employment. There is also guidance on staff retention, succession planning, employee turnover as well as crucial information on how staff leave the business whether this is retirement, redundancy or dismissal.

This new edition of Resourcing and Talent Management now includes a brand new chapter on managing absence as well as new content on the UK labour market outside the EU and the implications of Brexit on recruitment and staff development, Fully updated throughout and aligned to the new CIPD qualification framework, this textbook includes ‘explore further’ boxes to encourage students to read more deeply, ‘pause for thought’ boxes to encourage reflection on learning and activities to put their learning in practice and test their understanding.

Date:

Format

Pages:

Author Information Stephen Taylor, Chartered CCIPD, is a senior lecturer in Human Resource Management at the University of Exeter Business School. He is also a Chief Examiner for the CIPD. Before his academic career he worked in a variety of management roles in the hotel industry and the NHS. Based in Devon, UK he is co-author of Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice, published by Kogan Page. Theory and Practice Edition: 8 03/12/2021 £49.99 9781398600461 Ebook: 9781398600508 480 (mm): 246x190

AnDescriptionessentialtextbook for the CIPD Level 7 module in Resourcing and Talent Management which covers the recruitment, selection and retention of staff as well as employee retirement, dismissals and redundancy.

Learning and Talent Development Edition: 1 Date: 03/01/2011 Price: £47.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781843982500 ISBN Ebook: 9781843983422 Pages: 392 Format (mm): 245x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Talent Management & Recruitment Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

229 Talent Management & Recruitment Table of Contents Introduction 1 The Nature, Purpose and Context of Learning and Talent Development 1 Organising and Managing Learning and Talent Development 2 International and National Contexts 3 Various and OrganisationVaryingContexts 4 The Politics of Learning and Talent Development 2 The Process of Learning and Talent Development 5 Individual and Organisation Learning in DevelopmentTalent 6 Establishing Needs and Solutions to Talent Development 7 Learning and Talent Development Practical Strategies 3 The Management of Learning and Talent Development 8 Designing and Evaluating Talent Development 9 Accessing and Managing Resources 10 Ethics and Professionalism in Learning and Talent Development 11 Doing a Student Research Project 12 Conclusion

Description

This book Shows the nature and benefits of a critical understanding of and approach to the professional practice of learning and talent development Case studies help students focus on particular concepts and prepare for professional practice Online resources: web links for each chapter, lecture slides and an instructor’s manual complete with lecture handouts and additional case studies per chapter Written for the CIPD Level 7 Advanced module of the same name, Learning and Talent Development combines a clear and concise structure and writing style with an academic and critical approach to the subject. It analyses and evaluates a range of learning and talent development theories and strategies so students can learn how to take the lead and confidently initiate, develop and implement these strategies, interventions and activities in the workplace. Covering key topics such as the national and organizational context of learning and talent development, concepts related to individual and organizational learning and the functions associated with managing learning and talent development in the context of professional practice, Learning and Talent Development equips individuals to meet the expectations placed upon those performing specialist roles in developing others and is therefore also ideal for undergraduate and postgraduate students of human resource management or business students taking a module in human resource development or learning and development. Online supporting resources include web links for each chapter, lecture slides and an instructor’s manual complete with lecture handouts and additional case studies per chapter.

Danny Kalman is a talent management consultant, executive coach and regular speaker on leadership development. He was Director of Global Talent at Panasonic Corporation from 2008-2013.

Featuring case studies from internationally recognised brands such as Goldman Sachs, Unilever, KPMG, Hitachi, Oxfam and the NHS, Inclusive Talent Management shows that to achieve business objectives and gain the competitive advantage, it is imperative that organizations take an inclusive approach to talent management. It puts forward a compelling and innovative case, raising questions not only for the HR community but also to those in senior management positions, providing the practical steps, global examples and models for incorporating diversity and inclusion activities into talent management strategy.

Inclusive ManagementTalent How Business can Thrive in an Age of Edition:Diversity 1 Date: 03/07/2016 Price: £32.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749475871 ISBN Ebook: 9780749475888 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Talent Management & Recruitment Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Author Information Stephen Frost works with clients worldwide to embed inclusion into their decision making. He teaches at various business schools and was formerly Head of Diversity and Inclusion for the London Organizing Committee of the Olympic Games and Paralympic Games.

230 Talent Management & Recruitment Table of Contents 1 Challenge - The Addiction to Likeness in an Age of Diversity = Sameness 1 The Fierce Urgency of Now 2 Homogenous Talent Management 3 History – How a Segregated Mindset Evolved 4 The Future – Diversity is Local, Inclusion is Global 5 The Case for Inclusive Talent Management 2 How to Meet the Challenge 6 ITM in Recruitment – Finding Diverse Talent 7 ITM in Development –Growing Diverse Talent 8 ITM in Retention – Keeping Diverse Talent 9 Leadership – How You Can Make a Difference 10 Resolution: Change the System (Unconscious Nudges) + Change Your Behaviour (Conscious Leadership) = Inclusion This book « Shows how to attract the best candidates and keep them by building cultures in which they feel valued « Provides evidence for how better diversity and inclusion practices lead to increased creativity, openness to change, new ideas and understanding of new markets « Includes original research from globally recognised organizations including Goldman Sachs, NHS, Telefonica, Unilever, KPMG, Royal Mail, Hitachi, Oxfam, Novartis and the Rio 2016 Olympic Games on how diversity and inclusion activities can improve talent attraction, management and retention

SHORTLISTED:Description

CMI Management Book of the Year 2017 - Practical Manager Category Organizations traditionally have had a clear distinction between their policies on diversity and inclusion and their talent management. The main driving force behind diversity and inclusion has been being seen to be a good employer, to be able to make claims in the annual report and to feel as though a positive contribution is being made to society. On the other hand, talent management activities have been driven by a real business need to ensure that the organization has the right people with the right skills in the right place to drive operational success. Inclusive Talent Management aligns talent management and diversity and inclusion, offering a fresh perspective on why the current distinction between them needs to disappear.

AnDescriptionorganization’s employees are its biggest competitive advantage. Performance gains can be achieved through cost saving, process improvement or technology adoption, but the biggest difference is made by people. This means that recruiting, engaging and retaining the very best talent has never been more important.

Price:

Neurodiversity at Work is a practical guide that explains what neurodiversity is, why it’s important and what the benefits are. It covers how to attract, recruit and engage neurodiverse talent and provides guidance on how to adapt HR policies, processes and workplaces to ensure that all employees, including the 2 in 10 employees in the UK who are neurodiverse, can reach their full potential.

This book « Explains what neurodiversity is and how it creates performance, productivity and financial benefits Provides guidance on how to optimize recruitment and talent management processes to attract, acquire and retain neurodiverse employees « Includes case studies and interviews from IBM, LinkedIn, UK Cabinet Office, Autotrader and Heathrow Airport « Covers how to adapt policies and workplaces to ensure that they work for all employees

Pages:

Neurodiversity at Work is packed full of case studies from leading organizations like Microsoft who are already seeing the productivity, performance and financial benefits of neurodiversity in the workplace. Individuals in these companies are also experiencing benefits in their working environments. Also featured are interviews with prominent figures in the neurodiversity community and people who have successfully adapted their HR processes for neurodiversity, including members of the ND@IBM Program and the Head of People and Culture at Autotrader. With tips, advice, examples and ‘how to’ actions in every chapter, this is essential reading for every HR professional.

231 Talent Management & Recruitment Table of Contents Introduction 1 Why neurodiversity is important 2 Labels - What do they mean? 3 Categories and spiky profiles 4 Eliminating kryptonite and enabling superheroes 5 Pre-employment - The lost demographics 6 Policies and proceduresWhat’s the legal stuff all about? 7 How can employers attract neurodiverse talent in recruitment? 8 Apprenticeships, internships, work placements and hiring schemes 9 Interviews and assessments 10 Making adjustmentsworkplace 11 Induction and onboarding 12 Line management means having good conversations 13 Everyday conferencesmeetings,andseminarsPlanning to be neuro-inclusive 14 Champions, staff networks and communities - How to succeed in being an inclusive workplace 15 Future workspaces and workplaces 16 Next Steps! Inclusion, equity and diversity = belonging - No one fits into one neat box 17 Appendix 18 Glossary

Crucially, these employees should be a diverse group of people with different approaches, skills and strengths in problem-solving and driving innovation. As well as focusing on gender, race, age and class, it is critical that businesses also develop a neurodiverse workforce if they are committed to outperforming the competition and achieving sustainable business growth.

Product Category: Professional Subject: Talent Management & Recruitment Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

ISBN Ebook:

Format

Author Information Theo Smith is a VP of a HR tech start-up Zinc.Work, and previously, the Recruitment Manager at NICE (The National Institute for Health and Care Excellence). Based in the UK, he was selected to be part of the Resourcing Leaders 100 (RL100), Europe’s leading network of resourcing leaders. Prior to this he was the Resourcing Manager at TMP Worldwide UK, now part of PeopleScout. He is also the host of several podcasts including ‘Neurodiversity - Eliminating Kryptonite & Enabling Superheroes’. Professor Amanda Kirby is the Founder and CEO of Do-IT Solutions, a tech for good company specialising in neurodiversity screening tools. She has more than 25 years’ experience working in the field of neurodiversity, publishing more than 100 research papers, and is internationally recognized for her work with 1000s of families and neurodivergent adults. She is also a medical doctor. Based in the UK, she advises Department of Work and Pensions on Neurodiversity as well as being an emeritus professor at the University of South Wales. She was one of the top 20 Linkedin voices in the UK in 2020. 03/08/2021 £29.99 9781398600249 9781398600256 328 (mm): 233x155

ISBN Paperback:

Neurodiversity at Work Drive Innovation, Performance and Productivity with a Neurodiverse Edition:Workforce 1 Date:

Organizational Development and Coaching

Author Information Jonathan Passmore is the Director of The Henley Centre for Coaching at Henley Business School, University of Reading. He works with leaders from business, politics and the public sector to help them improve individual, team and organizational performance through coaching. He is also an award-winning researcher, a regular international conference speaker, and the author and editor of a number of publications and books, including Leadership Coaching and Mastery in Coaching, also published by Kogan Page. in Coaching Theory, Tools and Techniques to Achieve Outstanding Coaching Edition:Performance 4 Date: 03/02/2021 £29.99 9781789665475 ISBN Ebook: 9781789665482 Pages: 392 Format (mm): 235x158 Category: Supplementary Text/ Subject: Resources,

HowDescriptioncanyouachieve coaching excellence? Use the latest research and insights from some of the biggest industry names in this fully revised fourth edition, which provides a diverse range of theory, tools and models for students and practicing coaches alike.

Excellence

Professional

Coaching Human

232 TableCoachingof Contents Introduction 1 The business of coaching 1 The development of coaching 2 What is coaching? 3 Coaching within organizations 4 Leveraging the coaching investment 5 Setting up and running your coaching practice 2 Coaching models and approaches 6 Coaching with the GROW model 7 Solution-focused coaching 8 Cognitive behavioural coaching 9 Transpersonal coaching 10 Appreciative Coaching: pathway to flourishing 11 Integrative coaching 3 Coaching issues 12 Intercultural coaching 13 Coaching and stress 14 Coaching ethics: integrity in the moment of choice 15 Coaching supervision 16 Evaluating programmescoaching 17 Coach accreditation 18 Team coaching 19 Goal setting in coaching 20 Association for Coaching 21 Index This book « Provides a complete resource for best practice coaching from industry experts including Sir John Whitmore, Peter Hawkins and David Clutterbuck « Covers all the fundamental areas of coaching, from making the personal and business cases for coaching, to using goal setting, questions and reflection and coaching evaluation and accreditation « Explores a range of coaching models and techniques in both theory and practice, to allow readers to tailor their approach to specific situations « New to this edition: new chapters including neuroscience coaching, systemic coaching, existential coaching, coaching contracts, reflection practice in coaching alongside updates to incorporate new research and models published since the last edition

ISBN Paperback:

Product

Price:

Excellence in Coaching is a comprehensive guide presenting the latest cutting-edge thinking in the field of workplace coaching. Published with the Association for Coaching, this book covers all key components of the coaching process, and examines a diverse range of coaching models including behavioural and transpersonal coaching, enabling coaches and trainers to adapt their approach and excel in their professional practice. With updates to incorporate the latest thinking and insights, this revised fourth edition of Excellence in Coaching also contains a wealth of fresh material, including new chapters on establishing a coaching business, neuroscience coaching, psychodynamic coaching and understanding the coaching relationship. Featuring tips, checklists and tools, and a collection of best-practice material from some of the biggest names in the profession including Sir John Whitmore, Peter Hawkins and David Clutterbuck. This remains essential reading for practising coaches as well as for students.

Contents Introduction 1 Fundamentals 1 What is a coaching

HR Fundamentals is a series of succinct, practical guides for students and those in the early stages of their HR careers. They are endorsed by the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD), the UK professional body for HR and people development, which has over 145,000 members worldwide.

How to Create a Coaching Culture A

Author Information Gillian Jones is Managing Director of Emerge, a development consultancy that specializes in leadership, organizational development and executive coaching. Working with a number of high-profile international organizations, she has extensive experience of implementing coaching and mentoring strategies and facilitating cultural changes. Ro Gorell is a change strategist and business coach. She is co-director of Change Optimised, which focuses on developing and coaching the workplace of the future. She is also author of Group Coaching and the coauthor with Gillian Jones of 50 Top Tools for Coaching, also published by Kogan Page. Practical Introduction Edition: 2 Date: 03/09/2018 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749483272 ISBN Ebook: 9780749483289 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 235x157 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Coaching Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

TableCoachingof culture? coaching culture strategy your

233

This book « Is part of the CIPD-endorsed HR Fundamentals series of succinct, practical guides for those in the early stages of HR « Uses practical tools, assessments and real life examples to build knowledge and skills in order to implement an efficient and effective coaching culture that empowers people and delivers business results New to this edition: demonstrates how a coaching culture should be closely aligned with broader business concerns, including bottom line results, productivity and agility in the VUCA (volatile, uncertain, complex, and ambiguous) environment. It shows how to link productivity and growth, how to adopt principles that naturally encourage coaching and engagement, how to develop autonomous teams, how to develop tools that foster flexibility, how to assess organisational readiness for change, and includes new international case studies « Online resources: a suite of downloadable templates and tools for use in practice, including a diagnostic tool to check ‘coaching culture health’ and a corresponding report, development plan, monitoring templates, and training course assessment forms

with organizational strategy: getting the right fit 2 In practice 4 Creating a coaching culture: the key components 5 Planning and developing the right

for

organization 6 Measurement tools for evaluating coaching 7 Conclusion

2 Is having a coaching culture important for your organization? 3 Aligning the

Description Management approaches and workplace culture help determine employee productivity, morale, talent acquisition and retention, and organizational adaptability. How to Create a Coaching Culture is a practical guide to embedding effective coaching behaviours within an organization to empower and engage employees to perform at their best. Using a combination of practical tools, assessments, case studies and examples, it provides guidance on how to plan and develop a strategy aligned to your organization and its goals, engage the board to secure ‘buy-in’, and how to effectively measure and evaluate initiatives in every stage of the employee lifecycle.

This fully updated second edition of How to Create a Coaching Culture contains new material on promoting employee engagement, reinventing performance reviews, and new and updated case studies from HarperCollins, British Airways and Leanintuit. Online resources include a series of downloadable templates and tools to use in practice, including a board report, communication strategy, development plan, and pre- and post-course training assessment.

234 TableCoachingof Contents 1 Introduction to this edition of Coaching and Mentoring 1 The purpose, nature and practice of coaching and mentoring 2 Coaching – what the research says 3 Learning and adaptability 4 The core skills 5 The toolkit chapter 6 Awareness of individual differences 7 Supervision for coach or mentor 8 Stories of coaching and mentoring 2 How to implementeffectivelycoaching and mentoring in organizations 9 Why invest in coaching and mentoring? What and where is the need? 10 Coaching and mentoring: what they are and how they are used in organizations 11 Implementing coaching and mentoring 12 Roles and responsibilities in coaching and mentoring 13 Supervision in practice 14 Coaching the team 15 Coaching and mentoring in the system and the impact of culture 16 What’s next? 17 References 18 Appendix: Professional governing bodies

This book « Provides a complete resource for coaching and mentoring at individual, team and organizational levels Shows how to align coaching and mentoring to an organization’s overall business strategy and measure its transformational impact « Contains insights and case studies from the NHS and the CIPD’s Steps Ahead mentoring programme « New to this edition: a chapter on group and team coaching, material on systemic coaching and how to use coaching for diversity and inclusion, as well as updates to wider thinking and models

HowDescriptioncancoaching and mentoring approaches be applied in individual, team and organizational contexts to increase performance? Coaching and Mentoring offers a complete resource for developing and implementing the latest theories and models in your organization.

Author Information Eric Parsloe was an experienced international executive coach-mentor, one of the founders of the European Mentoring and Coaching Council and founder of The OCM. He was also a member of the International Coaching Federation and the CIPD coaching and mentoring faculty. Melville Leedham is an associate lecturer at The University of Northampton. Based in Northumberland, UK, he runs his own coachmentoring business and also trains, supervises and assesses other coaches.

Coaching Practical Techniques for Developing Learning and Performance Edition: 4 Date: 03/03/2022 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398601963 ISBN Ebook: 9781398601970 Pages: 312 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Coaching Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Diane Newell is the Managing Director of OCM Discovery at The OCM, based in Oxford, UK, offering consultancy and coaching to individuals and teams to support their strategic aims.

Mentoringand

Featuring tips, tools and checklists throughout, this book covers all the key aspects of the process, from delivering feedback that builds confidence and success and observant listening to evaluating the effectiveness of initiatives and coaching supervision. Guidance is also provided on how to support people in their learning, getting buy-in from stakeholders and creating a coaching culture.

Drawing upon insights from a number of experienced coaching and mentoring professionals, it also features case studies from the NHS and the CIPD’s Steps Ahead mentoring programme to show how these approaches have been applied in practice.

This fully revised fourth edition of Coaching and Mentoring contains a new chapter on group and team coaching and further material on systemic coaching and how to use coaching for diversity and inclusion. Featuring updates to case studies and wider research, coaches and mentors of all levels of experience and those studying coaching and mentoring will benefit from this definitive text.

Pages: 368 Format (mm): 230x155 Product Category: Professional Subject: Coaching Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Author Information John Whittington is an individual and team coach with a broad portfolio of clients that includes entrepreneurs, executive leaders and public figures. He facilitates regular systemic workshop interventions in corporate environments and leads a small teaching team who share the systemic coaching and constellations approach with other professional coaches internationally. He is also a guest tutor at Henley Business School for students of the Msc in Coaching and Behavioural change in the UK and South Africa. 03/08/2020 £29.99 9781789662849 9781789662856

ISBN Ebook:

Systemic Coaching and Constellations The Principles, Practices and Application for Individuals, Teams and Edition:Groups 3 Date:

This book « Shows how to draw out and overcome systemic and relational issues in organizations to improve coaching approaches and performance Contains a wide range of practical exercises which coaches can use for their own development and with clients, both in one-to-one and group settings Includes case studies from a joint ICF/EMCC constellation workshop and examples from coaches around the world, including Australia, Mexico, France, Spain, the US and the Netherlands Includes answers to the most frequently asked questions in workshops and training sessions New to this edition: a chapter on systemic supervision, material on team coaching, systemic questions and resourcing constellations as well as fresh case studies and updates to wider research and thinking Description Systemic Coaching and Constellations offers a refreshingly uncomplicated path into a potentially complex subject, demonstrating how to understand and manage intricate relationship systems as part of a powerful coaching agenda. It provides a comprehensive introduction to the principles that sustain systems, how to map and explore them through constellations, as well as a step-by-step guide to integrating these principles and practices into coaching. Featuring a variety of case studies from around the world to illustrate different facilitation styles and approaches, it also contains practical exercises which can be used in a variety of contexts, including one-to-one coaching, group coaching, leadership development coaching and managing conflict in teams.

This updated third edition of Systemic Coaching and Constellations contains a new chapter on systemic supervision, new material on team coaching, systemic questions and resourcing constellations as well as new and refreshed case studies and updates to wider research and thinking. Whether used in an initial selection meeting or to underpin all coaching conversations and interventions, it remains an indispensable resource for coaches of all levels of experience and in all remits looking to transform their practice, as well as for those studying coaching as part of a degree or coaching qualification.

Price:

235 TableCoachingof Contents Acknowledgements 1 Outside in, inside out 1 Outside in 2 Ingredients 3 Inside out 2 Principles 4 Belonging 5 Conscience, guilt and innocence 6 The universal language of systems 7 The time is now 3 Practices 8 Map making 9 Living maps 4 Tabletop to workshop 10 One to one: principles and practices in action 11 One to many: systemic team coaching 12 Sticky moments 13 Extending your practice: further practices and applications 14 Systemic supervision 5 Familiar themes 15 Human being 16 The F word 17 Appendix: Resources and further reading 18 Meet the team 19 Postscript: Outside in, inside out 20 FAQs: Answers to frequently asked questions 21 Index

ISBN Paperback:

236

Leadership coaching 2 Coaching for authentic leadership The integrated leadership model Coaching for emotionally intelligent and inspiring leadership The Leadership Radar™ An Asian perspective on leadership coaching: Sun Tzu and The Art of War Coaching for Icarus leadership: helping leaders who can potentially derail 8 Coaching for integral leadership Coaching political leaders Leadership coaching with feedforward Coaching from a systems perspective Coaching for transactional and transformational leadership Coaching for leadership style Strategy coaching Coaching global top teams 16 Coaching using leadership myths and stories: an African perspective 17 Coaching for conversational leadership 18 Coaching for team leadership: using the Belbin ‘team roles’ model 19 Coaching for strength-based leadership 20 Coaching with complexityinformed leadership

This book « Includes wide-ranging, up-to-the-minute coverage of the leadership models and coaching frameworks most relevant to coaches working with business leaders « Brings together a group of international experts, with each chapter providing a research-grounded overview of a particular approach, and illustrating this with a real-life case study « New to this edition: Four brand new chapters on conversational leadership, team leadership, strengths focused leadership and complexity based leadership Description

Author Information Jonathan Passmore is well known for editing the Association for Coaching series, as well as for other titles in leadership and organisational psychology. He is an occupational psychologist with an international reputation, having spoken at conferences across the world from Harvard University, to Denmark, South Africa and Israel. He is also the Series Editor for the Wiley Blackwell Industrial Psychology series and has authored/co-authored Top Business Psychology Models, AI for Change Management and The Facebook Manager over the last four years. In 2010, Jonathan was awarded the AC Global Coaching Award for his contribution to practice and research. He divides his time between academia, where he works as a professor of psychology at the University of East London, and business, where he works as a practicing psychologist.

TableCoachingof

Leadership Coaching Working with Leaders to Develop Elite Edition:Performance 2 Date: 03/07/2015 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473297 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473303 Pages: 384 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Coaching Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Contents 1

Published with the Association for Coaching, this revised edition of the highly-respected Leadership Coaching will enhance and extend your coaching practice. It draws on evidence-based thinking and the writing of some of the world’s top leadership thinkers and coaching practitioners to present a start-of-the-art coverage of leadership models and how to use them effectively to benefit your coaching relationships. Leaders face many challenges, and this book will challenge you to adapt your coaching approach to suit your clients’ needs. Its coverage ranges from newer topics such as strengths focused leadership and conversational leadership to more tried-and-tested frameworks such as Porter’s strategy model and Goleman’s model of leadership styles. It also incorporates non-Western perspectives from Asia and Africa and considers multinational topics like coaching global boards.

2 Team

ISBN Ebook:

237

–Advice

–Beyond

5 The

6 Coaching

7 Many

Contents 1 High-performing

TableCoachingof teams the world needs more high-performing leadership teams high-performing team and the leadershiptransformationalteam five disciplines of successful team practice coaching is team coaching? team coaching process and journey the five disciplines team coaching different types of teams types of teams the board next frontier for systemic team coaching the high-performing team and renewing team coaching dimensions for ecosystemic team coaching Creating shared leadership, selecting, developing and coaching your own team to chief executives and other team leaders Selecting the players for a high-performing team Key steps for CEOs in creating a high-performing team with shared leadership How to find, select and work with a good team coach Developing as a team coach Supervising team coaching Team coaching methods, tools and techniques

10 New

–Systemic

This book « Provides a complete resource for coaching leadership teams, as well as international, virtual, project and account teams and executive and non-executive boards Explores the key techniques and tools to be used at each stage of the coaching process, as well as guidance on common challenges and pitfalls to avoid Includes case studies from organizations including Deloitte and General Electric (GE) to illustrate how these approaches have been applied in practice New to this edition: discussion of agile teaming, using digital team coaching apps and AI, and training team leaders to coach their own team; new and refreshed case studies; updates to incorporate new developments and research OrganizationsDescriptionare most effective when the teams responsible for their success work together collectively and in a dynamic relationship with the rest of the company. For those involved in developing leadership teams, understanding coaching practices and techniques is essential for enabling the best performance.

Leadership Team Coaching provides a comprehensive roadmap for team coaching, explaining all the key elements alongside practical tools and techniques for developing international and virtual teams, executive and non-executive boards and project and account teams in all types of organizations.

Author Information Peter Hawkins is Professor of Leadership at Henley Business School, UK, and a visiting professor at the University of Bath, UK, and Oxford Brookes University, UK. The President of the Association of Professional Executive Coaching and Supervision (APECS) and the founder and emeritus chairman of Bath Consultancy Group and chairman of Renewal Associates, he has worked with many leading companies internationally, co-designing and facilitating major change projects and coaching boards and leadership teams. A regular keynote speaker at international conferences, he is also the author of several books including Leadership Team Coaching in Practice, also published by Kogan Page. 03/06/2021 £29.99 9781789667455 9781789667462 234x157

9 Disrupting

Featuring case studies and insights from organizations including Deloitte and General Electric (GE), it also contains guidance on choosing the best team coach, creating a team-based culture and common pitfalls to avoid. This fully updated fourth edition of Leadership Team Coaching contains new material on agile teaming, using digital team coaching apps and AI, and training team leaders to coach their own team. It remains an indispensable resource for coaches and senior leaders as well as for those studying coaching as part of a degree or coaching qualification.

1 Why

3 Coaching

Price:

Product Category: Professional Subject: Coaching Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

2 The

3 The

Pages: 488 Format (mm):

ISBN Paperback:

Leadership Team Coaching Developing Edition:TransformationalCollectiveLeadership 4 Date:

4 What

8 Coaching

17 Conclusion

4 The

« Online resources: additional tools, interactive templates, summary documents and videos of the tools in action demonstrated by the authors

ThisCoachingbook « Provides over 50 easy-to-use tools and techniques to use throughout the coaching process, alongside supporting templates and tips to ensure their success

and

« New to this edition: tools for managers for performance coaching and for building your own coaching practice

« Includes tools to enhance leadership styles, manage periods of change, address conflict and to increase personal impact and influence

A complete resource for both in-house and external coaches, 50 Top Tools for Coaching presents the techniques required for every coaching situation. It focuses on every stage of the coaching process, from setting up and managing the coaching relationship, understanding and resolving conflict, developing client confidence and performance to enhancing leadership styles and coaching during periods of change. Supporting hints and tips are found throughout to maximise the effectiveness and impact of the tools. This fully revised fifth edition of 50 Top Tools for Coaching includes new tools for managers for performance coaching and for building your own coaching practice. It remains an indispensable resource for coaches of all levels of experience and in all remits, as well as managers and leaders looking to improve performance in their organizations through coaching. Online supporting resources include additional tools, interactive templates and videos of the tools in action demonstrated by the authors.

FullDescriptionofexercises, models, checklists and templates, this book covers how to assess the needs of clients, select the right tool for the circumstance and deliver effective coaching with confidence.

Author Information Gillian Jones is Managing Director of Emerge, an international development consultancy that specializes in leadership, organizational development and executive coaching. She is a motivational speaker, a Master Executive Coach and a champion for women’s development, delivering RISE, the popular empowering women’s programme, both in Europe and the Middle East. Ro Gorell is Director at Change Optimised, supporting leaders to navigate organisationwide transformation through coaching, mentoring and change management solutions. She has extensive experience in both group and individual coaching. An accredited trainer with IC Agile she is an active member of both the Agile and Change Management global communities. Based in Australia, she is the author of Group Coaching and with Gillian Jones the co-author of How to Create a Coaching Culture, also published by Kogan Page. Her latest area of research is coaching self-organizing teams. Top Tools for Coaching Complete Toolkit for Developing Empowering People Edition: 5 Date: 03/04/2021 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789666557 ISBN Ebook: 9781789666564 Pages: 352 Format (mm): 235x157 Product Category: Professional Subject: Coaching Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

238

Author Information Peter Hawkins is Professor of Leadership at Henley Business School, UK and a visiting professor at the University of Bath, UK and Oxford Brookes University, UK. Based in Bath, UK, he is the President of the Association of Professional Executive Coaching and Supervision (APECS) and the founder and emeritus chairman of Bath Consultancy Group and chairman of Renewal Associates. He has worked with many leading companies internationally, co-designing and facilitating major change projects and coaching boards and leadership teams. A regular keynote speaker at international conferences, he is also the author of several books including Leadership Team Coaching, also published by Kogan Page.

Introduction: High valuecreating teams – the latest research and development [Peter Hawkins] 2 What are leadership team coaching and systemic team coaching? [Peter Hawkins] 3 Learning from case studies and an overview of published case studies [Peter Hawkins, Catherine Carr and Jacqueline Peters] 4 Coaching the commissioning and clarifying: A case study of a professional services leadership team [Hilary Lines] 5 Coaching the co-creating within the team: Two case studies from Canada [Catherine Carr and Jacqueline Peters] 6 Coaching the Connections: Inter-team coaching at Yeovil Hospital Foundation Trust [Peter Hawkins and Gavin Boyle] 7 Coaching the team working with its core learning [Sue Coyne and Judith Nicol] 8 Systemic team coaching: co-creation by four teams – A Japanese case study: Kyoto Toyota Motor Company [Hidetoshi Tajika]

Featuring expert contributions from chief executives, team coaches, team leaders and consultants in organizations including Comair and the UK National Health Service (NHS), this practical guide illustrates best practice tailored to the needs of each organization. The new and updated third edition of Leadership Team Coaching in Practice incorporates the latest research and thinking in the field, including new material on developing the personal core capacities for systemic team coaching.

Creating a ‘teaming’, and ‘team of teams’ culture and a strategy for team coaching [Peter Hawkins] 17 Embodied approaches to team coaching [Peter Hawkins and David Presswell]

Contents

Leadership Team Coaching in Practice provides an overview of the tools and techniques for coaching leadership teams and shows how these approaches have been applied around the world in a variety of team types and industries.

20 Systemic team coaching –where next? [Peter Hawkins and Krister Lowe]

« Features case studies from organizations from around the world and from a range of sectors, including Comair and the UK National Health Service (NHS) to show how these approaches have been applied in practice

Leadership Team Coaching in Practice Case Studies on Creating Highly Effective Teams Edition: 3 Date: 03/02/2022 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789666212 ISBN Ebook: 9781789666229 Pages: 472 Format (mm): 234x157 Product Category: Professional Subject: Coaching Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Coaching the board: How coaching boards is different from coaching executive teams, with case examples from the private, public and voluntary sectors [Peter Hawkins and Alison Hogan] 16

Alongside updates to case studies to offer a long-term view of interventions, the third edition contains new case studies including team coaching in Toyota through a period of transformation. There is a new medley chapter of short case stories that address some of the regularly asked questions by new team coaches and new material that explores ways of creating a teaming and ‘team of teams’ culture. This book remains an essential resource for executive and team coaches, CEOs, team leaders, organizational development consultants, and those studying coaching as part of a degree or coaching qualification.

18 Developing the personal core capacities for systemic team coaching [Peter Hawkins] 19 Training systemic team coaches [Peter Hawkins, John Leary-Joyce and Hilary Lines]

239

« Shows how to use coaching tools and techniques to increase performance in leadership teams and the organization as a whole

Team coaching for organizational learning and innovation: A case study of an Australian pharmaceutical [Padraig O’Sullivan and Carole Field] 10 The team coaching journey with a leadership team in a period of transformation [Olivia Chauvain, Claire Forest, Fanny Sensen and Christophe Mikolajczak] 11 Systemic Team Coaching combined with a leadership team coaching program: Peel Police Canada [Heather Clayton, Catherine Carr and Nishan Duraiappah] 12 Developing an effective ‘team of teams’ approach in Comair [Barbara Walsh, Danny Tuckwood, Erik Venter, Geraldine Welby-Cooke, Tracey Mccreadie and Justin Dell, Peter Hawkins] 13 A medley of team coaching vignettes: challenges and innovation [Peter Hawkins, Helen Zink, Nathalie Lerotic Pavlik and Nqobekile Dorah Manyoni, Monica Callon, Lucy Shenouda and Ralph Cochrane, Declan Woods]

This book

« New to this edition: a new medley chapter of short case stories that address some of the regularly asked questions by new team coaches; a new chapter that explores ways of creating a teaming and team of teams culture; new material on the role of team coaching in mergers and developing the personal core capacities for systemic team coaching; a new case study describing team coaching in Toyota through a period of transformation

ADescriptionhigh-performing and cohesive leadership team is essential for organizational success.

TableCoachingof

14 Assessment and evaluation of teams and team coaching [Peter Hawkins] 15

240 TableCoachingof Contents 1 Introduction 1 Brain areas 2 Prefrontal Cortex 3 Basal Ganglia 4 Striatum 5 Insular Cortex 6 Amygdala 7 Anterior Cingulate Cortex 8 Hypothalamus 9 Hippocampus 10 Cerebellum 2 Brain chemicals 11 Cortisol 12 Dopamine 13 Oxytocin 14 Serotonin 15 Noradrenaline 16 GABA & Glutamate 3 Foundational brain concepts 17 Neurons & Synapses 18 Neuroplasticity 19 Threat / Reward response 20 Neuroimaging 21 Working memory 22 HPA Axis 23 Mirror neurons 4 Brain networks 24 Brain networks 5 The quantum brain 25 The quantum brain 6 Neuroscience of classic Coaching areas 26 Self control / willpower 27 Optimism 28 Mindfulness 29 Expectations 30 Beliefs 31 The Foundational Four - Safe Space, Listening, Questioning, Reflecting 32 Flow 33 Motivation 34 Decision-making 35 Goals 36 Habits 7 Neuroscience of not so classic Coaching areas 37 Choice Architecture 38 False Memory 39 Trust 40 Fairness 41 Loneliness 42 Conclusion This book « Presents the latest neuroscientific research in an accessible and practical way for coaches and managers who coach « Demonstrates the benefits neuroscience offers the coaching practice, including how to create the best coaching environment and the opportunity to ask more tailored questions to find an effective intervention « Provides helpful tools and insights, including from Marshall Goldsmith and Susan Grandfield, on coaching concepts such as goals, decision-making and motivation to enable coaches to deliver greater value to their clients « New to this edition: updated material on key brain concepts and chemicals; new tools and techniques in coaching areas including expectations and loneliness; new material and insights for managers who coach ManyDescriptioncoachingtools and techniques are now well established, but how do they actually work?

Author Information Amy Brann is an author, consultant and global speaker. She is the founder of Synaptic Potential, through which she works with companies including Warner Brothers, EY, Twinings, the NHS and Mondelez International to help them better understand their teams, clients and organizations as a whole. Based in Warwick, UK, she is also the author of Make Your Brain Work, published by Kogan Page. for Coaches How coaches and managers can use the latest insights to benefit clients and Edition:teams 3 Date: 03/03/2022 £29.99 ISBN 9781398604193 Ebook: 9781398604209 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Coaching Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

This fully updated third edition covers the latest neuroscientific research on key brain areas and their functions, such as the Prefrontal cortex and Amygdala which affect attention, processing and emotional regulation. With tips and insights throughout, it crucially demonstrates the ways in which coaches and managers who coach can use this information effectively and practically in their everyday work. Neuroscience for Coaches is a vital resource for improving coaching practice with the latest scientific developments, tools and techniques.

Paperback:

Based on extensive research, Neuroscience for Coaches provides a clear explanation of the aspects of neuroscience that are relevant to coaching so coaches can describe to clients why particular techniques work and the benefits to be gained from using them. It also features interviews with Marshall Goldsmith, Susan Grandfield, Christian van Nieuwerburgh and Kim Morgan on topics including mindfulness and behaviour change in coaching.

Neuroscience

ISBN

Price:

The third edition of Neuroscience for Coaches answers this question to help coaches and managers deliver greater value to clients and employees.

may impact these needs « Shows

in the workforce CoachingDescriptionanddeveloping

Packed full of practical tips, tools, case studies, interviews, examples and activities to work through in practice, this book allows coaches, leaders and line managers to create an inclusive culture of belonging and psychological safety to ensure that all employees flourish. There is also specific guidance on how to deal with employee trauma such as prejudice, racism, bullying, burnout, imposter syndrome and grief as well as how to cultivate a system of acceptance and encourage all employees to safely bring their authentic selves to work. Supported by expert advice, personal experience and industry research, this book is crucial reading for all coaches, leaders and managers responsible for talent development.

« Explains

Pages:

and

in the workplace « Includes

A Practical Guide Edition: 1 Date: 03/04/2022 Price: £29.99 9781398604506 ISBN Ebook: 9781398604544 272 Format (mm): 234x156 Coaching Human Resources,

and

241 TableCoachingof Contents 1 Introduction 2 Coaching the lived experience 3 Identity 4 Belonging 5 Inclusion 6 Entanglement 7 Trauma 8 Resilience 9 Authenticity 10 Psychological Safety 11 Thriving 12 Equity 13 Allyship

ISBN Paperback:

and

confidently

employees « Provides

employees is not a one size fits all activity. Race, gender, class, education, culture and religion can all affect the needs of employees. Coaches, leaders and line managers must address this. Diversity, Inclusion and Belonging in Coaching is a practical guide for coaches, leaders and line managers which explains how to understand different employee needs, identify what experiences can impact these needs and shows how to develop a truly inclusive approach to coaching and employee development. It also covers how to recognize the difference between employees in survival mode as opposed to those who are thriving, feeling psychologically safe and displaying healthy resilience.

Diversity, Inclusion and Belonging in Coaching

« Shows

Product Category: Professional Subject:

and

Organizational Development and Coaching

and identify which

Author Information Salma Shah is the Founder and Director of the award-winning Mastering Your Power, a certified coach training programme designed with a wider systemic lens of diversity, inclusion, belonging and equity. Based in London, UK she works with clients at a senior level in public, private and voluntary sectors. She supervises and trains other coaches as well as presenting at events globally. She has worked with clients across a range of industries, including: Teenage Cancer Trust, Reuters O2 and British Transport Police. She has also delivered programs for major international organisations including: Oracle and Ernst and Young (Kuwait, Palestine).

This book how to assess different employee needs experiences coaches and line managers how to discuss race, gender, class, culture, education socioeconomic issues with their practical tips, tools, advice, examples and activities to work through in practice specific guidance on how to deal with employee trauma such as prejudice, racism, bullying, burn out, impostor syndrome grief how coaches can build an inclusive culture encourage authenticity acceptance

Transformation Edition:

Date:

Author Information Sue Noble is the Founder and Director of Noble Learning Ltd where she delivers qualification, training and development in coaching, change management and leadership to individuals and organizations. Based in Sussex, UK, she is a founding member of the Change Management Institute (CMI) Coaching and Mentoring Think Tank. Amy Tarrant is the Project Management Lead for a global corporate and speciality insurer where she focuses on internal change capacity. She is also their Programme Manager for the Operations Transformation Programme and is based in Brighton, UK. She is a founding member of the CMI’s Coaching and Mentoring Special Interest Group. to Wellbeing, Productivity and Resilience During Business 1 03/09/2022 £29.99 9781398607026 9781398607033 288 (mm): 234x156

ISBN Ebook:

Format

HowDescriptioncanIcoach

ChangeOrganizationalPeopleCoachingthrough Tools

This book « Outlines what organizational change is, the different forms it can take and how it impacts coaching Explains how to use evidenced-based coaching techniques to coach employees during turbulent times to support the delivery of lasting business change Provides practical advice and coaching interventions which are all county-agnostic and can be used with employees both in-person and remotely Includes over 20 tools, techniques and frameworks with suggestions for what type of organizational change they’re best suited to employees effectively when business change is constant? What tools and techniques can I use both in-person and remotely? How can I reduce the stress caused by business transformation to boost productivity and wellbeing?

Product Category: Professional Subject: Coaching Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Coaching People through Organizational Change is a practical guide for professional coaches and managers alike. It is specifically designed to support those coaching employees during uncertain times in a new world of work which is in a constant state of flux. It outlines what organizational change is, the different forms it can take and how to use evidenced-based coaching techniques to support the delivery of lasting business change. It will help those coaching to develop a greater understanding of how the brain makes decisions and adjusts to change and provides practical advice and guidance that can be used to deliver the most effective coaching intervention. Including over 20 tools and frameworks each supported by a suggestion for what type of organizational change the activity is best suited for, this is invaluable reading for anyone responsible for coaching and talent development whether as a professional coach or a line manager. Including country-agnostic advice that can be used with employees both in-person and remotely, this book will help to reduce stress and presenteeism and to boost productivity, performance, resilience and wellbeing.

242 TableCoachingof Contents 1 COACHING AND CHANGE 1 Organizational Change 2 Coaching in a Change Context 3 Behaviours, Thinking and Decision Making During Change 4 Identifying Coaching Solutions for Change Challenges 5 Evidence-based Coaching Interventions 6 Developing an Internal Coaching Capacity 7 Wellbeing, Stress and Resilience 8 Productivity and Performance 2 COACHING FRAMEWORKSTECHNIQUESTOOLS,ANDFOR CHANGE

Pages:

Improve

Price:

ISBN Paperback:

www.koganpage.com OperationsLogistics, and Supply ManagementChain Innovation and Best Practice in Intro Logistics & Supply Chain HumanitarianSupplySupplySupplyProcurementManufacturingMaritimeTransportRetailWarehouseOperationsGlobalLogisticsLogisticsManagementManagementLogistics&SupplyChainLogistics&ProductionChainFinanceChainAnalyticsChainManagementLogisticsandSupply Chain Sustainability

Choose from our ebook collections to equip your students with knowledge and practical guidance for academic and professional success. Logistics, Supply Chain & Operations Ebook Collections 4 ManagementWarehouse Systems ManufacturingforExcellence TheToolkitInventory No. of ebooks: 15 Operations Help students to learn the skills needed to improve operational efficiency and cost effectiveness. 1Supply Chain Equip students with vital skills to effectively manage supply chains. Supply AnalyticsChainandModelling Blockchain and the Supply Chain ManagementSupplyLogisticsSustainableandChain No. of ebooks: 45 2 TheProcurementTechnologyHandbook A Practical Guide to E-auctions Procurementfor ProcurementLeadingStrategy No. of ebooks: 17 Procurement Prepare students to lead exceptional procurement teams and deliver sustainable competitive advantage. 3 E-Logistics Logistics & ManagementRetail The Handbook of Logistics ManagementDistributionand No. of ebooks: 40 Logistics Introduce students to the field of logistics with clear and understandable explanations of key concepts and methods. Contact us at corporate-enquiries@koganpage.com Your library can choose a collection above or create your own bespoke collection. Unlimited concurrent users | MARC records | LMS/VLE www.koganpage.com/collectionsintegration

245 Intro Logistics & Supply Chain Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Concepts of Logistics and Distribution 1 Introduction to Logistics and Distribution 2 Integrated Logistics and the Supply Chain 3 Customer Service and Logistics 4 Channels of Distribution 5 Key Issues and Challenges for Logistics 2 Planning for Logistics 6 Planning Framework for Logistics 7 Logistics Processes 8 Supply Chain Segmentation 9 Logistics Costs and Trade-Offs 10 Logistics Network Planning 11 Logistics Management and Organisation 12 Omnichannel Fulfilment 13 Manufacturing Logistics 3 Procurement, Inventory and Demand Forecasting 14 Procurement and Supply 15 Inventory - The Basic Concepts 16 Inventory and the Supply Chain 17 Inventory Planning and Demand Forecasting 4 Warehousing and Storage 18 Principles of Warehousing 19 Storage and Handling Systems (Palletised) 20 Storage and Handling Systems (Non-Palletised) 21 Order Picking and Packing 22 Receiving and Despatch 23 Warehouse Design 24 Warehouse Management and Information 5 Freight Transport 25 International Logistics - Modal Choice 26 Maritime Transport 27 Air Transport 28 Rail and Intermodal Transport 29 Road Freight TransportVehicle Selection 30 Road Freight TransportVehicle Costing 31 Road Freight TransportPlanning and Resourcing 32 Road Freight TransportVehicle Routeing & Scheduling 33 International Freight Forwarding 6 Outsourcing Logistics 34 Outsourcing - Operations & Services 35 Outsourcing - Decision Criteria 36 Outsourcing - The Selection Process 37 Outsourcing Management 7 Operational Management 38 Cost and MonitoringPerformance 39 Benchmarking 40 Information Communicationand Technology in the Supply Chain 41 Security and Safety 42 Logistics and the Environment 43 Humanitarian Logistics

This book « Unique breadth and depth of coverage of supply chain strategy and logistics/distribution including step-by-step strategic accounts of setting up and operating supply chains for maximum value and the tactical elements of logistics and distribution Worked examples using current real-world data (flow charts, tables, maps, equations) from the authors’ first-hand experience bring the concepts to life « Figures and flow charts show how the elements of supply chains are interdependent, and a dedicated chapter on supply chain integration brings them together New to this edition: the latest innovations in logistics and supply chain management including artificial intelligence, cyber-security, 5G mobile networks, drones and cobots

« Online Resources: Lecture slides (featuring tables, images and formulae from the text), infographic, acronyms and abbreviations and useful formulae

FullyDescriptiongraspthecore principles of logistics, distribution management and the supply chain, in addition to emerging trends and the latest technologies, with this definitive guide that offers clear and straightforward explanations.

Written by an author team with extensive practical experience in some of the most challenging environments across the world, this seminal text is an invaluable resource for both practitioners and students, providing a useful desk reference for topics across the wide ranging and vitally important fields of logistics and the supply chain.

Author Information Alan Rushton worked in the chemical industry and is a former Director of Dialog Consultants. He was the Director of Graduate Programmes at the Centre for Logistics and Supply Chain Management at Cranfield University. Phil Croucher held several senior posts in industry, across many countries. He is an independent supply chain consultant and lecturer, and has an MSc in Logistics and Distribution Management from Cranfield University. Peter Baker worked in international freight forwarding and then as a consultant completing over 80 supply chain projects across the world. He was a senior logistics lecturer and, more recently a Visiting Fellow, at Cranfield University. Edition: 7 Date: 03/01/2022 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398602045 ISBN Ebook: 9781398602052 Pages: 824 Format (mm): 240x171 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Logistics & Supply

The seventh edition offers: Updates and solutions designed to meet the challenges faced by those studying and working in the sector New coverage of future supply chain related technologies, including artificial intelligence, data analytics, digital twins and autonomous mobile robots and how these can be used to optimize operations and increase productivity Online resources including lecture slides (tables, images and formulae from the text), glossary of terms, weblinks, blog articles, video interviews and infographics.

The Handbook of Logistics ManagementDistributionand

Intro

The Handbook provides practitioners and students with a complete, step-by-step overview of the many different aspects of setting up, managing and optimizing supply chains. Designed to offer a full appreciation of how supply chains are planned and operated, it is structured logically and delves into topics in more clarity and detail than disparate collections of research papers. Integrating both strategic and tactical insights, this textbook is underpinned throughout by real-world data and worked examples that bring the concepts to life.

Chain

246 Intro Logistics & Supply Chain Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction – What is logistics? 2 First steps – Strategic decisions 3 Storage – The physical infrastructure 4 Warehouse handling equipment 5 Warehouse operations 6 Warehouse management systems 7 Packaging and customer requirements 8 Road vehicles 9 Abnormal indivisible loads 10 Vehicle operations – Costs and their reduction 11 Legal requirements and compliance 12 Vehicle routing and networks 13 Rail and other inland transport 14 Seafreight and airfreight 15 Terms and conditions and insurance 16 Customs and imports 17 Export requirementsdocumentation 18 Miscellaneous supply chain topics 19 Appendix list of suppliers of services This book « Presents a step-by-step guide to all aspects of logistics, from the warehouse to delivery, giving newcomers to the industry a complete overview of all the logistics processes « Provides practical, accessible, up-to-date information on the field of logistics, covering today’s best practices « Features illustrations, reference charts and tables which provide useful visual explanations for both students and professionals « Online resources: Lecture slides and bonus Figures Description Few people come into logistics management with knowledge and experience of all aspects of the profession. Some may have worked their way up from driving a vehicle but know little of warehouses, others may find themselves taking responsibility for logistics as part of a wider remit such as operations. A Practical Guide to Logistics aims to equip them with the necessary knowledge to move on to the next stage, with simple non-technical explanations of the options available, and impartial advice on how to choose the right option for their business. It is also an excellent primer for students studying logistics for the first time, on BSc or MSc courses, as well as practitioners on professional training courses.

Author Information Jerry

A Practical Guide to Logistics is a straightforward guide taking readers through all aspects of this fascinating industry, covering packaging, transportation, warehousing and exporting and importing of goods. There is a real need for this basic knowledge, both for practitioners starting out in the industry or more experienced practitioners who may have gaps in their knowledge. The book examines each aspect of logistics in turn and the text is supported by numerous illustrations. Rudd is a Logistics and Supply Chain professional with over 25 years’ experience. He has worked with companies such as Ford, Peugeot, the Bank of England and Wincanton. £29.99 9780749486327

A Practical Guide to Logistics Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Edition: 1 Date: 03/07/2019 Price:

ISBN Paperback: 9780749486310 ISBN Ebook:

Pages: 384 Format (mm): 239x169 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Intro Logistics & Supply Chain

« Gain insights into a variety of topics including technology-related issues, setting and reviewing budgets, managing economic performance and managing costs

Action A Case Study Collection in

Table of Contents Supply chain process design Efficient integration of shipping into intra-regional supply chains

Supply in Supply Chain, Logistics, Procurement and Operations Management

JohnChristodoulou,[AnastasiaZeeshanRaza,Woxenius] Overcrowding in a hospital emergency department – A supply chain management referral pathway to reduce overcrowding [Ingrid Hunt, Noreen Spillane] X company’s OTD (On-Time Delivery)

Edition: 1 Date: 03/10/2019 Price: £160.00 ISBN Ebook: 9780749483715 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 240x160 Product Category: Reference Subject: Intro Logistics & Supply Chain

Volume 2 of Logistics, Supply Chain and Procurement Case Study Collection contains new case studies tackling Supply Chain and Procurement issues, aiming to provide solutions affecting a range of different businesses. Comprehensive in scope and scrupulous in detail, this collection includes actual events experienced by businesses of every size, from SMB’s to some of the most successful corporations in manufacturing, transportation, maritime and other industries. Readers will discover proven tactics and innovative solutions for handling uncertainties, solving problems and circumventing risk, plus a wealth of information to guide strategy and decision making. Readers involved in logistics and supply chain management will find the Logistics, Supply Chain and Procurement Case Study Collection full of: immediate application of strategies and tactics to situations and challenges; valuable tools for testing management proficiency in crisis mitigation and resolution; independent learning modules and professional training programmes; expanded questionand-answer sections designed to measure knowledge transfer and lessons learned; engaging, topical situations highly relevant to the fields of logistics, supply chain management and operations. Students and prospective managers will learn crucial skills to meet current challenges, qualify for professional advancement and achieve success.

247 Intro Logistics & Supply Chain Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

« Understand unique perspectives that demonstrate how leading organisations stay competitive across the globe in a variety of geographical contexts

Author Information Professor Richard Wilding OBE is recognised globally for his thought leadership in Logistics & Supply Chain Management. Richard is a highly acclaimed presenter and regularly speaks at Industrial Conferences and has undertaken lecture tours of Europe and Asia at the invitation of local Universities; Confederations of Industry. As Chair (Full Professor) in Supply Chain Strategy at the Centre for Logistics and Supply Chain Management, Cranfield School of Management UK, Richard works with European and International companies on Logistics and Supply Chain projects in all sectors including pharmaceutical, retail, automotive, high technology, food, drink and professional services to name a few. He has published widely in the area of Supply Chain Management and is Editorial Advisor to a number of top journals in this area. He is currently Chair of CILT.

« New to this edition: Covers hot new topics and vital new areas of research which will guide future strategies, as well as being edited by industry expert and highly respected academic, Richard Wilding Description

Chains

Closing the cycle from tree to product, x company’s sustainability journey [Gendao Li, Alireza Shokri, Jie Ma] Environmentally responsible packaging in global supply chains [Henrik Pålsson] Freight transport, storage and distribution organisations to be able to identify customer requirements [Graham Heron, Erica Ballentine] Supply chain information system design 9 Protecting supply chains from counterfeit products [Mark Manning, Daniel Stanton] 10 The same but different; a comparative analysis of common reverse logistics and closed loop supply chain issues in the UK multiple retail sector [Graham Heron, Erica Ballentine] 11 Supply chain disruption [Steve O’Sullivan] 12 Defence support chain performance dashboard development [Alan Woods]

This book « Learn from in-depth case studies which deliver insights and perspectives on current and emerging issues, trends and significant new areas of research

« Learn from first-hand experiences from subject matter experts in industry and academia regarding how to reach business objectives and overcome considerable obstacles

Nussbaum]Li,methodologyapplicationimprovementperformance–Theofleansix-sigma[GendaoAlirezaShokri,Kyrill Developing best-practice in operational workforce planning [Peter Hilton] Supply chain network and infrastructure design 5 Why procurement should want to pay for performance – A case study of how buyer and sellers aligned to create the most profit for both [Todd C Snelgrove]

Foreword by Martin Christopher Description

of Logistics at Hull

248

The Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management Case Study Collection contains real-life scenarios from leading companies including Volvo, Vortex, Honda of America, Green Cargo and Swedish Transport Administration. It includes a foreword by Martin Christopher. Comprehensive in scope and scrupulous in detail, this collection includes actual events experienced by businesses of every size, from SMB’s to some of the most successful corporations in manufacturing, transportation, hospitality and other industries. Readers will discover proven tactics and innovative solutions for handling uncertainties, solving problems and circumventing risk, plus a wealth of information to guide strategy and decision making. Readers involved in logistics and supply chain management will find the Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management Case Study Collection full of: immediate application of strategies and tactics to situations and challenges; valuable tools for testing management proficiency in crisis mitigation and resolution; independent learning modules and professional training programmes; expanded questionand-answer sections designed to measure knowledge transfer and lessons learned; engaging, topical situations highly relevant to the fields of logistics, supply chain management and operations. Students and prospective managers will learn crucial skills to meet current challenges, qualify for professional advancement and achieve success. David B. Grant Professor University

« In-depth case studies deliver insight and perspective on current and emerging issues, trends and significant new areas of research in the fields of logistics, supply chain and operations

« Cases cover a variety of topics including how to tackle technology-related issues, setting and reviewing budgets, managing economic performance and managing costs

« Imparts unique perspectives that demonstrate how leading organisations stay competitive across the globe in a variety of geographical contexts

« Covers hot new topics and vital new areas of research which will guide future strategies

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

« Shares first-hand experiences and knowledge from subject matter experts in industry and academia regarding how to reach business objectives and overcome considerable obstacles

This book

Author Information Professor

Intro Logistics & Supply Chain

Business School. He has over 175 publications and is on the editorial boards of numerous journals. StudyManagementandSupplyLogistics,ChainOperationsCaseCollection Edition: 1 Date: 03/03/2016 Price: £160.00 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477493 Pages: 384 Format (mm): 24x156 Product Category: Reference Subject: Intro Logistics & Supply Chain

Repeat from last catalogue (Gabby) Logistics cases studies advert.pdf Get access to dozens of real-life examples you can share with your students. Invaluable for students needing to understand key concepts and their real-life application, our case study collection brings operations management, supply chain management and logistics to life. You can access these resources in one of three ways: 1. Buy EPDF access to individual case studies for use in teaching. If you’re interested in licenses for multiple users, please contact kpinfo@koganpage.com 2. Ask your university library to buy a copy of the complete Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management Case Study Collection in print or ebook format. Under the CLA (Copyright Licencing Agency) rules you can print/copy 10% of the book in teaching (which roughly equates to 3 cases) 3. Get your library to buy a print or ebook copy of the collection for reference Logistics, Supply Chain and StudyManagementOperationsCaseCollection Access a free case study by visiting www.koganpage.com/free-case-study

An Introduction to Macrologistics Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Edition: 1 Date: 03/05/2020 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789664010 ISBN Ebook: 9781789664027 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 233x157 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Intro Logistics & Supply Chain

250 Intro Logistics & Supply Chain Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 An introduction to logistics and macrologistics 2 Business logistics and its role in customer service 3 Measuring communicatingand the value of logistics 4 An introduction to strategy 5 Logistics strategy 6 Strategy implementation and change management 7 The need for macrologistics 8 The instrumentation of macrologistics 9 Macrologistics strategy 10 Logistics and the future This book « Explains measurement processes for macrologistics, looking at GDP and freight flow measurements « Includes case studies examining the use of freight-flow and logistics cost models « Based on vital research from Stellenbosch University « Online resources: lecture slides Description Macrologistics is a strategic view of logistics as a production factor on national scales to support a shift towards sustainability. The book details logistics’ evolution from a functional discipline to a value chain optimiser and, ultimately, an enabler of sustainability, including the evolution of metrics to support this shift. Macrologistics instrumentation involves striving towards the lowest total cost of ownership for national economies where, to improve decision-making, these costs should ultimately include the societal and ecological costs incurred due to logistics activities.

From Logistics Strategy to Macrologistics represents macrologistics research outputs for a number of developing economies, identifying distinctive macrologistics policy and infrastructure investments themes to address national logistics challenges in developing economies. The book culminates in a discussion on the potential future role of logistics to support the shift to a more sustainable society, where an acceptance of a degrowth paradigm might be required, and even advisable, for a more secure, fulfilling future. Logistics (and economics) scholars, researchers and practitioners should steer their work towards contributing to the development of an ecologically sustainable society, where resources and returns are shared widely, sustainably and equitably.

Preface 1 Supply chain – General introduction 2 Introduction to the business dimension of supply chain management 3 Introduction to the technical dimension of supply chain management 4 Introduction to the leadership dimension of supply chain management 5 Scenarios in a fresh food company 6 Knowledge in action, with a supply chain simulation 7 Mastering the technical dimension of supply chain 8 Mastering the leadership dimension of supply chain 9 Supply chain in a VUCA world 10 Imagining business challenges for the supply chain 11 Imagining technical challenges for the supply chain 12 Imagining leadership challenges for the supply chain 13 Epilogue 14 References This book « Establish a holistic view of the many complex, real-life scenarios that supply chain managers face, in the context of a real company situation « Gain a better understanding of the challenges of supply chain management and develop effective problem solving skills « Discover how to deliver optimal performance by integrating the business, technical and leadership dimensions of supply chain management « Learn how to tear down silos and create the right cross-functional mindset « Online resources: free access to the online business simulation game The Fresh Connection, supporting templates, frameworks and PowerPoints Description Mastering the Supply Chain is an introduction to supply chain management. The book integrates theory with practice and aims to create a cross-functional mindset in students and practitioners. It provides a wide overview of relevant supply chain concepts and sets out the challenges that need to be overcome in order to find practical ways of implementing these in a real company situation. Readers are continuously asked to actively reflect on the choices they make, thus experiencing first-hand the many challenges that good and effective supply chain management presents.

Mastering the Supply Chain presents a different way of learning that puts the reader at the heart of a life-like situation, so that they experience the impact of every decision they make, not just in their own ‘silo’ but across the business. In this way, they will learn that many supply chain concepts are relatively simple to understand, but not so easy to apply in reality. Chapter 6 helps students to pull everything they’ve learned together and see how the concepts play out in the real world by guiding them through an interactive demonstration of the online business simulation game The Fresh Connection (free access is included with the book). This is a key text for students on supply chain management BScs and MScs as well as background reading for students playing the full version of The Fresh Connection Business Simulation game.

Author Information A freelance trainer and consultant, Ed Weenk is also a senior lecturer in Supply Chain at Maastricht School of Management, EADA Business School in Barcelona and the Antwerp Management School.

Mastering the Supply Chain Principles, Practice and Real-Life Edition:Applications 1 Date: 03/03/2019 Price: £36.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749484484 ISBN Ebook: 9780749484491 Pages: 296 Format (mm): 237x171 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Intro Logistics & Supply Chain

251 Intro Logistics & Supply Chain Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Table of

Contents

We provide 24/7 support and expert guidance to guarantee successful implementation.

The Fresh Connection

Quickly switch between a classic, online, or hybrid classroom se ing

FIND THE RIGHT BALANCE at any time!

Our integrated Learning Approach allows for complete ﬂexibility. When designing your course, you can easily tailor it to meet speciﬁc wishes!

– Laura M Meade, Director of International Programs, Professor of Supply Chain Practice, Neeley School of Business, Texas Christian University, Forth Worth – Professor Samir Dani, Professor of Logistics and Supply Chain Management, Head of Logistics, Marketing, Hospitality and Analytics, University of Huddersﬁeld, UK

Mastering the Supply Chain provides an invaluable guide for understanding how decisions are made when managing the supply chain strategically. The emphasis of the book is on practical learning and hence the book is wri en around 'The Fresh Connection' supply chain game. Having used this game in my courses over several years, this book would be an excellent companion. The book will provide value for UG, PG and MBA courses with a focus on supply chain management.

The Fresh Connection allows you to achieve a perfect balance between methodol ogy and a practical approach. This cross-functional business simulation game engages participants in turning around a manufacturer of fruit juices. In teams of 4, participants will represent the functional roles of VP Purchasing, VP Operations, VP Supply Chain, and VP Sales. Accredited by professionals and educators from all over the world, it will motivate your students to deliver optimal performance. It pushes students to develop critical skills when dealing with supply chain best practices from theory and real life. Experience how this new tool creates high energy levels and keep your students engaged.

theMasteringSupply Chain by Ed Weenk

theMasteringSupply Chain Textbook Educator Course Materials Business simulation game Exercises, videos & more

Flip the switch and change how you teach your students. You control whether it is in a physical classroom, fully online, or a hybrid setting.

Ingeniously incorporates knowledge and practice of the fundamentals. The diagrams are especially descriptive, and the combina tion of theory with experiential learning is a game-changer in the quest to educate students and professionals how to manage supply chains in an ever-changing world.

The ultimate value chain experience

An out-of-the-box solution

Easy to implement into your curriculum Integrates theory with practice and aims to create a cross-functional mindset in students and practitioners.

Easy and fast to implement! Everything needed to start your course today is included. Our Teaching Approach takes away the stress of planning & designing your course.

The Fresh Connection is now available with Textbook!

What’s included in our Integrated Learning Approach?

LearningTestimonials&Personal

The beneﬁts of using The Fresh Connection in your course Game will experience the impact of every decision they make, not just in their own functional ‘silo’ but across their business! Game setup in a nutshell entails participants playing the web-based business game in teams of 4 people; either virtually or in classroom setting. Eeach of the team members take up one of the four VP roles available in the business simulation game. The teams are challenged to manage a virtual company and consider corpo rate strategy and business objectives. Our business simulation games provide the ultimate learning experience using best practices from theory

– Professor Dr.Ing. Gaby Neumann Professor in Engineering Logistics Technische Hochschule Wildau

virtuallyBusinessOnlinegameTeamsof4orinclassroom

Creating the curriculum with the teaching materials was easily done. I had very limited time and was able to set up an entire semester in one evening.

Alignment is key Real world Experience Teamwork skills Critical thinking

The only time I have trouble ge ing my students out of the classroom is when we’re playing The Fresh Connection.

development

Wide variety of course materials available Switch instantly between classroom, online, or a hybrid setting

– Dr. Roberto Perez–Franco Director, MIT Supply Chain Strategy Lab Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT)

setupTheteam

Repeat from last catalogue Fresh Connection software advert.pdf Easy to use and implement Increases engagementstudent Perfectly match any knowledge level Setup gameplay to highlight course topics

Multiple learning cycles create a step-by-step learning experience Put complex topics directly into practice

Developed by: www.inchainge.com

Ask your Kogan Page sales representative for more information: kpinfo@koganpage.com

The Blue Connection allows you to achieve a perfect balance between methodol ogy and a practical approach. This innovative web-based business game engages participants in the transitioning from a take-make-dispose linear production towards circular business models by implementing a circular strategy for a virtual e-bike manufacturer. In teams of 4, participants will represent the functional roles of VP Finance, VP Purchasing, VP Supply Chain, and VP Sales.

Easy and fast to implement! Everything needed to start your course today is included. Our Integrated Approach takes away the stress of planning & designing your course. Flip the switch and change how you teach your students. You control whether it is in a physical classroom, fully online, or a hybrid setting. We provide 24/7 support and expert guidance to guarantee successful implementation.

Quickly switch between a classic, online, or hybrid classroom se ing An out-of-the-box solution What’s included in our Integrated Learning Approach?

theMasteringCircular Economy by Ed Weenk and Rozanne Henzen is now available with Textbook! Easy to implement into your curriculum Integrates theory with practice! It aims to oﬀer students and practitioners a deeper understanding of circularity from a business and value chain management perspective.

The Blue Connection

FIND THE RIGHT BALANCE at any time!

theMasteringCircular Economy Textbook Educator Course Materials Business simulation game Exercises, videos & more Our integrated Learning Approach allows for complete ﬂexibility. When designing your course, you can easily tailor it to meet speciﬁc wishes!

This timely book provides a thorough overview of the diﬀerent aspects of the circular economy and concrete tools and exercises for implementing a circular strategy. The combination with The Blue Connection simulation game enables an experiential learning experience that will ensure that students master knowledge and skills needed in the circular economy.

Experience a circular future

Hands-on and engaging writing style with a brilliant structure where the reader is taken on the journey from idea to practice, and towards envisioning the future. Truly recom mendable! – Dr. Desirée Knoppen, Associate professor of circular economy and supply chain management, EADA Business School Barcelona – Eric Dooms, Associate professor of Strategy at TIAS School for Business and Society

Accredited by professionals and educators from all over the world, it will motivate your students to deliver optimal performance. Experience how this new tool creates high energy levels and keeps your students engaged!

At universities, the circular perspective will become a major topic when teaching students supply chain skills. Mastering the Circular Economy book, in combination with the business game “The Blue Connection”, provides a practical and concrete tool for both top level executives in companies and for professors at universities! – Søren Schulian Associate Professor at CPH business Copenhagen – Denyse Julien Associate Professor Cranﬁeld University School of Management

Alignment is key Real world Experience Teamwork skills Critical thinking

The Blue Connection is a simulation that allows us to manage this transition for an electric bicycle manufacturer, it surfaces many of the challenges we will face in reality and allows us to test diﬀerent solutions and approaches to understand the interactions and inherent complexities.

virtuallyBusinessOnlinegameTeamsof4orinclassroom

LearningTestimonials&Personal

development

Developed by: www.inchainge.com

Ask your Kogan Page for more information: kpinfo@koganpage.com

sales representative

Game setup in a nutshell entails participants playing the online business game in teams of 4 people; either virtually or in classroom setting. Eeach of the team members take up one of the four VP roles available in each business simulation game. The teams are challenged to manage a virtual company and consider corpo rate strategy and business objectives. Our business games provide the ultimate learning experience using best practices from theory and real life.

Easy to use and implement Increases engagementstudent Perfectly match any knowledge level Setup gameplay to highlight course topics Wide variety of course materials available Switch instantly between classroom, online, or a hybrid setting Multiple learning cycles create a step-by-step learning experience Put complex topics directly into practice

setupTheteam

The beneﬁts of using The Blue Connection in your course Game will experience the impact of every decision they make, not just in their own functional ‘silo’ but across their business!

The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit

The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit provides practical tools for warehouse, inventory and transport managers and students to help them tackle the challenges of logistics and supply chain management. It is full of practical ideas and information to optimise the management of logistics and supply chain processes.

256 Intro Logistics & Supply Chain Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 Warehouse management tools and guides 2 Transport management tools 3 Inventory management tools 4 Supply chain management tools 5 Outsourcing tools 6 General management tools 7 Performance management tools 8 Financial management tools and ratios 9 Problem-solving tools 10 Appendix 1 Useful websites 11 Appendix 2 conversionsImperial/metric 12 Appendix 3 identificationAutomatic(autoID) 13 Index This book « Presents models such as the 8D approach and Decision Matrix Analysis (DMA) as well as examples of how they are used in practice « Provides over 100 tools that cover every function of warehousing, transport and inventory management « Online resources: downloadable tools such as supply chain audits and supply chain strategy decision charts « New to this edition: resource planning and productivity spreadsheets, CSR in supply chain audits and supply chain strategy decision charts Description

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Edition: 3 Date: 03/03/2020 Price: £44.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789660869 ISBN Ebook: 9781789660852 Pages: 424 Format (mm): 230x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Intro Logistics & Supply Chain

The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit offers solutions and plans spanning across a variety of subdisciplines such as warehousing, logistics, supply chain management, inventory and outsourcing. Each toolkit addresses key principles within its area of discipline, providing the reader with a precision approach to be used in complex and sensitive circumstances. The toolkit presents a number of major management tools such as Fortna’s Product Flow Smart Design, SMART, DMAIC and Gantt charts. General management, performance management and problem-solving tools have also been included to provide a broader, transferable scope of tools for the reader.

Author Information Gwynne Richards has over thirty years’ experience in warehouse management and logistics. As well as running his own successful logistics consultancy he provides a number of courses on warehouse and transport management for practitioners. He lectures at Warwick and Hong Kong Polytechnic University. He is also the author of Warehouse Management. Susan Grinsted has over thirty years’ experience of improving material flow through supply chains, directly or indirectly, as a business manager, consultant, educator and trainer. She is co-founder of HowToLogistics. com, an associate at Apprise Consulting (UK) and a Principal Fellow of WMG at Warwick University (UK).

The HandbookOutsourcingLogistics A Step-by-Step Guide From Strategy Through to Implementation Edition: 1 Date: 03/12/2019 Price: £44.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749484620 ISBN Ebook: 9780749484637 Pages: 384 Format (mm): 234x155 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Logistics

By analysing current statistics and surveys, looking into factors behind why contracts are awarded and terminated important insights can be acquired. This book contains tools, models, online resources and case studies on the outsourced relationships of companies including Intel KFC and BA to further develop the reader’s knowledge which makes this book an informative and essential resource.

The Logistics Outsourcing Handbook analyses outsourcing from both an industry wide perspective, while also drilling down into specific individual considerations. The book provides valuable guidance in terms of contractual relationships, cost models and the integration of information technology systems.

Author Information Gwynne Richards has over 35 years of experience in warehouse management and logistics outsourcing. As well as running his own successful logistics consultancy, he produces and runs a number of courses on warehouse management and logistics outsourcing for practitioners.

Jo Godsmark is a supply chain professional and consultant with over 20 years experience in manufacturing and logistics. She is Chair of Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport’s Outsourcing and Procurement Forum.

257 Logistics Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 Logistics outsourcing 2 To outsource or not to outsource? 3 The logistics services marketplace 4 Supplier or partner? 5 The outsourcing lifecycle 6 Third-party logistics contracts and pricing mechanisms 7 Performance measurement and management 8 The risks associated with outsourcing 9 Managing relationships 10 IT in logistics outsourcing 11 The future of logistics outsourcing 12 Appendix I LSP warehouse audit checklists 13 Appendix II LSP transport audit checklists 14 Appendix III Sample nondisclosure agreement 15 Appendix IV LSP outsourcing contract – typical headings 16 Appendix V Sample receiving process flow 17 Appendix VI Sample customer questionnaire 18 Appendix VII Useful websites 19 References and further reading 20 Index This book « Provides a life-cycle approach to logistics outsourcing, with tried and tested processes for decisionmaking and implementation « Includes informative case studies from large companies such as Asda, British Airways and KFC, as well as major 3PLs « Looks at the benefits of outsourcing, such as enhancing customer satisfaction and reducing liabilities « Presents current statistics for logistics outsourcing and analyses why contracts are both awarded and terminated « Online Resources: Includes examples of decision tables, RFP/metrics/selection criteria as excel and word downloadable templates, as well as PowerPoints for students Description For any business involved in today’s supply chains, logistics services are critical. Companies have to decide whether to retain their own logistics operations or place their trust in third-party suppliers. This potential move away from the traditional approach of managing these processes internally can lead to improved service and reduced cost although this isn’t always the case. The Logistics Outsourcing Handbook provides step by step guidance on the process of logistics outsourcing and explains how to apply this information for commercial success. Vital advice is given on benchmarking existing operations, how to shortlist companies, produce a request for a proposal, choose the optimum supplier and implement and manage the contract.

Table of E-logistics definition, trends and directions 2 End-to-end global visibility and order managementIntegrated supply and demand chains in the age of value chain management 3 B2C e-commerce and fulfilment 4 The challenges of e-commerce on warehousing in the future Advanced managementwarehousesystems and innovations - Streamlining e-logistics processes with technology deployment 6 Automating a logistics service chain - A company’stelecommunicationsperspective Regional logisticsmarketplaceselectronictoimprove 8 Trade and transport electronic single windows 9 Port-centric ICT systemsBuilding value in supply chains

Contents 1

Dr. Wang is also a Chartered Member of the Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport (CILT). Stephen Pettit is a Professor at Cardiff Business School and is a member of the Transport and Logistics Research Group within the Logistics and Operations Management Section. He has been involved in a wide range of transport-related research programmes for both the UK Government and the European Commission. His research interests include port management and policy, and the logistics of humanitarian aid delivery. His recent research has also focused on international logistics and the application of information and communication technology in the fields of transport, logistics and supply chain management.

« Examines the strategic role of e-logistics in managing information and information flows within and between organizations « New to this edition: new chapters on AI, machine learning and autonomous vehicles, Internet of Things, Immersive technology, robotics, drone and last mile deliveries

258 Logistics Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

This book « Provides the latest insights from leading thinkers to keep readers up to date with the growth and evolution of e-logistics « Explains key technological and business developments, such as cloud computing, social technology and distributed leger technology, and how they can be applied

Description E-Logistics serves as the nerve system for the whole supply chain and enables smooth information flow within and between organizations. This new and updated edition provides the latest and most comprehensive coverage on digitalization in logistics and supply chain. It covers all transport modes and the role of ICT in supporting an integrated freight and supply chain network.

E-Logistics provides a cross-academic and industry perspective with leading academics and practitioners as contributing authors. A variety of successful e-logistics business approaches are discussed covering a range of commercial sectors and transport modes. Subsequent chapters address in depth support systems for B2C and B2B e-commerce and e-fulfilment, warehouse management, RFID, electronic marketplaces, global supply network visibility and service chain automation. Industry case studies are used to support the discussion. The new edition also covers emerging technologies such as AI, machine learning and autonomous vehicles, Internet of Things, Robotics, drone and last mile deliveries.

Author Information Yingli Wang is a Reader in logistics and operations management at Cardiff Business School. She specialises in logistics and supply chain digitisation and has led a number of research projects from a wide range of UK and international funding bodies. Her research started with examining technological innovation for organisations such as logistics service providers and manufacturers, and then recently extended to explore how technological innovations could benefit a wider society, in particular by addressing the ‘wicked’ problems and grand challenges.

Managing Digital Supply Chains for Competitive Advantage Edition: 2 Date: 03/09/2021 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749496883 ISBN Ebook: 9780749496890 Pages: 296 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Logistics

E-Logistics

259 Logistics Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 Defence logistics definitions and frameworks 2 Defence logistics - an historical perspective 3 Defence logistics in context 4 Resilience in defence supply chains 5 Integrating mission and support systems through the life cycle - Integrated logistics support and maintenance strategies 6 Supportability analysis for supportable and supported mission systems 7 Achieving dependability in defence systems 8 Planning and executing defence operational logistics 9 Procurement for defence logistics support 10 Managing performance in defence logistics 11 Optimizing the defence inventory 12 Accounting and finance in defence logistics 13 Decision support in defence logistics 14 Defence logistics and crisis response 15 Defence logistics information systems 16 A look to the future

The management of logistics and supply chain operations is of vital importance in the defence sector.

Defence Logistics Enabling and Sustaining Successful Military Operations Edition: 1

Defence Logistics looks at established theories and their practical utility, providing insights into current thinking for postgraduate and undergraduate students, lecturers, researchers, practitioners and professionals through real-life case studies.

Author Information Jeremy Smith manages modules on the Defence Acquisition Management and the Programme and Project Management MScs at Cranfield Defence and Security, UK. He developed and leads several logistics short courses and workshops pitched at strategic and practitioner levels. He served for 25 years in the British Army as a logistician and Ammunition Technical Officer. Date: 03/02/2018 £49.99 9780749478032 9780749478049

This book « Covers the entire supply chain in a defence context through real-life case studies, examining issues such as circular logistics in defence and contracting Provides vital insights from international academics and professionals currently working in defence logistics areas such as distributive manufacturing and performance management Includes coverage of recent developments and technologies affecting defence logistics, such as 3D printing and issues such as obsolescence, counterfeiting and sustainability Description

Price:

ISBN Ebook:

Pages: 384 Format (mm): 230x150 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Logistics

Defence Logistics focuses on key areas of logistics and supply chain management in context, such as sustainability, inventory management, resilience, procurement, information systems and crisis response. This comprehensive and up-to-the-minute collection includes contributions from international academics from a range of universities, academies and defence schools, along with practitioners who are currently working in the field of defence logistics.

ISBN Paperback:

Retailers are being advised to review their supply chains in a bid to accelerate their speed to market.

Fashion Logistics

Author Information John Fernie is Emeritus Professor of Retail Marketing at Heriot-Watt University, Scotland. He has written and contributed to numerous textbooks and papers on retail management, especially in the field of retail logistics. He was the founder editor of the International Journal of Retail & Distribution Management and is on the editorial board of numerous marketing and logistics journals. He is a Fellow of the Institute of Logistics and Transport. He holds an Honorary Professorship at St Andrews University and several visiting positions at European universities.

David B Grant is Professor of Supply Chain Management and Social Responsibility at the Hanken School of Economics, Finland. David has over 250 publications in various refereed journals, books and conference proceedings and is on the editorial board of several internationally ranked journals. Honours in 2019 include the award of the Bualuang ASEAN Chair Professorship at Thammasat University in Thailand.

260 Logistics Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction to fashion logistics 2 The changing nature of fashion retailing: Implications for logistics 3 Offshore sourcing and outsourcing in the international fashion supply chain 4 Corporate social responsibility (CSR) in international fashion supply chains 5 International logistics 6 In-store consumer service 7 Online consumer service 8 Luxury fashion and supply chain management 9 Sustainable fashion retailing and logistics This book « Provides a holistic view of both fashion retailing and fashion logistics. « Studies major forces driving change in the fashion retail industry and how manufacturers can adapt their working practices accordingly. « New to this edition: content has been restructured to include updated case studies, key objectives, summary q&a’s and ‘how to put into practice’ textboxes. Description

Fashion Logistics assesses the growth and changes in the industry as well as the drivers of change in the market. Supply chain networks and operations play an integral role in distributing product across the retail industry and significant changes within those networks have altered the way in which they function. Manufacturers therefore need to rethink their supply chains to make them resilient to shock, agile enough to respond quickly to sudden change, flexible enough to customize products and efficient enough to protect margins. Fashion Logistics assesses these forces and changes and how manufacturers should adapt their working practices accordingly.

This second edition of Fashion Logistics includes revised CSR and reshoring sections, updated case studies and new content on how manufacturers can adapt their working practices and the further demise of the department store sector.

Insights into the Fashion Retail Supply Chain Edition: 2 Date: 03/11/2019 Price: £44.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749493318 ISBN Ebook: 9780749493325 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 235x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Logistics

261 Logistics Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 An Introduction – Setting the Scene 2 Customer Value – What is it? 3 Organisations have to be More Capable Today than Ever Before – Why? 4 How Purpose is Achieved – A Marketing and Logistics Led Approach 5 What Great Operational Process Capability Looks Like 6 Marketing and Logistics in Harmony – Building and Sustaining Operational Excellence Integrated with a Marketing Orientation 7 Finding Logistics Solutions –How Logistics is Responding to Modern Challenges 8 Conclusions – Logistics is Business Critical This book « Looks at how bringing marketing and logistics together is a powerful way of improving customer service and increasing competitiveness « Demonstrates how to deal with digitalisation and successfully integrate it into marketing and logistics strategies « Presents a range of examples from a range of sectors such as retail, transport and the service industries « Includes case studies such as Toyota and Value and Tesco and the club card « Examines how to deal with scenarios such as Black Friday and Online Monday, where marketing is promising something logistics can’t deliver Description Logistics and marketing stand out as two disciplines which are connected, and both are critical to the provision of customer value. Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations looks at marketing-led logistics and logistics-led marketing. In the current business world, the idea of a single supply chain has been replaced by an integrated multi-channel approach. The authors therefore examine how to optimise profit and control costs through the coordination of these two functions.

and

Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations takes an in-depth look at physical supply chains where manufacturing of a product occurs from groceries to pharmaceuticals, and from automotive to construction. The authors examine omni-channel, how this affects the customer experience and the need for a joined-up strategy which is operationalised across all channels. They also look at the challenges of digitalisation and the customer interface with the growth of the internet as well as the intensification of competition across all sectors.

OrganizationsLed

Creating and Operating Customer Focused Supply Networks Edition: 1 Date: 03/10/2017 Price: £42.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478735 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478742 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Logistics

Marketing Logistics

Author Information Robert Mason has a business background, mainly in a variety of roles with M&S. He is now a Reader in Logistics and Operations Management (LOM) at Cardiff Business School and has led many business research projects with Tesco as a partner. Barry Evans’ early career involved roles in Logistics/Distribution with Watney Mann, Rank Hovis McDougall and Royal Mail. This was followed by roles in Tesco plc, including Lean Process Manager in Tesco Supply Chain Development. He joined the Lean Enterprise Research Centre at Cardiff Business School as a Senior Research Associate. Mr Evans is now retired.

Urban Logistics is written by an outstanding team of international editors combining their expertise and using their research from leading business schools in Sweden and the US. There are also valuable contributions from academics and industry experts from companies and universities from all over the world. The book includes clear examples of initiatives that work and business case developments, as well as toolkits for policymakers and managers who are devising new initiatives. There is an in-depth examination of different aspects of urban logistics, such as retail logistics for cities, urban food supply chains, services and the special logistics requirements involved, construction, waste management and e-commerce and home delivery. There is also a focus on networks and partnerships and an analysis of innovation as a new constant.

This book « Provides fascinating cases that identify the key stages in the development of city logistics initiatives in London, New York, Paris, Sao-Paulo, Tokyo, Beijing, Delhi and Gothenburg « Examines urban supply chains for major cities, with cases looking at urban food supply chains, services and the special logistics requirements involved, construction, waste management, e-commerce and home delivery

« Includes toolkits to help policy makers and managers devise and work with new initiatives « Presents and is based on original research from the University of Gothenburg and Chalmers in Sweden, the Centre for Infrastructure, Transportation and the Environment in New York and the University of California Description

262 Logistics Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Setting the scene 1 Introduction to urban logistics 2 Metropolitan economies and the generation of freight and service activity – An international perspective 3 Urban logistics – The regional dimension 4 Urban planning policies for logistics facilities: a comparison between US metropolitan areas and the Paris region 5 The dualism of urban freight distribution – City vs suburban logistics 6 Port cities and urban logistics 2 Urban logistics diversity 7 The logistics of parcel delivery – Current operations and challenges facing the UK market 8 E-commerce trends and implications for urban logistics 9 Food and urban logistics – A fast-changing sector with significant policy and business implications 10 Consolidation centres in construction logistics 11 The socio-economic benefits of off-peak hour distribution –The case of Stockholm 3 Making change happen 12 Stakeholder engagement and partnerships for improved urban logistics 13 Multi-actor multi-criteria analysis as a tool to involve urban logistics stakeholders 14 Off-hour deliveries – The importance of outreach and proper planning 15

Author Information Michael Browne is Professor of Logistics and Urban Freight Transport at the University of Gothenburg. Sönke Behrends is a senior researcher at IVL Swedish Environmental Research Institute, Gothenburg. Johan Woxenius is Professor of Maritime Transport Management and Logistics at the University of Gothenburg.

José Holguín-Veras is William H Hart Professor and Director of the Center for Infrastructure, Transportation and the Environment at the Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, Troy, New York.

Urban Logistics Management, Policy and Innovation in a Rapidly Changing Environment

Edition: 1 Date: 03/12/2018 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478711 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478728 Pages: 392 Format (mm): 235x157 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Logistics

Approximately 80 per cent of European and American citizens live in an urban environment. Due to their large populations and extensive commercial establishments, urban areas require large quantities of goods and services for commercial and domestic use. This results in increasing levels of demand for freight transport services. Freight transport in towns and cities is a major contributor to environmental impacts, particularly to local air pollution and noise. Urban Logistics addresses public policy makers, freight transport companies and receivers of supplies, providing them with the information and guidance to affect change in the logistics of the city.

Genevieve Giuliano is Professor and Margaret and John Ferraro Chair in Effective Local Government at the University of Southern California. She is also Director of METRANS Transportation Center.

The procurement process – A key to improved urban logistics efficiency 16 Future developments in modelling and information

263 Logistics Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Defining Packaging Logistics 2 Packaging performance in supply chains 3 Packaging methodologyperformance 4 Environmental performance of packaging logistics 5 Managing packaging waste 6 Managing ICT features of packaging 7 Reusable packaging systems 8 Industrial evaluationpackaging 9 Decision support for industrial packaging 10 Organising developmentpackaging 11 Packaging innovation capability 12 Managing packaging logistics in e-commerce channels 13 Managing packaging logistics in developing countries 14 References This book « Explores key characteristics of industrial and consumer packaging in a variety of companies, using examples and case studies from practice « Examines the different ways that packaging adds value to logistics and supply chain, such as costeffectiveness and packaging aesthetics « Provides concrete tools, methods and guidelines that help reduce the cost of materials handling, and increase safe and efficient storage « Looks at environmentally friendly and innovative packaging solutions which help promote sustainability and cut costs « Examines the track and trace capability of packaging through ICT, the technology included in packaging to enable tracking through the supply chain Description Packaging has a major impact on supply chain performance, as it affects all logistics activities in supply chains. Effective and efficient packaging can significantly improve the performance of companies by generating value and reducing costs and the negative environmental impacts in supply chains.

Understanding and managing the economic and environmental impacts in supply chains 1 Date: 03/06/2018 Price: £42.99 9780749481704 Ebook: 9780749481711 248 Format (mm): 234x157 Category: Text/

Product

of packaging

Edition:

Logistics

Author Information Henrik Pålsson is Associate Professor at Lund University, Sweden. He has conducted research and taught master’s students within packaging logistics since 2004.

Supplementary

Packaging Logistics uses a systems approach to examine all the essential roles of packaging in supply chains, from the purchasing of raw materials to the production and sale of finished products, as well as transport and distribution. It examines the strategic role of packaging and its operational importance, explains the theoretical basis, presents useful methodologies, tools and concepts, and provides decision support for packaging innovation. It provides several examples of the total environmental impacts of packaging: on logistics and transport efficiency, on product waste and from the packaging material.

ISBN

Packaging

Professional Subject: Logistics

Pages:

ISBN Paperback:

Packaging Logistics covers essential topics such as one-way and reusable packaging, industrial and consumer packaging, ICT, end-of-life, environment, innovation, e-commerce, and future trends and challenges. This research-based and practical book takes the reader through every stage of packaging and relates it to supply chain and logistics, illustrated by many case studies.

Information

Price:

ISBN Ebook:

ISBN Paperback:

Author Jerry Rudd is a logistics consultant. He was formerly Logistics Manager at Gefco and Business Unit Director at Wincanton, working with Waitrose, Sainsbury’s and British Airways. 03/09/2020 £39.99 9781789663259 9781789663266

264 Logistics Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction – The importance of health and safety 2 Basic principles of health and safety 3 Physical health issues 4 Mental health 5 Drug and alcohol issues 6 Personal equipmentprotection 7 Safe storage and warehouse layout 8 Manual handling 9 Materials handling equipment 10 Fire safety 11 Yard safety 12 Vehicle loading 13 Road vehicle specifications, maintenance and compliance 14 Accident prevention during vehicle operations 15 Transport of dangerous goods by road 16 Vehicle mounted loading equipment 17 Seafreight, rolling motorway and airfreight 18 Miscellaneous issues 19 Health and safety monitoring and audit This book « Outlines health and safety from the basic principles such as establishing the best culture, through to issues relating to physical and mental health, personal protection equipment, manual and mechanical handling, and safe transport operations « Provides the most up to date regulatory information on health and safety, such as the Health and Safety at Work Act (HASAWA) « Focuses on assessment and elimination of risks, compliance and the avoidance of unsafe practices in logistics and transportation « Looks at vehicles, their maintenance and driving standards as well as the important role of managers in safe operation, for example by optimum vehicle routing Description Logistics is a complex industry that exposes employees to a whole variety of risks. These include not only accidents on the road and deaths and injuries resulting from unsafe use of forklifts, but also the consequences of poor fire safety, long-term health risks due to poor manual handling technique and problems relating to mental health. Many thousands of incidents are recorded every year. This book examines each aspect of health and safety in turn, with a focus on warehousing and transportation. Health and Safety in Logistics informs managers about potential hazards found in the industry and explains in detail how they can make the workplace as safe as possible.

Health and Safety in Logistics Assessing and Avoiding Risk in Warehousing and Transportation Edition: 1 Date:

Pages: 464 Format (mm): 234x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Logistics

Introduction 1 What’s shaping the global logistics market? An industry in transformation: towards consolidation Logistics market development by geography 4 The emergence of logistics clusters International freight forwarding Contract logistics European road freight Express parcels Air cargo Container shipping The European rail and intermodal sectors Supply chain technologies Supply chain dynamics of vertical sectors Risks in global supply chains The e-commerce logistics phenomenon Supply chain innovation and disruption Ethical and sustainable supply chain strategies This book « Offers a step-by-step guide to global logistics « Provides in-depth definitions, descriptions and explorations of the strategic principles and practices in transportation modes and supply chain verticals, including: freight forwarding, contract logistics, shipping, road freight, air cargo and express « Examines important trends and developments that are shaping the industry, including 3D printing, megacities, and post-harvest food losses « Online resources: Chapter-supporting lecturer slides Description

Author Information John Manners-Bell is the founder and CEO of Transport Intelligence, a leading supplier of market solutions to the global logistics industry. He is Honorary Visiting Professor at the London Metropolitan University, adviser to the World Economic Forum and a former Chairman of the Supply Chain Council of the World Economic Forum. Prior to establishing Transport Intelligence, he worked as an analyst in consultancies specializing in international trade, transport and logistics.

265 Global Logistics Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents

Online resources available: Chapter-supporting lecturer slides.

Introduction to Global Logistics offers a detailed examination of key topics, including: how the logistics industry has developed, how it is influenced by macro-economic factors and demand-side trends, what the risks are to the industry, and how it will develop over the coming years. It examines important trends and developments that are shaping the industry, including 3D printing, megacities, and post-harvest food losses.

Introduction to Global Logistics offers a step-by-step guide to global logistics. Covering the breadth of logistics, this highly accessible text is illustrated by engaging case studies of market leaders. In this comprehensive second instalment of Global Logistics Strategies, John Manners-Bell provides an indepth definition, description and exploration of the strategic principles and practices in transportation modes and supply chain verticals, including: freight forwarding, contract logistics, shipping, road freight, air cargo and express. The book also examines major sectors, including automotive, chemical, pharmaceutical, retail, consumer, and high tech.

John Manners-Bell is author of Logistics and Supply Chains in Emerging Markets and Supply Chain Risk

Introduction to Global Logistics

Delivering the Goods Edition: 2 Date: 03/11/2016 Price: £42.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478254 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478261 Pages: 384 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Global Logistics

Global Logistics New Directions in Supply Chain Edition:Management 8 Date: 03/07/2021 Price:

266 Global Logistics Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Re-thinking supply chain strategy 2 Linking supply chain management to financial performance 3 Supply chain management:riskfinance – the forgotten perspective? 4 Supply chain vulnerability and resilience 5 Fulfilling customer needs in the 2020s with marketing and logistics 6 New procurement directions in supply chain management 7 Maximizing capacity utilization in freight transport 8 Retail logistics 9 Trends and strategies in global logistics and supply chain management 10 Global sourcing and supply 190 11 Supply chain relationships: the foundation of success 12 Delivering sustainability through supply chain management 13 Greening of logistics: cutting pollution and greenhouse gas emissions 14 People contemporarypoweringsupply chains 15 Leadership in logistics 16 Ethics in supply chains: an illustrated survey 17 Humanitarian logistics and supply chain management 18 Digitalization in global supply chain operations 19 Digitalization and Industry 4.0 in logistics 20 Performance measurement and management in the supply chain 21 Aligning tochain:manufacturingtechnology,andsupplywhyitmattersandhowdoit 22 The ‘deglobalization’ of logistics and supply chains: operating in an increasingly nationalistic and risky world

Author Information Edward Sweeney is Professor of Logistics and Systems and Head of the Department of Engineering Systems & Supply Chain Management at Aston University in Birmingham, UK. He has held full-time academic posts at Technological University Dublin, the University of Warwick and the University of Technology, Malaysia (UTM), as well as visiting positions at several institutions in Asia and North America. Edward’s research has been widely published and he sits on the editorial boards of several leading international supply chain journals. He has worked in close collaboration with many of the world’s leading companies across many sectors including electronics, food and drink, life sciences and logistics.

Donald Waters is a retired Professor of logistics and operations management. He worked at various universities including the University of Calgary, Canada. £49.99 9781398600003 9781398600010 Logistics

ISBN Ebook:

ISBN Paperback:

Pages: 480 Format (mm): 234x155 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Global

Blending geography, economics, politics and trade, International Freight Transport provides insight into a wide range of topics, including: globalisation; demand versus supply; buyers and sellers; transport regulation, geography, modes and methods; transport ownership; alliances; and safety and security. The book is the only comprehensive and accessible book on international transport available.

This book « Overviews global container transport, including shipping networks and inland/multi-modal aspects « Focuses on operational models and cost structures, including multimodal « Discusses key origins and destinations, main routes and service types, and key players in the sector

International Freight Transport Cases, Structures and Prospects

267 Global Logistics Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction – Cases, Structures and Prospects 1 Trade and the Transport Environment 2 Demand, Supply and Freight Rates – The Shipping of Global Trade [Hassiba Benamara, Jan Hoffmann and Frida Youssef] 3 Trade and Customs Procedures in International Freight Transport – Requirements, Issues and Trends [Andrew Grainger] 2 International Freight Transport in Practice 4 Multimodal Transport Solutions for Grain Exports from Kazakhstan [Timur Bimaganbetov, Anthony Beresford and Stephen Pettit] 5 The Transport of Oil and Gas [Hance D Smith and Azmath Jaleel] 6 Global Container Transport [Rolf Neise] 7 Car Shipping Nieuwenhuis][Paul 3 Trading Regions 8 International Freight Logistics in South East Asia –[RuthGrowthIndonesia–Malaysia–ThailandTheTriangle(IMT-GT)Banomyong]

« Written by industry experts and respected academics who have advised the Department of Transport and the United Nations Description International Freight Transport presents the key changes and issues in the fast-moving industries of trade and transport. It includes coverage of regional trade groupings, the emergence of new large economies (i.e. BRIC countries), and pivotal regions such as the Middle East and Central America where major projects, such as new and widened canals, are underway or planned. These changes could redraw the trade map with major implications for transport patterns and solutions.

Author Information Professor Anthony Beresford is Programme Director for the MSc International Transport at Cardiff University and Director for the suite of Masters Programmes within Logistics and Operations Management. Professor Beresford has travelled widely in an advisory capacity within the ports and transport fields in Europe, Asia and North America. Dr Stephen Pettit is a researcher for the Transport and Shipping Research Group in Cardiff Business School. He has been involved in a range of transport related research including a ground-breaking project for the Department of Transport.

Edition: 1 Date: 03/03/2017 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474348 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474355 Pages: 376 Format (mm): 240x155 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Global Logistics

9 North America’s Evolving International Freight Transport – Challenges and Responses [Michael Ircha] 10 International Freight Transport in South America – The Case of Colombia [David B Grant, Rodrigo Britto, Juan Pablo Soto, Marcus Thiell] 11 International Freight Transport in Southern Africa [Christopher Savage] 12 Freight Transport in Korea and Taiwan [Su-Han Woo, Po-Lin Lai, Doori Kim and Jungeun Kim] 4 Challenging Environments and Transport Futures 13 Overcoming International Freight Transport Challenges in a Disaster Response Context [Peter Tatham and Gyöngyi Kovács] 14 Transport Futures –Reconciling the On-Demand Economy with Global Production Chains [Peter Wells]

LogisticsCross-BorderOperations Effective

International students, business operators and government officials will find the book rich in detail with practical examples that include the political, administrative, regulatory, technological and economic context throughout. It covers all the critical operational and legal aspects of cross-border logistics operations, including: -prevailing trade, customs and border policy -tariffs and import taxes -border management and supply chain security practices -prohibitions and restrictions -enforcement and compliance practices -supply chain and logistics arrangements -disaster relief operations -frictionless trade and trade facilitation principles.

Cross-Border Logistics Operations serves as a comprehensive guide and companion to the crossborder trade and customs environment and its implications for international business supply chains and their control. Inspired by the World Customs Organization’s Professional Standards (also known as the WCO PICARD Standards), it provides key insights into transporting goods across borders and effectively managing the requirements for compliance and enforcement.

Author Information Dr Andrew Grainger is an established trade facilitation practitioner, academic and educator with global outlook. As the Director of Trade Facilitation Consulting, he helps government agencies and international organizations cut red-tape in international trade. He is also an Adjunct Professor at the Centre for Customs and Excise Studies (CSU, Australia) and an Honorary Associate Professor at the University of Nottingham (UK). He has provided consultancy services to the World Bank Group and the United Nations family of organizations, has given witness to the UK Parliament’s Select Committees and provided research services to the European Parliament. Trade Facilitation and Border Edition:Management 1 Date: 03/08/2021 Price: £59.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789666724 ISBN Ebook: 9781789666748 Pages: 312 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Global Logistics

268 Global Logistics Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Cross-border logistics operations 2 Customs administrations, tariffs and other taxes 3 Customs declarations and control 4 Prohibitions, restrictions and other border procedures 5 Border facilities - Operations and design 6 Trade and customs compliance management 7 Coordinated managementborderandsupply chain security 8 Logistics, supply chain management and borders 9 Trade facilitation 10 Borders and disaster relief logistics operations This book « Provides a comprehensive overview of cross-border logistics from an operational and strategic perspective « Focuses on operational and regulatory requirements, their impacts on business and ways to reduce those impacts « Includes illustrative case studies and examples and extracts from relevant regulations and international recommendations « Covers trade facilitation and frictionless trade, such as the World Trade Organization (WTO) Trade Facilitation Agreement, Customs Partnership Programmes and Region Trade Agreements « Online resources: summary tables of regulations and international recommendations

WithDescriptionconsiderable turmoil in international trade and logistics it is more important than ever to understand trade and customs issues and their impact on logistics operations. At every port and border international freight operations are exposed to trade and customs procedures.

Multinational corporations have developed networks of production that stretch across the globe. They have done this in order to maximize their ability to service their customers in markets worldwide, exploit greater opportunities for growth, maximize their profitability and increase their business value.

269 Global Logistics Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 The globalization of business and the supply chain management concept 2 The world is not flat –Geography still matters 3 Culture – An evolutionary strategy for success 4 We’re getting hitched – Longterm relationshipsinter-organizational 5 Let’s make a movie – Situational organizationalinter-relationships 6 Why bother? The whole is greater than the sum of the parts 7 Do you speak my language? Supply chain communication 8 Right stuff, right place, right time – Supply chain coordination 9 Finger on the pulse – Control and measurement 10 Looking around the block –Future trends This book « Examines the myriad ways in which companies are configuring themselves to compete in an internationalized economy « Explains the shared benefits and metrics which are crucial for the long-term sustainability of international supply chain business relationships « Presents case studies of long-term strategic relationships, which are critical for success, as well as short-term alliances designed to address specific tactical goals, projects or initiatives « Online resources: audio Q&A clips with Patrick Daly Description

International Supply Chain Relationships aims to provide supply chain practitioners in any type of business with ideas, tools and strategies that they can readily access, interpret and put into practice speedily and pragmatically to create value for their own international business. In many instances, supply chain projects bring together people from different disciplines who may come from different cultures and ethnic backgrounds. Add in long distances and different time zones and the complexities and challenges of sustaining successful working relationships increase even more. This book provides case studies which illustrate how to manage these arrangements effectively.

Author Information Patrick Daly has been a consultant for almost 20 years working in international supply chain and logistics with some of the world’s top international corporations, including PepsiCo Worldwide Flavours, Pfizer, Proctor & Gamble, GlaxoSmithKline, Merck Millipore and many more. He has worked with these clients all around the world including China, India, Middle East, Europe, North America and South America. Competitive a Globalized Economy Edition: 1 Date: 03/02/2019 Price: £44.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480035 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480042 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 235x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Global Logistics

International Supply Chain Relationships Creating

It is the strength and quality of the relationships and connections that we build with other players that will ultimately determine the effectiveness and the success of our business. International Supply Chain Relationships looks at these complex connections, covering long-term inter-organizational relationships, situational inter-organizational relationships, multi-disciplinary global engineering teams, technologies and innovations, supply chain communication, supply chain coordination, and future trends.

Advantage in

Becoming a Disruptive Competitor

The book provides detailed international case studies that illustrate how the principles work in practice, including Apple, Dell, Amazon, John Lewis, Southwest Airlines, Aldi, Toyota and many others.

Business Operations Models

Edition: 1 Date: 03/05/2015 Price: £32.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473310 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473327 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Operations Management

Most successful companies have operations management at their heart. It enables strategy and should be part of boardroom discussions. However, Cranfield research has shown that business strategy barely recognises the world of operations management.

Recognising that operations management needs to be more strategic, Business Operations Models is a revolutionary new title that looks at the interrelationship of operations management and strategy.

Author Information Alan Braithwaite is Visiting Professor at Cranfield University and specializes in supply chain strategy and operational excellence in the retail, manufacturing and service sectors. He is the founder of LCP Consulting, which collaborates with over 400 companies internationally. Martin Christopher has been at the forefront of the development of new thinking in logistics and supply chain management for over 30 years. He is Emeritus Professor of Marketing and Logistics at Cranfield University, where he helped build the Centre for Logistics and Supply Chain Management into a leading centre of excellence. His published work is widely cited by other scholars and he has been invited to participate in academic and industry events around the world.

270 Operations Management Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 What we mean by business operations models – and why are they important? 2 The characteristics of superperforming businesses 3 The customer lens –understanding compelling value 4 The strategy operations gap 5 Unpacking the business operations model framework 6 The technology dimension to being a disruptor 7 Market-changing models –driving transformation 8 Competing through the basics 9 Optimization of the business operations model 10 Making it happen – becoming a disruptor 11 Guiding principles to building a competitive edge through business operations models

This book « Looks at common strands that can inform strategy from a practical operating perspective « Highlights the core fundamentals that business leaders should be guided by in order to achieve organizational success « Offers a framework for achieving super performance Description

In Business Operations Models, Martin Christopher and Alan Braithwaite identify the characteristics of market-leading businesses that have transformed their markets and delivered super performance for their stakeholders. It points to the theory gap between strategic thinking and operations and how many high-performing businesses arrive at their new operating models as much by chance as judgement. Unpacking those observations leads to some clearly defined features of winning competitors, including eliminating waste, leveraging technology, and utilising transformative business models. Business Operations Models offers a framework for achieving super performance and understanding when and how a company may be able to leverage its capabilities to outperform.

Author Information Nigel Slack is Emeritus Professor of Operations Management and Strategy at Warwick Business School, Coventry, UK and the former head of its Operations Management Group. He acts as a consultant in many sectors, including Financial Services, Utilities, Retail, Professional Services, General Services, Aerospace, FMCG, and Engineering Manufacturing. 03/04/2017 £32.99 9780749473549 9780749473556

ISBN Paperback:

271 Operations Management Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Exploit the Power of Operations 2 Establish an Operations Capability Culture 3 Make Operations a Strategic Asset 4 Set Your FrameworkPerformance 5 Resource Your Operation Appropriately 6 Establish Internal Processes Networks 7 Shape Your External Supply Networks 8 Learn from Day-to-day Control 9 Setting Improvement Priorities 10 Position Your Improvement Process 11 Master the Mechanics of Improvement This book « Shows how effective operations can have a huge strategic impact throughout the organization « Provides guidance on how to respond to the most important challenges facing the practice of operations management « Offers direction on how to set the agenda for developing operations capabilities Description The study and practice of operations has shifted to reflect the new challenges and uncertainties of how to thrive in today’s ever-changing world. The Operations Advantage identifies the most significant challenges to the practice of operations management and gives guidance on how businesses can respond. Leaders need to link the strategic objectives of the business clearly and logically to its operations performance objectives. The book presents a series of ten activities that will help them to do this and therefore make operations work better, such as designing and configuring internal processes and resourcing the operations appropriately.

Based on the global teaching, training and consultancy conducted by the author, The Operations Advantage looks at the application of operations management across a range of sectors, including finance, healthcare, professional services, oil and gas industries. Although these diverse sectors require operations practitioners to apply knowledge in different ways, they essentially deal with the same set of processes. The book is an indispensable and unique guide for anyone with an operational role in any organization, as well as operations management students and academics.

ISBN Ebook:

Price:

The AdvantageOperations Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Edition: 1 Date:

Pages: 312 Format (mm): 233x158 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Operations Management

« Online resources: supporting excel spreadsheets to aid understanding and implementation of inventory planning, with ready-to-use formulae.

ToolkitInventory

This comprehensive second edition of The Inventory Toolkit includes case studies from diverse industries such as retail and aerospace, and worked examples and regular exercises which illustrate how the inventory tools can be used in an operational setting. It is an invaluable reference guide for students and practitioners focusing on inventory management and operations management in manufacturing and retail, as well as operational staff involved in the implementation of the MRP and inventory management modules of ERP systems.

Author Information Geoff Relph has extensive experience in inventory and business systems management in the operational, consulting and academic sectors. He is an associate lecturer at the Warwick Manufacturing Group, University of Warwick, UK, and delivers modules for the MSc Programme in the UK and internationally. Catherine Milner is a chartered engineer and project manager with experience working in aerospace, petrochemicals and telecommunications. She has managed many successful projects on electronic data exchange with customers, forecasting, MRP, supply chain management, and business process re-engineering. She is a managing consultant, and a visiting lecturer at the University of Warwick.

Description Looking beyond the complexity and theory of inventory management, authors Geoff Relph and Catherine Milner examine managing inventory and achieving targets. Whilst the first edition mainly focused on planning, this new edition of The Inventory Toolkit includes three new chapters that go beyond planning to implementation. Amongst other topics, the new chapters cover holding and moving inventory, working with suppliers and using stack and flow to identify pinch points and facilitate lean and agile operations.

The Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Edition: 2 Date: 03/07/2019 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482121 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482138 Pages: 448 Format (mm): 239x171 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Operations Management

272 Operations Management Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 Introduction to inventory management 2 Business systems and business 3 Inventory balancing and control 4 The complexity of inventory management within business systems 5 Stack and flow inventories 6 Traditional thinking in inventory optimization 7 k-curve methodology 8 The practical application of k-curve 9 Case study examples of k-curve planning approach 10 Review, summary and what to do next 11 Appendix A 12 Appendix B 13 Appendix C 14 Useful websites 15 Index This book « Provides extensive guidelines to the key parameters used when planning inventory at the detailed item operational level and tools required to plan inventory at a strategic level. « Presents case study examples to provide broader understanding of tools and techniques and to demonstrate where each tool is best applied « Includes a comprehensive list of tools used in inventory planning, essential for both students and practitioners « New to this edition: chapters on balancing and control, inventory stack and flow, future developments in inventory management and new tools and case studies.

Warehouse Management guides the reader through all aspects of successfully managing a warehouse, its operations and distribution. This bestselling book covers an extensive range of key topics from defining the modern warehouse, detailing management processes, strategies and practices to outlining how to tackle environmental challenges to ensure a sustainable supply chain. With practical insights into how to improve operating costs, increase efficiency and reduce costs, this is a must read for optimizing warehouse performance.

Author Information Gwynne Richards has over 30 years of experience in warehouse management and logistics and is based in the Vale of Glamorgan, UK. As well as running his own successful logistics consultancy, he provides a number of courses on warehouse and transport management and logistics outsourcing for practitioners. He is the coauthor of The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit with Susan Grinstead and The Logistics Outsourcing Handbook with Jo Godsmark, both published by Kogan Page. Definitive Guide to Improving Efficiency and Minimizing Costs in the Modern Warehouse Edition: 4 Date: 03/11/2021 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789668407 ISBN Ebook: 9781789668414 Pages: 536 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Warehouse Management

ManagementWarehouse The

ModernDescriptionwarehouses are capitalizing on cutting-edge technologies, new operating models and innovative practices to maximize their role in the wider supply chain. Understand how to successfully manage these warehouses with this bestselling guide.

This book « Outlines the essential information on warehouse management and how to overcome common challenges and exploit potential opportunities Provides practical advice on how to operate an efficient and cost-effective warehouse using methods such as resource planning, labour management and warehouse layout Explores the latest technologies in warehousing, including robotics, cobots, technologies for dealing with pandemics, AI and drones in the warehouse, along with how these will impact the future of warehousing « New to this edition: updates on new technologies in warehousing, the latest thinking on the future of warehouses and renewed online resources Online resources: PowerPoint slides (lecturer slides), videos, questions and answers

273 Warehouse Management Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 The role of the warehouse 2 Role of the warehouse manager 3 Warehouse processesReceiving and put-away 4 Warehouse processes - Pick preparation 5 Goods-to-person and personto-goods picking 6 Order-picking methods 7 Warehouse processes from replenishment to despatch and beyond 8 Information systems in the warehouse 9 Warehouse layout 10 Storage and handling equipment 11 Resourcing a warehouse 12 Warehouse costs 13 Performance measurement and management 14 Health and safety 15 The warehouse and the environment 16 The warehouse of the future 17 Appendix 1 Global warehouse costs 18 Appendix 2 Warehouse audit checklists 19 Bibliography 20 Websites of companies that have contributed to this book and other useful websites 21 Glossary

The fourth edition of Warehouse Management is fully updated to include up to date information across the board. The latest technologies in warehousing, such as robotics, cobots and AI, are explained and their impact is situated alongside discussions on the future of warehousing. Gwynne Richards provides expert advice with clear and easy to grasp solutions. New and updated online resources provide support to readers.

Author Information

Warehousing and Transportation Logistics looks at unit creation, material flow or goods storage as well as systems and management for planning or information to identify objects, control and processing of orders. It is a practice-oriented book for students with a multitude of useful information and ideas. It is also a workbook for professional practitioners, production, planning and industrial engineers, who are specifically concerned with the planning side of this specialist area. The examples at the end of each chapter deepen and complement the content and there are comprehensive notes with each figure providing additional information on the topic. Professor Heinrich Martin was a lecturer at the University of Applied Science in Hamburg for over 30 years, and has been a visiting lecturer in universities around the world. His areas of expertise include transportation systems, warehousing systems, order picking material flow systems and factory planning. Dr Martin has lead multiple projects with numerous organisations.

systems,

Warehousing LogisticsTransportationand Systems, Planning, Application and Cost Edition:Effectiveness 1 Date: 03/04/2018 Price: £54.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482206 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482213 Pages: 680 Format (mm): 241x170 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Warehouse Management

274 Warehouse Management Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Logistics Structures Within Companies 2 Material Flow Logistics 3 Transporting Goods –Packaging, Loading Unit 4 Basic Transport Logistics 5 Continuous Conveyor 6 Discontinuous Conveyor 7 Switching 8 Handling 9 Basic Warehouse and Picking Logistics 10 Warehouses and Shelves 11 Picking Systems 12 Planning System and Project Management 13 Information Logistics This book « Presents the complex detail of warehousing and transportation logistics in a clear and digestible way « Provides full-colour technical drawings, structural models and tables which clearly illustrate technical issues « Translated from the original German bestselling book, Transport-und Lagerlogistik, published by Springer Nature. « Includes valuable tools for planning and making economic efficiency calculations « Provides more than 200 examples with worked solutions and gives the reader targeted practice with 250 questions and answers Description Warehousing and Transportation Logistics offers an overview of transport, warehousing and assembly logistics, including order picking, packaging, handling and management. The key focus is on the management techniques in transport and warehousing and the logistics-focused perspective runs throughout the entire book. The author examines different applications and planning techniques and includes examples of supporting economic calculations and questions and answers.

Emerging Issues Challenges in the Retail Supply Chain Edition: 5 Date: 03/11/2018 Price: £46.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481605 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481612 Pages: 344 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Retail Logistics & Supply Chain

Table of Contents Retail Logistics – Changes and challenges [John Fernie and Leigh Sparks] Relationships in the supply chain [John Fernie]

Author Information John Fernie is Emeritus Professor of Retail Marketing at Heriot-Watt University, Edinburgh. He has written and contributed to numerous textbooks and papers on retail management, especially in the field of retail logistics. Leigh Sparks is Professor of Retail Studies at the Institute for Retail Studies, University of Stirling, Scotland. He is on the editorial boards of several leading marketing and business journals.

and New

Description Logistics and supply chains play a vital role in the overall success of retail management. This fifth edition of Logistics and Retail Management covers the major strides made in retail logistics and the challenges which remain, providing students and professionals with the current thinking and research in this strategic field. Including chapters on internationalization, corporate social responsibility (CSR), and green logistics, the book also explores examples from successful organizations such as Schuh and FullyTesco.updated with the latest international developments and on-going changes in the field, Logistics and Retail Management, 5th edition is a multi-contributed collection from leading academics and practitioners and an expert editor team. The new edition also includes material on the luxury fashion industry and the logistical challenges of e-commerce. Logistics and Retail Management, 5th edition is the essential text for students of retail logistics and supply chain management.

The internationalization of the retail supply chain [John Fernie] The international fashion supply chain and corporate social responsibility [Patsy Perry, John Fernie and Steve Wood] The footwear supply chain – The case of Schuh [John Fernie and Colin Temple] Supply chain strategy in the fashion and luxury industry [John Fernie and Patsy Perry] Tesco’s supply chain management [Leigh Sparks] 8 On-shelf availability in UK retailing [John Fernie and David B Grant] 9 The development of e-tail logistics [John Fernie, Suzanne Fernie and Alan McKinnon] The greening of retail logistics [Alan McKinnon and Julia Edwards]

275 Retail Logistics & Supply Chain Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

This book « Focuses on specific logistics and supply chain issues relevant to retail management « Includes internationalization, corporate social responsibility and green logistics, and explores practical examples from Tesco and Schuh « New to this edition: New material on the luxury fashion industry and the logistical challenges of e-commerce « Features contributions from leading academics in the field and retail logistics practitioners

Logistics and Retail Management

Description Buying, merchandising and the supply chain are inextricably linked. Product merchandisers play a key role within retail, as profits can be affected by how successfully they undertake their work.

ISBN Paperback:

Pages:

Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Retail Logistics & Supply Chain

Author Information James Topps has worked in retail supply chain for Kraft (Formerly Cadbury), Ted Baker and Morrison’s. He currently heads up the merchandise planning (formerly supply chain) for Maplin Electronics, Rotherham. Glenn Taylor is currently Merchandise Planning Director at Maplin Electronics. He has been Merchandise and Supply Chain Director in companies such as Dreams, B&Q and BonMarche, developing best practice through periods of expansion and growth for business on and offline, in the UK and overseas. 03/01/2018 £42.99 9780749480622 9780749480639 288 Format (mm): 235x156

Merchandisers set prices to maximise profits and manage the performance of ranges, planning promotions and mark-downs as necessary. They also oversee delivery and distribution of stock and deal with suppliers. Their connection with and understanding of the supply chain is vital. Supported by theories, explanations and real-life examples, Managing the Retail Supply Chain looks at concepts and core themes that run across all sectors.

Many businesses use a one-size-fits-all solution for any issues which arise, leading to big problems.

ISBN Ebook:

276 Retail Logistics & Supply Chain Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Foundations of retail and supply chain and merchandising 3 Merchandise planning 4 Branch merchandising 5 Buying and sourcing 6 Logistics 7 Finance 8 Omni-channel retailing 9 Tools, reports and documents 10 Technology 11 Roles within supply chain and merchandising 12 Vertical integration and manufacturing 13 The fashion industry 14 Supermarket and food retail 15 Electronics retailing 16 Big ticket retailing 17 SME retail 18 Troubleshooting common issues in supply chain and merchandising 19 The future for supply chain and merchandising in retail This book « Explores retail supply chain and merchandising from the very basics, up to strategic and senior level challenges « Includes an academic presentation of theories and models used to aid practical understanding « Includes tools and case studies to help supply chain managers and merchant planners work more effectively « Explores the differences between industries in retail (i.e. the supply chain function in a supermarket is different to a merchandising function in a fashion retailer)

Price:

« Bridges the gap between research-based texts and those aimed solely at managers

Managing the Retail Supply Chain Merchandising Strategies that Increase Sales and Improve Edition:Profitability 1 Date:

Managing the Retail Supply Chain presents numerous examples of different business models adopted by a variety of companies. Covering basic principles of retail supply chain, KPIs, merchandise planning and demand planning as well as omnichannel, vertical integration, on-shelf availability and e-commerce, Managing the Retail Supply Chain is an essential guide for anyone involved in or studying retail supply chains and merchandising.

277 Transport Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction by Glen Davies 2 Goods Vehicle O-Licensing 3 Professional Competence 4 Goods Vehicle Drivers’ Hours and Working Time 5 Drivers’ Hours Records – GB Domestic Rules 6 Drivers’ Hours Records – EU/ AETR rules 7 Driver Licensing and Licence Penalties 8 Driver Testing and Training 9 Vehicle Registration, HGV Road User Levy, Excise Duty and Trade Licences 10 Insurance (Vehicles and Goods in Transit) and Conditions of Carriage 11 Road Traffic Law 12 Goods Vehicle Dimensions and Weights 13 Construction and Use of Vehicles 14 Vehicle Lighting and Marking 15 Goods Vehicle Plating, Annual Testing and Vehicle Inspections 16 Light Vehicle (MOT) Testing 17 Vehicle Maintenance and Maintenance Records 18 Safety – on the Road and at Work 19 Loads – General, Livestock, Food, etc 20 Loads – Abnormal and Projecting 21 Loads – Dangerous Goods and Waste 22 Light Vehicles 23 Vehicle Fuel Efficiency 24 Digital Communications and Technology 25 Transport and the Environment 26 International Operations

This book « Outlines the key information on professional competence, technical standards and goods vehicle operators, including the latest yearly updates, needed for those working in the transport industry « Provides clear guidance on the changes to transporting good between Great Britain and the EU caused by Brexit and the new trade deal and how to adapt working practices to remain compliant with the new rules and processes « Offers a definitive one-stop reference source for those working in the haulage industry « New to this edition: the latest yearly updates to the guidelines and regulations governing Great Britain, detailed information on the changes to transporting good between Great Britain and the EU (Brexit) and content on the key issues for those in the transport industry

Author Information Glen Davies is a transport and logistics specialist and Managing Director at The Driver Handbook based in Derbyshire, UK. Previously, he led the freight safety and environment programme at Transport for London following a 23 year career in military logistics. He is a Fellow of the Charted Institute of Logistics and Transport (CILT) and active in its Transport & Logistics Safety Forum. David Lowe has been involved in the road haulage industry for many years and is an experienced consultant and freelance writer based in Norfolk, UK. He has written notable books on transport including The Professional LGV Driver’s Handbook and The Pocket Guide to LGV Drivers’ Hours and Tachograph Law.

TheDescriptionUnitedKingdom has experienced the biggest changes to its freight and transport regulations in a lifetime. Understand the complete rules and processes governing the UK’s road transport operators with this guide, including those that have changed with Brexit.

Lowe’s HandbookOperator’sManager’sTransportand2022

Edition: 52 Date: 03/02/2022 Price: £64.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398605282 ISBN Ebook: 9781398605770 Pages: 616 Format (mm): 240x172 Product Category: Professional Subject: Transport

Lowe’s Transport Manager’s and Operator’s Handbook 2022 offers a complete overview of the operational rules and guidelines governing the UK’s road transport operator. This book contains all the relevant legal and technical information required to run a compliant, safe and efficient transport operation. It includes all the latest changes to the rules and processes, including those governing the transportation of goods between Great Britain and the EU following Brexit. This fully updated 52nd edition remains an essential resource for transport managers, fleet operators, owner-driver hauliers and those working in the sector. It covers all aspects relating to goods vehicles and their operators from vehicle registration, maintenance and load management (including abnormal and dangerous loads) to professional competence, operator training and driver testing. Road traffic law is explained alongside how to ensure safety on the road and at work. Meeting operating standards, keeping up to date with the latest industry changes and complying with the law, all while running sustainable transport operations, has never been simpler with the help of this guide.

A Study Guide for the Operator Certificate of CompetenceProfessional(CPC) in Road Freight 2020

A Study Guide for the Operator Certificate of Professional Competence (CPC) in Road Freight 2020 is a vital study guide that offers the thorough preparation needed to pass the tough CPC exams in the UK. It covers the examination method used by the Oxford, Cambridge and RSA (OCR) and the Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport (CILT). This is the Level 3 standard qualification overseen by The Office of Qualifications and Examinations Regulation (OFQUAL) and the Welsh Assembly Government, which is required by any person wishing to operate vehicles over 3,500 kg, the maximum authorised mass for hire and reward, in the UK and internationally.

Description

A Study Guide for the Operator Certificate of Professional Competence (CPC) in Road Freight 2020 has been extensively revised to include all the new legislation. It covers the eight study sections that the directive requires: civil law; commercial law; social law; fiscal law; business; financial; management of the undertaking access to the market; technical standards and technical aspects of the operation road safety. It features many case studies, examples, diagrams and graphics. New to this edition: updated sections on operator licencing, drivers’ hours, tachographs, vehicle testing, vehicle tax, vehicle registration, civil law, international driving and documentation.

Author Information Clive Pidgeon served as Chair on the Freight Transport Association (FTA) Welsh Freight Council for four years whilst with the PO. He joined OCR as a CPC examiner as a chief examiner. He also worked with HMG when the CPC qualification was reviewed in 1996. He serves as examination database manager for CILT Level 5 qualifications, a CILT Distance Learning Advisor, an examiner and verifier for CILT and an author of various CILT textbooks and training materials. Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Edition: 3 Date: 03/02/2020 Price: £59.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789665031 ISBN Ebook: 9781789665048 Pages: 400 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Transport

This book « Covers the entire CPC 2020 syllabus (as laid out in EC regulation 1071/2009), including all the set examination questions and factual notes needed to pass the exams « Meets the needs of those wishing to take either of the two most popular routes available to pass the CPC: the OCR and CILT examinations « Provides summaries of key learning points, spaces for notes and self-test sections throughout the book « New to this edition: updated sections on operator licencing, drivers’ hours, tachographs, vehicle testing, vehicle tax, vehicle registration, civil law, international driving and documentation

278 Transport Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Civil Law 3 Commercial Law 4 Social Law 5 Fiscal Law 6 Business and Financial Management 7 Access to the Market 8 Technical Standards and Technical Aspects of Operation 9 Road Safety

Author Information Anthony Francis is a consultant providing guidance on operating and commercial issues affecting the road, rail and aviation transport industries to passenger transport companies. He previously worked in senior strategic roles for the Department of Transport, the Strategic Rail Authority and Arriva. David Hurdle is an independent transport consultant and a transport and town planner. He has written and spoken extensively on sustainable transport issues. He has worked for local government and the public transport industry.

This book « Essential guide to cost-effective, sustainable road passenger transport management « Features a complete set of management tools equipping readers for success in the passenger transport field « Includes essential guidelines on topics such as coordinating staff training, putting together performance reports for directors and arranging vehicle maintenance « Online resources: sample performance reports and target assessment forms.

Description Road passenger transport management is an important role, involving the planning and coordinating of passenger transport operations, including routes and schedules. Managers ensure that passengers reach their destinations safely, on time and in the most cost-effective way. Road Passenger Transport Management covers all the essential tasks a transport manager is expected to master.

Road ManagementTransportPassenger

Planning and Coordinating Passenger Transport Operations Edition: 1 Date: 03/09/2020 Price: £44.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749497019 ISBN Ebook: 9780749497026 Pages: 352 Format (mm): 234x157 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Transport

279 Transport Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 How the bus business works 2 Definition of road passenger transport 3 History, heritage, current challenges 4 The legal and regulatory framework 5 Planning 6 Vehicles and fuels 7 Operations 8 Fares, ticketing and other revenue – turning a social service into a business 9 Human resources case study: Metroline 10 Wider engagement 11 The present and potential market for public transport 12 Bus provision and land use planning 13 Bus priority 14 Planning and operating a rural bus service 15 Further betweenpartnershipsbusoperators, local authorities and employers 16 The bus industry in Wales 17 Working with the public 18 The value of the bus to society 19 Presentation 20 The future and new technology 21 Appendix I (by Cyril McIntyre) – Regulation of road passenger transport in the Republic of Ireland 22 Appendix II (by Gavin Booth) –Scotland’s buses 23 Index

Road Passenger Transport Management provides tips and tools for working with customers, planning routes and scheduling delivery times, as well as managing a team of supervisors, administration staff and drivers. The authors include guidelines for coordinating staff training and arranging vehicle maintenance, MOTs and tax payments, as well as organizing vehicle replacements and managing contracts and developing new business. This is a contributed book, with expertise shared from wellknown academics and practitioners who have spent many years in the passenger transport field. The tools and case studies in this vital new guide will enable readers to learn new skills or build on existing expertise. Online supporting resources include sample performance reports and target assessment forms.

The aviation industry is a major driver of world trade. As global markets and economies are constantly evolving, practitioners and academics need more quality information and a broader perspective of aviation management rather than just silo-based knowledge, particularly if they wish to move up the management ladder and progress. Air Transport Management presents the dynamic shifts which have influenced structural changes in the aviation industry, such as the emergence of low cost carriers. These changes have transformed the market, leading to deregulation and consolidation. The author provides a viable road map aimed at giving students and managers in the aviation industry a rigorous understanding on how to manage strategically in complex and turbulent market conditions.

Textbook/Professional Subject: Transport

Air Transport Management examines the airline industry structure in terms of entry barriers, competition dynamics and competing business models. With the inclusion of fascinating case studies, this handbook assesses different business models used by international companies and proposes best fit management practices which airlines should follow in order to survive.

Pages:

Air ManagementTransport Strategic Management in the Airline Edition:Industry 1 Date:

Product

Price:

280 Transport Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 The scope of the airline industry 2 Growth and change in the airline industry – Air transport liberalization 3 The airline alliances 4 Airline industry analysis – A performancestructure-conduct-perspective 5 Airline competing business models 6 Airline competition dynamics 7 Measuring airline performance 8 Strategic groups in the airline industry 9 The future outlook of air transport 10 Conclusion 11 Index This book « Delivers an in-depth investigation of the full scope of the airline industry « Includes industry analysis of competing business models and the impact of airline alliances « Provides an assessment of airline performance, examining core competencies, dynamic capabilities and key performance indicators « Learn from case studies including Monarch, Air Berlin, Niki, Sabena, examining airline capacity management, risk models and fuel hedging Description

Author Information Prof Dr Eyden Samunderu (PhD) is a leading expert and well trusted advisor in the area of air transport with extensive international consulting experience. He is Program Director for a Master’s programme at the International School of Management (ISM) in Dortmund Germany. He is currently a Board Advisor at Aviation Partners Africa London as well as sitting as Advisory Board Member for the Hamburg Aviation Conference. His research interests are in air transport economics, airport infrastructure financing, container and shipping logistics, competition policy, multimarket contact and strategic group theory in air transport. 03/11/2019 £44.99 9780749484569 9780749484576 384 Format (mm): 235x155 Category:

ISBN Ebook:

ISBN Paperback:

281 Transport Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Air cargo – trying harder 2 The world of air cargo, Oliver Evans, former TIACA 3 Air cargo history 4 Airport connections 5 Cargo handling agents – the impact of IT 6 Road feeder service 7 Freight forwarder 8 Cool logistics 9 Express and mail 10 Special air cargoes 11 Cargo security and risk 12 Environment 13 Innovation and trends in air logistics 14 Views on the future 15 The law – organizations and regulations governing international aviation 16 Glossary of common air freight terms This book « Explains how the rapidly evolving global logistics industry works in close partnership with the aviation operators to achieve fast and efficient facilitation « Looks at air freight and how carriers are responding to market demands with new and better methods and technologies « Reviews changes in manufacturing and production methods « Illustrates how different challenges are met in varied markets through insightful case studies « Features contributions from a team of experts, including: Oliver Evans, Chief Cargo Officer at Swiss International Airlines Ltd and Stan Wraight, who has over 40 years of industry experience gained through both senior management and board level positions at KLM Cargo, Atlas Air and AirBridge Cargo « Online resources: Air Cargo News’ Freighter Directory Description Aviation Logistics looks at the function of the air cargo business and its role in global supply chains and logistics. As global economies are constantly evolving, the supply chain business with its transport partners must be proactive for the future. Technology and its resulting efficiency and transparency are therefore a central part of this book. Aviation Logistics examines how carriers are coming up with new methods and technologies to improve ground handling and road transport, traceability systems and barcoding, security and screening, and safe delivery of perishable items (such as in the pharmaceutical and medical sectors).

Endorsed by The International Air Cargo Association (TIACA), Aviation Logistics is supplemented with case studies and contributions from a team of experts including Oliver Evans and Stan Wraight, both industry experts. Online resources available: Air Cargo News’ Freighter Directory.

Aviation Logistics

The Dynamic Partnership of Air Freight and Supply Chain Edition: 1 Date: 03/02/2016 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749472702 ISBN Ebook: 9780749472719 Pages: 208 Format (mm): 234x155 Product Category: Textbook/Professional

Author Information Michael Sales specializes in press relations and consultancy for the transport industry. He has handled a number of prestigious clients, including Airports of Paris, Air France Express, Athens International Airport, Cologne Bonn Airport, ECS, Basque regional industrial promotion, Düsseldorf Airport, Budapest Airport and many more. He is also a freelance journalist.

Subject: Transport

SeaDescriptionfreightremains

Grasp the core theories and understand the latest research in maritime logistics, along with how this field operates and contributes to global supply chains, with this key textbook.

The third edition is fully updated with new content on maintenance optimization, supply chain integration, economies of scale within liner shipping and port performance and management. In addition, this edition examines new technologies, considers new and existing risks to the maritime supply chain as well as generally how maritime logistics will continue to evolve. For those seeking to become maritime logistics specialists, this is the authoritative companion.

Author Information Dong-Wook Song is Korean Chair in Maritime Affairs, Professor of Maritime Economics and Logistics and Head of Shipping Management and Logistics at the World Maritime University, Malmö, Sweden. He is Editor-inChief of WMU Journal of Maritime Affairs and has worked as consultant for a number of private and public organizations including the UN, OECD, ADB and World Bank Photis M Panayides is Professor in Shipping Economics, Department of Commerce, Finance and Shipping at Cyprus University of Technology, Limassol, Cyprus. He serves on the editorial board of several academic journals and has served as Vice-President of the Board of Directors of the Cyprus Ports Authority and as member of the Council of the International Association of Maritime Economists.

Maritime Logistics provides a complete overview of the core concepts within this discipline from a range of international expert contributors. This textbook examines the recent developments in the ports and shipping industries including supply chain strategies and emerging, innovative practices.

Designed for maritime students and professionals, the structure offers a complete approach with an emphasis on developing a well-rounded knowledge and understanding of the field.

Maritime Logistics

This book « Provides a comprehensive overview of maritime logistics including all of the core concepts and latest research « Examines the latest risks and threats within the port and shipping industry such as the propagation effects on port disruption, and how recent technological developments such as improved analysis of real time data information seek to prevent these risks « New to this edition: updates on real time data to improve operational efficiencies, capacity optimization, scheduling and agility, asset utilization within port management, route planning, integration and KPIs in intermodal shipping « Covers all trade facilitating elements to maritime transport and its value within global supply chains

282 Maritime Logistics Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1 Introduction to maritime logistics 2 Maritime transport and logistics as a trade facilitator 3 International maritime trade and logistics 4 Defining maritime logistics and its value 5 Hinterland logistics and global supply chains 6 Human elements in maritime logistics 2 Shipping logistics 7 Intermodal freight transport and logistics 8 Global maritime networks in container shipping 9 Supply chain integration of shipping companies 10 Logistics strategy in container shipping 11 Tanker shipping logistics 12 Dry bulk shipping logistics 3 Port logistics 13 Dry ports in concept and practice 14 Port-centric logistics in concept and practice 15 Container hub ports in concept and practice 16 Multinationalizing container ports - Business models and strategies 17 Public-private partnerships and port logistics performance 18 Port and logistics chainsChanges in effectivenessorganizational 19 Logistics performance of supply chain-oriented ports 4 Conclusion 20 Looking ahead

overwhelmingly the most common form of transport for goods globally.

A Guide to Contemporary Shipping and Port Management Edition: 3 Date: 03/12/2021 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789661699 ISBN Ebook: 9781789661705 Pages: 536 Format (mm): 234x157 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Maritime Logistics

Parts one and two of Maritime Transport present the concepts, theory and background information, then part three presents more complex and deeper issues such as the maritime transportation of the future. It covers topics such as intelligent shipping, data exchange at sea and maritime security. In addition, the book includes fascinating case studies and examples, such as maritime transport in the Baltic sea, ship strategies in Norway and Greece and the benefits of slow steaming. At the end of each chapter there are questions that will help students to gain a deeper understanding of the many topics covered.

This book « Develop the ability to understand complex decision making approaches in international maritime logistics and transport settings Gain a critical understanding of international maritime transport from a strategic perspective Develop analytical skills to assess the role of logistics service providers and other stakeholders in international maritime transport and logistics « Learn from insightful case studies covering topics such as: Gothenburg dry land transport; traffic between Helsinki and Tallinn; Russian transit traffic; IKEA transport operations; ship strategies: Greece vs Norway Description

283 Maritime Logistics Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Global shipping 2 World trade patterns 3 Globalization and growth in shipping 4 Sea traffic currents 5 Passenger traffic 6 Logistics definition 7 Logistics costs 8 Transport costs 9 Transport modes 10 Short sea shipping 11 Cargoes 12 Vessels 13 Employment issues 14 Sea transport market 15 Cargo review 16 Ship structure 17 Port time 18 Ship size 19 Freight ticket registers and subsidies for shipping 20 Other expenses 21 Funding 22 Operational cost accounting of the vessel 23 Relocation agreement and shipping documents 24 Cargo formation 25 Delivery clauses and shipping conditions 26 Operational operations of the port 27 Cargo handling 28 Environmental impacts of sea transport 29 Dangerous cargoes 30 Ship recycling 31 Maritime security and social responsibility 32 Supervision and regulation of shipping 33 Developments in maritime safety regulations 34 Security culture 35 Logistics exchange 36 Information exchange in the port 37 Data exchange at sea and in shipping companies 38 Intelligent shipping by sea

Maritime transport is the transport of people or goods by water. It is the backbone of world trade and globalization. Twenty-four hours a day and all year round, ships carry cargoes to all corners of the globe. Maritime Transport focuses on the operational side of this important industry, covering many topics such as sea traffic currents, passenger transport, short sea shipping and dangerous cargoes.

Author Information Ulla Tapaninen is a Senior Transport and Logistics Specialist for the City of Helsinki. She is also in charge of Helsinki City maritime cluster programme, focusing on the city’s unique arctic and smart marine industry with start-up companies. She is an adjunct professor of maritime logistics and was previously at the University of Turku. She has worked in key positions in two Finnish shipping companies, Finncarries Oy Ab and ESL Shipping.

Maritime Transport Shipping Logistics and Operations Edition: 1 Date: 03/05/2020 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789662467 ISBN Ebook: 9781789662481 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Maritime Logistics

This book « Edited by two leading academics who have conducted research for The Department of Transport and the United Nations « Includes research-based findings from an international team of contributors as well as invaluable insights and international case studies « Focuses on the big picture, which differentiates it from other available texts which are regional (e.g. Europe, Asia) or focus on specific aspects (e.g. privatisation, competitiveness)

284 Maritime Logistics Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Global Challenges and Port Governance 1 Value Creation and Value Capture in the Ports’ Business System 2 The Governance of Ports under Global Challenges –What Next? 3 Effect of Global Supply Chain Developments on the Governance of Port Regulation 4 Port Governance Reform in Spain 2 Port Resilience, Transport Logistics and the Environment 5 Port Resilience – A Perspective from UK Ports 6 Quantifying Resilience in Seaports – An Application to Ports in the Hamburg-Le Havre Range 7 Understanding Australian Port Resilience and the Development of a Port Resilience Framework 8 Green Pricing Decision-Making – Tackling Uncertainty In The Case Of Port Infrastructure 9 The Implications of the SECA for Ports and Hinterland Transport in Sweden 10 The Role of Ports in the Offshore Wind Industry 3 Port Policies and Competition Strategies 11 Canadian Ports Policy – An Evolutionary Approach 12 Port Policies and Private Investments – Insights from Latin America and Caribbean Countries 13 The Operations Management and Governance of Cruise Terminals in Hong Kong 14 Competition Strategies in the Spanish Port System and Their Relationship with Port Authority Efficiency 15 Assessing the National Port System – The Case of Vietnam 4 Port Choice and Ports in Shipping Systems 16 Supply Chain Modelling for Container-Port Choice – Case Study of a TranshipmentWest-MediterraneanPort 17 Port-centric Logistics – The Seaport Versus Inland Location Dilemma 18 Port Management Implications from Economies of Scale in the Liner Container Shipping Industry

« Online resources: Includes lecture notes, lesson plans and PowerPoints

Port Management covers all the main aspects of management, administration and policy, and fills existing gaps in the literature in this area. Edited by two leading academics who have conducted research for the Department of Transport and the United Nations, this text is international in scope and includes research-based findings from a global team of contributors. It provides fascinating insights into the geography, economics, politics and trade involved in port management. Online supporting resources include lecture notes, lesson plans and PowerPoints.

Description Port Management looks at the numerous types of business interactions that occur at active ports. These include cooperating with other ports, coordinating deliveries with ships, overseeing port development, advertising and promotion, and enforcing security and environmental protection initiatives. Including research, practical insights and case studies, this book looks at quantitative methods and market analysis, maritime logistics, port planning and pricing, and commercial law.

Author Information Dr Stephen Pettit is a researcher for the Transport and Shipping Research Group in Cardiff Business School, UK. He has been involved in a range of transport-related research including a groundbreaking project for the UK Department of Transport. Professor Anthony Beresford is Programme Director for the MSc International Transport at Cardiff University, UK and Director for the suite of Masters Programmes in Logistics and Operations Management. Professor Beresford has travelled widely in an advisory capacity within the ports and transport fields in Europe, Asia and North America.

Port Management Cases in Port Geography, Operations and Edition:Policy 1 Date: 03/12/2017 Price: £54.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474324 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474331 Pages: 576 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Maritime Logistics

Smart ShippingGreen Building Regenerative Business Systems in Maritime Edition: 1 Date: 03/02/2023 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789667837 ISBN Ebook: 9781789667844 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Maritime Logistics

This book « Includes case studies from leading organizations that have created innovative solutions to environmental issues, such as Maersk « Examines the business plans behind the building of 100% renewable powered ships and the impact of wind power and alternative fuels on operating expenses

285 Maritime Logistics Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Building the right team, systems design 2 Adapting technologytime-testedfor21stcentury 3 Combining proven tech in new ways 4 Approach Shift - the impact of the Paris Treaty 5 Traction and cultivating the right environment with Demand Pull, interlocking systems, using renewables 6 Systems Innovation - the 3 Horizons approach, working tech and digital and finance simultaneously 7 Collaboration in action with shared purpose, conflict and resolution 8 Cutting steel, new business models 9 Ship manufacturing in 21st century, progressive business models

« Argues that in a climate emergency, not doing anything is the biggest risk to the shipping industry and global trade « Explores the importance of collaboration across sectors and industries in the reduction of maritime emissions

OverDescription90%ofallgoods are moved by sea, meaning international shipping emissions have a huge impact on the environment. However, with the International Maritime Organisation’s commitment to reach zero greenhouse gas emissions as soon as possible, the shipping industry needs to change.

New ships operating today, which have a typical 30 year lifetime, must therefore work in a zeroemission world. Smart Green Shipping explores how those in the industry can address the world’s greatest challenge through collaboration and embracing a new ‘racing mindset’. It also includes key case studies of organizations to inspire successful problem solving and innovation, because in a climate emergency the biggest risk is taking no action.

Beginning by looking at the current state of shipping and international shipping emissions, the book goes on to examine examples of industry initiatives using new technologies, such as working with the European Space Agency on meteorological data. With information on circular shipbuilding, wind power and alternative fuels, this timely work explains how developing viable systems for the future demands effort across the entire system to design and build new technologies, enablers, organizations and infrastructures.

Author Information Diane Gilpin is Founder and CEO of The Smart Green Shipping Alliance (SGS Ltd), a collaborative industry initiative focussed on developing technically, commercially and environmentally superior systems solutions for shipping. She advises the UK Government as a member of the Clean Maritime Council and acts an expert reviewer for high level policy recommendations focused on decarbonising shipping. She regularly appears on TV, radio and in print media discussing shipping and climate change and was included in the BBC Woman’s Hour Power List 2020. She is based in Swindon, UK.

« Outlines the importance of understanding the complex, interconnected shipping supply chain in order to design and build new systems and technologies for the future

7 Cooperation and Collaboration between Shipping Lines [Alan Robertson, Webster Robertson Ltd, London, UK] Collaboration in the Container Shipping Industry – New Technologies Enabling Collaboration between Shipping Lines and Terminals [Robert Inchausti, XVELA, Oakland, California, USA]

12 IoT Solutions in Maritime Logistics: Transports of Perishable Dairy Goods [Stefan Viehmann and Hans-Thoralf Bieber, Kuehne + Nagel (AG & Co. KG), Hamburg, Germany]

History and Usage of Containers in Logistics and Beyond [Hildegard Buschmann, Merle & Sheppard, Wuppertal, Germany / New Zealand] Effective Management of the MCLC Empty Container Logistics – A Prospective Local Approach in the Port Of Hamburg [Marco Hofmann and Lillian Schmidt, Hamburg Port Authorities (HPA), Hamburg, Germany] Port and Terminal Operations [Maik Ullrich and Michael Baumert, Hamburg,HPMPORT,Germany]

14 Industry Trends and Opportunities [Rolf Neise, International School of Management (ISM), Hamburg, Germany]

286 Maritime Logistics Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1

Current hot topics from the supply chain and the maritime business perspective are included.

13 The Dortmund,School[QeisinPerspectiveService-DominanttoCreateValuetheMaritimeBusinessKamran,InternationalofManagement(ISM),Germany]

2 The

The Maritime Container Logistics Chain (MCLC) Global Container Trade – The Past and the Future [Eyden Samunderu, International School of Management (ISM), Dortmund, Germany] Maritime Hamburg,School[RolfTransportationContainerChain(MCTC)Neise,InternationalofManagement(ISM),Germany]

« Features research and innovations from the supply chain and the maritime business perspective, covering topics such as empty container logistics, terminal & port optimisation and intermodal freight

« Includes vital tools and case studies to help supply chain managers and shippers work more effectively in complex areas, such as design thinking and real-time data management

Container Logistics

From the supply chain perspective, Container Logistics covers areas such as the purchase of transportation services from ocean carriers and transport management, to effective and efficient logistics execution. From the maritime business perspective, the book covers topics such as intermodal freight optimisation and hinterland transportation, and terminal and port optimisation.

Description Whilst the maritime container business has been studied in depth, the impact on shippers and how shippers deal with the given challenges has not been fully examined. Container Logistics bridges this gap and looks at the maritime business from a customer’s perspective. The book examines the challenges, solutions and the latest developments in the container industry as well as the interaction between the different actors involved, such as freight forwarders, supply chain managers and shippers.

« Provides shared knowledge from a team of international contributors such as the CEO of Hamburg Port Authorities, the International Logistics Director of Michelin, the Senior Vice President of Global Customer Solutions, Kuehne + Nagel and the Global Procurement Director, Mondi

Multimodal Transport of Mining Equipment from Germany to Kazakhstan [Zhanat BusinessStephenAnthonyAbdugalimov,Beresford,andPettit,CardiffSchool,Cardiff, UK]

2 The

This book « Examines container logistics from the shippers perspective, tackling issues that are central to the role of organising and overseeing the transportation of goods and commodities, a unique angle which is not covered in other maritime transport books

Author Information Dr Rolf Neise was the Global Head of Logistics Operations at BAT (British American Tobacco plc.) responsible for defining Logistics Excellence in the End-to-End Supply Chain. Prior to BAT, Dr Neise worked in several consultancies where he collected in-depth experience in reorganization and optimisation projects in different industries (automotive, telecommunication, chemistry) and companies across the world. He currently works as a lecturer at the International School of Management (ISM) in Germany and as a senior consultant supporting multinational companies in optimising their supply chain management and logistics structures.

« Provides insights into ways of managing container logistics as an integrated part of a shipper’s global supply chain covering planning, procurement and execution and collaboration of logistics activities

The Integration of the MCLC into Global Supply Chain Management 9 Global SCM and Resulting Shippers’ Requirements [Rolf Neise, International School of Management (ISM), Hamburg, Germany] 10 Advanced Benchmarking and Market Intelligence – A Key Instrument in Optimising Container Logistics Procurement [Björn Klippel, TIM Consult, Mannheim, Germany] 11 Formation of a Shipper Council to Improve Data Quality and Share Best Practices [Gregory Kefer, Infor Corporation, San Francisco, USA]

The Role of the Container in the Supply Chain Edition: 1 Date: 03/05/2018 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481247 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481254 Pages: 448 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Maritime Logistics

With the inclusion of clear examples of best practice and bona fide case studies, as well as invaluable contributions from an international team of experts, Container Logistics is an essential guide for supply chain managers and shippers, as well as academics and industry professionals working in the maritime business. Online supporting resources include images from the book and chapter summaries.

« Online resources: Powerpoints of key diagrams and tables and chapter summaries

Pages: 288

287 Maritime Logistics Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 An introduction to the blue economy 2 Shipping 3 Ports and harbours 4 Offshore renewables 5 The cruise industry 6 Maritime surveillance 7 Aquaculture 8 Hydrography and bathymetry 9 Ocean observation 10 Sustainable fisheries 11 Subsea monitoring 12 Safety of life at sea 13 Conclusion

ISBN Paperback:

ISBN Ebook:

Andy Hamflett is co-founder and director of NLA and a journalist, researcher and innovation expert on new technologies. He leads innovative research projects that explore the emerging potential of Big Data for social impact.

Author Information Nick Lambert is co-founder and director of NLA, a Blue Economy solutions company, which specializes in the Blue Economy and tech innovation in associated domains. He advises corporates on a wide range of marine and maritime issues, and regularly hosts and delivers keynote speeches at high-profile conferences.

Jonathan Turner is co-founder and director of NLA and specializes in customerfocused organizational process design, lean methodology and performance measurement through analytical skills and practical use of data. £46.99 9780749483951 9780749483968 Format (mm): 234x158 Product Category: Supplementary Maritime

Technology and the Blue Economy From Autonomous Shipping to Big Edition:Data 1 Date: 03/09/2019 Price:

Logistics

Text/ Professional Subject:

Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Manufacturing & Production

Many production managers have de-stocked excessively large inventories, gone lean, experimented with continuous improvement processes and introduced new working practices. These interventions have largely failed. Businesses have also failed to invest in the workforce that undertakes improvements. This means that cash flow stops quickly, stocks are depleted to zero and customers lose confidence. Systems for Manufacturing Excellence looks at how people and technology work effectively together to generate high performance manufacturing and service operations. Not everyone is a Toyota but that does not mean we cannot learn from such businesses. The book will present a logic, variety of approaches and methods that underpin the different models of high performance used by ‘world class’ businesses. The authors use examples from their training with Toyota, work with Tesco, and many world class manufacturing businesses that form their research agenda. The book will help teams run each part of their production process for effectiveness and efficiency, with a high level of discipline that supports excellence in performance.

Systems ExcellenceManufacturingfor Generating Efficient and Reliable

288 Manufacturing & Production Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Operational excellence 2 The real issues and DNA of winning organizations 3 Socio-technical systems and their design 4 High performing organizations (six sigma and lean) 5 TPM and (reliabilitymaintainingfocusedand OEEbased flow improvement) 6 Highly reliable organizations (organizational level preoccupations) 7 Operations management by design of new processes 8 The safety case 9 Improving processes and the sustainability of improvement 10 The new agenda for change 11 Conclusions This book « Examines the real secrets of highly effective production processes in winning organizations, such as Rolls Royce, Toyota and Land Rover, as well as Tesco and Unilever « Explains socio-technical systems and their design through in-depth case studies of best practice « Investigates high performing organisations and their use of six sigma and lean manufacturing « Presents tools to help managers improve processes and the sustainability of improvement such as sand cone models and the supportive model of manufacturing « Online resources: powerpoint diagrams of models, as well as surveys and exercises Description

Manufacturing Operations Edition: 1 Date: 03/01/2020 Price: £39.99 ISBN 9780749496999 ISBN Ebook: 9780749497002 Pages: 344 Format (mm): 235x155

Author Information Nick Rich is Professor of Operations Management at Swansea School of Management. He teaches Socio-Technical Systems Design. Nick Rich is a Fellow at Toyota Motor Corporation of Japan. Mohamed Afy-Shararah is an industrial engineer experienced in the manufacturing and distribution sectors. He was awarded his doctorate in strategic operations management and received formal training at the Toyota Lean Management Centre.

Paperback:

289 Manufacturing & Production Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 The importance of standards 2 The evolution of Total Quality Management (TQM) 3 Introduction to management system standards 4 Quality management system standards 5 Operational excellence (OpEx) 6 Environmental management systems standards (EMS) 7 Occupational health and safety management systems 8 Information managementsecurity 9 Business continuity and uninterrupted product flow 10 Supply chain management, design and international standards 11 Developing a learning organization and auditing 12 Leadership and international standards 13 Implementation, resistance to change and sustaining change 14 Conclusions and looking forwards This book « Presents the theory behind international standards and their application in industry, with case studies from Bosch, BP, M&S, Bodyshop, Toyota, Tesco, McDonalds, Benetton and Royal Mint. « Looks at how product and technical standards have evolved to help shape the way in which we manage entire businesses and their interactions with customers, suppliers and the consumer « Introduces examples of standards working in practice, resulting in safer ways of working, better health and safety, better quality, better regulatory compliance, better environmental performance « Includes insightful seminar topics and sample exam questions.

International Standards for Design and Manufacturing is based on many years of research collaboration between Swansea University and leading manufacturing and production practitioners from key companies from around the world. Each chapter includes an introduction to the standards being discussed, definitions, examples of using the standards in practice, why these standards are important, conclusions, seminar topics and mock exam questions to allow the reader to test their knowledge and understanding.

« Online resources: Full lecture slides for seminars as well as links to videos and revision materials for students Description

Author Information Nick Rich is Professor of Socio-Technical Systems Design at Swansea School of Management. He is an academic with a specialist interest in high performance and highly reliable businesses. He has gained international acclaim and has received a significant number of awards for his research work. F. Tegwen Malik is an academic at Swansea University and focuses her research on biomimetics, product design and innovation (for all applications including the life sciences sector) and the application of international management standards to industry and service sectors.

StandardsInternationalfor Design and Manufacturing Quality Management and International Best Practice Edition: 1 Date: 03/11/2019 Price: £44.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789660425 ISBN Ebook: 9781789660531 Pages: 368 Format (mm): 231x155 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Manufacturing & Production

International standards ensure that organisations operate the right processes to support their objectives. International Standards for Design and Manufacturing is an accessible guide for manufacturing and production managers and students. It guides readers through the standards needed to build operating systems which are robust, integrated and used to drive the continuous improvement of business performance.

290 Manufacturing & Production Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Hyper manufacturing 2 Cross integration 3 Software hybridization 4 Tentacular traction 5 Story making 6 Start-up leadership 7 Men & machine learning 8 The 3 concentric circles of Teslism – A systemic model 9 Case studies

Description

Tesla disrupts the automotive industry by creating many innovative pieces that fit together. Its marketing, production, sales and technology strategies are all notably different from its competitors.

The Tesla Way

« Online

The disruptive strategies and models of Edition:Teslism 1

Date: 03/08/2019 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749497033 ISBN Ebook: 9780749497040 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Manufacturing & Production

Author Information Michaël Valentin is Associate Director at OPEO, a consultancy specialized in industrial transformations. Having accumulated significant experience both as an operational manager in the automotive sector and as a McKinsey & Company consultant, Valentin now helps small to medium enterprises (SMEs) and large groups become industries of the future.

This book « Investigates how to reinvent modern manufacturing processes through following the Tesla business strategy Examines some of the features of Tesla’s ground-breaking model, such as their continuous improvement indicators and cycles that can drastically reduce and better sort waste, save energy, increase renewable energy and enable self-sufficiency Includes case studies from Michelin, Mass and other innovative consumer goods manufacturers such as Bosch and Kimberley Clarke resources: sample templates for analysing efficiency of processes on the factory floor

The Tesla Way is an elongated case study looking at Tesla’s business model and how this can be applied to existing manufacturing and production strategies in other companies. The author also includes case studies from Michelin, Mass and other consumer goods manufacturing companies.

The Tesla Way will look at the origins of Tesla, its journey to success, new business models and what will come next. The author includes a mixture of the theory behind the Tesla business model and its applications, examining the combination between the manufacturing world and the digital world. He has also interviewed a cross-section of Tesla’s current employees in both the USA and France. At the end of each chapter an interview with a CEO or top manager of an industrial firm is featured: among others, the stories of Luxor Lighting, ThyssenKrupp, Bosch or Kimberley Clarke. There are also insightful questions for managers. Online supporting resources include sample templates for analyzing efficiency of processes on the factory floor.

Leonardo Salcerini is the Managing Director of Toyota Material Handling Italia, President of Toyota Service Centre, Bologna, President of MBT, Chairman of the Academy and Logistics Solutions, Toyota Material Handling Italia, Bologna. Danilo Verga is an international consultant working in business transformation through Toyota methods and practices.

Toyota Methods and Operating Models Achieve Business Success with the Toyota Way Edition: 1 Date: 03/04/2020 Price: £34.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789663044 ISBN Ebook: 9781789663075 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x157 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Manufacturing & Production

The Italian market 23 The Toyota Way, values, interpretations and lean 24 The new model A.C.C.E.S.S 3 Appendices

This book « Presents a case study of an organizational development programme, which transformed a small business into an international success through applying the Toyota methods and values « Provides a detailed analysis of Toyota methods and operating models « Gives advice on how to grow a business and achieve commercial success through the application of learnings from Toyota « Presents Toyota’s superior logistics networks as well as its development of an advanced and highly successful supply chain Description

291 Manufacturing & Production Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 From CESAB to Toyota Material ManufacturingHandlingItaly 1 The Toyota Group 2 The History of CESAB 3 The product 4 From Push to Pull 5 The production lines 6 The model 7 The 2S (Seiri and Seiton) 8 The Logistics 9 The organisation of Toyota 10 Standardisation 11 Quality 12 Visual Management 13 Kaizen and efficiency 14 Starting from the bottom up 15 Examples of implementationthe of TPS in other organisations 16 Monozukuri and Hitozukuri (important men at the centre of the transformation) 17 Toyota and Business 18 Kaizena and Financial Results 19 TPS and Industry 4.0 2 The implementation of the Toyota Way into commercial processes and sales operations 20 The Toyota Academy 21 Problems faced, interviews with central figures 22

Toyota Methods and Operating Models presents a case study of a small, traditional Italian manufacturer in the Toyota Industries Corporation Group, which began an important process of transformation until it became a successful, modern and advanced international business: Toyota Material Handling. Toyota management made internal changes and developed the commercial networks, successfully applying the Toyota Production System (TPS, or Lean Production) as well as the values of the Toyota Way. Author Stefano Cortiglioni led the transformation project, which took four years. Toyota Methods and Operating Models presents the continuing success story. The authors analyze the Toyota methods and operating models that can be directly applied to your business in order to reach excellence in operations and industry 4.0. It provides tangible advice on how to grow a business and achieve commercial success, with superior processes and logistics networks, as well as the development of an advanced and highly successful supply chain.

Author Information Stefano Cortiglioni is the Toyota Lean Academy Italy Director and a senior specialist in T.P.S and regional manager of Toyota Material Handling Europe. International Consultant optimizing business processes, He was formerly Operations Director at Toyota Material Handling Manufacturing, and General Manager of LTE Italy.

Author Information Omera Khan is Professor of Supply Chain Management at Royal Holloway University of London. She’s also a Visiting Professor at the University of Agder in Norway and adviser in logistics and supply chain management to many other universities around the world. She is internationally recognized in the fields of supply chain risk management, supply chain resilience and cyber risk, supply chain responsiveness, sustainability and the impact of product design. Omera Khan’s work in this area has been widely published in practitioner articles and academic publications.

Eighty percent of a product’s eventual supply chain costs are already present at the early stages of product design and development. This book allows companies to make informed design decisions that have significant positive through-life implications for risk, complexity and responsiveness, thus allowing them to create a ‘moat’ that is difficult for competitors to sidestep or surmount.

« Provides valuable insights from leading businesses who are known for their successful product design, such as Egil Moller Nielsen, former Group-Vice President for Global Distribution and Logistics at LEGO Description

Product Design and the Supply Chain Competing Through Design Edition: 1 Date: 03/12/2018 Price: £42.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478230 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478247 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 234x154 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Manufacturing & Production

Product design touches every aspect of modern life, determining the form and function of the products and technologies that we use every day. Product design is not just concerned with the appearance and functionality of products; it has an important role in determining the cost, pricing, risk and profitability profile of those products. Product Design and the Supply Chain shows how decisions taken at the design stage of a product’s life cycle go on to affect that product’s subsequent value to a company.

Product Design and the Supply Chain contains fascinating content applicable to industry. It is full of useful and insightful real-life cases and examples. This book sets out to show how design impacts: sales revenues, pricing, time to market, manufacturing and supply chain costs, supply chain risks, brand loyalty, and competitiveness.

292 Manufacturing & Production Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Setting the design agenda 2 The interface between product design and the supply chain 3 Product design and supply chain risk 4 Product design and the pursuit of agility 5 Product design and sustainability 6 Building bridges – Making the change

This book « Explains how to design and manufacture products that meet the diverse needs and demands of customers, covering a number of different industries, such as textiles, automotive, electronics, aerospace and retail Describes how to compete in a global market by integrating product design into the supply chain and looks at key issues, such as resource footprints and risk

Pages: 720 Format (mm): 239x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Procurement

This book « Shares wisdom from one of the most respected academics in the field and a team of contributors who are both academics and industry experts Covers purchasing concepts, frameworks and best practice from esteemed business school HEC Paris « Covers strategic and tactical standpoints, including strategic thinking and specific thought processes « Shows how to optimise specific aspects of purchasing Description Strategic Sourcing Management examines procurement and supply management in detail, covering the three dimensions of competitiveness, effectiveness and efficiency. Written by Olivier Bruel, Professor Emeritus HEC Paris, and a team of contributing experts from academia, consulting and industry, the book is organised into four parts: strategic decisions; operational management of procurement and related supply chain; management of human resources and dedicated information systems; management of performance and change.

Author Information Olivier Bruel is Professor Emeritus of the Information Systems and Operations Management Department at HEC Paris. He has also been conducting many consulting activities and is Founder and and Honorary President of the ACA (Association Cesa Achats et Supply Chain). 03/12/2016 £49.99 9780749476991 9780749477004

Strategic ManagementSourcing Structural and Operational DecisionEdition:making 1 Date:

ISBN Paperback:

293 Procurement Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Strategic decisions and supplier policies 1 Procurement: its integration in a company’s general strategy 2 Procurement segmentationmarketing:andstrategies 3 Definition of requirements and upstream procurement practices 4 Supplier policy: sourcing, panel and SRM 5 Globalization and international procurement 6 Sustainable procurement: stakes and implementation 7 Outsourcing, “make-orbuy” decisions and simple subconctracting 2 Operational management of procurement 8 Quantitative forecasting and requirements planning 9 Economic optimization: tco minimization, service level for internal clients and shared cash management 10 Calls for tenders: major stages, selection process and postprocurement follow-up 11 Procurement of services CAPEX procurement 12 The financial stakes of procurement: mechanisms for protecting currency and energy and commodity purchases 13 Public procurement: French and European contexts 14 The practice of international operations 15 International procurement: legal considerations 3 Organization and management of resources 16 Organization, structure and positioning of the procurement department 17 Procurement professions and managementhuman-resources 18 Procurement information systems and dedicated web tools 4 Performance and change management 19 Procurement communication plan 20 Procurement reportingmeasurementperformance:indicatorsandsystems 21 Procurement performance: steering change management 22 The co-authors 23 Glossary

This book has been written with a comprehensive global and coherent approach but the chapters are self-standing, enabling the reader to dip into different sections according to need. Strategic Sourcing Management considers both tactical and strategic perspectives that link with a corporate strategy and it includes dedicated chapters on how to set up a Strategic Sourcing function. The text is enriched with clear graphics and solid examples of best practice. Strategic Sourcing Management is a robust text based on both research and experience, so an essential reference for practitioners and academics working in or studying procurement and supply management. It is suitable for anyone involved in procurement and supply management at a senior level but also for general management enabling them to understand the mechanisms of value creation through Strategic Sourcing.

Price:

ISBN Ebook:

294 Procurement Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Establishing strategic sourcing success criteria 2 Supply market research 3 Supplier research 4 Make versus buy decisions 5 Outsource versus insource 6 Supply risk analysis 7 Category management 8 Thinking local acting global 9 Zero carbon footprint sourcing 10 RFI versus RFP 11 Strategic sourcing tools and techniques 12 Ecosystem mapping and value chain dynamics 13 Cost modelling and pricing models 14 Sustaining competitive pricing over time 15 Advanced negotiation skills 16 Supplier managementperformance This book « Features interviews with supply chain leaders working in a range of industries, who share new insights and practical recommendations « Explores how to drive performance and margin improvement in a sustainable and ethical way « Outlines how to turn the theory into an action plan with a comprehensive toolkit of tried and trusted strategic sourcing techniques and processes « Explains how to design and implement a sourcing strategy, from establishing success criteria through to supplier performance management « Online resources: PowerPoint slides for lecturers

Effective Strategic Sourcing brings together tools and techniques to develop comprehensive sourcing strategies and drive performance and margin improvement in an ethical, environmentally responsible way. From supplier research and risk analysis to category management and cost modelling, it answers key questions around make versus buy, outsource versus insource and RFI versus RFP.

ModernDescriptionsupplychains are enjoying new opportunities for innovation and growth. Build competitive advantage, optimize cost and encourage ethical business practices with the process of strategic sourcing.

Author Information Patrick Barr is the owner and Managing Partner of Barr Performance Coaching, based in Greater Dublin, Ireland. He has over 30 years’ international experience in supply chain operations, strategic sourcing and strategy management, and previously held senior supply chain roles at Microsoft, Diageo and British Airways. His current clients range from micro SMEs to major multinationals. He is a Faculty member at the Irish Management Institute and is also the author of The Successful Career Toolkit, published by Kogan Page. Strategic Sourcing with Sustainable Strategies for Procurement Edition: 1 Date: 03/06/2022 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398605541 ISBN Ebook: 9781398605558 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Procurement

Effective

Top supply chain leaders from a range of industries offer their insights and experience in interviews covering the challenges inherent in modern strategic sourcing. The book also focuses on how supply chain and procurement professionals can address sustainability concerns by thinking globally and acting locally and aiming for net-zero carbon footprint sourcing. Learn from the experts and thrive in the ‘new normal’ with this essential guide to maximising the benefits of strategic sourcing.

Drive Performance

ManagementCategory in Purchasing

A Strategic Approach to Maximize Business Profitability Edition: 4 Date: 03/03/2019 Price: £49.99 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482626 Pages: 520 Format (mm): 242x165 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Procurement

In this new edition, Jonathan O’Brien shows how a strategic approach needs to integrate with other approaches, such as supplier relationship management and how the procurement function negotiates. Additionally, this new edition includes some new insights, based upon the experience of senior practitioners in industry, on how to make category management a success in the organization. It also includes some general updates and contextualizes the future procurement function and an ever increasing digitally enabled, de-globalized, post Brexit world. There is also additional material on the effect of international developments on procurement, updated tools and templates, and examples of how these have been successfully used in industry. Category Management in Purchasing, 4th edition connects theory and practice and provides readers with the tools to analyze complex sourcing situations quickly and clearly, and so develop innovative and creative proposals for sourcing.

This book « Includes a full collection of the essential tools and templates for practitioners to apply category management and deliver value and cost savings when sourcing and purchasing Connects procurement theory and practice through case studies including IKEA, The Body Shop, the UK’s National Health Service (NHS), Heinz and GlaxoSmithKline « New to this edition: Examples and case studies from businesses who have successfully used the tools in practice, as well as an analysis of the effects of international developments, such as Brexit, on the procurement function « Allows readers to analyze complex sourcing situations quickly and clearly, and develop innovative and creative proposals for sourcing Description Category Management in Purchasing is a comprehensive guide to strategic category management which provides a step-by-step guide to its implementation and use, and enables readers to deliver value and cost savings when sourcing and purchasing. Now in its fourth edition, this text has cemented its place as the essential reference for category management practitioners.

295 Procurement Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 Introducing managementcategory 2 The principles of category management 3 Laying the groundwork for success 4 Stage 1 – Initiation 5 Stage 2 – Insight 6 Stage 3 – Innovation 7 Stage 4 – Implementation 8 Stage 5 – Improvement 9 Making category management happen 10 Guaranteeing success – Now and for the future

Author Information Jonathan O’Brien is the CEO of Positive Purchasing Ltd, the international procurement and negotiation consultancy and training provider. With over 27 years of experience working in purchasing, he has worked all over the world to help global organizations increase their purchasing capability through training, education and working directly with practitioners and executive teams to drive in the adoption of category management and other strategic purchasing methodologies. He is also author of Supplier Relationship Management, now in its second edition, The Buyer’s Toolkit and his award-winning title Negotiation for Procurement Professionals, all published by Kogan Page.

Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Procurement

The Technology Procurement Handbook examines the multiple streams of data that feed into the technology procurement process, such as ITIL service lifecycle data, PMI project management and cloud and software contract provisions. The book includes case studies and extensive practical advice based on the authors experience from recent procurement projects. There is also a chapter on modular contracting for the US market, explaining the use of agile contracts for IT projects.

296 Procurement Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Setting the scene for the next-generation technology procurement 2 Four pillars of technology procurement 3 Technology basics for procurement professionals 4 Relationship management in procurement 5 Deep dive into the procurement process 6 Practical advice and case studies on procurementtechnology 7 US legislation and regulation on agile deployment and contracting and performancebased management 8 Procurement 3.1 – Agile, lean, and value delivery today 9 Conclusion This book « Provides a holistic, non-technical view of the strategic sourcing process for complex technologies « Presents clear explanations of the end-to-end costing model for digital buying, tied to a service lifecycle, project milestones and deliverables, illustrated with case studies « Enables procurement managers to gain vital digital and analytical skills, helping them to realize business innovation and growth « Online resources: sample audit sheets, workflows and checklists

Description With the rise of cloud services and the digitization of all business units, procurement managers need to understand how to buy technology services in order to generate revenue, drive innovation and retain customers. The Technology Procurement Handbook provides a structured and logical view of the digital buying process. It includes invaluable advice on how to manage digital demand, prepare sourcing strategies, analyze the cost and benefits of proposed solutions and negotiate and implement comprehensive agreements.

The HandbookProcurementTechnology Logistics, Operations and

Price:

Author Information Sergii Dovgalenko is the CPO at Ukrainian Railways. He specializes in technology procurement and used to manage IT category portfolios across multiple companies and geographies. His recent projects included full procurement support of new digital sales and communication channels, Agile development outsourcing from major Indian and Easter European hubs, SAP and Ariba implementation, various procurement transformation initiatives and many more. Supply Date: 03/04/2020 £49.99 9781789662108 9781789662115 328 (mm): 235x157

Chain Management Edition: 1

ISBN Paperback:

ISBN Ebook:

Pages:

Format

297 Procurement Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 Lessons learned at Ikea 2 What is management?category 3 Leading category sourcing 4 The hunt is on 5 Where is the money? 6 Creating value 7 The moment of truth 8 Control performance and create more value 9 Different categories and other perspectives 10 From theory to practice 11 Success or failure? 12 Appendix tools and models 13 Notes 14 References and further reading This book « Explores the extraordinary global sourcing methods of IKEA, one of the largest and most influential companies in the world « Presents practical guidelines on how purchasing teams can real create value and tangible results in category sourcing « Looks at how category sourcing, beyond the initial consolidation of the supplier base, can be successfully implemented and managed « New to this edition: focus on Ikea as a good example of how to create cost leadership by creating value, exploration of new ways of helping practitioners to really understand the fundamental ideas in category sourcing, and not just rely on models and processes, with case studies from Maersk, Carlsberg, P&G and Aldi Description How is it possible to sell a kitchen at 30 per cent below market price? Why are hot dogs cheaper in IKEA than in the supermarket? How can IKEA sell the Lack table at half the price it was when it was launched 35 years ago and how can it be achieved with a substantial profit?

Strategic Sourcing and Category Management examines how IKEA - and other cost leading companies - use category management to create advantages with direct and indirect sourcing. With 25 years’ experience from IKEA, where he had the responsibility to develop and execute the company’s purchasing strategy, author Magnus Carlsson shares his insights on important topics: when category management is profitable and why; how teams repeatedly create value and results; what the main approaches are in different categories; how a company implements category management; the difference between success and failure. In this new edition of Strategic Sourcing and Category Management, Magnus Carlsson has added new themes including examples and references from companies such as Maersk, Carlsberg, P&G and Aldi, illustrating the application of cost leadership that spans far beyond IKEA. Even there, the cost leadership lessons are not limited to home furnishings as the company is sourcing categories such as food, components, materials, transports and indirect materials, with a total purchasing spend of approximately €7 billion. But maybe even more importantly, the book illustrates how teams create value by thinking differently and asking the right questions, allowing an understanding that goes beyond mere tools and processes.

Author Information Magnus Carlsson has 25 years’ experience as a strategic sourcing expert at IKEA. He also has 10 years’ experience with leadership and training within the Swedish defence forces and is an advisor in strategic sourcing for Kingfisher.

Strategic Sourcing and ManagementCategory Lessons Learned at IKEA Edition: 2 Date: 03/05/2019 Price: £42.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749486211 ISBN Ebook: 9780749486228 Pages: 296 Format (mm): 234x157 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Procurement

298 Procurement Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 Contract Management as a Value Driver 2 What is the Task? 3 Role and Importance of Effective ManagementContract 4 Contract Administration 5 Commercial Strategy 6 Contract Design 7 Mobilization 8 When Things Go Wrong 9 Managing for Success 10 Practical Tools and Checklists This book « Provides a practical handbook for procurement and supply chain managers who need to review their own skills and practices « Provides tools to help organizations move towards best practice « Equips the reader with accompanying PowerPoint slides that illustrate the tools and skills « Presents broad commercial skill-sets which are internationally applicable Description Contract management is a key management skill, yet it is underplayed in most organizations, which usually default to project management skills as a proxy for contract management skills. Whilst project management skills are equally essential, they are not the same thing. Contract Management looks at the wider contract management picture from an industrial-commercial perspective, and helps set-out typical structures and processes that assist the contract management task. The author uses diagramatic representations to depict complex ideas. Contract Management includes “learning points” in each chapter, looking at handling problems, procedural changes and enhancing commercial performance. Author Information Peter Sammons is a commercial/ procurement specialist with 35 years in field. He is now a consultant who provides commercial support and develops/delivers training seminars ManagementContract Core Business Competence Edition: 1 Date: 03/07/2017 Price: £32.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480646 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480653 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 233x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Procurement

299 Procurement Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 What we need from our supply base is... 2 Five good reasons to get close to our suppliers 3 Introducing the Orchestra of SRM 4 Segmenting the supply base 5 Supplier measurementperformance 6 Building a systemperformancesuppliermeasurement 7 Acting upon measurement 8 Supplier improvement and development 9 Supplier management 10 Contract management 11 Relationship management 12 Supply chain management 13 Strategic relationshipscollaborative 14 Innovation from suppliers 15 The Orchestra of SRM is ready to play 16 Glossary This book « Provides clear guidance on all aspects of managing suppliers to demonstrate how effective relationships that maximize value and success in business can be formed and maintained « Explains ‘The Orchestra of SRM®’ proven framework for developing successful supplier relationship management programmes alongside practical tips and tools for real world application « Outlines how to manage supplier segmentation and put in place interventions unique to each supplier « New to this edition: how working practices have changed in supplier relationship management due to COVID-19 and the implications moving forward, information on the future of the supply base, updates on how to practically develop strategic collaborative relationships and implement supplier innovation EffectiveDescriptionsupplier relationship management enables organizations to unlock value from their supply base and reap tangible benefits. With practical tips and a proven approach, this is the guide to understanding how to maximize the potential of suppliers to gain a competitive advantage, get more innovation and drive sustainability.

Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback:

Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Procurement

ISBN Ebook:

Pages:

ManagementRelationshipSupplier Unlocking the Value in Your Supply Edition:Base

Supplier Relationship Management explains the importance of ongoing supplier management, how to measure and improve their performance, and for the critical few that can make a dramatic difference to our organization, drive in and future-proof strategic collaborative relationships. The Orchestra of SRM® framework, coupled with expert tips, tools and resources, delivers clear guidance on how to design an effective supplier relationship management program, with maximum return on time and Writteninvestment.byleading procurement expert, Jonathan O’Brien, this third edition offers new content on how to adapt to the huge changes we have seen across supply bases in recent years, and the new risks and challenges organizations face in managing key suppliers. It includes new information on driving sustainability, the future of the supply base, and how to secure more innovation from our suppliers.

Author Information Jonathan O’Brien is the CEO of Positive Purchasing Ltd, the international procurement and negotiation consultancy and training provider, and is based in Plymouth, UK. With over 30 years of experience working in purchasing, he has worked all over the world to help global organizations increase their purchasing capability through online and classroom training, education and working directly with practitioners and executive teams to drive the adoption of supplier relationship management and other strategic purchasing methodologies. He is also the author of Category Management in Purchasing, now in its fourth edition, The Buyer’s Toolkit, and the award-winning title Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals, now in its 3rd edition, all published by Kogan Page 3 03/01/2022 9781398602250 9781398602267 504 (mm): 233x155

Date:

Format

Supplier segmentation is outlined in more detail and there is new information on how companies are managing supply chains, and the impacts of this in practice. A practical guide to unlock the new value from your key suppliers in a changing world.

300 Procurement Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Introducing negotiation 2 Countering the seller advantage 3 Red sheet 4 Planning the negotiation 5 Negotiation across cultures 6 Personality and negotiation 7 Power 8 Game theory 9 Building the concession strategy 10 The negotiation event 11 Winning event tactics 12 Body language 13 Managing what you say and how you say it 14 Post-negotiation activities 15 Negotiation as a key enabler for success 16 Appendix - The Red Sheet negotiation templates This book « Offers a ground-breaking new approach to delivering winning negotiations in procurement and supply chain management « Provides the vital tools and comprehensive tactics for a detailed, planned approach to negotiation « Helps purchasers to evaluate a supplier in advance, assess the sales team, and tailor their negotiation strategy « New to this edition: changing themes in procurement such as near shoring, update of contextual global factors to negotiation. Description Highly effective negotiation skills are an essential element of a purchasing and supply chain professional’s toolkit. Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals provides a stepby-step approach to delivering winning negotiations and getting game-changing results. It provides purchasers and supply chain managers with the necessary tools and tactics for a detailed, planned approach to negotiation. Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals allows the purchasing professional or the buying team to evaluate the supplier in advance, assess the sales team, and tailor their negotiation strategy depending on concession strategies, cultural influences and game theory. Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals provides a strong framework for discussion in advance of the meeting, allowing the negotiator to plan their agenda, objectives and tactics. Based upon the Red Sheet® Methodology, this book is a proven and collaborative technique used by many companies globally. The new edition includes supply chain planning, updates on multi-party negotiation for supply chain negotiations, Brexit as a retrospective example of negotiation and how the negotiation capability will need to change in the future.

Author Information Jonathan O’Brien is the CEO of Positive Purchasing Ltd, the international procurement and negotiation consultancy and training provider. With over 30 years of experience working in purchasing, he has worked all over the world to help global organizations increase their negotiation and purchasing capability through training, education and working directly with practitioners and executive teams to drive in the adoption of negotiation and other strategic purchasing methodologies. He is also author of Supplier Relationship Management, now in its second edition, The Buyer’s Toolkit and Category Management in Purchasing, now in its fourth edition, all published by Kogan Page. 3

Date: 03/08/2020 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789662580 ISBN Ebook: 9781789662597 Pages: 480 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Procurement

Negotiation ProfessionalsSupplyProcurementforandChain A Proven Approach for Negotiations with Edition:Suppliers

Procurement Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 How to Buy Really Well 2 The Size of the Prize 3 What Stops Us Being Good 4 The 5D Power Buying Process 5 Step 1: Define the Need 6 Step 2: Discover Our Position 7 Step 3: Determine How to Buy 8 Step 4: Securing the Best Deal 9 Step 5: Delivery - Ensuring We Get What We Agreed 10 Getting Good at Power Buying

This book Provides an understanding of core principles from category management, SRM, negotiation, contract management and supply chain management Equips the reader with simple toolsets and frameworks, translated from complex models and concepts Provides easily understood concepts that can be applied with no prior training or knowledge in this area Uses tried and tested methods to transform your business and increase its profit and value gained from the supply base Description In order to buy well it is important to understand a few basic principles and apply a series of tools and approaches in given situations. The Buyer’s Toolkit distills all the best practice tools for professional buying and negotiating into a simple, jargon-free framework that can be picked up and applied by anyone who buys. The book seeks to transform how individuals view and practise buying so they know when to influence a situation and what to do to buy well.

The Buyer’s Toolkit Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Edition: 1 Date: 03/09/2017 Price: £42.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749479817 ISBN Ebook: 9780749479824 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Procurement

The Buyer’s Toolkit has a simple chapter layout, contains graphics and models, and a simple flow of tools through the book with an overarching framework, that glues them together. Covering different buying scenarios, understanding and defining the requirements, choosing the right deal and supplier, negotiation, managing the contract and the suppliers, fixing problems and sustainable buying, this comprehensive guide will help you boost your advantage as a buyer.

Author Information Jonathan O’Brien is the CEO of the international purchasing consultancy and training provider, Positive Purchasing Ltd. With over 27 years’ experience working in purchasing, he has worked all over the world to help global organizations increase their purchasing capability through training, education and working directly with practitioners and executive teams to drive in the adoption of category management and other strategic purchasing methodologies. He is also author of Category Management in Purchasing, Supplier Relationship Management and Negotiation for Procurement Professionals, all published by Kogan Page.

301

302 Procurement Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Procurement strategy 1 Introduction - The strategic role of procurement 2 Procurement and the organization - Organizing for success 3 The strategic procurement cycle 2 Procurement and the supply network 4 Supplier managementrelationship 5 Global sourcing 3 Delivering performance in procurement 6 Strategic cost management 7 The impact of procurement on financial results 8 Supply chain risk management 9 Digitization of procurement - The enabling role of technology 4 Sustaining performanceprocurement 10 Sustainable procurement 11 The future of procurement This book « Delivers key strategic insights and guidance on formulating and implementing a robust procurement strategy « Provides real world case studies from leading organizations including IBM, IKEA, John Deere, NASA, Nike and Tesla « New to this edition: the latest on the future of procurement and digitalization, updates on green and socially responsible procurement « Offers powerful practical tools for managing procurement and supply, brought to you by the authors, who have consideration professional and academic experience DeliveringDescriptionsuccessful procurement programs has helped businesses like IKEA, Tesla and Nike maximize the potential of their resources and gain the competitive advantage. Learn how to develop similar strategies, that meet the needs of the business, customers and suppliers, and lead their implementation using insights from the experts in procurement strategy.

Leading Procurement Strategy provides readers with a complete overview of the skills, knowledge and tools needed to implement a successful procurement strategy. The expert author team of Carlos Mena, Remko van Hoek, and Martin Christopher present practical advice and guidance underpinned by academic theory and supported by an extensive range of real-world case studies including IBM, IKEA, John Deere, NASA, Nike and Tesla. Readers are shown how to develop, deliver and sustain procurement performance with clear and accessible guidance.

The third edition offers the latest insights into the future of procurement and digitalization, updates on green and socially responsible procurement and a revised structure. The key issues affecting the procurement function are covered and tips for developing the best practices in teams are found throughout.

Leading

Author Information Carlos Mena is the Nike Professor of Supply Chain Management at Portland State University (PSU), USA. Previously, he was a faculty member at Michigan State University, USA and Cranfield University, UK. Remko van Hoek is Professor of Supply Chain Management at the University of Arkansas, USA. Previously, he was Chief Procurement Officer at the Walt Disney Company, California, USA and he held executive roles at Nike, Cofely (GDF SUEZ) and PwC. Martin Christopher is Emeritus Professor of Marketing and Logistics at Cranfield School of Management, Bedfordshire, UK.

Driving Value Through the Supply Edition:Chain 3 Date: 03/09/2021 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398601581 ISBN Ebook: 9781398601598 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 233x157 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Procurement

StrategyProcurement

A Practical Guide to Corporate Social Responsibility in the Supply Chain Edition: 1 Date: 03/10/2022 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398604681 ISBN Ebook: 9781398604698 Pages: 296 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Procurement

TheDescriptionbusinesscase for sustainability and the global imperative to act are now clear, but organizations still struggle with procurement and supply chains as some of the most difficult factors to improve.

303 Procurement Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Why the world needs CSR 2 Why do this – The business case for sustainability 3 Frameworks for corporate action 4 The sustainable procurement process 5 Sustainability audit 6 Defining the procurementsustainableobjectives 7 Making what we buy sustainable 8 Driving sustainability in our suppliers 9 Driving sustainability back up the supply chain 10 Creating a sustainabilityblendedstrategy and plan 11 Making it a success 12 What the future holds This book « Introduces an actionable, step-by-step process for prioritising and implementing a sustainable procurement strategy « Focuses on the social and environmental factors of procurement, including labour practices, the processes used and the waste created in goods and services bought « Features guidance on implementing sustainability requirements with immediate suppliers and driving improvements elsewhere in the supply chain where there is no direct relationship « Explains how to carry out a sustainability audit then develop objectives and a strategy based on the priorities and major impacts identified « Highlights key methods of monitoring results, communicating to the organization and ensuring continued sustainability success in the future

Sustainable Procurement explains how procurement professionals can expand on existing tools and approaches to make sustainability a reality. It begins by exploring the current landscape and the need for new approaches before moving onto a step-by-step process for sustainable procurement and supply chain CSR, from reviewing goods and services bought to supply chain mapping and implementing new supplier requirements. Guidance is offered on factors such as specification, use of labour and processes, and how to drive improvements further up the supply chain where there is no direct contractual relationship.

ProcurementSustainable

Written by leading procurement expert and best-selling author, Jonathan O’Brien, this practical guide outlines how to carry out a sustainability audit to define objectives and develop a new strategy. It also explains how to monitor results, the governance required to ensure success and how to be ready for changes in the future. Drive positive change with this roadmap to sustainable procurement and responsible supply chains.

Author Information Jonathan O’Brien is the CEO of Positive Purchasing Ltd, the international procurement and negotiation consultancy and training provider, and is based in Plymouth, UK. With over 30 years of experience, he has helped global organizations increase their purchasing capability through training, education and working directly with practitioners and executive teams. He is also the author of Category Management in Purchasing, Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals, Supplier Relationship Management and The Buyer’s Toolkit, all published by Kogan Page.

Author Information Steven Morgan was Director of Commercial Operations at the UK’s Ministry of Defence (MoD). He was also responsible for the training, qualification, mentoring, and deployment of Commercial professionals throughout the MoD in collaboration with the Defence Academy. He was previously Capital Programmes Director for BAA, where he was responsible for capital projects and procurement. He has also previously worked at Sellafield as director of commercial and contract management. Best Practice Toolkit for Planning, Negotiating and Managing a Contract Edition: 1 Date: 03/07/2019 Price: £36.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749475932 ISBN Ebook: 9780749475949 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 232x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Procurement

The role of a contracting professional begins well before the award of a contract and doesn’t end until the benefits of the acquisition have been realised, long after the deliverables arrive in a box on a loading dock. Global Contract Logistics tackles the growing complexity of contracting in a technologically accelerating world. The author looks at the common errors and the ten phases of a successful acquisition.

Global Contract Logistics examines what it takes to be an intelligent client, one who employs contracting or procurement professionals to obtain goods and services on their behalf. It debunks many commonly held myths involving contracting, procurement and acquisition and outlines ten vital steps towards success for intelligent clients and their supporting acquisition professionals. The text is supported by case studies of projects that the author Steve Morgan has led, during his time with the Ministry of Defence and BAA. Online supporting resources include contract templates for procurement and acquisition projects.

Global LogisticsContract

304 Procurement Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 Professional growth in procurement 2 Defining the need 3 Specifying the requirement 4 Chunking the work (aka acquisition strategy) 5 Competitively selecting the ideal source 6 Devising an incentivized contract for alignment 7 Supporting the contractor 8 Enforcing the contract 9 Integration 10 Commissioning 11 Assessing effectiveness 12 Conclusions This book « Provides an overview of contracting logistics and the complexities of procurement and acquisition « Gives clear guidelines for successfully planning, negotiating and managing a contract « Features interesting examples of successful procurement projects from different industries, such as defence, aviation and ship building. « Includes case studies from Ministry of Defence, Heathrow Airport and Cross-Rail based on the author’s experience of leading the procurement and acquisition projects. « Online Resources: contract templates for procurement and acquisition projects Description

305 Procurement Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Understanding eSourcing and eNegotiation 1 What is an eAuction? 2 Applicability, when can you use eAuctions? 3 The history of eAuctions 4 Value in a perspectivetheoretical 2 eNegotiation strategy 5 Game theory - eNegotiations as a strategic game 6 Negotiation theory 7 eAuction formats 8 eNegotiation strategy objectives 9 Supplier relationshipsmaintain relationships 10 eNegotiation strategy framework 3 Bidder engagement 11 The value proposition for suppliers 12 Supplier communication 13 Supplier Training 4 Driving usage and adoption 14 Introduce a Center of Excellence (COE) for Support, Technology and Governance 15 Ensure executive support to eAuctions 16 Make it strategic 17 Drive it with hard KPI’s 18 Address the myths 19 Re-inventing yourself every year 20 Examples of best-practice 21 The selling never stops 5 The future of eNegotiation 22 The accelerating digitization of negotiations 23 AI powered negotiation guides 24 Automating negotiation processes 25 The future of eAuctions, cup half full or half empty

A Practical Guide to E-Auctions for Procurement provides guidance to procurement professionals on how to realize the potential of e-auctions. Now is the time to optimize your e-negotiation strategy using key insights from the author Jacob Gorm Larsen, who is responsible for one of the most successful and award-winning e-sourcing programs in the world.

ISBN

Pages:

ISBN Paperback:

This book « Demonstrates how to develop a successful e-sourcing and e-negotiation strategy using insights from Maersk’s award winning program e-auctions, when and how they should be applied and their numerous benefits Features practical learnings from more than 10,000 e-sourcing programmes across all spend categories Provides a new perspective on the future of e-auctions which includes the increased development of AI and Robotic Process Automation within the negotiation discipline

WINNER:Description 2021 Plume d’Or - Grand Prix ACA-Bruel Award

A Practical

Procurement

« Explains

Professional

to E-auctions for Procurement Logistics,

Price:

Edition:

Product

Author Information Jacob Gorm Larsen is Head of Digital Procurement in Maersk with responsibility for the execution of the digital transformation of procurement. For the past 15 years he has been part of the procurement team at Maersk including responsibility for developing and operating the e-sourcing program for more than a decade. Guide Supply Chain & Operations 1 Date: 03/02/2021 £44.99 9781398600287 Ebook: 9781398600294 272 Format (mm): 233x157 Category: Supplementary Text/ Subject:

A Practical Guide to E-Auctions for Procurement presents a proven process for developing an e-auction and e-negotiation strategy, along with a catalogue of change management initiatives for securing buy-in internally in the organization. The different e-auction formats and benefits are explained in detail and demonstrated with practical examples, templates and advice that can be adopted by the reader.

Jacob and the team at Maersk are at the forefront when it comes to developing robots that execute e-auctions from end-to-end and are kicking off a transformation that will fundamentally change how we consider e-auctions and negotiations. In addition, with learnings from more than 10,000 e-auctions globally, this is the book for those in procurement looking to implement, deliver and maintain a thriving e-auction program.

Supply Chain Finance Risk Management, Resilience and Supplier Management Edition: 1 Date: 03/12/2018 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482404 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482411 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Supply Chain Finance

Supply Chain Finance includes theory as well as practical case studies addressing advances in the area of supply chain finance. The editors and contributors look at how to design and implement supply chain finance in supply chains and examine what the future holds for this important area. Online supporting resources include self-test multiple-choice and essay questions for each chapter.

306 Supply Chain Finance Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Supply chain finance –Solutions for managementsustainability,financialriskandresilience in the supply chain 2 Supply chain finance – History and future directions 3 Suppliers, customers, and firms’ financial decisions 4 Supply chain finance –Definition, modern aspects and research challenges ahead 5 Optimizing cash flows for a retail supply chain coordinator 6 Supply chain payablesopportunitiesfinancebymanagingdiscounts 7 Mapping and managing the financial supply chain 8 Supply chain finance and cyber risk – An illustrative case study 9 Commodity risk management at BMW – Price indices and contracts 10 A business partners’ view on decision-making challenges in the supply chain 11 Exploring fragmentation in the supply chain finance (SCF) ecosystem 12 Foundational premises and value drivers of blockchaindriven supply chains – The trade finance experience

Lydia Bals is Professor of Supply Chain & Operations Management at Mainz University of Applied Sciences, Germany and Visiting Professor at the Department of Strategy & Innovation, Copenhagen Business School, Denmark. Lisa M. Ellram is the Rees Distinguished Professor of Supply Chain Management in the Department of Management at the Farmer School of Business, Miami University in Oxford, Ohio.

This book « Looks at the benefits of the supply chain finance (SCF) approach, including reduction of working capital and increased profitability through the supply chain « Examines the role of innovative technologies to support SCF, such as blockchain and the Internet of Things (IoT) « Presents solutions and programmes that help mitigate and better manage financial flows within and across the supply chain « Contains essential theory and practical case studies, making this a vital text for MSc, PhD and MBA students « Links the field of SCF to that of the overarching problem of sustainability « Online resources: self-test multiple-choice and essay questions for each chapter Description Supply Chain Finance is a contributed book looking at the two major perspectives of managing finance across the supply chain. The first is more short-term, focused on accounts payables and receivables. The second is a more overarching perspective, focused on working capital optimization in terms of inventory and asset management. It includes chapters from a variety of research perspectives, as well as from business and policymakers. The authors look at the benefits of the supply chain finance approach including reduction of working capital, access to more funding at lower costs, risk reduction, as well as an increase of trust, commitment, and profitability through the chain.

Author Information Wendy Tate is the William J. Taylor Professor of Business and Cheryl Massingale Faculty Research Fellow, Department of Supply Chain Management at the Haslam College of Business, University of Tennessee in Knoxville, Tennessee.

Managing Profitability, Working Capital and Asset Utilization

Description

« Online resources: invaluable study questions and worked solutions to reinforce the learning as well as multiple-choice questions with solutions and PowerPoint activities

Supply Chain Management Accounting looks at how the evolution of supply chains has been dramatic over the last few years, with more and more companies moving to sourcing overseas, distributing finished goods to overseas markets, and increasing their international operations. The seeking of low-cost country sourcing, optimizing manufacturing, and exporting products and services has created new challenges to demand forecasting and supply chain planning. Supply Chain Management Accounting presents a wide range of approaches and ground-breaking research findings. The book covers profitability, liquidity and asset utilization, product costing, activity-based costing, investment appraisal, customer profitability analysis, budgeting and sales and operations planning. Online supporting resources include invaluable study questions and worked solutions to reinforce the learning as well as multiple-choice questions with solutions and PowerPoint activities.

Supply AccountingManagementChain

Author Information Simon Templar is a qualified accountant with 20 years industry experience as well as a lecturer on supply chain and procurement MScs in Cranfield and Plymouth. The author is a founding member of the Supply Chain Finance Community, a not-for-profit association which aims to share best practice and new research in an open, collaborative environment.

Edition: 1 Date: 03/03/2019 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749472993 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473006 Pages: 392 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Supply Chain Finance

The need to contain costs across the business is as strong as ever and the search for cost reduction opportunities is intensifying. There still remains one last major opportunity to take out costs - through the supply chain. Ultimately all costs will make their way to the final marketplace to be reflected in the price paid by the end user. Smart companies instead seek to make the supply chain more competitive through the value it creates and the costs it reduces overall. They have realized that the real competition is not company against company but rather supply chain against supply chain.

307 Supply Chain Finance Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Supply chain accounting 2 Profitability, liquidity and asset utilisation 3 Supply chain management and firm performance 4 Product costing – Comparing marginal costing with full costing 5 Activity based costing and time based process mapping 6 Investment appraisal 7 Total cost of ownership and life cycle costing 8 Target costing and new product development 9 Introduction to supply chain finance 10 Customer profitability analysis 11 Budgeting, sales and operations planning, standard costing and variance analysis This book « Looks at the relationship between supply chain decisions and financial performance, measured by financial statements including the income statement, balance sheet and key financial and nonfinancial performance indicators « Examines the applications of traditional and contemporary costing approaches and how they support supply chain management decision making « Looks at the development of financially sustainable supply chain operations that have incorporated supply chain finance, working capital management and risk management « Introduces a capital investment appraisal toolkit to construct the business case for investing in supply chain assets or considering an outsourcing or insourcing decision

Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics is a step-by-step guide to balancing the triangle of service, cost and cash which is the essence of supply chain management. Supply chains have become increasingly strategy-driven, and this Supply Chain Triangle approach puts the supply chain at the heart of the strategy discussion instead of seeing it as a result.

Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics fully reflects the ‘inventory’ or ‘working capital’ angle and examines the optimisation of the supply chain and Return on Capital Employed. Including case studies of Barco, Casio and a selection of food retail companies, this book covers building a strategy-driven KPI dashboard, target setting and financial benchmarking. Regular examples and diagrams illustrate how different types of strategies lead to different trade-offs in the Supply Chain Triangle. This groundbreaking text links supply chain, strategy and finance through financial metrics, therefore creating value for the shareholder. Online supporting resources include worksheets covering basic financial concepts such as cash flow and working capital, with example data sets and guidelines/exercises to make it interactive. DeSmet

Author Information Dr Bram

is the CEO of Solventure where he helps global production and retail organizations in the domain of Strategy, Supply Chain and Operations. He is a Professor in Operations & Supply Chain Management at Vlerick Business School, Belgium. Supply FinancialStrategyChainandMetrics The Supply Chain Triangle Of Service, Cost And Cash Edition: 1 Date: 03/05/2018 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482572 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482589 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 230x154 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Supply Chain Finance

308 Supply Chain Finance Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 The Supply Chain Triangle of Service, Cost and Cash 2 Strategy in the Supply Chain Triangle 3 Financial Benchmarking in Two Dimensions 4 Financial Target Setting in Two Dimensions 5 The Impact of Strategy on Financial Benchmarking and Target Setting 6 Redefining the Service Corner into a Value Corner 7 Building a Strategy Driven KPI Dashboard 8 Implementing a Strategy Driven Supply Chain 9 Appendix – Financial Templates –ManagementInventory 10 Appendix – Financial Templates – The Cost of Inventory – Rent, Room, Risk This book « Examines the ‘inventory’ or ‘working capital’ angle, which is overlooked in many of the more strategic supply chain management texts « Includes a practical road map on how to improve a business and facilitate an improved Return-onCapital-Employed « Online resources: Includes worksheets covering basic financial concepts such as cash flow and working capital, with example data sets and guidelines/exercises to make it interactive « Provides insightful case studies examining successful supply chain transformation programmes employed in a wide variety of international companies Description

Financing the End-to-End Supply Chain provides readers with a comprehensive understanding of the financial synergies across the supply chain. It demonstrates the importance of the strategic relationship between the physical supply of goods and services and the associated financial flows.

309 Supply Chain Finance Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents

4 The

Charles Findlay is an experienced Business Strategy, Supply Chain and Procurement consultant , an agel investor and a Director of State of Flux. 2 Date: 03/08/2020 Price: £44.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789663488 ISBN Ebook: 9781789663495 Pages: 448 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Supply Chain Finance

Financing the Endto-End Supply Chain A Reference Guide to Supply Chain Edition:Finance

7 The

The book provides a clear introduction, demonstrating the importance of the strategic relationship between supply chain and financial communities within an organization. This book links together treasury, banking, supply chain, systems, IT, and key stakeholders.

Author Information Simon Templar is a founding member of the Supply Chain Finance Community, a non-forprofit association. Simon Templar is a qualified accountant with 20 years’ industry experience as well as a lecturer on supply chain and procurement MSc’s at Cranfield University. Erik Hofmann is Head of Supply Chain Finance-Lab at the University of St.Gallen in Switzerland. He is also Director of the Institute of Supply Chain Management (ISCMHSG) and Boardmember of the Supply Chain Finance Community (SCFC).

Financing the End-to-End Supply Chain will help senior supply chain practitioners to build collaboration, improve relationships and enhance trust between supply chain partners. With its combination of theory and practice it tackles vital issues including physical, information and financial flows, and tailoring supply chain finance to individual organisations’ circumstances. Recognizing that supply chain finance means different things in different countries, the authors also consider various initiatives to harmonize and develop cross-border financing as well as including an agenda for national and international policy makers. The new edition features interviews from SCF platform providers on how ecosystems are involved in supply chain finance, additional learning activities for students and new examples on working capital management.

5 The

Introduction 1 The background The nucleus – Supply chains and financial performance The big issue – Working capital management The flows – Towards an integrated view of supply chain processes The current practice concept – A case for supply chain finance ecosystem – Who is involved in supply chain finance? The value proposition –Solutions for supply chain finance implementation –Bringing supply chain finance programmes to life The future The global setting – Supply chain finance in the context of cultural and geographical dispersion 9 The look beyond – Factors impacting the future of supply chain finance 10 Index This book « Provides readers with a comprehensive understanding of the financial synergies across the supply chain « Combines theory and practice to tackle key issues and adapt supply chain finance to individual organizations’ circumstances « Presents several initiatives to coordinate and develop cross-border financing from institutions such as the World Bank « New to this edition: interviews from SCF platform providers, new examples on working capital management, additional learning activities and a terminology list Description

« Presents new research for developing, implementing and evaluating business analytics models within a complex supply chain environment « Highlights the most recent developments in the field of supply chain analytics, which have been driven by new technologies « Online resources: lecturer slides

AnDescriptionincrediblevolume of data is generated at a very high speed within the supply chain and it is necessary to understand, use and effectively apply the knowledge learned from analyzing data using intelligent business models. However, practitioners and students in the field of supply chain management face a number of challenges when dealing with business models and mathematical modelling. Supply Chain Analytics and Modelling presents a range of business analytics models used within the supply chain to help readers develop knowledge on a variety of topics to overcome common issues.

310 Supply Chain Analytics Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction to business analytics 2 The role of modelling in the supply chain 3 The role of data in the supply chain 4 Big data and data visualization 5 Supply chain measurementperformancesystems 6 Business analytics models 7 Supply chain analytics 8 The future of supply chain analytics

Author Information Nicoleta Tipi senior lecturer at The Open University, UK in the area of operations and supply chain. She has was senior lecturer at the University of Huddersfield where she has gained experience lecturing in the area of supply chain modelling and logistics operations. Nicoleta Tipi has considerable industry experience, having worked in different roles involving modelling and analytics for Unilever.

This book « Provides a detailed explanation of the most frequently used business analytics models in the supply chain, the challenges these present and the impact on different parts of the supply chain « Includes models in all areas of business analytics such as descriptive, predictive and prescriptive analytics, with fully solved examples that can be easily followed and adopted

Supply ModellingAnalyticsChainand

Quantitative Tools and Applications Edition: 1 Date: 03/04/2021 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749498603 ISBN Ebook: 9780749498610 Pages: 328 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Supply Chain Analytics

Supply Chain Analytics and Modelling covers areas including supply chain planning, single and multiobjective optimization, demand forecasting, product allocations, end-to-end supply chain simulation, vehicle routing and scheduling models. Learning is supported by case studies of specialist software packages for each example. Readers will also be provided with a critical view on how supply chain management performance measurement systems have been developed and supported by reliable and accurate data available in the supply chain. Online resources including lecturer slides are available.

including

Strategic Supply Chain Management Creating Competitive Advantage and Value Through Effective Leadership Edition: 1 Date: 03/10/2019 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478841 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478858 Pages: 200 Format (mm): 233x155 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Supply ManagementChain

311 Supply Chain Management Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Elements of strategy 2 Sales and operations planning 3 Sourcing and purchasing 4 Supplier relationships and collaboration 5 Risk and resilience 6 The circular economy and supply chain strategy 7 Talent management 8 Other factors important for supply chain strategy 9 Appendix - Factors influencing the supply chain strategy

management tools and strategies « Provides

Food

Author Information Samir Dani is Professor of Logistics and Supply Chain Management in Huddersfield Business School at the University of Huddersfield, UK. He is the recipient of the 2015 Prix des Associations prize at the Les Plumes des Achats & Supply Chain awards for his book Supply Chain Management and Logistics published by Kogan Page.

Top 25 «

with supporting

Strategic Supply Chain Management introduces concepts and tools which will enable successful buyer-supplier relationships and effective organizational leadership and talent management. Samir Dani provides a concise but important outlook on the connection between business strategy and supply chain strategy. The book delves into topical issues of risk, resilience, and sustainability and how these influence both business and supply chain strategy. The book also considers strategies for procurement, buyer supplier relationships, and sales & operations planning. An important aspect of this book is to consider the leadership and talent aspects of the humans in the supply chain and how this influences strategy and creates competitive advantage.

Description Supply chains, including logistics, are the functional elements of an organisation’s operations. To formulate a strategy for this operation to work seamlessly the organisation needs to align these operations with the corporate and business strategy. Strategic Supply Chain Management provides a discussion on effective supply chain strategic leadership for managerial teams who have previously been operating on a tactical or operational level, as well as students who need to learn about applying the theories of strategic supply chain management in practice.

the

and

This book Offers a theoretical underpinning supply chain examples of best practice, case studies of companies such as Nestlé organisations from Gartner Supply Chain Presents essential supply chain technologies, such as RFID, barcodes, logistics technology, automated warehouses, omnichannel, as well as future trends, such as big data, the Internet of Things (IoT) and autonomous systems Looks at how effective supply chain strategy can boost a company’s competitive advantage and examines the importance of talent management and organisational strategy

Pages:

Chain Management Edition: 1

A supply chain is the process of all parties involved in fulfilling a customer request, while a value chain is a set of interrelated activities a company uses to create value and a competitive advantage. In Strategic Value Chain Management the authors bring together a variety of disciplines, showing how to move from traditional supply chain management to value chain management. Research from the (ISM) International School of Management, Germany, originating from a network of companies in a range of sectors, is integrated with case studies to demonstrate particular concepts.

Global Value ManagementChain Logistics, Operations and

312 Supply Chain Management Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 Michael Porter – the founder of competitive strategy 2 A treatise of cybernetics, system sciences and complexity sciences 3 Introducing the six forces model 4 Global value advantageandmanagementchainstrategiesmodelsforcompetitive 5 Economic dimension of the six forces model and practical implications 6 Conclusion 7 Appendix – Economic layer, supply chain and collaboration 8 Index This book « Demonstrates how to integrate customer responsiveness and agile supply chains into the overall value chain strategy « Provides research-based models and frameworks which introduce new ways of driving effective strategic decision-making « Presents an interdisciplinary approach, highlighting the important field of systems sciences « Includes real-life examples of how to increase competitive advantage through effective value chain management, from large corporates such as BAT and Maersk Description

ISBN Ebook:

Format

Author Information Prof. Dr. Sc. Qeis Kamran (MBA-GM, MBA- PPM, MBL-HSG, LLM, PhD Scholar and researcher at University of Twente, the Netherlands) is the full Professor of Strategy, Cybernetics and Design Science at ISM International School of Management, Dortmund, Germany. He previously worked in sales, management, entrepreneurship and leadership roles in retail, energy, oil, petrochemicals and consulting industries. Supply Date: 03/11/2020 £44.99 9780749484422 9780749484439 440 (mm):

Strategic Value Chain Management brings together theory and practice and presents tangible ways of creating competitiveness in a changing world through the use of effective models and frameworks. Challenging the traditional Porters Five Forces Model, the authors introduce the important academic disciplines of cybernetics and systems sciences as essential drivers of strategy within the supply chain, supported by case studies illustrating their implementation.

230x150 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Supply ManagementChain

Price:

ISBN Paperback:

Supply Chain 4.0: enabling market-driven strategies [Martin Christopher] 2 Driving better customer experience in digital supply chains [Patrick Strauss] Blockchain in the supply chain [Martyn Walker] 4 Blockchain for humanitarian supply chain [Rameshwar Dubey, Gunasekaram,AngappaStephen J. Childe, Benjamin T. Hazen and Thanos Papadopoulos] Supply Chain 4.0: the cybersecurity challenge [James Kench] Defining and testing system parameters for enhancing vision picking technology in warehouse operations [Anastasios Gialos and Vasileios Zeimpekis]

Table of Contents

This book « Explains the theory behind Supply Chain 4.0 and its application in practice, examining existing and emerging technologies, such as IoT, autonomous vehicles and big data

Dr Emel Aktas is a Senior Lecturer in Cranfield School of Management at Cranfield University. She specializes in supply chain analytics, using mathematical modelling and decision analysis in transport, retail and manufacturing sectors. Dr. Vasileios Zeimpekis is a lecturer at the Hellenic Open University. He is a transportation expert in the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe (UNECE) and in the Hellenic Committee for Competitiveness and Development for Logistics. He is the Vice President of Operations at the board of directors of the Hellenic Logistics Association.

This edited collection includes contributions from leading international researchers from academia and industry. It considers the latest technologies and operational research methods available to support smart, integrated, and sustainable logistics practices focusing on automation, big data, Internet of Things, and decision support systems for transportation and logistics. It also highlights market requirements and includes case studies of cutting-edge applications from innovators in the logistics industry.

Edition:Technologies 1 Date: 03/02/2021 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789660739 ISBN Ebook: 9781789660746 Pages: 312 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Supply ManagementChain

7 Collaborative robotics –transforming warehouse logistics [Markus Voss] Improving cold-food quality control through the Internet of Things and big data: an empirical case [Alexandre Luis Prim, Tiago Pedro Nicchellatti and Roberto Goularth Mendes]

9 Predicting distributionphysicaldelays: a case study of outbound logistics [Zina Ben Miled, Jeremy Archbold and Brooke Renee Cochenour] 10 Adopting Industry 4.0 technologies in agri-food supply chains: an exploratory investigation of drivers and barriers [Imran Ali, Sattar Satie and Vinh Thai] 11

« Includes case studies of “Logistics 4.0” solutions in action, from companies such as Tesco, DHL and Waitrose Description ‘Supply Chain 4.0’ has introduced automation into logistics and supply chain processes, exploiting predictive analytics to better match supply with demand, optimizing operations and using the latest technologies for the last mile delivery such as drones and autonomous robots. Supply Chain 4.0 presents new methods, techniques, and information systems that support the coordination and optimization of logistics processes, reduction of operational costs as well as the emergence of entirely new services and business processes.

12 In search of a human dimension of Supply Chain 4.0: stipulating learning as a lever for the future supply chain organization [Henning de Haas, John Bang Mathiasen, Søren Skjold Andersen and Torben Tambo]

Professor Ioannis Minis is a Professor in the Department of Financial and Management Engineering of the University of Aegean. He is also the chairman of the National Council for Supply Chain Growth and Competitiveness, an advisory body to the Greek government.

313 Supply Chain Management Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

« Provides guidelines for designing and implementing innovative methods and techniques in order to address logistics problems effectively and systematically « Explores the significant value of smart and integrated logistics operations

The impact of sharing economy incentives and Industry 4.0 technologies on humanitarian logistics: insights from the Iran floods of 2019 [Hamed Seddighi and Hamid Moradlou]

Author Information Professor Michael Bourlakis is the Head of the Logistics, Procurement & Supply Chain Management Group at Cranfield School of Management. He is a member of the European Technology Platform (Food for Life, European Commission).

Supply Chain 4.0 Improving Supply Chains with Analytics and Industry 4.0

The SupplyStrategy-DrivenChain

Building on the fundamentals of the author’s previous bestselling book, Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics, this new work defines a mission and purpose for supply chain management which puts supply chain at the heart of the triangle of service, cost and cash. The Strategy-Driven Supply Chain explains the need for integrated value planning and execution as the next step beyond S&OP and IBP and how to use a strategy-driven scorecard with a focus on Return on Capital Employed (ROCE) as the overall value metric.

DifferentDescriptionstrategies lead to different supply chains, and a lack of strategic choices leads to a blurred focus. This book introduces the concept of the ‘strategy-driven supply chain’, which changes the role of supply chain from operational-tactical to tactical-strategic.

314 Supply Chain Management Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 The Supply Chain Triangle of Service, Cost and Cash 2 Strategy in the Supply Chain Triangle 3 Strategy-Driven S&OP 4 The Strategy-Driven Enterprise 5 The Strategy-Driven Scorecard 6 Implementing the StrategyDriven Enterprise 7 Appendix – Financial Templates –ManagementInventory 8 Appendix – Financial Templates – The Cost of Inventory – Rent, Room, Risk This book « Introduces the concept of the strategy-driven supply chain by exploring the effect of a poor strategy on supply chains and how strategy should translate into supply chain design « Offers practical guidance on implementing the strategy-driven supply chain concept in an organization from the top down or bottom up « Emphasises the need for strategic integrated value planning and execution as the next step beyond S&OP and IBP « Explores the financial context of how Return on Capital Employed (ROCE) links to other financial metrics and targets like growth, EBITDA and free cash flow « Builds and fully expands on the fundamental concepts of Bram DeSmet’s previous book, Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics

The Strategy-Driven Supply Chain includes numerous tools to put these ideas into action, including a method to analyse financial metrics and compare them to key competitors, and exercises to define an organization’s strategic choices (or lack thereof). It also features real-life examples of how to use the supply chain triangle to engage sales, finance and operations and case studies that illustrate the impact of strategy on the supply chain and financial metrics. This practical guide outlines a seven-step approach to integrating the people, process, tooling and analytics aspects of the change journey to the strategy-driven supply chain.

Author Information Dr Bram DeSmet is the CEO of Solventure where he helps global production and retail organizations in the domain of Strategy, Supply Chain and Operations. He is a Professor in Operations & Supply Chain Management at Vlerick Business School, Belgium and a visiting Professor at Peking University, China. Edition: 1 Date: 03/05/2021 Price: £44.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398600454 ISBN Ebook: 9781398600478 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Supply ManagementChain

Author Information Simon Eagle is a senior supply chain planning and strategy consultant with over 20 years of international industry experience and significant expertise in S&OP and demand-driven supply chain management. He works with manufacturing and distribution companies that wish to make a transformational improvement in their E2E operations and supply chain performance and does so through helping them to adopt ‘demand-driven’ planning and execution. 03/04/2017 £42.99 9780749479978 9780749479985 280 (mm): 234x158

ManagementSupplyDemand-DrivenChain Transformational Performance Edition:Improvement 1 Date:

315 Supply Chain Management Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction and Summaries 2 What is Demand-Driven SCM? 3 Why Demand-Driven SCM? 4 How to Operate a DemandDriven Supply Chain 5 Demand-Driven SCM and Lean 6 Why Aren’t We Already Using Demand-Driven SCM? 7 The Demand Driven Institute, Demand-Driven MRP and SaaS 8 What Next – Control Theory? 9 From Supply Chain – An Apology to Our Commercial Colleagues 10 Contribution by Chad Smith and Carol Ptak, Co-founders of the Demand Driven Institute

This book « Explains how to transform your company’s operational performance by implementing demanddriven supply chain management Provides a very simple, but effective, way to segment your supply chain and achieve your planned service levels from up to half the average inventory while using significantly less capacity Understand how to reduce capacity - delivering cost savings of approximately 20% « Online resources: Full-colour figures from the book Description Many manufacturing and distribution companies are moving from the traditional ‘forecast push MRP’ to demand-driven supply chain management (SCM). Demand-driven SCM is an ‘end-to-end’ supply chain planning and replenishment process that enables companies to achieve their planned service levels from up to half the average level of inventory and requiring significantly less throughput capacity - irrespective of the level of demand volatility or lead-time length. Demand-Driven Supply Chain Management is the go-to source for industry supply chain/operations executives and students. It describes the ‘what, how and why’ of the demand-driven SCM process. The key themes in the book are: what is demand-driven? why is demand-driven so effective? how to operate a demand-driven supply chain? and how to adopt the demand-driven process in your company? Readers can quickly grasp the essential concepts from one of numerous self-contained sections that present the book’s key concepts from different perspectives. Online resources available include full-colour figures.

Price:

ISBN Ebook:

Pages:

Format

ISBN Paperback:

Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Supply ManagementChain

1 An

and

–

Preface – Setting the scene introduction to supply chain disruption chain strategic friction omnia paratus for anything disasters the supply chain art of responding to disruption through physical supply chain supply chain disruption policy perspective breakdowns and supply chain conceptual process model Reducing the gap of pain through dynamic strategic alignment book Presents disruptive technologies as the enablers or drivers of new business models, products, services and overall solutions Maps how to create and implement superior process improvement solutions across the entire supply chain Features case studies of organizations that have successfully integrated new technologies into their existing business models and supply chains, such as BT, Morrisons and Aramex Features a foreword by world-leading thought leader, John Gattorna Description

Supply DisruptionChain Aligning Business Strategy and Supply Chain Tactics Edition: 1 Date: 03/08/2019 Price: £42.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749484101 ISBN Ebook: 9780749484118 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 233x158 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Supply ManagementChain

8 A

– Prepared

Disruptive technologies have the power to upend supply chains, adding uncertainty, cost, and complexity to any business. These technologies can also create competitive advantage, but only if organizations strategically build them into their supply chains. Supply Chain Disruption, with a foreword by John Gattorna, provides the vital knowledge that supply chain managers need in order to implement disruptive technologies strategically. This essential book avoids a one-size-fits-all approach and encourages the reader to consider customer needs first before aligning appropriate technologies with each supply chain application.

316 Supply Chain Management Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents

the

This

– A

the

5 The

7 Corporate

Supply Chain Disruption focuses on information systems, analysing how companies currently integrate and implement potentially disruptive technologies into their supply chain roadmaps. It presents new ways of planning more effectively and efficiently through the use of new tools and techniques, creating improvements in agility, customer service and cost.

Author Information Steve O’Sullivan is a supply chain and logistics specialist with extensive twodecade international experience in complex business-critical environments for firms across multiple industries, such as aviation and consumer electronics. As an academic scholarpractitioner, Steve consistently creates and implements superior process improvement solutions across the entire supply chain process, while supporting international management teams in meeting and exceeding established targets.

3 Ad

2 Supply

6 Pharmaceutical

4 Humanitarian

2 Smart technologies: disruptive technologies and the agrifood industry – fit for practice? [Professor Kim P Bryceson and Dr Asif Yaseen]

1 E-integrated healthcare supply chains: tracking and monitoring medical devices in the National Health Service (NHS), UK [Dr Ying Xie and Dr Liz Breen]

317 Supply Chain Management Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents

5 E-learning in higher education: a case of doctoral dialogue in a virtual space [Dr Mark Readman] 6 E-government: assessing the impact of e-business technologies on government service supply chains [Dr Ozlem Bak] 7 Cloud technology: China’s e-business approach to market development – the case of `Alisports [David Cockayne] 8 Supply chain integration through Ngo]Garza-ReyesKumari,Dr[Professorofenterprisee-business-enabledsystems:thecasetheUKautomobilesectorVikasKumar,JohnLoonam,ArchanaProfessorJoseArturoandHieuVan

3 Digital technologies in the professional services industry: aligning human capital supply with market demand [Georg Juelke]

This book « Discusses trends, issues and challenges associated with integrating e-business with supply chain management « Provides an overview of the use of B2B and B2C technologies in supply chains in different industries, such as HE institutions, multinational automation corporations and healthcare « Uses bona fide case studies from industry and academia which highlight concerns and problems such as e-technology security and collaborative system use « Looks at how to use e-technologies to increase the efficiency of logistics, production, distribution and other related activities

Description Using e-business technologies to manage supply chains increases the efficiency and performance of logistics, production, distribution and other related activities. E-Business and Supply Chain Integration explains how a number of tools can be used to produce an e-supply chain and achieve higher Thisproductivity.essential book examines supply chain theories along with real life cases and examples from industry to illustrate how e-business can enhance supply chain integration and highlights the negative outcomes when it is poorly managed. Dr Ozlem Bak and a team of expert contributors from practice and academia assess the impact of e-business on numerous different sectors, such as automotive, healthcare, logistics, higher education, and professional services. E-Business and Supply Chain Integration explains the strategic implications of new technologies and provides guidance on effective supply chains in e-businesses.

E-Business and Supply IntegrationChain Strategies and Case Studies from Edition:Industry 1 Date: 03/02/2018 Price: £46.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478452 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478469 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Supply ManagementChain

The role of business-tobusiness platforms and their implications for supply chains: a case from the European automotive industry [Dr Ozlem Bak] 10 E-freight: prospects and challenges of the digitalization of the air cargo supply chain [Alicja Gajewska and Dr Eric Tchouamou Njoya] 11 E-learning in higher education: an account of student autonomy within the context of a UK-based e-learning environment [Dr Ozlem Bak]

Author Information Dr Ozlem Bak is Senior Lecturer at Huddersfield University, UK. She lectures on courses in operations management, purchasing, and supply chain management at undergraduate and postgraduate level. Before entering academia she worked in the automotive industry for companies such as Daimler Chrysler and Hyundai.

4 Implementation of e-health to improve healthcare [Wenqi Jacintha Hee, Dr Geoffrey Jalleh and Dr Chad Lin]

Using frameworks based on extensive academic research, Richard Lloyd considers the potential blocks to an effective supply chain, and advises on how to deal with and identify uncertainties within an organization. Numerous international case studies included throughout show that every project has its own set of unique problems. Successful Integrated Planning for the Supply Chain is an invaluable guide for anyone who needs to implement change in the supply chain.

318 Supply Chain Management Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 The supply chain challenge 3 Context. Situation. Outside-in 4 An outside-in view of an organization 5 Who works here and why? 6 Digging to understand how we got here 7 Complication. What is really going on? 8 Incongruities uncertainties:andalook behind the scenes 9 Theory of action: linking behaviour to assumptions 10 The politics of information technology: patronage and partnership 11 Implications. Interpreting our findings 12 Wicked understandingproblems:the challenge 13 Leadership approaches to change 14 Realpolitik and ideals: projects 15 Conclusions. Decisions. Shaping interventions 16 Conclusions 17 Platforms and tools for change 18 Getting to agility faster 19 Wrap-up: Case study reimagined. Next steps 20 Case study re-imagined 21 Next steps

Author Information Richard Lloyd is Associate Director of the Supply Chain Centre of Excellence at TATA Consultancy Services, Mumbai. The author has worked for lots of international companies designing and managing supply chains such as NOKIA, where he was responsible for driving their global supply chain. He is a visiting lecturer at Cranfield University, Bedford, UK.

Managing changes to the supply chain comes with its unique challenges. Supply chain planning presents an especially complex challenge for the change practitioner as multiple stakeholders and functions are involved. Successful Integrated Planning for the Supply Chain evaluates different approaches to change interventions and explores how Integrated Business Planning could be implemented in any organization to create sustainable improvements.

IntegratedSuccessful Planning for the Supply Chain Key Organizational and Human Edition:Dynamics 1 Date: 03/03/2018 Price: £42.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749477684 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477691 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Supply ManagementChain

This book « Explains Integrated Business Planning frameworks and how they can be applied to supply chain management « Encourages the application of academic theories to real-world problems, such as how to build an honest and open supply chain « Discusses change and how to implement it through learning from examples provided by a range of supply chain professionals: academics, practitioners, consultants and service providers « Includes numerous international case studies illustrating the successful and unsuccessful implementation of change Description

Collaborative Principles for Better Supply Chain Practice covers different perspectives: the client looking down the supply chain, the suppliers looking up the supply chain and the inter-dependencies of organizations horizontally across the supply chain. The book explores operational and projecttype environments in different industry sectors, which will help you think about your supply chain differently and optimize your processes to achieve supply chain excellence. Online supporting resources include a bonus chapter and a roadmap on negotiations.

1 Knowledge Architecture Around Collaboration 1

BetterPrinciplesCollaborativeforSupply Chain Practice Creation Up, Down Across Supply Chains Edition: 1 Date: 03/09/2018 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480493 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480509 Pages: 296 Format (mm): 233x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Supply ManagementChain

Contents

Author Information Norman McLennan is a cross-industry leader in the area of supply chain management and business improvement. He is a visiting professor with the Robert Gordon University, Aberdeen. His professional industry experience spans over 30 years split between the oil and gas/energy, engineering and traditional construction sectors working in the UK, Europe and internationally with extensive supply chain management and commercial project management experience. The author is regularly invited to speak at related industry and professional bodies’ events and conferences.

Value

and

319 Supply Chain Management Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Introduction - the rationale for collaborative business practices across supply chains and why collaboration can be the jewel in the crown Collaborative arrangements - different supply chain perspectives, drivers and interdependencies Raising the game - ISO 44001 - the evolution and emergence of a new global standard for collaborative working 4 The importance of stakeholder engagement in harnessing the benefits of collaborative working practices Pan industry supply chain collaboration - an exemplar of solutions developed by the industry for the industry 6 Commercial risk and pricing considerations associated with collaborative versus traditional contracting arrangements 2 Case Studies Of Exemplar Historical Collaborative Practice 7 The team marine story - putting logic back into logistics 8 Captain - the impossible dream 9 Building supply chain functional excellence through collaboration with internal partners 10 Envoi - value creation through collaborative outsourcing of acquisition and divestmest (A&D) in upstream exploration and production (E&P) sector 3 Case Studies Of Exemplar Collaborative Practice In Play Or Evolving 11 Humanitarian relief - food for the hungry (daring to be different through collaborative innovation) The oil and gas technology centre (OGTC) All together improvementsnow:in collaboration in the pharmaceutical & biomedical life science sectors The emergence of digital procurement in the IT sector Referencing 16 Further reading 17 Index

Table of

This book « Provides best practice examples of collaborative working to help streamline working practices and drive waste and inefficiency out of supply chains « Examines the role that government, industry bodies, regulators and contractor trade associations can play in driving collaborative innovation « Provides insights into future digital collaborative knowledge-cube based procurement solutions « Online resources: Bonus chapter and roadmap Description Hyper competition and globalization mean that markets are changing. There is aggressive competition, shortening product life cycles, financial pressures and ever more demanding customers and consumers. Companies need to adopt new practices and new ways of thinking, so they are looking at collaboration across supply chains to become more sustainable, efficient and economical. Collaborative Principles for Better Supply Chain Practice looks at behavioural and commercial collaborative business principles and their application by means of case studies which showcase collaboration success across the private, public and 3rd sectors.

Disrupting trade financeblockchain, banks and freight forwarders

« Online resources: comprehensive resources including PowerPoints and sample case studies

The disruptive power of e-retailing 17 The ultimate disruptorsamazon and alibaba Conclusion - the future of the supply chain and logistics industry 19 Index

ISBN Ebook:

Format (mm):

This book « Offers a detailed overview of all the major trends transforming the supply chain and logistics industry, such as automation and blockchain « Presents case studies of companies such as Amazon, Alibaba, Maersk, UPS and DHL who have successfully integrated new technologies into their business models

Description

Author Information

Pages:

The Logistics and Supply Chain Innovation Handbook covers many important topics, such as crowd sourcing and shipping, on-demand delivery, autonomous vehicles, automation in the warehouse, electric vehicles and alternative fuels. It provides readers with a straightforward and easy to understand assessment of these innovations and their impact on the industry. Online supporting resources include PowerPoints and sample case studies.

Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Supply ManagementChain

The Logistics and HandbookChainSupplyInnovation Disruptive Technologies and New Business Models Edition: 1 Date:

The Fourth Industrial Revolution is now transforming logistics and supply chain industries. Consumer habits are changing fast and supply chains are having to adapt to meet the challenges created by this dynamic new environment. Traditional logistics operating models are under threat. Incumbent freight operators across the entire transport and warehousing spectrum have been forced to develop strategies to effectively compete with new start-ups. The Logistics and Supply Chain Innovation Handbook provides a comprehensive overview of all the major new technologies and business models currently under development and looks at this process of disruption in detail.

320 Supply Chain Management Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1

Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback:

Ken Lyon specializes in the use of advanced information systems to manage the operations of 3PL, 4PL and lead logistics providers and their trading partner networks. He is the Chair of an international logistics software group and sits on the board of Ti 03/07/2019 9780749486334 9780749486341 280 232x150

7 3D

The fourth industrial revolution and the anatomy of innovation 2 Breaking the paradigm - The rise of the disruptors Lessons from the past - What present day disruptors can learn from the containerization of the shipping industry Sector case study - Disruption in the express parcels market The internet of things, ‘big data’ and artificial intelligence Control towers and supply chain visibility printing - A review of its implications for the supply chain and logistics industry The disruptive potential of robots and automation 9 Blockchain in supply chains Digital logistics marketplaces On-demand delivery and crowd-shipping Autonomous vehicles and delivery robots A guide to alternative propulsion systems The digitization of international freight forwarding 15

« Investigates how disruptive technologies will transform supply chain dynamics in vertical sectors such as automotive and fashion « Provides practical guidelines, tools and frameworks to assist the development of new innovative business plans for future supply chains and logistics operations

John Manners-Bell is the CEO of Ti (Transport Intelligence), a leading supplier of market research solutions to the global logistics industry. He is also Visiting Professor at the Guildhall School of Business and Law, London Metropolitan University.

The Lean Supply Chain Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Edition: 2 Date: 03/12/2018 Price: £42.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482060 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482077 Pages: 336 Format (mm): 234x159 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Supply ManagementChain

This fully updated edition of The Lean Supply Chain contains new chapters on Tesco’s current strategy, rebuilding brand trust and its CSR agenda. It charts the principles of lean thinking, customer loyalty and simplicity which were used by Tesco to frame its supply chain strategy and draws upon the authors’ deep knowledge of how the retailer has dealt with challenges and market changes to provide lessons for other businesses, large or small, who wish to place how they manage their supply chains at the heart of their competitive strategy.

Les Plumes des Achats 2016 - Prix des Associations (1st edition)

Over the last two decades Tesco has emerged as a dominant player in the UK market and a leading global retailer. The Lean Supply Chain explores how Tesco, over the last 20 years or so, has built its business around supply chain excellence. As a mega-retailer, Tesco has learnt to create a balanced supply chain system, supporting suppliers’ needs as well as customers’ requirements. This perspective, and an ambition to act sustainably, has underpinned a rebuilding of trust in the Tesco brand and a resurgence in commercial fortunes.

321 Supply Chain Management Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Tesco past and present 3 Tesco and strategy –Managing the what, why and how! 4 Customer insight – To drive the Tesco supply chain 5 Lean and the Tesco supply chain – ‘Mastering the supply chain’ 6 Tesco and their CSR agenda 7 Rebuilding trust 8 Tesco and businesssevenimprovementcontinuous–Debunkingmythsofconventionalthinking 9 Current challenges – Aligning corporate and supply chain strategies to a changing macro environment 10 Conclusions This book « Reviews how Tesco has tackled all the recent challenges by revitalizing itself under Dave Lewis and facing down threats from discounters and Amazon « New to this edition: Chapters on rebuilding customer trust and Tesco’s Corporate Social Responsibility agenda « Uses real examples and academic research to explain the benefits of a Lean supply chain « Examines the key principles behind Tesco’s success: customer loyalty, simplicity of operations and Lean thinking « Winner of the prestigious Prix des Assocation 2016, in Les Plumes des Achats & Supply Chain WINNER:Description

Author Information Barry Evans has held roles at Tesco including Lean Process Manager in Supply Chain Development. He was part of the Lean Enterprise Research Centre at Cardiff Business School as a Senior Research Associate until his retirement. Robert Mason is Professor of Logistics and Programme Director, MSc Sustainable Supply Chain Management, at Cardiff Business School. He has led numerous business research projects, including working with Tesco as a partner.

322 Supply Chain Management Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction to food supply chains 1 Food production 2 Food production 3 Food manufacturing 2 Operational challenges 4 Food retailing 5 Food logistics 6 Challenges in international food supply chains 7 Collaboration and relationships 8 Food sourcing and procurement 9 Risk management 10 Technology trends in food supply chains 3 Sustainability and future challenges 11 Food regulation, safety and quality 12 Food innovation 13 Sustainability challenges in food supply chains 14 Food sector and economic regeneration 15 Food security and future challenges

The new edition of Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics is the guide to all aspects of food supply chains. This book examines food production, operational challenges and the future challenges of the industry and sustainability. The emergence of new technologies, which are key in increasing the efficiency of processes, such as food apps, big data and blockchain, are discussed. As are wider trends including veganism and local sourcing.

Food supply chains are integral in ensuring that food makes it from the farm to the table. Understanding how these operate has never been more important.

Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics embeds learning using case studies from leading companies such as Cargill, Nestlé and Starbucks. In addition, case studies from sustainable businesses such as Omnom Chocolate and ReFood also feature. The book is structured to provide readers with an understanding of the basics of food supply chain management and logistics before expanding the scope to cover more of a range of topics. Online resources include PowerPoint lecture slides.

This book « Provides the latest research on trends, challenges and technologies actively shaping food supply chains, such as veganism, supply shortages and blockchain

« Covers the fundamentals of food supply chain management including how food is produced, retailed and regulated « Offers international case studies from leading companies such as Cargill, Nestlé and Starbucks to show theory in practice « New to this edition: topics including food innovation, emerging trends, such as data analytics within the food supply chain, post-Brexit challenges to food supply chains and veganism, as well as online resources « Online resources: PowerPoint lecture slides

Author Information Samir Dani is Professor of Operations Management and Deputy Director of Keele Business School at Keele University, UK. He engages widely with industry and has research interests in supply chain risks, sustainability in supply chains, and the use of technology and business models. He works with the food sector on projects related to food supply risks, food sustainability, and food ecosystems. He has published widely and has presented his research to both academic and practitioner audiences.

Understanding the Challenges of Production, Operation and Sustainability in the Food Industry Edition: 2 Date: 03/06/2021 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398600126 ISBN Ebook: 9781398600133 Pages: 344 Format (mm): 233x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Supply ManagementChain

Food Supply

FirstDescriptioneditionWINNER: ACA-Bruel 2015 - Prix des Associations

LogisticsManagementChainand

Acknowledged as an engaging and energetic presenter, the author has completed over 450 speaking engagements at corporate events, client functions and industry conferences across 26 countries. A Visiting Lecturer at Hong Kong Polytechnic University, the author is recognised in the ‘China Supply Chain Top 20’, as one of ‘Asia’s Top 50 Influencers in Supply Chain and Logistics’ and in the 2017 USA listing of ‘Top Pros-to-Know in Supply Chain’.

In addition to highlighting key supply chain shifts such as the move beyond globalisation back towards regionalisation, this ground-breaking new publication explores several critical aspects of global supply chain ecosystems - including visibility, resilience, sustainability and collaboration.

323 Supply Chain Management Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Global supply chain ecosystems 2 Supply chain visibility 3 Sustainability and green supply chains 4 Risk and supply chain resilience 5 Free trade for all – navigating the FTA landscape 6 The Asian Era 7 The New Silk Road connecting Europe and Asia 8 Integrated logistics hubs 9 Human capital – the talent pool 10 Omni-channel supply chains 11 Africa – is it the next Asia? 12 Supply chain innovation This book « Gives invaluable advice on how to address the volatility and vulnerability of global inter-connected networks and build resilient, reliable and effective supply chains that drive competitive advantage « Provides practical examples, strategies and recommendations that you can implement immediately, improving short-term performance as you prepare for longer-term issues « Features real-life case-studies taken directly from the author’s industry projects and extensive experience « Presents a multi-dimensional geographic view, including opportunities and challenges in developing markets, multi-modal options of the New Silk Route, the diversity within Asia and developments in emerging Africa Description Twenty-first-century supply chains have evolved into world-wide inter-connected supply-and-demand networks comprising vastly more complex operations, with profound inter-dependencies and exposure to greater volatility in our uncertain world.

Global Supply Chain Ecosystems Strategies for Competitive Advantage in a Complex, Connected World Edition: 1 Date: 03/06/2015 Price: £46.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749471583 ISBN Ebook: 9780749471590 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 232x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Supply ManagementChain

The linear concept of a chain is therefore no longer adequate to describe these complex international networks of suppliers, stakeholders, partners, regulators and customers that are involved in ensuring the efficient and effective movement of products, services, information and funds around the worldwe are firmly in the era of Global Supply Chain Ecosystems.

Author Information Mark Millar is an internationally known industry expert who leverages over 30 years of global business experience to deliver practical knowledge and educated insights that help companies navigate the complex landscapes in Asia, develop new business opportunities, improve the efficiency of their supply chain ecosystems and make better informed business decisions.

Exploring the latest market trends and industry developments across emerging, developing and developed markets, in Global Supply Chain Ecosystems industry leader Mark Millar presents detailed and practical insights that will help you capitalise on market opportunities, overcome supply chain challenges and make better informed business decisions.

Author Information

« New to this edition: a new chapter on ‘The threat of supply chain cyber crime’, additional case studies, the latest thinking on political risk as well as updates throughout « Online resources: lecture slides and example test questions

Description

Supply Chain Risk Management How to Design and Manage Resilient Supply Chains Edition: 3 Date: 03/11/2020 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789666373 ISBN Ebook: 9781789666380 Pages: 368 Format (mm): 235x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Supply ManagementChain

324 Supply Chain Management Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 A framework understandingforrisk 2 Engineering supply chain resilience 3 Industry sector resilience to supply chain threats 4 Natural disasters and pandemics 5 Climate change and emissions policy 6 Economic risks to the supply chain 7 Societal risks to supply chains 8 Corruption in the logistics industry 9 Cargo crime and piracy 10 The threat of supply chain cyber crime 11 Political risks in supply chains 12 Illicit supply chains 13 Terrorism and security

John Manners-Bell is the CEO of Transport Intelligence, a leading supplier of market solutions to the global logistics industry. He is also Visiting Professor at the London Guildhall Faculty of Business and Law, London Metropolitan University.

« Provides multiple case studies of how a variety of businesses are using blockchain in the supply chain, including companies such as Walmart, Coca-Cola and Microsoft

« Includes an invaluable benchmark survey on the state of play of blockchain in supply chain management. Description Blockchain provides a secure ledger of transactions, programmable smart contracts, and real-time trustworthy visibility and insight into the supply chain process. For all the promises it offers to supply chain professionals, however, there’s very little guidance available on how organizations should begin evaluating and using it. Integrating Blockchain into Supply Chain Management provides that much needed step by step guidance.

What is the business case for embracing blockchain? This book « Demystifies blockchain technology and its intrinsic relationship to supply chain management.

Brian Fugate is the Oren Harris Chair in Transportation, Chair of the Department of Supply Chain Management at the University of Arkansas, and MIT Fulbright Senior Research Scholar. Marat Davletshin was formerly an Operations Manager with Amazon and is currently at the University of Arkansas. Matthew A. Waller is the Dean of the Sam M. Walton College of Business at the University of Arkansas, where he also serves as the Sam M. Walton Leadership Chair and a Professor of Supply Chain Management.

A Toolkit for Practical Implementation Edition: 1 Date: 03/11/2019 Price: £44.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749498269 ISBN Ebook: 9780749498252 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Supply ManagementChain

BlockchainIntegrating into Supply ManagementChain

« Offers practical tips, frameworks, and tools so readers can assess the business case for using blockchain and implement it within their supply chain

Integrating Blockchain into Supply Chain Management is a very practical book of tools, frameworks and case studies. It will help students and supply chain managers to evaluate the value proposition blockchain brings. It will then guide them through essential processes for making informed, practical, timely, and business-savvy decisions for using blockchain as an effective supply chain tool. It includes a valuable benchmark survey of the state of play in blockchain in supply chain management, including organisations such as Tyson Foods, IBM and Coca Cola, as well as downloadable frameworks and tools.

Author Information Remko van Hoek, is Professor of Supply Chain Management in the Walton College of Business at the University of Arkansas. Formerly Chief Procurement Officer for the Walt Disney Company, he has held senior supply chain executive roles in the US and Europe at several companies, including Nike and PwC. He also is the Chair of the Board of Directors of the Council of Supply Chain Management Professionals (CSCMP).

325 Supply Chain Management Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Understanding blockchain technology 2 Using blockchain as a new database 3 Common blockchain features 4 How to adopt blockchain and bridge the gaps 5 Supply chain operations and blockchain 6 Blockchain as a supplier of a stable and secure supply chain system 7 The implications of traceability across the supply chain 8 Blockchain technology and advantages for marketing products and services 9

326 Supply Chain Management Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Evolution of supply chainHow we got here 2 Supply chains in 2021 – Costly, fragile, and increasingly complex 3 Basics of blockchain 4 Internet of things, data analytics and other information technologies 5 Blockchain strategy – The why, what and how of blockchain 6 What supply managementchainprocesses and metrics will be affected by blockchain? 7 Blockchain projects in practice – Case study 8 Blockchain use cases in supply chain 9 Economic impact and future outlook This book « Provides the latest academic research on blockchain supported by actionable frameworks and practical insights from real-world application « Outlines how blockchain and other technologies can be utilized in supply chain management to improve tracking, metrics and performance « New to this edition: the latest technological developments relating to supply chain integration including Enterprise Blockchain, Ethereum and Hyperledger, the impact of COVID-19, the future of blockchain and potential developments « Online resources: Lecture slides and example assignments and quizzes « Examines case studies of successful implementation of blockchain and supply chain automation, and examples from IBM, Maersk-Line, ABN-AMRO

The fully revised new edition includes the latest information on Enterprise Blockchain, Ethereum and Hyperledger. Focus is also placed on the application of Cloud, Internet of Things (IoT), Machine learning (ML) and other technologies that support supply chains and their integration with blockchain.

This textbook highlights how to use blockchain as an enabler and key driver for solutions in the endto-end supply chain. Online resources include lecture slides and example assignments and quizzes.

BlockchainDescriptionisatransformative driver for change in all industries. Learn from the latest research and case studies how this technology can and will be used to revolutionize supply chain management. Blockchain and the Supply Chain provides a complete overview of blockchain and the key benefits of integrating this technology into the supply chain. This textbook explains how track and trace can be improved, transaction efficiency increased, visibility enhanced, and more through blockchain. With extensive case studies, learning is underpinned by practical insights as well as cutting-edge research.

Blockchain and the Supply Chain Concepts, Strategies and Practical

Clear and accessible information is provided to students on how blockchain will affect supply chain processes, metrics and performance and how to capitalize on the potential of this technology.

Edition:Applications 2 Date: 03/09/2022 Price: £44.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398605213 ISBN Ebook: 9781398605220 Pages: 344 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Supply ManagementChain

Author Information Nick Vyas is the Executive Director and Co-founder of USC Marshall’s Center for Global Supply Chain Management and Assistant Professor of Clinical Data Sciences & Operations, based in Los Angeles, California. Previously, he managed global operations for Duty-Free International, Sears, Federated Stores, and Toys R Us.

Aljosja Beije is Director of Blocklab, a technology company that specializes in the application of emerging technologies in the logistics and energy domains and start-up mentor at Yes!Delft, the incubator of the Technical University of Delft, The Netherlands. Bhaskar Krishnamachari is Director of USC Viterbi Center for Cyber-Physical Systems and the Internet of Things and Professor of Electrical and Computer Engineering at the University of Southern California, in Los Angeles, California.

327 Humanitarian Logistics & Supply Chain Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Introduction [Peter Tatham and Martin Christopher] 2 Process Improvement – A Matter of Life or Death for OrganizationsNon-Governmental[PaulD. Larson] 3 Impacts of Funding Systems on Humanitarian Operations [Tina Wakolbinger and Fuminori Toyasaki] 4 Introducing andProgramming(ICTs)CommunicationInformationTechnologiesIntoHumanitarian[LauraEldonAnnaKondakhchyan] 5 Technology Spens]GrahamChallenges–HumanitarianMeetsLogisticsAViewonBenefitsand[PeterTatham,HeaslipandKaren 6 The Increasing Importance of Services in Humanitarian Logistics [Graham Heaslip] 7 An Exploration of Horizontal Supply Chain Integration for Humanitarian and Disaster Relief [Jihee Kim, Stephen Pettit, Anthony Beresford and Irina Harris] 8

« Provides international perspectives through a series of multi-contributed essays written by practitioners and academics, including abstracts and references

LogisticsHumanitarian Meeting the Challenge of Preparing For and Responding To Disasters

This book « Assesses the principal challenges faced by humanitarian logistics practitioners and offers suggestions for best practice when supporting natural disasters and complex emergencies

Paperback:

Textbook/Professional Subject:

Supply Chain

Now in its third edition, Humanitarian Logistics is fully updated and contains new chapters on providing support for complex emergencies, waste management and reverse logistics, the application of value stream analysis and the potential of new technologies such as 3D printing, cash transfer programmes and drones. With a particular focus on pre-disaster preparation and inter-agency cooperation, this book is essential reading for anyone who needs to understand how to respond effectively during a disaster or crisis.

Edition: 3 Date: 03/05/2018 Price: £49.99 ISBN 9780749481445 Ebook: 9780749481452 Pages: 376 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Humanitarian Logistics &

Humanitarian logistics and supply chain management in Africa [Charles Mbohwa, Tatenda Chingono and Paul Buatsi] An Inquiry into Public Procurement for the Civil Preparedness Space – A Case Study in Finland [Hlekiwe Kachali and Isabell Storsjö] Supply chain and logistics competencies for the humanitarian logistician [Graham Heaslip, Alain Vaillancourt, Peter Tatham and Gyöngyi Kovács]

« New to this edition: contains new chapters on providing support for complex emergencies, waste management and reverse logistics, the application of value stream analysis and the potential of new technologies

Author Information Professor Peter Tatham is a leading international researcher in the field of humanitarian logistics, and is the Head of the Department of International Business and Asian Studies at Griffith Business School, Queensland, Australia. Martin Christopher is Emeritus Professor of Marketing and Logistics at Cranfield University, UK. His work in the field of logistics and supply chain management has gained international recognition. He is a regular contributor to conferences and workshops around the world.

16 Where next? A glimpse of the future of humanitarian logistics [Gyöngyi Kovács]

Application of centre-ofgravity analysis in network design for pre-positioning of emergency relief items [Gerard de Villiers]

13 Supply Chain Improvement at ShelterBox – A Case Study of the Application of Lean Principles and Techniques in a Disaster Relief Organisation [David Taylor and Darren Moss]

ISBN

Description

12 Humanitarian logistics – The Functional Challenges Facing Field Offices [Ira Haavisto, Peter Tatham, Hanna-Riitta Harilainen, Cécile L’Hermitte, Magnus Larsson and Alain Vaillancourt]

14 Emergency Management and Logistics Responsiveness – A Study of the Christchurch Earthquakes 2011 [Mark Wilson, Shaun Fogarty, Walter Glass and Paul Childerhouse]

15 What next for Humanitarian Logistics? A Practitioner’s Perspective [George Fenton and Rebecca Lewin]

« Gives particular focus to pre-disaster preparation, rather than post-disaster assistance

Effective logistics play a critical role in disaster preparation and response, but how can those working in this field deliver in environments which are often dangerous and unstable? Humanitarian Logistics provides thought-provoking guidance and discussion of the core issues facing practitioners involved in managing the logistics of disaster relief. With insights from academics and practitioners who have worked in these situations, this multi-contributed book offers suggestions for best practice and international perspectives on the nature of the humanitarian logistics challenge.

Description Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians provides an in-depth insight into the management of supply chains in the context of humanitarian logistics. This accessible and practical book considers humanitarian logistics from a strategic and operational perspective.

Each chapter is self-standing, relating the content in each chapter to the supply chain as a whole. This enables the reader to easily dip into different sections. At the end of each chapter, there is a case study written by a leading practitioner currently working in the humanitarian field.

« Shows how to integrate collaboration and coordination into working practices, one of the current biggest challenges in the humanitarian community.

Table of Logistics and supply chain management in the humanitarian context Introduction 2 Exploring competenceslogisticsandcapabilities in not-for-profit environments: the case of Médecins Sans Frontières Setting up a supply chain network Setting up a humanitarian supply network Service triad case study Setting up a supply chain network in the Kenyan nutrition sector Supply chain strategy Supply chain strategy Case study: partnerships –supply chain strategy Decision making in the supply chain Decision making in humanitarian logistics Forecasts, financing and acceleration of humanitarian logistics: from supply chain to value chain 5 Procurement 10 Procurement in humanitarian supply chains Joint tender for freightforwarding services: promises and pitfalls A procurement project in the Philippines Partnerships and innovative procurement as enablers for sustainable development goals Transportation, fleet management, delivery and distribution Transport in humanitarian supply chains Humanitarian aid supply corridors: Europe–Iraq 7 Warehouse and inventory management Warehousing in humanitarian logistics The ABC analysis 8 Information technology 18 Information systems for humanitarian logistics: concepts and design principles 19 GDACSmobile: an IT tool supporting assessments for humanitarian logistics 9 Sustainability, performance measurement, monitoring/ evaluation and exit strategy 20 Logistics competency for humanitarian relief: the case of Médecins Sans Frontières Community-managed rural water supply in Ethiopia 22 Managing supply chain sustainability risks 23 Using solutionscontext:printingthree-dimensionalinahumanitarianchallengesand 24 Making humanitarianmeasurementperformanceworkinlogistics: the case of an IT-supported balanced scorecard 25 Boko Haram: the security and supply chain management challenges of providing relief 26 Measuring the supply chain performance of humanitarian organizations: the case of Thai Red Cross in Chiangmai

Tools for Practice Edition: 1 Date: 03/08/2016 Price: £44.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474683 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474690 Pages: 416 Format (mm): 234x157 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Humanitarian Logistics & Supply Chain

328 Humanitarian Logistics & Supply Chain Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians fills a much needed gap in the market and is essential reading for humanitarians worldwide.

Author Information Dr Ira Haavisto is the Director of the HUMLOG Institute. She teaches Supply Chain Management and Social Responsibility at Hanken School of Economics in Finland. Professor Karen Spens is the Dean of Education at Hanken School of Economics, and a professor in Supply Chain Management and Social Responsibility. She is widely published in the logistics and supply chain industry. Dr Gyöngyi Kovács is the Erkko Professor in Humanitarian Logistics at the Hanken School of Economics, and the Director of the HUMLOG Institute. She also lectures in supply chain management and corporate geography. She is widely published in the logistics and supply chain industry.

This book « Offers vital insights on supply chain management from key practitioners and academics in the humanitarian field. « Provides highly practical cases and examples, written by practitioners from international companies and associations.

Contents 1

Supply ManagementChain Humanitariansfor

The overarching theme is collaboration and coordination, one of the biggest challenges in the humanitarian community. Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians takes a problem-based learning approach, featuring real cases and examples from leading organizations including Oxfam, Unicef, and The Red Cross.

329 Sustainability Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Exploring circularity 1 Introduction to circularity 2 Circularity – exploring the company perspective 3 Circularity – exploring the leadership perspective 4 Circularity – exploring the perspective beyond the company frontier 5 The corporate circular imperative 2 Mastering circularity 6 Knowledge in action – The Blue Connection 7 Circularity – mastering the company perspective 8 Circularity – mastering the leadership perspective 9 Circularity – mastering the perspective beyond the company frontier 10 The corporate circular imperative (2) 3 Imagining transformationthe from linear to circular 11 The transformation from linear to circular 12 Circularity – imagining the transformation from the perspective of the company 13 Circularity – imagining the transformation from the perspective of leadership 14 Circularity – imagining the transformation from the perspective beyond the company frontier 15 Conclusion

« Online resources: free introductory access to the online business simulation game The Blue Connection, supporting templates, videos and example course designs

Rozanne Henzen is a researcher and circular economy expert within the Sustainable Transformation Lab (STL) of Antwerp Management School, based in Antwerp, Belgium. She is currently recognized as one of the Sustainable Young 100 of 2020 in the Netherlands.

This book « Gain a deeper understanding of the circular economy with a mix of theory and practice to encourage experiential learning « Explores how different roles in supply chain management, purchasing, finance and sales must collaborate to create the right circular strategy for the business « Examines the wider societal context of the circular economy and its applications to an individual company, focusing on business models, profitability and transformation « Includes reflections, exercises and examples to aid understanding of the challenges, opportunities and practical implications of transforming to a circular business model

Author Information Ed Weenk is Senior Lecturer of Global Supply Chain Management at Maastricht School of Management and Senior Associate Professor at EADA Business School Barcelona. As a freelance trainer and consultant he also teaches at many other business schools around the world. He is based in Maastricht, the Netherlands.

Starting from the corporate imperative of moving from linear to circular business models, Mastering the Circular Economy covers the associated opportunities and challenges for organizations, from regulation and risk to value chain collaboration, reverse logistics and product quality. Part two of the book helps students to pull together everything they’ve learned and see how the concepts play out in the real world by guiding them through application in the online business simulation game The Blue Connection (free basic access is included with the book). Readers are continuously asked to reflect on the choices they would make in different roles to demonstrate a full understanding of the strategic and operational implications of the circular economy.

Mastering the Circular Economy

A Practical Approach to the Circular Business Model Transformation Edition: 1 Date: 03/05/2021 Price: £34.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398602748 ISBN Ebook: 9781398602762 Pages: 376 Format (mm): 242x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Sustainability

GlobalDescriptionconsumption of raw materials currently goes beyond the earth’s regenerative capacity, but the circular economy offers a more sustainable model which also provides new business opportunities. Mastering the Circular Economy is an introduction to circularity from a business and value chain management perspective. With many reflections and exercises throughout, the book draws a direct link between relevant recent theory and practice and offers students and practitioners a deeper understanding of the topic. It looks at both the macro and micro context of the circular economy, from the government and societal view to the impact of new business models in an individual company.

Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management is the essential guide to the principles and practices of sustainable logistics operations. Based on extensive research, this book covers the whole scope of sustainable logistics. The case studies, with particular attention for use in a teaching context, relate the theoretical concepts to practice and what is happening ‘on the ground’.

Description

Author Information Professor David B. Grant is Professor of Logistics at Hull University Business School, UK and Professor of Supply Chain Management and Social Responsibility at Hanken School of Economics, Finland. He has over 175 publications and participates in editorial boards for numerous journals.

This book « New to this edition: updated content on compliance and auditing, demand and inventory planning, plus strategic, operational and public policy perspectives « Online resources: Include instructor manuals; compiled lists of tables and figures « Provides a comprehensive overview of sustainability science, as well as an understanding of sustainability as it affects the supply chain « Examines all the key areas in sustainable logistics and supply chain management « Provides carefully reviewed research-led applications and topical case studies based on extensive research by experts in the field

330 Sustainability Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 Logistics and Supply Chain Management 2 Science of Sustainability 3 Freight Transport 4 Sustainable Warehousing 5 Product Design, Cleaner Production and Packaging 6 Sustainable Purchasing and Procurement 7 Reverse Logistics and Recycling 8 Risk, Resilience and Corporate Social Responsibility 9 Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management Strategy

Sustainable Logistics and Supply ManagementChain Principles and Practices for Sustainable Operations and Edition:Management 2 Date: 03/04/2017 Price: £42.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478278 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478285 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 233x157 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Sustainability

Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management examines all the key areas in sustainable logistics and supply chain management, including: sustainable product design and packaging; sustainable purchasing and procurement; environmental impact of freight transport; sustainable warehousing and storage; and much more. Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management is a highly accessible guide to sustainable supply chain management. It provides an excellent insight into the topic that will help managers, students, and scholars grasp the fundamentals of green supply and logistics management. A vital teaching resource for courses on sustainable logistics, this revised edition includes valuable supporting online materials

Dr Alexander Trautrims is a Lecturer in Supply Chain and Operations Management at Nottingham University Business School. His research focuses on sourcing, compliance and supply issues. Professor Chee Yew Wong is Chair of Supply Chain Management at Leeds University Business School. He has extensive consultancy experience in operations, purchasing, production, inventory and distribution management.

ISBN Paperback:

331 Sustainability Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 An overview of the circular economy 1 The circular economy 2 The design and supply chain 3 Circular business models 4 Enablers and accelerators 2 How are models?adoptingbusinessescirculareconomy 5 Drivers for change 6 Food and agriculture 7 Fashion and textiles 8 Consumer electricals and electronics 9 Industrial manufacturing 10 Packaging and plastics 3 What does this mean for supply chains? 11 Supply chain strategy and planning 12 Supply chain operations: Sourcing and andmanufacturing,procurement,distributionreverselogistics 4 Implementation 13 Making the business case and starting the journey 14 Glossary 15 Index This book « Provides guidance on how to move away from the ‘take, make, dispose’ approach towards a circular economy model that regenerates goods into new products « Explains how to create value instead of waste at every stage in the supply cycle, with real examples and case studies covering ecodesign, food waste apps, industrial manufacturing and key legislation changes affecting circular economies « New to this edition: circular economy framework 2.0, ecodesign, food & agriculture, recycled fabrics in fashion logistics, new chapter on packaging and examples from Africa, India and other developing countries « Online resources: lecture slides with figures and tables from every chapter Description WINNER: 2018 Les Plumes des Achats & Supply Chain - The Committee Special Prize

and Supply Chain Management Edition:

Pages:

Governments, businesses and think-tanks see the circular economy as the way forward. Now in its second edition, A Circular Economy Handbook is a guided tour through the concepts and the practicalities. A unique framework systematically explores the range of circular interventions, including product and supply chain design, material choice and supporting business models.

How does it really work for business? What circular approaches are emerging in food, fashion, consumer technology, packaging and other sectors? How do these reduce risk, improve resilience and build profitable, future-fit organizations? With over 300 real examples from around the world, this is a must-read for businesses, students and policymakers. This new edition has been extensively updated to include the latest trends, thinking, research and solutions, with a new chapter on packaging and 30 new company snapshots.

Author Information Catherine Weetman helps entrepreneurs and business leaders to rethink their businesses for a circular, regenerative and fair economy. A trained industrial engineer, she is fascinated by the ‘sweet spot’ where strategy, supply chain and sustainability come together. She hosts the Circular Economy Podcast and is an international speaker, coach and advisor. Operations 2 03/11/2020 £39.99 9781789665314 Ebook: 9781789665321 496 Format (mm): 235x160 Category:

ISBN

As we learn more about the climate and biodiversity crisis, it is clear that how we make and consume things is a major part of the problem. Extraction and processing of materials, fuels and food makes up about half of global greenhouse gas emissions and over 90% of biodiversity loss and water stress. Many modern businesses deplete resources, destroy ecosystems and dump waste and pollution at every stage - harming human health along the way.

Textbook/Professional Subject: Sustainability

Product

Date:

A Circular Economy Handbook for Business and Supply Chains Logistics,

Price:

Maja Piecyk is Associate Professor in Logistics at Heriot-Watt University, Edinburgh. Much of her research focuses on the optimisation of supply networks, carbon auditing of logistics and long-term trends in the energy requirements and environmental impacts of logistics.

« Examines ways of reducing these externalities and achieving a more sustainable balance between economic, environmental and social objectives

Edition: 3 Date: 03/02/2015 Price: £42.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749471859 ISBN Ebook: 9780749471866 Pages: 448 Format (mm): 234x155 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Sustainability

Michael Browne is Professor of Logistics at the University of Westminster, London. He has worked on studies for Transport for London, the European Commission, the UK Department for Transport, Research Councils and commercial organizations.

Green Logistics Improving the Environmental Sustainability of Logistics

« Provides insightful international case studies that illustrate the impact of green logistics in practice

332 Sustainability Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Reducing the environmental impact of warehousing – Peter Baker and Clive Marchant 3 Operational perspective 10 Optimizing the routeing of vehicles – Richard Eglese and Daniel Black 11

« Analyses the environmental consequences of logistics and how to deal with them

Other key topics examined include: carbon auditing of supply chains; transferring freight to greener transport modes; reducing the environmental impact of warehousing; improving the energy efficiency of freight transport; making city logistics more environmentally sustainable; reverse logistics for the management of waste; role of government in promoting sustainable logistics.

The 3rd edition of Green Logistics includes indispensable online supporting materials, including graphics, tables, chapter summaries, and guidelines for lecturers.

Author Information Alan McKinnon is Professor and Head of Logistics at Kühne Logistics University, Hamburg. He has been researching and teaching in freight transport and logistics for 35 years and has published in journals and books. He’s been an adviser to several governments and international organisations on environmental aspects of logistics.

The food miles debate: Is shorter better? – Tara Garnett 5 Implications for public policy and the future of supply chains 18 The role of government in promoting green logistics –Alan McKinnon

Anthony Whiteing is Senior Lecturer in the Institute for Transport Studies at the University of Leeds. An academic with 30 years’ experience, he’s been involved in various UK and European research projects primarily in the field of freight transport.

This book « Examines the most pressing issues and current trends in green logistics

Opportunities for improving vehicle utilization – Alan McKinnon 12 Increasing fuel efficiency in the road freight sector – Alan McKinnon 13 Alternative fuels and freight vehicles: Status, costs and benefits, and growth – Jacques Leonardi, Sharon Cullinane and Julia Edwards 4 Key issues 14 Sustainability strategies for city logistics – Julian Allen, Michael Browne and José Holguín-Veras 15 E-business, e-logistics and the environment – Alan McKinnon, Yingli Wang, Andrew Potter and Julia Edwards 16 Reverse logistics for the management of waste – Tom Cherrett, Sarah Maynard, Fraser McLeod and Adrian Hickford 17

Assessing the environmental effects of logistics 1 Environmental sustainability: A new priority for logistics managers – Alan McKinnon 2 Assessing the external impacts of freight transport – Maja Piecyk, Sharon Cullinane and Julia Edwards 3 Carbon auditing of companies, supply chains and products –Maja Piecyk 4 Evaluating and internalizing the environmental costs of logistics – Maja Piecyk, Alan McKinnon and Julian Allen 2 Strategic perspective 5 Green logistics, sustainable development and corporate social responsibility – Maja Piecyk and Maria Björklund 6 Restructuring road freight networks within supply chains – Irina Harris, Vasco SanchezRodrigues, Mohamed Naim and Christine Mumford 7 Transferring freight to ‘greener’ transport modes –Allan Woodburn and Anthony Whiteing 8

Table of Contents

Description

Leading the way in current thinking on environmental logistics, Green Logistics provides a unique insight on the environmental impacts of logistics and the actions that companies and governments can take to deal with them. It is written by leading researchers in the field and provides a comprehensive view of the subject for students, managers and policy-makers.

« Online resources: Graphics, tables, chapter summaries, and guidelines for lecturers

Development of greener vehicles, aircraft and ships –Alan McKinnon, Julian Allen and Allan Woodburn 9

Fully updated, the 3rd edition of Green Logistics has a more global perspective than previous editions.

It introduces new contributors and international case studies that illustrate the impact of green logistics in practice. There is a new chapter on the links between green logistics and corporate social responsibility and a series of postscripts examining the effects of new developments, such as 3D printing, distribution by drone, the physical internet and the concept of peak freight.

333 Sustainability Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 The problemsocio-ecologicalofwaste 1 The waste crisis – origins and causes 2 Waste as a problem of justice 3 Models to overcome the waste crisis 2 A new waste management system for a sustainable and just future 4 Waste as a legal problem 5 Legal regulation of crossborder waste transfer 6 Global governance and the management of waste 7 Conclusion 8 References and further reading 9 Index This book « Looks at the international trade of waste between countries, where hazardous and non-hazardous wastes are exported from developed to developing countries « Features theory and research supported by fascinating case studies looking at trans-boundary waste transfer, covering essential topics such as the Chinese ban on waste imports and the huge issue of plastic waste « Includes governance and management models and strategies for dealing with the waste crisis « Presents vital data and statistics on the waste crisis, examines possible causes and introduces different discourses and strategies « Performs a comparative analysis between the current main laws that regulate waste at international, European and Brazilian levels WINNER:Description 2020 International Solid Waste Association Publication Award

Author Information Dr. Kamila Pope is an environmental lawyer and researcher. She is a member of the World Commission on Environmental Law (WCEL/IUCN), the Experts Committee at Halte à l’Obsolescence Programmée (HOP), and Harmony with Nature Knowledge Network Experts (HwN/UN). She has won two international awards for research on sustainability and her PhD thesis was elected the best Brazilian legal thesis of 2019, a prize awarded by the Ministry of Education and Research of Brazil.

ManagementWaste

Global Waste Management outlines the emerging global waste crisis considering the perspectives of developed and developing countries around the world and the international relationships between them. This book provides an ecological viewpoint as well as studying these problems from a legal and justice standpoint.

Global Waste Management contextualises the problems faced when dealing with waste including the causes and origins. Focus is given to cross border waste transfer, as an ongoing and controversial practice, making waste management a global matter. This book scrutinizes existing international, European and Brazilian regulation on waste to highlight the complexity of the subject and the weaknesses of the law. Using a critical and socio-ecological approach, the book proposes an original model of governance to support a new system of global waste management that takes into account ecological sustainability and social justice to overcome the waste crisis. To create these models, a theoretical framework on socio-ecological justice is developed and combined with different discourses and theories described throughout the book. This is the essential guide to understanding the global waste crisis and the future of waste management.

Global Models for Tackling the International Waste Crisis Edition: 1 Date: 03/04/2020 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789660777 ISBN Ebook: 9781789660784 Pages: 416 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Sustainability

Among other factors, rapid global population growth, our development model and patterns of production and consumption have increased waste generation worldwide to unsustainable rates. This rise has led to crises in many countries where waste management practices are no longer sound.

ObsolescencePlannedUnderstanding Through Production, Consumption and Waste Generation Edition: 1 Date: 03/01/2017 Price: £44.99 ISBN 9780749478056 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478063 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Subject: Sustainability

334 Sustainability Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents

Textbook/Professional

Introduction 1 Identifying the causes, consequences and history of planned obsolescence Consumer society: A product of the growthist economy 2 Planned obsolescence as an instrument of the growthist economy and its socioenvironmental consequences How to overcome planned obsolescence: from theory to practice Sustainability in Economics and Law: The greening of sciences in the search for a new paradigm 4 The sustainability paradigm as the foundation to tackle planned obsolescence: New perspectives 5 Final considerations This book « Examines the ethical, social and economic causes and their negative consequences « Clarifies how the sustainability ideal aligns with Economics and Law, and how manufacturers and supply chain practices can integrate it into their processes « Outlines theoretical frameworks for tackling planned obsolescence « Presents real-life case studies which give insights into production, consumption patterns and planned obsolescence « Online resources: Chapter-by-chapter lecturer slides Description Planned obsolescence is a strategy used to make products obsolete, leading to their premature replacement. The result is the over-exploitation of natural resources, increased waste and detrimental social impacts. It is a known practice in consumer electronics and affects other industries as they put profit before consequence.

Author Information Kamila Pope is an Environmental Law and Bio-law lecturer, researcher and lawyer. She has published a plethora of articles, chapters and papers covering Environmental Law, Sustainability, Planned Obsolescence and Waste Management. She holds a Master’s in Law, Environment and Political Ecology and is studying a PhD in Law, Politics and Society.

A ground-breaking new book, Understanding Planned Obsolescence looks at the causes, cost and impact of planned obsolescence. It considers the legal and economic frameworks to overcome the practice and how to mitigate its effects. It also unearths new patterns of production and consumption highlighting more sustainable development models. Including a wide range of case studies from Europe, USA and South America, Understanding Planned Obsolescence is a vital step forward for the future of business and academia alike. Online resources now available include chapter-by-chapter lecturer slides.

Unsustainability

Paperback:

4 Ethical

Introduction – About the book importance of supply chain management for sustainability in global value chains research work in the field of SSCM principles of sustainable value chain management Start-ups as relevant supporters and initiators of sustainability attributes in global value chains of the future Global value sustainabilitychaingovernance Implications for management research and practice sustainability in global value chains Sustainability controlling in integrated value chains Measuring diversity among competing supply-value chains Sustainable buyer behaviour in value chains –Determinants and marketing implications planning measures for sustainable and efficient international transportation networks Actions to continuously improve sustainability in global value chains Biomimetic principles for improved chainsTowardinformationorganizationalprocessing–sustainablesupply (How) Can research in the field of sustainable supply chain management become more forward-looking and future-shaping? Success factors of voluntary sustainable supply chain management sector initiatives An institutional framework of urban logistics – Policy options and the role of the government 17 Index

2 The

Author Information Michael Henke is Chair of Enterprise Logistics at TU Dortmund University, Director of Enterprise Logistics, IML Dortmund, Professor for Strategic Sourcing and Procurement at Louvian School of Management, Paris and Professor for Supply Chain Management at Lappeenranta University of Technology, Finland. Holger Kohl is Director of Corporate Management at Fraunhofer IPK (Fraunhofer Institute for Design and Technology) and Head of Department in Sustainable Corporate Development at TU Berlin. Global Value Chains Measures, Ethics and Best Practices for Responsible Businesses

This book « Presents vital research from leading academics on sustainable supply chains, from the German Research Foundation - Deutsche Forschungsgemeinschaft (DFG) - the self-governing organization for science and research in Germany Provides examples of best practice in sustainable value chains from a cross-section of industries, such as agriculture, energy and retail « Examines the impact of digitalization as an enabler for sustainable supply chains and a facilitator of high performance « Focuses on increasing cost savings, profits and revenue Description Sustainability can create greater efficiency and cost savings in the supply chain. Supply chains, which are more complex and global than ever before, are full of both risks and opportunities. The risks range from inconsistent or poor quality, supply disruptions and health and safety concerns, to corruption.

7 Measuring

Sustainability in

Edition: 1 Date: 03/02/2021 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789662627 ISBN Ebook: 9781789662634 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 235x157 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Sustainability

335 Sustainability Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1

11 Tactical

3 Interdisciplinary

Businesses face pressure to adopt sustainable supply chain practices from various stakeholders and motivations typically come from one or more of four sources: customers, compliance, costs, competitive advantage. Sustainability in Global Value Chains is the guide to understanding all aspects and approaches of sustainable supply chains using in-depth research from leading academics from sixteen different universities. Sustainability in Global Value Chains focuses on how to make supply chains sustainable, with an emphasis on new technologies and digitization. The research featured covers topics such as KPIs in production and supply chains, the role of standards, blockchain technology and algebraic models. This comprehensive book presents real world issues, problems in implementing sustainability in the supply chain and examples of best practice.

–

2 ‘You want it where?’ How a holistic and end-to-end sustainable logistics strategy can inform manufacturing plant location decisions [Erica Ballantyne and Graeme Heron, Sheffield University Management School]

Table of Contents

5 Mechanized zones in food regional distribution centres – A sustainability case study [Tony Cragg, Tom McNamara, Ecole Supérieure de Logistique Industrielle]

11 Sustainable SchoolIrenaecosystemIndiamanagementsupplieratCoca-Cola–Creatingagreen[TomMcNamara,Descubes,RennesofBusiness]

14 The cargo-partner iLogistics Center – A warehouse made completely out of wood [Milan Lani, Alan Zalas, cargopartner]

3 The development of a triple bottom line sustainability index for a vertically integrated beef production company [Kim Bryceson, Mohd Mohsin, Geoff Slaughter, The University of Queensland]

8 Packaging design and sustainability – The case of the paper packaging supply chain [Nicoleta S Tipi, Elias D Georgakoudis, The Open University Business School]

« Explores innovative new topics and vital new areas of research which will guide readers to form future green and sustainable supply chain strategies

13 The circular supply chain – Study of a ESCPRatsimandresy,collaborationcross-industry[AnneJoeMiemczyk,BusinessSchool]

7 Exploring the inefficiency of medicine delivery processes in the pharmaceutical supply chain (PSC) waste – The case of the UK and Greece [Marina Paplexi, Manchester Metropolitan University]

12 Small and sustainable –

SustainabilityDescriptionisan increasingly urgent and important factor in logistics and supply chain management, impacting the whole supply chain lifecycle from product design and development, to supplier management, packaging, transportation, warehousing and distribution.

« Examines ways to reach sustainable business objectives through integration of innovative solutions and overcome considerable obstacles, with lessons learned from experts in industry and academia

4 Green practices in construction supply chains? How a construction company manages and coordinates its green SCM practices [Yiqing Zhao, Ying Xie, Linyi University]

The third volume of the Supply Chain Case Study Collection, the Sustainable and Green Supply Chains and Logistics Case Study Collection contains real-life scenarios from leading companies who are pursuing a sustainability agenda. Cases cover sustainability and ‘green’ practices in a range of different industries, from food through to manufacturing and construction, and in a variety of organization sizes. They are written by leading international academics and feature cutting-edge research from countries including India, Vietnam, Brazil, China and the UK.

Sustainable and Green Supply Chains and Logistics Case Study Collection Edition: 1 Date: 03/11/2021 Price: £160.00 ISBN Ebook: 9781789668223 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 240x165 Product Category: Reference Subject: Sustainability

Elevating business processes in sustainable supply chain management – The case of a chocolate supply chain network [Kate McLoughlin, David Lascelles, Sai S Nudurupati, MetropolitanManchesterUniversity]

9 Factors affecting sustainability adoption in small and medium-sized manufacturing enterprises (SMMEs) in Vietnam [Huy Q Phan, Mohammed Saad, Vikas Kumar, Bristol Business School]

By exploring examples of waste reduction, supplier management, the circular economy and crossindustry collaboration, the Case Study Collection focuses on how organizations are currently trying to meet sustainability goals and achieve success in greening supply chains.

15 ‘What is the impact of your company on the world?’ Developing changes towards supply chain sustainability [Ana P Ferreira Alves, Minelle E Silva, Excelia Business School]

This book

1 Connecting supply and demand markets in a circular economy – The case of Saica [Desirée Knoppen, EADE Business School]

Author Information Dr Ozlem Bak is a Senior Lecturer in Operations Management at Brunel Business School, based in London, UK. Her academic activities are underpinned by industrial and commercial background which included experience in the automotive industry for companies such as Daimler, Chrysler and Hyundai. Her current research interests lie in supply chain management, particularly organisational transformation and e-business implementations in supply chains.

336 Sustainability Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

The circular economy in manufacturing and service solutions – An air compressor company’s ‘air as a service’ [Mira Valkjärvi, Weimu You, Turku School of Economics]

« Provides examples of sustainable practices and solutions introduced across different industries, such as food, manufacturing, transportation and construction, including Coca-Cola India, CargoPartners, Saica and Natvita and others

« Contains in-depth international case studies written by leading academics, practitioners and consultants which deliver insights and perspectives on global sustainability trends

The challenges of a small business in the Global South competing in domestic and international markets [Daiane Mülling Neutzling, Frediano da Silva Jales, Breno Mota Fernandes, University of Fortaleza]

Description

Progressing towards zero emissions requires immediate change and this book will start you on the journey.

The transport industry has an important role to play in addressing climate change and the environmental challenges facing governments, businesses and individuals. Achieving net zero emissions by 2050 will require this sector, which is a large contributor of emissions, to innovate, adapt and drive positive change. New technologies including batteries and alternative fuels will all be significant, as will developing different approaches and outlooks.

Introduction 1 The road to zero emissions 2 The fall of the diesel engine and the rise of the electric motor 3 Climate change action and the Paris Agreement 4 The climate change challenge 5 Infrastructure challenge and the role of government 6 ‘Shock waves’ in the global battery market 7 Global energy systems and the impact of electric vehicles 8 EV development and the world’s ‘top 10’ commercial vehicle manufacturers 9 ‘New kids on the block’ – new entrants into the EV market space 10 Alternative fuels to diesel and electricity for trucks and transportation 11 Business innovation in the automotive sector 12 Financing the future 13 Journey milestones 14 The journey continues – 2050 and beyond

The Road to Zero Emissions is the comprehensive guide for those in the transport industry to understanding what can and is being done to tackle climate change. Through examining established companies and new entrants in the automotive space, readers are provided with examples of the importance of infrastructure, business innovation and financing for the future. In addition to this, the role of governments in establishing policies, such as zero-emission zones, is also discussed.

Alistair Williamson started as a technical engineer with Bedford Trucks and graduated through senior engineering roles at Scania UK and MAN AG, becoming Global Marketing Director for MAN AG based in Munich. He has operated his own successful Marketing consultancy for 14 years.

The Road to Zero Emissions The Future of Trucks, Transport and Automotive Industry Supply Chains Edition: 1 Date: 03/09/2020 Price: £49.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789665604 ISBN Ebook: 9781789665611 Pages: 312 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Sustainability

337 Sustainability Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents

This book « Examines the new technologies, artificial intelligence systems and applications needed to drive a sustainable trucking industry « Explains how the acceleration of the adoption of zero emission transport will be linked to infrastructure investments, supported by case studies from companies such as Jaguar, Land Rover and Honda « Presents the many other factors that will impact the survivability of Diesel as an energy source in the future, for the global manufacturers of Diesel cars and trucks « Details new players in freight sustainability across four continents and examines future plans and models, which manufacturing companies are planning to role out by 2050

Author Information Dennis Evans has held senior positions in truck manufacturing companies around the world, most recently with a division of VW Commercial Vehicles. He has worked in the UK, Europe, USA, South America, Middle East and Africa, with all of the major vehicle manufacturers.

Des Evans is an honorary Professor within the Advanced Services Group at Aston University Business School. He was awarded an O.B.E. for services to the Motor Industry.

Description Logistics accounts for around 9-10% of global CO2 emissions and will be one of the hardest economic sectors to decarbonize. This is partly because the demand for freight transport is expected to rise sharply over the next few decades, but also because it relies very heavily on fossil fuel. Decarbonizing Logistics outlines the nature and extent of the challenge we face in trying to achieve deep reductions in greenhouse gas emissions from logistical activities. It makes a detailed assessment of the available options, including restructuring supply chains, shifting freight to lower carbon transport modes and transforming energy use in the logistics sector. The options are examined from technological and managerial standpoints for all the main freight transport modes.

This book « Provides original research conducted by the Kühne Logistics University, Hamburg « Presents vital insights into how different companies have tackled decarbonisation with a focus on transportation « Includes a new decarbonisation framework within which external factors can be classified and systematically assessed by companies Explains the external factors likely to influence the carbon reduction in logistics, such as freight transport demand, truck fuel consumption and related CO2 emissions

LogisticsDecarbonizing

Based on an up-to-date review of almost 600 publications and containing new analytical frameworks and research results, Decarbonizing Logistics is the first to provide a global, multi-disciplinary perspective on the subject. It is written by one of the foremost specialists in the field who has spent many years researching the links between logistics and climate change and been an adviser to governments, international organizations and companies on the topic.

338 Sustainability Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents 1 Climate change: the nature and scale of the challenge 2 Developing a decarbonisation strategy for logistics 3 Reducing freight transport intensity 4 Shifting freight to lower carbon transport modes 5 Improving asset utilisation in logistics 6 Transforming energy use in road freight transport 7 Transforming energy use in maritime, air cargo and rail freight sectors 8 Decarbonising logistics at the national level: the case of the united kingdom

Distributing Goods in a Low Carbon Edition:World 1 Date: 03/06/2018 Price: £42.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749483807 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480486 Pages: 328 Format (mm): 236x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Sustainability

Author Information Alan McKinnon is Professor of Logistics at Kühne Logistics University, Hamburg. He has been researching and teaching freight transport and logistics for almost forty years and has published extensively in journals and books. He was a member of the European Commission’s High Level Group on Logistics, Chairman of the World Economic Forum’s Logistics and Supply Chain Industry Council and a lead author of the transport chapter of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change’s fifth assessment report. He has spent many years researching the links between logistics and climate change and been an adviser to governments, international organizations and companies on this topic.

Using CSR and Sustainability to Create Competitive Advantage Edition: 1 Date: 03/03/2017 Price: £42.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749479459 ISBN Ebook: 9780749479466 Pages: 296 Format (mm): 235x160 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Sustainability

Supply Chain Ethics covers the following issues which affect senior supply chain, operations and manufacturing managers: ‘triple advantage’ best practice and how it can create value for global businesses; product design; sourcing and warehousing; transportation and recycling; environmental practices of logistics companies and suppliers; supply chain technologies. There is also an invaluable Ethical Supply Chains survey of top global companies.

339 Sustainability Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Table of Contents Introduction 1 New Thinking and Business Models 1 Profit, People and Planet – The Triple Advantage 2 Supply Chains in the ‘Circular Economy’ 3 The Role of Supply Chain Technologies 4 Sustainable Supply Chains Survey 2 Public Policy and Industry Response 5 Government Policy and Industry Response to Climate Change 6 Implementing a CSR Strategy 7 Sustainable Warehousing and Distribution 8 Sustainable Packaging Initiatives 9 Global or Local? The Ethical Debate 3 Ethical Issues in the Supply Chain 10 Societal and Environmental Supply Chain Responsibility 11 Ethics in the Supply Chain –Societal Impact 12 Ethical Supplier Relationships 13 Treatment of Workers in the Modern Logistics Sector This book « Outlines suitable and safe conditions in which to manufacture products « Clarifies issues on waste and what it does to the environment « Depicts how to analyse the impact of the transportation of goods in terms of pollution « Looks at ways road freight operators, warehouse companies, shipping lines and airlines can mitigate their impact on the environment « Explores case studies including CEVA, ASOS, Apple, Intel, Exol Lubricants, ProLogis, Sports Direct, Unilever, Citylink, Deliveroo/Ubereats and Hewlett Packard Description

Supply Chain Ethics

Author Information John Manners-Bell is Founder and CEO of Transport Intelligence Ltd, Bath, UK, which since 2002 has developed a market-leading position in the provision of market research to a range of blue chip customers and governmental organisations. He is former Chair of the Logistics and Supply Chain Global Agenda Council of the World Economic Forum, attending meetings in the UAE, China and South Africa as well as speaking and moderating at the annual Davos meeting. He is regularly quoted in the trade and national press (FT, Bloomberg, Wall Street Journal, Economist) and has spoken at conferences worldwide.

It is increasingly clear that traditional supply chains which focus on sourcing products from the lowest possible cost suppliers are failing to exploit their full potential. Supply Chain Ethics, through case studies, surveys and unique research, identifies and outlines best practice employed by global manufacturers, retailers and logistics companies. It examines the so-called ‘triple advantage’ that accrues to businesses when strategies that combine bottom line profits, sustainable environmental practices and positive societal impact are employed. Narrow supply chain strategies which focus on only one of these three factors will inevitably fail.

www.koganpage.com andMarketingPR Innovation and Best Practice in RetailInternalPublicMarketingMarketingMarketingMarketEventProductLuxuryBrandingSalesB2BConsumerMarketingSocialDigitalMarketingAdvertisingFundamentalsMarketingMediaCommunicationsBehaviourMarketing&AccountManagementMarketingDesignManagementResearchAnalyticsStrategyPlanningRelationsCommunications

Choose from our curated ebook collections designed for professional marketing success. EbookMarketingCollections Contact us at corporate-enquiries@koganpage.com Your library can choose a collection above or create its own bespoke collection from any other Kogan Page marketing books. Unlimited concurrent users | MARC records | LMS/VLE www.koganpage.com/collectionsintegration13 42Branding & advertising Build your brand and engage with key audiences, with expert advice from industry leaders. PR & communications Communicate with impact and generate the right kind of noise with PR best practice. Digital marketing Adopt an integrated approach to digital marketing and optimize your strategy. Strategy & planning Use core principles, skills and tools, to create winning marketing plans that achieve business objectives. Paid Attention Planning and Managing Public Relations CampaignsDigital Branding CommunicationsSuccessfulEmployeeMyths Brandingof CommunicateinaCrisis DigitalStrategyMarketing Malcolm McDonald onPlanningMarketingSocialStrategyMedia InnovativeMarketingB2BThe End Marketingof DigitalUnderstandingMarketing No. of ebooks: 20 No. of ebooks: 20 No. of ebooks: 16 No. of ebooks: 20

Online resources include lecture slides, self-test questions, group activities, figures, and case studies for specific chapters, plus web links to industry body research and relevant further reading.

342 AdvertisingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 The Essentials of Advertising – What Are Adverts and Why Study Them? 2 Big Questions –PersuasionCommunication,Advertising,Rhetoricand 3 Art or Science – What do Legendary Advertisers Think about Advertising? 4 Ad Work – Management and Organizational Perspectives on Advertising 5 Information and Value – The Economics of Advertising 6 The Hierarchy of Effects – The Psychology of Advertising 7 The Society of the Spectacle –The Sociology of Advertising 8 The Magic System – Cultural Studies of Advertising 9 The Medium is the Message –Media Studies and Advertising 10 The Distorted Mirror –Advertising and Ethics 11 Next Steps – The New Essentials of Advertising This book « Takes a cross-disciplinary approach, explores the diverse ways advertising is interpreted by psychologists, sociologists, economists, historians, marketers, and media researchers - giving students the skills to respond sensitively to any advertising challenge « Brings big picture, theoretical concepts down to earth, linking them to everyday practice with thought-provoking examples from international companies « Builds awareness of the different ways advertising is interpreted across industries, enabling students to develop careers aligned with their abilities and interests, both client and agency side « Includes in-depth coverage of ethics, encouraging students to think critically about advertising in different contexts, and respond appropriately when faced with ethically subjective situations throughout their careers « Online resources: Lecture slides, self-test questions, group activities, case studies, figures, and web-links to industry body research, magazines, relevant research, blogs, podcasts, videos and documentaries Description As a subject, advertising affects us all - it surrounds us every day. Yet there is a great deal of variety in the way advertising is interpreted, and practitioners and academics from different backgrounds and disciplines study advertising in vastly different ways. For example, psychologists try to understand what happens to our brains when we see adverts, while economists try to understand whether money spent on advertising is worth it. Essentials of Advertising is designed to help students navigate their way through the field of advertising. It will introduce readers to the key concepts of advertising as they have been developed not only by psychologists and economists, but also by sociologists, historians, marketers and media researchers - not to mention advertising practitioners themselves.

Author Information Dr Robert Cluley is assistant professor at Nottingham University Business School, teaching in the fields of branding, advertising and marketing communications. He has contributed to a range of texts on branding and advertising, along with a plethora of research publications and edited collections.

Essentials Advertisingof Edition: 1 Date: 03/02/2017 Price: £32.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478391 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478407 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 238x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Advertising

Meticulously researched, Essentials of Advertising will allow readers to understand not just what different research traditions say about advertising, but why they say it. This will help students develop key analytic skills to critically evaluate and exploit existing research on advertising, based on a greater understanding of where it comes from. This allows them to develop greater perception and awareness professionally, and acts as a springboard for students to jump into the wider area of advertising studies and to develop their careers according to their interests.

This book « Offers models for advertising innovation to gain commercial stability in an evolving media landscape along with innovative ideas to influence purchasing behavior « Includes practical toolkits as well as real-world examples of advertising campaigns, including companies such as Google, Old Spice and Sony « New to this edition: brand new chapters exploring advances in attention spans and new trends in online advertising, as well as new case studies on compelling brand ideas « Online resources: additional toolkits focusing on brand behaviour and exercises on how to create case studies, and how to have ideas

Prospection - Planning for the future we want 4 2020 Foresight 13 Everything is PR 14 The quantity, quality, qualia and cost of attention

Paid Attention Innovative Advertising for a Digital Edition:World 2 Date: 03/11/2021 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398602502 ISBN Ebook: 9781398602519 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Advertising

343 AdvertisingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1

TheDescriptionadvertisingattention

marketplace is a confusing and vast playing field where the rules have changed drastically over the last decade. Make yourself heard and win the attention of your target audience with the new edition of this ultimate guide.

Paid Attention delivers new and innovative insights into advertising ideas: what they are, why they are evolving and how to use them in day to day strategy to ensure commercial stability within a changing digital landscape. Packed with real-world examples of advertising campaigns such as Google, Sony and Old Spice, it provides a robust model for influencing human behaviour and toolkits that offer best practice on brand behaviour and effective communication.

This second edition includes two new chapters exploring the latest evidence about attention spans and trends in online advertising, as well as new case studies on compelling brand ideas. In a world where being a consumer is confusing, learn to take control of the situation and make yourself heard in today’s crowded attention marketplace.

Author Information Faris Yakob, Based in New York City, New York, is co-founder of Genius Steals LLC, an ideas and innovation consultancy and of The School of Stolen Genius, an online learning community for marketers and creative thinkers. He is former Chief Innovation Officer at MDC Partners, EVP & Chief Technology Strategist at McCann Erickson, plus Global Digital Strategy & Creative Director at Native Communications. Yakob is a prominent international speaker, guest lecturer for a number of universities and has written for publications including the Financial Times, Forbes, Advertising Age and Media Week.

Epilogue - Talkin’ about your generation

Paid attention 1 Introduction - Paid attentionHow much is it worth? Logocentrism - What’s in a name? Attention deficit disorders Uncovering hidden persuaders - Why all market research is wrong 4 Advertising works in mysterious ways - Modern theories of communication Is all advertising spam? Communication planning in an on-demand world 6 The spaces betweenThe vanishing difference between content, media and advertising 3 Attention arts and sciences 7 Do things, tell people - How to behave in a world of infinite content 8 Recombinant culture - Talent imitates, genius steals 9 Combination tools - How to have ideas - A genius steals process 10 Advertising for advertising - Is the industry paying attention? Integrative strategy and social brands - Be nice or leave!

This book « Explores and debunks the most deeply entrenched myths about marketing, exposing them through academic research and examples « Helps readers clarify and improve their own understanding of the marketing industry, allowing them to become more effective marketers « Features fascinating examples and real world case studies from a diverse range of companies and sectors Description It’s common knowledge that marketing is nothing but advertising, and if your business comes through word of mouth then you don’t need marketing anyway. Besides, everyone knows that social media is the best form of free marketing there is... don’t they?

Using a combination of academic research, amusing examples and industry case studies, Myths of Marketing effectively debunks many of the most pervasive myths and assumptions, leaving readers with a clearer, more perceptive understanding of marketing as a whole, to improve their own practice and marketing strategy.

Myths of Marketing

Table of Contents 1 Myth 1fundamentallycommunicationsMarketinghaven’tchanged 2 Myth 2 - Marketing is just communications 3 Myth 3 - Sales and marketing are basically the same 4 Myth 4 - I don’t need marketing – My company is too small and business comes from word of mouth 5 Myth 5 - I don’t need a marketing plan 6 Myth 6 - Marketing is solely the responsibility of the marketing department 7 Myth 7 - Ultimately, people buy on price 8 Myth 8 - Pricing is a matter of charging the highest amount possible 9 Myth 9 - The purpose of a brand is to build awareness 10 Myth 10 - Every business is a brand 11 Myth 11onpurchasesBusiness-to-businessarepurelybasedlogic 12 Myth 12 - Business-to-business and differentmarketingbusiness-to-consumerarecompletely 13 Myth 13 - Effective marcom means running a series of great campaigns 14 Myth 14 - A successful business requires a compelling USP 15 Myth 15 - Market positioning is all about the product or service on offer 16 Myth 16 - Visuals are the most important aspect of any marketing communications 17 Myth 17 - Our offering must attract the largest audience possible 18 Myth 18 - Demography is the best way to segment your market 19 Myth 19 - The focus of marketing communications should be a company’s products or services 20 Myth 20 - We are operating in a service economy 21 Myth 21 - The customer buying journey is no longer a linear process 22 Myth 22 - I understandinstinctivelymycustomer 23 Myth 23 - Marketing can still rely on the traditional purchase funnel 24 Myth 24 - Creating content takes too much time and money 25 Myth 25 - Social media is nothing more than some alternative channels to market 26 Myth 26 - Every business requires a ‘higher purpose’ 27 Index

Author Information Grant Leboff is one of the UK’s leading sales and marketing experts. He serves as a nonexecutive director and runs Sticky Marketing Club, a sales and marketing strategy consultancy. He speaks regularly at global conferences and contributes to publications including the Daily Telegraph, the Independent, and the Financial Times, and is the author of Sticky Marketing and Stickier Marketing, both published by Kogan Page.

344 Marketing FundamentalsMarketing and PR

Banish the Misconceptions and Become a Great Marketer Edition: 1 Date: 03/01/2020 Price: £15.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749483913 ISBN Ebook: 9780749483920 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: General Subject: Marketing Fundamentals

The world of marketing is abound with a staggering number of misconceptions, fallacies and falsehoods. In Myths of Marketing, recognized industry expert Grant Leboff takes readers on a fascinating and entertaining journey through some of the most deeply entrenched stereotypes that exist in the industry, from the idea that sales and marketing are basically the same and that getting people’s attention costs a lot of money, to the notion that demography is the best way to segment your market and ‘content is king’.

Learn from real-world case studies including Coca-Cola, MoneySupermarket.com, Bloom & Wild, Airbnb, Adidas, Uber so you can view best-practice examples so you can build your own digital marketing Accompanyingstrategy.online resources consist of practical implementation guides spanning SEO, paid-search, email, lead-generation, as well as lecture slides and activity sheets. This is an invaluable guide for digital marketing students and entry-level to mid-management professionals.

« Online resources: Lecture slides, activity sheets, test banks, practical implementation guides and templates

Author Information Simon Kingsnorth is a digital marketing expert with over 20 years’ industry experience. Based in Reading, UK, he was formerly the Global Head of Digital Marketing at Citi Bank and has provided consultancy services to leading brands such as Vodafone, Asda and Lloyds TSB. A regular conference keynote speaker and contributor to industry publications, he is the author of The Digital Marketing Handbook, also published by Kogan Page.

Digital StrategyMarketing

An Integrated Approach to Online Edition:Marketing 3 Date: 03/05/2022 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398605978 ISBN Ebook: 9781398605985 Pages: 384 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

Introduction – How will this book transform your digital marketing strategy? The foundations of digital marketing Knowing your business objectives and your customer 2 Understanding the digital ecosystem Integrating digital into wider organization strategy Understanding the evolving digital consumer Barriers, considerations and data protection in digital marketing strategy Integrating digital change into your wider organization Enabling technologies for online marketing and digital transformation Planning your digital marketing strategy –Objectives, teams and budgeting Using channel strategy to reach your customers SEO strategy and organic techniques Building and optimizing a winning paid search strategy Display advertising and programmatic targeting 11 Tailoring your social media strategy Marketing automation, messaging and email marketing – The unsung heroes 13 Lead generation that delivers results 14 Content strategy – A key pillar of success 15 Personalizing the customer journey and digital experience 4 Conversion, retention and measurement Effective design, e-commerce and user experience (UX) Managing loyalty, CRM and data 18 Providing a smooth online service and customer experience 19 Measuring success through data analytics and reporting 5 Tailoring your final digital marketing strategy 20 Putting together your digital marketing strategy

345 Digital MarketingMarketing and PR Table of Contents

This book « Provides a one-stop guide to creating a digital marketing strategy and understanding how to structure and build a more strategic approach « Includes real-world case studies including Coca-Cola, MoneySupermarket.com, Bloom & Wild, Airbnb, Adidas and Uber « New to this edition: material on AI in marketing, marketing automation and how to use digital analytical tools, plus new strategies for third-party data and privacy protection

BuildDescriptionaneffective and practical digital strategy with this bestselling guide to digital marketing, covering everything from automation and analytics to integrating AI.

Digital Marketing Strategy is a global bestseller, and a one-stop guide to digital marketing and how to structure and build a more strategic approach. Recommended by the Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM), a professional marketing body. Now fully updated, this third edition covers the integration of AI in marketing, marketing automation and how to use digital analytical tools, plus new strategies for third-party data and privacy protection.

Digital Marketing Strategy will show you how to effectively select, align and manage digital channels and operations, to streamline a winning digital marketing strategy for measurable, optimized results.

Running display advertising that delivers brand value 6

How this book works 2 Building a high-converting, beautiful website 3 Optimizing your website to deliver top SEO results 4

Written by recognized industry expert and bestselling author, Simon Kingsnorth, The Digital Marketing Handbook brings together reliable and actionable insights into one complete resource. Also covering how to manage affiliates and partnerships to deliver highly targeted leads and provide customer service that achieves high review scores and builds loyalty, it is accompanied by online templates and interactive tools to use in practice. This book is an essential blueprint for marketing professionals to deliver the best results from their digital marketing campaigns.

Managing paid search for costeffective results

Managing affiliates and partnerships to deliver highly targeted leads Creating content that excites, informs and converts Delivering organic and paid social media that grows your brand 9 Using analytics to interpret and optimize your results to maximize performance 10 Automating your email and CRM plans to deliver compelling communicationsdigital 11 Using e-commerce and retail partners to scale your merchandizing 12 Providing customer service that delivers high review scores and builds loyalty

Marketing and

Build,Descriptionimplement and optimize your digital marketing campaigns, with this indispensable guide which covers everything from SEO, social media, paid search and display advertising.

« Features practical tips, examples from brands including Google and Amazon, platform recommendations and common pitfalls to watch out for

Author Information Simon Kingsnorth is a recognized digital marketing expert with over 20 years’ industry experience. Based in Reading, UK, he was previously the Global Head of Digital Marketing at Citi Bank and has worked with leading brands including Vodafone, Direct Line Group and Google as well as on many successful start-up launches. A regular conference keynote speaker and contributor to industry publications, he is also the author of Digital Marketing Strategy, also published by Kogan Page.

346

Digital MarketingPR Table of Contents

« Written by a recognized industry expert and bestselling author who has more than 20 years’ digital marketing experience « Online resources: presentation slides and interactive tools and templates to be used in practice

The Digital Marketing Handbook takes the reader step by step through the various components of B2B and B2C online marketing, making it an essential companion to every marketer’s desk. Highly practical in approach, it features tips, platform recommendations and common pitfalls to watch out for, as well as examples from global brands including Google, Amazon and Nissan. Detailed guidance is provided for key areas such as creating content that excites, informs and converts, using marketing automation and analyzing your results to maximize performance.

The MarketingDigital Handbook Edition: 1 Date: 03/01/2022 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398603394 ISBN Ebook: 9781398603400 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 235x157 Product Category: Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

This book « Guides the reader step by step through building, implementing and optimizing the components of digital marketing such as SEO, social media content, paid search and display advertising

The world of digital media is constantly changing, as technologies continue to transform the way we interact and communicate on a global scale. In this climate, Understanding Digital Marketing provides a practical, no-nonsense guide to digital marketing, from strategy and digital transformation to bestpractice basics and trends. Clear, informative and packed with case studies and examples, it gives an essential grounding in SEO, email marketing, social media, content marketing, performance marketing and much more.

This book « Provides tips on how to best connect with customers in a rapidly changing climate of engagement and interaction « Explores current and emerging trends which are shaping the industry, including voice-based marketing, influencer marketing and data insights « New to this edition: updated content on martech, consumer data and privacy considerations, programmatic and content marketing, SEO & paid search and new global case studies and expert views « Online resources: bonus contributor views and additional case studies on Kwik Fit, Battersea Dogs Home and Yves Saint Laurent

347 Digital MarketingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 IntroductiontransformationDigital 2 Digital marketing strategy setting 3 Being online: Welcoming the world 4 Search - Being found online 5 Email marketing 6 Mobile marketing 7 Social media 8 Content marketing and native content 9 Programmatic marketing 10 Performance marketing 11 How to form meaningful insights from data

Description

This fifth edition of the bestselling Understanding Digital Marketing is fully updated to reflect the latest global developments in the industry. Complete with first-hand accounts of what success in digital marketing looks like, this book is an essential resource for practitioners and students alike. It is now required reading for more than 100 universities and colleges, and has received endorsements from Harvard University, Hult Business School and the Chartered Institute of Marketing.

DigitalUnderstandingMarketing

Engaging

A Complete Guide to Customers and Implementing Successful Digital Campaigns

Author Information Damian Ryan is a media and marketing expert with over 30 years’ experience. He created the Golden Spider Awards for internet excellence, before establishing the first digital agency in the UK and Ireland in 1997. He went on to successfully build and sell three digital marketing businesses and is now a specialist adviser in mergers and acquisitions in corporate finance. Ryan is now a partner with BDO where he covers deals in media marketing communications and marketing Hetechnologies.isalsoauthor of Understanding Social Media and The Best Digital Marketing Campaigns in the World, both published by Kogan Page.

Edition: 5 Date: 03/11/2020 Price: £22.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789666014 ISBN Ebook: 9781789666021 Pages: 448 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

This book « Outlines techniques that will ensure the reader gets the most out of existing digital strategies before investing more on the latest ‘must have’ technologies « Features case studies from global brands including the Financial Times, O2, Regus, L K Bennett and The Economist « Provides clear strategies for developing a customer-centric approach to implementing processes and technologies such as programmatics, AI and automization

Author Information Christopher Bones is co-founder of GoodGrowth, He is an established thought leader in organizational strategy and change management in companies such as Diageo, Cadbury, Schweppes and Shell. He is Professor of Creativity and Leadership at Alliance Manchester Business School. James Hammersley is a co-founder of GoodGrowth whose clients include Bupa, The Open University, Barclays Connector and O2.

Nick Shaw is Director of Digital for Good Growth. He has over 10 years of experience in leading and helping a variety of organizations to improve their sales effectiveness and innovation performance.

Presenting a sustainable model of e-commerce that is appropriate to any individual organization’s needs, Optimizing Digital Strategy addresses the repetitive dilemma between even more investment in technology and the need to improve margins and grow revenue. Illustrated by the authors’ own digital work for global brands such as The Economist, Sky, O2, Regus, the Financial Times, Lidl and L.K.Bennett, this book shows how to balance the need to remain competitive, fully deliver customer expectations, and put resources behind investments that will deliver the best return.

Optimizing Digital Strategy How to Make Informed, Tactical Decisions that Deliver Growth Edition: 1 Date: 03/12/2018 Price: £22.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749483722 ISBN Ebook: 9780749483739 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 235x157 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

348 Digital MarketingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Building digital strategy that works 2 Why digital strategies fail and how to recognize failure 3 Levers for digital growth and how to use them 4

The importance of innovation in driving success The dark side of digital 6 Emerging digital business models The e-commerce system 8 Building a customer-centric culture 9 Making digital choices that differentiate success from failure 10 This is the business of transformation

Optimizing Digital Strategy explores the choices facing organizations in the rapidly changing world of technology-enabled business. From performance marketing through to personalization, on-demand retailing and AI, this book maps out commercial and customer-focused challenges and explains how leaders can get the most out of their digital strategies. Rather than rushing headlong into adopting the latest digital platforms, tools and technologies, the book challenges leaders to step back from the demands for constant investment in new technology and drive better returns from existing assets.

« Includes practical exercises, infographics and visuals that will help the reader apply the principles to their organization Description

Intensely practical, B2B Digital Marketing Strategy helps readers get to grips with some of the more advanced and complex elements of B2B marketing. It expertly explains how to incorporate the latest digital methodologies into critical processes such as lead generation, customer retention and customer experience personalization. Packed with global case studies and examples, this book is an invaluable resource for any professional operating in the B2B space.

B2B

MarketingDigitalStrategy

How to Use New Frameworks and Models to Achieve Growth Edition: 1 Date: 03/08/2020 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789662542 ISBN Ebook: 9781789662559 Pages: 352 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

This book « Gives clear, direct explanations of the more advanced aspects of digital B2B marketing, and makes these accessible and user-friendly « Expertly explains the most up-to-date digital frameworks relevant to the B2B marketing sphere, and shows how to implement these to achieve lead generation, customer retention and data management « Is due to be the set text for the Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM)’s course Advanced B2B Digital Marketing, and recommended reading for the courses B2B Acquisition and Retention Marketing, and Introduction to B2B Digital Marketing « Includes a wealth of global case studies, featuring companies such as Danfoss, American Express, IBM, Schneider Electric and more Description B2B Digital Marketing Strategy is a decisive guide to the most recent developments in the field. It gives readers an overview of the latest frameworks and models, and shows how these can be used to overcome the everyday challenges associated with account targeting, data utilization, and digital campaign management.

Author Information Simon Hall is a marketing innovator with around 25 years’ experience in Technology and Services Marketing. In his former career, he served as UK Chief Marketing Officer for Dell as well as many senior European roles at Acer, Microsoft and Toshiba. In addition to running courses and workshops with companies on various B2B marketing and digital marketing areas, Simon Hall also lectures final year university students and degree apprentices in strategy, and marketing at Pearson Business School (University of Kent). He is a member of the Chartered Institute of Marketing, of the DMA B2B Council, and a Global Thought Leader in B2B Marketing for the ICG Group (a global consulting company). He is the founder of NextGen Marketing Solutions and author of Innovative B2B Marketing, also published by Kogan Page.

349 Digital MarketingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 The new evolving business landscape 2 DEVELOPING THE B2B DIGITAL STRATEGY 3 B2B digital marketing strategy 4 B2B customer journeys and the customer experience 5 B2B personalization marketing and buyer personas 6 B2B customer insights and data management 7 THE EARLY BUYER JOURNEY STAGE 8 Generating awareness 9 B2B SEO and search strategies 10 B2B websites and website strategies 11 Digital for lead generation and lead nurturing 12 B2B digital marketing for lead generation 13 B2B digital and lead nurturing 14 Digital campaign management and integration 15 B2B content marketing 16 B2B digital marketing campaign planning 17 Digital integration marketing in B2B 18 Digital marketing and sales 19 Measuring digital marketing 20 Digital for retaining customers 21 Types of digital retention marketing 22 Digital retention marketing channels 23 B2B social media and digital marketing platforms 24 B2B social media marketing strategy 25 B2B digital technologiesmarketingandplatforms 26 Index

350 Digital MarketingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Introduction to e-commerce website optimization 2 The kick-off 3 How people buy 4 Essential research 5 Add depth with further research 6 Merchandizing analytics 7 Creating the optimization plan 8 Hypotheses and creative work 9 Testing your hypothesis 10 Personalization 11 Optimizing the optimization 12 People and culture 13 Persuasive copywritingwebsite 14 Launching a new website

Edition: 2 Date: 03/12/2020 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789664423 ISBN Ebook: 9781789664430 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

Can Do About

Johann van Tonder is COO at AWA Digital, working with brands such as Canon, Avis and Interflora. He has trained and coached big and small e-commerce businesses around the world, and is a regular speaker at international conferences. 95% Website You it

Visitors Don’t Buy, and What

This book « Highlights the most effective changes to undertake on your e-commerce site, demonstrating how to focus valuable time on tangible efficiencies and revenue gains Shows how to gain insights into online customers’ behaviour identifies free or inexpensive tools to help access them Supports the transition to becoming a data-driven organization, helping to adopt a scientific approach to implementing an optimized e-commerce website to this edition: new content on test metrics, prioritization and personalization, plus updated case studies and recommended tools Conversion rate optimization (CRO) is a complex field and one that is rapidly evolving. It’s about understanding people and their behaviour, not simply website visits. E-commerce Website Optimization provides an all-encompassing guide, explaining the how and why, before focusing on techniques and tools to increase the percentage of visitors who buy from the site, and subsequently the amount that these visitors spend when they buy. Grounded in best-practice theory and research, it brings together usability, analytics and persuasion to offer a detailed, step-by-step guide to improve conversion rates, increase ROI from online marketing campaigns, generate higher levels of repeat business and increase the e-commerce value of websites.

and

Description

Author Information

« New

In the fast-moving world of e-commerce, this fully revised second edition includes updates on test metrics, prioritization and personalization, alongside updated case studies and newly recommended tools. E-commerce Website Optimization is an invaluable book for those seeking to implement a datadriven ethos for their organization’s e-commerce programme, for everyone from chief digital officers and heads of online sales, to entrepreneurs and small business owners.

of Your

Dan Croxen-John is CEO of AWA Digital, a global e-commerce conversion optimization agency. He is a certified Web Analyst, a Fellow of the Institute of Direct Marketing, and has served on advisory boards for numerous associations.

E-Commerce OptimizationWebsite Why

Mobile Marketing How Mobile Technology is Revolutionizing Edition:CommunicationsMarketing,andAdvertising 2 Date: 03/02/2017 Price: £22.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749479794 ISBN Ebook: 9780749479800 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 216x139 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

351 Digital MarketingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Mobile Marketing in Perspective 1 Introduction 2 Understanding the User Journey 3 Technology Change and Adoption 4 Disruption and Integration 5 Devices, Platforms and Technology 6 The Future of Mobile Marketing 2 The Tactical Toolkit 7 Introduction 8 Mobile Sites and Responsive Design 9 Mobile and E-mail 10 How to Build an App 11 Social Media and Mobile 12 Mobile Search 13 Mobile Advertising 14 Augmented Reality (AR) and Virtual Reality (VR) 15 Quick Response (QR) Codes 16 Location-based Devices and Beacons 17 Near Field Communication (NFC) and Mobile Payments 18 Instant Messenger (IM) Apps and Short Messaging Service (SMS) 19 Mobile Analytics 3 Mobile Marketing Checklists 20 Introduction 21 Checklists 22 Conclusions

Mobile Marketing is a clear, practical guide to harnessing the mobile consumer and tackling the rising challenges of divided user attention across multiple screens at the same time. It demystifies the vast spectrum of tools and techniques now available and explains how to optimize these dynamics into an innovative and effective mobile marketing strategy. Now that website search rankings take into account mobile optimization, no serious marketer can do without a thorough understanding of mobile.

Author Information Daniel Rowles has worked in digital marketing for almost 20 years on both the client and agency sides. He is a Course Director for the CIM, lecturer at Imperial College London and Cranfield School of Management and lead judge of the CIM Marketing Excellence awards. He is also the host of the Digital Marketing Podcast, a global top-ten business podcast on iTunes. His company TargetInternet.com has helped clients of all types to use digital marketing more effectively, including the BBC, Vodafone, Sony, Oracle and Tesco.

This book « Is a clear-cut guide on how to structure mobile marketing in a planned and coordinated way « Demystifies terms, tools and techniques, helping readers connect and coordinate the different dynamics across their business Includes high-profile case studies including Heineken, Nike Training Club, Google Play and MailChimp « Changes since the last edition include two new chapters (Mobile & Email, Location-Based Devices and Beacons), plus cutting edge updates on wearable technology, mobile payments, virtual reality and understanding the multi-screen journey Checklists chapter and practical frameworks such as how to create a mobile marketing strategy and how to develop an app « Online resources: digital marketing instructors manual, lecture slides, example exam and self-test questions, and a content calendar template Description

The first edition of Mobile Marketing won the Judge’s Choice Award in Social Media at the Small Business Trend’s 2014 Book Awards. This fully revised 2nd edition includes straightforward explanations on mobile optimized content, app development, social media and proximity based marketing. It has also expanded to include two brand new chapters on mobile and email and on location-based devices, plus cutting-edge updates on advances in wearable technology, mobile payments, virtual reality and strategies for the changing user journey. Integrated with tactical checklists, easy application frameworks and powerful case study insights such as Heineken, WordPress, MailChimp, Nike Training Club (NTC), Google Play and Moz, it provides a full overview from service provision and technology integration to content strategy, ready to capture fast-moving consumers on the go. Online resources include a digital marketing instructors manual, supporting lecture slides, example exam and self-test questions, and a content calendar template.

Author Information Jon Mowat is the founder and MD of Hurricane, an award-winning video marketing agency which has worked with organizations including BMW, Axa, Costa Coffee and UN Environment. With decades of experience in the industry, he previously produced documentaries for the BBC, and now turns his expertise to create video content to meet clients’ business objectives. Based in Bristol, UK, he is a regular international conference speaker and has been published in a wide range of marketing publications including Adweek, Brandwatch, CIM, Smart Insights and Social Media Today.

This book « Provides step-by-step guidance for creating and activating effective video marketing and measuring its success « Shows how to create and edit video campaigns for all budgets, including DIY approaches using DSLRs and smartphones « Contains case studies and examples from well-known international brands including adidas, Kleenex, and Red Bull « Online resources: video links for campaigns discussed in the book and a downloadable strategy planner « New to this edition: chapters on understanding your audience and buying media space on ad networks and social media, content on personal and personalized content and avoiding potential pitfalls such as frauds and fake views

Video Marketing Marketing and PR Edition: 2 Date: 03/08/2021 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398601147 ISBN Ebook: 9781398601154 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x158 Product Category: Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

Updated with the latest developments, this second edition of Video Marketing contains new chapters on understanding your audience and buying media space on ad networks and social media, as well as further content on personal and personalized content and avoiding potential pitfalls such as frauds, fake views and updates. Accompanying online resources consist of video links for campaigns discussed in the book and a downloadable strategy planner for readers to complete and put into action.

Video Marketing takes a step-by-step and in-depth look at planning and creating great video campaigns, as well as activating, testing and measuring their success. Featuring case studies from global household names such as adidas, Kleenex, and Red Bull, it explores which video types and platforms brands should use, using multi-video campaigns, live videos and webinars, as well as creating and editing video campaigns on a budget using DSLRs and smartphones.

352 Digital MarketingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Video marketing strategyAn introduction 1 What is video marketing? 2 Why video marketing works 3 Understand your audience 4 Video types and platforms 2 Creating great videos 5 The basics of video marketing 6 Planning effective video campaigns 7 Storytelling and creative that changes behaviour 8 Activation, measurement and testing 9 Buying media space on ad networks and social media 10 The dark underbelly of video advertising - How to avoid losing money 3 DIY video projects 11 Filming and editing 12 Filming on a smartphone and DSLRs 4 Creating effective video campaigns 13 Steps 1 and 2 - Where your brand content is now and setting goals 14 Step 3 - Content planning and programming strategy 15 Step 4 - Building the perfect content hub 16 Step 5 - Creating high-volume video content - And making it easy 17 Step 6 - Multi-video campaign activation and testing (how to grow ROI)

InDescriptiona‘videofirst’world, video is one of the most effective tools marketers can use to raise brand awareness, engage consumers, drive website traffic and increase sales.

TakeDescriptionadvantageof the skyrocketing popularity of podcasts and learn how your business can use the unique opportunity to stand out and drive loyal engagement with target audiences, using this complete guide to podcast marketing - written by the hosts of the global top ten iTunes podcast, The Digital Marketing Podcast.

Edition: 1 Date: 03/05/2019 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749486235 ISBN Ebook: 9780749486242 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

Written by award-winning author Daniel Rowles, and his co-host of the global top ten iTunes podcast, The Digital Marketing Podcast, this book: -Explains how podcasting can drive business results -Advises on how to record, edit, and advertise your content -Provides a unique digital marketing toolkit -Is supported by case studies from influential organizations around the globe

Podcasting is a hugely persuasive, yet under-utilized channel accessed by an affluent and influential demographic. In a crowded and noisy digital environment, it gives organizations, brand builders and marketers the unique opportunity to stand out and drive engagement with target audiences, with accurate and measurable levels of allegiance that can only be dreamed of on other digital channels.

Podcasting in perspective 1 Stand out from the social media noise - Why you should be podcasting Podcast adoption - Growth and expansion of podcasting as a popular medium Understanding how people really listen to and absorb audio content Building genuine personal engagement through podcasting Building your business case and plan How to use podcasts to drive business results Understanding the role of podcasts in the user journey An introduction to podcast marketing What differentiates a great podcast? What is digital branding and how does business development fit in? Defining your content plan and using content calendars Driving action from podcasts Building your podcast and making it a success The importance of landing pages and show notes (and getting SEO right) Defining your podcast audience and content Understanding and selection of different podcast formats Preparing your podcast recording environment Choosing your recording hardware and software An overview of podcast editing options and how to do it Using interviews with influencers to maximize your podcast strategy Show branding intros and outros - Making the right first impression 20 Podcast advertising and monetization - Where to begin and how to manage 21 Publishing and distributing your podcast Measuring success - Tapping into how and why people listen to your podcast 23 The podcast marketing toolkit The value of web analyticsMeasuring the impact of your podcast activity 4 The future of podcasting 25 Where next for podcasting? conversational design, artificial intelligence and machine learning Future-proofing your podcast strategy for the ever-changing user journey 27 Index

Quite simply, Podcasting Marketing Strategy is the definitive authority to making and publishing podcasts that deliver quantifiable results.

This book « Demonstrates how to use podcasts effectively for content building, branding and business development to spread your organization’s message « Reveals why podcasting is a key way to stand out from the noise of social media « Explains how people really listen and how to use these insights to build personal engagement with listeners « Understand how to build the audience of your podcast through blogging and SEO, advertising and email marketing

MarketingPodcasting

A Complete Guide to Creating, Publishing and Monetizing a Successful Podcast

353 Digital MarketingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1

Strategy

Ciaran Rogers is the marketing director of Target Internet. He has worked for and trained a large number of international brands including QA, Liz Earle, Elemis, Time to Spa, Highlands & Islands Enterprise, UKSA, Jubilee Sailing Trust, The Sustainable Food Trust, Hershesons Bliss, REN Skincare and FatFace.

Author Information Daniel Rowles is a CIM Course Director, lecturer at Imperial College London, and lead judge for the CIM Marketing Excellence Awards. He is the host of the Digital Marketing Podcast, an iTunes top 10 business global, and CEO of TargetInternet.com, where clients include the BBC, Mastercard, and Warner Brothers. He is the author of Building Digital Culture, category winner of the 2018 CMI Management Book of the Year.

This book is the complete guide to the podcast environment. It describes the importance of podcasting for businesses and explains why, uniquely, it has the highest level of consumer commitment than any other social media.

How to Harness AI and Maintain the Competitive Edge Edition: 1 Date: 03/02/2019 Price: £21.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749483395 ISBN Ebook: 9780749483401 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 235x157 Product Category: Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

« Shares fascinating interviews from IBM, Tesco, Ocado and BT, plus case studies from Reiss, PwC and Gartner Description

Artificial intelligence (AI) marketing is paving the way for the future of marketing and business transformation, yet many organizations struggle to know exactly how and where to integrate it. With AI forecasted to boost global GDP by 14% by 2030, an efficient and sustainable AI marketing strategy is now essential to avoid losing the competitive edge. Using Artificial Intelligence in Marketing provides the definitive, practical framework needed for marketers to identify, apply and embrace the opportunity to maximize the results and business advancement that AI can bring.

Author Information Katie King is a CEO and Business Transformation consultant with over 28 years’ experience. She has advised many of the world’s leading brands and business leaders, including Richard Branson, o2, Orange, Accenture, PA Consulting, Arsenal Football Club and Harrods. King has delivered numerous TEDx talks and is a frequent commentator on BBC TV and radio, and is a regular speaker on the international conference circuit.

354 Digital MarketingMarketing and PR Table of Contents

Streamlining efficiencies into every business practice, AI automates simpler, repetitive tasks with unrivalled accuracy, allowing sales and marketing teams to return their attention to where human interaction is most valuable: strategy, creativity and personal connection. Using Artificial Intelligence in Marketing outlines key marketing benefits such as accurate market research samples, immediate big data insights and brand-safe content creation, right through to the on-demand customer service that is now expected 24/7. It also explores the inevitable myths, concerns and ethical questions that can arise from the large-scale adoption of AI. This book is an essential read for every 21st century marketer.

MarketingIntelligenceArtificialin

1 The AI wake-up call – The strategic transition of marketing 2 The personalization paradox –Global appetite for AI and the changing customer journey 3 Transformational marketing and AI in tourism – A glimpse at the Asia Pacific region 4 Transformational marketing and AI in Europe – Case studies from telecoms, banking and built environment 5 Transformational marketing and AI in North America –Case studies from banking and retail 6 Transformational marketing and AI in technology and venture capital – With a special focus on the Middle East 7 Framework for success –Democratization of AI 8 The new marketing paradigm – Reinventing the role of marketing, ethics and transparency 9 The future of marketing has arrived – AI’s wider impact on education, policy and politics

This book « Delivers a real-world framework for the confident application and integration of AI for marketing strategies and campaigns « Outlines time-saving marketing efficiencies such as chatbot customer service, market research samples, big data insights and brand safe content creation

« Clarifies how to manage both the advantages and ethical questions that arise in computer-based decision making, in line with individual business objectives

Using

« Contains a range of international case studies from a variety of sectors, including Airbnb, Hyundai, Deloitte Digital and LVMH « Online resources: presentation slides, content calendars, a content marketing framework and interactive tools for effective social media management SocialDescriptionmediahas become an imperative for almost every business. Discover how to successfully implement an effective social media strategy that is supported and integrated throughout every part of your organization, with this essential handbook to enhancing your online presence and achieving the competitive edge.

Social Media Marketing for Business provides a step-by-step roadmap to setting up effective workflows, team configurations, governance models and social media policies, alongside creating and measuring social media campaigns and content themselves. Featuring insights from leading industry experts, it covers areas such as balancing social media ownership, measuring success using analytics and conducting a social media audit.

Containing an array of international case study examples from organizations such as Airbnb, Hyundai, Deloitte Digital and LVMH, Social Media Marketing for Business also explores how to build a supportive culture, get buy-in and common pitfalls to avoid. Supported by online presentation slides, content calendars, a content marketing framework and interactive tools for effective social media management, Social Media Marketing for Business is a one-stop-shop resource for developing social media marketing strategies and integrating them within your business to ensure their success.

355 Digital MarketingMarketing and PR Table of Contents Introduction 1 You’re in charge of social media, now what? 2 The who/what/where of your social media and content audit 3 Social media governance and policy development 4 Content! Content! Content! 5 Training 6 Analytics and ROI 7 Employee advocacy and personal branding 8 In-house or outsource 9 Beware bright shiny syndrome 10 Your social media operating model 11 Giving up control 12 Paid social media 13 Hashtags 14 Humanity 15 Bringing it all together This book « Shows how to create a powerful social media marketing strategy which is embedded within your wider organization through effective workflows, team configurations and a supportive culture « Covers key areas such as balancing social media ownership and developing and measuring engaging social media content to increase reach and better reflect the personality of the brand

Social BusinessMarketingMediafor Scaling an Integrated Social Media Strategy Across Your Organization Edition: 1 Date: 03/03/2022 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398603691 ISBN Ebook: 9781398603707 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

Author Information Andrew Jenkins is Principal of Volterra, a professional services firm specializing in social media and social selling strategies. Based in Toronto, Canada, he was formerly the Head of Social Media Strategy for Royal Bank of Canada (RBC) and has worked with a diverse list of companies in North America and Europe, including CIBC, Rogers, Bell Canada, InfoSpace and The Aga Khan Foundation. A regular international speaker and panellist at numerous industry conferences and events, he also teaches a course on Social Media Strategies for the Enterprise at the University of Toronto’s School of Continuing Studies.

Marketing and Customer Engagement Edition: 1

to Social

Price:

Pages:

Product

Social StrategyMedia A Practical

Author Information Julie Atherton is a business leader, public speaker, consultant and strategist with 30 years’ experience gained working with global brands including Nissan, ITV, Deloitte Digital, Asos and St John Ambulance. Awarded IDM Educator of the Year in 2018, she trains marketing professionals and business leaders in digital, brand, social media and content marketing. She is also an experienced trustee and non-executive director for a range of organizations including the IDM Qualifications Advisory Board and Union of Brunel Students. Guide Media Date: 03/10/2019 £29.99 9780749497071 Ebook: 9780749497088 272 Format (mm): 235x165 Category: Media

356 Social MediaMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 The role of social media in business, marketing and customer expectations 2 Integrated developmentyourmediahowengagementcustomer–UnderstandingandwhyyoursocialstrategywillenhancePRandstrategicbusiness 3 Getting started – Aligning social media goals and KPIs with your wider business objectives, PR and marketing campaigns 4 The power of social listening –How to profile your audience and customer insights for a global social media strategy 5 A quick-step guide to channel selection, digital integration, niche social and being present on the relevant channels 6 How to drive action and engagement through integrated content marketing on social media 7 Customer or celebrity? Identifying and attracting the right influencers to advocate your brand 8 Examples, tools and templates – What does a great social media strategy look like? 9 Measuring and benchmarking success – How and when do you know your social media strategy is working? 10 Crisis and mediamanagementreputationforsocial–Aclearguidefor the unpredictable

ISBN Paperback:

ISBN

Textbook/Professional Subject: Social

357 Social MediaMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Getting started – how to create a compelling social media programme 2 Rules governing the relationship between search and social 3 How to budget for social media activities 4 Setting KPIs and measuring success 5

Understanding social media ROI – what matters and what doesn’t 6 Why social media is central to customer experience 7 How to build a social media team – how to pick the right suppliers 8

Understanding the relationship between online PR and social media 9 The future for social media and the vastly changing landscape 10 Risk assessment and risk management in social media This book « Covers topics such as how to develop a strategy and programme, budget for activities, set KPIs, determine ROI, create a dashboard and build a team « Addresses the relationship between search and social, analytics, customer experience and risk assessment and management in social media « Helps readers gauge their own social media score with crib notes and practical exercises « Serves as both a reference guide for professionals and study guide for marketing students Description Understanding Social Media is the essential guide to social media for students and professionals alike. Drawing on the experience, advice and tips from dozens of digital marketers and social media superstars, it is an extensive crowd-sourced guide to social media platforms.

Author Information Damian Ryan is founder and chairman of The Global Academy of Digital Marketing, a collaborative movement comprised of digital marketers seeking knowledge, case studies, contacts and credible data to help them prosper. He is also a partner with Mediaventura, the UK’s leading corporate finance firm for the TIME (Technology, Internet, Media and Entertainment) sector. He is also the author of Understanding Digital Marketing and The Best Digital Marketing Campaigns in the World

Illustrated throughout with case studies from both successful and failed campaigns, Understanding Social Media democratizes knowledge of social media and promotes best practice, answering questions such as ‘How do you create a compelling social media campaign?’, ‘How do you build and engage with an audience?’ and ‘Where is the line between online PR and social media drawn?’ It is the most comprehensive and practical reference guide to social media available.

Understanding Social Media

How to Create a Plan for Your Business that Works Edition: 1 Date: 03/04/2015 Price: £22.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473563 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473570 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 235x157 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Social Media

Everyone knows that social media is free, millennials are all adept social media experts, that businesses always have to be available 24/7 and ultimately none of it really matters, as the digital space is full of fake news and online messaging is seen as inauthentic. Don’t they?

Author Information Michelle Carvill is Founder of Carvill Creative - a social media marketing agency whose clients include the BBC, Nuffield Health and Norbord. Passionate about the digital future she advises clients on online marketing communication and social media strategies, and leads a team delivering practical social media planning and daily management. She is the author of Get Social, published by Kogan Page. Ian MacRae is a work psychologist, consultant, speaker, author and Managing Director of High Potential Psychology. He works with, and writes about, a wide range of topics relating to psychology and the workplace. He developed the High Potential Traits Inventory (HPTI), a personality assessment which has been translated into dozens of languages and used by over 50,000 people around the world. Myths of Social Media is his fifth book, he is co-author of Motivation and Performance and Myths of Work, also part of the Business Myths series.

Myths of Social Media Dismiss the Misconceptions and Use Social Media Effectively in Business Edition: 1 Date: 03/03/2020 Price: £15.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749498719 ISBN Ebook: 9780749498726 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 230x155 Product Category: General Subject: Social Media

Social media is free 2 Social media is a waste of time 3 Social media is the best use of my time 4 Social media is a fad 5 Social media is for posting photos of your breakfast 6 Social media replaces real-life networking 7 Social media is the best source of information 8 Social media is full of fake news 9 Social media creates information “bubbles” 10 Social media means my business has to be available 24/7 11 People’s personal information on social media should not be used by businesses 12 Businesses should ignore negative comments on social media 13 Social media use detracts from business relationships 14 All my customers/clients are on social media 15 I’ve had a few glasses of wine and, people on Twitter will really appreciate my sense of humour right now 16 Millennials are all social media experts 17 Digital natives understand how to use social media for business 18 Social media cannot be done in-house 19 Social media is just for connecting with people outside the company 20 Businesses should be on every social media platform 21 Social media is purely for broadcasting my business’s information 22 Social media can replace the traditional business website 23 It’s not possible to measure ROI on social media 24 Sharing too much on social media will reveal trade secrets 25 Sharing more content is always better

The use of social media as a business tool is dominated by falsehoods, fictions and fabrications. In Myths of Social Media, digital consultant Michelle Carvill and workplace psychologist Ian MacRae dismiss many of the most keenly-held misconceptions and instead, present the reality of social media best practice. Using helpful and instructive, sometimes entertaining and occasionally eye-watering examples of what you should and should not do, Myths of Social Media debunks the most commonly held myths and shows you how to use social media effectively for work and at work.

358 Social MediaMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1

This book « Banishes 40 of the most commonly held myths and fictions about the use of social media as a business tool « Helps readers understand the very real commercial benefits - and costs - of social media « Is packed with instructive and entertaining examples and case studies of what should and shouldn’t be done with social media

SHORTLISTED:DescriptionBusiness Book Awards 2021 - Sales & Marketing

Edition:Marketing 1

Influencer Marketing Strategy gives readers everything they need to create influencer marketing strategy. It will walk readers through the key considerations, and offer insight into decisions such as choosing the right influencer, planning content, and how to incorporate influencer marketing into your wider marketing strategy. This book presents fascinating, in-depth case studies from the beauty, fashion, gaming, travel, health and tech industries, demonstrating the variety of ways that influencer marketing can be utilized, and the huge opportunities it presents for organizations and industries of all sizes. Influencer Marketing Strategy is the ultimate guide to developing a successful influencer marketing strategy - and building campaigns that create real value.

Date: 03/03/2021 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789667257 ISBN Ebook: 9781789667264 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Professional Subject: Social Media

Influencer Marketing Strategy

359 Social MediaMarketing and PR Table of Contents Introduction 1 What is influencer marketing? 2 The major platforms for influencer marketing 3 Creating your strategic framework 4 The legal impacts of influencer marketing 5 Working with influencers 6 Finding influencers 7 Creating an ambassador programme 8 Influencer marketing around the world 9 The future of influencer marketing 10 Understanding analytics and measurement 11 Case studies 12 Appendix 1 – Directory of influencer marketing platforms, agencies and consultants 13 Appendix 2 – Glossary of terms 14 Index This book « Discusses the importance of maintaining control of the brand message while still giving the influencer the freedom to create posts in their natural style « Helps readers understand the key facets of influencer marketing, walking them through the process of preparing their own influencer marketing strategy « Features in-depth case studies from the beauty, fashion, gaming, travel, health and tech industries, to showcase the variety of influencer marketing strategies that can be adopted. Examples include Mumsnet, Fyre Festival, Dermalogica and Ryan’s Toys « Offers advice on incorporating influencer marketing into a wider content marketing strategy

CreateDescriptionaninfluencer marketing strategy that benefits both brand and the influencer with this fascinating guide, rich in case studies from the biggest and the best and the small and specialist. Influencer marketing can no longer be ignored. Whether it’s broad scale celebrity endorsement, or micro-influencers with niche, highly targeted followings, influencer marketing has become a natural extension of content marketing. However, while the opportunities are vast, the very nature of influencer marketing means that a brand must relinquish control of their marketing message to allow the influencer to communicate in their natural style. This can be unnerving, and it’s therefore imperative to have a clearly defined campaign that mutually benefits and protects both the brand and the influencer.

Successful Influencer

How to Create

Author Information Gordon Glenister, based in Cambridgeshire, UK, is Global Head of Influencer Marketing for the Branded Content Marketing Association, and has over 25 years’ experience in promotional marketing. He is the host of Influence, the global podcast that shines a spotlight on influencer marketing. He also runs his own consultancy and regularly speaks around the world on influencer marketing, membership and merchandise. Gordon Glenister was Director General of the British Promotional Merchandise Association for 11 years.

Author

ISBN

Information

Price:

360 Marketing CommunicationsMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 backgroundCommunicationsandtheories 1 New integrated communicationsmarketing 2 Branding 3 Customer managementrelationship 4 Buyer behaviour 5 Communications theory 6 Marketing communications research 7 Marketing communications agencies 8 International communicationsmarketing 9 The communicationsmarketing plan 10 The changing communications environment 2 Communications tools 11 Selling, social selling, marketing automation and martech 12 Advertising 13 Publicity and public relations 14 Sponsorship 15 Content marketing and other sales promotion 16 Direct mail, email, messaging and chatbots 17 Exhibitions, events and experiential marketing 18 Merchandizing and point of sale 19 Packaging 20 Owned media – websites and social media 21 Index

ISBN Paperback:

CommunicationsMarketing Integrating Online and Offline, Customer Engagement and Digital Edition:Technologies 7 Date:

PR Smith is a marketing consultant, bestselling business author and inspirational speaker. He has helped hundreds of businesses, from innovative start-ups to established blue-chip companies. He is founder of SOSTAC® Planning framework, voted in the Top 3 Business Models worldwide by the Chartered Institute of Marketing’s Centenary Poll, and created the Great Sportsmanship Programme. Ze Zook is an integrated marketing author, lecturer, producer and consultant specializing in helping the creative industries fulfil both their missions and business goals. He is a visiting academic at Regent’s University London and consults on digital marketing for private-sector disruptive start-ups. 03/12/2019 £44.99 9780749498641 Ebook: 9780749498658 672 Format (mm): 245x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject:

Pages:

CommunicationsMarketing

361 Marketing CommunicationsMarketing and PR Table of Contents

5 Media

to Strategic Content Marketing Marketing

Author Information

Introduction: mapping the Content marketing territory Content marketing: a new and better promise? Why Content is seen as the solution to current marketing challenges Experience Economy: brand and customer experience as Content enablers Content can help build sustainable brands with better purposes How Content changes the way we all do business agency perspective: how Content impacts creativity, process and revenue agency perspective: how Content impacts creativity, process and revenue how Content impacts creativity, process and revenue how Content impacts creativity, process and revenue Data, new formats and the role of Content in the consumer journey Content distribution and its role in the consumer journey Content and storytelling in the age of user data abundance

4 Creative

The rejecter’s manifesto: key arguments against the Content marketing ‘mirage’ Content marketing and ethics: challenges, threats and balancing acts

CommunicationsMarketing

3 How

Key measurement issues relating to Content marketing Content marketing: not such a new and better promise?

The evolution of Content formats: from text to video to AR/VR to AI… How to measure and evaluate Content marketing

The Definitive Guide and PR Edition: 1 Date: 03/07/2018 Price: £19.99 ISBN 9780749482220 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482237 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 235x157 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject:

Justin Kirby is a consultant, educator and thought leader with a 20+ year career in industry as a digital strategist, producer and entrepreneur. He chairs and speaks at conferences around the globe, judges industry awards, and advises brands and agencies.

14 Conclusions

Lazar Dzamic is the former Google ZOO Head of Brand Planning for North and Central Europe (NACE), a creative strategist, writer and academic. He is an award-winning Planning Director in several integrated agencies, and lectures at the Faculty for Media & Communications at the Singidunum University in Belgrade.

Paperback:

« Reveals the value content can not only bring to owned media initiatives, such as company websites or blogs, but the essential role content plays in all other marketing initiatives, from social media to advertising to offline channels « Empowers readers to make the best organizational, tool and process decisions necessary to get content up and running across departments and organizational silos

DISTINGUISHEDDescription

362 Marketing CommunicationsMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 The shift to content marketing 2 Content marketing versus content strategy 3 Converged media 4 Native advertising 5 Organizing for content 6 A culture of content 7 Global content strategy 8 Real-time marketing 9 Content marketing software 10 Content performancemarketing 11 Contextual campaigns

This book « Is written by global industry thought-leader Rebecca Lieb, who has conducted and published more content marketing research than anyone else « Shares the results of deep quantitative research and hundreds of hours of interviews with senior marketers at the world’s most respected brands

It will enable readers to make the organizational, staffing, tools and process decisions necessary to get content up and running across divisions and organizational silos. Deeply researched and insightful, Content - The Atomic Particle of Marketing is, quite simply, the definitive research-based guide to content marketing.

Content - The Atomic Particle of Marketing The Definitive Guide to Content Marketing Strategy Edition: 1 Date: 03/06/2017 Price: £21.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749479756 ISBN Ebook: 9780749479763 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 230x155 Product Category: Professional Subject: CommunicationsMarketing

FAVOURITE: NYC Big Book Awards 2017 Content, in all its forms, is the single most critical element of any marketing campaign. Finding a successful equilibrium between content marketing and content strategy is difficult, but essential.

Content - The Atomic Particle of Marketing goes beyond superficial descriptions of how to produce engaging social media content to offer the results of many years of deep quantitative research, and hours of interviews with senior marketers at some of the world’s leading brands.

Author Information Rebecca Lieb is a strategic advisor, research analyst, keynote speaker, author and columnist. She works with many of the world’s leading brands on digital marketing innovation. Clients range from start-ups to non-profits to Fortune 100 brands and regulated industries, including Facebook, Nestlé, Adobe, Fidelity, IBM, Save the Children, Pinterest, Cisco and The Federal Reserve Bank of New York. Previously, she was Altimeter Group’s digital advertising and media analyst, and prior to that she was Vice President at Econsultancy. Lieb was VP and Editor-In-Chief of The ClickZ Network for over seven years.

Written by a recognized industry thought leader, Content - The Atomic Particle of Marketing explores how content functions in the broader framework of all marketing, as well as organizational concerns and IT decision making. It demonstrates the value content brings not only to “owned” media initiatives, such as a company website or blog, but also the essential role content plays in all other marketing initiatives, from social media to advertising to offline channels.

Message: key communication of your brand message using experiential marketing Experiential strategy: how to develop live brand experience strategies and frameworks

Action: how to deliver and project manage live brand experiences Gauging effectiveness: creating a real-world test-andlearn approach for experiential marketing environments Evaluation: interpreting and monitoring tangible results from experiential marketing

Selected locations and brand ambassadors for your experiential marketing strategy Systems and mechanisms for measurement for experiential marketing planning

This comprehensive second edition of Experiential Marketing pinpoints exactly where this innovative strategy fits in with the current marketing and events climate, including a step-by-step outline to plan, integrate and evaluate its game-changing results. The completely fresh content analyzes the latest industry advances and case studies, including four new chapters on the digital experience and merged realities, plus the experience economy and creative explosion of the ‘Pop-Up’ phenomenon.

Accompanied with a digital toolkit of downloadable resources, this book is essential reading for marketing, business, media and events professionals alike, providing strategic decision makers with a unique competitive advantage in a vibrant new era of marketing strategy.

MarketingExperiential A Practical Guide to Interactive Brand Edition:Experiences

A whole new world: millennials, brand experiences and social media The experience economy is here Concept stores, the future of retail and pop-ups Digital experiences, artificial intelligence in marketing and merged realities

This book « Explains how to integrate immersive brand experiences into marketing strategies, using targeted outreach for a live social media domino effect « Provides practical steps to plan, inspire, activate and evaluate tangible results from experiential initiatives New to this edition: four new chapters on digital experience and merged realities, the experience economy, customer experience and the ‘Pop-Up’ phenomenon « Online resources: practical checklists, workbooks and sector -focused content on drinks, cosmetics, FMCG, automotive, retail, fashion and technology Description

The BETTER creative model: how to create unique experiential marketing ideas an activation framework for your experiential marketing strategy Situation and background: exploring the business context for experiential marketing Experiential objectives: how to creatively define and set your goals Target audience: gathering holistic insights and understanding of your customers

Author Information Shirra Smilansky is CEO and Executive Creative Director of Electrify Worldwide Ltd, an international brand engagement agency working with clients such as L’Oreal Luxe, Carling, Selfridges, Harvey Nichols, Lancome and Yves Saint Laurent. She is the Co-founder of an MA degree ‘Experiential Meets Digital’ and former Visiting Professor at London Metropolitan University. With over 15 years in the industry, Smilansky is an impactful thought-leader, entrepreneur and innovator in experiential marketing, co-founding her first company BlazinStar Experiential back in 2003. 2 Date: 03/12/2017 Price: £22.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480967 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480974 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: CommunicationsMarketing

Conclusion: planning for the future of experiential marketing

The immersive brand experience is revolutionizing brand engagement. Experiential Marketing, second edition, cuts through the jargon with clear practical guidelines on how to magnify marketing strategies to a powerful new level. This book emphasizes that experiential marketing is not just about creating a live event. A unique, immersive experience allows businesses to generate a surge of brand engagement, which is amplified immediately by a niche target of consumers through live content sharing and social media streams.

An experiential revolution: the accelerating transformation of business and marketing What is marketing?experiential

363 Marketing CommunicationsMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1

With many professionals now developing their skills on the job, it is notoriously difficult to benchmark successful copy. This book provides a step up for those who already know the basics of writing copy, and are seeking more advanced, psychology-driven techniques to gain the competitive edge. With practical insight into human decision making and consumer engagement, it will inspire the clear-cut confidence needed to create, quantify, and sell stand out copy in a cluttered marketplace.

Communicate

364 Marketing CommunicationsMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1

Complementing the ‘how to’ perspective of copywriting, with impressive interviews from leading ad agencies and copywriters across the globe, this second edition addresses the everyday issues faced in a multitude of roles, including: -Practical advice to measure and benchmark effective copy -Guidance on creating and critiquing briefs -New chapters on how to weave copywriting skills into the wider industry -Storytelling and content marketing -The impact of evolving channels like mobile and social media

Author Information Andy Maslen is Managing Director of Sunfish, a writing agency specializing in corporate communications, direct marketing and digital content, and CEO of the Andy Maslen Copywriting Academy. A lifetime fellow of the Institute of Direct and Digital Marketing, Maslen works globally with clients such as the NHS, Prudential, The Economist, BBC Worldwide, Hamleys, London Stock Exchange, RSPB, The New York Times and PricewaterhouseCoopers. He is co-founder of the Copy Cabana conference and a bestselling author of numerous fiction and non-fiction books. Cut Through the Noise and With Impact Edition: 2 Date: 03/01/2019 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749483661 ISBN Ebook: 9780749483678 Pages: 296 Format (mm): 235x157 Product Category: Professional/General Subject: CommunicationsMarketing

CopywritingPersuasive

Practical, inspiring and extremely digestible, Persuasive Copywriting is the only vibrant, allencompassing guide to copywriting that you need.

This book « Explains how to amplify engagement by tapping into consumer emotions with practical, psychology-driven techniques « Inspires the confidence and dexterity to sell and deliver stand out copy in a variety of creative contexts « Includes exclusive interview insights across the creative industry from high profile copywriters, ad agencies and market leaders « New to this edition: four new chapters placing copywriting in context: content marketing, creativity, storytelling and the impact of mobile and social channels; how to sell, quantify, brief and critique copy; plus brand new interview insights directly from the industry

Copywriting in context 1 Creativity – A genuinely marketable skill? The right and wrong way to judge copy 3 The impact of new channels –From mobile to social 4 Blood brothers or ugly sisters – How do copy and content fit together? Motivation versus reason – Tapping into your customer’s deepest drives Harnessing the power of emotional copywriting to persuade your prospects Three big ideas you should use for copy before highlighting the "benefits" A powerful process for developing customer empathy through copy 8 Copywriting hacks – Flattery will get you everywhere 9 The ancient Greek secret of emotionally engaging copy 10 Copywriting and connecting on social media 11 Creating calls to action – Top tips to bring home the bacon 3 The pleasure principle –Making your writing more enjoyable and compelling

Balancing pleasure and profit – Five techniques to write fantastic copy 13 How to engage your imagination and free your creativity 14 Tone and technique in copy –Finding your voice (and that of others) The definitive guide to when grammar matters in copywriting 16 Injecting life into your sales pitch – An age-old method

EnhanceDescriptionyourcopywriting skills with psychology-driven techniques to create stand out copy that taps into consumer decision making and sells, using this second edition of the ultimate copywriting survival guide for the 21st century - essential to every marketing or creative professional’s bookshelf.

365 Consumer BehaviourMarketing and PR Table of Contents Introduction 1 Conscious Resource Limits and Mental Shortcuts 2 Reward Anticipation and Approach Motivation 3 Habits and their Triggers Along the Path to Purchase 4 Making it Easier to Change Habitual Behaviors 5 The Role of Policy in Incentivizing Consumption Changes 6 Reprogramming System""BehavioraltheImmune 7 Using Social Norms to Accelerate and Sustain Behavior Change 8 Overcoming Resistance to Behavior Change 9 Conclusion This book « Uses neuroscience to explain the “say-do” gap in sustainable consumer behavior and how to overcome it « Outlines how marketers can design informational campaigns to encourage more sustainable selections « Explains how to leverage psychological framing effects, design choice architecture and pricing strategies to disrupt habits and promote sustainable behavior

Inspiring

Inspiring Green Consumer Choices explains the factors that underlie the discrepancy between consumers’ expressed preferences and their incongruous behavior in the marketplace. Drawing from advances in neuroscience, behavioral economics and experimental psychology, the author reveals how marketplace behavior is not always rational. Instead it is frequently the product of mental shortcuts, triggered by situational cues and colored by implicit emotional responses. In making purchasing decisions, routine consumer behavior is governed less by intention than by mental habits and unconscious response biases. These tendencies are difficult (but not impossible) to change. Inspiring Green Consumer Choices outlines how techniques such as psychological framing, design of choice architectures and pricing strategy can be used to disrupt habits and promote sustainable behavior. The author also addresses the role that legislative policy and changing social norms can play in accelerating and sustaining behavior change. Illustrated with case studies and filled with best practices, Inspiring Green Consumer Choices helps marketers understand how consumers make purchase decisions in order to shift consumption choices towards a more sustainable future.

Leverage Neuroscience to Reshape Marketplace Behavior

WhileDescriptionmanyconsumers profess a desire to help end climate change by engaging in more sustainable behaviors, consumer behavior experts note the “say-do” gap between expressed intention and behavior. How do we explain this? What, if anything, can consumers be encouraged to do to close this gap and purchase sustainable products and services?

ConsumerGreenChoices

Edition: 1 Date: 03/09/2021 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398601000 ISBN Ebook: 9781398601017 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Consumer Behaviour

Author Information Michael E. Smith is an applied cognitive neuroscientist and consumer insights professional with over three decades of research experience in the human brain and behavioral sciences. He is Principal Scientist and Founder of Adaptation Research and is based in La Jolla, California. He previously served as Vice President of Consumer Neuroscience at Nielsen and was President of CorTechs Labs Inc. He was also Program Officer in Cognitive Neuroscience at the US National Science Foundation. He has held numerous research and teaching positions, written for peer-reviewed journals and trade publications, and speaks at industry conferences.

The ChameleonsNew Marketing & Communications Edition: 1 Date: 03/02/2021 Price: £14.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398600041 ISBN Ebook: 9781398600058 Pages: 296 Format (mm): 220x130 Product Category: General Subject: Consumer Behaviour

Consumers are changing but the marketing categories used to identify them have not. Engage with this new generation of consumers who increasingly take for granted that products and advertising will blend their multiple brand identities rather than market to them as a specific subculture. Male or female, work or play, online or offline. These and other market categories are no longer relevant as modern consumers defy traditional boundaries and identify as members of multiple subcultures. The New Chameleons reveals how to engage with this new generation and how to stand out among the competition.

Combining history, data, experience and examples, The New Chameleons is written for every marketer (or reader) who wants to offer products and services that resonate with consumers now and in the future.

Global consumer behavior expert Michael R. Solomon directs marketers to move beyond their traditional categories and communicate with consumers as individuals rather than as a market segment. He explains how traditional marketing is based on the assumption of boundaries between us and them, the individual and the collective, producer and consumer, work and play, humans vs. computers, and editorial vs. commercial. He then shows how those boundaries are blurring: people identify with members of multiple subcultures; individuals seek collective advice before making a purchase; consumers no longer distinguish between purchases online or in-store; consumer-generated content becomes the norm; gender identity is fluid; gamification strategies turn work into play; and identity marketing becomes more popular.

WINNER:Description NYC Big Book Award 2021 - Marketing & PR

366 Consumer BehaviourMarketing and PR Table of Contents Introduction 1 The evolution of marketing categories 2 Consumers who defy demographic labels 3 Consumers who defy traditional purchasing behavior 4 Consumers who defy the bricks vs. clicks debate 5 Consumers who defy buyers vs. sellers 6 Consumers who defy traditional sex roles and gender stereotypes 7 Consumers who defy the separation of brand and identity 8 Consumers who defy boundaries of traditional media 9 A fond farewell to dichotomies we love This book « Identifies the unique and complex relationships modern consumers form with products and services « Discloses how many of the most fundamental assumptions marketers use to understand customers actually don’t make sense anymore « Illustrates the breaking of traditional boundaries using examples such as bitmojis, avatars, video games, Augmented Reality, the sharing economy and unisex clothing brands

Author Information Michael R. Solomon is professor of marketing in the Haub School of Business at Saint Joseph’s University and he resides in Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. He advises global clients in leading industries on marketing strategies to make them more consumercentric. He is the author of several leading textbooks on marketing, consumer behavior, advertising and social media.

367 Consumer BehaviourMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Theoretical insights 1 The irrational consumer: introduction 2 The brain: attention, memory and emotion 3 Neuroaesthetics 4 Behavioural economics 2 The new research tools 5 Guidelines for experiments 6 Eye-tracking 7 Implicit response measures 8 Facial action coding 9 Biometrics 10 Neuro-measures 3 Putting it all together 11 Computational neuroscience 12 Smarter survey design 13 Combining techniques 14 Conclusions This book « Endows practitioners with all the key conceptual and theoretical tools to take control of understanding subconscious responses and become neuro-literate « Covers behavioural economics, eye-tracking, implicit response measures, facial coding and other research tools which can measure and illuminate the irrational drives of consumers « Aligns with new understandings in behavioural science and developments in data-processing technology to meet the demand for new insights into decision making « Online resources: Online guide for students and lecturers with helpful chapter summaries

Decoding the Irrational Consumer presents in plain terms the key theoretical tools required to implement neuromarketing studies and achieve desired research outcomes. Marketers and researchers will learn how to effectively and confidently brief data processors, and confer with neuroscientists and technicians. They will gain keen understanding of recent developments in behavioural science and data-processing technology, as well as sophisticated neuromarketing tools used to understand subconscious responses including behavioural economics, eye-tracking, implicit response measures, and facial coding. The author discusses when to apply these techniques and others, how to combine them effectively and how to correctly interpret resulting data to generate valuable insights that aid in decision making. The book is also suppotrted by an online guide for students and lecturers with helpful chapter summaries.

Author Information Darren Bridger works as a consultant to marketers, advising on using and analysing data that tap into consumers’ non-conscious thinking and motivations. He was one of the original pioneers of the consumer neuroscience industry, co-founding both the world’s first full-service agency, Neuroco, and the first agency dedicated to serving the public relations industry, MindLab International, then joining the world’s largest agency, Neurofocus, as its second employee outside of the US.

Decoding the Irrational Consumer How to Commission, Run and Generate Insights from Neuromarketing Research

Description Decoding the Irrational Consumer is written to help marketing practitioners demystify neuromarketing, a relatively new field of marketing research used to understand consumer response to marketing stimuli.

Edition: 1 Date: 03/08/2015 Price: £32.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473846 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473853 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Consumer Behaviour

Author Information Simon Hall, based in Berkshire, UK, is a marketing innovator with 25 years’ experience in Technology and Services Marketing. He has served as UK Chief Marketing Officer for Dell as well as senior roles at Acer, Microsoft and Toshiba. In 2016 Simon founded NextGen Marketing Solutions. He is a Course Director with the Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM), and lectures at Pearson Business School (University of Kent). He is a B2B council member with The Institute of Direct and Digital Marketing (IDM). He is the author of B2B Digital Marketing Strategy, also published by Kogan Page.

NavigateDescriptiontheB2B marketing sphere with this fully updated guide to better understanding new customer habits, the digital era and shifting away from outdated traditional practices using the latest models.

Innovative B2B Marketing is an essential guide for marketers looking for new approaches, models and solutions for B2B marketing. Written by one of the leading voices in the B2B marketing sphere who works with the Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM) and other major associations, it features real-life examples from diverse sectors, plus topical discussion points and problems from key B2B marketing forums and associations.

Now fully updated, this second edition of Innovative B2B Marketing provides three new chapters on customer attrition, B2B partnership marketing and lead nurturing, as well as further content on influencer marketing and the behaviours of millennial customers. It is accompanied by online resources which consist of case studies, web links to insightful videos and articles, and lecture slides with practical models and templates.

Innovative B2B Marketing New Models, Processes and Theory Edition: 2 Date: 03/08/2022 Price: £24.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398604766 ISBN Ebook: 9781398604773 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: B2B Marketing

368 B2B MarketingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Introduction to Innovative B2B Marketing 1 Developing Your Marketing Strategy 2 The New Marketing Mix 3 B2B Strategy & Planning 2 Improve B2B Customer Centric Marketing 4 B2B Buyers and Their Changing Behaviours 5 Acquisition Marketing 6 Customer Loyalty & Retention – the Stickiness Factor 7 Understanding C-suite Marketing 8 B2B Product & Solutions Marketing 9 B2B Influencer Marketing 3 Transform Through Content and Digital Marketing 10 B2B Digital and Content Marketing Landscape 11 B2B Digital Marketing Channels 12 B2B Digital Marketing Planning and Strategy 13 B2B Content Marketing 14 B2B Social Marketing 15 B2B Brand Building 4 Collaborate with Channel Partners 16 The Channel Landscape 17 Marketing to Channel Partners and Enabling Them 18 How to Market Through Channel Partners 19 Channel Strategy, Planning and Control 5 Optimizing PerformanceMarketingandExecution 20 Sales and AlignmentMarketing 21 Account Based Marketing 22 Lead Generation and Nurturing 23 Modern Events Marketing 24 Marketing ManagementPerformance

This book « Illustrates new approaches, models and solutions to help deal with any B2B marketing challenge « Written by one of the leading voices in the B2B marketing sphere who brings a wealth of insight and information sourced from first-hand experience « Online resources: includes additional case studies, web links to insightful videos and articles and lecture slides with practical models and templates New to this edition: new chapters on customer attrition, B2B partnership marketing and lead nurturing, new research on influencer marketing and the behaviours of millennial customers

369 B2B MarketingMarketing and PR Table of Contents

This book « Refocus on the outcome of marketing, rather than the tactics used in marketing, as the only way to win ongoing customer engagement « Confronts and refutes widely accepted, but misguided, beliefs that are currently dominating the B2B marketing realm, and uses case studies and evidence to prove how they are misleading « Features practical advice and real-world case studies including Apple, Volvo & NHS, to identify the model’s effectiveness in real-world B2B marketing environments

B2B StrategyMarketing Differentiate, Develop and Deliver

« Presents a completely original model - the 3D Marketing Strategy - to shift focus from continually changing technologies and channels to lasting customer engagement and measurable results

Introduction 1 Think Different - Fallacy #1; Marketing Has Forever and Fundamentally Changed 1 Change Happens – The Seismic Shift in Our B2B Marketing Environment 2 All That Glitters – B2B Marketing’s Obsession With the Latest Tools and Tactics 5 Essential Steps to Think Different Do Different - Fallacy #2; The Marketing Plan is The Marketing Strategy 4 Getting Back to Basics –Brand, Strategy, Customers and Measurement An Introduction to 3D Marketing - Differentiate, Develop and Deliver 6 5 Essential Steps to Do Different 3 Be Different - Fallacy #3; The Purpose of Marketing is Lead Generation 7 What is the Purpose of Marketing? 8 7 rules of Engagement For The Social Era 9 Taking a Big Idea to Market –5 Lessons 10 5 Essential Steps to Be Different 4 Conclusion 11 Tactics are For The Moment, Ideas are Forever

Description B2B marketing is functioning in an increasingly fast-paced and complex business landscape, with a wealth of new technologies, tools and channels, and where customers are more in control of the buying process than ever before. With the imperative to become ‘digital’, B2B marketers have become consumed by the marketing activity itself - the tactics - instead of the outcomes marketers want and need to achieve for customers and businesses. B2B Marketing Strategy provides fresh insight into the challenges marketers are facing in such an environment and offers a new framework for developing B2B marketing strategy and plans.

Lasting Customer Engagement Edition: 1 Date: 03/12/2017 Price: £21.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481063 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481070 Pages: 216 Format (mm): 233x157 Product Category: Professional Subject: B2B Marketing

Written by an internationally recognised and award winning senior marketing strategist, B2B Marketing Strategy is a thought-provoking and comprehensive exploration of the state of B2B marketing. Expertly examined, this book will challenge the perspective of B2B marketers by confronting and refuting the many fallacies that currently dominate the industry. Filled with real-world case studies and practical, actionable insights, B2B Marketing Strategy takes the reader through three phases of thinking, doing and being different in order to make B2B marketing memorable in the hearts and minds of customers, creating lasting customer engagement.

Author Information Heidi Taylor is a consultant, speaker and prolific blogger with a significant global following. Her expertise is in strategy and creating powerful multi-channel, multiformat marketing campaigns. In 2015 Heidi Taylor was named a top 25 UK B2B Marketing Influencer by Onalytica. She has won two awards at the Chartered Institute of Marketing’s prestigious annual Marketing Excellence Awards, including the coveted overall Marketer of the Year.

B2B

MarketingDigitalStrategy

370 B2B MarketingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 The new evolving business landscape 1 DEVELOPING THE B2B DIGITAL STRATEGY 2 B2B digital marketing strategy 3 B2B customer journeys and the customer experience 4 B2B personalization marketing and buyer personas 5 B2B customer insights and data management 2 THE EARLY BUYER JOURNEY STAGE 6 Generating awareness 7 B2B SEO and search strategies 8 B2B websites and website strategies 3 Digital for lead generation and lead nurturing 9 B2B digital marketing for lead generation 10 B2B digital and lead nurturing 4 Digital integrationmanagementcampaignand 11 B2B content marketing 12 B2B digital marketing campaign planning 13 Digital integration marketing in B2B 14 Digital marketing and sales 15 Measuring digital marketing 5 Digital for retaining customers 16 Types of digital retention marketing 17 Digital retention marketing channels 6 B2B social media and digital marketing platforms 18 B2B social media marketing strategy 19 B2B digital technologiesmarketingandplatforms 20 Index

This book « Introduces a new framework that will help sales people dramatically improve their performance by providing a better customer experience « Presents a range of case studies from diverse global organizations including Starbucks and Hewlett Packard « Provides models, diagrams and self-assessment questionnaires which will help sellers develop more customer-focused mindsets Description For years, sales people have struggled with cliched views of how they sell, while at the same time customers have become more sophisticated and discerning, stopping off at different or unconventional places in the sales funnel. The result is that the technique of sales people controlling the sales conversation and learning how to influence the customer no longer works. Selling Transformed introduces the new world of selling, and addresses the reasons why sales people are so poorly perceived.

Dr Philip Squire is CEO of Consalia, a sales consulting group. Based in Surrey, UK, he has for over 20 years provided sales consulting education services and training to brands including Apple, AT&T, Ford, Hertz, HP, Pirelli, Royal Caribbean, SAP and Zurich Financial Services. He is a subject matter expert for the UK Trail Blazer undergraduate apprenticeship sales degrees and is co-founder of the International Journal of Sales Transformation

Introduction 1 How history informs current sales practice Sales psychology and the pressure of time Changing sources of competitive advantage require a new selling paradigm A new paradigm of selling based on values - the research journey Values creating a positive or negative selling experience Values that are an antecedent to trust Principle one - the value of authenticity Principle two - the value of client-centricity Principle three - the value of proactive creativity Principle four - the value of tactful audacity Royal Caribbean International case study: turning a potential disaster into an opportunity 12 The role of leadership in transforming sales Looking to the future

Author Information

371 Sales & Key Account ManagementMarketing and PR Table of Contents

Selling Transformed provides fresh, tangible ideas on how to develop better sales practices. Focusing as much on the customers as on the sellers, it explains key theories of selling effectively and introduces four proven strategies that are based on the values customers look for in sales people: authenticity, client-centricity, proactive creativity and being tactfully audacious. Explaining what customers look for in sales people, and advising on how to develop and deliver these values, this is a new type of sales manual guaranteed to improve sales performance.

Selling Transformed

Develop the Sales Values which Deliver Competitive Advantage Edition: 1 Date: 03/12/2020 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789665352 ISBN Ebook: 9781789665369 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 235x159 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Sales & Key ManagementAccount

« Offers an integrative Key Account Management framework that senior executives can use to design or further develop strategic customer management programmes

ManagementKeyImplementingAccount

Rigorously researched, well-grounded and practical, this book is - quite simply - the definitive, go-to resource for implementing key account management programmes.

This book « Features case studies from diverse sectors including professional services (Ernst & Young), financial services (FM), manufacturing (Rolls-Royce), services (EMCOR, FM Global), pharmaceuticals (Pfizer), and engineering (AMEY)

Author Information Javier Marcos has designed and delivered programmes globally for clients such as Barclays, Cap Gemini, GKN Aerospace, RollsRoyce and Unilever.

« Combines ground-breaking research with experience from recognized thought leaders of Cranfield School of Management

Description Implementing Key Account Management is a highly practical handbook that guides readers through the realities of rolling out a functional key account management programme. The book offers an integrated framework for key account management (KAM) that businesses can use to design or further develop strategic customer management programmes, enabling them to overcome the obstacles that organizations often face when rolling out their strategies.

Rodrigo Guesalaga is Senior Lecturer at Cranfield School of Management, Associate Professor at Pontificia Universidad Católica de Chile, and Visiting Professor at Vlerick Business School.

Designing Customer-Centric Processes for Mutual Growth Edition: 1 Date: 03/08/2018 Price: £32.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482756 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482763 Pages: 352 Format (mm): 245x170 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Sales & Key ManagementAccount

Sue Holt is Director of the Cranfield School of Management’s flagship Open Programme on KAM.

372 Sales & Key Account ManagementMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Introduction to implementing key account management 1 Re-engaging strategic customers 2 Adopting key account management 3 Building understandingcustomerand value planning 4 Developing relationshipscustomer 2 Developing winning offerings 5 Creating compelling customer value propositions 6 Co-creating value with key customers 3 Designing approachescustomer-centricandprocesses 7 The role of the key account manager and the KAM team 8 Measuring KAM performance 9 Motivating, incentivizing and rewarding for KAM 10 KAM and procurement: the buyer’s perspective and valuebased negotiation 11 International key account management 4 Assessing your KAM programme: a framework 12 The KAM Framework 13 Epilogue: Final word on implementing KAM from a global practitioner at Unilever Food Solutions

Bringing together the experiences of leading experts within this field, Implementing Key Account Management draws on two decades of research and best practice from Cranfield University School of Management, one of the foremost centres for researcher and thought leadership in KAM. Between them, the authors have designed and delivered programmes globally for clients such as Rolls-Royce, Unilever, Vodafone, The Economist and many more.

Mark Davies acts as Visiting Fellow for Cranfield School of Management and facilitates the Cranfield KAM Best Practice Research Club.

373 Sales & Key Account ManagementMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Introducing key account management 2 The role of key accounts in achieving business growth 3 Selecting the right key accounts 4 Understanding buying decisions 5 Key account plans 6 Understanding account-based marketing 7 People and skills for key account management 8 Going global with key accounts 9 The risks of key account management 10 The future of key account management 11 The McDonald and Rogers 10 guidelines for profitable key account management 12 A quiz for key account managers 13 Important research articles on key account management This book « Understand the balance between achieving growth through the development of key accounts and serving key accounts, without letting costs become prohibitive « Implement best practice in key account management in a confident and successful manner through a highly practical, step-by-step approach « Benefit from rich learning features, including mini-cases, narratives, examples, diagrams, and visually represented models « Online resources: include a bonus chapter, case studies, self-test questions, figures and tables, a template for creating your own KAM plan and suggested further reading «

Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management explores the challenges of winning, retaining and developing key accounts. Key accounts are customers who help their suppliers grow, and consequently, they wield significant power. Although they are the key to market share and revenue growth, the costs of serving key accounts can erode profitability unless they are thoroughly understood and managed.

Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management takes a step-by-step approach to presenting best practice in key account management. Whether your business is starting up or well-established, there is always more to discover about improving the way value is created between you and your most important customers. Malcolm McDonald and Beth Rogers have spent over twenty years researching, teaching and consulting on key account management, and have condensed their knowledge into this book, focusing on making it clear, concise and easy to use.

Edition: 1 Date: 03/08/2017 Price: £21.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480776 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480790 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Sales & Key ManagementAccount

Author Information Professor Malcolm McDonald was formerly a Professor of Marketing and Deputy Director at Cranfield University School of Management and is now an Emeritus Professor. Based in the UK, he is also an Honorary Professor at Warwick Business School and the author of Malcolm MacDonald on Marketing Planning, also published by Kogan Page. Dr Beth Rogers was formerly a Business Development Manager at Portsmouth Business School and chaired project board developing National Occupational Standards for UK professional sales. Based in the UK, she is now the Director of two organisations and writes articles for business publications.

Written by authors with over 20 years experience researching, teaching and consulting on key account management Description

Malcolm McDonald on Key ManagementAccount

An organization’s key accounts are its lifeblood. Key account management focuses on the long-term investment of resources in customers that can offer an exceptional return on resources. But which are the key accounts? Are they the ones growing the fastest? The ones that are most financially secure? Or are they the ones that shout the loudest? Key Account Management puts forward a straightforward and effective planning methodology. This fully updated 6th edition of Key Account Management takes a long-term, team-selling strategic view of the whole process, from defining the customer, to managing the relationship and achieving key supplier status. With coverage of latest best practice including IT’s role in account management, plus new case studies, online supporting resources and a new section comparing how different industries/ markets approach key account management, it stands alone as the premier book on managing key customers.

Key ManagementAccount Tools and Techniques for Achieving Profitable Key Supplier Status Edition: 6 Date: 03/02/2015 Price: £36.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749469405 ISBN Ebook: 9780749469412 Pages: 416 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Sales & Key ManagementAccount

Online resources include helpful templates, guides for students and lecturers, and self tests to ensure that best practice is being followed.

374 Sales & Key Account ManagementMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Definitions and purpose 1 The key account approach 2 Why Key Management?Account 3 The spectrum of KAM ambition 4 What is a key account? 5 What is Key Management?Account 2 Analysis: opportunity and value 6 Knowing the market, knowing your value 7 Knowing the people, knowing your value 3 Relationship management 8 From ‘bow-ties’ to ‘diamonds’ 9 Decision mapping and contact strategies 10 The good, the bad, the sad and the ugly 4 Achieving key supplier status 11 The purchasing revolution 12 Supply chain management: seeking value 13 Purchasing centralizationrationalizationorganization:and 14 Supplier managingpositioning:suppliers 5 Achieving strategic supplier status 15 Being of strategic value 16 How do they plan to grow? 17 How do they aim to win? 18 What drives them? 19 A shared future? 6 The value proposition 20 The customer’s total business experience 21 The customer’s activity cycle 22 Measuring the value –securing the reward 23 Making the proposal 7 Planning and joint planning 24 The key account plan 25 Joint planning 8 Targeting 26 Customer classification 27 Customer distinction 28 Global Account Management 9 Making it happen 29 Sins and requirements 30 Leadership and organization 31 Skills, attitudes and behaviours 32 The role of information technology 33 Measuring profitabilitycustomer 34 The implementation plan 35 Training and further help This book « Focuses on practical implementation rather than the theory of account management « Helps boost account management effectiveness with practical tools including new and updated online resources « Brings the elements of key account management together to help practitioners form and implement their own strategy « Online resources: Helpful templates, guides for students and lecturers, and self tests Description

Author Information Peter Cheverton is Director of Insight Marketing & People, now established as the leading international training and consultancy firm in KAM implementation, working in more than thirty countries including Australia, Austria, Belgium, Brazil, Canada, China, Denmark, France, Germany, Holland, Hong Kong, India, Italy, Korea, Malaysia, Mexico, Poland, Singapore, South Africa, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, the United Kingdom and the United States, with a client list that includes some of the world’s major blue chip companies. He is also the author of Understanding the Professional Buyer and Global Account Management (both published by Kogan Page).

BasedGuidePractitioner’stoAccount-Marketing

Edition: 2 Date: 03/06/2021 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398600874 ISBN Ebook: 9781398600898 Pages: 312 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Professional Subject: Sales & Key ManagementAccount

AsDescriptionsomeoftoday’s major and complex companies are worth more than the GDPs of some countries, traditional marketing approaches, such as glossy corporate campaigns, will have limited returns.

This updated second edition contains further discussion on how ABM initiatives can go from a pilot to being embedded in a business, new material on quantified value propositions and updated wider research. Meticulously researched and highly practical, A Practitioner’s Guide to Account-Based Marketing will help all marketers to deliver successful B2B marketing.

Dave Munn, based in Massachusetts, US, is a recognized thought leader in B2B services and solutions marketing. As President and CEO of ITSMA, he has led the way in defining and inspiring excellence within the ITSMA global community. Dave helped pioneer the discipline of Account-Based Marketing (ABM) in the early 2000s and is co-author of the first and second edition of, A Practitioner’s Guide to Account-Based Marketing

375 Sales & Key Account ManagementMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Setting up an account-based marketing programme 2 The essentials of accountbased marketing 3 Building the right foundations for account-based marketing 4 Investing in the right tools and technologies 5 Deciding which accounts to focus on 6 The ABM adoption model 7 Account-based marketing step by step 8 Knowing what is driving the account 9 Playing to the client’s needs 10 Mapping and profiling stakeholders 11 Developing targeted value propositions 12 Planning integrated sales and marketing campaigns 13 Executing campaignsintegrated 14 Evaluating results and updating plans 15 Developing your career as an account-based marketer 16 The competencies you need to do account-based marketing 17 Managing your ABM career 18 Index This book « Provides step-by-step guidance on harnessing account-based marketing techniques and setting up ABM programmes to deliver successful B2B marketing « Includes guidance on developing the competencies needed for account-based marketing and managing your ABM career « Contains case studies from organizations including Microsoft, Accenture, O2 and Fujitsu and insights from experienced ABM professionals « New to this edition: updates to the ABM adoption model, further material on quantified value propositions, new and updated case studies and examples and updated wider research

A Practitioner’s Guide to Account-Based Marketing outlines a clear, step-by-step process for readers to harness ABM tools and techniques and set up ABM programmes. Featuring insights from practising professionals and case studies from organizations including Fujitsu, Infosys, Microsoft, O2 and ServiceNow, it also contains guidance on developing the competencies needed for account-based marketing and managing your ABM career.

Account-based marketing, also known as client-centric marketing, treats important individual accounts as markets in their own right, to help strengthen relationships, build reputation, and increase revenues in important accounts.

Author Information Bev Burgess, based in Kent, UK, is a Senior Advisory to ITSMA’s global ABM practice and Founder and Managing Principal at Inflexion Group. Since she codified ABM in 2003, she has personally helped over 40 of the world’s most influential firms accelerate account growth using ABM techniques through her consulting, training and thought leadership.

Connect with Customers, Build Relationships and Drive Sales

78% of social sellers outsell peers who don’t use social media. And yet many B2B sales professionals still aren’t confident in using social media in a strategic way, or to measure its success. B2B Social Selling provides a clear framework for identifying the right social channels, connecting with potential and existing customers and measuring success against objectives and KPIs.

376 Sales & Key Account ManagementMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Introduction to social selling 2 The challenges of modern B2B sales 3 The social selling strategy framework 4 Social selling channels 5 Leveraging your network on social media 6 Content marketing for social selling 7 Integrated social selling 8 Using influencer marketing 9 Measurement and KPIs 10 Creating a social selling culture

This book « Provides a clear strategic framework for leveraging social media effectively to create strong B2B leads and sales « Shows how to identify the right social channels, connect with customers, create engaging content and work with B2B influencers « Demonstrates how to integrate social selling with other sales and marketing channels and measure success against objectives and KPIs « Features original research, case studies and interviews with industry experts to explore best practice « Online resources: interactive tools and templates to be used to create and execute your own social selling strategy OptimizeDescriptionyourB2B selling by using social media to identify leads, build mutually valuable relationships and convert them into sales for long-term advantage.

Edition: 1 Date: 03/11/2022 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398604490 ISBN Ebook: 9781398604605 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Sales & Key ManagementAccount

Social

Julie Atherton is an award-winning social media consultant and digital strategist with over 30 years’ experience gained working with global brands including Nissan, ITV, Deloitte Digital and ASOS. Based near Bristol, UK, she trains marketing professionals and business leaders in social selling and social media strategy and is a Qualifications Advisory Board member for the Institute of Data and Marketing (IDM). A regular speaker and awards judge, she has been interviewed for publications including Forbes and The Sunday Times. She is the author of Social Media Strategy, also published by Kogan Page.

Author Information

Featuring original research, case studies and interviews with industry professionals, it also shows how to create content to attract attention and gain trust, work with B2B influencers and create a social selling culture. Also exploring how to integrate social selling with other sales and marketing channels, it is supported by online interactive tools and templates to be used to create and execute your own social selling strategy. Written by a recognized social media expert, B2B Social Selling is an indispensable guide for B2B sales, marketing and social media professionals.

B2B Selling Strategy

377 Sales & Key Account ManagementMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1 How to get the best out of this book 2 The business of getting products and services to market 3 Major trends developmentsandinmarket access 2 Distributors, wholesalers and intermediaries 4 The role of the distributor for sales and marketing channels 5 How the distributor business model works 6 Managing distributors –margins and profitability 7 Managing distributors –working capital 8 Managing distributors –productivity 9 Managing distributors –sustainability 10 Managing distributors –managing growth 11 Understanding the distribution landscape 12 How to get the best from distribution strategy 3 Managing final-tier sales and marketing channels 13 The roles of the final-tier channel players 14 How the business model works for final-tier channel players 15 Managing final-tier channel players – sales and utilization 16 Managing final-tier channel players – gross margin and recoverability 17 Managing final-tier channel players – working capital management 18 Managing final-tier channel players – value creation and growth 19 How to get the best from finaltier channel players 4 Managing distribution in individual industry sectors 20 Introduction to managing distribution in individual industry sectors 21 Insights from managing capital goods distribution 22 Insights from managing consumer goods distribution and retailers 23 Insights from managing services distribution 24 Insights from managing hotels, restaurants, catering and travel distribution 25 Insights from managing intellectual property distribution 26 Insights from managing franchised distribution Appendix: Key ratios Appendix: Glossary of technical terms

Unprecedented upheavals in routes-to-market are challenging businesses of all types. Products are becoming services, online and offline channels are integrating, and new distribution channels are dictating terms to producers. Placing market access at the heart of business and marketing strategy, this revised edition of Sales and Marketing Channels (originally Distribution Channels) addresses emerging business models and buying behaviours with practical steps, offering an efficient structure to extract tangible commercial value from partner relationships.

Author Information Julian Dent is Chairman of VIA International, a specialist routes-to-market consultancy. He has more than 35 years of global experience in distribution, specializing in channel strategy and implementation at global, corporate and regional levels. His clients include Barclays, Esso, Hewlett-Packard, Hyatt, Microsoft, Philips, Subway and Xerox.

Michael White is EMEA General Manager of Quadmark, a global channels and sales enablement consultancy. He has been a worldwide routes-to-market specialist for 30 years across multiple industries, leading commercial consumer channel strategy from formulation through to execution. His clients include Apple, Caterpillar, Cisco, Electrolux, PayPal and Procter & Gamble.

Often referred to as the “Place” P in the marketing mix, this book and its host of downloadable resources integrate innovative case studies like AirBNB, the largest seller of rooms without ownership of any; Transferwise, the peer-to-peer Forex; plus, the rise of online retailers like Amazon and ASOS versus the decline of traditional stores like Macy’s or BHS.

Sales and Marketing Channels

How to Build and Manage

Distribution Strategy Edition: 3 Date: 03/04/2018 Price: £31.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482145 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482152 Pages: 384 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Sales & Key ManagementAccount

This book « Provides a complete economic framework for analyzing any channel partner (distributor, reseller or retailer) and a new series of multi-sector insights « Enables a defined go-to-market strategy and forecasting for emerging channels and technology « Supports the allocation of scarce resources for the highest returns, and channel negotiation from positions of market strength or weakness

Other updates include: -The impact of cloud technology -Advancing consumer channels -Monetizing the distribution of intellectual property -Plus the evolving ‘gig economy’, led by Uber and Deliveroo

« New to this edition: multi-sector focus, the emergence of the cloud, new consumer channels, the switch from products to services, the ‘gig economy’ and monetizing intellectual property « Online resources: Bonus chapters on how to engage with retailers, franchised systems, and managing the people-based business model Analyze,Descriptionplanand manage profitable channels to market with this economic framework, ensuring maximum leverage of channel partners at every stage of the go-to-market process, with this fully revised third edition of the global bestseller, Distribution Channels - an essential toolkit for strategizing new and existing routes to market.

« Features a foreword by Mark Tungate: Editorial Director of the Epica awards, and author of multiple books on branding published by Kogan Page Description In today’s hyper-connected world, any brand with a website or digital presence is ‘global’ by its very definition; yet in practice it takes an enormous amount of strategic planning and adaptability to successfully manage an international brand. Global Brand Management explores the increasingly universal scope of brand management. In an era when many brand managers will find themselves working for large multinationals operating across varied territories, categories and consumer groups, developing an understanding of both the opportunities and risks of multinational brands is truly Meticulouslyessential.

Author Information Laurence Minsky is Associate Professor, School of Media Arts, Columbia College Chicago, and author of many leading books on advertising, branding, and marketing. He is also an award-winning marketing strategist, creative director, and copywriter focused on creating innovative and effective branding and cross-discipline marketing solutions. His consulting practice serves a broad range of B2C and B2B clients from the emerging to global leaders.

researched, Global Brand Management shows readers how to manage an existing global brand, while simultaneously equipping them with the skills to build one from scratch. The text uses fascinating case studies including Oreo, Harley Davidson and Xiaomi to demonstrate the challenges of maintaining a stable brand identity when operating across territories with different languages, cultural values and logistics. With helpful pedagogy throughout and built-in features to enhance classroom learning, Global Brand Management is the perfect springboard for students to appreciate, enjoy and embrace the nuances and complexities of brand management on an international scale.

378 BrandingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Theoretical and strategic foundations 1 A definition of brands and branding 2 The strategic role branding plays 3 Internal branding vs. external branding 4 MarTech, Programmatic, and more innovationstechnological 2 Practical and tactical applications 5 Brand developmentfoundational 6 Brand actualization 7 Branding and the marketing communication ecosystem 8 Brand management 3 Branding issues and opportunities 9 Branding in a global economy 10 Brand architecture 11 Speciality application areas 12 Digital asset management (of branding elements) This book « Prepares students to manage an existing global brand, as well as providing the basic considerations and strategies for developing and building a new one « Features perspectives from world class practitioners to demonstrate the crucial importance of global brands effectively adapting to different languages, cultural values and commerce laws « Demonstrates the essential role that flex and elasticity play in enabling a brand to maintain a distinct and unified identity across global borders « Includes detailed case studies from Oreo, McDonalds, Harley Davidson, Tropicana and Xiaomi, and guest contributions from a range of international entrepreneurs, strategists and marketers « Online Resources: Chapter PowerPoints, chapter summaries, test banks, sample syllabus

Ilan Geva is Adjunct Professor at the University of Chicago and DePaul University, and was formerly Design Head and Creative Director at Ogilvy & Mather, Leo Burnett, Frankel & Co., and several internationally renowned agencies. He currently runs Ilan Geva & Friends, a leading branding consultancy based in Chicago.

Global ManagementBrand A Guide to Developing, Building & Managing an International Brand Edition: 1 Date: 03/11/2019 Price: £39.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749483609 ISBN Ebook: 9780749483616 Pages: 328 Format (mm): 240x167 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Branding

With dedicated sections for specific types of brands (luxury, corporate and retail), international examples and case studies from companies such as Audi, Nivea, Toyota and Absolut Vodka; plus models and frameworks such as the Brand Identity Prism; The New Strategic Brand Management remains at the forefront of strategic brand thinking.

Using an array of international case studies, this book covers all the leading issues faced by brand strategists today, with both gravitas and intelligent insight. It reveals new thinking on topics such as putting culture and content into brands, the impact of private labels and the comeback of local brands.

This book « Reveals and explains the latest branding techniques used by companies worldwide Includes expert advice on best practice for adding culture and content into brands Enables students and practitioners to stay up to date with targeting, adding recent research and market knowledge to the discipline « Contains a section on brand valuation which illuminates the complex strategies behind how brands are ranked in the media

AdoptedDescriptioninternationally by business schools and MBA programmes, this book is the ultimate resource for senior strategists, positioning professionals and postgraduate students to understand and overcome the challenges of brand management and strategy today, written by the leading international expert of branding, Jean-Noël Kapferer.

This updated fifth edition builds on the book’s already impressive reputation, including new content that will help students and practitioners stay up to date with targeting, with relevant research and market knowledge to support the discipline.

379 BrandingMarketing and PR Table of Contents Introduction - Building the Brand when the Clients Are Empowered 1 Why is Branding So Strategic? 1 Brand Equity in Question 2 Strategic Implications of Branding 3 Brand and Business Models 4 Brand Diversity - How Specific Are Different Sectors? 5 Managing Retail Brands 2 The Challenges of Modern Markets 6 The New Brand Management 7 Brand Identity and Positioning 3 Creating and Sustaining Brand Equity 8 Launching the Brand 9 Growing the Brand 10 Sustaining a Brand Long Term 11 Brand and Products - Identity and Change 12 Growth Through Brand Extensions 13 Brand Architecture 14 Multi-Brand Portfolios 15 Handling Name Changes and Brand Transfers 16 Brand Turnaround and Rejuvenation 17 Managing Global Brands 4 Brand Valuation 18 Financial Valuation and Accounting for Brands

The New Strategic Brand Management is simply the reference source for branding professionals and postgraduate students. Over the years it has not only established a reputation as one of the leading works on brand strategy, but also has become synonymous with the topic itself.

Author Information Jean-Noël Kapferer is one of the world’s foremost thought leaders on luxury brands. An active researcher, he is an HEC Paris graduate and holds a PhD from Northwestern University’s Kellogg Business School.

Kapferer is author of Kapferer on Luxury and co-author of The Luxury Strategy (both published by Kogan Page). He is a sought after speaker, leading seminars on luxury worldwide at institutions including HEC Paris, Tsing Hua University Beijing, Seoul Luxury Business Institute and LBI Shanghai. He is also advisor to the president of Inseec Business School (Paris).

The New Strategic Brand Management Marketing and PR Edition: 5 Date: 03/01/2012 Price: £42.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749465155 ISBN Ebook: 9780749465162 Pages: 512 Format (mm): 245x188 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Branding

International Brand Strategy was written for those who are planning to enter a new market and for those who are already there but wish to improve their brand’s performance. It helps the reader recognize some of the most common pitfalls and how to avoid them, provides practical tips to understand the dynamics of price, product and value from a foreign buyer’s perspective, and defines a conceptual framework to assess and improve brand equity at home and abroad.

A Guide to Achieving Global Brand Edition:Growth 1 Date: 03/01/2021

A different type of management 21

This book « Provides the necessary tools to create more informed marketing strategies, enabling brands to thrive in foreign markets « Delivers a proven, repeatable methodology that can be adapted to any product, industry or region « Helps organizations engage more effectively with buyers in the foreign market, and seize market opportunities promptly « Contains clear, practical tips to recognize and avoid the most common pitfalls when entering new markets « Helps readers understand the dynamic of product, price and value from a foreign market’s perspective Description In theory, the Internet allows all brands to market internationally. But in practice, most companies struggle to compete outside their home market. Written from a marketing practitioner’s perspective, International Brand Strategy evens the playing field with clear, actionable techniques to guide any organization going through the process. This book helps companies build sales in foreign markets, but just as important it helps them thrive by maintaining price integrity and building brand equity at the same time. With the guidance provided in International Brand Strategy companies hit the ground running in foreign markets. This provides a competitive advantage from day one, empowers companies to avoid costly mistakes, and saves months of trial and error. The book lays out a unique methodology for managing brands abroad that can be implemented for any product in any market. These methods have proven their value for companies large and small across six continents. The book guides readers with pragmatic models and a wealth of examples from global companies such as Target Canada, Unilever and Apple.

Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789666298 ISBN Ebook: 9781789666304 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 233x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Branding

Author Information Sean Duffy is founder and CEO of Duffy Agency, based in Boston MA, USA and Malmö, Sweden. He is Adjunct Professor in International Strategic Marketing at Lund University School of Economics & Management, Sweden and contributes to its Masters Programme in Entrepreneurship. He has served two terms as European Governor of TAAN Worldwide, and was previously creative director with MullenLowe Group / IPG, Sweden.

Evaluating risk 4

Conclusion

The renewed importance of vision and mission 22 Distinguish between marketing and sales

Defining success 24

380 BrandingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1

Preparation 1 Why brands fail abroad The business case for entering a foreign market Choosing the right market The difference between domestic and international brand building Defining an approach to international markets Preparing the brand for travel The new market Understanding the mechanics of building brand equity abroad Setting realistic expectations Dealing with language Assembling the right team Segmenting the market and targeting Understanding local buyers in foreign markets Understanding local competitors from the buyer’s POV Seeing your product from the local buyer’s POV 15 Seeing your product’s price from the local buyer’s POV 16 Seeing your brand’s value from the local buyer’s POV 17 Creating an international web presence 18 Responding to the market 3

Get moving 19 Engaging company leadership 20

International Brand Strategy

Digital Branding is ideal for marketers and brand strategists who want to enhance their brand’s online presence. It provides step-by-step, practical guidance on how to build a brand online and quantify it through tangible results.

Author Information Daniel Rowles, based in Jersey, has more than 25 years of digital marketing experience on both client and agency sides. He is a CIM fellow and course director and the lead judge for the CIM Marketing Excellence Awards. Rowles also lectures at Imperial College London and Cranfield School of Management and co-hosts the Digital Marketing Podcast, a global top-10 business podcast on iTunes. His digital marketing company, TargetInternet. com, supports clients such as the BBC, Vodafone, Sony, Oracle and Tesco. He is also the author of Building Digital Culture, Mobile Marketing and Podcasting Marketing Strategy, also published by Kogan Page.

The book delivers a robust framework for planning, brand identity, channel selection and measuring the effectiveness of campaigns, and includes lessons from the BBC, Imperial College London and Hootsuite. Now fully updated, this third edition features new content on brand authenticity, ethics and meaning, as well as updates on social media regulations and social media platforms such as TikTok.

« Illustrates how popular and established brands use digital branding to create lasting and memorable digital marketing campaigns

Digital Branding A Complete Step-by-Step Guide to Strategy, Tactics, Tools and Edition:Measurement 3 Date: 03/01/2022 Price: £22.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398603189 ISBN Ebook: 9781398603196 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Branding

EveryDescriptiondecisionand action you make contributes to your brand, so it makes sense that everything you do digitally also contributes to your digital brand. Use this bestselling guide to strengthen your brand’s online presence and explore core marketing avenues.

381 BrandingMarketing and PR Table of Contents Introduction 1 Digital branding in perspective 1 What digital branding really means 2 Focusing on value 3 Considering the user journey 4 Objectives and authenticity 2 The digital toolkit 5 Social media 6 Search 7 Mobile 8 Online advertising 9 Email marketing 10 CRM and automationmarketing 11 From integration to transmedia campaigns 3 Digital brand strategy and measurement 12 Measuring digital branding 13 Primaries and indicators 14 The role of analytics 15 Bridging the gaps 16 The importance of asking questions 17 Conclusion This book « Provides practical tools to deliver digital branding success, such as a checklist covering the entire process, and measurement devices for multiple channels and purposes

Written by a respected Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM) fellow, course leader and industry thought leader, it examines core marketing areas such as content marketing, social media, search engine optimization and web analytics.

« New to this edition: a closer study of brand authenticity and ethics along with fresh case studies, updates on social media regulations and overviews of new social media platforms such as TikTok

Written by a respected CIM fellow, course leader and industry thought leader, who has over 20 years of digital marketing experience on both client and agency sides

Brand Elevation explains the main drivers behind brands becoming peerless and priceless and how to harness these principles to develop a winning brand strategy. Written for marketers and brand managers of all levels of experience, and for both those working in start-ups and established players, it proposes a six-step, easy-to-follow program to elevate your brand.

This book « Explains how any marketer, in any category, can elevate their brand and become a modern prestige brand « Provides actionable checklists and advice on how to apply the power of prestige to add meaning to a brand, making it peerless, priceless and profitable « Includes answers to key questions such as how to operate a luxury brand on social media « Packed with case studies from leading global brands including including Airbnb, Acqua di Parma, Burt’s Bees, Lakrids, Starbucks, TerraCycle, and YouTube

382 BrandingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 RECAP – THE PRINCIPLES OF UEBER-BRANDINGTM 1 Principle 1MissionaincomparableMission–Havingdistinct,brand-guiding 2 Principle 2 - Longing vs belonging – Balancing exclusivity and inclusion 3 Principle 3 - Un-selling –Mastering the art of seduction 4 Principle 4 - From Myth to meaning – Giving the brand soul 5 Principle 5 - Behold the product! Making your product manifest the Myth 6 Principle 6 - Living the dream – Letting the brand radiate from the inside out 7 Principle 7 - Growth without end – Balancing scaling and brand building 2

HOW TO – SIX STEPS TO ELEVATE YOUR BRAND 8 Step 1 - Set Your Mission 9 Step 2 - Write Your Myth 10 Step 3 - Realize Your Dream 11 Step 4 - Live Your Dream 12 Step 5 - Find Your UeberTarget 13 Step 6 - Ignite All Targets 14 Summing up – The UeberBranding Model 3 LESSONS – UEBERBRANDING IN ACTION 15 Case 1 - TerraCycle – From Mission to Myth to movement, or – How to ‘eliminate the idea of waste’ 16 Case 2 - Acqua di Parma – The power of a mythical core, or – How to build your business and your equity simultaneously 17 Case 3 - Burt’s Bees – Growing an Ueber-Brand ground up, or – How purpose and profit can live in harmony 18 Case 4 - Starbucks – The renaissance plan, or – How to leap ahead by going back to quality and service 19 Case 5 - Airbnb – The importance of culture, or –How Airbnb found, launched and lives its purpose 20 Case 6 - Lakrids – Growth without end, or – How to scale a dream 21 Case 7 - YouTube – Platform or brand of the future, or – How to be one when you are many EPILOGUE: Crises – Times of Ueber-Opportunities 22 References and further reading 23 Index

Brand Elevation explores challenges such as creating a distinct and brand-guiding mission, mediating between exclusivity and inclusion and mastering the art of seduction. Featuring case studies and expert accounts from organizations including Airbnb, Acqua di Parma, Burt’s Bees, Lakrids, Starbucks, TerraCycle, and YouTube, Wolfgang Schaefer and JP Kuehlwein skilfully explain how any brandregardless of sector and industry - can become a modern prestige brand.

JP Kuehlwein is the Founder of marketing consultancy Ueber-Brands. He’s also Adjunct Professor of Marketing at NYU Stern and Columbia Business School and leader of the Marketing Institute at The Conference Board think tank. Previously, he was Executive Vice President at Frederic Fekkai & Co as well as Brand Director and Director of Corporate Strategy at Procter & Gamble.

Brand Elevation Lessons in Ueber-Branding Lessons in Edition:Ueber-Branding1 Date: 03/01/2021 Price: £90.00 ISBN Ebook: 9781789664676 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 240x168 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Branding

HowDescriptioncanabrand become one of those peerless ‘Ueber-Brands’ we all admire and are willing to pay a premium for? Is there a proven process? Where should we start?

WINNER:DescriptionBerry-AMA Book Award 2012 (1st edition)

Author Information Joeri Van den Bergh is the co-founder of InSites Consulting, a global new generation research agency with offices in Belgium, the UK, France, Switzerland and the Netherlands. His clients include global customers such as Lego, Nokia, Sony, MTV Networks, Danone, Unilever and Coca-Cola.

383 BrandingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Defining Generation Y 2 Developing a Brand Model for the New Consumer 3 What Cool Means to Brands 4 The Real Thing: Brand Authenticity 5 We All Want Unique Brands 6 Self-Identification with the Brand 7 Happiness: Gen Y’s Adoration for Branded Emotions 8 Who’s Next? Generation Z

How Cool Brands Stay Hot analyses Generations Y and Z, the most marketing savvy and advertisingcritical generations yet. It reveals how millennials think, feel and behave, offering proven strategies to market to these groups more effectively and remain a relevant, appealing brand. Featuring interviews with global marketing executives of successful brands such as the BBC, Converse, Coca-Cola, eBay and MasterCard along with case studies from companies including H&M, MTV and Diesel, it guides readers in developing the right strategies to leave a lasting business impact.

This fully revised 3rd edition of How Cool Brands Stay Hot goes beyond the discussion of Generation Y, expanding its reach with an entirely new chapter on Generation Z and a detailed analysis of the impact that issues such as recession, social media and mobile marketing have had on these consumers. Based on new figures, case studies and interviews, it provides a fresh take on what remain critical issues for anyone hoping to market to those who come after Generation X.

How Cool Brands Stay Hot Branding to Generations Y and Z

Edition: 3 Date: 03/04/2016 Price: £21.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749477172 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477219 Pages: 312 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Branding

WINNER: Expert Marketing Magazine’s Marketing Book of the Year Award 2011 (1st edition)

This book « Includes an entirely new chapter on Generation Z based on detailed new research « Reveals what drives Generations Y and Z, and how these groups have been impacted by recent events like the recession along with the rise of social media and mobile marketing Features interviews with global marketing executives of successful brands such as Converse, Heineken, DIESEL, Coca-Cola, MasterCard, eBay and the BBC Offers tools and guidance for developing brand strategies that effectively target Generations Y and Z, as well as a critical comparison of Generation X and Baby Boomers

Audio Branding Using Sound to Build Your Brand Edition: 1 Date: 03/03/2017 Price: £22.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478575 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478582 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 235x170 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Branding

Colleen Fahey is US Managing Director of Sixième Son, the world’s leading audio branding and sound design agency. Throughout her career, Colleen has worked for major marketing organizations on some of the leading brands in the US, Europe, Latin America and Asia.

Written by authors who have contributed directly to the development of this field, the book contains an enlightening set of case studies, including companies such as Renault (a surprisingly emotional audio brand) Atlanta Convention & Visitors Bureau (a warm, energetic audio brand), and Michelin (a globally coherent audio brand). Covering issues such as the dominance of audio-enabled devices and the phenomenon of continuous partial attention, Audio Branding demonstrates how brands can infuse sound into so many different aspects of their identity, building in a subtle longevity of brand presence through daily user experience.

384 BrandingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Wake up to the Power of Audio Branding 2 Audio Branding in the Digital Age 3 It’s Time We Came to our Sensory Marketing 4 Welcome to the World of Audio Branding 5 The Search for your Sound 6 What Gets Measured 7 The Audio Branding Process 8 How to Launch your Audio Brand 9 Maintaining and Evolving your Audio Brand 10 Music and Sound Design in Environments 11 Glossary

Audio Branding delivers fascinating insights into this area of marketing, underpinned by practical step-by-step guidance and cutting-edge research to enhance brand loyalty through user experience.

« Explores immediate and upcoming topics such as audio-enabled devices, digital touch points, and continuous partial attention « Provides practical, step-by-step instructions to enable readers to build an audio language to enhance their brand « Draws real life relevance with insightful case studies on companies which have developed successful audio brands in differing ways, including Peugeot, Atlanta Convention & Tourism Bureau, and Michelin « Written by authors with unique insider knowledge, having worked at the forefront of the audio branding industry and been involved with some of the world’s leading audio branding campaigns Description

Audio Branding is a concise, practical guide on the influential world of audio branding - what it is, why it’s important, and how it can be used to enhance a brand. Consider the familiar tune of a branded ringtone, the bubbly sounds of Skype, and even the chosen sound bite for a branded car unlocking as the driver presses the key. How do these choices tie into a wider brand identity? Which emotions do they spark, and most importantly, how do these choices enhance brand association with the consumer?

This book « Features a foreword by Dr Philip Kotler « Explains why audio branding (examples of which include the Skype intake of breath, the noise an iPod wheel makes as it clicks, and the sound a particular brand of car makes when a key is inserted in the ignition) is a crucial element of brand development

Charlie Mawer is Executive Creative Director of Red Bee, responsible for their global creative output. A BAFTA nominee and former Promax UK chairman, Charlie has lectured around the world including for a number of universities, TEDx, the BFI and D&AD.

385 BrandingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 The context 1 Marketing in the world of television 2 Building tv channel brands 2 What’s the point of a tv channel brand? 3 Relaunching a tv channel: waving a flag on the horizon 4 The 800lb gorillas: building a big broadcast brand 5 The risk takers: building a TV channel brand with attitude 6 Idents: giving a channel a personality 3 Building and promoting tv programme brands 7 Marketing drama: glimpsing the future, unravelling the helix and speed dating 8 Timing and other secrets: a guide to promoting TV comedy 9 Selling the news 10 Promoting entertainment shows: scrubbing the shiny floors 11 Documentaries and reality: stories and storytellers 12 Faster, higher, stronger, longer: the hyperbolic world of TV sports promotion 13 Marketing to children: nailing jelly to a moving train 4 Building brands in the age of online tv 14 Storyworlds: blurring the lines between content and marketing 15 Social media: from viewers to fans to friends 16 The future of tv marketing: seismic change, timeless principles 5 TV channel design in a multiscreen world (online-only chapter completescrollTheTVBrandBuilderswww.koganpage.com/at-pleasetobottomofpageandformtoaccess)

« Online resources: Bonus chapter on TV channel design in a multi-screen world, and a Student and Instructor’s Manual with chapter summaries

Description The TV Brand Builders is the definitive account of how the biggest television networks, channels and programmes are created as brands, with rare privileged access to the marketing strategies and creative thinking behind culturally defining TV promos, digital and social media campaigns and design Writtenidentities.by two leading practitioners responsible for work as famous as the BBC One hippos, the creation of a TV channel called Dave and the re-launch of Doctor Who, and featuring interviews with 50 leading industry experts from 8 countries, from HBO to ESPN, from DreamWorks to CANAL+, The TV Brand Builders combines practical advice and strategic insight with exclusive stories from the ratings front line. Online resources include a bonus chapter on TV channel design in a multi-screen world, plus a ‘Student and Instructor’s Manual’ with chapter summaries.

The TV BuildersBrand Edition: 1 Date: 03/04/2016 Price: £24.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749476687 ISBN Ebook: 9780749476700 Pages: 328 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Branding

This book « Uses a wide range of examples from major broadcasters around the world to expertly illustrate the marketing, advertising and design approaches that work best in television « Includes 50 interviews with leading practitioners in global TV brands, providing the insider perspective on the challenges and opportunities of marketing television programmes « Includes examples drawn from globally recognised channels and networks, Sky TV, BBC, Fox, ITV, NBCU, AMC, Comedy Central, HBO, UKTV etc. It also includes examples drawn from universally loved television shows including Doctor Who, Mad Men, Game of Thrones, American Horror Story, and major sporting events such as the Olympics and Paralympics.

Author Information Andy Bryant is Managing Director of Red Bee, a London-based, internationally acclaimed creative agency. He is a recognised thought leader and frequent speaker at leading industry conferences globally on TV brand strategy, marketing and creativity. He is Honorary Professor in Film and Media at the University of Nottingham.

Suitable for marketing, branding and PR professionals, reputation management specialists and students, Brand Psychology takes examples from e-cigarette legislation, the iPhone 5S’s fingerprint ID technology, Barclays’ branded bikes and the London 2012 Olympics, Miley Cyrus and the UK National Health Service’s big data to reveal how to build a meaningful brand that resonates with the public.

Brand

Consumer Perceptions, Corporate

Edition:Reputations 1 Date: 03/03/2015 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749471736 ISBN Ebook: 9780749471743 Pages: 440 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Branding

Why do we trust some brands more than others? How important is integrity for a brand’s survival?

Introduction 1 Believing is not seeing. Seeing is believing Lies, excuses and further justifications for inconvenient truths Brains, brands, bytes, Bolshevik brawls and teenage tantrums Cloud-high reputations, big media personalities and bigger data Smoke and mirroring Rings of confidence Egg whites, whitewash and snowflakes Flattered trusted minds and fluttery trusting hearts Under the influence From addictive self-interests to interesting selves Brand me 12 Maslow: misunderstood? The church of brand ideology. Open for redemption 24/7 14 In the spotlight Can we still be friends? IDs and CEGOs You don’t have to be mad to work here: brand leadership and psychosis Big boys don’t cry 19 The authentic employer brand Brand stories: tell – don’t yell 21 Rhetoric, rules, reasoning 22 The final question first

How can brand confidence be rebuilt during a crisis? Using both new and classic insights from social psychology, cognitive psychology and neuroscience, Brand Psychology reveals the hidden processes behind why certain brands command our loyalty, trust and - most importantly - disposable income. Reputation management authority Jonathan Gabay takes readers on a tour of the corporate, political, and personal brands whose understanding of consumer psychology has either built or broken them.

Author Information Jonathan Gabay is a creative strategist, educator and writer. He has held several major advertising and marketing roles, including that of Group Creative Head at Saatchi and Saatchi Direct, where he worked with some of the most respected names in creative advertising, marketing, PR, the media and education. His books and business insights are featured throughout academia and regularly sought by news media including CNN, ABC, BBC and Bloomberg. Psychology

386 BrandingMarketing and PR Table of Contents

This book « Combines practical ‘how to’ advice in areas such as media relationships, crisis management and more with an exploration of reputation psychology and consumer motivation « Provides tools and techniques to internally and externally deal with a crisis situation that affects a brand’s reputation « Presents a robust vision for modern brand reputation strategy Description

Author Information Helen Edwards is a branding consultant, based in London, UK, and an award-winning columnist at Marketing Week, focusing on brand positioning and brand strategy. She is the director of Passionbrand, a Teaching Fellow in Marketing at London Business School and is the author of Creating Passion Brands

Mainstream brands are besieged when it comes to being innovative, developing new products and taking new services or goods to market. Legacy brands seek out small and comfortable advantages within their market sectors and while this may produce a small market share uplift, it will never bring about sensational brand growth.

From Marginal to Mainstream shows why businesses, marketers and product development teams need to break through mainstream inhibition and turn their attention to those brands that are currently in the margins - to confront, evaluate and embrace the strangeness of brand strategies, behaviours, ideas, marketing and and the way of life at the fringes. This may be an unpromising, untested, weird and even sometimes frightening place, yet studying the behaviour of marginal brands - what they get right, how they engage with customers, how they develop products - can point the way to new innovation, new routes to market and exciting new category creation.

387 BrandingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 The margins and why they matter 1 From ‘Does anyone do that?’ to ‘Doesn’t everyone do that?’ 2 The excitement and fear of the fringes 3 How mainstream brand thinking is holding back mainstream brand growth 2 Understanding the margins 4 Where to go and what to look for 5 The M2M accelerators,journey:howto spot them, ride them – and create them 6 When marginal doesn’t become mainstream – how to avoid ‘magical thinking’ 3 A strategy for growth 7 A blueprint for reading the margins: how to react and not lose 8 Brand Entrepreneurs: naturals for M2M, because they are marginals too 9 Mainstream businesses: marketing has to lead, here’s how 10 The M2M advantage: what every business needs to do This book « Explains why the quest for incremental advantages by mainstream brands will hold back marketbeating growth « Identifies why brand managers and product development teams need to seek out the quirky and the odd « Demonstrates the principles and ways of working that need to be applied if brands are to develop new entrepreneurial products, learned from the margins « Features case studies from brands operating at the margins and those organizations that have leveraged the margins such as Knorr and Peroni LegacyDescriptionbrandsare struggling. To put it simply, mainstream brand thinking is holding back mainstream brand growth. Businesses need to turn their attention to those brands who are playing at the fringes and learn from their business techniques.

Today’s margins are tomorrow’s pot of gold - if you know where and how to look.

From Marginal to Mainstream Why Tomorrow’s Brand Growth Will Come from the Fringes and How to Get There First Edition: 1 Date: 03/12/2022 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398604315 ISBN Ebook: 9781398604322 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Branding

388 BrandingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Myth 1 – Brands are just a way of charging you more for the same product 2 Myth 2 – Once lost, brand trust can never be rebuilt 3 Myth 3 – A good brand can prop up a bad business 4 Myth 4 – Technology is diminishing the power of brands 5 Myth 5 – Branding is just about identity 6 Myth 6 – Brands don’t have any real economic value 7 Myth 7 – There is no such thing as brand loyalty 8 Myth 8 – The customer is always right 9 Myth 9 – It takes large resources and years of effort to build a global brand 10 Myth 10 – A brand is ‘owned’ by the marketing department 11 Myth 11 – Brand purpose is about effective corporate social responsibility 12 Myth 12 – Customers are seeking a conversation with your brand 13 Myth 13 – There are no real tools to help you manage your brand 14 Myth 14 – In certain businesses, brands really don’t matter 15 Myth 15 – Branding has nothing to do with the customer experience 16 Myth 16 - Branding is all about the product

Myths of Branding takes the most up-to-date research and evidence to debunk these popular misconceptions, and replaces them with the reality of what it’s really like to work in the world of branding. Jam-packed with entertaining anecdotes and useful information that practitioners can learn from, it guarantees a deeper, sharper understanding of the realities of branding and brand management.

A Brand is Just a Logo, and Other Popular Misconceptions

Edition: 1 Date: 03/01/2019 Price: £15.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749483098 ISBN Ebook: 9780749483104 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: General Subject: Branding

Myths of Branding, written by renowned branding experts Andy Milligan and Simon Bailey, explores the huge number of misguided, mistaken and blatantly false myths that abound in the branding arena.

This book « Explores the most pervasive and entertaining myths about the world of branding, including ‘a good brand can save a bad business’; ‘brands don’t matter in every business’; and ‘branding is all about visual identity’, debunking them with up-to-date research and evidence « Includes fascinating examples from the world’s leading brands and foremost branding agencies « Features in the topical and successful Myths Of series, debunking the most popular myths and misconceptions in the business landscape Description A brand is just a logo - everyone knows that, don’t they? After all, it’s not as though a good brand can save a bad business, and besides, the digital revolution is making branding irrelevant...

From the belief that developing brands is nothing more than fiddling with logos, to the perception that it’s a ‘soft’ area of marketing that doesn’t go beyond visual identity - these myths are all surprisingly entrenched, yet could not be further from the truth.

Author Information Andy Milligan is a leading international branding consultant. He has worked for almost 20 years advising major organizations on strategies for brand building, customer experience and internal culture, and comments regularly in the media on brand issues. He is the co-author of On Purpose and Bold. Simon Bailey is an experienced business leader and brand specialist who advises CEOs on using their brand to drive business growth. He was formerly European CEO of Interbrand and UK CEO of WPP agency the Brand Union. His agencies have twice been awarded ‘Agency of the Year’ by Marketing Magazine

Myths of Branding

Subject: Luxury Marketing

Author Information Jean-Noël Kapferer is an internationally recognized thought leader on brands and brand management. A professor at HEC Paris, he holds a PhD from Northwestern University (USA) and is an active consultant to many European, Asian and American corporations. He is the author of 12 books, including the international bestseller New Strategic Brand Management, and Reinventing the Brand (published by Kogan Page).

Now with a new section on marketing and selling luxury goods online and the impact of social networks and digital developments, this book has truly cemented its position as the authority on luxury strategy.

to successful luxury brand management with this bestselling guide written by two of the world’s leading experts on luxury branding, Jean-Noël Kapferer and Vincent Bastien, providing a unique blueprint for luxury brands and companies.

This book « Identifies the rules for marketing luxury products and implementing a luxury strategy « Provides the depth insight required to master luxury marketing strategies « Includes coverage of human resources and financial management in the luxury space DiscoverDescriptionthesecrets

The Luxury Strategy Marketing and PR Edition: 2 Date: 03/09/2012 Price: £36.99 ISBN Ebook: 9780749464929 Pages: 408 Format (mm): 240x165 Product Category: Textbook/Professional

Written by two world experts on luxury branding, The Luxury Strategy provides the first rigorous blueprint for the effective management of luxury brands and companies at the highest level.

389 Luxury MarketingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Back to luxury fundamentals 1 In the beginning there was luxury 2 The end of a confusion: premium is not luxury 3 Anti-laws of marketing 4 Facets of luxury today 2 Luxury brands need specific management 5 Customer attitudes vis-à-vis luxury 6 Developing brand equity 7 Luxury brand stretching 8 Qualifying a product or service as luxury 9 Pricing luxury 10 Distribution and the internet dilemma 11 Communicating luxury 12 Financial and HR management of a luxury company 3 Strategic perspectives 13 Luxury business models 14 Entering luxury and leaving it 15 Learning from luxury 16 Luxury and anddevelopment:sustainableconvergencesdivergences

Having established itself as the definitive work on the essence of a luxury brand strategy, this book defines the differences between premium and luxury brands and products, analyzing the nature of true luxury brands and turning established marketing ‘rules’ upside-down.

Vincent Bastien is one of the most experienced senior managers in the luxury business. Formerly MD of Louis Vuitton Malletier and CEO of Yves Saint Laurent Parfums, he has held senior posts at some of the world’s most prestigious luxury brands. He is now Affiliate Professor at HEC Paris, teaching Strategy in Luxury.

This fully revised second edition of The Luxury Strategy explores the diversity of meanings of ‘luxury’ across different markets. It rationalizes those business models that have achieved profitability and unveils the original methods that were used to transform small family businesses such as Ferrari, Louis Vuitton, Cartier, Chanel, Armani, Gucci, and Ralph Lauren into profitable global brands.

390 Luxury MarketingMarketing and PR Table of Contents

The LVMH–Bulgari agreement: what changes in the luxury market lead family companies to sell up? 11 Developing luxury brands within luxury groups: synergies without dilution?

This book addresses the No 1 challenge of all major luxury brands today: How can these brands pursue their growth yet remain luxury? How do you reconcile growth and rarity? Kapferer on Luxury offers a selection of the most recent and insightful articles and original essays on the luxury growth challenge from Jean-Noël Kapferer, a world-renowned luxury analyst. Each chapter addresses a specific issue relating to the luxury growth challenge such as sustaining the ‘luxury dream’, adapting the internet to luxury demands, re-widening the gap with premium brands’ competition, and the importance of non-delocalization. It also explores in detail facing the demand of the Chinese clients, rising sustainable quality and experiential standards, developing real luxury services and managing luxury brands within groups without diluting their equity and more.

Introduction: Growth issues for luxury 1 How luxury is changing 1 Sustaining the luxury dream: challenges and insights 2 Abundant rarity: the key to luxury growth 3 The artification of luxury: from artisans to artists 2 Specific issues and challenges 4 Luxury after the crisis: pro logo or no logo? Why luxury should not delocalize: a critique of a growing tendency 6 Internet and luxury: underadopted or ill-adapted? Does luxury have a minimum price?: an exploratory study into consumers’ psychology of luxury prices 8 All that glitters is not green: the challenge of sustainable luxury 3 The business side of luxury brands’ growth 9 Not all luxuries act alike: the distinct business models of luxury brands

This book « Addresses the need to demonstrate growth in the face of the many unique challenges to the luxury sector « Offers expert strategies that help sustain luxury growth at higher volumes without risking dilution « Includes recent and authoritative international research into the basis of the luxury dream and a fresh approach to the specific obstacles to perceived exclusivity posed by the Internet Description

Author Information Jean-Noël Kapferer is one of world’s foremost thought leaders on luxury and its brands. An active researcher, HEC Paris graduate and PhD-holder from Northwestern University’s Kellogg Business School (USA), Kapferer is co-author of The Luxury Strategy and The New Strategic Brand Management and has written many seminal articles. He is a sought after speaker, leading seminars on luxury all around the world at institutions such as HEC Paris, Tsing Hua University Beijing, Seoul Luxury Business Institute and LBI Shanghai. He is also advisor to the president of Inseec Business School (Paris).

As such, Kapferer on Luxury is the perfect and timely resource for luxury executives, communication managers, luxury observers and advanced students willing to deepen their understanding of this major luxury challenge.

Kapferer on Luxury How Luxury Brands Can Grow Yet Remain Rare Edition: 1 Date: 03/03/2015 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474362 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474379 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Luxury Marketing

Managing Luxury Brands

391 Luxury MarketingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 The fundamentals of luxury brand management 1 Introduction - the definition of luxury and key facets of luxury brands 2 The perception and development of luxury over time 3 Socio and marketingdevelopmentsculturalshapingdecisionsfor luxury brands 4 Luxury brands and markets in a global context 2 Managing luxury brands today 5 The environmental and social impact of luxury - consumer concerns and practices 6 Sustainable luxury and the circular economy – new business strategies 7 Advances in digital - new opportunities for luxury brands 8 Developing relationshipscustomerthrough AR and AI 3 New directions in luxury branding 9 Blockchain and NFTsauthenticity, exclusivity and ethics 10 Niche luxury brands and products 11 Future industry developments - hidden luxury, extreme personalization and ‘first to’ experiences

Author Information Eleonora Cattaneo (ed.) is Senior Lecturer in luxury marketing and Head of the MA in Luxury Brand Management at Regent’s University London. Previously, she was Senior Lecturer at SDA Bocconi School of Management, Italy, and Adjunct Professor at Franklin University Switzerland. She has extensive consulting experience in a variety of industries including automotive, fashion and non-profit. The author of several publications and papers, her research interests focus on the management of iconic brands and luxury consumption. She is Senior Fellow of the Chartered Management Institute and is based in London, UK.

WhatDescriptionarethekey components of a luxury brand? How can luxury be marketed successfully in a changing global context? What opportunities does the increasing demand for sustainability and the latest technological developments present?

A Complete Guide to Contemporary Luxury Brand Strategies Edition: 1 Date: 03/11/2022 Price: £34.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398606401 ISBN Ebook: 9781398606739 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Luxury Marketing

This book « Explores what makes a luxury brand and how to market them in a changing global context « Shows how luxury brands can develop customer relationships through AR and AI and embrace endto-end sustainability and the circular economy « Contains case studies from international brands such as Louis Vuitton, Michael Kors and Shanghai Tang as well as discussion points and suggestions for further reading « Online resources: lecture slides for each chapter and video interviews with industry experts « Written by leading academics with extensive industry experience and tightly edited into a cohesive whole

Managing Luxury Brands brings together insights from leading academics in the field to answer these questions and more in this comprehensive guide to luxury brand management. It examines what makes a luxury brand, the changing perception of luxury over time, and how to market luxury brands in light of socio and cultural developments and global market shifts. Featuring discussion points, key concept definitions and further reading suggestions for each chapter, it also explores how brands can embrace end-to-end sustainable luxury and the circular economy, and the opportunities of technological developments such as artificial intelligence, augmented reality and non-fungible tokens Featuring(NFTs).

case studies from a range of international brands such as Louis Vuitton, Michael Kors and Shanghai Tang, Managing Luxury Brands combines rigorous academic research with the authors’ extensive consulting and industry experience to ensure that complex ideas are firmly grounded in real-world implications and applications throughout. Supported by online resources of lecture slides and video interviews with industry experts, this book is an essential resource for any student studying luxury brand management.

Adding Prestige to Your Portfolio

Author Information Drew Boyd is Associate Professor of Marketing and Innovation at the University of Cincinnati in Mason, Ohio. He trains, consults and speaks on the topics of innovation, persuasion and marketing strategy at Macy’s, Toyota and Procter & Gamble. He spent 17 years at Johnson & Johnson in marketing, mergers and acquisitions, and international development, where he also earned his first of five patents for medical devices. His work has been featured in business publications such as The Wall Street Journal, Bloomberg, Industry Week, Psychology Today, and Strategy+Business

This book « Provides examples from global brands such as Harley-Davidson, Caterpillar, Disney, Apple, Madecraft, LinkedIn, Johnson & Johnson, Nestle, FedEx, and Gillette among others

392 Luxury MarketingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 The Luxury Opportunity –Upscale and Grow 2 Switching on Luxury – The Tools of Creative Luxury 3 Transforming a Product or Service to Luxury 4 Transforming the Shopping and Buying Experience 5 Transforming the Usage Experience 6 Transforming the PostPurchase Experience 7 Driving Prestige into Your Culture 8 Conclusion

Adding Prestige to Your Portfolio describes how companies can elevate any product or service at each step of the customer buying journey (awareness, search and compare, purchase, use, advocate). By applying the creativity technique Closed World Principle, readers can determine which luxury benefits (security, fun, self-respect, self-fulfillment, accomplishment, recognition, relationships or belonging) would best map to their product or service and garner the greatest business impact at that particular stage of the customer buying journey.

« Introduces a detailed step-by-step formula to transition any part of your portfolio, regardless of industry, to luxury status « Redefines luxury as a series of attributes or “switches” that create greater perceived value in the eyes of consumers « Online resources: sample syllabi for classroom use, templates for application of framework, case studies, discussion questions ExpandDescriptionyourexisting portfolio by using the creative luxury process to elevate specific products and provide greater value to customers.

Illustrated with examples from industries as diverse as healthcare and industrial equipment, Adding Prestige to Your Portfolio shows companies how to borrow the elements of luxury and sprinkle them throughout the customer experience in order to strengthen loyalty and increase their appeal to potential new customers. Online resources include sample syllabi, templates to aid in application of framework, case studies and discussion questions.

How to Use the Creative Luxury Process to Develop Products Everyone Edition:Wants 1 Date: 03/01/2021 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789666090 ISBN Ebook: 9781789666106 Pages: 216 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Luxury Marketing

Contrary to popular belief, luxury is a well-defined code that can be reapplied to any other product or service to enhance its value. Adding Prestige to Your Portfolio reveals how non-luxury companies can apply the principles of luxury and creativity to transition parts of their portfolio to luxury status.

393 Luxury MarketingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 RECAP – THE PRINCIPLES OF UEBER-BRANDINGTM 1 Principle 1MissionaincomparableMission–Havingdistinct,brand-guiding 2 Principle 2 - Longing vs belonging – Balancing exclusivity and inclusion 3 Principle 3 - Un-selling –Mastering the art of seduction 4 Principle 4 - From Myth to meaning – Giving the brand soul 5 Principle 5 - Behold the product! Making your product manifest the Myth 6 Principle 6 - Living the dream – Letting the brand radiate from the inside out 7 Principle 7 - Growth without end – Balancing scaling and brand building 2

HowDescriptioncanabrand become one of those peerless ‘Ueber-Brands’ we all admire and are willing to pay a premium for? Is there a proven process? Where should we start?

The Power of a Prestige Brand Marketing and PR Edition: 1 Date: 03/01/2021 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789664669 ISBN Ebook: 9781789664676 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 233x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Luxury Marketing

394 Luxury MarketingMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1

Rethinking prestige branding 1 The times they are a-changing 2 From marker to myth – a brief history of branding 3 A new kind of prestige – or what we mean by UeberBrands™ 2 The seven secrets of UeberBrands 4 Principle 1: incomparableMission–the first rule is to make your own 5 Principle 2: Longing versus belonging – the challenge is both 6 Principle 3: Un-selling – the superiority of seduction 7 Principle 4: From myth to meaning – the best way up is to go deep 8 Principle 5: Behold! – the product as manifestation 9 Principle 6: Living the dream –the bubble shall never burst 10 Principle 7: Growth without end – the ultimate balancing act

Edition: 1 Date: 03/05/2015 Price: £22.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749470036 ISBN Ebook: 9780749470043 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 233x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Luxury Marketing

Rethinking Prestige Branding Secrets of the Ueber-Brands

This book « Hones premium marketing skills by helping readers understand how the prestige marketing model seeks to attract the media, analysts and consumers « Provides insight into both the practical marketing of prestige brands and how consumers respond to them psychologically and emotionally « Shows how to upgrade brands facing the ‘squeeze in the middle’, a polarization to high-end/lifestyle or commoditized retailer brands Description

Author Information Wolfgang Schaefer is CEO and Founder of zwoelf consulting, specialized in narrative brand strategies. Based in Berlin and NYC, he lectures at XU Exponential University Potsdam and other schools in Europe and the US. For the past 25 years as chief strategist he has worked with many of the world’s top marketers at LVMH, P&G, Miele, Swarovski, Coty and Unilever et al. JP Kuehlwein is the Founder of marketing consultancy Ueber-Brands. He’s also Adjunct Professor of Marketing at NYU Stern and Columbia Business School and leader of the Marketing Institute at The Conference Board think tank. Previously, he was Executive Vice President at Frederic Fekkai & Co as well as Brand Director and Director of Corporate Strategy at Procter & Gamble.

What makes someone covet a Kelly bag? Why are Cirque Du Soleil or Grey Goose so successful despite breaking all the conventions of their categories? What does Gucci’s approach to marketing have in common with Nespresso’s? And why do some people pay a relative fortune for Renova toilet paper or Aesop detergent even though they hardly ever ‘advertise’ and seem to have none of the ‘functional performance advantages’ conventional marketers would seek to demonstrate? Prestige brand experts JP Kuehlwein and Wolfgang Schaefer have dedicated themselves to studying what drives the success of prestige brands. Rethinking Prestige Branding collects their insights.

Uncovering the secrets of why and how some brands are created more equal than others, Rethinking Prestige Branding includes over 100 case studies from Apple and Abercrombie & Fitch to Tate Modern and Tesla. Rather than re-telling brand success stories or re-hashing long-standing marketing principles, it takes readers on a colourful journey behind the scenes of today’s marketing pros. This book will fascinate marketing professional just as much as those who are simply curious as to how premium brands tick.

« New to this edition: how to manage the changing Asian markets, the digitalization of sales, communication and product, new strategies for the evolving market and business of luxury « Shares high profile insights to case studies such as Louis Vuitton, Leica and Moët-Hennessy

Sven Reinecke is Associate Professor of Business Administration, specialized in Marketing, and Director of the Institute of Marketing at the University of St.Gallen (HSG), Switzerland.

395 Luxury MarketingMarketing and PR Table of Contents

updated in its second edition, The Management of Luxury explores the newly evolving direction of Asian market trends and how to integrate digitalization into sales and product strategies. Both are crucial for competitive advantage in the luxury market, featured alongside iconic case studies such as Burberry, Louis Vuitton and Leica. The book’s value is not only in streamlining management processes and return on investment; but equally for those who marvel at an industry unlike any other, striving to trust both in the conventional and innovate new paths towards the extraordinary. Highly influential, applicable and enlightening, it is a vital addition to every luxury business manager’s collection.

The Management of Luxury, second edition, presents a unique snapshot of best practice insights into the increasing challenges faced in luxury business, with contributions shared by more than fifty global leaders on luxury management. The highly renowned editors draw these together into one essential handbook, ranging from luxury brand strategy, luxury consumer behaviour and market positioning, through to management succession, heritage, counterfeiting and competing effectively as a luxury FullySME.

The Chinese market: entry modes [Rui Wang, Kaibin He and Yue Wen] Entering the Chinese market [Rui Wang, Kaibin He and Yue Wen] 15 Managing brand extensions in the luxury industry [KlausPeter Wiedmann, Christiane Klarmann, Nadine Hennigs, Stefan Behrens and Alexander Stigelski] 16 Luxury brands enter the online market [Elisa Arrigo] 17 Competing as a luxury SME [France Riguelle and Didier Van Caillie] 18 Insisting on luxury to survive [Michael Reinhold and Emil Annen] 19 Managing price fluctuations of raw materials through innovation [Anne-Flore Maman and Camille Depigny] 20 The Counterfeit Timer© [Anne-Flore Maman] 21 Acting on Cesareocounterfeitingluxury[LudovicaandAlbertoPastore] 22

Günter Müller-Stewens is Professor of Management and Organization at the University of St.Gallen (HSG), Switzerland, and Director of its Institute of Management.

ExamineDescriptionluxurybranding on a global scale, with more than fifty cutting edge contributions from the foremost thought leaders in luxury management and marketing.

Luxury brands as employers [Verena Batt and Benjamin Berghaus] 23 The impact of luxury brands on employees [Benjamin Berghaus and Sven Reinecke] 4 Luxury responsibility 24 Heritage of luxury and responsibility [Duane Windsor] 25 Luxury organizations and responsibility: a toolbox [Farah Montesa and René Rohrbeck] 26 Luxury organizations and social responsibility: a case study [David S Waller and Anurag G Hingorani] 27 Index

Author Information Benjamin Berghaus is Head of the Competence Center for Luxury Management at the Institute of Marketing of University of St.Gallen (HSG), Switzerland.

This book « Explains how to streamline marketing and management processes across a luxury business « Contributes unique strategies from more than fifty luxury thought leaders across Europe, Asia, Australia and the Americas

Preface 1 The luxury market 1 The market and business of luxury: an introduction [Günter Müller-Stewens and Benjamin Berghaus] 2 Classifying luxury and prodigality [Michael Jäckel] Exploring luxury consumer behaviour Theodoridis[ProkopsisandSofia Vassou] Identity-based luxury brand management [Klaus Heine, Michel Phan and Vera Waldschmidt] 2 Luxury brand strategy Public luxury representatives [Michael ChristopherBreazeale,RLong and Daniela Ott] 6 Curating the creative genius in luxury firms [Charles Aaron Lawry and Sabrina Helm] Arts meet luxury brands [Carsten Baumgarth, Nicole Lohrisch and Olga Louisa Kastner] 8 Luxury as societal mentor [George Panigyrakis and Eirini Koronaki] 9 Preserving luxury exclusivity through art [Claude Chailan and Ivan Valek] Brand charismatic legitimacy and marketing of adoration [Delphine Dion and Eric Arnould] Digital media in monobrand stores [Marcus SchÖgel and Timo Tischer] Luxury business strategy Gravity shift from West to East [Philip Beil, Fabian Sommerrock and Alexander Gaus] 13

The Management of Luxury Marketing and PR Edition: 2 Date: 03/06/2018 Price: £31.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481827 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481810 Pages: 496 Format (mm): 234x157 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Luxury Marketing

The Essential Handbook Edition: 1 Date: 03/11/2017 Price: £32.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478414 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478421 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Product Design

396 Product DesignMarketing and PR Table of Contents Introduction 1 Design Values - Design and the Organization 2 Design Management in Action - Case Studies 3 Design Horizons - Fluid Strategies for Success 4 Design Strategies in ActionCase Studies 5 Design Vision - A National Asset 6 Design - A Possible Instrument for Growth and Innovation (Mexico) 7 Design Futures - Design as an Enabler for Change 8 Looking Ahead and Discussions on the Future of Design Management

This book « Provides a complete overview of the development, key issues and future directions of design management, giving students the holistic knowledge they need to practice design management across a wide range of industries « Gives students the skills to get design management recognised at board level, enabling them to effect revolutionary new initiatives and changes in their companies

Author Information Dr David Hands is a senior lecturer in Design Management at Lancaster University. He is also Course Leader for MA Design Management at Lancaster Institute for Contemporary Arts. He has written and published extensively on all aspects and themes surrounding strategic design management theory and practice.

Meticulously researched, Design Management goes beyond individual project-level implementation to explore design strategy at both organizational and macro levels. By showcasing its impact all the way up to industrial and national application, students will gain a deep understanding of the nuances, scope and scalability of design. Filled with vibrant case studies and guest perspectives from a spectrum of industry leaders and policy makers, this book is an invaluable real-world commentary on design’s role as a key asset in organizational activity. The book’s engaging and accessible style provides students and practitioners with everything needed to foster a climate of creative engagement.

Online resources include a valuable toolkit of PowerPoint slides, review questions, project questions, activity worksheets and further reading.

« Links theory to practice with in-depth case studies and thought-provoking contributions from actively practicing professionals « Online Resources: PPT slides, review questions, project questions, activity worksheets, further reading Description Design Management is the essential handbook to all things design. As a discipline, design management is continually in motion; changing, responding and adapting to the dynamics of social and business transformation. As a business function, it combines project management, design, strategy and supply chain techniques to enable the creation of more effectively designed products, services, communications and brands. As such, it is relevant to a very broad range of industries and sectors, and Design Management recognizes this by structuring content around four key universal perspectives: values, horizons, visions, and futures. These perspectives give an overview of the development, key issues and future direction of design management.

Design Management

« Builds awareness of the changing nuances of design management practice at varying levels, including macro, organizational and individual-project level, allowing students to develop their studies and careers in accordance with their skills and interests

Event Planning and Management Principles, Planning and Practice Edition: 2 Date: 03/11/2018 Price: £34.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749483319 ISBN Ebook: 9780749483326 Pages: 368 Format (mm): 238x178 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Event Management

397 Event ManagementMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Introduction to events 2 Putting event planning into motion 3 Location, location, location! Destination and venue selection for events 4 Developing your events programme and content 5 Understanding site planning and safety essentials for events 6 How to build and develop an events team 7 Drawing in the crowdsPromotion and publicity for events 8 Budgeting, finances and procurement for events management 9 A practical guide to managing an event on the day 10 Measuring success – Postevent evaluation and insights 11 Future-proofing your events This book « Provides a structured, practical framework of essential theory and application, specifically the logistical planning, promotion and delivery of events « Saves time sourcing, understanding and applying complex safety, risk management and legal admin, helping to minimize stress on the day and resolve issues as they arise « New to this edition: How to manage an event on the day, fresh international case studies and exploring live brand experiences for experiential marketing « Online resources: Downloadable checklists, step by step processes, planning templates, lecture slide pack, and real-world case studies with discussion questions

Description Event Planning and Management, second edition, is an ideal resource for those seeking a step by step formula to plan and deliver a successful event. With the vital balance of professional experience behind them, the authors teach the next generation of event planners with unrivalled knowledge, ensuring an effective event process from start to finish. This book delivers practical understanding of the theory and practice needed to activate each stage of planning, from initial venue selection, budgeting and programme content, to managing stakeholders and sponsors, promotion, risk assessment, safety and post-event evaluation.

Author Information Ruth Dowson has more than 30 years of experience in strategic development, management and delivery of events, conferences, seminars and exhibitions, in both the public and private sectors. She is a senior lecturer in events management at the UK Centre for Events Management at Leeds Beckett University. David Bassett is an experienced event organizer and educator in events management, leisure, sport and tourism. He is former senior lecturer at the UK Centre for Events Management and now provides training to industry professionals. He is also a leadership development consultant for Leeds Business School, UK.

Fully revised, the second edition of Event Planning and Management expands on managing events on the day, and explores the PR and experiential marketing boom for live brand experiences. Including updated real-world case studies from around the globe, it also features an invaluable toolkit of templates, planning checklists and budget sheets. Accompanied by a host of downloadable resources, this book is the ideal end to end resource for both event planning modules and certifications, plus busy marketing and PR professionals facing the new wave of live brand and customer experiences.

Author Information Tom Lunt is the Programme Leader for International Events Management at the University of Surrey. He is former senior lecturer at London Metropolitan University and spent nine years working in fundraising events with organizations such as Christian Aid and the Royal Star & Garter Home for disabled servicemen and women. Eva Nicotra is Senior Lecturer at London Metropolitan University, teaching event planning, events marketing and sponsorship, and live music events promotion. She is an accomplished events and music industry professional and previously ran her own events management company for live events, charity fundraisers, concerts and festivals.

398 Event ManagementMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1

Introduction to event sponsorship, fundraising, partnerships and relationship development Event sponsorship at the centre of the integrated marketing communications mix Delivering event sponsorship campaigns Identifying and securing sponsors and funding opportunities Prospecting for grant funding and sponsorship: case studies from Scottish cycling events Preparing and delivering a sponsorship pitch Managing relationships with sponsors and funding bodies Legal issues in event sponsorship and fundraising Evaluating sponsorship and grant-making relationships Where next for event sponsorship and fundraising? Practical templates to kickstart your event sponsorship and fundraising Afterword – building your career in sponsorship and fundraising This book « Introduces the subjects of event sponsorship, fundraising, partnerships and relationship development, in the context of the Integrated Marketing Communications Mix, allowing readers to see the role they play in overall events management

Event Sponsorship and Fundraising

Securing sponsorship and other sources of funding for events is becoming increasingly competitive, making differentiation and delivery vital. Event Sponsorship and Fundraising explores this complex area of event management, drawing on both experiential marketing and consumer behaviour theories, and developing critical insights on the dynamics of successful event sponsorship. Its coverage includes professional guidance on prospecting for sponsors, brand activation and evaluation, as well as advice on relationship management, proposal writing and pitching to potential sponsors.

« Reveals fascinating discussion on the future of fundraising and sponsorship, including burgeoning developments such as crowdfunding « Online resources: Comprehensive set of downloadable teaching aids Description

« Includes discussion questions and recommended reading sections, with each chapter structured around specified learning outcomes

Event Sponsorship and Fundraising places each of these concepts at the heart of the Integrated Marketing Communications Mix, alongside cutting edge literature on the topic. Written by two highly experienced industry practitioners, both of which now teach on two of the UK’s leading event management degree courses, and supported by a comprehensive set of online resources, this book is an invaluable go-to resource for event management students, tutors and professionals alike.

An Advanced Guide Edition: 1 Date: 03/11/2018 Price: £36.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480929 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480936 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Event Management

Created in collaboration with the Market Research Society (MRS), this course covers the fundamentals of statistics in market research, theory and practice. Equipping students with a core understanding of the statistical concepts that underpin business, this interactive course offers students the opportunity to develop their skills set when working with statistics. the end of this course, your students will able course is academic discount now available institutions now access the course for an unlimited number of students with a significant multi-user discount. Please contact corporate-enquiries@koganpage.com for more information.

can

Statistics for Research online course

Are your students struggling to grasp statistics?

to: • Understand different types of data and methods of summarizing • Test the accuracy of survey data • Calculate confidence intervals • Determine appropriate sample sizes • Understand how to test for real differences in data using significance testing This

Academic

worth six CPD points NEW! Exclusive

Market Research in Practice provides a practical and robust introduction to the subject, providing a clear step-by-step guide to managing market research and how to effectively to obtain the most reliable results. Written by an industry expert with over 35 years’ practical experience in running a successful market research agency, tips and advice are included throughout to ground the concepts in business reality. This text also benefits from real-world examples from companies including Adidas, Marks & Spencer, Grohe and General Motors.

Now in its fourth edition, Market Research in Practice is now fully updated to capture the latest changes and developments in the field and explores new tools of qualitative research using online methods as well as expanding further on online surveys such as SurveyMonkey. Accompanied by a range of templates, surveys and resources for lecturers, this is an invaluable guide for students of research methods, researchers, marketers and users of market research.

This book « Explores the fundamentals of market research, and offers a step-by-step guide to managing the process such as guidance on planning a project and executing it through to analysis and presenting the findings « Explains how to use market research tools and methods effectively to obtain reliable results with examples from companies including Adidas, Marks & Spencer, Grohe and General Motors « New to this edition: Further analysis of modern trends including change in ethics and analysis of market research that focuses on quicker and cheaper sources of intelligence, such as blogs and internal data analysis « Online resources: templates to use when conducting market research such as ‘customer satisfaction questionnaires’ and ‘focus group discussion guide’ as well as improved PowerPoint slides for lecturers and exercises for students

Market Research in Practice

400 Market ResearchMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Planning a market research study 1 Introduction 2 Market research design 3 Uses of market research 2 Qualitative research 4 Qualitative research 5 Desk research 6 Focus groups 7 Depth interviewing 8 Observation and ethnography 3 Quantitative research 9 Quantitative research 10 Sampling and statistics 11 Questionnaire design 12 Face-to-face interviewing 13 Telephone interviewing 14 questionnairesSelf-completion 15 Online surveys 16 Data analysis 4 Using market research 17 Using market research to segment markets 18 Using market research to improve a brand position 19 Using market research to improve customer satisfaction and loyalty 20 Using market research to achieve optimum pricing 21 Using market research to enter a new market 22 Using market research to test advertising effectiveness 23 Using market research to launch a new product 24 Reporting 5 The market research industry 25 International market research 26 Research trends 27 Ethics in market research

LearnDescriptionthefundamentals of market research with this bestselling guide that delivers an overview of the whole process, from planning a project and executing it, what tools to use, through to analysis and presenting the findings.

An Introduction to Gaining Greater Market Insight Edition: 4 Date: 03/11/2021 Price: £34.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398602823 ISBN Ebook: 9781398602830 Pages: 392 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Market Research

Author Information Paul Hague is based in Manchester, UK and is the founder of B2B International Ltd. Their clients include some of the largest corporations in Europe and the United States. Paul Hague is the author of a dozen books on market research as well as books on customer experience and business models that share over 35 years of practical experience in running a successful market research agency. These include Kogan Page titles such B2B Customer Experience (2018) and The Business Models Handbook (2019).

Now fully revised, this fifth edition of Questionnaire Design addresses some of the modern-day challenges facing questionnaires in an ever changing business landscape. In this new edition, explore advances in behavioural science and more in-depth review of neuroscience approaches in questionnaires to achieve more focused surveys. Readers can expect easier navigation to key points that will make using this guide whilst in the process of writing a questionnaire easier than ever.

Author Information Ian Brace, based in Oxford, UK, is a fellow of the MRS and runs training courses on questionnaire design. He was previously director of research methods at TNS UK and a visiting professor in market research at Bristol Business School. Kate Bolton, based in Surrey, UK, is a certified member of the MRS and has been its key industry trainer for questionnaire design for over 20 years as well as being an examiner for the MRS Advanced Certificate. She previously led the Foundations Research Skills Programmes at Kantar.

Whether applying to business positioning, consumer insights, employee feedback or product analysis, the ability to gauge a market snapshot on a global scale is escalating the demand for online survey and questionnaire data, making Questionnaire Design an essential addition to every professional’s shelf. This book provides practical guidelines to plan, structure and compose questionnaires across all industries and purposes, ensuring valuable data insights are captured with accuracy and efficiency.

DesignQuestionnaire

401 Market ResearchMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Objectives in writing a questionnaire 2 The data collection media 3 Planning the questionnaire 4 Types of questions 5 Data types 6 Rating scales 7 Behavioural questions 8 Attitude and measurementimage 9 Writing the questionnaire 10 The look of the questionnaire 11 Questionnaire design software 12 Engaging the respondent online 13 Piloting the questionnaire 14 Ethical issues 15 Social desirability bias 16 International surveys This book « Provides a toolkit to structure, compose and design questionnaires for business application « Delivers an accessible guide to aid the process of writing a questionnaire with easy navigation to key points « Addresses the modern-day challenges facing questionnaires such as the pressure to be shorter and smarter than ever « New to this edition: advances in behavioural science and more in-depth review of neuroscience approaches in questionnaires, a ‘mobile-first’ focus in the text and inclusions of clear and quick reference summaries at the end of each chapter

How to Plan, Structure and Write Survey Material for Effective Market Edition:Research 5 Date: 03/05/2022 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398604124 ISBN Ebook: 9781398604131 Pages: 344 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Market Research

YouDescriptioncan’twritea good questionnaire unless you know exactly what you are trying to achieve. But gaining this clarity is the hardest challenge of all. This comprehensive guide provides you with tools and guidance on how to tackle this real-world challenge.

This book « Clearly outlines and explains all the key methods of user research, such as card sorting, A/B testing, stakeholder and workshops « Benefit from in-depth knowledge from one of the UK’s leading UX research professionals « Features tools and frameworks that readers can refer to when conducting their own user research

402 Market ResearchMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Introduction - Why is user research so important? 1 The fundamentals - What good research looks like 2 Planning, objectives and legalities in user research 3 Best practice in user researchWho, what, why and how 4 Managing user research logistics - Agencies, facilities and contracts 2 Selecting and using user research methods 5 Usability testing - Observing people doing things 6 Content testing - What do people think your content means? 7 Card sorting - Understanding how people group and relate things 8 Surveys - How to gauge a widespread user response 9 User interviewsUnderstanding people’s experience through talking to them 10 Diary studies - How to capture user research data over time 11 Information architecture validation - Does the structure of your information work for your users? 12

However, companies often fail to consider the end user - the consumer - in their planning and development processes. How can marketing practitioners effectively understand their customers and create products and services that work for them? This book has the answers.

Author Information Stephanie Marsh (she/they) is a leading UX research professional and currently UX Research Operations Lead at Springer Nature. They are the former Head of User Research and Analysis for the UK Government Digital Service and former Head of Digital Strategy for the UK Ministry of Defence. She was also previously a consultant at Bunnyfoot, a leading UX consultancy in the UK. They have contributed chapters to a range of peer-reviewed texts in related fields and has delivered talks on UX Research, Research Operations and UX strategies at a range of conferences and industry events. She is based in London.

« New to this edition: new chapter on research operations and infrastructure, further analysis on combining user research methodologies and combined new research plan and strategy templates

User Research Improve Product and Service Design and Enhance Your UX Research Edition: 2 Date: 03/02/2022 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398603578 ISBN Ebook: 9781398603585 Pages: 344 Format (mm): 235x157 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Market Research

Covering all the key research methods including face-to-face user testing, card sorting, surveys, A/B testing and many more, the book gives expert insight into the nuances, advantages and disadvantages of each, while also providing guidance on how to interpret, analyze and share the data once it has been obtained. Now in its second edition, User Research provides a new chapter on research operations and infrastructure as well as new material on combining user research methodologies.

User experience research, also known as UX research, focuses on understanding user behaviours, needs and motivations through a range of observational techniques, task analysis and other methodologies. User Research is a practical guide that shows readers how to use the vast array of user research methods available. Written by one of the UK’s leading UX research professionals, readers can benefit from in-depth knowledge that explores the fundamentals of user research.

Prioritizing issues and user needs - What’s important and what to work on next 21 Making recommendationsHow to make your research findings actionable 22 Creating executive summaries and detailed reports to present results Using video playback to present your research results Using personas to communicate characteristicsuserand behaviours 25 Using mental models to visualize how users think and identify opportunities 26 Using journey and experience maps to visualize user research data 27 Using scenarios and storyboards to represent the user journey 28 Using infographics to translate numerical and statistical data 29 How to recommend changes to visual, interaction and information design 30 Conclusion

ManyDescriptionbusinesses are based on creating desirable experiences, products and services for users.

Ethnography - Observing how people behave in the real world Contextual inquiryInterviewing people in their own environment A/B Testing - A technique to compare different options Getting the best out of stakeholder workshops Guerrilla research - Running fast-paced research in the real world 17 How to combine user research methodologies 3 Analyzing and presenting your data Content analysis - A method of coding and making sense of your qualitative data 19 Affinity diagrammingUnderstand your data through identifying its themes 20

Description Semiotics is big business. It is most famous for its unique ability to decode visual images, and is the only market research method which provides a systematic, reliable and culturally sensitive method for interpreting what visual images mean. Semiotics sheds new light on consumers and the world they live in, stimulates creativity and innovation, guides brand strategy, and finds solutions to a plethora of marketing problems. Using Semiotics in Marketing will help marketers looking to launch new brands, reposition existing brands, or rejuvenate established brands. In what can seem a complex and abstract field, it is an invaluably clear, practical resource on how to seize the tremendous opportunity that semiotics offers.

403 Market ResearchMarketing and PR Table of Contents Introduction 1 Semiotics will change your career in marketing or market research 2 An explosion of semiotics in business 3 How to do research using semiotics – A blueprint for marketers 4 Images, language and other semiotic signs 5 Society, culture and other big influences on consumers 6 Creativity and innovation –Semiotic tools for thinking 7 How to do semiotic field trips 8 Combining semiotics with ethnography and discourse analysis 9 Data – insight – strategy 10 Sharing the findings of semiotic research 11 Industry debates and the future of semiotics 12 Inspiration – How to continue teaching yourself to do semiotics This book « Gives truly fascinating insight into what semiotics is, why it matters, and how it enables marketers to tap into consumers like never before « Guides through the end-to-end process of running a commercial semiotics project, from commission and design right through to analysis of results « Shows how to convert those results into brand strategy to guide business development and increase profit margins « Packed with fascinating case studies from around the world showing semiotics in action « Written by one of the original founders of commercial semiotics

Author Information Dr Rachel Lawes is recognized as one of the original founders of commercial semiotics. She has convened the Market Research Society (MRS) Advanced Qualitative Methods Masterclass for over ten years, and was previously a Principal Lecturer in Marketing at Regent’s University London. She has supplied brand strategy and consumer insight to major brands globally, including Unilever, P&G, Kraft, Tesco and The Discovery Channel.

Written by one of the original founders of commercial semiotics, Using Semiotics in Marketing outlines precisely what semiotics is and why it matters, before moving on to demonstrate how to run a successful commercial semiotics project. Packed with fascinating case studies proving how visual imagery is interpreted differently across cultural, racial and social demographics, it provides essential insights into understanding consumers. This results in better ads, websites, packaging and social media content - ultimately driving brand growth and profits.

Using Semiotics in Marketing

How to Achieve Consumer Insight for Brand Growth and Profits

Edition: 1 Date: 03/03/2020 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789662078 ISBN Ebook: 9781789662085 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 230x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Market Research

« Written by one of the UK’s leading designers of Research Games, Betty Adamou, who has been named one of seven women shaping the future of market research Description Games are the most engaging medium of all time: they harness storytelling and heuristics, drive emotion and push the evolution of technology in a way that no other platform has or can. It’s no surprise, then, that games and gamification are revolutionizing the market research industry, offering opportunities to reinvigorate the notoriously sluggish engagement levels seen in traditional surveying methods. This not only improves data quality, but offers untapped insights unattainable through traditional methods. Games and Gamification in Market Research shows readers how to design ResearchGames and Gamified Surveys that will intrinsically engage participants and how best to use these methodologies to become, and stay, commercially competitive.

World of understanding –Overview 1 The impact of low participant engagement in market research 2 The surprising similarities between digital games and online surveys 3 Debunking gamificationresearchmisconceptionscommoninmarketaboutgamesand Games and gamification: exploring definitions and why games are so engaging 5 The differences and similarities between games and gamification 6 An ontology of game-based research methods – defining research-games, gamified research and surveytainment The scientific foundation for using game-based research methods – the six vital states and their benefit to market research 8 Game culture – a showcase of intrinsic engagement to help market researchers 9 How games and gamification are used for engagement and data collection outside of research and entertainment 10

This book « Shows readers how to create intrinsic engagement through gamification, and use this engagement to glean more meaningful consumer insights « Provides insight into the contexts in which gamification can be used, and the specifics of designing and making games for research purposes

404 Market ResearchMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1

In a world where brands and organizations are increasingly interested in the feelings and contexts that drive consumer choices, Games and Gamification in Market Research gives readers the skills to use the components in games to encourage play and observe consumer behaviours via simulations for predictive modelling. Written by Betty Adamou, the UK’s leading research game designer and named as one of seven women shaping the future of market research, it explains the ways in which these methodologies will evolve with technologies such as virtual reality and artificial intelligence, and how it will shape research careers. Alongside a companion website, this book provides a fully immersive and fascinating overview of game-based research.

The Triple E Effect – games as engaging, emotive and experiential simulations for research and insight 11 Case studies and results from game-based research 12 Five things to consider before using games and gamification for market research 2 World of design – Overview 13 Fifteen ethics guidelines for designing and making gamebased surveys 14 A vocabulary of play for game-based research – Game terminologies and inspiration 15 Game-based research design –Ten tips for building the right foundations 16 Introducing Smart Intuition and Meaningful Creativity (SIMC) 17 Overcome these four concerns about game-based survey design 18 Design your game-based research – Play ‘20 for 20’ 3 World of making – Overview 19 Stakeholder onboarding and preparing to build your gamebased survey design 20 Tailor-made versus readymade game-based surveys – Differences, benefits and drawbacks 21 Build mode – Create, playtest, maintain and launch your game-based survey 22 Analysing the quality of gamebased research designs 4 A new market research world – Overview 23 Building a career in gamebased research 24 The future of game-based research 25 Final words

Edition: 1 Date: 03/11/2018 Price: £31.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749483357 ISBN Ebook: 9780749483364 Pages: 360 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Market Research

Games Gamificationand in Market Research

Author Information Betty Adamou is the Founder and Chief ResearchGame Designer at Research Through Gaming. In addition to developing ResearchGames on behalf of Fortune 500 companies and academic institutions alike, Adamou also guest lectures, writes about and gives keynote presentations and talks on Game-Based Research Methods. Adamou has won multiple awards for her work in entrepreneurship and innovation in market research.

Increasing Consumer Engagement in Research for Business Success

Author Information Mike Grigsby is vice president of customer insights and advanced analytics at Brierley and Partners in Texas, US. With more than 25 years of experience, he is the former vice president of strategic business analysis and advanced analytics at Targetbase, director of marketing science for Millward Brown and has held leadership positions at Hewlett-Packard and Gap. 03/04/2018 £29.99 Paperback: 9780749482169 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482176 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Marketing Analytics

The finale – what should you take away from this?

Introduction to marketing analytics – how can marketing analytics help you? brief statistics review principles of consumer behaviour and marketing strategy is an insight? variable techniques drives demand? dependent variable techniques is most likely to buy and how do I target them? are my customers most likely to buy? Panel regression – how to use a cross-sectional time series Systems of equations for modelling dependent variable techniques does my (customer) market look like? Modelling inter-relationship techniques – tools and techniques important topics for everyday marketing testing – how do I know what works? Big Data and Big Data analytics

1 Overview

6 When

3 techniquesInter-relationship 9 What

4 More

Who is most likely to buy and what is the best way to target them? How can businesses improve strategy without identifying the key influencing factors? The second edition of Marketing Analytics enables marketers and business analysts to leverage predictive techniques to measure and improve marketing performance. By exploring real-world marketing challenges, it provides clear, jargon-free explanations on how to apply different analytical models for each purpose. From targeted list creation and data segmentation, to testing campaign effectiveness, pricing structures and forecasting demand, this book offers a welcome handbook on how statistics, consumer analytics and modelling can be put to optimal use.

This book « Simplifies intimidating data, segmentation and predictive analytics tools for everyday use in business, using real-world marketing problems to apply to a range of practical scenarios Provides accessibility and insightful application of techniques regardless of experience level New to this edition: Three new chapters on panel data regression, insights and how to collect, separate and analyze data using big data analytics; added tools such as tobit analysis - a customer lifetime value framework « Online resources: Downloadable data sets and test bank resources

4 What

3 What

10 Segmentation

5 Who

Marketing Analytics A Practical Guide to Improving Consumer Insights Using Data Edition:Techniques 2 Date:

1 A

2 Dependent

The fully revised second edition of Marketing Analytics includes three new chapters on big data analytics, insights and panel regression, including how to collect, separate and analyze big data. All of the advanced tools and techniques for predictive analytics have been updated, translating models such as tobit analysis for customer lifetime value into everyday use. Whether an experienced practitioner or having no prior knowledge, methodologies are simplified to ensure the more complex aspects of data and analytics are fully accessible for any level of application. Complete with downloadable data sets and test bank resources, this book supplies a concrete foundation to optimize marketing analytics for day-to-day business advantage.

Modelling

12 Implementing

Glossary

11 Statistical

405 Marketing AnalyticsMarketing and PR Table of Contents

5 Conclusion 13

ISBN

Description

Price:

2 Brief

1 How

This book « Provides an impartial overview of the various solution vendors and software providers available, enabling readers to select the most appropriate predictive analytic tools for their needs Features international case studies gleaned from the author’s more than 25 years of industry experience, and contains supplementary articles from recognised thought-leaders in the field

« Gives a holistic, balanced overview of predictive analytics, the universal branch of advanced analytics used to make predictions about unknown future events Description

8 How

406 Marketing AnalyticsMarketing and PR Table of Contents

3 Managing

6 Predicting

4 The

Predictive analytics has revolutionized marketing practice. It involves using many techniques from data mining, statistics, modelling, machine learning and artificial intelligence, to analyse current data and make predictions about unknown future events. In business terms, this enables companies to forecast consumer behaviour and much more. Predictive Analytics for Marketers will guide marketing professionals on how to apply predictive analytical tools to streamline business practices. Including comprehensive coverage of an array of predictive analytic tools and techniques, this book enables readers to harness patterns from past data, to make accurate and useful predictions that can be converted to business success. Truly global in its approach, the insights these techniques offer can be used to manage resources more effectively across all industries and sectors.

Author Information

Dr Barry Leventhal is a leading UK authority on geodemographics and a marketing analytics expert. He is Emeritus Chair of the Census and Geodemographics Group (CGG), which is an advisory board of The Market Research Society (MRS) and a leading voice in the UK information industry. He was recently awarded the MRS Gold Medal Award - the association’s rarest accolade, presented for the first time since 2008 - in recognition of his lifetime of exceptional achievement and contribution to the research profession.

5 Software

Using Data Mining for Business Edition:Advantage 1 Date: 03/02/2018 Price: £22.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749479930 ISBN Ebook: 9780749479947 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 234x154 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Marketing Analytics

Introduction to predictive analytics can predictive analytics help your business? Using data mining to build predictive models the data for predictive analytics analytical modelling toolkit solutions for predictive analytics customer behaviour using analytical models lifetimes – from customers to machines to build a customer segmentation baskets, citizens or businesses – applying predictive analytics in various sectors From people to products –using predictive analytics in retail How to benefit from social network analysis Testing the benefits of predictive models and other marketing effects Top tips for gaining business value from predictive analytics

9 Accounts,

Predictive Analytics for Marketers

7 Predicting

Written in clear, non-technical language, Predictive Analytics for Marketers contains case studies from the author’s more than 25 years of experience and articles from guest contributors, demonstrating how predictive analytics can be used to successfully achieve a range of business purposes.

Artificial ChoicePredictingMarketingIntelligenceandConsumer

An Overview of Tools and Techniques

Edition: 1 Date: 03/04/2017 Price: £24.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749479558 ISBN Ebook: 9780749479565 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 234x154 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Marketing Analytics

Author Information

Online resources: bonus chapters on AI, ensembles and neural nets, and finishing experiments, plus single and multiple product simulators.

Dr. Steven Struhl PhD, MBA, MA has more than 25 years’ experience in consulting and research, specializing in practical solutions based on statistical models of decisionmaking and behavior. In addition to text analytics and data mining, his work addresses how buying decisions are made, optimizing service delivery and product configurations and finding the meaningful differences among products and services. Steven also has taught graduate courses on statistical methods and data analysis. He speaks at conferences and has given numerous seminars on pricing, choice modelling, market segmentation and presenting data.

Description

The ability to predict consumer choice is a fundamental aspect to success for any business. In the context of artificial intelligence marketing, there are a wide array of predictive analytic techniques available to achieve this purpose, each with its own unique advantages and disadvantages. Artificial Intelligence Marketing and Predicting Consumer Choice serves to integrate these widely disparate approaches, and show the strengths, weaknesses, and best applications of each. It provides a bridge between the person who must apply or learn these problem-solving methods and the community of experts who do the actual analysis. It is also a practical and accessible guide to the many remarkable advances that have been recently made in this fascinating field.

« Serves to integrate widely disparate approaches to predicting consumer choice via artificial intelligence marketing, showing the strengths, weaknesses and best applications of each method and point of view.

« Includes extensive diagrams and charts, pointers on tools and techniques, definition boxes and practical hints and tips.

« Online resources: bonus chapters on AI, ensembles and neural nets, and finishing experiments, and a range of multiple or single product simulators

« Covers methods and techniques including Discrete Choice Modelling, Conjoint Analysis and Machine Learning Models, placing all of these in the wider context of predictive analytics and artificial intelligence marketing.

407 Marketing AnalyticsMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Who Should Read this Book and Why? 2 Getting the Project Going 3 Conjoint, Discrete Choice and Other Trade-offs: Let’s Do an Experiment 4 Creating the Best, Newest Thing: Discrete Choice Modelling 5 Conjoint Analysis and its Uses 6 Predictive Models: Via Classifications that Grow on Trees 7 Remarkable Predictive Models with Bayes Nets 8 Putting it Together: What to Use When This book

« Explores the human side of advanced analytics - using data to predict what people will choose.

This book « Full of case studies and examples demonstrating the use of the analytic techniques.

« Employs a pervasive example retail analyst as the vehicle to explain how theoretical concepts can be applied in practice across the range of data challenges.

Author Information Mike Grigsby has been involved in marketing science for more than 25 years. He was marketing research director at Millward Brown and has held leadership positions at Hewlett-Packard and the Gap. With a wealth of experience at the forefront of marketing science and analytics, he now heads up the strategic retail analysis practice at Targetbase. Mike is also known for academic work, having written articles for academic and trade journals and taught at graduate and undergraduate levels. He is a regular speaker at trade conventions and seminars.

RFM vs. segmentation 24 Marketing strategy

Targeting, Valuing, Segmenting and Loyalty Techniques Edition: 1 Date: 03/10/2016 Price: £32.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749477158 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477165 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 234x157 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Marketing Analytics

« Online resources: Supported by a selection of datasets in relation to specific chapters. Description Advanced Customer Analytics provides a clear guide to the specific analytical challenges faced by the retail sector. The book covers the nature and scale of data obtained in transactions, relative proximity to the consumer and the need to monitor customer behaviour across multiple channels. The book advocates a category management approach, taking into account the need to understand the consumer mindset through elasticity modelling and discount strategies, as well as targeted marketing and loyalty design.

408 Marketing AnalyticsMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Overview 2 Regression and Factor Analysis 3 Retail 4 Retail 5 Understanding and estimating demand 6 Price elasticity and discounts 7 Valuing communicationsmarketing(marcomm) 8 Forecasting future demand 9 Targeting the right customers 10 Maximizing the impact of mailing 11 The benefits of product bundling 12 Estimating time of purchase 13 Investigating the time of product purchase 14 Increasing customer lifetime value 15 Modelling (transactions)counts 16 Quantifying complexity of customer behaviour 17 Designing effective loyalty programmes 18 Identifying loyal customers 19 Introduction to segmentation 20 Tools for segmentationsuccessful 21 Drawing insights from segmentation 22 Creating targeted messages 23

A practical, no-nonsense approach to complex scenarios is taken throughout, breaking down tasks into easily digestible steps. The use of a fictional retail analyst ‘Scott’ helps to provide accessible examples of practice. Advanced Customer Analytics does not skirt around the complexities of this subject but offers conceptual support to steer retail marketers towards making the right choices for analysing their data. Online resources include a selection of datasets to support specific chapters.

Advanced Customer Analytics

« Considers the specific features of retail that set it apart from other disciplines, such as proximity to customers and the interface with merchandising, putting forward effective solutions to the challenges these present.

By decoding industry terminology and demonstrating practical application of data models once reserved for experts, Practical Text Analytics shows marketers how to frame the right questions, identify key themes and find hidden meaning from unstructured data. Readers will learn to develop powerful new marketing strategies to elevate customer experience, solidify brand value and elevate reputation. Online resources include self-test questions, chapter review Q&A and an Instructor’s Manual with text sources and instructions.

In an age where customer opinion and feedback can have an immediate, major effect upon the success of a business or organization, marketers must have the ability to analyze unstructured data in everything from social media and internet reviews to customer surveys and phone logs. Practical Text Analytics is an essential daily reference resource, providing real-world guidance on the effective application of text analytics. The book presents the analysis process so that it is immediately understood by the marketing professionals who must use it, so they can apply proven concepts and methods correctly and with confidence.

Author Information Steven Struhl PhD, MBA, MA has more than 25 years’ experience in consulting and research, specializing in practical solutions based on statistical models of decisionmaking and behaviour. In addition to text analytics and data mining, his work addresses how buying decisions are made, optimizing service delivery and product configurations and finding the meaningful differences among products and services. Steven also has taught graduate courses on statistical methods and data analysis. He speaks at conferences and has given numerous seminars on pricing, choice modelling, market segmentation and presenting data.

AnalyticsText

Interpreting Text and Unstructured Data for Business Intelligence Edition: 1 Date: 03/07/2015 Price: £32.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474010 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474027 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 233x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Marketing Analytics

Practical

409 Marketing AnalyticsMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Who should read this book? And what do you want to do today? 2 Getting ready: capturing, sorting, sifting, stemming and matching 3 In pictures: word clouds, wordles and beyond 4 Putting text together: clustering documents using words 5 In the mood for sentiment (and counting) 6 Predictive models 1: having words with regressions 7 Predictive models 2: classifications that grow on trees 8 Predictive models 3: all in the family with Bayes Nets 9 Looking forward and back This book « Provides real-world guidance on the application of text analytics for marketing professionals « Bridges the gap between marketers and data analysis experts by cutting through jargon « Helps marketers to frame the right questions and apply the results successfully « Online resources: Self-test questions, chapter review Q&A and an Instructor’s Manual with text sources and instructions Description

This book « Offers a well-rounded approach to the new realities of marketing professions, including discussions of multidisciplinary skills, tools, and the updated 4Ps (Product, Price, Promotion & Place) « Adapts a variety of cutting-edge business issues from the wider business world into a focused marketing context « Summarizes a large body of literature and academic research on new developments in marketing management, making them accessible and actionable « Explores case studies from significant brands and multiple real-world examples in a comprehensive way « Online resources: Lecture slides and further questions for group discussion Description Marketing as a practice is facing unprecedented challenges: a changing media landscape, an increasingly complex customer journey, innovative technologies, start-ups which disrupt traditional channels and a new generation of tech-savvy clients. How should students and practitioners adapt to this shifting landscape and address the skills gap that many of today’s marketers face? Advanced Marketing Management prepares students for this new world of marketing. Since traditional marketing approaches fail to provide convincing solutions to modern business realities, a new approach is urgently needed if marketers are to regain trust within their organizations.

Dr. Neda Jovanovic Dimitriadis is an academic researcher and guest lecturer on brand strategy, consumer behaviour and marketing communications. She specializes in behavioural research in marketing, branding and media planning.

Author Information

Using contemporary examples, business case studies and supporting pedagogy, Advanced Marketing Management will provide a critical exploration into the more advanced aspects of marketing management, including the gap that exists between formal marketing literature and real-world practice, discussion of multidisciplinary tools, and the crucial evolution of the ‘4Ps’. Summarizing a large body of literature and academic research on new developments, this book is the go-to guide for students, lecturers and practitioners, wanting to succeed as modern marketers.

Dr Jillian Ney is a consultant and guest lecturer on social media intelligence in the UK and Europe. Her work has featured at global conferences and has been used by Fortune 500 companies.

Dr Nikolaos Dimitriadis is an award-winning educator and consultant and the CEO of Trizma Neuro, a neuromarketing and neuroHR company. He is also Regional Director of The University of Sheffield International Faculty, CITY College, for the Western Balkans.

Online resources include lecture slides and further questions for group discussion.

Advanced ManagementMarketing Principles, Skills and Tools Edition: 1 Date: 03/11/2018 Price: £36.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480370 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480387 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Marketing Strategy

410 Marketing StrategyMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 The need for the new marketer 2 Neuroscience skills –Marketing and the human brain 3 Predictive skills – Marketing and data intelligence 4 Innovation skills – Marketing and creative thinking 5 Adaptability skills – Marketing and decision making 6 The 4EPs marketing mix, part 1 – Empathic product and experiential price 7 The 4EPs marketing mix, part 2 – Ever-present place and engaging promotion 8 Reorganizing the marketing function 9 Marketers – The new transformational leaders

Marketing Strategy is highly practical in approach. Chapters are supported by short tasks to complete throughout, to cement the reader’s understanding of the concepts discussed. Put together, these tasks create an easy to follow, step-by-step framework for creating a marketing strategy. The framework is adaptable and can be applied to any industry or business. Marketing Strategy also includes input from leading marketing strategists including Mark Ritson and organizations such as Mailchimp, the CIM and DMA.

Author Information Jenna Tiffany, based in London, UK and Lisbon, Portugal is Founder and Strategy Director at marketing agency Let’sTalk Strategy and is recognized as one of the top 50 marketers to follow in the world. A Chartered Marketer and awarded fellow of the IDM, she has worked with brands such as Shell, Hilton and World Duty-Free, and is an elected member of the prestigious DMA UK Email Marketing Council. Jenna Tiffany is also an international conference speaker, qualified teacher and a thought-leader on marketing trends.

Introduction 1 What is strategy? Scenario - Establishing the current situation Targets - Setting objectives Reach - Researching your customers Awareness - Planning your marketing campaign Tactics - Selecting the right channels Execution - Implementing your marketing strategy Generate - Tracking the results Yield - Analysing your strategy’s success Common pitfalls in marketing strategy Glossary Further resources This book « Presents an easy-to-follow framework for creating a marketing strategy which is scalable and adaptable and can be applied to any business or industry

Marketing Strategy Overcome Common Pitfalls and Create Effective Marketing Edition: 1 Date: 03/05/2021 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789667417 ISBN Ebook: 9781789667424 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Marketing Strategy

411 Marketing StrategyMarketing and PR Table of Contents

« Written by thought-leader Jenna Tiffany, who has been has been recognized as one of the top 100 female marketers to follow worldwide by Search Engine Journal « Identifies the most common pitfalls in everyday marketing practice and provides tools to preemptively avoid them « Supports key concepts with practical tasks for the reader to complete, to cement their understanding of the tasks discussed

TaskedDescriptionwithcreating marketing strategy? This book is for you. Learn about the most useful tools and models, dodge common mistakes, and optimize your marketing strategy success, with this practical and adaptable framework from award-winning thought-leader Jenna Tiffany.

Create an effective marketing strategy for your business with Marketing Strategy, which offers a clear, easy-to-follow overview of why strategy is important, how to create it, how to implement it, and - crucially - how to measure its success. Packed with global examples and case studies, the book opens by discussing the role strategy plays in any organization’s long-term vision. It also discusses the key models and frameworks that can be used to analyze the marketing environment, and offers information on segmentation, targeting and positioning. Importantly, it will outline some of the key challenges likely to crop up, and gives pre-emptive tools for avoiding them.

Author Information Christina Inge is the Founder and CEO of Thoughtlight, a tech consulting company which specializes in digital marketing and analytics strategies. She has worked with well-established brands such as Nissan, Smithsonian and Pega Systems, as well as a range of startups and nonprofits. Based in Boston, MA, she is a member of the Massachusetts Technology Leadership Council and has served on the board of the American Marketing Association-Boston. An instructor at Harvard University Extension School and Northeastern University College of Professional Studies, she is a frequent and sought-after speaker and has been published in numerous industry publications.

« Explores how to use data in a non-invasive, secure and ethical way, which respects consumer privacy and new global laws

StopDescriptionfeelingoverwhelmed by data and start using it to its full potential, to create an agile and forward-looking strategy that enables customer-centric marketing, builds your brand and develops product strategies.

Leverage Analytics and Data to Optimize Marketing Strategies

Marketing Metrics

Edition: 1 Date: 03/09/2022 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398606593 ISBN Ebook: 9781398606609 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Marketing Strategy

This book « Shows how to create an agile data-powered marketing strategy to increase engagement, enable customer personalization and build brand and product strategies

Many brands talk about creating a marketing strategy powered by data, analytics and metrics. Yet too often they’re still overwhelmed by data, or unsure of how to use it to create a flexible and futurefocused strategy that doesn’t just validate what’s happened in the past. Marketing Metrics takes readers through all the stages of implementing a data-first strategy, from early-stage adoption to more advanced customization. Featuring examples from a range of organizations including Coca-Cola, Sephora and The American Marketing Association, it shows how to create a strategy which leverages consumer data for customer-centric marketing, establishes the ROI of channels and campaigns, strengthens brands and creates data-driven product strategies.

« Describes how to communicate data analysis effectively to stakeholders, and how to develop the skills needed to be a data-savvy marketer

412 Marketing StrategyMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 The fundamentals of datadriven strategy 2 Leveraging customer data for customer-centric marketing 3 Channel data and metrics for ROI 4 Brand-building with analytics 5 Metrics-based content marketing 6 Data-driven product strategy 7 Price and place - data for pricing models and distribution managementchannel 8 Marketing performance metrics 9 Incorporating cross-functional data 10 Data governance and the new privacy laws 11 Building dashboards and data evangelism 12 The skills of the data-savvy marketer

« Includes best practice case studies and examples from a range of organizations in a variety of sectors, including Coca-Cola, Sephora and The American Marketing Association

Covering the range of new global laws that impact consumer privacy and data collection and usage, Marketing Metrics shows how to use data in a non-invasive, secure and ethical way. Also showing how to communicate critical data to the right stakeholders and the skills of the data-savvy marketer, this is a clear and jargon-free guide to creating a future-focused and data-powered marketing strategy.

The V.A.L.U.E. competency framework –competenciescorefor B2B differentiation The role of sales and marketing in organizationsB2B–what is important?

413 Marketing StrategyMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 B2B organizations are stuck in a Sea of Sameness 2 Why does sameness happen in B2B marketing? 3

The visionary – competencies for seeing the next competitive move The activator – competencies for getting things done

The learner – competencies for staying in tune with your customers Usefulness – competencies for becoming indispensable to your customers The evaluator – competencies for making good decisions Building a competencyV.A.L.U.E.culture 11 Using V.A.L.U.E. competencies to stand out from your competitors

This book « Presents fascinating original research comparing the websites and social media feeds of over 30 organizations from various sectors, proving how consumers are dealing with a ‘sea of sameness’ with many of them saying the same thing « Offers a clear, seven-step, values-based framework that will help organizations break away and differentiate themselves from the competition « Helps companies identify the exact capabilities, attitudes and behaviours that need to be adjusted to escape the ‘herd instinct’, enabling them to meet consumers’ needs more effectively, and therefore stand out from the competition

Stand-out Marketing presents original research which compares the content produced by organizations in a range of sectors which demonstrates that customers are left swimming in a “sea of sameness” by copycat marketing that makes choice difficult.

« Helps organizations create differential value for their customers, by re-focusing on the consumer and the kinds of solutions they want, rather than the kinds of solutions the organization has traditionally offered “HowDescriptiondoweget customers to choose us over our competitors?”In a crowded market it’s imperative to demonstrate that you understand what your customers value and can communicate how you can solve their problem better than the competition.

Author Information Dr Simon Kelly is President of Shake Marketing, and was formerly Marketing Director (SVP) of British Telecom. He is also Senior Lecturer in Marketing at Sheffield Business School, and Lecturer in Marketing and Sales at University of York. Dr Paul Johnston is a visiting lecturer at Nottingham Trent University, Sheffield Hallam University in the UK and the IESEG management school in Paris.

Stand Out Marketing Marketing and PR Edition: 1 Date: 03/12/2020 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789664829 ISBN Ebook: 9781789664836 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Marketing Strategy

Stacey Danheiser is CEO and founder of Shake Marketing. She is also CEO and Course Creator for Customer Value Link.

On the back of this unique and fascinating research, Stand-out Marketing sets out a framework of five competencies for business leaders, marketing and sales professionals to successfully differentiate themselves from competitors. These include seeing the next competitive move, staying in tune with your customers and becoming indispensable to them, activating and evaluating initiatives, as well as building an organizational culture which enables these competencies. Featuring interviews with industry experts, tools and exercises throughout, Stand-out Marketing is an essential resource to help companies stand out, deliver genuine value, and achieve competitive advantage.

Malcolm McDonald on Value Propositions is a stepby-step guide to understanding exactly why financially quantified value propositions will help readers to increase revenue and deliver tangible results.

13 Developing

Description

Summary of the value proposition process

From understanding how buying decisions are made, through to financial dashboards and value quantification tools, Malcolm McDonald on Value Propositions is perfect for anyone looking to integrate financial success into their proposition, and gain understanding of how it can be used to deliver and communicate value.

7 Which

12 Creating

3 Quantifying

Highly practical and filled with useful tools and checklists, this succinct guide explains the process of developing a value proposition from start to finish, how to use segmentation appeal to the relevant key accounts, and to ensure it is both financially grounded and has resonance with customers.

An important introduction –getting the best out of your value proposition financially quantified value propositions will make you richer the emotional elements of value propositions exactly is a financially quantified value proposition?

This book « Provides readers with a simple, direct methodology to develop and financially quantify their value propositions Includes research that demonstrates the impact that quantified value propositions have on a company’s financial performance, and why successfully implementing them will make a company more profitable Features a wealth of tools, frameworks and templates for the reader to apply to their own day-today business practices, and additional downloadable templates and resources

Author Information Professor Malcolm McDonald is Emeritus Professor at Cranfield & Honorary Professor at Warwick Business School. He is Chairman of six companies, and works with the operating boards of some of the world’s leading multinationals. He has written over 40 books including the best-selling Marketing Plans: How to prepare them, how to use them Grant Oliver is MD at 90 Day Action Plan, and has over 20 years’ experience in software and management consultancy. He has been interim IT director in the NHS, Finance Director of a software company, and NonExecutive Director of a Housing Association.

2 How

Malcolm McDonald on PropositionsValue How to Develop Them, How to Quantify Them Edition: 1 Date: 03/10/2018 Price: £22.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481766 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481759 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 230x157 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Marketing Strategy

A value proposition is an innovation or feature that clarifies a company’s core purpose and identity. In the same way profit lies at the heart of every business, so does the value proposition, communicating how its service or products fulfil the needs of their customers. While many organizations understand the importance of having a clearly defined value proposition to help them become more profitable, many businesses struggle to use them effectively.

414 Marketing StrategyMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1

11 Developing

An overview of the value proposition process – where to start Why it is critical to understand how key buying decisions are made key accounts should you develop value propositions for? Which segments should you develop value propositions for? key account and segment needs before building a value proposition Understanding our own asset base and capabilities value propositions and financially quantifying value propositions and presenting value propositions that resonate with customers Value-celling – How to maximize value creation in supply chains Financial analysis, value quantification tools and financial dashboards

4 What

9 Understanding

« A compact guide for busy professionals, containing all essential info in a user-friendly, pedagogically rich format featuring helpful margin notes and key points.

« Explains the key concepts and principles of marketing planning in an accessible, engaging fashion.

This book « Written by the internationally acknowledged authority on marketing planning, Malcolm McDonald.

Description A primer for marketing professionals and students, the second edition of Malcolm McDonald On Marketing Planning provides a clear guide to marketing planning. Focusing on the practical application of marketing planning, this book will guide readers through the production of a marketing plan that has real world application. Key content includes defining markets and segments, setting marketing objectives and strategies, advertising and sales promotion strategies, and price and sales Withstrategies.anemphasis

415 Marketing PlanningMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Let’s get real 2 Getting rid of that big managerial nonsense 3 Understand the real meaning of customer value 4 A very practical way to begin planning a profitable future 5 Market segmentation 6 What do our customers want? 7 How to set marketing objectives 8 How to set marketing strategies 9 A step-by-step strategic planning system 10 How to deal with adversity

Malcolm McDonald on Marketing Plans and Edition:Strategy 2 Date: 03/11/2016 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478216 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478223 Pages: 192 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Marketing Planning

Author Information Professor Malcolm McDonald is a global leading authority on marketing. He was until recently Professor of Marketing and Deputy Director at Cranfield University School of Management, and is now an Emeritus Professor at the University as well as being an Honorary Professor at Warwick Business School and Academic Advisor at the Oxford College of Marketing. He has consulted many major companies in strategic marketing and is Chairman of numerous companies for some of the world’s leading multinationals. He has written more than 40 books including the best-selling Marketing Plans: How to prepare them, how to use them

on practicality, this fully revised second edition has been thoroughly overhauled to contain new content on the essentials of marketing planning and the strategic marketing process. Online resources include multiple templates as a practical toolkit for marketing planning.

PlanningMarketing Understanding

« Includes adaptable business templates and tools that the reader can use when establishing their own marketing plans.

« Online resources: multiple templates as a practical toolkit for marketing planning.

to creating a successful marketing plan: from carrying out a marketing audit, setting objectives and devising budgets to writing, presenting and implementing the plan.

How to Write a Marketing Plan

This book « Provides a step-by-step guide to formulating a workable and successful marketing plan « Is part of the bestselling Creating Success series, which has sold over 1.5 million copies and contains practical advice on essential work skills to help you develop your career « Features a free downloadable marketing plan template « New to this edition: updated to include the use of new technologies and with new templates and revised marketing models

416 Marketing PlanningMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Situation analysis – The marketing audit 3 Objectives 4 Strategies and action plans 5 The distribution plan 6 The advertising and promotions plan 7 Costs and budgets 8 Writing the plan 9 Presenting the plan, follow-up and revision 10 Mini-plans and quick plans 11 Appendix – Marketing plan for the UK market

How to Write a Marketing Plan includes advice on producing mini-plans and the most current information on email marketing, web usage, mobile commerce and social media This 7th edition now features even more practical exercises, useful templates, and top tips to help you develop this allimportant business skill. Including helpful chapter summaries and a detailed sample marketing plan, it is essential reading for anyone who wants to boost their product or business.

The Creating Success series of books...

Author Information John Westwood has held a wide variety of senior sales and marketing positions and is currently an independent marketing consultant, based in East Sussex, UK. He is the author of The Marketing Plan, 30 Minutes to Write a Marketing Plan, The Marketing Plan Workbook and Marketing Your Business, all published by Kogan Page.

ADescriptionstep-by-stepguide

Unlock vital skills, power up your performance and get ahead with the bestselling Creating Success series. Written by experts for new and aspiring managers and leaders, this million-selling collection of accessible and empowering guides will get you up to speed in no time. Packed with clever thinking, smart advice and the kind of winning techniques that really get results, you’ll make fast progress, quickly reach your goals and create lasting success in your career.

Define Your Strategy, Plan Effectively and Reach Your Marketing Goals

Edition: 7 Date: 03/07/2022 Price: £12.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398605688 ISBN Ebook: 9781398605695 Pages: 192 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Marketing Planning

417 Public RelationsMarketing and PR Table of Contents Introduction 1 PR is all Spin, Smokescreens and Lies 2 PR Results Can’t Be Measured 3 All Publicity is Good Publicity 4 The Press Release is Dead 5 The Media Ignores Good News 6 You Have to Pay to See Social Media Benefits 7 PR is Glamorous 8 Calling the Media is a No-No 9 That You Can Make Something Go Viral 10 You Have to Be an Extrovert to Succeed in PR 11 PR is the Silver Bullet 12 Good People and Products Market Themselves 13 The More You Pay, the Better the Job Done 14 PR Results are Instant 15 Consumers ConversationsWantWith Brands 16 Working In-House is Easier 17 Media Relationships are Especially Important 18 Gender Wage Gap Figures 19 Conclusion This book « Frames a critical look at the world of PR by exploring a number of myths that endure, and offers frank discussions of what they reveal about the industry « Explores fascinating PR myths, and provides genuine insights into where these have stemmed from and what lessons they offer startup owners, brand marketers, communications practitioners and students « Written in an engaging, anecdotal style while still being underpinned by research and clear, evidence-based conclusions Description

Myths of PR All Publicity is Good Publicity and Other Popular Misconceptions

Myths of PR uses popular myths about the theory and practice of public relations as a vehicle for helping startup owners, brand marketers, communications practitioners and students to distinguish between fads and tried-and-tested PR practice. Its purpose is to shatter widespread misconceptions about PR, and grant readers insights into why these myths have endured in spite of clearly demonstrable evidence to the contrary.

By exploring topics that readers will relate to (though many might frequently misunderstand), Myths of PR will shed new light on essential PR methodology. From the assumption that PR is a neverending party, propagated by the way the industry is shown in the media and entertainment, to more potentially damaging misconceptions such as the often-repeated ‘all publicity is good publicity’, it is an engaging, anecdotal read that offers authentic insights into the reality of PR practice from one of the brightest and most exciting young communication experts in the UK.

Edition: 1 Date: 03/04/2017 Price: £15.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749479596 ISBN Ebook: 9780749479602 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 233x156 Product Category: General Subject: Public Relations

Author Information Listed in PR Week’s 29 under 29 list and named one of ‘the brightest young social media communicators’, Rich Leigh has a rich and varied PR background, having led award-winning campaigns and household name accounts at digital agency 10 Yetis and consumer agency Frank PR. He now runs Radioactive PR, working with brands big and small, as well as a range of personal PR clients. Rich Leigh created PRexamples.com, dedicated to the best in up-to-date PR stunts and campaigns. He also co-founded blogger outreach service bloggabase, used by brands including Disney, Ralph Lauren and Tesco.

418 Public RelationsMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Planning and managing – The context 2 Public relations in context 3 Starting the planning process 4 Research and analysis 5 Communication theory and setting aims and objectives 6 Knowing the public and messages 7 Strategy and tactics 8 Timescales and resources 9 Knowing what has been achieved – Evaluation and review

Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns provides a blueprint for success, and is widely regarded as one of the best ‘how-to’ guides for students and practitioners. Digestible and easy to read, this fifth edition presents a 12-point plan for ensuring success of campaigns of all sizes, covering vital areas including the role of public relations in organizations, the importance of context, research and analysis, setting objectives, strategy and tactics, timescales and resources, evaluation and review.

With discussion of new developments in the industry, from the gig economy and online influencers, to disruptive models, this fully updated new edition addresses the need for agile planning and draws on fresh case studies to provide up-to-date examples of best practice. Supported by a suite of online resources, Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns is an invaluable guide for students and practitioners alike. Online resources include extended case studies, lecture slides, discussion questions and assessment tasks.

Planning

RelationsManagingandPublicCampaigns

A Strategic Approach Edition: 5 Date: 03/12/2020 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789663204 ISBN Ebook: 9781789663211 Pages: 352 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Public Relations

This book « Covers all aspects of planning and managing campaigns in a structured way, from research and analysis, to objectives, strategy and tactics, timescales, resources, evaluation and review Features best-practice examples from organizations including Procter & Gamble, Co-op, McDonalds and the UK Government New to this edition: material on the latest developments such as online influencers, the role of big data in stakeholder identification and disruptive models Online resources: extended case studies, lecture slides, discussion questions and assessment tasks

Description Taking a public relations campaign from planning through to implementation can seem overwhelming.

Author Information Dr Anne Gregory is a professor of corporate communication and leading international academic. She is based in the School of Business and Law at the University of Huddersfield, and previously spent many years in public relations practice with senior experience both in-house and in consultancy. She remains a consultant and an advisor at board level to several large organizations.

Using case studies from industries as varied as financial services, technology, travel, automotive and more, along with best practice examples from Adobe, Mastercard, Southwest, Ford and other world class organizations, PR Technology, Data and Insights shows professional communicators how to optimize technology, lead with data, quantify PR’s ability to convert public relations outputs to business outcomes, and deliver insights that empower executive decision-making.

Author Information Mark Weiner is Chief Insights Officer for PublicRelay, Inc. He lives in Ponte Vedra Beach, Florida. He has lectured at public relations programs at Columbia University, The University of Texas at Austin, UNC-Chapel Hill and New York University. He is an advisor for The University of Florida Public Relations Advisory Council, trustee for the Institute for Public Relations, member of the Arthur Page Society and a member of the PR News Public Relations Hall of Fame. He is the 2018 recipient of the Institute for Public Relations Jack Felton Medal for Lifetime Achievement.

PR Technology, Data and Insights Igniting a Positive Return on Your Communications Investment Edition: 1 Date: 03/04/2021 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398600409 ISBN Ebook: 9781398600416 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 235x157 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Public Relations

Data,Descriptiontechnology and insights have forever changed the public relations and corporate communications function. Failure to adapt is more a matter of willingness than inability.

Now, technology, data and insights inform more meaningful objectives and elevate performance evaluation. The result is a positive return on PR investment, reduced reputational risk and optimal efficiency. By ignoring these essential assets, PR professionals risk losing executive attention and organizational investment. While “building buzz” or “breaking through the media clutter” may have been adequate measures of success in the past, the top executives who fund and evaluate corporate communications expect much more, including a quantifiable and positive return on PR investment.

419 Public RelationsMarketing and PR Table of Contents Introduction 1 Technology, Data, and Insights 1 Technology 2 Data 3 Insights 2 The Public ContinuumRelations 4 The Landscape Analysis 5 Setting Objectives 6 Strategy and Tactics 7 Evaluation This book « Reveals the specific purpose-built technologies, data assets and actionable insights that PR professionals can use to inform better executive decisions « Outlines how you can use technology, data and insights to quantify PRs contribution to business objectives « Includes case studies from Mastercard, Cisco, Southwest Airlines, Adobe, Oracle, Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation, KPMG, Bank of NY Mellon, Wells Fargo, Visa, Audi, IBM, FedEx, NFL, Airbus and General Motors

Leaders assume that corporate communications and PR professionals already understand the fundamentals of business, and they expect an ability to contextualize PR objectives, outputs and outcomes in the language of business. PR Technology, Data and Insights helps communications professionals understand the purpose-built technologies, data assets and actionable insights available to them while sharing best practices to apply these assets for improved PR performance over time, versus objectives and against competitors.

Ethical practice in any professional discipline is guided by age-old philosophical perspectives, but its modern parameters are continually evolving. Ongoing developments in technology, social media and social contexts mean that public relations and its practices are constantly changing, and so do the ethical questions faced by practitioners in the field.

Ethics in Public Relations offers a lively exploration of the key ethical concerns present in the public relations world today, written by an accredited academic with over 26 years’ professional experience in the field.

TheDescriptionweightofsocial responsibility in public relations (PR) has never been more pronounced.

A Guide to Best Practice Edition: 3 Date: 03/04/2016 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749477264 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477271 Pages: 192 Format (mm): 235x157 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Public Relations

Face the ethical questions and dilemmas that are inherent to public relations and ensure you practice across the public relations spectrum in an ethical and socially responsible manner with this fully updated guide, packed with useful tools and insights to support those in PR and corporate Engagingcommunications.andaccessible,

Ensure the professionalism and credibility of your business using the practical tips and guidance in this book, written by a leading academic in the field and recommended for PR students and practitioners alike.

This book « Demonstrates that an individual’s sense of morality has an impact on decision making and ethical business behaviour, and helps managers account for this in business practice « Helps practitioners understand and react to ethical consequences in the face of fast-moving technological advances « Explores the concept of personal ethics spilling into the professional realm in relation to topical issues such as sexual harassment and social media « Relates underlying ethical issues such as utilitarianism and moral relativism to everyday issues

Ethics in RelationsPublic

420 Public RelationsMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 What Lies Beneath 1 Before we begin: New profession... or one of the oldest? 2 Lies, truth and honesty: their role in PR practice 3 Truth, trust and the virtue of being ‘good’. 4 Whose rights are right? 5 The trouble with rules 6 Utilitarianism: Right acts and wrong reasons 2 Ethics and the Practitioner 7 Your moral development: Cultivating respect and humility 8 Codes of ethics: The good, the bad and the (almost) ugly 9 Conflicts of Interest: Sex and other relationship issues 10 (Very) personal ethical decisions: Whistle-blowing and moonlighting 3 Strategies and Dilemmas 11 Public Relations ethics and traditional media 12 Public Relations ethics and social media 13 Persuasion propaganda and advocacy: The ethics of influence 14 Supporting ‘good causes’: bad ethics or bad taste? 15 Deceptive authorship: Ghostwriting and plagiarism 4 Organizations, Ethics and PR 16 Making decisions: The true reality of everyday ethics 17 PR and the corporate ethics programme 18 The future of ethical PR: education and leadership Appendix 1: For your bookshelf Appendix 2: Chartered Institute of PR Code of Conduct Appendix 3: Guidelines for the ethics audit

Fully updated, this third edition includes an entirely new chapter on the uses of ethics in social media, covering topical issues such as blogger engagement and the relationship between employee social media activity and organizational reputation.

Author Information Patricia J Parsons APR, FCPRS spent 26 years as a faculty member and former chairman in the Department of Communication Studies at Mount Saint Vincent University in Halifax, Canada retiring recently as a full Professor. Her research, writing and teaching focused on public relations ethics and strategy, and healthcare communication. She is the author of a dozen books and numerous papers for the professional and lay press. She is accredited in public relations and is a member of the Canadian Public Relations Society’s College of Fellows. Prof. Parsons lives in Toronto and can be reached via email at ethicsinpr@gmail.com or via Twitter @ ethicsinpr.

The social media Hydra: Principles of transparency versus suppression of information in crisis mitigation 11 Crises in action: Lessons learned from crisis responses from five major brands 12

Author Information Kate Hartley is co-founder of Polpeo, a crisis simulation training consultancy that works with some of the biggest brands in the world. Hartley has 25 years’ agency-side experience in crisis and reputation management and corporate PR. She has spoken and run workshops on the impact of social media on crisis management at international events including SXSW, The Global PR Summit, PR Week’s Crisis Comms, and Social Media Today’s Social Shake Up. She is a member of the CIPR and the PRCA, and sits on the PRCA’s digital steering committee which is designed to shape digital best practice in the PR industry.

Influence

The importance of telling the truth and its role in crisis and reputation management 13 Withstanding the attack: The importance of resilience in your communications teams 3 Building your communicationcrisisstrategy and response 14 The brain’s response to a crisis and training your team to cope 15 Insights from communicationcrisisinfluencers on managing the threats facing brands 16 The role of leadership in a crisis and preparing your crisis team 17 Showing humanity and empathy in a crisis: When it counts and when it’s empty 18 What do I do first? Getting your priorities right in a crisis 19 Harnessing the crowd: Using influencers and advocates to calm the crisis: An interview with Scott Guthrie 20 The role of technology in crisis management: Using predictive analysis, social listening, search data and insights 21 Practical steps to prepare, execute and analyse a crisis response (and avoid common pitfalls)

Communicate in a Crisis Understand, Engage and Consumer Behaviour Maximize Brand Trust Edition: 1 Date: 03/08/2019 Price: £22.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749486501 ISBN Ebook: 9780749486822 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Public Relations

This book turns the traditional crisis management approach on its head, starting by understanding changing consumer behaviours and the new ‘threat’ for brands, then outlining practical steps to prepare, synchronize and execute a coordinated brand response across all channels - under pressure. It reveals why we love to hate our favourite brands, how to recognize a day to day problem from a crisis, and offers valuable advice, such as using influencers and brand advocates to address social media trolls, rumours and the impact of fake news. With unique case studies, interviews and anecdotes from global leaders, Communicate in a Crisis will embed a bottom-up culture of long-term reputation management, always ready to face the unexpected.

This book « Clarifies a coordinated crisis response plan to overwhelming and often misinformed media and public reaction on social media « Enables organizations to maximize positive customer engagement with a practical, step by step understanding of how a crisis spreads, the peaks and troughs of consumer reaction and how to turn it into an opportunity « Embeds a ‘bottom-up’ crisis culture, including how to differentiate a daily problem from a crisis, engage in early mitigation and legally sound stakeholder response « Features case studies from leading global brands, as well as personal anecdotes from front-line industry experience Description Communicate in a Crisis is the definitive guide for any PR or marketing professional to recognize, plan and respond to a sudden wildfire of consumer-led reaction, ‘manipulated outrage’ sparked from interaction on news feed algorithms, fuelled by social media and the constant demand for an instantaneous response.

421 Public RelationsMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Understanding how consumer behaviour has changed 1 Kick a brand when it’s down – Why we love to hate our favourite brands 2 The issue of declining trust in the spread of fake news 3 Who do I trust? The rise of individual influencers versus declining traditional media 4 It’s outrageous! Understanding the new response to outrage and bad news, and the role of social media 5 I want it now – Managing consumer expectation for instant information 6 Profile of a troll –Understanding and dealing with trolling behaviour 7 The conscious consumer – The question complex and pressures of brand transparency 2 The role of changing consumer behaviour in crisis management and response 8 The new challenges –Understanding the impact of changing consumer behaviour on crisis strategiesmanagement 9 What is acceptable in a crisis? How to differentiate business as usual versus crisis management 10

Influential Streamline 1 Date: 03/04/2021 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781789666137 ISBN Ebook: 9781789666144 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Internal Communications

422 Internal CommunicationsMarketing and PR Table of Contents Introduction 1 Foundations 1 Introduction to internal communication 2 Without communication there is chaos 3 Understanding organizations and leadership 4 Understanding people 2 Applying the model 5 The Field Model 6 Data and diagnostics 7 The fix 8 Applying the model and making it work for the long term 9 Conclusion

Your Corporate Communication to Drive Efficiency and Edition:Engagement

CommunicationInternal

Backed up with data and statistics from industry reports on workplace culture, Influential Internal Communication is based on The Field Model and draws on research with CEO’s, some of the best insights into people, organisations and chaos. The theory is backed up with real world case studies, showing how chaos can impact a range of organizations of varying size and industry. Written by the 2020 President of the Chartered Institute of Public Relations (CIPR), Influential Internal Communication will streamline any organization’s IC practices, and help to drive engagement, efficiency and profit across the board.

Author Information Jenni Field has nearly 20 years’ experience in communications and is based in Berkshire, UK. She has worked at Director level for numerous organizations including the global pharmaceutical company Perrigo. Jenni Field was the 2020 President of the CIPR, and is both Chartered and a fellow of the Institute. She has been quoted by The Times, Raconteur and listed on the Institute of IC’s 30 under 30, and Inspiring Workplaces top 101 influencers in employee engagement. She now runs her own consultancy, Redefining Communications, and speaks regularly for organisations and at industry events.

« Includes

This book « Delivers a clear, repeatable methodology that will transform an organization’s IC practices from chaos to calm Uses data and statistics to prove the impact that IC has on profit margins, and gives practical tips for getting board members on side for IC initiatives Highlights relevant research, comments and input from leading industry figures including Seth Godin and Brené Brown practical case studies from companies such as Perrigo, SSP and transport organizations like fire services and airports

As the title suggests, Influential Internal Communication proves just how influential internal communications (IC) is, and the measurable impact it has on an organization’s growth. For many organizations, IC often slips down the list of priorities when there are high pressure, high stakes business situations to cope with. This causes a sense of chaos and confusion within the organization that will - eventually - permeate to external customers and clients. Influential Internal Communication presents a clear, adaptable methodology that will help readers understand, diagnose and fix their own communication challenges, thereby transforming the chaos into calm.

communication with the powerful and easy-to-follow methodology presented in this book, featuring insight from experts including Simon Sinek and Brené Brown. Better communication will mean better business practice company-wide as well as increased employee engagement, happier clients and customers, and stronger profits.

StreamlineDescriptionyourorganization’s

tools and advice throughout « Includes

Author Information Liam FitzPatrick is Joint Managing Partner of change communication consultancy Agenda Strategies. He has worked both in-house and for major consultancies running change campaigns, developing communications teams and advising on metrics and evaluation.

Klavs Valskov is Joint Managing Partner of change communication consultancy Agenda Strategies. Since 1999 he has worked in PR, marketing and communication with organisations including L’Oreal, Accenture, Nordea Bank and the Danish Government.

and put

A Manual for Practitioners Edition: 1 Date: 03/08/2014 Price: £26.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749469320 ISBN Ebook: 9780749469337 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Internal Communications

This book Offers a refreshingly practical introduction to internal communications covers core concepts and models, skills and readers both understand key theories them with ready-to-use templates for communications in a variety of situations, including crises, health and safety, branding, redundancy bad news, mergers and acquisitions, customer service business strategies Supported by online resources, including slides for lecturers

into practice

423 Internal CommunicationsMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 What internal communication is and why it matters 2 Organizing communicationinternal 3 Planning 4 Audiences 5 Messaging 6 Channels 7 Why line managers matter and how to support them 8 Working with senior leaders 9 Change 10 Research and evaluation for internal communicators 11 Developing yourself and the team

Written by experts with extensive experience as consultants and in-house leaders in the private, public and not-for-profit sectors, Internal Communications covers how to build an internal communications team and plan; devise messages and decide which channels to use; work with line managers and senior leaders; research and evaluate internal communications and support change within an Supportedorganization.by easy to follow models, example explanations of the core theory, and case studies, it provides students and internal communicators alike with the practical tools and advice they need to make a difference in an organization. The book is also supported by online resources, including slides for lecturers.

Liam co-founded the Black Belt series of training for internal communicators and lectures and has served as an external examiner at UK universities. A Fellow of the UK Chartered Institute of Public Relations, he has been involved in planning the education and training of PR practitioners. He is a also member of the Global Certification Council of the International Association of Business Communicators.

From 2008-2013 Klavs was the award-winning Global Director of Communication in Maersk Line managing a team around the world working on public relations, crises, internal communications, social media and customer campaigns. Klavs is part of the Advisory Board at the Institute of Business Communication at Copenhagen Business School. He holds a double MA in Communication and Business Studies.

CommunicationsInternal

and

GetDescriptioninternalcommunications

right in your organization and the benefits are clear: motivated staff, better financial performance, a strong external reputation and delighted customers are just a few of the reasons why getting your message over to staff effectively matters.

which

all the

Internal Communications explores what good practice in internal communications looks like, providing a no-nonsense, step-by-step approach to devising an internal communications strategy.

and new

processes « Helps

Author Information Constant Berkhout is a passionate practitioner of retail marketing and shopper psychology. He obtained a Master of Science in Economics Cum Laude with a major in Marketing at the University of Groningen in the Netherlands. Through his own agency, Berkhout works with retailers and suppliers in Europe, the Middle East and Asia including Conagra Brands, Danone, GrandVision, Heineken, JDE, Jumbo, Migros, SPAR International and Sonos. Before setting up his own agency, he held commercial and insights roles at Ahold Delhaize, Kraft, P&G and PepsiCo. Delivering Shopper Delight

Edition: 1 Date: 03/11/2015 Price: £32.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749476915 ISBN Ebook: 9780749476922 Pages: 296 Format (mm): 235x158 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Retail

If you are a marketing, branding or supply chain professional working in retail seeking straightforward and research-driven techniques for building lasting customer loyalty, or you are responsible for driving retail strategy in your organization, let Retail Marketing Strategy be your guide.

424 RetailMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Shopper happiness 1 Delivering shopper happiness 2 Shoppers are people 2 The myth of impulse purchasing 3 Tapping into irrational shopper behaviour 4 Understanding the shopper brain through neuro research 3 Channel choices 5 Channel preference: the future of the hypermarket channel 6 What the shopper wants from online shopping channels 4 Fact-driven decision making 7 Getting your assortment right 8 Really making loyalty card programmes work 9 Making big data digestible 5 In-store execution 10 The unstoppable growth of private labels and opportunities for A-brands 11 The unexplainable effect of music 12 Can scents work wonders? 13 Self-scanning is more than savings 6 Organizational development 14 The birth of managementcategory 15 True customer understanding 16 Shopper marketing: new phase of trade marketing 7 Embracing the shopper 17 Retailers in action to increase shopper happiness This book « Includes current insights derived from neuromarketing research into consumer behaviour « Provides practical tools that are robust and easy to use to translate the theory into tangible results « Contains new models for retail brand management based on first-hand experience at major global retailers and suppliers Description Basing shopper marketing strategy on customer insights is what differentiates market leading retail brands from weaker competitors. Many retail organizations lack business development and strategic departments that collect experiences, set benchmarks and create models and manuals. Retail Marketing Strategy makes the information available to drive new ways of thinking and make retail practice more agile for everyone. Outlining the five key capabilities required for retail excellence, namely in-store execution; organizational development; fact-driven decision making; multi-channel operations, and understanding customers, Retail Marketing Strategy answers some of the most difficult questions in retail including how to innovate to develop new ways to interact with customers across multiple channels, and how to replicate online success stories from other sectors. Practical steps are put forward for collating and interpreting the data generated in shopper activity, helping to make sense of trends and build effective strategy. Guidance is based throughout on neuromarketing research, providing a clear framework for building in experiential elements such as scent or music into the retail environment to really engage with consumers on an emotional level.

Retail StrategyMarketing

Despite the challenge to establish stores and big-box retailers, there’s a rapid increase in the number of retail start-ups and consistent growth in the independent sector. From beard shops and barbers, through cafes and coffee shops, to ‘retailment’ concept stores and boutique consumer-focused experiences, the specialist retail sector is booming.

Author Information Rowland Gee is former Chief Executive of Moss Bros Group plc. Under his leadership, Moss Bros entered a strategic business relationship with Hugo Boss, resulting in the UK establishment of the brand. He is cofounder of Grey4Gold Ltd, a professional skills matching service for retail. Danny Sloan was BAA Director of Planning 2012, ensuring BAA airports delivered the First and Lasting Impression for the UK across its airports during the London Olympics. He is co-founder of Grey4Gold Ltd. Graham Symes is an experienced finance director in retail and wholesale fashion, with clients including Harrods, Harvey Nichols, Selfridges, and Christian Lacroix.

Introduction 1 Getting to grips with retail 1 The issues facing the UK retail trade today 2 Creating your retail marketing plan 2 Analysing and positioning your retail business in the existing market 3 Generating a powerful SWOT analysis for your retail business 4 Planning your retail marketing strategy 5 Building your retail marketing mix 6 Winning in retail – know your market, know your customer 7 Understanding the basic principles of shopping 8 Attracting and retaining customers online, using on-brand content and social media 3 Effective finance planning and control 9 How to kickstart your retail business 10 Generating a results-driven business plan 11 A straightforward guide to sales, stock and profit 12 Selection and management of retail systems and controls 4 Buying and merchandisingvisual 13 Step one to procurement and merchandising – Understand your business and the marketplace you will be entering 14 Efficient buying techniques to make money 15 Controlling and measuring product performance and establishing KPIs 16 Building and maintaining relationships in retail for longterm returns 17 Understanding customers’ behaviour and information overload – The need to make the product focused, visually clear and correctly pricepositioned 5 Maximizing customer feedback and the visual experience 18 Visual merchandising –Managing space performance, layout and add-on selling to encourage purchase 19 Creating your global signpost through online merchandising 6 Challenges for bricks-andmortar retailers 20 Understanding your lease –and how local authorities can benefit you 7 How good should become sensational 21 Why good today is not good enough in the current retail trade 22

Conclusion – Your journey

The Retail Start-Up Book provides clear guidance and advice on how to develop a winning retail strategy that seamlessly merges online and offline tactics. Introducing the science of shopping and how to understand customer behaviours and needs, it explores the essential steps of developing a business plan, marketing and promoting a business and advising on buying and visual merchandising.

425 RetailMarketing and PR Table of Contents

The Retail Start-Up Book Marketing and PR Edition: 1 Date: 03/05/2019 Price: £22.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749484729 ISBN Ebook: 9780749484736 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 240x160 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Retail

This book « Learn how to plan and deliver a successful retail vision, master the best routes to market and communicate effectively with new and existing customers « Shows how to set KPIs to balance sales against overheads and use data to keep an eye on profits « Teaches the science of shopping, how to research customer behaviours and optimize staff for the greatest customer satisfaction « Online resources: Templates and spreadsheets for cash flow, stock turn, gross profit margin calculations and asset depreciation Description

The retail market in the UK is worth more than £400 billion annually and employs over 3 million workers, while in the US 29 million people create over USD $4 trillion of revenue through the industry.

Building on years of retail experience nationally and internationally, in large groups and with independent retailers, The Retail Start-Up Book meticulously provide invaluable practical insights to help new retailers hit the floor running, or more established organizations grow their business and nurture their profits.

Business Book Awards 2020 - Sales and Marketing Category

According to many reports, the physical retail experience is in crisis as more and more consumers shift to internet shopping. Despite this, the majority of global purchases still happen offline, from 90% of sales in the US through to 92% of sales in the UK and 94% in China. The big change is that today’s shopper seeks content and advice online before buying in store. Omnichannel Retail celebrates all the advantages of the physical shopping experience, from its sensory selection through to try-beforeyou buy, and its potential for providing an instant and profitable retail solution, while explaining the imperative of bringing the power of digital and an omnichannel experience to everyday shopping.

Omnichannel Retail How to build winning stores in a digital world Edition: 1 Date: 03/04/2019 Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749484460 ISBN Ebook: 9780749484477 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Retail

Tim Mason has over 30 years’ experience within the grocery and retail industries, with a strong background in strategic marketing and customer loyalty. He was the Deputy CEO of Tesco from January 2010 to December 2012 and held a number of senior roles in the Tesco Group including CMO, where he was responsible for the launch of Clubcard and Tesco.com. He is currently CEO of Eagle Eye, an SaaS technology company, working with leading grocery chains, the casual dining sector and non-food retailers.

Connecting the digital customer to the physical customer, Omnichannel Retail delivers a wealth of opportunities for the bricks and mortar store, including an enhanced customer journey, effortlessly tailoring specific products to a particular customer, exploiting surge pricing, upselling lucrative products and above all, building real, and profitable, relationships with your best customers. Based on over thirty years in loyalty marketing, Tim Mason diligently addresses the challenges facing retailers, providing tangible and proven solutions to capitalize on the changing retail landscape.

Miya Knights is Head of Eagle Eye Solutions with 20 years’ experience as an analyst, journalist and editor, specializing in enterprise technology use in retail. She owns Retail Technology magazine, is ranked one of Vend’s top 50 retail influencers and has recently appeared on the BBC, ITN and Sky News, as well as regularly speaking at or moderating industry events.

FINALIST:Description

Author Information

426 RetailMarketing and PR Table of Contents Introduction 1 The digital imperative 2 Analogue learnings 3 Loyalty is dead 4 Your location in the physical world 5 The digitally augmented store 6 Mobile makeover 7 Data-based retailing 8 Performance marketing 9 The importance of e-commerce 10 New media, new content 11 Lessons learned 12 Index This book « Exploit the multi-million revenue concept of ‘research online, buy offline’ (ROBO) to build real and profitable relationships with your best customers « Learn how to use the digitally augmented store to face challenges affecting retailers in all sectors, from high street chains, through to out of town stores « Understand how to use artificial seasonal peaks, such as ‘Black Friday’ to commercial advantage « Work out how loyal customers can create a more stable foundation for your retail business « Discover how customer data can have an accurate impact on range decisions

427 RetailMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 How hard discounters are disrupting the traditional retail model 1 Hard discounter strategies 2 Understanding the hard discounter business model 3 Strategies of key hard discounters: Aldi, Lidl, Trader Joe’s and DIA 4 Hard discounter success around the world 5 The next frontier – dissecting the US grocery retailscape 2 counterstrategiesCompetitive for conventional retailers 6 How are conventional retailers being impacted by discounter entry? 7 How conventional retailers can compete with hard discounters 8 Strategies to reduce procurement costs 3 Brand discountersstrategiesmanufacturerversushard 9 Competition – creating winning brand propositions versus private labels 10 Cooperation – producing private labels for hard discounters 11 Co-opetition – generating successful sales in hard discounter stores 12 A look into the future of disruptive retailing

Author Information Dr Jan-Benedict Steenkamp is Distinguished Professor of Marketing at University of North Carolina, USA. He is Honorary Professor at the European Institute for Advanced Studies in Management, Fellow of the European Marketing Academy, and Fellow at the Institute for Sustainable Growth at Fudan University (Shanghai). His work has received over 38,000 citations and been featured in the Wall Street Journal, Financial Times and the Economist Dr Laurens Sloot is Professor of Retail Marketing at the University of Groningen. He founded the EFMI Business School at Erasmus University, which has since developed into a leading educational and research institute.

Retail Disruptors

The Spectacular Rise and Impact of the Hard Discounters

Price: £19.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749483470 ISBN Ebook: 9780749483487 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 235x155 Product Category: Supplementary Text/ Professional Subject: Retail

This book « Explains the retail strategies and business models behind the leading hard discounters such as Aldi, Lidl and Trader Joe’s « Provides traditional retailers with the tips, strategies and techniques needed to remain competitive in the face of hard discounting disruption « Questions whether or not hard discounters can feasibly replace traditional mega retailers, such as Walmart and K-Mart Description Hard discounters are stores that sell a limited selection of consumer packaged goods and perishablestypically fewer than 2,000 Stock Keeping Units - for prices that are usually 50-60% lower than national brands. The best known hard discounters are Aldi and Lidl, but global brands include Trader Joe’s, EuroSpin, Biedronka, Netto and Leader Price. Their rise has been monumental; they have irrevocably changed the face of retail in Europe and Australia, and are making steady inroads into the US. Retail Disruptors explores the very real threat that hard discounters pose to traditional retailers and brand manufacturers. Retail Disruptors is the first book that explores this upheaval, providing expert insight into the business models of the leading hard discounters, and what mainstream retailers and brand manufacturers can do to remain competitive in the face of disruption. Meticulously researched by two of the leading authorities in retail strategy, private labels, branding, and hard discounting, Retail Disruptors is essential reading for all brand manufacturers and retailers who want to retain the competitive edge.

Edition: 1 Date: 03/10/2018

Using Semiotics in Retail shares game-changing marketing insights in categories such as FMCG, fashion, technology and entertainment, drawn from China, India, Mexico, the US and the UK. The book is supported by online resources that include templates and interactive exercises. Using Semiotics in Retail equips readers with a set of powerful tools which readers can use straight away to create engaging and successful retail marketing.

Practical, accessible and based on 20 years of global marketing experience, Using Semiotics in Retail shows retailers of all sizes how to upgrade and empower their marketing, today and for the future. Discover step-by-step how to recognise and design for emerging consumer needs and create meaningful shopper experiences. Learn how to surprise and delight consumers, increase engagement and make shopping easier for everyone. It features case studies and examples from Unilever, Freshippo, H&M, Google, Toyota and many more.

428 RetailMarketing and PR Table of Contents 1 Case studies - semiotics in real-world retail 1 Semiotics will change your career in retail or retail marketing 2 How Unilever uses semiotics 2 The present day 3 Desire 4 ‘Premium, sensational!’natural,Howto create meaning 5 Shopper needs and behaviour 6 Shopping and identity 3 The future 7 The future of business 8 The future of consumers 9 The future of retail 10 The future of everything 4 You can do semiotics - tools for retailers 11 Fast answers to everyday questions 12 Tools for thinking - how to generate ideas using semiotics 13 Acknowledgements This book « Reveals how to create effective retail marketing to increase sales and engagement by applying semiotic insights « Equips retailers of all sizes with a practical toolkit to be implemented both online and in bricks and mortar stores « Explains how to modify shopper behaviour to stimulate unplanned purchases, boost brand recognition and design exciting shopper experiences « Contains numerous real-world case studies and examples throughout from brands including Unilever, Selfridges and Waitrose « Online resources: interactive checklists and templates BoostingDescriptionretailsales is more important than ever. Stand out in a global, digital marketplace, grow customer loyalty and evolve your brand by leveraging the power of semiotics online and in physical stores.

Using Semiotics in Retail Leverage Consumer Insight to Engage Shoppers and Boost Sales Edition: 1 Date: 03/02/2022 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398603820 ISBN Ebook: 9781398603837 Pages: 296 Format (mm): 235x157 Product Category: Professional Subject: Retail

Author Information Dr Rachel Lawes is recognized as one of the original founders of commercial semiotics. Based in London, UK, she is a Fellow of the Market Research Society, and for 15 years has convened its Advanced Qualitative Methods Masterclass. She supplies brand and marketing strategy to businesses such as Unilever, P&G, Kraft, Nike and Diageo, as well as clients in specialized sectors such as pharmaceuticals and finance. A regular international conference speaker, she is the author of Using Semiotics in Marketing, also published by Kogan Page.

Author Information Gareth Jude is Co-Founder and Asia Pacific Leader of ThinkUncommon based in Sydney, Australia. He was formerly group wide merchandise/marketing and store planning manager for the DSE division of Woolworth’s where he led the launch of Australia’s first full range, fully trading website by a traditional retailer. He has had several senior leadership or CEO roles in retail and is a highly respected influencer in Australian retail. He is passionate about educating the next generation of retailers and has done so at Sydney, Macquarie, University of Technology Sydney and Shanghai Jiao Tong Universities.

429 RetailMarketing and PR Table of Contents

Introduction 1 Why the retail industry needs to reframe 1 Why retail needs to be reframed 2 Why innovation is hard for retailers 3 Retail innovation as a process 2 Your Innovation quest 4 Stage 1 – Resetting the foundations and building an innovation Launchpad 5 Stage 2 – Filter the right ideas using the golden rule 6 Stage 3 – Get innovation-ready 7 Stage 4 – Analyse and design the solution 8 Stage 5 – Make the design and scale it 9 Stage 6 – Embedding and making it the new normal 3 The different paths of innovation 10 Urgent innovation 11 Innovation in small retail businesses 12 Weaving innovation into the operating fabric of your business 13 Conclusion 14 Index This book « Provides insights from leading industry experts for retailers on how to navigate innovation and manage retail operations in a disruptive environment « Offers the latest thinking on how to demonstrate the value and opportunities innovation can bring to clients and organizations « Looks at the right ways to analyze and test new innovations, providing evidence, tools and business operations models to ensure change is sustainable « Features case studies of Walmart, Amazon, Starbucks and Warby Parker « Online resources: templates include interview sheet and observation sheets and a testing card for innovation ideas RetailDescriptionisdefined by disruption; companies either adapt or are replaced by those that will. More so than ever learning how to reframe your business, apply change and stay innovative is key to continued success and survival.

and Achieve

and

Innovation is hard for any organization, even more so for retailers where executing retail basics can often be seen as enough. But the difference between success and failure is increasingly becoming the ability to reframe your approach to innovation and use it to win the competitive edge, as Retail Innovation Reframed explains. Changing your business operations to solve customers’ biggest challenges is how established household names and emerging businesses now thrive.

How to Transform Operations Purpose-led Growth Edition:Resilience 1 Date: 03/03/2021 Price: £29.99 ISBN Paperback: 9781398600911 ISBN Ebook: 9781398600935 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Retail

Andrew Smith is Co-Founder and Manging Partner for the Americas of ThinkUncommon, based in New York, New York. He has formerly held roles including the Head of Customer Experience Strategy and the Head of Retail Operations for Telstra in Australia as part of a retail career focused on experience and technology innovation. He brings a decade of successful execution of innovation as a process in retail across two continents, with a focus on the new skills required for retailing during disruption.

Retail ReframedInnovation

Featuring case studies including Walmart, Warby Parker, Starbucks and Amazon, Retail Innovation Reframed demonstrates how to weave innovation into the operating fabric your company to remain ahead of the curve. Start your journey to innovation and learn how to use change to succeed. Online resources include templates for testing and analyzing new innovations.

Unlock fundamental skills for business success. This newly updated bestselling collection of accessible and empowering guides help readers make fast progress, reach their goals and create lasting success. Creating Success 9781398606111GemmaDaleJuly2022 NEW to the seriesOver 1.5 million copies sold 9781398606098JohnCauntJuly2022Michael9781398605466ArmstrongJuly20229781398605930TheoTheobaldJuly2022 9781398605824AlanBarkerJuly20229781398605688JohnWestwoodJuly20229781398606197PatrickForsythJuly2022 9781398606180JohnAdairJuly20229781398605640BrianFinchJuly20229781398606166PaulJFieldingJuly2022 9781398606104PatrickForsythJuly20229781398606159RoyLilleyJuly20229781398606173JohnAdairJuly2022 www.koganpage.com/creatingsuccess

Stefan9781398607743Stern&CaryCooperOctober2022 9781398608573IanMacRaeOctober2022 Michelle9781398607781Carvill&IanMacRaeOctober2022 Business Myths Tackle the falsehoods that pervade the business world. From leadership and management to social media and strategy, this series equips readers with the no-nonsense wisdom they need to succeed. www.koganpage.com/myths Jérôme9781398607828BarthélemyOctober2022 NEWto theseries 9781398608276JoOwenOctober2022 9781398608153 Simon Bailey & Andy Milligan October 2022

Kogan Page koganpage.com/ultimate Practical advice on essential skills for readers to get the job they want, from starting a job search to completing an interview ULTIMATE SERIES 9781398601765JaySurtiJuly2021 9781398602380MikeBryoniJuly2021 Martin9780749481537JohnYateAug2018 9781398602137LynnWilliamsJuly2021 Martin9780749481667JohnYateAug2018 9780749482084 Jim Barrett and Tom Barrett July 2018 97807494743009781398602175LynnWilliamsJuly2021 Ken Russell and Philip Carter Aug 2015

9781789663082 Rob Percival & Darren Woods August 2020 9781789664386KirillEremenkoAugust2020 9781789663365AdamWatersAugust2020 9781789663457KennyWoodAugust2020 9781789663402JessicaBarkerAugust2020 Confident Series Enhance your professional life and master the fundamentals of key digital skills, whatever your career path. www.koganpage.com/Confident NEW to the series

•

Kogan Page ebooks are available in EPUB3 and MOBI (Kindle) formats and since 2019 conform to the W3C standard EPUB Accessibility 1 0. We ensure ARIA roles, EPUB types, accessibility metadata and alternative (alt) text and long descriptions for imagery and tables are included. All of our ebooks have a logical reading order and include mark-up and structure to ensure easy navigation and compatibility with assistive technologies, such as screen readers. Users can:

Creating accessible ebooks Since 2012, Kogan Page has worked with RNIB Bookshare, an online library of accessible publications, to make all of our ebooks available to persons who are blind, visually impaired or otherwise print disabled at the same time as the publication of the print editions. Our accessible ebooks are also available on numerous platforms including VitalSource Bookshelf, AccessText, Kortext, Bookshare (US) and Bookshare Australia (Vision Australia). We are a signatory to the Accessible Book Consortium’s Charter for Accessible Publishing, which promotes the production of ebooks in accessible formats.

Accessing accessible ebooks

• accessible table data for complex tables that are rendered as images

Accessibility

ASPIRE rating GOLD for website accessibility statement koganpage.com/accessibility

Shortlisted for Awards ABC International Excellence Award in Accessible Publishing London Book Fair 2019 DAISY Award for Accessibility Digital Book World 2019

• change the font and increase/decrease font size • reﬂow the text to ﬁt any screen size

As part of our continued eﬀort to improve the accessibility of our products, we also provide high-quality text descriptions for images and tables that are not otherwise accessible to print-impaired users, including: • alt text for all images long descriptions for complex imagery

If you have any questions about accessibility accessibility@koganpage.com

• adjust colour and contrast to suit their preference

Kogan Page has made a commitment to accessibility. We create highly accessible ebook files and we make sure they are readily available to users who are blind, visually impaired or otherwise print disabled. Our commitment to accessibility has been recognized by organizations such as DAISY, Inclusive Publishing and Digital Book World. Kogan Page staff have presented at London Book Fair and the Anniversary Conference for the NADP on accessibility and born-accessible production workflows, and authored an accessibility case study for Inclusive Publishing.

• enable text-to-speech functionality

Index of titles

50 Top Tools for Coaching 238 Accounting and Finance for Managers 8 Accounting for Non-Accountants 9 A Circular Economy Handbook for Business and Supply Chains 331 Adding Prestige to Your Portfolio 392 Advanced Customer Analytics 408 Advanced Marketing Management 410 Advancing Strategy through Behavioural Psychology 80 Agile Change Management 186 Air Transport Management 280 An Introduction to Macrologistics 250 Anti-Money Laundering 21 Appreciative Inquiry for Change Management 188 A Practical Guide to E-auctions for Procurement 305 A Practical Guide to Logistics 246 A Practitioner’s Guide to Account-Based Marketing 375 Armstrong on Reinventing Performance Management 172 Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice 136 Armstrong’s Handbook of Learning and Development 202 Armstrong’s Handbook of Management and Leadership for HR 147 Armstrong’s Handbook of Performance Management 170 Armstrong’s Handbook of Reward Management Practice 176 Armstrong’s Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management 166 Artificial Intelligence for HR 151 Artificial Intelligence for Learning 214 Artificial Intelligence Marketing and Predicting Consumer Choice 407 Assessment Centre Success 109 A Study Guide for the Operator Certificate of Professional Competence (CPC) in Road Freight 2020 278 Audio Branding 384 Aviation Logistics 281 B2B Digital Marketing Strategy 349 B2B Digital Marketing Strategy 370 B2B Marketing Strategy 369 B2B Social Selling Strategy 376 Be Data Driven 50 Be Data Literate 133 Blockchain and the Supply Chain 326 Brand Elevation 382 Brand Psychology 386 Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation 49 Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation 187 Building Top Performing Teams 175 Business Continuity Management 68 Business Experimentation 83 Business Operations Models 270 Business Research 34 Business Research Methods 35 Business Resilience 224 Career Fear (and how to beat it) 99 Category Management in Purchasing 295 Coaching and Mentoring 234 Coaching People through Organizational Change 242 Coherence 60 Collaborative Principles for Better Supply Chain Practice 319 Commercial Lending 25 Communicate in a Crisis 421 Competitive HR 149 Confident Coding 128 Confident Cyber Security 131 Confident Data Skills 132 Confident Digital Content 129 Confident Web Design 130 Consultancy, Organizational Development and Change 182 Container Logistics 286 Content - The Atomic Particle of Marketing 362 Continuing Professional Development 208 Contract Management 298 Cross-Border Logistics Operations 268 Culture Audit in Financial Services 27 Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking 26 Cyber Risk Management 71 Cybersecurity for Business 72 Data and Analytics Strategy for Business 47 Data-Driven HR 165 Data-Driven Organization Design 217 Dealing with Difficult People 123 Decarbonizing Logistics 338 Decision Making and Problem Solving 82 Decoding the Irrational Consumer 367 Defence Logistics 259 Demand-Driven Supply Chain Management 315 Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D 207 Designing Exceptional Organizational Cultures 193 Design Management 396 Developing Mental Toughness 94 Developing People and Organisations 219 Develop Your Leadership Skills 56 Develop Your Presentation Skills 122 Digital Branding 381 Digital HR Strategy 169 Digital Marketing Strategy 345 Diversity, Inclusion and Belonging in Coaching 241 Driving Digital Transformation through Data and AI 164 E-Business and Supply Chain Integration 317 E-Commerce Website Optimization 350 Effective Strategic Sourcing 294 E-Logistics 258 Emerging Markets 52 Employee Engagement 191 Employee Relations 201 Employment Law 197 Employment Law 198 Employment Relations 200 Essential Leadership 54 Essentials of Advertising 342 Ethical Data and Information Management 51 Ethics in Public Relations 420 Event Planning and Management 397 Event Sponsorship and Fundraising 398 Evidence-Based Management 77 Excellence in Coaching 232 Excellence in People Analytics 162 Experiential Learning 215 Experiential Marketing 363 Fashion Logistics 260 Financial Management for Technology Start-Ups 16 Financial Technology 11 Financing the End-to-End Supply Chain 309 Flexible Working 154 Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics 322 Forensic Accounting and Finance 17 From Marginal to Mainstream 387 From Start-Up to Grown-Up 90 Fundamentals of Operational Risk Management 65 Fundamentals of Risk Management 64 Games and Gamification in Market Research 404 Global Brand Management 378 Global Business Ethics 40 Global Contract Logistics 304 Global Logistics 266 Global Supply Chain Ecosystems 323 Global Value Chain Management 312 Global Waste Management 333 Good Work 95 Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions 108 Green and Sustainable Finance 28 Green Logistics 332 Health and Safety in Logistics 264 How Cool Brands Stay Hot 383 How to Create a Coaching Culture 233 How to Manage People 127 How to Organize Yourself 125 How to Pass Advanced Verbal Reasoning Tests 116 How to Pass Numerical Reasoning Tests 115 How to Pass the QTS Numeracy and Literacy Skills Tests 117 How to Work Remotely 126 How to Write a Business Plan 87 How to Write a Marketing Plan 416 How to Write Effective Business English 118 How to Write Reports and Proposals 120 Human Capital Management Standards 155 Human Experience at Work 195 Humanitarian Logistics 327 Human Resource Management 145 Human Resource Management at Work 137 Human Resource Management for MBA and Business Masters 140 Human Resource Management in a Business Context 144 Human Resource Management in Context 146 Human Resource Practice 138 Implementing Key Account Management 372 Improve Your Communication Skills 121 Improve Your Global Business English 119 Inclusive Talent Management 230 Influencer Marketing Strategy 359 Influential Internal Communication 422 Innovative B2B Marketing 368 Inspiring Green Consumer Choices 365 Integrating Blockchain into Supply Chain Management 325 Internal Communications 423 International Brand Strategy 380 International Finance 12 International Freight Transport 267 International Human Resource Management 156 International Human Resource Management 157 International Human Resource Management 158 International Standards for Design and Manufacturing 289 International Supply Chain Relationships 269 Introduction to Employment Law 196 Introduction to Global Logistics 265 Introduction to HR Technologies 168 Introduction to Human Resource Management 139 Introduction to People Analytics 161 Investment and Portfolio Management 14 IT Governance 45 Kapferer on Luxury 390 Key Account Management 374 Knowledge Management 43 Leadership Coaching 236 Leadership Skills Handbook 53 Leadership Team Coaching 237 Leadership Team Coaching in Practice 239 Leading Cultural Change 189 Leading, Managing and Developing People 148 Leading Procurement Strategy 302 Learning Analytics 163 Learning and Development 210 Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace 203 Learning and Talent Development 229 Learning Experience Design 212 Learning for Organizational Development 204 Logistics and Retail Management 275 Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management Case Study Collection 248 Lowe’s Transport Manager’s and Operator’s Handbook 2022 277 Make Your Own Map 98 Making Sense of Change Management 179 Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management 373 Malcolm McDonald on Marketing Planning 415 Malcolm McDonald on Value Propositions 414 Management and Leadership in the 4th Industrial Revolution 74 Managing and Leading People Through Organizational Change 181 Managing Change 180 Managing Employment Relations 199 Managing Luxury Brands 391 Managing the Retail Supply Chain 276 Managing Workplace Health and Wellbeing during a Crisis 150 Maritime Logistics 282 Maritime Transport 283 Marketing Analytics 405 Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations 261 Marketing Communications 360 Marketing Metrics 412 Marketing Strategy 411 Market Research in Practice 400 Mastering the Circular Economy 329 Mastering the Supply Chain 251 Mavericks 61 Mobile Marketing 351 Motivation and Performance 174 Myths of Branding 388 Myths of Leadership 57 Myths of Management 32 Myths of Marketing 344 Myths of PR 417 Myths of Social Media 358 Myths of Work 218 Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals 300 Networked, Scaled, and Agile 225 Neurodiversity at Work 231 Neuroscience for Coaches 240 Neuroscience for Leaders 59 Neuroscience for Learning and Development 209 Neuroscience for Organizational Change 185 Omnichannel Retail 426 Operational Risk Management in Financial Services 66 Optimizing Digital Strategy 348 Organizational Behaviour 216 Organizational Change Explained 183 Organizational Planning and Analysis 223 Organization Development 221 Organizing for the New Normal 55 Packaging Logistics 263 Paid Attention 343 People and Organisational Development 220 People Practice 143 Performance Management 171 Performance Management 173 Persuasive Copywriting 364 Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns 418 Podcasting Marketing Strategy 353 Port Management 284 Practical Statistics 36 Practical Text Analytics 409 Predictive Analytics for Marketers 406 Predictive HR Analytics 160 Product Design and the Supply Chain 292 PR Technology, Data and Insights 419 Questionnaire Design 401 Radical Business Model Transformation 79 Reinventing Banking and Finance 29 Relationship Management in Banking 24 Remote Workplace Culture 226 Repeat from last catalogue 253 Repeat from last catalogue (Gabby) 249 Research Methods in Human Resource Management 33 Research Methods in Human Resource Management 159 Resetting Management 76 Resourcing and Talent Management 228 Responsible Business 42 Retail and Digital Banking 23 Retail Disruptors 427 Retail Innovation Reframed 429 Retail Marketing Strategy 424 Rethinking Prestige Branding 394 Rethinking Reputational Risk 73 Reward Management 177 Reward Management 178 Road Passenger Transport Management 279 Sales and Marketing Channels 377 Selling Transformed 371 She Made It 89 Smart Green Shipping 285 Social Entrepreneurship and Innovation 88 Social Media Marketing for Business 355 Social Media Strategy 356 Stand Out Marketing 413 Stop, Ask, Explore 97 Strategic Decision Making 75 Strategic Human Resource Management 167 Strategic Internal Communication 194 Strategic Sourcing and Category Management 297 Strategic Sourcing Management 293 Strategic Supply Chain Management 311 Studying Human Resource Management 141 Studying Learning and Development 206 Success After Service 101 Successful Employee Communications 192 Successful Integrated Planning for the Supply Chain 318 Successful Time Management 124 Superconductors 110 Supplier Relationship Management 299 Supply Chain 4.0 313 Supply Chain Analytics and Modelling 310 Supply Chain Disruption 316 Supply Chain Ethics 339 Supply Chain Finance 306 Supply Chain Management Accounting 307 Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians 328 Supply Chain Risk Management 67 Supply Chain Risk Management 324 Supply Chains in Action 247 Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics 308 Sustainability in Global Value Chains 335 Sustainability to Social Change 58 Sustainable and Green Supply Chains and Logistics Case Study Collection 336 Sustainable Human Resource Management 152 Sustainable Investing 15 Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management 330 Sustainable Procurement 303 Systemic Coaching and Constellations 235 Systems for Manufacturing Excellence 288 Technology and the Blue Economy 287 The Agile Organization 222 The A-Z of Careers and Jobs 100 The Business Analysis Handbook 37 The Business Guide to Effective Compliance and Ethics 41 The Business Models Handbook 81 The Business Plan Workbook 86 The Buyer’s Toolkit 301 The Contemporary CFO 19 The Cryptocurrency Revolution 22 The Definitive Guide to Strategic Content Marketing 361 The Digital Marketing Handbook 346 The Effective Change Manager’s Handbook 184 The Energized Workplace 227 The Enterprise Big Data Framework 46 The Financial Services Guide to Fintech 20 The Handbook of International Trade and Finance 13 The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management 245 The Inventory Toolkit 272 The Job-Ready Guide 111 The Knowledge Manager’s Handbook 44 The Lean Supply Chain 321 The Learning and Development Handbook 213 The Learning Organization 205 The Logistics and Supply Chain Innovation Handbook 320 The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit 256 The Logistics Outsourcing Handbook 257 The Luxury Strategy 389 The Management of Luxury 395 The New Chameleons 366 The New Strategic Brand Management 379 The New Strategist 78 The New World of Work 153 The Next Rules of Work 190 The Operations Advantage 271 The Organizational Resilience Handbook 69 The Power of a Prestige Brand 393 The Power of Project Leadership 39 The Practical Guide to Digital Transformation 48 The Practical Negotiation Handbook 30 The Retail Start-Up Book 425 The Return to Study Handbook 93 The Risk Management Handbook 70 The Road to Zero Emissions 337 The Strategy-Driven Supply Chain 314 The Success Factor 31 The Successful Career Toolkit 96 The Sustainable Business Handbook 63 The Technology Procurement Handbook 296 The Tesla Way 290 The TV Brand Builders 385 The Young Entrepreneur 92 Toyota Methods and Operating Models 291 Ultimate Aptitude Tests 113 Ultimate Cover Letters 104 Ultimate CV 105 Ultimate Interview 106 Ultimate IQ Tests 112 Ultimate Job Search 102 Ultimate New Job 103 Ultimate Presentations 107 Ultimate Psychometric Tests 114 Understanding Digital Marketing 347 Understanding Islamic Financial Services 18 Understanding Planned Obsolescence 334 Understanding Project Management 38 Understanding Social Media 357 Unprepared to Entrepreneur 91 Urban Logistics 262 User Research 402 Using Artificial Intelligence in Marketing 354 Using Semiotics in Marketing 403 Using Semiotics in Retail 428 Value Pricing for Accounting Professionals 10 Video Marketing 352 Warehouse Management 273 Warehousing and Transportation Logistics 274 What Philosophy Can Teach You About Being a Better Leader 62 Work and Employment in a Changing Business Environment 142 Workplace Learning 211

435 www.koganpage.com

Abley, Richard Relationship Management in Banking 24 Abraham, Peter Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation 49 Abraham, Peter Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation 187 Adair, John Decision Making and Problem Solving 82 Adair, John Develop Your Leadership Skills 56 Adamou, Betty Games and Gamification in Market Research 404 Afy-Shararah, Mohamed Systems for Manufacturing Excellence 288 Aktas, Emel Supply Chain 4.0 313 Al-Karaghouli, Wafi Understanding Islamic Financial Services 18 Anderson, Valerie Human Capital Management Standards 155 Anderson, Valerie Research Methods in Human Resource Management 33 Anderson, Valerie Research Methods in Human Resource Management 159 Arian, Somi Career Fear (and how to beat it) 99 Armstrong, Michael Armstrong on Reinventing Performance Management 172 Armstrong, Michael Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice 136 Armstrong, Michael Armstrong’s Handbook of Learning and Development 202 Armstrong, Michael Armstrong’s Handbook of Management and Leadership for HR 147 Armstrong, Michael Armstrong’s Handbook of Performance Management 170 Armstrong, Michael Armstrong’s Handbook of Reward Management Practice 176 Armstrong, Michael Armstrong’s Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management 166 Armstrong, Michael How to Manage People 127 Arney, Eileen Learning for Organizational Development 204 Arvinen-Muondo, Raisa Organizational Behaviour 216 Ashby, Simon Fundamentals of Operational Risk Management 65 Ashdown, Linda Performance Management 173 Asplen-Taylor, Simon Data and Analytics Strategy for Business 47 Atherton, Julie B2B Social Selling Strategy 376 Atherton, Julie Social Media Strategy 356 Atkins, Derek Rethinking Reputational Risk 73 Aylott, Elizabeth Employee Relations 201 Aylott, Elizabeth Employment Law 197 Bailey, Simon Myths of Branding 388 Baker, Peter The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management 245 Bak, Ozlem E-Business and Supply Chain Integration 317 Bak, Ozlem Sustainable and Green Supply Chains and Logistics Case Study Collection 336 Ball, Joan P Stop, Ask, Explore 97 Bals, Lydia Supply Chain Finance 306 Bamber, Matt Accounting and Finance for Managers 8 Banks, Ken Social Entrepreneurship and Innovation 88 Barbour, Paul J Building Top Performing Teams 175 Barends, Eric Evidence-Based Management 77 Barker, Alan Improve Your Communication Skills 121 Barker, Jessica Confident Cyber Security 131 Barlow, Sonya Unprepared to Entrepreneur 91 Barrett, Jim Ultimate Aptitude Tests 113 Barrett, Tom Ultimate Aptitude Tests 113 Barrow, Colin The Business Plan Workbook 86 Barrow, Paul The Business Plan Workbook 86 Barr, Patrick Effective Strategic Sourcing 294 Barr, Patrick The Successful Career Toolkit 96 Bassett, David Event Planning and Management 397 Bastien, Vincent The Luxury Strategy 389 Beard, Colin Experiential Learning 215 Beaven, Karen Strategic Human Resource Management 167 Beevers, Kathy Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace 203 Beevers, Kathy People Practice 143 Behrends, Sönke Urban Logistics 262 Beije, Aljosja Blockchain and the Supply Chain 326 Bell, Fred Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking 26 Bell, Graham The Organizational Resilience Handbook 69 Bennett, Tony Managing Employment Relations 199 Beresford, Anthony International Freight Transport 267 Beresford, Anthony Port Management 284 Berghaus, Benjamin The Management of Luxury 395 Berkhout, Constant Retail Marketing Strategy 424 Bhattarcharjee, Sudakshina Improve Your Global Business English 119 Bhimani, Alnoor Financial Management for Technology Start-Ups 16 Bishop, Kathryn Make Your Own Map 98 Bolles, Gary A The Next Rules of Work 190 Bolton, Kate Questionnaire Design 401 Bond, Heather Human Capital Management Standards 155 Bones, Christopher Optimizing Digital Strategy 348 Borek, Alexander Driving Digital Transformation through Data and AI 164 Bourlakis, Michael Supply Chain 4.0 313 Boyd, Drew Adding Prestige to Your Portfolio 392 Brace, Ian Questionnaire Design 401 Braithwaite, Alan Business Operations Models 270 Brann, Amy Neuroscience for Coaches 240 Brewster, Chris International Human Resource Management 156 Bridger, Darren Decoding the Irrational Consumer 367 Bridger, Emma Employee Engagement 191 Brown, Duncan Armstrong’s Handbook of Reward Management Practice 176 Browne, Michael Green Logistics 332 Browne, Michael Urban Logistics 262 Brown, Robert The Business Plan Workbook 86 Bruel, Olivier Strategic Sourcing Management 293 Bryant, Andy The TV Brand Builders 385 Bryon, Mike How to Pass Advanced Verbal Reasoning Tests 116 Bryon, Mike Ultimate Psychometric Tests 114 Buglear, John Practical Statistics 36 Burgess, Bev A Practitioner’s Guide to Account-Based Marketing 375 Burroughs, Chloe The Return to Study Handbook 93 Calder, Alan IT Governance 45 Cameron, Esther Essential Leadership 54 Cameron, Esther Making Sense of Change Management 179 Cameron, Sheila Business Research Methods 35 Cantore, Stefan Appreciative Inquiry for Change Management 188 Carlsson, Magnus Strategic Sourcing and Category Management 297 Carter, Philip Ultimate IQ Tests 112 Carvill, Michelle Myths of Social Media 358 Cattaneo, Eleonora Managing Luxury Brands 391 Caunt, John How to Organize Yourself 125 Chapman, Rose Anti-Money Laundering 21 Cheese, Peter The New World of Work 153 Cheung-Judge, Mee-Yan Organization Development 221 Cheverton, Peter Key Account Management 374 Chew, Bee-Lean Forensic Accounting and Finance 17 Choudhury, Islam Business Resilience 224 Christopher, Martin Business Operations Models 270 Christopher, Martin Humanitarian Logistics 327 Christopher, Martin Leading Procurement Strategy 302 Citroën, Lida Success After Service 101 Clark, Donald Artificial Intelligence for Learning 214 Clark, Donald Learning Experience Design 212 Clinton, Larry Cybersecurity for Business 72 Clough, Peter Developing Mental Toughness 94 Cluley, Robert Essentials of Advertising 342 Coakes, Elayne Business Research 34 Cohn, Alisa From Start-Up to Grown-Up 90 Coleman, Sarah Organizational Change Explained 183 Collins, Stella Neuroscience for Learning and Development 209 Cooper, Cary Managing Workplace Health and Wellbeing during a Crisis 150 Cooper, Cary Myths of Management 32 Cooper, Cary Remote Workplace Culture 226 Cortiglioni, Stefano Toyota Methods and Operating Models 291 Coulter, Chris The Sustainable Business Handbook 63 Cowan, David Strategic Internal Communication 194 Crask, James Business Continuity Management 68 Crockett, Hema Designing Exceptional Organizational Cultures 193 Croucher, Phil The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management 245 Croxen-John, Dan E-Commerce Website Optimization 350 Cudby, Adrian Commercial Lending 25 Cureton, Peter Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D 207 Dale, Gemma Flexible Working 154 Dale, Gemma How to Work Remotely 126 Daly, Patrick International Supply Chain Relationships 269 Danheiser, Stacey Stand Out Marketing 413 Daniels, Kathy Introduction to Employment Law 196 Dani, Samir Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics 322 Dani, Samir Strategic Supply Chain Management 311 Davies, Glen Lowe’s Transport Manager’s and Operator’s Handbook 2022 277 Davies, Mark Implementing Key Account Management 372 Davies, Melissa The Practical Negotiation Handbook 30 Davletshin, Marat Integrating Blockchain into Supply Chain Management 325 de, Anneke An Introduction to Macrologistics 250 Dent, Julian Sales and Marketing Channels 377 DeSmet, Bram Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics 308 DeSmet, Bram The Strategy-Driven Supply Chain 314 de Swart, Jacques Responsible Business 42 de Waal, Anastasia The Job-Ready Guide 111 Dewhurst, Sue Successful Employee Communications 192 Dibben, Pauline Employment Relations 200 DiMartino, Michele Networked, Scaled, and Agile 225 Dimitriadis, Nikolaos Advanced Marketing Management 410 Dimitriadis, Nikolaos Neuroscience for Leaders 59 Donnelly, Rory Human Resource Management at Work 137 Dovgalenko, Sergii The Technology Procurement Handbook 296 Dowson, Ruth Event Planning and Management 397 Duffy, Sean International Brand Strategy 380 Dzamic, Lazar The Definitive Guide to Strategic Content Marketing 361 Eagle, Simon Demand-Driven Supply Chain Management 315 Edwards, Helen From Marginal to Mainstream 387 Edwards, Kirsten Predictive HR Analytics 160 Edwards, Martin R Predictive HR Analytics 160 Ellram, Lisa M Supply Chain Finance 306 Eremenko, Kirill Confident Data Skills 132 Eubanks, Ben Artificial Intelligence for HR 151 Evans’, Barry Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations 261 Evans, Barry The Lean Supply Chain 321 Evans, Dennis The Road to Zero Emissions 337 Evans, Des The Road to Zero Emissions 337 Fahey, Colleen Audio Branding 384 Farnham, David Human Resource Management in Context 146 Fernie, John Fashion Logistics 260 Fernie, John Logistics and Retail Management 275 Ferrar, Jonathan Excellence in People Analytics 162 Field, Jenni Influential Internal Communication 422 Finch, Brian How to Write a Business Plan 87 Findlay, Charles Financing the End-to-End Supply Chain 309 Fisher, Virginia Managing Employment Relations 199 FitzPatrick, Liam Internal Communications 423 FitzPatrick, Liam Successful Employee Communications 192 Fitzsimmons, Anthony Rethinking Reputational Risk 73 Fletcher, Janet Introduction to Human Resource Management 139 Fontinha, Rita Research Methods in Human Resource Management 33 Fontinha, Rita Research Methods in Human Resource Management 159 Forsyth, Patrick How to Write Reports and Proposals 120 Forsyth, Patrick Successful Time Management 124

436 www.koganpage.com

Index of titles by author

Francis, Anthony Road Passenger Transport Management 279 Francis, Helen People and Organisational Development 220 Francis, Ronald D Global Business Ethics 40 Franklin, Melanie Agile Change Management 186 French, Ray Leading, Managing and Developing People 148 Frost, Stephen Inclusive Talent Management 230 Furnham, Adrian Motivation and Performance 174 Furnham, Adrian Myths of Work 218 Gabay, Jonathan Brand Psychology 386 Gee, Rowland The Retail Start-Up Book 425 Geva, Ilan Global Brand Management 378 Gilpin, Diane Smart Green Shipping 285 Girod, Stéphane J.G Resetting Management 76 Giuliano, Genevieve Urban Logistics 262 Glenister, Gordon Influencer Marketing Strategy 359 Goddard, Jules Business Experimentation 83 Goddard, Jules Mavericks 61 Goddard, Jules What Philosophy Can Teach You About Being a Better Leader 62 Godsmark, Jo The Logistics Outsourcing Handbook 257 Googins, Bradley Sustainability to Social Change 58 Gorell, Ro 50 Top Tools for Coaching 238 Gorell, Ro How to Create a Coaching Culture 233 Gorm Larsen, Jacob A Practical Guide to E-auctions for Procurement 305 Goswami, Swish The Young Entrepreneur 92 Gotian, Ruth The Success Factor 31 Goulding, Steve Relationship Management in Banking 24 Grainger, Andrew Cross-Border Logistics Operations 268 Grant, David B Fashion Logistics 260 Grant, David B Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management Case Study Collection 248 Grant, David B Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management 330 Grath, Anders The Handbook of International Trade and Finance 13 Grayson, David The Sustainable Business Handbook 63 Green, David Excellence in People Analytics 162 Green, Kevin Competitive HR 149 Green, Mike Essential Leadership 54 Green, Mike Making Sense of Change Management 179 Gregory, Anne Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns 418 Grigsby, Mike Advanced Customer Analytics 408 Grigsby, Mike Marketing Analytics 405 Grosse, Robert E Emerging Markets 52 Guesalaga, Rodrigo Implementing Key Account Management 372 Haavisto, Ira Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians 328 Hague, Paul Market Research in Practice 400 Hague, Paul The Business Models Handbook 81 Hall, Cristina Learning Analytics 163 Hall, Simon B2B Digital Marketing Strategy 349 Hall, Simon B2B Digital Marketing Strategy 370 Hall, Simon Innovative B2B Marketing 368 Hamflett, Andy Technology and the Blue Economy 287 Hammersley, James Optimizing Digital Strategy 348 Hancock, Dora International Finance 12 Hands, David Design Management 396 Hardy, Michelle Investment and Portfolio Management 14 Harris, Stacey Introduction to HR Technologies 168 Hartley, Kate Communicate in a Crisis 421 Haslam, Simon Strategic Decision Making 75 Hatami, Alessandro Reinventing Banking and Finance 29 Haupt, Michael The Contemporary CFO 19 Havenga, Jan An Introduction to Macrologistics 250 Hawkins, Peter Leadership Team Coaching 237 Hawkins, Peter Leadership Team Coaching in Practice 239 Hayden, David Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace 203 Hayward, Andrew The Business Guide to Effective Compliance and Ethics 41 Henderson, Iain Human Resource Management for MBA and Business Masters 140 Henderson, John Retail and Digital Banking 23 Henke, Michael Sustainability in Global Value Chains 335 Henzen, Rozanne Mastering the Circular Economy 329 Hesketh, Ian Managing Workplace Health and Wellbeing during a Crisis 150 Hillson, David The Risk Management Handbook 70 Hodges, Julie Consultancy, Organizational Development and Change 182 Hodges, Julie Managing and Leading People Through Organizational Change 181 Hodson, Christopher J Cyber Risk Management 71 Hofmann, Erik Financing the End-to-End Supply Chain 309 Holbeche, Linda Organization Development 221 Holbeche, Linda People and Organisational Development 220 Holbeche, Linda The Agile Organization 222 Holguín-Veras, José Urban Logistics 262 Holt, Sue Implementing Key Account Management 372 Hopkin, Paul Fundamentals of Risk Management 64 Horner, David Accounting for Non-Accountants 9 Houde, Shannon Good Work 95 Houlder, Dominic What Philosophy Can Teach You About Being a Better Leader 62 Houldsworth, Elizabeth International Human Resource Management 156 Hughes, Mark Managing Change 180 Hurdle, David Road Passenger Transport Management 279 Hussain, Shazad People Practice 143 Hutchinson, Sue Performance Management 171 Iles, Paul International Human Resource Management 158 Inge, Christina Marketing Metrics 412 Innes, James Ultimate New Job 103 IRM, The Fundamentals of Operational Risk Management 65 IRM, The Fundamentals of Risk Management 64 Jacobs, Jamie Designing Exceptional Organizational Cultures 193 James, Rob Business Experimentation 83 Jenkins, Andrew Social Media Marketing for Business 355 Johnston, Paul Stand Out Marketing 413 John Yate, Martin Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions 108 John Yate, Martin Ultimate Cover Letters 104

437 www.koganpage.com

John Yate, Martin Ultimate CV 105 Jones, Gillian 50 Top Tools for Coaching 238 Jones, Gillian How to Create a Coaching Culture 233 Jones, Sarah Reward Management 177 Jovanovic Dimitriadis, Neda Advanced Marketing Management 410 Jude, Gareth Retail Innovation Reframed 429 Kalman, Danny Inclusive Talent Management 230 Kamran, Qeis Global Value Chain Management 312 Kapferer, Jean-Noël Kapferer on Luxury 390 Kapferer, Jean-Noël The Luxury Strategy 389 Kapferer, Jean-Noël The New Strategic Brand Management 379 Kates, Amy Networked, Scaled, and Agile 225 Kelly, Simon Stand Out Marketing 413 Kesler, Greg Networked, Scaled, and Agile 225 Kew, John Human Resource Management in a Business Context 144 Khan, Nadeem Introduction to People Analytics 161 Khan, Omera Product Design and the Supply Chain 292 King, Katie Using Artificial Intelligence in Marketing 354 Kingsnorth, Simon Digital Marketing Strategy 345 Kingsnorth, Simon The Digital Marketing Handbook 346 Kirby, Amanda Neurodiversity at Work 231 Kirby, Justin The Definitive Guide to Strategic Content Marketing 361 Klerck, Gilton Employment Relations 200 Knights, Miya Omnichannel Retail 426 Kohl, Holger Sustainability in Global Value Chains 335 Kovács, Gyöngyi Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians 328 Kovela, Serhiy Business Resilience 224 Králik, Martin Resetting Management 76 Krishnamachari, Bhaskar Blockchain and the Supply Chain 326 Kuehlwein, JP Brand Elevation 382 Kuehlwein, JP Rethinking Prestige Branding 394 Kuehlwein, JP The Power of a Prestige Brand 393 Kynighou, Anastasia Human Resource Management at Work 137 Lambe, Patrick The Knowledge Manager’s Handbook 44 Lambert, Nick Technology and the Blue Economy 287 Lawes, Rachel Using Semiotics in Marketing 403 Lawes, Rachel Using Semiotics in Retail 428 Leatherbarrow, Charles Introduction to Human Resource Management 139 Leboff, Grant Myths of Marketing 344 Leedham, Melville Coaching and Mentoring 234 Lee, Mark The Sustainable Business Handbook 63 Leigh, Rich Myths of PR 417 Leventhal, Barry Predictive Analytics for Marketers 406 Lewis, David Employment Law 198 Lewis, David Mavericks 61 Lewis, David What Philosophy Can Teach You About Being a Better Leader 62 Lewis, Rhian The Cryptocurrency Revolution 22 Lewis, Sarah Appreciative Inquiry for Change Management 188 Lieb, Rebecca Content - The Atomic Particle of Marketing 362 Lilley, Roy Dealing with Difficult People 123 Ling Zhang, Crystal International Human Resource Management 158 Linz, Carsten Radical Business Model Transformation 79 Liu, Shaofeng Knowledge Management 43 Lloyd, Richard Successful Integrated Planning for the Supply Chain 318 Loudermilk, Derek Superconductors 110 Lowe, David Lowe’s Transport Manager’s and Operator’s Handbook 2022 277 Lunt, Tom Event Sponsorship and Fundraising 398 Lyon, Ken The Logistics and Supply Chain Innovation Handbook 320 MacRae, Ian Motivation and Performance 174 MacRae, Ian Myths of Social Media 358 MacRae, Ian Myths of Work 218 Madsen, Susanne The Power of Project Leadership 39 Malik, Tegwen, F International Standards for Design and Manufacturing 289 Malin, Angelica She Made It 89 Manners-Bell, John Introduction to Global Logistics 265 Manners-Bell, John Supply Chain Ethics 339 Manners-Bell, John Supply Chain Risk Management 67 Manners-Bell, John Supply Chain Risk Management 324 Manners-Bell, John The Logistics and Supply Chain Innovation Handbook 320 Marchington, Mick Human Resource Management at Work 137 Marcos, Javier Implementing Key Account Management 372 Markides, Constantinos C Organizing for the New Normal 55 Marr, Bernard Data-Driven HR 165 Marsh, Stephanie User Research 402 Martin, Heinrich Warehousing and Transportation Logistics 274 Maslen, Andy Persuasive Copywriting 364 Mason, Robert Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations 261 Mason, Robert The Lean Supply Chain 321 Mason, Tim Omnichannel Retail 426 Mattox II, John R Learning Analytics 163 Mawer, Charlie The TV Brand Builders 385 McCalman, James Leading Cultural Change 189 McDonald, Malcolm Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management 373 McDonald, Malcolm Malcolm McDonald on Marketing Planning 415 McDonald, Malcolm Malcolm McDonald on Value Propositions 414 McKinnon, Alan Decarbonizing Logistics 338 McKinnon, Alan Green Logistics 332 McLennan, Norman Collaborative Principles for Better Supply Chain Practice 319 Megginson, David Continuing Professional Development 208 Mena, Carlos Leading Procurement Strategy 302 Middelburg, Jan-Willem The Enterprise Big Data Framework 46 Miles, Roger Culture Audit in Financial Services 27 Millar, Mark Global Supply Chain Ecosystems 323 Milligan, Andy Myths of Branding 388 Millner, Dave Introduction to People Analytics 161 Milner, Catherine The Inventory Toolkit 272 Milton, Nick The Knowledge Manager’s Handbook 44 Minis, Ioannis Supply Chain 4.0 313 Minsky, Laurence Audio Branding 384 Minsky, Laurence Global Brand Management 378

438 www.koganpage.com Mirvis, Philip Sustainability to Social Change 58 Mohan, Devie The Financial Services Guide to Fintech 20 Morgan, Steven Global Contract Logistics 304 Morrison, Rupert Data-Driven Organization Design 217 Morrison, Rupert Organizational Planning and Analysis 223 Morrow, Jordan Be Data Driven 50 Morrow, Jordan Be Data Literate 133 Mowat, Jon Video Marketing 352 Müller-Stewens, Günter Radical Business Model Transformation 79 Müller-Stewens, Günter The Management of Luxury 395 Müller-Stewens, Günter The New Strategist 78 Munn, Dave A Practitioner’s Guide to Account-Based Marketing 375 Murfey, Guy Global Business Ethics 40 Neise, Rolf Container Logistics 286 Newell, Diane Coaching and Mentoring 234 Ney, Jillian Advanced Marketing Management 410 Ng, Wilson Business Research 34 Nicotra, Eva Event Sponsorship and Fundraising 398 Noble, Sue Coaching People through Organizational Change 242 O Brien, Daragh Ethical Data and Information Management 51 O’Brien, Jonathan Category Management in Purchasing 295 O’Brien, Jonathan Negotiation for Procurement and Supply Chain Professionals 300 O’Brien, Jonathan Supplier Relationship Management 299 O’Brien, Jonathan Sustainable Procurement 303 O’Brien, Jonathan The Buyer’s Toolkit 301 O’Keefe, Katherine Ethical Data and Information Management 51 Oliver, Grant Malcolm McDonald on Value Propositions 414 O’Meara, Sean Remote Workplace Culture 226 Osborn, Tony The Business Guide to Effective Compliance and Ethics 41 O’Sullivan, Steve Supply Chain Disruption 316 Owen, Jo Leadership Skills Handbook 53 Owen, Jo Myths of Leadership 57 Pagdin, Ian Investment and Portfolio Management 14 Page-Tickell, Rebecca Learning and Development 210 Paine, Nigel Workplace Learning 211 Pålsson, Henrik Packaging Logistics 263 Panayide, Photis M Maritime Logistics 282 Panzarino, Helene Reinventing Banking and Finance 29 Parry, Simon Accounting and Finance for Managers 8 Parry-Slater, Michelle The Learning and Development Handbook 213 Parskey, Peggy Learning Analytics 163 Parsloe, Eric Coaching and Mentoring 234 Parsons, Patricia J Ethics in Public Relations 420 Passmore, Jonathan Appreciative Inquiry for Change Management 188 Passmore, Jonathan Excellence in Coaching 232 Passmore, Jonathan Leadership Coaching 236 Pedersen, Niels Financial Technology 11 Percival, Rob Confident Coding 128 Perkin, Neil Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation 49 Perkin, Neil Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation 187 Perkins, Graham Work and Employment in a Changing Business Environment 142 Perkins, Stephen J Organizational Behaviour 216 Perkins, Stephen J Reward Management 177 Perry, John Developing Mental Toughness 94 Pettit, Stephen E-Logistics 258 Pettit, Stephen International Freight Transport 267 Pettit, Stephen Port Management 284 Pidgeon, Clive A Study Guide for the Operator Certificate of Professional Competence (CPC) in Road Freight 2020 278 Piecyk, Maja Green Logistics 332 Pope, Kamila Global Waste Management 333 Pope, Kamila Understanding Planned Obsolescence 334 Potter, David Leading Cultural Change 189 Price, Deborah Business Research Methods 35 Prill, Nadine Driving Digital Transformation through Data and AI 164 Psychogios, Alexandros Neuroscience for Leaders 59 Purcell, James Sustainable Investing 15 Pykhova, Elena Operational Risk Management in Financial Services 66 Rea, Andrew Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace 203 Reddington, Martin People and Organisational Development 220 Rees, Gary Leading, Managing and Developing People 148 Reinecke, Sven The Management of Luxury 395 Relph, Geoff The Inventory Toolkit 272 Reynolds, Alison What Philosophy Can Teach You About Being a Better Leader 62 Richards, Gwynne The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit 256 Richards, Gwynne The Logistics Outsourcing Handbook 257 Richards, Gwynne Warehouse Management 273 Rich, Nick International Standards for Design and Manufacturing 289 Rich, Nick Systems for Manufacturing Excellence 288 Rigg, Clare Learning and Talent Development 229 Roberts, David Business Resilience 224 Roberts, Sheila Business Resilience 224 Robson, Fiona Research Methods in Human Resource Management 33 Robson, Fiona Research Methods in Human Resource Management 159 Rogers, Beth Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management 373 Rogers, Ciaran Podcasting Marketing Strategy 353 Rogers, Patricia Developing People and Organisations 219 Rogers, Patricia Studying Learning and Development 206 Roobeek, Annemieke Responsible Business 42 Rose, Michael Reward Management 178 Rousseau , Denise M Evidence-Based Management 77 Rowles, Daniel Digital Branding 381 Rowles, Daniel Mobile Marketing 351 Rowles, Daniel Podcasting Marketing Strategy 353 Rudd, Jerry A Practical Guide to Logistics 246 Rudd, Jerry Health and Safety in Logistics 264 Rushton, Alan The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management 245 Russell, Ken Ultimate IQ Tests 112 Ryan, Damian Understanding Digital Marketing 347 Ryan, Damian Understanding Social Media 357

Salcerini, Leonardo Toyota Methods and Operating Models 291 Sales, Michael Aviation Logistics 281 Sammons, Peter Contract Management 298 Samunderu, Eyden Air Transport Management 280 Sargeant, Malcolm Employment Law 198 Saundry, Richard Managing Employment Relations 199 Scarlett, Hilary Neuroscience for Organizational Change 185 Schaefer, Wolfgang Brand Elevation 382 Schaefer, Wolfgang Rethinking Prestige Branding 394 Schaefer, Wolfgang The Power of a Prestige Brand 393 Schipperheijn, Katja The Learning Organization 205 Sen, Soumyasanto Digital HR Strategy 169 Shah, Salma Diversity, Inclusion and Belonging in Coaching 241 Shaw, Nick Optimizing Digital Strategy 348 Shenoy, Ben Strategic Decision Making 75 Sitko, Rafal Sustainable Human Resource Management 152 Slack, Nigel The Operations Advantage 271 Sloan, Danny The Retail Start-Up Book 425 Sloot, Laurens Retail Disruptors 427 Small, Nicky People Practice 143 Smilansky, Shirra Experiential Marketing 363 Smiles, Simon Sustainable Investing 15 Smith, Andrew Retail Innovation Reframed 429 Smith, Heidi How to Pass Numerical Reasoning Tests 115 Smith, Jeremy Defence Logistics 259 Smith, Michael E Inspiring Green Consumer Choices 365 Smith, PR Marketing Communications 360 Smith, Richard The Effective Change Manager’s Handbook 184 Smith, Theo Neurodiversity at Work 231 Solomon, Michael R The New Chameleons 366 Song, Dong-Wook Maritime Logistics 282 Sparks, Leigh Logistics and Retail Management 275 Sparrow, Paul International Human Resource Management 156 Spens, Karen Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians 328 Squire, Philip Selling Transformed 371 Steenkamp, Jan-Benedict Retail Disruptors 427 Stern, Stefan Myths of Management 32 Stewart, Jim Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D 207 Stewart, Jim Developing People and Organisations 219 Stewart, Jim Learning and Talent Development 229 Stewart, Jim Studying Learning and Development 206 Straw, Gary Understanding Project Management 38 Stredwick, John Human Resource Management in a Business Context 144 Struhl, Steven Artificial Intelligence Marketing and Predicting Consumer Choice 407 Struhl, Steven Practical Text Analytics 409 Strycharczyk, Doug Developing Mental Toughness 94 Surti, Jay Ultimate Presentations 107 Sweeney, Edward Global Logistics 266 Symes, Graham The Retail Start-Up Book 425 Talbot, Fiona How to Write Effective Business English 118 Talbot, Fiona Improve Your Global Business English 119 Tanvir, Jawwad Business Resilience 224 Tapaninen, Ulla Maritime Transport 283 Tarrant, Amy Coaching People through Organizational Change 242 Tate, Wendy Supply Chain Finance 306 Tatham, Peter Humanitarian Logistics 327 Taylor, Glenn Managing the Retail Supply Chain 276 Taylor, Heidi B2B Marketing Strategy 369 Taylor, Stephen Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice 136 Taylor, Stephen Human Resource Management 145 Taylor, Stephen Resourcing and Talent Management 228 Taylor, Stephen Studying Human Resource Management 141 Taylor, Stephen Work and Employment in a Changing Business Environment 142 Templar, Simon Financing the End-to-End Supply Chain 309 Templar, Simon Supply Chain Management Accounting 307 Theobald, Theo Develop Your Presentation Skills 122 Thomas, Bob Organizational Change Explained 183 Thompson, Clive Fundamentals of Risk Management 64 Thompson, Simon Green and Sustainable Finance 28 Tiffany, Jenna Marketing Strategy 411 Timms, Perry The Energized Workplace 227 Tipi, Nicoleta Supply Chain Analytics and Modelling 310 Tomlinson, Keith People Practice 143 Topps, James Managing the Retail Supply Chain 276 Trautrims, Alexander Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management 330 Turner, Jonathan Technology and the Blue Economy 287 Tyreman, Chris How to Pass the QTS Numeracy and Literacy Skills Tests 117 Ullah, Karim Understanding Islamic Financial Services 18 Underwood, Quinn The Young Entrepreneur 92 Valentin, Michaël The Tesla Way 290 Valskov, Klavs Internal Communications 423 Van den Bergh, Joeri How Cool Brands Stay Hot 383 van der Plas, Myrthe Responsible Business 42 van Hoek, Remko Integrating Blockchain into Supply Chain Management 325 van Hoek, Remko Leading Procurement Strategy 302 van Tonder, Johann E-Commerce Website Optimization 350 Vasileios, Dr. Supply Chain 4.0 313 Verga, Danilo Toyota Methods and Operating Models 291 Vernon, Guy International Human Resource Management 156 Vyas, Nick Blockchain and the Supply Chain 326 Wadström, Pontus Advancing Strategy through Behavioural Psychology 80 Waite, Karen People Practice 143 Wang, Yingli E-Logistics 258 Waters, Adam Confident Digital Content 129 Waters, Donald Global Logistics 266 Watkins, Alan Coherence 60 Watkins, Steve IT Governance 45 Weenk, Ed Mastering the Circular Economy 329

Williamson, Alistair The Road to Zero Emissions 337 Wilson, John P Experiential Learning 215 Winter, Helen The Business Analysis Handbook 37 Wintersberger, Daniel International Human Resource Management 157 Witthöft, Ilse An Introduction to Macrologistics 250 Wong, Wilson Human Capital Management Standards 155 Wood, Geoffrey Employment Relations 200 Woodhams, Carol Human Resource Management 145 Woodhams, Carol Studying Human Resource Management 141 Wood, Kenny Confident Web Design 130 Woods, Darren Confident Coding 128 Woxenius, Johan Urban Logistics 262 Wyatt, Stephen Management and Leadership in the 4th Industrial Revolution 74 Yakob, Faris Paid Attention 343 Yew Wong, Chee Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management 330 Zimmermann, Alexander Radical Business Model Transformation 79 Zook, Ze Marketing Communications 360

439 www.koganpage.com

Weenk, Ed Mastering the Supply Chain 251 Weetman, Catherine A Circular Economy Handbook for Business and Supply Chains 331 Weightman, Tony Assessment Centre Success 109 Weiner, Mark PR Technology, Data and Insights 419 Weiss, Antonio The Practical Guide to Digital Transformation 48 Westwood, John How to Write a Marketing Plan 416 Whitaker, Vivien Continuing Professional Development 208 Whiteing, Anthony Green Logistics 332 White, Michael Sales and Marketing Channels 377 Whiting, Fiona Human Resource Practice 138 Whitter, Ben Human Experience at Work 195 Whittington, John Systemic Coaching and Constellations 235 Wickersham, Mark Value Pricing for Accounting Professionals 10 Widdowson, Lucy Building Top Performing Teams 175 Wilding, Richard Supply Chains in Action 247 Wilkinson, Adrian Human Resource Management at Work 137 Williams, Lynn Ultimate Interview 106 Williams, Lynn Ultimate Job Search 102

Kogan Page Academic Catalogue 2022

Articles inside

Human Resource Management at Work

Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice

Confident Data Skills

Be Data Literate

Confident Digital Content

Confident Web Design

Confident Cyber Security

Confident Coding

How to Manage People

How to Work Remotely

Successful Time Management

How to Organize Yourself

Dealing with Difficult People

Develop Your Presentation Skills

Improve Your Communication Skills

How to Write Reports and Proposals

How to Write Effective Business English

Improve Your Global Business English

How to Pass the QTS Numeracy and Literacy Skills Tests

How to Pass Advanced Verbal Reasoning Tests

The Job-Ready Guide

Ultimate Psychometric Tests

Ultimate IQ Tests

How to Pass Numerical Reasoning Tests

Superconductors

Assessment Centre Success

Ultimate Presentations

Ultimate CV

Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions

Ultimate Interview

Ultimate Cover Letters

Ultimate New Job

Ultimate Job Search

The A-Z of Careers and Jobs

Career Fear (and how to beat it

Make Your Own Map

Good Work

The Successful Career Toolkit

The Young Entrepreneur

Developing Mental Toughness

Unprepared to Entrepreneur

She Made It

The Business Plan Workbook

How to Write a Business Plan

Business Experimentation

Advancing Strategy through Behavioural Psychology

Decision Making and Problem Solving

The Business Models Handbook

The New Strategist

Radical Business Model Transformation

Evidence-Based Management

Strategic Decision Making

Rethinking Reputational Risk

Management and Leadership in the 4th Industrial Revolution

Cyber Risk Management

Cybersecurity for Business

The Risk Management Handbook

The Organizational Resilience Handbook

Business Continuity Management

Supply Chain Risk Management

Operational Risk Management in Financial Services

The Sustainable Business Handbook

Fundamentals of Risk Management

Mavericks

Neuroscience for Leaders

Fundamentals of Operational Risk Management

What Philosophy Can Teach You About Being a Better Leader

Coherence

Myths of Leadership

Leadership Skills Handbook

Develop Your Leadership Skills

Emerging Markets

Ethical Data and Information Management

Be Data Driven

Building the Agile Business through Digital Transformation

The Practical Guide to Digital Transformation

The Enterprise Big Data Framework

Data and Analytics Strategy for Business